JP7607967B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Traditionally, pachinko machines, which are gaming machines equipped with a gaming board, have had the gaming board detachably attached to the frame, and it has been possible to change the gaming machine to a different specification by replacing the old gaming board with a new gaming board (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In such gaming machines, the frame is merely given a universal design, so there is little relation to the design given to the gaming board. In recent years, gaming machines have been proposed that make decorative members detachable from the frame, and when replacing the gaming board with a new one, the decorative members attached to the frame are changed to decorative members with a design corresponding to the new gaming board, thereby making it possible to unify the design of the entire gaming machine.

JP 2017-221608 A (paragraph [0016], FIG. 1)

However, in the gaming machine described above, the decorative members are separate from the gaming board, so when replacing the gaming board, in addition to replacing the gaming board, it is necessary to perform the work of attaching and detaching the new decorative members, which is prone to human error. If such a human error results in the decorative members corresponding to the old gaming board remaining instead of being replaced with those corresponding to the new gaming board, the overall sense of unity of the gaming machine will be lost, which may reduce interest in playing.

The present invention was made in consideration of these circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

Effective solutions for achieving the above-mentioned objectives are shown below. The actions and other details will be explained as necessary. For ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations and other details will be shown in the embodiments of the invention as appropriate, but are not intended to be limiting.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides
A frame component having a main body frame and a door frame that can be opened and closed on the main body frame and having a plurality of frame light emitters;
a game component part detachably provided on the frame component part and having a first game component part and a second game component part;
A presentation control means having a sound output unit, a liquid crystal display unit, and a light-emitting unit including the frame light-emitting unit and controlling the presentation of the game;
a special state control means for executing a special state capable of initializing the RAM based on an operation of a special operation unit that is inoperable by a player;
A special state illumination that illuminates a specific frame light source among the frame light sources in a manner corresponding to the special state when the special state occurs;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first game configuration unit includes a control board equipped with a microprocessor,
The second game configuration unit is composed of a specific board not equipped with a microprocessor,
The presentation control means is provided with a notification means capable of notifying, when the first game configuration unit and the second game configuration unit are not connected, a non-connection light emission notification that causes the specific frame light-emitting body to emit light in a manner corresponding to the non-connection and a non-connection sound notification that causes the sound output unit to output a notification sound corresponding to the non-connection,
When the special state occurs in a state in which the first game configuration unit and the second game configuration unit are not connected, a special state light emission is executed to cause the specific frame light-emitting body to emit light in a manner corresponding to the special state without executing a non-connection light emission notification to cause the specific frame light-emitting body to emit light in a manner corresponding to the non-connection, and after the special state light emission ends, a non-connection light emission notification is executed to cause the specific frame light-emitting body to emit light in a manner corresponding to the non-connection,
The specific light emitting substrate on which the specific frame light emitting body is mounted has an insulating coating formed on substantially the entire area of a front mounting surface on which the specific frame light emitting body is mounted, and a land electrically connected to a front mounting surface side wiring pattern formed on the front mounting surface,
The insulating coating formed on the front mounting surface of the specific light-emitting substrate is white.
It is characterized by:

According to the above invention, when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not connected, and the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism within a specific period after the setting confirmation state ends, the function of the unconnected notification means is restricted to notify, while the magnetic detection abnormality notification means is not restricted to notify. In other words, when the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism within a specific period after the setting confirmation state ends, there is a risk of fraudulent activity that is likely to cause disadvantages. Therefore, by prioritizing the notification by the magnetic detection abnormality notification means over the notification by the unconnected notification means, it is possible to prevent disadvantages from occurring, and prevent a decline in interest in games by preventing disadvantages from being caused to game establishments and players (see, for example, paragraphs [3705] to [3751]).

The gaming machine of the present invention can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. This is a front view of a pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine from the front right when the pressure operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame open from the main frame and the main frame open from the outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine viewed from the front, disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. This is an oblique view of the outer frame from the front. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the outer frame disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the left and right outer frame assemblies of the outer frame, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame, as viewed from the front and above, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. FIG. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front left. This is a perspective view of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame disassembled into its main components from the rear. 1A is a perspective view of a door frame base unit of a door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components from the rear. (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as viewed from the front and rear, (c) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of a conventional pachinko machine as viewed from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as viewed from the rear. 34(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) seen from the front, and FIG. 34(b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) seen from the rear. FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock in Figure 34 (a) from the front, (b) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state in (a). (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit from the rear. (a) is an exploded oblique view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded oblique view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and anti-tamper member removed. FIG. 1A is a perspective view of the fall cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the fall cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a front view of the fall cover unit with the lid member removed. 1A is an enlarged front view showing the handle unit and handle cover unit portions of the door frame, and FIG. 1B is an enlarged perspective view showing the handle unit and handle cover unit portions of the door frame. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line I-I in Figure 41 (a). 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in FIG. 1. This is an oblique view of the tray unit of the door frame. This is an oblique view of the plate unit from behind. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the key parts of the door frame cut horizontally at the lower tray ball supply port, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the key parts of a conventional door frame cut at the same location as (a). This is an enlarged plan view showing the ball lending operation unit area in the tray unit of the door frame. 1A is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of FIG. 1A seen from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from above and at the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main components, viewed from below and in the front. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member is at the upper end of its movement position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit has moved from the position in (a) to the raised position. This is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member is at the downward end of its travel position. This is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the outer peripheral decorative board of the performance operation unit, the outer decorative board of the buttons, and the inner decorative board of the buttons in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. (a) is a front view of the dish unit in its normal state, and (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the performance operation unit is in the raised position. This is a plan view of a performance operation unit showing an example in which multiple contact detection bodies are provided in the performance operation unit of the performance operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic example of multiple contact detection bodies connected to one contact detection sensor main body, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic example of an example in which a switching unit is provided between the contact detection sensor main body and multiple contact detection bodies in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the plate unit's left plate decorative unit, right plate decorative unit, and performance operation unit, etc. can be moved forward and backward, and contact detection bodies are provided on the front and rear of the performance operation unit, etc. FIG. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact detection body, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the performance operation unit. 1A is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame, FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame from the front, and FIG. 1C is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line U-U in Figure 62(a). (a) is a front view of the right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the right side unit of the door frame, (c) is an oblique view of the right side unit of the door frame from the front, and (d) is an oblique view of the right side unit of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 66(a). This is a cross-sectional view taken along line O-O in Figure 66(a). FIG. 1A is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the two-color molded outer layer of the door frame in an opaque state, and FIG. 1B is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the outer layer in a transparent state while leaving the inner layer intact in FIG. A front view showing each decorative substrate of the door frame. This is a plan view showing the decorative board in the part of the door frame's performance operation unit. A rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the front left. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. 1A is an enlarged oblique view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and FIG. 1B is an enlarged oblique view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame when the door frame is opened relative to the main body frame. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed relative to the main body frame. FIG. 1A is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the ball launcher as viewed from the rear. 1A is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main frame seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit seen from the rear. 1A is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the dispensing unit seen from the rear. FIG. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components as viewed from the rear. This is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-to-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the fore-and-aft direction when the ball-removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in (a). An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the door frame foul cover unit and the lower full ball path unit. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. 1A is a perspective view of a board unit of a main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the rear. 1 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below and rear. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the front, disassembled into its main components. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. This is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut in the center in the left-right direction. 1A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. 1A is a plan view of a main body frame, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. This is an enlarged view showing the upper part of the main body frame in a perspective view seen from behind. 1A is a perspective view of the spherical tank with tank rails and the like assembled thereto, as viewed from above the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of FIG. 1A from below the front. 100(a) is an exploded perspective view seen from the front. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing the area through which game balls that overflow from the ball tank at the top of the main body frame circulate. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls that have overflowed from the ball tank at the top of the main body frame. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls into the bypass passage at the top of the main frame. 1 is an enlarged perspective view showing the main body frame from the rear of the hinge side, showing the tank rail and its surroundings. FIG. This is an oblique view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail as viewed from behind of a pachinko machine equipped with a tank rail of another embodiment. 106 assembled together with a spherical tank, (b) is an oblique view of the tank rail etc. in (a) seen from the front, and (c) is an oblique view of the tank rail etc. in (a) seen from the rear. 107A is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 as seen from the front, and FIG. 107B is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 as seen from the rear. FIG. 107(a) is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail, etc., taken along the kerk line. An explanatory diagram showing a cross section of the flow of game balls within the tank rail of Figure 107. 1A is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, FIG. 1B is an oblique view of the board unit of FIG. 1A seen from the front right, and FIG. 1C is an oblique view of the board unit of FIG. 1A seen from the front left. 111(a) is an oblique view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) seen from the upper right rear, and FIG. 111(b) is an oblique view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) seen from the lower right rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the substrate unit of Figure 111 (a) viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the board unit of Figure 111 (a) viewed from the rear. 111(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line K-K-I in FIG. 111(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line K-K in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line K-K in (a). This is a bottom view showing the area behind the door frame in a pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of Figure 111 (a). An explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge outlet of the out ball passage. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out-sensor is detachable, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out-sensor in FIG. (a) is an oblique view of the board unit of the third embodiment, with the power supply unit, dispensing control unit, and interface unit omitted, viewed from the front right, and (b) is an oblique view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front left. 119 from the upper right rear, and FIG. 120B is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119 from the lower right rear. 119A is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119, FIG. 119B is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in FIG. 119A, and FIG. 119C is a cross-sectional view taken along line S-S in FIG. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in Figure 121 (a). 120 is an exploded oblique view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the board unit of Figure 119, seen from the rear. 120A is a perspective view of the ball path member of the base plate unit of FIG. 119 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 120B is a perspective view of the ball path member of the base plate unit of FIG. 119 as viewed from the back. An explanatory diagram showing the elimination of ball clogging in the board unit of Figure 119. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing how the board unit of FIG. 119 prevents the intrusion of linear illegal tools. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing how to remove dust from the board unit of FIG. 119. This is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine, in which the center device and other parts are made opaque. FIG. 130 is an oblique view of the game board of FIG. 129 as seen from the front right. FIG. 130 is an oblique view of the game board of FIG. 129 as seen from the front left. This is an oblique view of the game board from behind. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from a function display unit on a main control board. FIG. This is a front view of the game board with the center gimmicks and other parts made transparent. This is an exploded oblique view of the game board disassembled into its main components as seen from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. This is a front view of the game board with the front unit cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle pins. FIG. 2A is a perspective view of the front components and game panel of a game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 2B is a perspective view of the front components and game panel as viewed from the back. 1A is a front view showing an enlarged view of the upper right corner of the front component and the game panel, FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view cut along the soot line in FIG. 1A, and FIG. 1C is an exploded oblique view of FIG. 1A disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2A is a perspective view of a front unit of a game board, and FIG. 2B is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board, seen from behind. 1A is an exploded oblique view of the lower right guide passage in the center part, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a side cross-sectional view of the center part, as viewed from the right, cut left and right at the separation hole in the front member in front of the lower right guide passage. 1A is a perspective view of the gate member as viewed from the front, FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the gate member as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1C is an exploded perspective view of the gate member as viewed from the rear. 1A is a front view of a gate member, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C--C in FIG. An explanatory diagram showing the flow path of the game ball on the right side of the front unit. An explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the first attacker unit and second attacker unit in Figure 144. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board showing the arrangement of magnetic sensors. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that can detect magnetic lines of force from a magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that cannot detect magnetic lines of force from a magnet, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic perspective view of the detection range of a magnetic sensor, (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body where magnetic lines from a magnet cannot be detected, and (e) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body where magnetic lines from a magnet can be detected. 1A is an oblique view showing a state in which a magnetic sensor is held by a holding member, FIG. 1B is an exploded oblique view showing a state in which the holding member and the magnetic sensor are separated, and FIG. 1C is an exploded view showing the holding member in cross section. FIG. 2A is a perspective view of the rear unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 2B is a perspective view of the rear unit of the game board as seen from the back. This is a front view of the back front performance unit in the back unit. (a) is an oblique view of the back front performance unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is an oblique view of the back front performance unit in the back unit seen from the back. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the rear front performance unit cut near the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above, (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the left part in (a), and (c) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the right part in (a). This is an exploded oblique view of the back-front left decorative unit of the back-front performance unit, viewed from the front together with the light guide plate. This is an exploded oblique view of the rear front left decorative unit, showing only the rear front left first decorative body, the rear front left second decorative body, the rear front left third decorative body, and the rear front left decorative body base. (a) is a front view of the first back front left decorative body shown in a transparent state, (b) is a front view of the second back front left decorative body shown in a transparent state, (c) is a front view of the third back front left decorative body shown in a transparent state, and (c) is a front view of the back front left decorative body base shown in a transparent state. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate in the rear front performance unit and the decorative substrate for illuminating and decorating the light guide plate and the rear front left decorative unit from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate in the rear front performance unit and the decorative substrate for illuminating and decorating the decorative body of the rear front lower performance unit from the front. A front view showing the back front left decorative unit illuminated and decorated. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a first pattern on the light guide plate is illuminated, and FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a second pattern on the light guide plate is illuminated. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the light-emitting configuration of the second pattern of the light guide plate. FIG. This is a front view of the back front performance unit showing the second image on the light guide plate illuminated. This is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the rear upper first decorative part of the rear upper movable decorative body in the rear upper performance unit of the rear unit has been moved to a lowered position facing forward. This is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the rear-upper movable decorative body in the rear-upper performance unit of the rear unit has been moved to the lowered position and the rear-upper second decorative part is facing forward. This is a front view of the game board showing the rear left movable decoration and the rear right movable decoration in the rear lower performance unit of the rear unit being moved to their appearance positions. This is a front view of the game board showing the back front lower middle decorative body in the back front lower performance unit of the back unit's back front performance unit in a raised state. This is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back front left logo decoration, the back front upper left logo decoration, the back front left sub decoration, and the back front left band decoration of the back front left decorative unit 3120 in the back front performance unit of the back unit are illuminated and decorated. This is a front view of the game board showing the first image on the light guide plate in the rear front performance unit of the rear unit in an illuminated and decorated state. This is a front view of the game board showing the first pattern on the light guide plate in the rear front performance unit of the rear unit being illuminated and decorated, and the rear left movable decoration and the rear right movable decoration in the rear lower performance unit being moved to their appearance positions. This is a front view of the game board showing the second image on the light guide plate in the rear front performance unit of the rear unit in an illuminated and decorated state. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit. FIG. 1A is a perspective view of a ROM socket having a conversion board, and FIG. 1B is a top view of a control ROM having a leadless package attached to the ROM socket. This is a view taken from the arrow P in Figure 173(a). 4 is a cross-sectional view of a through hole showing an overview of the positional relationship between a through hole formed in a peripheral control board and a through hole formed in a conversion board. 1A is a perspective view of a control ROM having a leadless package and a ROM socket mounted on a conversion board, and FIG. 1B is a top view of the control ROM having a leadless package attached to the ROM socket. 5A to 5C are schematic diagrams showing the board management numbers of the peripheral control boards. 2 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of a main control board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a main control input circuit with an error detection function. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a power outage monitoring circuit. A schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the dispensing control board. FIG. 1A is an oblique view of the main control board box showing the state before the main control board is attached to the cover body and the base body is slid to cover the opening side of the cover body, and FIG. 1B is an oblique view of the main control board box with the cover body and base body sealed by a sealing mechanism. 1A is a front perspective view of a setting key switch as viewed obliquely from the right, FIG. 1B is a front perspective view of the setting key switch as viewed obliquely from the left, and FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting key switch and the cover body of the main control board box. FIG. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is implemented; FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is implemented and the corresponding solder surface (back side) of the main control board; and FIG. 2C is a diagram showing the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is implemented and the corresponding solder surface (back side) of the main control board. This is a continuation of Figure 186, and is a diagram (part 3) (d) showing the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is implemented and the corresponding solder surface (back side) of the main control board, and a diagram (part 4) (e) showing the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is implemented and the corresponding solder surface (back side) of the main control board. 1 is a schematic diagram illustrating an outline of the layout of various electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of a main control board. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of the solder side (back side) of the main control board, illustrating an overview of various wiring patterns to the main control MPU of the main control board. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration for covering an insulating coating on the land of a through-hole for an input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment formed on the mounting surface (front surface) of a main control board; FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of a cross section taken along line X-X in FIG. 1A; and FIG. 1C is a schematic diagram of a modified example of FIG. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration for covering with an insulating coating the lands of through holes for an input signal wiring pattern according to the second embodiment formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of a main control board 1310; FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram of a cross section taken along line X-X in FIG. 13A; and FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram of a modified example of FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration for covering an insulating coating on the land of a through hole for an input signal wiring pattern according to a third embodiment formed on the mounting surface (front surface) of a main control board; FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line X-X in (a); and FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of (b). FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration for covering an insulating coating on the land of a through hole for an input signal wiring pattern according to a fourth embodiment formed on the mounting surface (front surface) of a main control board; FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line X-X in (a); and FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of (b). 1A is a front view showing an enlarged portion of a game board of a first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a front view showing an enlarged portion of a game board of a second embodiment in the same area as in FIG. (a) is a front view showing an enlarged portion of the game board of the second embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the back front left decorative unit of the back front performance unit in (a) in an illuminated and decorated state. FIG. 195(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the panel board of the game panel in an illuminated and decorated state. FIG. 11 is an exploded oblique view of a panel plate and cells in a game board according to a third embodiment, as viewed from the front. (a) is a front view of the function display unit of the second embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view along the So-So line in (a), (c) is an oblique view of the function display unit of (a) seen from the front, and (d) is an oblique view of the function display unit of (a) seen from the back. 199 is an exploded oblique view of the functional display unit of FIG. 198 as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the function display unit of Figure 198, seen from the rear. An explanatory diagram showing a schematic relationship between the function display unit of Figure 198 and the player. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a relationship between a function display unit and a player in a third embodiment. FIG. FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view of a function display unit according to a fourth embodiment. 1A is a cross-sectional view showing a second embodiment of the mounting of a magnetic sensor, FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor in FIG. 1A in an oblique view, FIG. 1C is an exploded oblique view showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor in FIG. 1B in an exploded view, and FIG. 1D is an exploded oblique view showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor shown with a holding member different from that in FIG. 1C. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative body also serves as a positioning hole for the second member, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of an example in which a closed space is formed by the second member behind the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative body, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of the state in which decorative bodies of different thicknesses are attached in (b), and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative body also serves as an attachment hole for the decorative body. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the first member from the front with a decorative body attached, (b) is a cross-sectional view of (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the first member from the front with a decorative body different from that of (a) attached. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a horizontally elongated rectangular decorative body and a first member, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a circular decorative body and a first member, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a symmetrically arranged decorative body and the first member, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a symmetrically arranged decorative body of a different shape to (c) and the first member. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the decorative body and the movable first member from the front, (b) is a cross-sectional diagram cut along line T-T in (a), (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the decorative body and the first member in (a) and (c), (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a decorative body of a different shape to (a) and the movable first member from the front, and (e) is a cross-sectional diagram cut along line T-T in (d). FIG. 1 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process performed when the main control side is powered on; This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on processing in Figure 210. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a main control side timer interrupt processing. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting value confirmation display process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error display process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of processing performed when the dispensing control unit is powered on. This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit in Figure 216. Following Figure 217, this is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the dispensing control unit is powered on. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a dispensing control unit timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power-on process; 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special symbol and special electric device control processing (step S114). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing processing (step S232). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a performance pre-determination process (step S245). A flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing (step S238). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern normal processing (step S280). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a hit determination process (step S305). Various tables showing a hit determination table (A), a big hit pattern determination table (B), and a small hit pattern determination table (C). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281). 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of the first variation pattern setting process (step S282). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern change processing (step S283). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern stop processing (step S284). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control processing (step S235A). FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a rainbow-colored effect. An explanatory diagram showing groupings of multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board. An explanatory diagram showing groupings of multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame. FIG. 11 is a timing diagram showing an example of a rainbow effect. FIG. 11 is a timing diagram showing an example of a rainbow effect during an abnormality. (A) is a front oblique view of the upper rear movable decorative body, and (B) is a cross-sectional view of the upper rear movable decorative body cut along line A-A. FIG. 11 is a timing diagram showing a first modified example of a rainbow effect. FIG. 11 is a timing diagram showing a first modified example of a rainbow effect. FIG. 11 is a timing diagram showing a second variation of the rainbow effect. FIG. 11 is a timing diagram showing a second variation of the rainbow effect. FIG. 2A is a schematic front view of a split game board, and FIG. 2B is a schematic rear view of the split game board. FIG. 3A is a rear perspective view of the split game board as viewed from the lower left rear before the right and left game boards that make up the split game board are combined, and FIG. 3B is a rear perspective view of the split game board as viewed from the lower left rear. This is a schematic front view of the split game board in Figure 248 (a) after the decoration has been rearranged. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing an example of an ID output circuit. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example of a photosensor information serial output circuit. FIG. 11 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a plurality of ID output circuits. 1 is a table showing a match/mismatch table of combinations. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power-on process capable of performing ID determination. 11 is a table showing how to handle various errors when power is turned on (specific example 1). This is a table showing how to respond to various errors (specific example 1) that do not involve magnetic detection while a performance is in progress after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers. This is a table showing how to deal with various errors (specific example 1) that involve magnetic detection when a performance is in progress after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers. 11 is a table showing how to handle various errors when power is turned on (specific example 2). This is a table showing how to respond to various errors (specific example 2) that do not involve magnetic detection while the performance is progressing after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers. This is a table showing how to deal with various errors (specific example 2) that involve magnetic detection when a performance is in progress after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example of an ID comparison circuit. A circuit diagram showing an example of a circuit of a relay board provided in a plate unit. This is a circuit showing an example of a modified example of FIG. 262. This is a circuit diagram showing an example of replacing the LED driver that constitutes the ID comparison circuit provided on the frame side decorative board shown in Figure 262 with a serial-parallel conversion circuit. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an outline of the allocation of each unit. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing an example of an ID output circuit in each unit. This is a circuit diagram showing an example of a circuit that further includes a manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value) in the ID output circuit in each unit of Figure 267. FIG. 2A is a schematic front view of a divided game board on which an ID error determination switch is provided, and FIG. 2B is a schematic rear view of the divided game board on which an ID error determination switch is provided. 1 is a schematic exploded oblique view of the right-side game board disassembled into a right-side game panel and a right-side rear box as viewed from the front. This is a schematic oblique view of a portion of the right-side rear box of the rear unit of the right-side game board, as viewed from the front. This is a schematic exploded oblique view of a portion of the right-side game board disassembled into a right-side game panel and a right-side rear box, as viewed from the front. This is an example of behavior when changing the setting value when the split game board 5A, which is composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR, is in a compatible (matched) state as a combination of the split game board 5A. This is an example of behavior when changing the setting value when the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when unauthorized magnetism occurs during execution of a setting change process when the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when unauthorized magnetism occurs during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed when the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when changing the setting value when the right side game board 5AR is not connected. This is an example of behavior when unauthorized magnetism occurs while the setting change process is being executed while the right side game board 5AR is not connected. This is an example of behavior when unauthorized magnetism occurs during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed with the right-side game board 5AR not connected. This is an example of behavior when a setting value confirmation display is performed when the split game board 5A consisting of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR is in a compatible (matched) state as a combination of the split game board 5A. This is an example of behavior when a setting value confirmation display is performed when the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when unauthorized magnetism occurs during execution of the setting value confirmation display process when the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when unauthorized magnetism occurs during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed when the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when the setting value confirmation display is performed when the right side game board 5AR is not connected. This is an example of behavior when unauthorized magnetism occurs while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed while the right side game board 5AR is not connected. This is an example of behavior when unauthorized magnetism occurs during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected.

[1. Overall structure of a pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 1 to 12. Fig. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, Fig. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and Fig. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Fig. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the right front, Fig. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the left front, and Fig. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the rear. Fig. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the performance operation unit is in the raised position, and Fig. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the performance operation unit is in the raised position, seen from the right front. Also, Fig. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame as viewed from the rear.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in an island facility (not shown) of a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a game board 5 that is detachably attached to the main frame 4 from the front and is visible from the player's side through the door frame 3, and has a game area 5a into which the player shoots a game ball B (see Figure 89).

The outer frame 2 is formed into a rectangular frame that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, an upper outer frame member 30 that connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, a lower outer frame assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, an upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30, and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 so that they can rotate coaxially, and the main frame 4 is attached so that it can be opened and closed forward around the left side when viewed from the front.

In addition, when the main frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 has the lower outer frame assembly 40 which cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622, and the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, allowing the player to hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are dropped so that it can be seen from the front, stores the game balls B to be dropped into the game area 5a, and is equipped with a handle 195 that the player operates to drop the stored game balls B into the game area 5a. The door frame 3 also decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 also has a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player in addition to the handle 195. When a player-participation performance is being executed, the player can participate in the performance by operating the performance operation unit 301. This allows the player to enjoy the game not only by playing with the game ball B, but also by operating the performance operation unit 301.

The main body frame 4 comprises a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable and for mounting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 which reinforces the main body frame base unit 500, a ball launching device 540 for shooting game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a game ball supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. It is equipped with a payout base unit 550 that receives the game balls B, a payout unit 560 that pays out the game balls B received by the payout base unit 550 to the player, a board unit 620 that has a power board 630 equipped with a power switch 630a that can turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 as well as a payout control board 633, a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 that locks the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

The main frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a play area 5a where a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and is used to pay out the game ball B to the player and to eject the game balls B used in the game to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment of the game hall). The main frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is removably stored inside from the front. The main frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3 is attached so that the open front side can be closed.

The game board 5 is made up of a game area 5a where the game ball B is thrown by the player, a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and has a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311. The game panel 1100 includes a display unit 1300, a functional display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on a control signal from a main control board 1310, a peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) that is located on the rear side of the game panel 1100, a performance display device 1600 that is located in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and can display a predetermined performance image, a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a rear unit 3000 that is attached to the rear of the game panel 1100. The rear unit 3000 includes various performance units that can perform movable performances and light-emitting performances depending on the game status.

The game area 5a of the game board 5 includes a plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, as well as a general prize opening 2001, a first start opening 2002, a gate 2003, a second start opening 2004, and a large prize opening 2005 that provide a player with a predetermined privilege (e.g., the payment of a predetermined number of game balls B) when the game ball B is accepted or passed through. The obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general prize opening 2001, the first start opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second start opening 2004, and the large prize opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

The player can shoot the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. This allows the player to enjoy operating the handle 195 to shoot the game ball B so that it is accepted into or passes through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005, etc., in the game area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 can entertain the player by displaying a predetermined performance image on the performance display device 1600 according to the game state that changes when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a, and by performing light-emitting and moving performances using the back front performance unit 3100, back upper performance unit 3200, back lower performance unit 3300, etc.

[2. Overall structure of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figs. 13 to 18. Fig. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, Fig. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and Fig. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Fig. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and Fig. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the rear. Fig. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main components and seen from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in an amusement hall or the like on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed into a rectangular frame that extends vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 comprises a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other laterally and extend vertically, an upper outer frame member 30 that connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, a lower outer frame assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, an upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30, and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When the main frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622, and can invert the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 and radiate it forward.

The outer frame 2 can detachably support the upper hinge assembly 50 of the main body frame 4. The upper hinge assembly 50 and the lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 can coaxially support the upper hinge member 510 and the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4, and the main body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed forward around the left side when viewed from the front.

[2-1. Left outer frame assembly and right outer frame assembly]
The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 19. Fig. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, disassembled and viewed from the front. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are arranged spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 coaxially support the upper main frame hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable on the same axis, and are used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 comprises a left outer frame member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-to-rear direction, an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper end of the right side of the left outer frame member 11, and a lower left connecting member 13 that is attached to the lower end of the right side of the left outer frame member 11.

The left outer frame member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed from an extruded aluminum alloy material. The left outer frame member 11 has a recess 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear part of the left side surface, which is one of three equal parts in the front-to-rear direction, a bulge 11b that bulges to the right from the part on the right side surface opposite the recess 11a, and a hollow portion 11c that penetrates the bulge 11b vertically. The strength and rigidity of the left outer frame member 11 are increased by the recess 11a and the bulge 11b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

The left outer frame member 11 also has multiple grooves extending vertically formed on both the left and right side surfaces. The multiple grooves on the left side surface are V-shaped, and the multiple grooves on the right side surface are semicircular. The left outer frame member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the right outer frame member 21 of the right outer frame assembly 20 described below.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 is equipped with a flat horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat upper lateral fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-to-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both the front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 is attached to the left outer frame member 11 by inserting the rear lower horizontal fixing part 12c into the hollow part 11c of the left outer frame member 11, abutting the horizontal fixing part 12a against the upper end of the left outer frame member 11, and abutting the front and rear lower horizontal fixing parts 12c against the right side of the left outer frame member 11, and then screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing part 12c from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 is attached to the upper outer frame member 30 by abutting the horizontal fixing part 12a against the underside of the left end of the upper outer frame member 30, and inserting the upper horizontal fixing part 12b into the notch 30a on the left side of the upper outer frame member 30, and then screwing a screw into the upper outer frame member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 12a and the upper horizontal fixing part 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 is provided with a flat horizontal fixing portion 13a extending horizontally, a flat upper lateral fixing portion 13b extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a, a flat lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat abutment portion 13d extending short to the right from the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The left lower connecting member 13 is attached to the left outer frame member 11 by screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11 with the rear surface of the abutment portion 13d abutting against the front surface of the bulge portion 11b of the left outer frame member 11, the left side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b abutting against the right side of the left outer frame member 11, and the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a coinciding with the lower end of the left outer frame member 11. The left lower connecting member 13 is attached to the lower outer frame member 41 by screwing a screw into the lower outer frame member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c with the horizontal fixing portion 13a abutting against the upper surface of the left end side of the lower outer frame member 41 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c inserted into the notch 41a on the left side of the lower outer frame member 41.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 comprises a right outer frame member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-to-rear direction, an upper right connecting member 22 attached to the upper end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hook member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, and a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side of the right outer frame member 21.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed from an extruded aluminum alloy material. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface, which is one of three equal portions of the right side surface divided in the front-to-rear direction, a bulge 21b that bulges to the left from the portion of the left side surface opposite the recess 21a, and a hollow portion 21c that penetrates the bulge 21b vertically. The strength and rigidity of the right outer frame member 21 are increased by the recess 21a and the bulge 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

The right outer frame member 21 also has multiple grooves extending vertically formed on both the left and right side surfaces. The multiple grooves on the right side surface are V-shaped, and the multiple grooves on the left side surface are semicircular. The right outer frame member 21 is formed in a symmetrical shape to the left outer frame member 11 of the left outer frame assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 is provided with a flat horizontal fixing portion 22a extending horizontally, a flat upper lateral fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the fore-aft direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both the front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 is attached to the right outer frame member 21 by inserting the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, abutting the horizontal fixing portion 22a against the upper end of the right outer frame member 21, and screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side of the right outer frame member 21 with the front and rear lower horizontal fixing portions 22c abutting against the left side of the right outer frame member 21. The upper right connecting member 22 is attached to the upper outer frame member 30 by abutting the horizontal fixing portion 22a against the lower surface of the right end side of the upper outer frame member 30, inserting the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the notch portion 30a on the right side of the upper outer frame member 30, and screwing a screw into the upper outer frame member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (lower outer frame member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 is provided with a flat horizontal fixing portion 23a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 23b extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat abutment portion 23d extending short to the left from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 is attached to the right outer frame member 21 by screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing part 23b from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21 with the rear surface of the abutment part 23d abutting against the front surface of the bulge part 21b of the right outer frame member 21, the right side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b abutting against the left side of the right outer frame member 21, and the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 23a coinciding with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 is attached to the lower outer frame member 41 by screwing a screw into the lower outer frame member 41 through the horizontal fixing part 23a and the lower horizontal fixing part 23c with the horizontal fixing part 23a abutting against the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41 and the lower horizontal fixing part 23c inserted into the notch 41a on the right side of the lower outer frame member 41.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are hooked by the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main frame 4 described below. The upper hook member 24 has a flat mounting part 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and a flat hook piece part 24b that extends leftward from the front edge of the mounting part 24a and hooks the upper outer frame hook 653.

The lower hook member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a flat hook piece portion 25b that extends leftward from the front edge of the mounting portion 25a and to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion hole 25c that penetrates the hook piece portion 25b in the front-to-rear direction and through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted.

[2-2. Upper outer frame member]
The upper outer frame member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 18. The upper outer frame member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides. The upper outer frame member 30 has a width in the front-to-rear direction that is approximately the same as that of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21 in the front-to-rear direction, a constant thickness in the up-down direction, extends in the left-to-right direction, and is made of wood. The upper outer frame member 30 is formed so that its length in the left-to-right direction is the same as that of the lower outer frame member 41 of the lower outer frame assembly 40, which will be described later.

The upper outer frame member 30 has cutouts 30a at the center of the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides, which penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. The upper horizontal fixing part 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted and attached into the cutouts 30a at both left and right ends.

The upper outer frame member 30 also has a mounting step 30b at the left end, the top and front surfaces of which are recessed from the general surface. The upper outer frame hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to this mounting step 30b.

[2-3. Lower Outer Frame Assembly]
The lower frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 20. Fig. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower frame assembly of the outer frame when viewed from the front. The lower frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left and right frame assemblies 10 and 20, which are spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and is used to close off the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 for decoration.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 comprises a lower outer frame member 41 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and extends left and right; a box-shaped front panel member 42 that is disposed in front of the lower outer frame member 41, extends left and right along the lower outer frame member 41, and is open at the rear; a box-shaped rear panel member 43 that is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42 and is attached to the top surface of the lower outer frame member 41, extends left and right, and is open at the front; and a ball-jamming prevention mechanism 44 formed at the left end of the top surface of the rear panel member 43.

The lower outer frame member 41 has a width in the front-to-rear direction that is approximately the same as that of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21 in the front-to-rear direction, a constant thickness in the up-down direction, extends in the left-to-right direction, and is formed from wood. The lower outer frame member 41 is formed so that its length in the left-to-right direction is the same as that of the upper outer frame member 30 in the left-to-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutouts 41a at the center of the front-rear direction on both left and right sides, which penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted and attached into the cutouts 41a at both left and right ends. This allows the lower ends of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21 to be connected to each other.

The outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the top surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the back panel member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends left and right and extends from a position toward the rear of the center in the front-to-rear direction to the front end side. This recess 41b makes the volume of the back panel internal space 40a formed by the front panel front member 42 and the back panel rear member 43 as large as possible.

The front panel member 42 has the same left-right length as the outer frame lower member 41, is formed in a horizontally long rectangular box shape with a short front-to-back depth relative to its height, and is open on the entire rear side. The front panel member 42 closes the open rear side with the rear panel member 43, thereby forming the front panel internal space 40a that becomes part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the rear panel member 43. The front panel member 42 has a long hole-shaped opening 42a on the front side near the right end that penetrates from front to back and extends left to right.

The rear panel member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. The rear panel member 43 has the front panel member 42 attached to its front surface, and cooperates with the front panel member 42 to form the interior space 40a of the panel, which is part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connecting tube portion 43a in the left-right center of the upper surface, which extends left-right and protrudes upward and communicates with the interior space 40a of the panel. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined so that its upper end is located higher from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43, toward the rear. In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a is formed so that its left-right length is approximately 1/3 of the length of the entire rear panel member 43, and its front-rear depth is slightly shorter than the depth of the entire rear panel member 43. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end and rear end are provided inside the connecting tube portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is connected to the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4, and is in communication with the internal space of the speaker unit 620a, forming an enclosure 624.

The ball trapping prevention mechanism 44 prevents the game ball B from being trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 by retaining the game ball B at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

The ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later can be attached, a first discharge port 44b opening upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c opening upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, a standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the mounting portion 44a, and an upper end protruding portion 44e protruding forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and slanting so that the upper surface is positioned upward as it approaches the rear.

The first discharge opening 44b is formed at a position that coincides with the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c are formed to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c do not communicate with the front panel internal space 40a, and open to the rear surface of the front panel rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that enters the first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c can be discharged to the rear of the front panel rear member 43.

If an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 described below, the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 can prevent the illegal tool from entering by using the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a. Even if the tip of the illegal tool abuts against the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end protrusion portion 44e that protrudes forward at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent illegal acts from being performed through the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

However, if the rear end of the mounting portion 44a is provided with a vertical wall portion 44d, when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, if a game ball B falls onto the mounting portion 44a for some reason, the vertical wall portion 44d will prevent the game ball B from moving rearward relative to the outer frame 2, making it easier for the game ball B to remain on the mounting portion 44a. If the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, the game ball B will be pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, causing a problem that the main frame 4 cannot be closed.

In contrast, the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 of this embodiment allows game balls B that have fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or onto the placement portion 44a to be discharged to the rear of the curtain board rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first discharge opening 44b, or through the second discharge opening 44c, thereby preventing game balls B from being caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 spaced apart on the left and right sides of the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43, a flat grill member 46 that closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear, a port member 47 with two cylinders extending forward and backward that is attached to the inside of the front panel member 42 so as to sandwich the grill member 46 and close the opening 42a, and a frame-shaped seal member 48 that is placed at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 are against which the lower end of the door frame 3 abuts when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2. The guide members 45 are made of a low-friction material that has low friction resistance, making the lower end of the main frame 4 easier to slide on, facilitating opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is a strip-like plate extending in the left-right direction, and has multiple blades 46b spaced apart in the up-down direction. The blades 46b are inclined so that the front end is higher than the rear end (see FIG. 47). The grill member 46 allows ventilation between the inside of the front panel member 42 (the front panel internal space 40a) and the outside through the gaps between the blades 46b.

The port member 47 uses two cylinders to connect the interior space 40a of the panel (enclosure 624) to the front of the outer frame 2 through the gap between the blades 46b of the grill member 46. The port member 47 is made of two cylinders with a specified inner diameter and length, and can resonate and amplify the low-pitched sounds emitted backward (inside the enclosure 624) from the main frame speaker 622 using the principle of Helmholtz resonance, radiating rich low-pitched sounds to the front of the outer frame 2 (towards the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, allowing the player to hear deep low-pitched sounds.

When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the sealing member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 on the main frame 4, and prevents sound from inside the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 from leaking out from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of this embodiment, the air vibrations emitted from the main frame speaker 622 to the outside from the inner space 40a of the fascia board can be directed by the inclined vane portions 46b through the lower cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 diagonally upward and forward, into the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is housed. As a result, when a player inserts his or her fingers inside the handle cover 295 (front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the device for striking the game ball B), the main frame speaker 622 can be vibrated to send air into the front tube portion 291a, surprising the player and providing an unprecedented performance.

In addition, because the port member 47 is open toward the front, a portion of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the multiple blades 46b of the grill member 46 is emitted forward, so that the sound effects emitted from the port member 47 can be heard by players seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and other players wandering around the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. This also attracts the attention of players, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, since the port member 47 is provided in the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 provided in the main frame 4 can be increased, allowing for a deeper bass sound to be output, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 21. Fig. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame when disassembled and viewed from above the front, and Fig. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) when viewed from below the front. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinged and rotatable. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, a locking member 52 attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, and a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 includes an upper fixing portion 51a that is a flat plate extending horizontally and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, a flat forward extension portion 51b that extends forward from the front edge of the upper fixing portion 51a, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right edge of the forward extension portion 51b toward the front and penetrates the front and rear from the left and right center of the forward extension portion 51b, a flat horizontal fixing portion 51d that extends downward from the left edge of the upper fixing portion 51a, and a flat edge wall portion 51e that extends downward from the edge of the left edge of the forward extension portion 51b around the front edge to the part where the bearing groove 51c opens and is continuous with the horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 (described later) of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 within the bearing groove 51c.

The locking member 52 comprises a band-shaped locking body 52a extending forward and backward, an operating piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the locking body 52a, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic part 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the locking body 52a and then diagonally forward to the left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the locking body 52a. The locking member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extension part 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 at a position rearward of the bearing groove 51c by means of a mounting screw 53.

When the locking member 52 is attached to the upper hinge member 51, the locking body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end extends forward so that it can abut against the portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c in the edge wall portion 51e of the upper hinge member 51. In addition, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the locking body 52a abuts against the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the upper hinge member 51. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward around the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the locking body 52a of the locking member 52 abuts against the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the upper body frame hinge pin 512 of the upper body frame hinge member 510 is formed in the bearing groove 51c in a portion forward of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operating piece 52b of this locking member 52, the locking body 52a can be rotated against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operating piece 52b to rotate the locking body 52a in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, the locking body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be fully opened. This makes it possible to insert the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c or remove the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 from within the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Lower outer frame hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 18. The lower outer frame hinge member 60 includes a flat horizontal portion 60a extending horizontally, a flat rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a rearward of the center in the front-rear direction, a lower outer frame hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating the horizontal portion 60a from top to bottom and large enough for only one game ball B to pass through. The lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower outer frame hinge pin 60c is cylindrical and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrowed upper end above the vertical center. This lower outer frame hinge pin 60c is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to contact the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-to-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. This discharge hole 60d is formed to be approximately the same size as the first discharge opening 44b of the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear of the horizontal section 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is placed on the mounting section 44a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and is fixed to the rear panel member 43 with screws (not shown). The raised section 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11, forward of the bulging section 11b, with screws (not shown). This outer frame lower hinge member 60 can cooperate with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 to attach the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4.

In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge opening 44b of the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. This allows the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a to fall (discharge) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge opening 44b. In more detail, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 rolls to the rear side where the gap is wider, as the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 gradually narrows as the main frame 4 is closed, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. In this case, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 in a state where it is assembled into the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, game balls B that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling rearward beyond the main frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 60d, and game balls B are less likely to become stuck in the area of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 30. Figure 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, Figure 23 is a rear view of the door frame, Figure 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and Figure 25 is a right side view of the door frame. Figure 26 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right, Figure 27 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front left, and Figure 28 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the rear. Figure 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and Figure 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components and seen from the rear.

The door frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, with approximately the same size as the interior of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the interior of the outer frame 2 via the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front. The door frame 3 closes the play area 5a of the play board 5 into which the game balls B are dropped so that it can be seen from the front, stores the game balls B to be dropped into the play area 5a, and is equipped with a handle 195 that the player operates to drop the stored game balls B into the play area 5a. The door frame 3 also decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 comprises a door frame base unit 100, which has a rectangular, vertically extending outer shape when viewed from the front, a glass unit 160 that is removably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and closes the play area 5a of the play board 5 attached to the main frame 4 so that it can be seen from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear, a handle unit 180 that is attached to the front right corner of the door frame base unit 100, and a handle that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180. It comprises a cover unit 290, a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, a left side unit 420 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 200, a right side unit 430 attached to the right front of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, and a top unit 450 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the left side unit 420 and the right side unit 430.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed into a vertically extending square (rectangle) in front view and penetrates from front to back, a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner as seen from the rear, a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end as seen from the rear, a door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left of the door frame main relay board 104 as seen from the rear, a handle rear relay board 106 attached to the left of the door frame sub-relay board 105 as seen from the rear, a door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 from the rear, a handle rear relay board cover 108 that covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear, and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, an upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and a lower door frame hinge member 125 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a ball supply unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from behind.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide it with rigidity. The upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and the lower door frame hinge member 125 are used to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 to be used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and for locking and opening the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

The ball supply unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 is for guiding the game balls B (foul balls) that have been launched by the ball launching device 540 and have not reached the playing area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and for guiding the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 has a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player, and the handle unit 180 is used to play a game in which the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540 by operating the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. Figure 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Figure 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 is hingedly attached to the main frame 4 on the left side when viewed from the front, closing the front of the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, while allowing the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 attached to the main frame 4 to be visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 is equipped with a flat door frame base 101 that has a rectangular shape that extends vertically, and a speaker duct 103 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner when viewed from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view, a door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left of the door frame main relay board 104 in rear view in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, a handle rear relay board 106 attached to the left of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in rear view in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable.

The door frame base unit 100 further includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, an upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and a lower door frame hinge member 125 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a ball supply unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from behind.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 attached to the lower front corners, a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 420 attached to the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

In addition, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) with an outer shape extending vertically in front view. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates from front to back and has an inner periphery shape extending vertically in front view. The upper side and both left and right sides that form the inner periphery of the door window 101a are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side that forms the inner periphery is located at about 1/3 height in the vertical direction from the lower end of the door frame base 101. In this way, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101a that penetrates from front to back. This door frame base 101 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is provided with a handle mounting surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) formed in the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward more than the right end side, a cylinder insertion hole 101d that penetrates from front to back between the handle mounting surface 101b and the door window 101a and into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted, and a ball feeding opening 101e that penetrates from front to front on the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting surface 101b when viewed from the front and allows the entrance 141a and ball removal opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 to be exposed forward.

The door frame base 101 also has a lower tray ball passage port 101f that penetrates from front to back at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction and at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, allowing the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 to face forward, an upper tray ball passage port 101g that penetrates from front to back adjacent to the lower edge of the door window 101a near the left end when viewed from the front, allowing the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to face forward, and a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the door window 101a, into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

The door frame base 101 also has multiple vertical slits 101i formed in the lower left corner when viewed from the front (below the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray) that penetrate from front to back. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the multiple slits 101i. When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the multiple slits 101i have the speaker opening 211b of the tray unit base 211 in the tray unit 200 located in front of them, and the main body frame speaker 622 in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 located behind them, allowing sound from the main body frame speaker 622 to be emitted forward.

Furthermore, the door frame base 101 has a through hole 101j that penetrates from front to back below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. This through hole 101j is for inserting a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side, and is formed to match the through hole 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. This allows the sound emitted (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 to be guided forward without being diffused, and can be well guided to the front of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the player) through the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the speaker port 211b in the plate unit base 211 of the plate unit 200.

The speaker duct 103 also has a cable holder 103a on the rear surface below the cylindrical section, which holds the connection cable 503. The cable holder 103a is located to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and holds the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 so that it extends to the left end of the door frame 3.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 has an outer shape that extends vertically and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 serves to relay the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and a part of the connection cable 503 (see Figures 82 and 83) extending from the main body frame 4 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an inverted L-shape with a top part of a vertically extending rectangle joined to the right side of the top part when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the vertically extending part is adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is for relaying the connection between the handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top relay board of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the main frame 4, and the remainder of the connection cable 503 extending from the main frame 4 is connected to it.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude toward the rear. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts of the door frame sub-relay board 105 that extend upward and downward are covered at the rear by the door frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining parts of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are covered at the rear by the fall cover unit 150.

The handle rear relay board 106 has an external shape formed in a rectangle extending left and right, and is attached to the rear of the handle mounting surface 101b below the ball feed opening 101e at the rear of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay board 106 is used to relay the connection between the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194 of the handle unit 180, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the rear side of the handle rear relay board 106 is covered by the handle rear relay board cover 108.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the handle rear relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 31 to 33. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to cover the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 (parts extending up and down in an inverted L-shape). The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front and left sides open when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and the connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the open left side and connected to those terminals.

The handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 in the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and is intended to cover the wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball dispensing operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape that extends left and right, and has openings near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cable through.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and provide rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 comprises a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 which extend vertically and are arranged at a distance from each other on the left and right sides, an upper reinforcement frame 113 which extends horizontally and connects the upper ends of the left reinforcement frame 111 and the right reinforcement frame 112, an intermediate reinforcement frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcement frame 111 and extends to the right near the right reinforcement frame 112, a cylinder mounting frame 115 which connects the right end of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 to the right reinforcement frame 112, and hook hook members 116 which are attached to the rear side of the right reinforcement frame 112 at a distance from each other on the left and right sides and to which door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 are hooked.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically for a length approximately equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 has multiple insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the up-down direction and extends horizontally for a length approximately equal to the left-to-right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcement frame 114 extends left and right with a width wider than the width of the upper reinforcement frame 113. The intermediate reinforcement frame 114 has a rectangular cutout 114a cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a through-hole 114b that penetrates from front to back near the right end. The cutout 114a is formed at a position that coincides with the upper tray ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through-hole 114b is formed at a position that coincides with the through-hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is provided with a pair of rear pieces arranged at a distance from the left and right and formed as rectangular flat plates extending up and down when viewed from the front, a pair of side pieces extending forward in a flat plate shape from each of the opposing edges of the pair of rear pieces, and a flat front piece connecting the front end edges of the pair of forward extending pieces. This cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed into a convex shape that protrudes forward when viewed from above. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of this cylinder mounting frame 115.

The hook members 116 are attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at the locations of the insertion holes that penetrate from front to rear. These hook members 116 are hooked by the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650.

The left reinforcement frame 111, right reinforcement frame 112, upper reinforcement frame 113, middle reinforcement frame 114, cylinder mounting frame 115, and hook member 116 that make up the door frame reinforcement unit 110 are formed by punching and bending metal plates using press molding. They are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is assembled so that the left reinforcement frame 111, the right reinforcement frame 112, and the top reinforcement frame 113 are aligned along the left, right, and top edges of the door frame base 101, and the middle reinforcement frame 114 is positioned below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a number of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, and the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 of the door-frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door-frame reinforcement unit 110 when viewed from the front. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinged and rotatable in cooperation with the lower door-frame hinge member 125. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door-frame reinforcement unit 110, an upper door-frame hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the up-down direction, a flange member 123 attached to the upper door-frame hinge pin 122, and a lock spring 124 that biases the upper door-frame hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 has a flat mounting piece 121a that is rectangular when viewed from the front, and flat protruding pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The mounting piece 121a of the hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The upper door frame hinge pin 122 is a cylindrical metal rod bent into an L-shape. When assembled to the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, the portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 that extends vertically penetrates from below near the front ends of a pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, with the upper end extending upward beyond the upper protruding piece 121b, and the portion that extends horizontally abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the upper door frame hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 in the upper body frame hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The flange member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 that extends upward and downward between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123.

In the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, the upper door frame hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 121b, restricting further upward movement. In this state, the upper end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 protrudes a predetermined amount above the top surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 from below, and remove it downward. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front can be supported so as to be hinged and rotatable relative to the main body frame 4.

In addition, the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 has a portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 that extends vertically and is positioned coaxially with the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 described below. This allows the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 to hinge rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in a favorable condition.

[3-1g. Door frame bottom hinge parts]
The door-frame bottom hinge member 125 of the door-frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door-frame bottom hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door-frame reinforcement unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door-frame bottom hinge member 125 cooperates with the door-frame upper hinge assembly 120 to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so as to be hinged and rotatable thereabout.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110 and has a flat mounting piece 125a that is rectangular when viewed from the front, a flat protruding piece 125b that extends forward from the bottom edge of the mounting piece 125a, and a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see Figure 22, etc.) that protrudes downward from the underside near the front end of the protruding piece 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and protruding piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The lower door frame hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal bar with a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, this lower door frame hinge pin 126 is attached to a portion of the protruding piece 125b that is coaxial with the portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 of the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 that extends vertically.

This door frame lower hinge member 125 can support the door frame 3 to be hingedly rotatable relative to the main frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main frame lower hinge assembly 520.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 34 to 36. Figure 34(a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the rear front, (c) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in a conventional pachinko machine seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the rear. Figure 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) seen from the rear. Figure 36(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) from the front, (b) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 comprises a cylindrical cylinder body 131 that extends forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a rotation transmission member 133 that is provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131 and rotates together with the rotation of a regular key inserted in the keyhole 132.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear and has its rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (more specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear, and has a pair of notches cut from the rear end toward the front at positions opposite each other across the central axis. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be inserted from the rear, and the rotation of the rotation transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate it by inserting a pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches.

In more detail, the cylinder lock 130 is provided with a first cam member 134 that is provided at the rear end side of the cylinder body 131 and rotates together with the rotation of a regular key inserted in the keyhole 132; a second cam member 135 that is rotatably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 at a position below the cylinder body 131 around an axis in the front-to-rear direction; a band-shaped first arm 136 that is rotatably attached at its upper end to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 and at its lower end to the right of the center of rotation of the second cam member 135; and a band-shaped second arm 137 that is rotatably attached at its upper end to the lower position below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 and at its lower end to the lower position below the center of rotation of the second cam member 135.

The cylinder lock 130 also includes a rear cover 138 attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear, excluding the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133), and rivets 139 that rotatably attach the upper and lower ends of each of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively.

The first cam member 134 has the upper end side of the first arm 136 attached to the rear side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and a rotation transmission member 133 is attached to the rear side across the front side of the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to be able to rotate integrally with it. The second cam member 135 has the lower end side of the first arm 136 attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 attached to the front side forward of the first arm 136.

In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion where the first arm 136 is attached and the portion where the second arm 137 is attached are separated by an angle of 90 degrees around the respective rotation axes. In addition, in each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion where the first arm 136 is attached is located farther from the center of rotation than the portion where the second arm 137 is attached.

The rear cover 138 is detachably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 at its upper end with a screw (not shown), with the shaft 138a, which protrudes cylindrically outward from the lower ends of both the left and right sides, engaged with the L-shaped engagement slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115.

This cylinder lock 130 has a cylinder mounting frame 115, a cylinder body 131, a rotation transmission member 133, a first cam member 134, a second cam member 135, a first arm 136, and a second arm 137, all of which are made of metal.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is approximately aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side unit 430.

Here, we will explain the conventional cylinder lock 130A. As shown in Figures 34(c) and (d), the conventional cylinder lock 130A has a cylinder body 131 that penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and has its rear end attached to the front piece. This cylinder lock 130A has a rotation transmission member 133 provided on the axis of the cylinder body 131.

Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment will be described. In a conventional cylinder lock 130, as shown in Figures 34(c) and (d), a rotation transmission member 133 is provided on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas in the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 34(a) and (b), the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

In the normal state of this cylinder lock 130, as shown in FIG. 36(a), both upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 are attached to the right of the rotation center of each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, and both upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the lower of the rotation center of each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135. With the use of a regular key, the cylinder body 131 can be rotated by 90 degrees in both the clockwise and counterclockwise directions from the normal state.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 with the key inserted in the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, a large force acts on the first arm 136 to rotate the second cam member 135 counterclockwise, whereas since the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached below the rotation center of the first cam member 134, almost no force acts on the second arm 137 to rotate the second cam member 135 counterclockwise.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force is transmitted mainly via the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate counterclockwise, and the rotation transmission member 133 to rotate together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward due to the counterclockwise rotation of the first cam member 134 is proportional to the left-right distance between the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force acting upward in the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force acting upward in the second arm 137 becomes larger.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force acting upward on the second arm 137 becomes greater than that on the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the counterclockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated in the counterclockwise direction up to an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(b)).

When using the key to rotate the key counterclockwise 90 degrees from the normal state and then clockwise 90 degrees to return it to the normal state, the action is reversed.

On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise from the normal state via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted in the keyhole 132, the first arm 136, the upper end of which is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, moves downward, and the second arm 137, the upper end of which is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, moves upward. At this time, since the upper end of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, a large force acts on the first arm 136 to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction, whereas since the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, almost no force acts on the second arm 137 to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force is transmitted mainly via the first arm 136, the second cam member 135 rotates clockwise, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is proportional to the left-right distance between the part where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force of the first arm 136 that tries to rotate the second cam member 135 decreases, whereas the force of the second arm 137 that tries to rotate the second cam member 135 increases.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force tending to rotate the second cam member 135 from the second arm 137 becomes greater than that from the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated in the clockwise direction up to an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(c)).

When using the key to rotate the key 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state to return it to the normal state by rotating it 90 degrees clockwise, the action is the reverse of the above.

In this way, according to the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are connected by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 that are attached at a 90 degree angle from each other to transmit rotation, so that no matter what rotation position the first cam member 134 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) is in, rotation can be transmitted by at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to rotate the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133), allowing for good locking and unlocking of the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

In addition, according to the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the axis of the rotation transmission member 133 (the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4) can be set at a different position relative to the axis of the cylinder body 131 by transmitting rotation using the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as a rotation transmission mechanism. This makes it possible to change the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 to any position without changing the locking unit 650. This allows the cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) to be located in a position that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a highly decorative door frame 3.

In addition, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder body 131 is changed in the door frame 3, there is no need to change the locking unit 650 in the body frame 4, so the locking unit 650 can be reused, and the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

However, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131, so that a fraudster who knows this configuration may insert a tool from the front to the rear of the cylinder body 131 and use the tool to illegally rotate the rotation transmission member 133, opening the door frame 3 and committing a fraudulent act. In contrast, in the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131. Therefore, even if a tool is inserted at the rear of the cylinder body 131 to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmission member 133 is not present at that position, and fraudulent acts by opening the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, etc. can be prevented.

Furthermore, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects portions of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 that are spaced apart by a rotational angle of 90 degrees relative to the first arm 136. Therefore, even if the portions of either the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are positioned on a line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the portions that are furthest from the line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Therefore, even if one of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 is positioned at the dead center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 and cannot transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 can transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. This means that there is no significant resistance to the rotation of the first cam member 134, and the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated smoothly, making it easy to lock and unlock, and also preventing the key inserted in the keyhole from being forcibly rotated, preventing damage to the key.

In addition, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133, which is located at an eccentric position, by two arms, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137. Therefore, even if one arm is damaged for some reason, the rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a highly reliable cylinder lock 130.

In addition, the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133, which is located at an eccentric position, by the smooth rod-shaped (strip-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137. If the rotation were transmitted by a gear, there would be a risk that the gear would rotate and rotate the rotation transmission member 133 by catching the tip of a tool on the teeth of the gear. However, by making the first arm 136 and second arm 137 into a rod-shaped arm with a smooth surface, it is possible to prevent the tip of a tool from getting caught on the first arm 136 or second arm 137. This makes it possible to prevent the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated by moving the first arm 136 or second arm 137. This reliably prevents the door frame 3 or main frame 4 from being unlocked by unauthorized operation of the locking unit 650.

In the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as a rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135, but this is not limited to this. For example, a rotation transmission mechanism using multiple gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using gears and rack gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using sprockets and chains, a rotation transmission mechanism using pulleys and belts, etc. may also be used.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 37 and 38. Figure 37(a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. Figure 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back with the rear case and the anti-tampering member removed. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main frame 4, and can extract the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball extraction button 222.

The ball supply unit 140 comprises a box-shaped front cover 141 having an entrance 141a penetrating in the front-to-rear direction through which the game balls B are supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200, and a ball ejection port 141b opening below the entrance 141a, and a rear cover 142 that closes the rear end of the front cover 141 and is box-shaped with an open front and has a ball supply port 142a for supplying the game balls B that enter through the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-to-rear direction to the ball launching device 540; The ball removal member 143 is supported rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front covers 141 and has a partition 143a that separates the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b at the rear of the front covers 141; a ball delivery member 144 is supported rotatably around an axis extending in the up-down direction between the front covers 141 and the rear covers 142 and delivers the game balls B on the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one to the ball supply port 142a of the rear cover 142; and a ball delivery solenoid 145 that rotates the ball delivery member 144.

As shown in the figure, when viewed from the front, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 disposed to the right of the entrance 141a, a ball extracting member 143 disposed to the left of the ball feeding member 144, and a ball feeding solenoid 145 disposed to the right of the ball feeding member 144.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 to the left of the ball extracting opening 141b when viewed from the front, and the operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 described later extends forward from this slit 141c. In addition, the upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and is formed so that when the door frame 3 is assembled, the rear side closes the rear-open portion of the ball feeding guide path 241b and the upstream end of the ball extracting guide path 241c of the rear base 241 in the upper tray ball extracting unit 240.

The ball removal member 143 comprises a partition section 143a which is located below the entrance 141a between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, a pivoting rod section 143b which extends downward from the end of the partition section 143a opposite the ball feeding member 144 and is bent in an L-shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball removal opening 141b, with its lower end supported for rotation around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c which protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod section 143b, and a weight section 143d which protrudes from the side of the rotating rod section 143b below the operating rod 143c in the opposite direction to the partition section 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37(a)). The operating rod 143c abuts against the upper end (upper surface) of the operating transmission part 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, which moves downward by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 through the ball feed opening 101e of the door frame base 101.

The ball feeding member 144 has a cutoff portion 144a that is fan-shaped in plan view and is centered on the rotation axis that extends vertically toward the entrance 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143, a ball holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end of the cutoff portion 144a toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped shaft portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The cutoff portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b in the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of approximately 180° centered on the rotation axis. The ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 is large enough to hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis by moving the rod portion 144c, which is positioned eccentrically to the rotation axis, left and right when driven by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

This ball feeding member 144 is adapted to rotate between a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces in a direction communicating with the ball supply port 142a, and a holding position in which the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the ball supply port 142a, and the game ball B that has entered the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a is prevented from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball delivery member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the ball supply port 142a, and only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

The ball feeding unit 140 also includes a ball feeding actuating rod 146 whose tip swings up and down when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (energized), and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction due to the movement of the tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 swinging up and down, and which rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operating rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end opposite the ball feeding crank 147 (right end) is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a of the ball feeding operating rod 146 is pulled toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 rotates upward around the right end. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, rotating the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 downward around the right end, returning to the original state. As a result, the ball feeding actuating rod 146 is caused to swing up and down at its left end (tip) closest to the ball feeding crank 147 by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball delivery crank 147 is equipped with an engagement portion 147a that extends in the left-right direction and can engage with the tip of the ball delivery operating rod 146 that moves up and down, an axle portion 147b that is located on the opposite side of the engagement portion 147a that engages with the ball delivery operating rod 146 and is rotatably supported around an axis that extends in the front-to-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and a transmission portion 147c that extends upward from the axle portion 147b and engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see Figure 38 (b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the ball delivery member 144.

This ball feeding unit 140 can rotate the ball feeding crank 147 around an axis extending forward and backward via the ball feeding actuating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normally), the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward, and in this state, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned in the feeding position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position. In other words, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is deactivated (OFF state), the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 540 side. The drive of the ball delivery solenoid 145 in this ball delivery unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the drive control of the delivery solenoid 542 by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 169) of the payout control board 633.

The ball feeding unit 140 is also configured to apply a moment of rotation in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the ball removal member 143, which is rotatably supported by a shaft, or the weight portion 143d. However, the rotation of the ball removal member 143 is restricted by the actuation rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removal member 143 coming into contact with the upper end of the actuation transmission portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, which is operated by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200. Therefore, under normal conditions, the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b to separate them, and the game ball B does not enter the ball removal opening 141b side.

When the player presses the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 downward, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the actuation transmission part 242b, and the actuation rod 143c also moves downward relatively in accordance with the downward movement of the actuation transmission part 242b. When the actuation rod 143c moves downward together with the actuation transmission part 242b, the ball removal member 143 rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition part 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, releasing the partition. As a result, the game ball B that enters through the entrance 141a falls toward the ball removal opening 141b, is discharged from the ball removal opening 141b into the ball removal guide path 241c of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 in the tray unit 200, and can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply opening 211c.

The upper tray ball removal slider 242, which is formed with the actuation transmission part 242b against which the actuation rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 abuts, is biased upward by a spring. Therefore, even if a game ball B is supplied forcefully onto the partition part 143a, the impact can be absorbed by the spring via the actuation rod 143c, preventing damage to the ball removal member 143 etc., and preventing the game ball B from bouncing off the partition part 143a.

The ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38(b), etc.) that is recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from behind the ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and an anti-tampering member 148 is attached within the mounting recess 142b. The anti-tampering member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed from a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is attached removably from the rear side within the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142.

The anti-tampering member 148 has an outer shape in a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front, and is provided with an upper piece 148a and a lower piece 148b that are separated vertically at approximately the center in the vertical direction a certain distance to the left from the right side, and an inclined portion 148c that is formed in a C-chamfered shape at the tip side (right end side when viewed from the front) of the opposing sides of the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. The upper piece 148a of the anti-tampering member 148 is bent so that the right end when viewed from the front protrudes backward with respect to the general surface of the anti-tampering member 148. The lower piece 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the anti-tampering member 148. As a result, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right when viewed from the top.

When the tamper-proof member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b is in communication with the inside of the ball supply port 142a.

According to this fraud prevention member 148, when a fraudulent game ball B with a string attached is shot from the upper tray into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 540 via the ball feeding unit 140, and the string attached to the fraudulent game ball B is manipulated to move the fraudulent game ball B into or out of the first starting hole 2002, etc., the momentum of the fraudulent game ball B shot (shot) by the ball launcher 540 causes the string attached to the fraudulent game ball B to be inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then cut by the narrow V-shaped area formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, thereby preventing fraudulent activities using the fraudulent game ball B with a string attached.

[3-1j. Foul Cover Unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 39 and 40. Figure 39(a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit seen from the back. Also, Figure 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game ball B that has been paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the fall cover unit 150 comprises a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and open at the front, and a flat cover member 152 attached to the front of the unit body 151.

The foul cover unit 150 has a through ball passage 150a that penetrates from front to back at the upper left corner when viewed from the front and connects the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main frame 4 to the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200, and a full ball receiving port 150b that opens toward the rear on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and can connect to the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main frame 4.

The foul cover unit 150 also has a foul ball receiving port 150c that opens upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 150b when viewed from the front and receives game balls B (foul balls) that have been launched by the ball launcher 540 of the main frame 4 but have not reached the play area 5a, and a ball discharge port 150d that opens forward near the lower right corner when viewed from the front and discharges game balls B received in the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c forward and is connected to the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit 200.

Furthermore, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with a storage passage 150e that is formed by the unit body 151 and the cover member 152 between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d, and has a width sufficient to store a predetermined amount of game balls B.

The through ball passage 150a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152.

The fall cover unit 150 also includes a flat movable piece 153 that forms part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e and has a lower end that is rotatably attached to the unit body 151 and the cover member 152, a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects the rotation of the movable piece 153 in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 becomes full of game balls B and game balls B are no longer released from the ball release port 150d toward the lower tray 202, this foul cover unit 150 can store a certain number of game balls B in the storage passage 150e. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the movable piece 153 to rotate so that the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155, and this rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. This makes it possible to determine that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B, and when the full-tray detection sensor 154 detects that the tray is full, the payout of further game balls B is stopped, and the player or amusement hall staff is notified of this, urging them to replenish the lower tray 202.

The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear of the unit body 151 below the through ball passage 150a, and is provided with a door opening/closing abutment 150f against which the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 of the main body frame 4 (described later) can abut (see FIG. 90). The door opening/closing abutment 150f is inclined so that it moves forward as the rear surface faces downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against this door opening/closing abutment 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 can be rotated to open the downstream ends (front openings) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The glass unit 160 is inserted from the rear into the glass unit mounting portion 101h and removably mounted so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, this glass unit 160 makes the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front) and closes the front of the playing area 5a.

The glass unit 160 comprises a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner circumference of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, two transparent glass plates 162 that close the inside of the glass frame 161 and have their outer circumferences attached to the glass frame 161, and a pair of glass unit attachment members 163 that are rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and are used to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101.

The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat shape from a position lower than the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band-shaped locking piece 161b protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower edge. The mounting pieces 161a of the glass frame 161 can abut against the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 (see Figure 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front and rear ends of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other in the front and rear so that a space is formed between them (see Figure 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably attached around an axis that extends forward and backward on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion 163b that protrudes from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of rotation. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the two upper corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first rotate the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, insert the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and then abut the front end of the glass frame 161 against the rear surface of the glass unit attachment portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Then, rotate the glass unit attachment member 163 so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and abut the protruding portion 163b against the rear surface of the attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161. This allows the glass unit 160 to be attached to the door frame base 101.

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by reversing the procedure described above. This makes the glass unit 160 detachable from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protrusion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in a rotational position located below the base 163a, the protrusion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protrusion 163b will not rotate to a position where it is above the base 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 will not be released naturally, and the glass unit 160 will not come off naturally from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Anti-theft cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed into a predetermined shape, a flat rear projection 172 projecting rearward along the outer periphery of the body portion 171, and a pair of locking pieces 173 spaced apart on the left and right, projecting forward beyond the body portion 171, and capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that its lower end protrudes downward below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. The upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape that conforms to the lower end of the play area 5a of the play board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. In more detail, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape that conforms to a part of the inner rail 1002, the out guide portion 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the component 1000 described below, and is formed so as not to protrude into the play area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 172 is formed around almost the entire outer periphery of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed by the main body 171 and the rear protrusion 172 into a shallow box shape that is open to the rear, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 that is different from the outer periphery of the main body 171. The rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to fit along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

When assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the rear protrusion 172 is not formed in the area located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5. As a result, game ball B (game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170, and does not impede the shooting of game ball B into the game area 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). This allows the security cover 170 to be easily attached and detached to the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts against the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the rear projection 172, excluding the portion projecting rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 171, is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the component 1000. In addition, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projection 172 projecting rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 171 projects rearward beyond the front surface of the component 1000 so as to contact the bottom surface of the component 1000. As a result, the area between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area 5a through the gap between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 41 to 47. Figure 41(a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. Figure 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Figure 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Figure 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Figure 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Figure 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-I in Figure 41(a). Figure 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in Figure 1. Note that Figure 46 shows a cross-sectional view of only the door frame 3, with the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 omitted.

The handle unit 180 in this embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the tray unit 200 together with a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, and can be operated by a player to shoot the game ball B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181, the rear end of which is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover base 291 of a handle cover unit 290 described later, a handle 195 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by the handle cover base 291 described later, a disk-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195, a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and a handle front lens 185 attached to the cover base 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration board 184.

The handle unit 180 also includes an inner base 186 that is attached to the front of the handle base 181 behind the handle 195, a shaft member 187 that has the handle 195 attached to its front end and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 and has a drive gear portion 187a on its outer periphery, a transmission gear 188 that meshes with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that has a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188 and is sandwiched between the handle base 181 and the inner base 186.

The handle unit 180 further includes a handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end of which is attached to the handle 195, biasing the handle 195 to return to its initial rotation position (the end of rotation in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front), and an auxiliary spring 191, one end of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to the transmission gear 188, biasing the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front via the transmission gear 188.

The handle unit 180 also includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, a single button 193 whose tip end protrudes outward from the left side of the outer circumferential surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front and whose base end is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward, and a single button operation sensor 194 attached to the handle base 181 and detects the pressing operation of the single button 193.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending forward and backward, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and three grooves 181c recessed from the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical base 181a and extending axially, and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylinder 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. The three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291 described later. Therefore, with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, the base 181a can be inserted into the rear cylinder 291c of the handle cover base 291, and by inserting the protrusions 291d into the three grooves 181c, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 is equipped with a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, multiple (three in this case) spoke portions 195b extending radially outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in the circumferential direction, an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the multiple spoke portions 195b, two slits 195d extending in an arc around the rotation axis (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction, and a locking protrusion 195e protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slits 195d and locking the other end of the handle return spring 190. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the general outer surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

When the handle 195 is in a free state (not rotating), the three spoke parts 195b of the handle 195 extend horizontally to the left from the central hub part 195a, and two spoke parts 195b extend from the center in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions at angles of 120 degrees each. The three spoke parts 195b extend to such a length that a gap is formed between the central hub part 195a and the outer ring part 195c into which the player's fingers can be inserted.

The outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is arranged coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer ring portion 195c is formed in a circular ring shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the U-shaped radius side facing forward.

The handle 195 is formed to be entirely translucent, and is partially plated with an electrically continuous plating from the central hub portion 195a to the outer circumferential ring portion 195c. This allows the handle touch sensor 192 to detect the touch of the handle 195 even when only the outer circumferential ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be shot in by turning the outer circumferential ring portion 195c.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a that opens toward the center of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b that extends from the front end of the guide portion 196a toward the center. The three handle guides 196 have the mounting stay 196b attached to the rear side of the spoke portion 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portion 196a is located behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. The handle guide 196 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by inserting a guide piece 291g of the handle cover base 291 (described later) into the inside of the guide portion 196a.

The cover base 183 is formed in a disk shape with a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and has three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slits 195d of the handle 195 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting bosses 183a of the cover base 183 penetrate the slits 195d of the handle 195, the mounting bosses 183a come into contact with the circumferential ends of the slits 195d, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of approximately 120 degrees.

The handle decoration board 184 is equipped with a total of 10 LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) in a triple concentric arrangement: one in the center, three at regular intervals around the circumference in the middle, and six at regular intervals around the circumference. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle, two at the top left of the circumference, two at the top right of the circumference, and two at the bottom of the circumference (see Figure 72). This handle decoration board 184 is equipped with a 24-bit LED driver 184b with a unique address for illuminating each LED 184a. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls a total of 15 systems, with three systems for each group, so that the 10 LEDs 184a divided into five groups can each be illuminated in full color.

Although not shown, this handle decoration board 184 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires: two power lines (one of which is a ground line) that supply power to drive the LEDs 184a and LED driver 184b, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 184b of this handle decoration board 184 receives a command addressed to that address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can cause the 10 LEDs 184a, divided into five groups, to emit light with the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

As such, since this handle decoration board 184 has an LED driver 184b, it is possible to individually (here, by group) control the light emission of a greater number of LEDs 184a than the number of wires that make up the connected wiring cable, thereby reducing the number of wires and simplifying the configuration related to the electrical wiring.

The front surface of the handle front lens 185 bulges forward in a round shape and is translucent. Inside the handle front lens 185, a lens member is provided that is three-dimensionally formed from a transparent material. This handle front lens 185 can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately illuminating the LED on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of this detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 described later changes according to that internal resistance, and the game ball B can be shot into the game area 5a with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 195.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player touches the handle 195, it detects the static electricity acting from the player and detects the player's contact with the handle 195. Then, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's contact, if the handle 195 is rotated, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the drive of the launch solenoid 542 is controlled with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 195, allowing the game ball B to be shot into the ball.

Therefore, even if a player tries to rotate the handle 195 in some way to shoot game ball B into the game area 5a without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact, so the launch solenoid 542 is not driven and game ball B cannot be shot into the game area 5a. This makes it possible to prevent players from playing by rotating the handle 195 in a way that is different from the intended way, and reduces the burden (stress) placed on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

The single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing of the single-shot button 193 by the player. When the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops the operation of the firing solenoid 542. Therefore, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation of the handle 195, and by releasing the pressing of the single-shot button 193, the game ball B can be shot into the game area 5a again with the same hitting strength before the single-shot button 193 was operated.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be described. The handle cover unit 290 includes a handle cover base 291 that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 behind the handle 195 and has its rear end attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, an inner 292 that covers the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291 and has its rear end attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200, a ring-shaped handle cover decorative board 293 that is provided on the front side of the inner 292 and has multiple LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface, a ring-shaped board cover 294 that covers the handle cover decorative board 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and has its rear end attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200.

The handle cover base 291 is provided with a cylindrical front tube portion 291a that extends forward and backward with an inner diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, a middle wall portion 291b that extends from the rear end of the front tube portion 291a so that the inner diameter decreases as it extends forward, a cylindrical rear tube portion 291c that penetrates the middle wall portion 291b and extends forward and backward with an inner diameter that allows the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 to be inserted, and multiple (here, three) ridges 291d that protrude inward from the inner circumference of the rear tube portion 291c and extend forward and backward, and are provided at positions corresponding to the groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

The handle cover base 291 also includes a flange portion 291e that extends outward from a portion rearward of the front end of the outer periphery of the front tube portion 291a, a cylindrical outer tube portion 291f that protrudes forward from the middle of the flange portion 291e to the same position as the front end of the front tube portion 291a, a guide piece 291g that protrudes outward from the front tube portion 291a between the front end of the front tube portion 291a and the flange portion 291e, and an opening 291h that penetrates the lower portion of the front tube portion 291a.

The middle wall 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends from the rear end of the front tube 291a to the center of the front-rear direction in a circular arc shape with a cross section that bulges outward. The rear end of the rear tube 291c is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. This rear tube 291c is formed to the same length as the base 181a of the handle base 181, and the base 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted inside. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181, and by inserting them into the grooves 181c, the handle base 181 can be made non-rotatable relative to the flange 291e. The outer tube 291f extends forward from a position outside the center of the flange 291e in the radial direction. This handle cover base 291 has multiple triangular ribs in the circumferential direction that connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer periphery of the front tube portion 291a from the center between the outer periphery of the front tube portion 291a and the inner periphery of the outer tube portion 291f to a position close to the front tube portion 291a. The guide piece 291g extends in the circumferential direction over a length in the range of approximately 110 degrees, and three guide pieces 291g are provided in the circumferential direction at intervals of 10 degrees. By inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 rearward of the guide piece 291g through between the guide pieces 291g and rotating the handle 195, the guide piece 291g can be positioned within the U-shaped guide portion 196a, and the movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction can be restricted.

The opening 291h penetrates the front tubular portion 291a with a length in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front tubular portion 291a to near the flange portion 291e and a size in the circumferential direction within an angle range of approximately 90 degrees.

The inner 292 has an annular base 292a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tube 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange 291e, a leg 292b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the base 292a, and a plurality of (four in this case) notches 292c cut out from the rear end of the leg 292b to the vicinity of the base 292a and spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The front tube 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted into the base 292a from the front, and the base 292a is positioned behind the flange 291e. The leg 292b extends in a curved shape that bulges outward, and its rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200. The notches 292c are provided at the top and bottom and the left and right parts of the leg 292b.

The handle cover decorative board 293 is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange part 291e. The handle cover decorative board 293 is equipped with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b with a unique address for illuminating each LED 293a. The 12 LEDs 293a (full color LEDs) are arranged in a row with intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into six groups, two on the lower left, two on the left, two on the upper left, two on the upper right, two on the right, and two on the lower right from the center (see Figure 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and controls a total of 18 systems, with three systems for each group, so that the 10 LEDs 293a divided into six groups can each be illuminated in full color.

Although not shown, this handle cover decorative board 293 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four electric wires: two power lines (one of which is a ground line) that supply power to drive the LEDs 293a and the LED driver 293b, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 293b of this handle cover decorative board 293 receives a command addressed to that address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can make the 12 LEDs 293a, which are divided into six groups, emit light with the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

The board cover 294 has an annular front plate 294a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tube 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter approximately the same as the outer diameter of the base 292a of the inner 292, and a cylindrical side plate 294b with the outer peripheral edge of the front plate 294a extending rearward. The front plate 294a of this board cover 294 is located between the flange 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative board 293, and the side plate 294b extends to the base 292a of the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a at its front end with an inner shape the same as the outer diameter of the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291, and is formed in a spindle-shaped (snow-hollow or bowl-shaped, etc.) cylinder that bulges toward the rear, and has multiple (four in this case) notched openings 295b cut from the rear end toward the front in the circumferential direction. The handle cover 295 is formed to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and the multiple notched openings 295b are formed to match the notches 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200 via the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71 (a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

As shown in FIG. 46 etc., when the handle unit 180 and handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment are assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the part of the handle unit 180 rearward of the handle 195 is inserted inside the front tube part 291a of the handle cover base 291, and the handle 195 and the handle front lens 185 are positioned forward of the handle cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 with the part closing the rear end of the rear tube part 291c of the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290 sandwiched between them.

The handle 195 of the handle unit 180 has a central hub portion 195a rotatably supported by the handle base 181. The handle 195 is also rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 via a handle guide 196 attached to the rear side of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the central hub portion 195a. The rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 is inserted (locked) between the front cylinder portion 291a and the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291, and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g, and is rotatably supported with movement in the front-rear direction (axial direction) restricted.

The handle 195, and the handle cover base 291, inner 292, board cover 294, and handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed to be translucent, and by illuminating the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated and decorated, and the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front tube portion 291a), the handle cover 295, etc. can also be illuminated and decorated.

The handle cover unit 290 has matching cutout openings 295b and cutouts 292c in the handle cover 295 and inner 292, so when viewed from the outside, it appears as if there are holes on both the left and right sides and on the bottom that communicate with the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291. This can ease the player's mental anxiety about sticking their hand (fingers) into the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

The upper cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 (upper cutout 292c of the inner cover 292) is closed by the right plate decorative unit 275 and the right door frame unit 430.

In the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment, the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted is connected to the lower cutout portion 292c and cutout opening 295b of the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 through the opening 291h (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if liquid such as a drink or game ball B enters the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer circumferential ring portion 195c of the handle 195, it can be discharged downward of the handle cover unit 290 through the lower opening 291h, the cutout portion 292c, and the cutout opening 295b.

In addition, if liquid or game balls B enter the cutout openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, they can be discharged downward from the lower cutout opening 295b through the gap between the front tube portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292.

As shown in Fig. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the lower cutout 292c of the inner 292, and the lower cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 are provided on an extension line of the inclination direction of the blades 46b of the grill member 46 in the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. This allows the wind (wind pressure) discharged diagonally upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blades 46b due to vibration of the main frame speaker 622 to enter the front tube portion 291a through the opening 291h, the cutout 292c, and the cutout opening 295b. Therefore, when a player inserts his or her fingers inside the handle cover 295 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the device for striking the game ball B), the main frame speaker 622 vibrates to send air into the front cylinder portion 291a, surprising the player and providing an unprecedented performance.

Furthermore, because the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the right cutout opening 295b can be hooked with a finger and pulled, and can be used as a handle when opening the door frame 3, etc.

In addition, because the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring portion 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and the game ball B can be shot even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched.

In addition, because the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, the rotational position of the handle 195 can be easily fixed by gripping the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and the cutout opening 295b with the fingers, and the game ball B can be continuously shot into the game area 5a with a constant force without having to keep twisting the hand. In this way, the handle 195 can be rotated in a variety of ways to shoot the game ball B, so a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that allows the player to select the shooting operation that is most suitable for them.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end is located further back than the left end in a plan view, and faces outward (toward the open side). Therefore, the handle unit 180 attached via the handle cover base 291 is also inclined outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). This makes it easy for the player to grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, and allows the player to rotate the handle without any discomfort.

In this way, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment, a handle 195 having a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, multiple spoke portions 195b protruding radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the multiple spoke portions 195b is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3, which is arranged to be able to be opened and closed with the left side as the axis and which closes the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 so that it can be seen from the front, and a cylindrical handle cover unit extending rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Because the handle cover unit 290 is provided, a handle 195 and handle cover unit 290 of a never-before-seen form can be seen in the area where the handle is provided in conventional pachinko machines, making a strong impact on the player and strongly attracting the player's interest, while also increasing the player's motivation to play with this pachinko machine 1, making it easier for players wandering around the game hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed to select this pachinko machine as the pachinko machine to play on.

In addition, the player's fingers can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. When the player operates the handle 195 to shoot the game ball B into the play area 5a, the player grasps the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and the player's fingers are inserted into the handle cover unit 290. This gives the player a different sensation when operating the handle 195 than the handles of conventional pachinko machines, and the player can be entertained by the new sensation of shooting the game ball B, preventing a decline in interest.

When the player operates the handle 195 and causes a sound effect to be output from the main frame speaker 622 mounted on the speaker unit 620a in the base unit 620A of the main frame 4, the vibration of the main frame speaker 622 causes the air in the enclosure 624 formed by the speaker box 623 to vibrate, and the vibration of the air in the enclosure 624 is released forward as sound pressure (sound wind) through the fascia internal space 40a and port member 47 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2 which is connected to the enclosure 624. At this time, the multiple blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47 can guide the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main frame speaker 622 into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, and the sound pressure can stimulate the fingers of the player who is operating the handle 195 with their fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Therefore, by supplying sound pressure from the port member 47 through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h to the player's fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 according to the game status in the game area 5a, it is possible to surprise the player, give them a sense of an upcoming opportunity, or change the amount of handle operation, thereby entertaining the player and preventing them from becoming bored, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, sound pressure (sound wind) from the main frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h, making it possible to cool the inside of the handle cover unit 290 and making the environment around the player's fingers operating the handle 195 more comfortable, thereby relieving stress on the player and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

As described above, the sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, which is different from the door frame 3 in which the handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290 are provided, is guided by the multiple blades 46b of the grill member 46 to stimulate the fingers of the player who is operating the handle 195 with his/her fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c. Therefore, compared to a case in which a vibration device is provided in the handle 195, there is no damage to the various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194, etc.) and bearing mechanism provided in the handle 195, and it is possible to make the handle unit 180 less likely to be damaged, and it is possible to avoid causing discomfort to the player due to damage to the handle unit 180, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, because the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has an appearance similar to that of a steering wheel of an automobile, and therefore, even though the appearance of the handle 195 is significantly different from that of the handles of conventional pachinko machines, it is possible for the player to intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of conventional pachinko machines. Therefore, even a player who has seen this pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of this pachinko machine 1 without confusion, making it easier for the player to select this pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play without hesitation.

In addition, the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h are provided on the downward facing portion of the outer circumferential surface of the handle cover unit 290, where the player can insert his/her fingers between the central hub portion 195a and the outer circumferential ring portion 195c of the handle 195. When looking inside the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) from the front, the lower portion of the handle cover unit 290 can be seen through the opening 291h and the lower cutout opening 295b. This gives the cylindrical handle cover unit 290 a sense of openness, reducing the player's anxiety about inserting his/her fingers into the handle cover unit 290 and allowing the player to operate the handle 195 without hesitation.

In addition, the handle cover unit 290 has a through-hole cutout opening 295b and an opening 291h on the outer peripheral surface facing downward, and the port member 47 of the outer frame 2 (lower outer frame assembly 40) is opened toward the front. This means that even if liquids such as drinks or game balls B enter the handle cover unit 290, they can be discharged downward from the lower cutout opening 295b and opening 291h, and liquids discharged downward from the cutout opening 295b and opening 291h are less likely to enter the port member 47.

Furthermore, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and multiple cutout openings 295b are provided in the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290, whose front end has the same diameter as the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. This allows the handle to be grasped and operated by hand using the central hub portion 195a in the same way as the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, or operated using only the fingers using the spoke portions 195b, or operated like a steering wheel of an automobile using the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, or operated by placing the fingers on the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the cutout openings 295b and grasping them, or by straddling the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and pinching the inside and outside of the handle cover unit 290 with the fingers. This provides a pachinko machine 1 that allows a variety of operations to be performed to shoot game balls B (handle operations). Therefore, depending on the game status and the player's condition, the player can shoot the game ball B into the game area 5a in a way that is easy for the player to operate, making it possible to prevent the player from becoming bored and allowing the player to enjoy the operation of shooting the game ball B, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed by gripping the outer circumferential ring portion 195c and the cutout opening 295b of the handle 195 with fingers, or by straddling the outer circumferential ring portion 195c and pinching the inside and outside of the handle cover unit 290 with fingers. Therefore, in addition to handle operations similar to those of conventional pachinko machines, handle operations that are not possible with conventional pachinko machines can also be performed, providing the player with a variety of handle operations that make handle operation enjoyable and less likely to bore the player.

In addition, because the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, giving the appearance that the handle cover unit 290 is integrated with the handle 195, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that looks good and is capable of attracting the attention of players.

In addition, because the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming larger than necessary, and by preventing the handle cover unit 290 from compressing the play area 5a (door window 101a) upward, it is possible to prevent the play area 5a from becoming narrower, allowing the play area 5a to be relatively larger, and the large play area 5a makes the pachinko machine 1 stand out, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and strongly attracts the attention of players.

Furthermore, by appropriately illuminating the LEDs 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293, the handle cover unit 290 (the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated and decorated. Therefore, even when the player is operating the handle 195, the illuminated decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is not blocked by the player's hand, making the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c stand out, and providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the player's attention.

In addition, the handle 195 is provided in the lower right corner of the door frame 3 on the side opposite the hinge side, and the cutout opening 295b is provided in the part of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side, so that the cutout opening 295b can be used as a handle when opening and closing the door frame 3. Therefore, there is no need to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that would make it look unattractive, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

The handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer circumferential ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so that it can rotate in the circumferential direction, and has a flange portion 291e and a guide piece 291g that restrict movement in the front-rear direction. Even if the outer circumferential ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the guide piece 291g etc. can restrict the forward movement of the outer circumferential ring portion 195c. Therefore, the outer circumferential ring portion 195c and the spoke portion 195b connecting the outer circumferential ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and damage to the handle 195 can be prevented.

In addition, the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195, and then accepts the operation of the handle 195 to shoot the game ball B. Therefore, the game ball B can be shot even if the handle 195 is operated while touching only the spoke portion 195b or the outer ring portion 195c. This allows the pachinko machine 1 to perform a variety of shooting operations (handle operations) as described above, and also prevents the game ball B from being shot when the player is not touching the handle 195. This prevents the handle from being operated using tools, and reduces the burden on the game hall.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the plate unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. Figure 48 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame, and Figure 49 is a perspective view of the dish unit from behind. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion below the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 200 includes an upper dish 201 for storing game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and a lower dish 202 arranged below the upper dish 201 and capable of storing game balls B supplied from the upper dish 201 and the foul cover unit 150.

The plate unit 200 comprises a plate base unit 210 having an upper plate 201 and attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a plate decoration unit 250 having a lower plate 202 attached to the front of the plate base unit 210, and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 comprises a flat dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish main body 212 attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201, a mounting base (not shown) attached to the right of the upper dish main body 212 and protruding forward, a dish unit relay board (not shown) attached to the right of the mounting base, a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the top surface of the mounting base, an upper dish pre-ball removal unit (not shown) attached below the mounting base, and an upper dish post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear of the upper dish pre-ball removal unit.

The dish decoration unit 250 comprises a lower dish body 251 which is attached to the lower front part of the dish unit base 211 and has a lower dish 202, a dish unit body 252 which is attached to the front part of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 which is attached to the underside of the lower dish body 251, and a left dish decoration unit 270 and a right dish decoration unit 275 which are attached to the upper front part of the dish unit body 252, spaced apart from each other on the left and right.

The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player, which includes a touch operation section 302 that can be operated by the player through touch and a press operation section 303 that can be operated by the player through pressing. The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with a performance operation section cover unit 310 with a spherical outer surface, an operation section base 315 that is housed within the performance operation section cover unit 310 and attached to the front of the plate decoration unit 250, a circular performance operation section outer periphery decoration board 320 attached to the top surface of the operation section base 315, an outer periphery board cover 325 that covers the top of the performance operation section outer periphery decoration board 320, and an operation section relay board unit 330 attached to the rear side of the operation section base 315.

The performance operation unit 300 also includes a performance operation unit unit 350 that can protrude upward from the performance operation unit cover unit 310 and is provided with a performance operation unit 301, a performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 that is attached to the operation unit base 315 and supports the performance operation unit unit 350 so that it can be raised and lowered, and a protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward protruding force of the performance operation unit unit 350 by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

The tray unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, with the performance operation unit 300 positioned in the left-right center so that the top surface of the performance operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward, with the upper tray 201 positioned to the left of the performance operation unit 300 on the top surface, the ball lending operation unit 220 positioned to the right of the performance operation unit 300, and the lower tray 202 positioned below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the performance operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The upper tray 201 is formed by a tray unit base 211 and an upper tray body 212, and is formed in a container shape that is open upward and bulges forward more on the left side than the center when viewed from the front. The upper tray 201 (upper tray body 212) bulges forward most at about 1/3 of the left end to the right side relative to the left-right width of the door frame 3. The upper tray 201 has a guide passage portion 201a (see Figure 73) whose front end retreats backward as it moves from the most bulging portion to the right when viewed from the front, and whose depth in the front-back direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The entire bottom surface of the upper tray 201, including the guide passage portion 201a, is inclined so that the right end side is lower, and the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a when viewed from the front is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When assembled to the tray unit 200, the upper tray 201 has a bottom surface that is inclined downward from a position lower than the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 to a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B relative to the upper end of the upper tray ball feed port (not shown). This allows the game ball B released forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a to be received and stored within the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be supplied from the right end side of the guide passage section 201a through the upper tray ball feed port to the ball feed unit 140 side.

The induction passage section 201a is equipped with a metal earth fitting that is electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B comes into contact with it (rolls), the static electricity charged to the game ball B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 50. Figure 50 (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part by cutting horizontally at the lower tray ball supply port in the door frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part by cutting the same part as (a) in a conventional door frame. The lower tray 202 is located below the upper tray 201, to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) when viewed from the front. The lower tray 202 is formed of a lower tray main body 251 and a tray unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in a container shape that can store game balls B, and is provided with a lower tray ball removal hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall vertically and allows the game balls B to be discharged. The lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by the lower tray ball removal cover 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower tray 202 is formed into a roughly rectangular shape that extends left and right when viewed from above, with the front end on the left side protruding further forward than the right side from the center in the left-right direction. The lower tray 202 has a lower tray ball removal hole 202a that penetrates from top to bottom, located near the front end near the right end. The lower tray 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface is lower toward the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. When assembled into the tray unit 200, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is located below the performance operation unit 300, to the left of the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

When the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed, the lower tray 202 can store the game ball B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and by opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202a, the stored game ball B can be discharged below the tray unit 200 (e.g., to a cash box). Also, when the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is positioned in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the game ball B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be quickly discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in a conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. 50(b), a lower tray ball ejection hole 202b of the lower tray 202 is provided in front of the central axis of the lower tray ball supply port 211j of the tray unit base 211 in the tray base unit 210, which is connected to the ball ejection port 150d of the far cover unit 150. The lower tray ball supply port 211j is cylindrical and extends straight forward so that the game ball B released forward from the ball ejection port 150d goes straight toward the lower tray ball ejection hole 202b. This allows the game ball B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211j to be quickly ejected downward from the lower tray ball ejection hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

However, if the lower tray ball supply port 211j is designed to guide the game ball B straight toward the lower tray ball removal hole 202b, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202b is closed by the lower tray ball removal cover 265, there is a risk that the game balls B will be concentrated in the area to the right of the center in the lower tray 202, since the lower tray ball removal hole 202b and the lower tray ball supply port 211j are located near the right end of the lower tray 202. If the game balls B concentrated in the right area in the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B will no longer be released from the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 to the lower tray 202 side, which may activate the full tank detection sensor 154 and determine that the lower tray 202 is full, even though there is still room in the left area of the lower tray 202.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is inclined so that it extends diagonally forward to the left. In more detail, the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is inclined diagonally forward to the left so that the distance between the location directly behind the lower tray ball removal hole 202a and the front of the tray unit base 211 is a distance that allows at least one game ball B to circulate.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is moved to the left of the central axis (line shown by the dashed dotted line) of the rear end of the lower tray ball supply port 211c (ball release port 150d).

As a result, by moving the lower tray ball removal hole 202a to the left, the lowest part of the lower tray 202 (the part of the lower tray ball removal hole 202a) moves to the left, thereby reducing the concentration and accumulation of game ball B on the right side of the lower tray 202 when the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed. Furthermore, even if multiple game balls B are stored in the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball removal hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front of the tray unit base 211), the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c extends diagonally to form a gap between the rear end of the lower tray 202 and the rear end of the lower tray 202 through which game balls B can flow. Therefore, game balls B released from the foul cover unit 150 (ball release port 150d) or the upper tray ball removal unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) toward the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be guided along the diagonally extending left side wall to the left side of the lower tray 202 and released, allowing game balls B to be properly stored throughout the entire lower tray 202.

This prevents the full tank detection sensor 154 from activating and reporting a full tank even when there is sufficient space remaining in the lower tray 202 to store the game balls B.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish base unit 210 comprises a flat dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, an upper dish main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201, and a dish unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

The dish base unit 210 also includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211, an upper dish pre-ball removal unit (not shown) attached to the front part of the dish unit base 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220, and an upper dish post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the upper dish pre-ball removal unit.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in a flat plate shape (a shallow box shape with an open rear) extending left and right across the entire width of the door frame base 101.

The dish unit base 211 is provided with an upper dish ball supply port 211a that penetrates from front to back near the upper left corner when viewed from the front and extends cylindrically to the rear, a speaker port 211b that penetrates from front to back below the upper dish ball supply port 211a and has a punched metal attached to the front, a lower dish ball supply port 211c that penetrates from front to back at the lower part toward the left of the center when viewed from the front and extends cylindrically to the rear, a notch 211d that is cut out in the right wall of the part that extends cylindrically to the rear of the lower dish ball supply port 211c to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, and an upper dish ball delivery port (not shown) that penetrates from front to front on the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c when viewed from the front and extends vertically, with the upper part located at the right end of the upper dish main body 212.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has a front end that opens into the rear wall of the upper tray 201, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the upper tray ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101 from the front and connects to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. This allows the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 to be supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end that opens into the rear wall of the lower tray 202, and a cylindrical rear end that penetrates the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side and connects to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. In addition, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 is connected to the cutout portion 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. As a result, by operating the upper tray ball removal button 222, the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 is discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202 via the upper tray ball supply port, the entrance 141a and ball removal port 141b of the ball supply unit 140, the ball supply guide path 241b and ball removal guide path 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240, and the cutout portion 211d.

When assembled to the tray base unit 210, the upper tray ball supply port is located in front of the ball receiving port (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is supplied from the ball receiving port of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 to the ball supply guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper tray body 212 of the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The upper tray body 212 is attached to the front of the tray unit base 211 and cooperates with the tray unit base 211 to form the upper tray 201. The upper tray body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with an open top and rear. The upper tray body 212 extends left and right, and the left side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper tray body 212 retreats backward from the most forward bulging part toward the right side when viewed from the front, and the depth in the front-to-back direction is formed to a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the upper tray body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper part of the upper tray body 212 near the right end is closed.

When the upper tray body 212 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the section that is closed at the top near the right end is attached so that it fits under the ball lending operation unit 220. In addition, the upper tray body 212 has a performance operation unit attachment section 212a formed in the middle of the upper part in the left-right direction, and a part of the performance operation unit 300 is attached to this performance operation unit attachment section 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 is intended to relay the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100 and the dish left decorative board 273, dish right decorative board 278, and operation unit relay board 332. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner of the rear surface of the dish unit base 211. When attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface of this dish unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball lending operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the tray base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a plan view showing an enlarged portion of the ball lending operation unit in the tray unit of the door frame. This ball lending operation unit 220 is for discharging game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, lending a predetermined number of game balls B to the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, displaying the remaining amount of cash or a prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine, returning the cash or a prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine minus the amount of the lent game balls B, adjusting the volume, and adjusting the amount of light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 comprises a base section 221 attached to the upper front part of the tray unit base 211, an upper tray ball removal button 222 located near the left end of the top surface of the base section 221, a translucent disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 located to the right of the upper tray ball removal button 222 on the top surface of the base section 221, a ball lending button 224 located on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, a return button 225 located on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, a ball lending display section 226 located on the lower rear part of the ball lending operation base 223, a volume adjustment button 227 located in front of the ball lending button 224 on the outside of the base section 221, and a light intensity adjustment button 228 located to the left of the volume adjustment button 227.

The upper tray ball removal button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the top surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward when the player presses it. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, with the character "ball" (ball) printed on the top surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display portion 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one bullet-shaped LED, and can be clearly seen by the player through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 when illuminated.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can eject game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222. In addition, when cash or a prepaid card with a remaining balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is returned minus the amount of the lent game balls B. The ball lending display unit 226 displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. In addition, the ball lending display unit 226 displays an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume adjustment button 227 is for adjusting the volume of music, voice, sound effects, and other sound effects output from the top center speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4. This volume adjustment button 227 is shaped like a gourd, with two circles combined. The volume adjustment button 227 has the letter "+" in the center of one (upper) circle and the letter "-" in the center of the other (lower) circle, and the area between the two circles has a design that looks like sound is coming from a speaker. The volume adjustment button 227 is shaped so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of this volume adjustment button 227 increases the volume, and pressing the "-" side decreases the volume.

The light intensity adjustment button 228 is for adjusting the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. This light intensity adjustment button 228 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that combines two circles. The light intensity adjustment button 228 has the letter "+" at the center of one (upper) circle and the letter "-" at the center of the other (lower) circle, and a light bulb pattern is applied to the area between the two circles. The light intensity adjustment button 228 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. This light intensity adjustment button 228 becomes brighter when the "+" side is pressed, and becomes darker when the "-" side is pressed. Note that in addition to the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the brightness of the display screen of the performance display device 1600 may also be adjustable.

The volume control button 227 and the light control button 228 are different colors (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light control button 228 is black) to prevent players from confusing them.

When adjusting the volume or light intensity using the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 301, when a player-participation performance that requires the operation of the performance operation unit 301 is not being performed, the performance operation unit 301 is operated appropriately to display a setting menu for adjusting the volume or light intensity on the performance display device 1600, and an item to be adjusted is selected, and then the contact operation unit 302 is operated to change the volume or brightness of the light intensity, etc., which takes time and effort to adjust the volume or light intensity. In contrast, according to this embodiment, the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 can be operated to directly adjust the volume or light intensity, and a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that simplifies the effort required for adjusting the volume or light intensity and allows adjustments to be made in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Upper tray ball removal unit]
The upper tray pre-ball removal unit and the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 49. The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 cooperates with the ball delivery unit 140 to discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed.

The upper tray ball removal unit 240 comprises a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball supply port from the rear, an upper tray ball removal slider 242 attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be able to slide vertically, a spring (not shown) that biases the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241.

The rear base 241 is equipped with a ball receiving opening (not shown) that protrudes upward from the portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens toward the front, through which the game ball B can pass, a ball feed guide path 241b that guides the game ball B received in the ball receiving opening downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then backward, and a ball removal guide path 241c that guides the game ball B downward from a position lower than the ball feed guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it to the right when viewed from behind.

When assembled to the tray base unit 210, the ball receiving port is formed at the downstream end (right end when viewed from the front) of the guide passage section 201a of the upper tray 201 in a position that opens forward through the upper tray ball supply port of the tray unit base 211. When assembled to the door frame 3, the ball supply guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball supply unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part. This allows the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 to enter the entrance 141a of the ball supply unit 140 through the ball receiving port and ball supply guide path 241b.

The left and right extending portion of the ball removal guideway 241c protrudes further to the right as viewed from the rear than the portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached, is inclined so that the right end as viewed from the rear is lower, and opens to the right side as viewed from the rear. The rear side of the left and right extending portion of the ball removal guideway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. When assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball supply guideway 241b is located in front of the ball removal opening 141b of the ball supply unit 140, and is formed so that the right end as viewed from the rear of the portion extending left and right is connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower tray ball supply opening 211c in the tray unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is released into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball ejection guide path 241c and the notch portion 211d.

The upper plate ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is equipped with an actuation receiving part (not shown) that protrudes forward from the upper left corner, and an actuation transmission part 242b that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the actuation receiving part. The actuation receiving part has a flat upper surface. The actuation transmission part 242b is inclined so that its upper surface is positioned downward as it moves rearward, and its lower surface extends horizontally to connect with the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the actuation receiving part protrudes forward through the tray unit base 211 from the rear side, and the lower end of the upper tray ball removal button 222 abuts against the upper surface of the actuation receiving part. In addition, when the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the actuation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the actuation rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 abuts against the upper surface.

The spring has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper tray ball removal slider 242, and biases the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upper end of its movement due to the biasing force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

The upper tray ball removal unit 240 positions the upper tray ball removal slider 242 at its upper end of movement due to the spring force, and positions the upper tray ball removal button 222 at its upper end of movement via the actuation receiving part of the upper tray ball removal slider 242. In addition, because the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at its upper end of movement due to the spring force, the actuation rod 143c abutting the upper surface of the actuation transmission part 242b is prevented from moving downward, and the partition part 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, separating the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and the game ball B sent from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving port can be sent from the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144 through the ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side.

On the other hand, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the spring force, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves downward, and the operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the operating transmission part 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, can move downward, and the ball removal member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight part 143d of the ball removal member 143, and the partition part 143a retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b. As a result, the game ball B that entered the entrance 141a from the upper tray 201 through the ball receiving opening and the ball delivery guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball removal opening 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball discharge port 141b passes through the ball discharge guide path 241c and is guided from the cutout portion 211d into the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and is then released from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the lower tray 202.

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the spring force, the upper tray ball removal button 222 rises, and the ball removal member 143 rotates due to the operating rod 143c abutting the operating transmission part 242b, so that the partition part 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, returning to the original state.

In this way, the upper tray ball removal unit 240 can feed the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 via the ball feeding unit 140, or discharge it to the lower tray 202.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 48. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front of the plate base unit 210, and the performance operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the left-right direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire plate unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 comprises a lower plate body 251 attached to the lower front part of the plate unit base 211 and working together with the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202, a plate unit body 252 attached to the front part of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251, a lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the underside of the lower plate body 251, and a left plate decoration unit 270 and a right plate decoration unit 275 attached to the upper front part of the plate unit body 252, spaced apart from each other on the left and right.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower dish body 251 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 50. The lower dish body 251 cooperates with the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 to form the lower dish 202. The lower dish body 251 extends left and right and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with an open top and rear. This lower dish body 251 is attached to the left side of the center in the left-right direction at the bottom of the front of the dish unit base 211 so that the open rear is closed.

The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a generally rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from above, with the front end on the left side protruding further forward than the right side from the center in the left-right direction. A lower dish ball removal hole 202a that penetrates vertically is formed near the front end of the right end of the lower dish main body 251 when viewed from above. The bottom surface of the lower dish main body 251 is inclined so that it is lower toward the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal cover 265 of the lower dish ball removal unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

When the lower dish body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the outer periphery and part of the bottom surface are covered by the dish unit body 252. Furthermore, when the lower dish body is assembled to the dish unit 200, the bottom surface is located lower than the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is located in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. This allows the game balls B released forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c to be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges out so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward at the upper side, and bulges out so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward at the lower side. The dish unit main body 252 is also curved such that the top surface is lowest at the center in the left-right direction. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The plate unit body 252 has upper side bulges 252a that bulge forward from both the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction at the top and extend downward and are spaced apart on the left and right, and a lower front decorative part 252b that bulges forward on the left side of the center in the left-right direction at the bottom to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251.

The left and right upper side bulges 252a have a left plate decorative unit 270 and a right plate decorative unit 275 attached to their front faces.

The dish unit main body 252 has a lower dish opening 252d that penetrates from front to back between the upper left side bulge 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower dish opening 252d is large enough for the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that it becomes wider from top to bottom as it moves to the left. The lower dish opening 252d is formed into a cylindrical shape that extends from front to back by the lower dish main body 251 and the underside of the upper left side bulge 252a.

Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, the dish unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulges 252a in the center in the left-right direction and is equipped with a performance operation unit mounting portion to which the performance operation unit 300 is attached. The performance operation unit mounting portion is formed with a width of approximately 1/3 of the left-right width of the dish unit main body 252.

When assembled to the dish unit 200, the dish unit main body 252 is formed to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210, with the speaker port 211b facing forward through the lower dish opening 252d.

[3-5d-3. Bottom tray ball removal unit]
The lower tray ball removal unit 260 in the tray decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 27 and 50. The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is attached to the underside of the lower tray body 251, and is for storing game balls B in the lower tray 202 and discharging game balls B from the lower tray 202 by opening and closing the lower tray ball removal hole 202a.

The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is equipped with a lower tray ball removal button 263 and a lower tray ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by operating the lower tray ball removal button 263.

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the tray decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal button 263 is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decorative part 252b of the tray unit main body 252, and the lower tray ball removal lid 265 closes the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball removal lid 265, and game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

In the normal state, when the lower tray ball removal button 263 is pressed backward, the lower tray ball removal cover 265 moves and the lower tray ball removal hole 202a opens, allowing the game ball B in the lower tray 202 to be ejected below the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball removal hole 202a.

When the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is moved by pressing the lower tray ball removal button 263, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains in the moved position, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open position, and the game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

To close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is set back from the front of the lower front decorative part 252b, backward and then release the pressure, and the lower tray ball removal cover 265 returns to its normal position, closing the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. This allows the game ball B to be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5d-4. Left plate decorative unit and right plate decorative unit]
The left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 in the dish decorative unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 48 etc. The left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 are disposed at the upper part of the dish unit 200 and decorate both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 300.

The left dish decorative unit 270 comprises a semi-cylindrical left dish decorative body 271 that extends left and right and is translucent, a left dish decorative lens 272 that is translucent and passes through the left dish decorative body 271, and a left dish decorative board 273 that is provided behind the left dish decorative lens 272 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape, moving forward and downward as it moves from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the top of the upper left side bulge 252a. The left decorative body 271 is formed in a shape resembling a twisted semicylinder, with a semicircular arc that bulges forward and whose central axis extends diagonally to the upper left at the left end and from left to right at the right end. This left decorative body 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The left dish decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction, coinciding with the front surface of the left dish decorative body 271. The multiple LEDs mounted on the left dish decorative board 273 are full-color LEDs, and when illuminated, can illuminate and decorate the left dish decorative body 271.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the left end of the left decorative unit 270 is continuous with the bottom end of the door frame left side unit 420. Since the left decorative unit 270 does not have ribs along the length of the left decorative body 271, when the multiple LEDs on the left decorative board 273 are illuminated, the entire front of the left decorative body 271 can be illuminated and decorated in a substantially uniform manner, giving the appearance of embedded fluorescent lamps.

The right-hand plate decorative unit 275 comprises a translucent right-hand plate decorative body 276 that is semi-cylindrical and extends to the left and right, a translucent right-hand plate decorative lens 277 that passes through the right-hand plate decorative body 276, and a right-hand plate decorative board 278 that is provided behind the right-hand plate decorative lens 277 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The right plate decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape, moving forward and downward as it moves from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the top of the upper right side bulge 252a. The right plate decorative body 276 is formed as a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, giving it the shape of a twisted semicylinder. This right plate decorative body 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The right-hand decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction of the right-hand decorative body 276, coinciding with the front surface of the right-hand decorative body 276. The multiple LEDs mounted on the right-hand decorative board 278 are full-color LEDs, and when illuminated, can illuminate and decorate the right-hand decorative body 276.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the right end of the plate right decorative unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the plate right decorative unit 275 does not have ribs in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the plate right decorative body 276, when the multiple LEDs on the plate right decorative board 278 are illuminated, the entire front of the plate right decorative body 276 can be illuminated and decorated in an approximately uniform manner, giving the appearance of embedded fluorescent lights.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 protrude upward from the front end of the upper side bulge 252a of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decorative unit 250, forming a step between the upper side bulge 252a and the left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275. This allows the player to hook his/her fingers using the step between the left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulge 252a, and to use it as a finger rest when leveling the game balls B in the upper dish 201 or operating the performance operation unit 301 described later. In addition, the step between the left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulge 252a prevents the game balls B on the upper side bulge 252a from spilling forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 52 to 56. Fig. 52(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and Fig. 52(b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the back of (a). Fig. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into main components and seen from the front above, and Fig. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into main components and seen from the front below. Fig. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lift spring lower holding member is at the upper end of the movement, and Fig. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit has moved from the state of (a) to the upper position. Fig. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lift spring lower holding member is at the lower end of the movement.

The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, and serves to decorate the plate unit 200. When a player-participation performance is executed, the player can operate the unit to participate in the performance. The performance operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The presentation operation unit 300 is equipped with a presentation operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The presentation operation section 301 is composed of a touch operation section 302 that can be operated by the player through contact and a pressure operation section 303 that can be operated by the player through pressure, and can accept operations by the player and move (vibrate) the presentation operation section 301, allowing the player to participate in the presentation during the game as well as the operation of shooting the game ball B. The presentation operation section 301 has the touch operation section 302 provided above the pressure operation section 303. The presentation operation section 301 has the touch operation section 302 and the pressure operation section 303 formed in a circular shape with a diameter that is approximately 5/8 the outer diameter of the presentation operation unit 300.

The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with a spherical performance operation cover unit 310 that is provided on the front of the plate unit 200 in the center of the left-right direction, an operation unit base 315 to which the performance operation cover unit 310 is attached on the outside and which is attached to the front of the plate decoration unit 250, a performance operation outer peripheral decoration board 320 that is provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and is equipped with multiple LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part of the performance operation cover unit 310 (unit upper cover 312), an outer peripheral board cover 325 that is attached to the operation unit base 315 so as to cover the performance operation outer peripheral decoration board 320 from above, and an operation unit relay board unit 330 that is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315.

The performance operation unit 300 also includes a performance operation unit 350 having a performance operation unit 301, a performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 that raises and lowers the performance operation unit 350, and a protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the protruding force of the performance operation unit 350. The performance operation unit 350 is arranged so that it can advance and retreat upward from the top surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Production operation section cover unit]
The performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 53 to 56. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the performance operation unit 300 (the periphery of the performance operation unit 350) at the center of the left-right direction of the dish unit 200.

The performance operation unit cover unit 310 comprises a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is open upward and backward, and a circular unit upper cover 312 that is provided above the unit lower cover 311 and has an insertion opening 312a through which the performance operation unit 301 is inserted. The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and bottom of the operation unit base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. In other words, the performance operation unit cover unit 310 has an outer surface that is formed in a roughly spherical shape. Incidentally, the performance operation unit cover unit 310 in this embodiment is spherical in shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The performance operation section cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it moves upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of approximately 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 becomes the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is approximately 1/2 the overall width of the door frame base 101 in the left-right direction.

At least the unit top cover 312 of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 is translucent, and can be illuminated and decorated by the illumination of multiple LEDs on the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 described below.

When assembled to the tray unit 200, the front end of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 protrudes further forward than the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 is also connected so that the left tray decorative body 271 and the right tray decorative body 276 extend outward from both the left and right sides of the unit bottom cover 311. This makes the performance operation unit 300 stand out, and the integrated decoration gives it a good appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 315 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The rear side of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 212a of the upper tray body 212 in the tray base unit 210. The front and bottom of the operation unit base 315 are covered by the unit bottom cover 311, and the top is covered by the unit top cover 312 and the performance operation unit 301. The operation unit base 315 is formed in the shape of a container with an open top.

The operation unit base 315 comprises a main body 315a, which is a roughly cubic box-shaped body with an open top, and a flange 315b, which extends outward from the top end of the main body and has a circular outer periphery. The main body 315a houses the performance operation unit 350. The main body 315a also has a pair of guide shafts 362 and the lower end of a central shaft 366 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in the performance operation unit 350, which will be described later, attached to its bottom wall. The main body 315a also rotatably supports the lower end of an adjustment screw 384 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 on the upper surface of its bottom wall. Furthermore, the board base 331 of the operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body 315a.

The performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 is placed on the upper surface of the flange portion 315b. In addition, a circular outer peripheral board cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320. The unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral board cover 325.

When the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the performance operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b is positioned approximately flush with the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 330 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 53 to 56. The operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. The operation unit relay board unit 330 includes a board base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body 315a in the operation unit base 315, an operation unit relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the board base 331, and a board cover 333 attached to the board base 331 so as to cover the operation unit relay board 332 from the rear.

The operation unit relay board 332 relays the connection between the performance operation unit outer decorative board 320 (front decorative board 321 and rear decorative board 322), the button outer decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the contact detection sensor main body 358, the button middle decorative board 364, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the lifting detection sensor 374, the protruding force detection sensor 375, and the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 and the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210.

[3-5e-4. Production operation unit]
The performance operation unit 350 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The performance operation unit 350 is provided so as to face the outside from the insertion opening 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the performance operation unit cover unit 310, and can function as the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303.

The performance operation unit 350 comprises a bottomed, cylindrical button body 351 with a closed top end, a disk-shaped contact detector 352 attached to the top of the button body 351, a cylindrical button sleeve 353 inserted into the button body 351 from below, a disk-shaped button base 354 attached to the bottom end of the button sleeve 353 and supported by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 so that it can be raised and lowered, and a circular outer button decorative board 355 located above the button base 354 and with multiple LEDs 355a mounted on its top surface.

The performance operation unit 350 also includes a vibration motor 356 arranged between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 that attaches the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection sensor body 358 that is connected to the contact detection body 352 and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is formed entirely transparent. The button body 351 has a disk-shaped upper surface portion 351a that curves to bulge upward, a cylindrical tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer periphery of the upper surface portion 351a, and a locking portion 351c that protrudes downward from the lower end of the tubular portion 351b. The upper surface portion 351a is formed in a shape that constitutes a part of a sphere having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310. This upper surface portion 351a is decorated with a circular shape that is formed with a diameter of about 1/2 the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (tubular portion 351b) is about 5/8 of the diameter of the performance operation unit cover unit 310. The length (height) of the tubular portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals around the circumference of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portions 351c are locked to the button base 354. In this embodiment, the button body 351 has a diameter of approximately 127 mm.

The contact detector 352 has a circular outer circumference and is formed in a dish shape with a certain width inside bulging upward from the outer circumference. The contact detector 352 is formed below the circular decoration on the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, bulging obliquely upward and with a flat inner surface. This makes the contact detector 352 look like a part of the decoration of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 has a flat downward extension piece 352a that extends downward from both left and right ends of the outer circumference and the rear end. The contact detector 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface 351a of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 is formed of punching metal. The capacitance of the contact detector 352 relative to the entire area is suppressed by the multiple holes in the punching metal, preventing erroneous detection. In addition, because the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, light from the LED 364a on the button interior decorative substrate 364 located below can be transmitted upward, allowing the center of the top surface 351a of the button body 351 to be illuminated and decorated in good condition.

The contact detector 352 is connected to an external electrode terminal of the connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358. This allows the contact detector 352 to function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, and to detect contact or approach of a detectable object (a player's hand) with the top or side surface of the button main body 351. In other words, the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 allow the button main body 351 to function as the contact operation unit 302.

The button sleeve 353 has a cylindrical sleeve body 353a that extends vertically, and an annular flange portion 353b that extends outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is formed to be transparent throughout. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353a is approximately 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351, and its length is approximately the same as the length of the cylindrical portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 allows light from the multiple LEDs 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 to pass upward through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 is disk-shaped with a diameter approximately equal to the outer diameter of the button body 351, and is attached to the bottom end of the button body 351 so as to close the open bottom end of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a that penetrate vertically at positions symmetrical with respect to the center, a central hole 354b that penetrates vertically at the center, and a pair of guide pins 354c that protrude from the inner surface of the central hole toward the center. The guide shafts 362 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a. The central hole 354b is formed with an inner diameter large enough to allow the lifting cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same axis and are attached rotatably around the axis.

The button base 354 extends downward and further has a flat detection piece 354d that is detected by a pressure detection sensor 373 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360. The button base 354 has the locking portion 351c of the button body 351 locked to its outer circumferential surface. The button base 354 is guided so that it can be raised and lowered in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362 being inserted into a pair of guide holes 354a. The button base 354 is also moved in the vertical direction by a pair of guide pins 354c being guided by the cam portion 371a of the lifting cam member 371. The upper ends of a pair of lifting springs 365 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 abut against the bottom surface of the button base 354, and the button base is biased upward by the pair of lifting springs 365.

The button exterior decorative substrate 355 has multiple LEDs 355a mounted on its top surface. The multiple LEDs 355a are arranged in a row on two concentric circles. In more detail, the multiple LEDs 355a are provided in a portion slightly outside the sleeve body 353a of the button sleeve 353 and in a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 355a of the button exterior decorative substrate 355, the portion on the top surface of the button body 351 outside the contact detector 352 and the side (circumferential surface) of the button body 351 can be illuminated and decorated.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to its rotation shaft, and can generate vibrations by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is arranged so that its rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that its rotation shaft extends in a direction perpendicular to the forward and backward movement direction of the performance operation unit 301. The vibration motor 356 is also provided on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the performance operation unit 301 (performance operation unit 350) in the up-down direction. This allows the vibrations from the vibration motor 356 to be transmitted well to the performance operation unit 301. The vibrations caused by the vibration motor 356 can also reduce the impact on the pair of guide holes 354a (pair of guide shafts 362).

The contact detection sensor body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor body 358 has a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, an oscillator circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, etc., an output circuit, a constant voltage circuit that supplies power to the sensor IC and the output circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connection connector. The contact detection sensor body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrode inside. In addition, the connection connector of the contact detection sensor body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352. In other words, the contact detection sensor body 358 can make the contact detection body 352 function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor body 358 detects the capacitance with the sensor electrode and outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance set by an external resistor. In this embodiment, the contact detection sensor body 358 outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance, but it may also output a signal in multiple stages depending on the magnitude of the capacitance.

In the present embodiment, the performance operation unit 350 is provided with a contact detector 352 on the underside of the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, which is made to function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by the contact detection sensor body 358, and can detect the contact or approach of a detectable object (a player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 via the contact detector 352. In addition, the contact detector 352 of the performance operation unit 350 has a plurality of downward extension pieces 352a extending downward, so that it can detect the contact or approach of a detectable object (a player's hand) to the side of the button body 351 with the performance operation unit 350 protruding upward. For this reason, the performance operation unit 350 can make the button body 351 function as the contact operation unit 302 with the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358.

This performance operation unit 350 is supported by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 so that it can be raised and lowered in the vertical direction. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the performance operation unit cover unit 310, making the performance operation unit 300 look like a single sphere. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and can function as the pressing operation unit 303 by pressing downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

In more detail, when the performance operation unit 350 is in the state where it has been moved to the lowest position (normal state), it will not move any further downward even if it is pressed, and it is in a state where pressing operations cannot be performed. In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressing detection sensor 373 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360. Then, when the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 leaves the pressing detection sensor 373 and becomes undetectable. Then, when the upper surface of the performance operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the performance operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower end of movement against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressing detection sensor 373. This detects the pressing operation of the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303).

In addition, the performance operation unit 350 covers the upper side of the contact detection body 352 made of punched metal with the button body 351, so that when operating the contact operation unit 302, the player touches the smooth, spherical upper surface of the button body 351, and the player does not directly touch the surface of the punched metal with the unevenness caused by the multiple holes, allowing the player to smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302. In addition, because the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, it is possible to give the contact operation unit 302 any tactile sensation by forming fine unevenness or multiple streaks on the surface (top surface) of the button body 351, which increases the design freedom for the contact operation unit 302 and provides a pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to players.

In the above, the button body 351 is transparent, but this is not limiting, and the button body 351 may be opaque or semi-transparent, so that the lower side is difficult to see through. This makes it difficult to see the contact detector 352 made of punched metal through the button body 351, improving the appearance of the performance operation unit 350. Furthermore, if the button body 351 is opaque, it is preferable that it be translucent. This allows the button body 351 to be illuminated and decorated by light from the LED 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 and the LED 364a of the inner button decorative board 364 provided below, and the player can be entertained by the illumination of the button body 351.

[3-5e-5. Performance operation unit lifting mechanism]
The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315 and can lift and lower the performance operation unit 350. The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 comprises a lifting mechanism base 361 having an approximately circular outer periphery and attached within the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the performance operation unit unit 350; a pair of cylindrical guide shafts 362 arranged symmetrically about the central axis of the lifting mechanism base 361, with their lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and their upper ends extending upward through the operation unit base 315 and the button base 354; a disk-shaped upper base 363 connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and having an outer periphery smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353; and a button decorative board 364 attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 and equipped with a plurality of LEDs 364a capable of emitting light upward.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 also includes a pair of lifting springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted, respectively, and which urge the button base 354 upward, and a central shaft 366 that passes vertically through the center of the lifting mechanism base 361 and the button base 354, with its lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a and its upper end attached to the upper base 363.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 further comprises an operation button lifting drive motor 367 attached to the underside of the lifting mechanism base 361 so that its rotation shaft protrudes upward, a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, a spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 meshing with the lifting drive gear 368 and rotatably attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361, and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 also includes a lifting cam member 371, the lower end of which is connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 and rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough, which lifts and lowers the button base 354 by rotating, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to cover the lifting drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 also includes a pressure detection sensor 373 attached to the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, a lifting detection sensor 374 attached to the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the lifting of the performance operation unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the lifting cam drive gear member 370 (lifting cam member 371), and a protruding force detection sensor 375 attached to the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the lifting of the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 to detect the protruding force of the performance operation unit 350.

The lifting mechanism base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of through holes 361c penetrating the base body 361a and through which the lifting spring 365 can pass together with the pair of guide shafts 362. The base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body 315a in the operation unit base 315. The base body 361a has a driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressing detection sensor 373, and a protruding force detection sensor 375 attached to its upper surface. The base body 361a also has an operation button lifting drive motor 367, a lifting detection sensor 374, and a protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to its lower surface. The lower ends of the legs 361b of the lifting mechanism base 361 are attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315. This forms a space in which the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is disposed between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 at positions that are half the diameter of the base main body 361a forward and backward from the center.

The pair of guide shafts 362 pass through a pair of through holes 361c provided at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center forward and backward in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 have their respective lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, and their respective upper ends attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed from metal rods.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower protrusion that protrudes downward. By abutting the lower protrusion of the upper base 363 against the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372, a space capable of accommodating the lifting cam member 371 can be formed between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361.

The button middle decorative board 364 has multiple LEDs 364a mounted on the top surface that are full-color LEDs. The button middle decorative board 364 can illuminate and decorate the center of the top surface of the button body 351 by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 364a.

The pair of lift springs 365 are coil springs, and each has a guide shaft 362 inserted therethrough. The lower ends of the pair of lift springs 365 abut against the lift spring lower holding member 385 of the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the upper ends abut against the button base 354.

The lifting/lowering cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the lifting/lowering cam member 371, and a lifting/lowering detection piece 370c that protrudes downward from the gear portion 370a in a cylindrical shape and has two opposing notches that are detected by the lifting/lowering detection sensor 374. The lifting/lowering cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The lifting cam member 371 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The lifting cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372, and is provided between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361. The lifting cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer periphery and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending perpendicular to the axis near the bottom end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, a second cam 371d extending upward parallel to the axis from one end of the first cam 371b, and a third cam 371e extending upward in a spiral shape from the end of the first cam 371b opposite the second cam 371d (see FIG. 55, etc.). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and adjacent cam portions 371a are spaced apart by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The lifting cam member 371 also has a connected portion 371f at its lower end that connects to the connecting portion 370b of the lifting cam drive gear member 370.

The lifting/lowering cam member 371 is formed so that the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the lifting/lowering cam member 371 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view. By rotating, the lifting/lowering cam member 371 can guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 with the cam portion 371a, and can raise and lower the button base 354 (performance operation unit 350), which is biased upward by the lifting spring 365.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the lift spring 365 and the lift cam member 371 can pass. The gear cover 372 also has an upper protrusion that protrudes upward at a location facing the lower protrusion of the upper base 363. By abutting the upper protrusion against the lower end of the lower protrusion of the upper base 363, the gear cover 372 can form a space between the upper base 363 and the lift mechanism base 361 that can accommodate the lift cam member 371.

The pressure detection sensor 373 detects the pressure operation of the performance operation unit 350 (pressure operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the performance operation unit 350. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the pressure detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 from the normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated, and this pressure detection sensor 373 becomes non-detecting. When the top surface of the performance operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the performance operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower end of its travel against the force of the lift spring 365, the pressure detection sensor 373 detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 and can detect the pressing operation of the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303).

The lifting/lowering detection sensor 374 detects the lifting/lowering detection piece 370c of the lifting/lowering cam drive gear member 370, thereby detecting the rotational position of the lifting/lowering cam member 371 via the connected part 371f, which is connected to the connecting part 370b of the lifting/lowering cam drive gear member 370.

The protruding force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the lift spring lower holding member 385 in the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can support the performance operation unit unit 350 so that it can be raised and lowered via the button base 354 using a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in front and behind, and can urge the performance operation unit unit 350 upward via the button base 354 using a pair of lifting springs 365. In addition, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can raise and lower the performance operation unit unit 350 (performance operation unit 301) relative to the performance operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the lifting cam member 371 using the operation button lifting drive motor 367. In addition, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can illuminate and decorate the central part of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately illuminating multiple LEDs 364a mounted on the button middle decorative board 364.

In the normal state, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is engaged with the engaging portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the lifting cam member 371 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 (see FIG. 55(a)). In this normal state, the performance operation unit 350 is located at the downward movement end via the button base 354, and even if the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the performance operation unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected. Also, in the normal state, the surface (top surface) of the unit upper cover 312 in the performance operation unit cover unit 310 and the top surface of the button body 351 in the performance operation unit 350 are aligned, and the performance operation unit cover unit 310 and the button body 351 form a single sphere.

In the normal state (when the performance operation unit 350 is in the lowered position), when the operation button lift drive motor 367 rotates the lift drive gear 368 in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view, the lift cam drive gear member 370 rotates in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view via the driven gear 369 meshing with the lift drive gear 368, and the lift cam member 371 connected to the lift cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the lift cam member 371 rotates in a counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a visible from the front in FIG. 55(a) moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 rolls from the locking portion 371c to the left of the locking portion 371c on the first cam 371b, and the button base 354 moves slightly downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

When the guide pin 354c, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the lifting cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second cam 371d extends upward perpendicularly to the first cam 371b, so that the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button base 354 rises together with the guide pin 354c, and the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position. In this state, the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, so that the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detecting state.

The lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, to which the lower end of the lifting spring 365 abuts, can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, as will be described in detail later. The amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 can be changed depending on the vertical position of the lifting spring lower holding member 385, so that the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded to the raised position with a protruding force according to the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365.

When the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. In this state, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 abuts against the lower surface of the upper base 363, restricting further upward movement of the button base 354. Also, when the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire performance operation unit 350 (performance operation unit 301) moves upward, and the upper surface 351a of the button main body 351 protrudes upward beyond the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312.

When the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) of the performance operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the force of the lifting spring 365, the performance operation unit 350 moves downward against the force of the lifting spring 365, and the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372. When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and together with the button base 354, the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the button base 354 abuts against the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373, and the pressure on the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) of the performance operation unit is detected.

To return the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view. In FIG. 55(b), the third cam 371e that abuts against the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves to the right (towards the guide pin 354c). As a result, the third cam 371e presses the guide pin 354c downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

When returning the performance operation unit 350 to the lowered position, the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward by the thrust force adjustment drive motor 381 of the thrust force adjustment mechanism 380, and the amount of compression of the lift spring 365 is reduced (see FIG. 56). This weakens the force of the lift spring 365 that urges the performance operation unit 350 upward, and the force acting on the third cam 371e of the lift cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is also weakened, reducing the load on the operation button lift drive motor 367 that rotates the lift cam member 371, and reducing damage (breakage) of the operation button lift drive motor 367. In addition, an inexpensive motor with low torque can be used as the operation button lift drive motor 367.

When the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the lift cam member 371 rotates, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops and the guide pin 354c rolls along the first cam 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c halfway along the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the upwardly recessed locking portion 371c by the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the operation button lift drive motor 367 is stopped, and the performance operation unit 350 returns to its original lowered position.

In the above, an example was described in which the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise in the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 to move the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, causing the button base 354 (button body 351) to protrude from the lowered position to the raised position in one go. However, in the normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 and the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 may rotate the lifting cam member 371 in the clockwise direction in a plan view. Incidentally, the lifting distance of the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in this embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the lifting cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in the normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the guide pin 354c moves upward along the third cam 371e due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. Then, when the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 is stopped when the guide pin 354c is in a position halfway along the third cam 371e, the upward protrusion of the button body 351 can be stopped at any position between the lowered position and the raised position. Then, by protruding the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, it becomes possible to press the button body 351 downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button body 351 can function as the pressing operation unit 303.

When the third cam 371e is used to protrude the button body 351 upward, it is desirable to move the lift spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 downward to weaken the biasing force of the lift spring 365. This reduces the load on the rotation of the lift cam member 371 (operation button lift drive motor 367) and also makes the button body 351 feel lighter when pressed.

In this way, the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be changed depending on the rotational position of the lifting cam member 371, so by varying the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 depending on the game status (for example, depending on the special lottery result that is drawn when the game ball B is received in the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004), it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game.

In addition, at least one shallow recess in which the guide pin 354c can be engaged may be provided midway on the third cam 371e of the lifting cam member 371. This allows the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) to be stably protruded to a position with the same protrusion amount, preventing variation in the amount of protrusion. Furthermore, if a recess is provided at least at one location midway on the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c can be engaged in the recess, eliminating the need to keep the lifting cam member 371 stopped from rotating by the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and reducing the load on the operation button lifting drive motor 367.

[3-5e-6. Ejection force adjustment mechanism]
The protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 is a lifting spring 365 that urges the performance operation unit 350 upward. By changing the amount of compression of the operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303), the force (projecting force) with which the operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) projects upward can be changed. It is provided between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the lift mechanism base 361 and the base main body 361 a of the lift mechanism base 361 .

The protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 includes a protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the underside of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, a spur gear-shaped pinion gear 382 attached to the rotating shaft of the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, a transmission gear 383 meshed with the pinion gear 382 and rotatably attached to the underside of the base body 361a, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a meshed with the transmission gear 383, and a screw portion 384b extending downward from the gear portion 384a in a cylindrical shape and having a spiral groove formed on the outer periphery, an adjustment screw 384 through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably supported, and a lifting spring lower holding member 385 meshed with the screw portion 384b of the adjustment screw 384, through which a pair of guide shafts 362 pass and against which the lower ends of a pair of lifting springs 365 abut.

The protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 is attached to the underside of the base body 361a so that a gap is formed between the motor and the underside of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 has a rotating shaft that protrudes into the gap between the motor and the base body 361a.

The adjustment screw 384 is formed to a length that extends from the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation unit base 315 to the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The screw portion 384b of the adjustment screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter larger than that of the gear portion 384a.

The lift spring lower holding member 385 has a main body portion 385a extending forward and backward, a screw hole 385b that penetrates the center of the main body portion 385a vertically and screws into the screw portion 384b, spring holding recesses 385c that are provided at both the front and rear ends of the main body portion 385a and are recessed downward to accommodate the lower end of the lift spring 365, and a flat detection piece 385d that extends upward from the front end of the main body portion 385a. The lift spring lower holding member 385 has a guide shaft 362 that penetrates each of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c at the center. The detection piece 385d is detected by the protruding force detection sensor 375 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

When the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a. Then, by rotating the adjustment screw 384 by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can move the lifting spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction by the screw hole 385b that meshes with the screw portion 384b.

In the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the lift spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves upward, and the amount of compression of the lift spring 365 increases. On the other hand, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the lift spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves downward, and the amount of compression of the lift spring 365 decreases (see FIG. 56). In other words, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the force of the lift spring 365 urging the performance operation unit 350 upward can be increased, and when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the force of the lift spring 365 urging the performance operation unit 350 upward can be decreased. This allows the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 to adjust the upward protruding force of the performance operation unit 350.

The detection piece 385d of the lift spring lower holding member 385 is detected by the protruding force detection sensor 375 when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is raised to the highest position. In other words, the detection piece 385d is detected by the protruding force detection sensor 375 when the lift spring 365 is in the state where the amount of compression is greatest. As a result, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is being moved upward by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, if the protruding force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d, the upward movement of the lift spring lower holding member 385 by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 is stopped, thereby preventing further compression of the lift spring 365 and preventing damage to the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380.

As described above, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the protruding force of the performance operation unit 350, so that when the performance operation unit 350 is in the lowered position and the contact detector 352 detects contact or approach of a detected object (for example, a player's finger, etc.) to the button body 351, and the performance operation unit lift mechanism 360 is used to protrude the performance operation unit 350 to abut against the detected object, the vertical position of the lift spring lower holding member 385 can be appropriately selected to vary the protruding force of the button body 351. This makes it possible to vary the strength of the force exerted on the player's finger, etc. when the button body 351 protrudes upward, so that when the button body 351 strongly abuts, the player can be made to think that something good is going to happen, and the player's expectations for the game can be increased. Therefore, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can make the protruding force of the button body 351 stronger or weaker depending on the game status (for example, depending on the special lottery result that is drawn when the game ball B is received in the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004), thereby indicating to the player the degree of expectation for the game.

By the way, as a method of changing the spring's biasing force, it is possible to change the biasing force by applying a twist to the spring. However, in order to protrude the performance operation unit 350, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring), and if the biasing force is changed by applying a twist to the compression coil spring, an excessive stress different from that in the original use acts on the compression coil spring, which may cause the internal structure to deteriorate early and be damaged. In contrast, in the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 of this embodiment, the protruding force (bias) of the performance operation unit 350 is adjusted by changing the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 by moving the lifting spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction, so that excessive stress is not applied to the lifting spring 365, and the early deterioration of the lifting spring 365 can be reduced, and the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded stably for a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Function of the Production Operation Unit]
Next, the operation of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 57 and Fig. 58. Fig. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board, the button outer decorative board, and the button inner decorative board in a plan view of the performance operation unit seen from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. Fig. 58 (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the performance operation unit unit is in the raised position. The performance operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and is provided with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The performance operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by contact or approach of the player's hand, etc., and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed. The contact operation unit 302 is provided on the upper part of the pressing operation unit 303 (button body 351).

The performance operation unit 300 is assembled to the tray unit 200 with the protruding direction of the pressing operation part 303 (performance operation part unit 350) that can protrude upward tilted so that the upper part is located forward with respect to the vertical direction. In other words, the center of the performance operation part 301 is located forward of the apex of the spherical performance operation unit 300. This makes it easier for a player seated in front of this pachinko machine 1 to see the performance operation part 301.

In the normal state, the performance operation unit 300 has the pressing operation section 303 (performance operation unit 350) in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350 coincides with the spherical surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310. In addition, in the normal state, even if the pressing operation section 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation section 303 (performance operation unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the performance operation unit 300 appears to the player as simply a spherical decorative object, making it difficult for the player to recognize that it is operable.

As shown in FIG. 57, the performance operation unit 300 has a performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 arranged below the unit upper cover 312 that surrounds the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 303 (performance operation unit 350), and a circular button outer decorative board 355 arranged inside the outer edge of the pressing operation unit 303, and a button middle decorative board 364 arranged further inside. The performance operation unit 300 is arranged outward from the button middle decorative board 364 in the order of the button outer decorative board 355 and the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320. The button middle decorative board 364 and the LED 355a inside the button outer decorative board 355 are arranged below the contact detector 352, but since the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal and has translucency, the light from them can be transmitted upward (to the player side) well.

The performance operation unit 300 can illuminate and decorate the annular unit upper cover 312 using the LEDs 320a on the performance operation outer peripheral decorative board 320. In addition, the LEDs 355a on the button outer decorative board 355 can illuminate and decorate the periphery and outer peripheral surface of the top surface of the button body 351. Furthermore, the LEDs 364a on the button middle decorative board 364 can illuminate and decorate the central part of the top surface of the button body 351.

The multiple LEDs 320a on the outer decorative board 320 of the effect operation unit, the multiple LEDs 355a on the outer decorative board 355 of the button, and the multiple LEDs 364a on the inner decorative board 364 of the button are each arranged in a row on the circumference, so that by sequentially emitting light in the circumferential direction, the player can see a light-emitting effect in which light rotates around the center of the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, the multiple LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 363a are arranged in a concentric circle, so that the player can see a light-emitting effect in which light spreads from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside, or a light-emitting effect in which light converges from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303.

In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the presentation operation unit 300 is in a lowered position with the pressing operation unit 303 (presentation operation unit 350) flush with its upper surface against the surface of the unit upper cover 312. In this state, pressing the pressing operation unit 303 is not possible. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can allow contact operations depending on the player participation type presentation being executed.

In the normal state where the pressing operation unit 303 (operation operation unit 350) is not protruding, the performance (player participation type performance) may be, for example, to display a performance image on the performance display device 1600 encouraging the player to touch the top surface of the performance operation unit 300, or to output voice or sound effects. Then, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or approach) with the button body 351, the performance proceeds to the next stage. When contact is detected, the button body 351 is illuminated and decorated by the LED 355a on the button outer decorative board 355 or the LED 364a on the button inner decorative board 364, so that the player can recognize that the touch operation has been accepted, and a feeling of operation of the touch operation unit 302 may be given. At this time, the light color, light emission brightness, light emission pattern, etc. of the button body 351 may be used to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game (for example, the occurrence of a favorable game state in which the player has an advantage, such as a "jackpot" game).

Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or proximity) with the button body 351, the vibration motor 356 may be driven to vibrate the button body 351. This provides a sense of operation to the contact operation unit 302, making the player more aware that the contact operation has been accepted. At this time, the vibration motor 356 may be caused to give strong vibrations, weak vibrations, or vibrations with a predetermined rhythm, to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game.

In addition, in the normal presentation (player participation presentation), a presentation image encouraging the player to touch the top surface of the presentation operation unit 300 is displayed on the presentation display device 1600, and voice, sound effects, etc. are output, and then when the contact detector 352 detects contact of the player (hand or fingers) with the top surface of the button body 351, the presentation operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350) to protrude upward (pop up) due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. In more detail, when the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view in a normal state, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 comes off the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b), and the force of the pair of lifting springs 365 causes the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351, pressing operation unit 303) together with the button base 354 to vigorously protrude upward and reach the raised position (see FIG. 55(b)). In this raised position state, the upper surface of the button body 351 is located significantly above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 protrudes upward. And, by the button body 351 protruding upward as described above, the fingers touching the button body 351 are pushed upward together with the button body 351, which can greatly surprise the player and strongly attract the player's interest.

Then, the presentation transitions to one in which the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed, and the player enjoys pressing the pressing operation unit 303. In more detail, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and the button body 351 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350) moves downward, and the top surface of the button body 351 becomes flush with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373. This detects the pressing of the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303), and the presentation is changed in response to the pressing operation, allowing the player to enjoy a player-participation presentation.

During the above-mentioned performance, the protruding force (momentum) of the button body 351 may be increased or decreased by using the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, so that the strength of the protruding force may suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game. In addition, when the button body 351 pops up or is pressed, the button body 351 may be vibrated by the vibration motor 356.

In a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 is protruded, the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) may be protruded upward when the contact detector 352 detects that the player's fingers, etc. have approached within the movement range (protruding range) of the upwardly protruding button body 351. This causes the button body 351 to come into contact with the player's fingers, etc., causing an impact, which can surprise the player and strongly attract the player's interest. Even in this case, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can be used to increase or decrease the protruding force of the button body 351, so that the strength of the protruding force can suggest to the player how much he or she is looking forward to the game.

In addition, in a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 is protruded, when the contact detector 352 detects that the player's fingers, etc., have approached within a predetermined distance of the protruding button body 351, outside the protruding range of the upwardly protruding button body 351, the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) may be protruded upward. This allows the wind pressure generated by the protruding button body 351 to hit the player's fingers, etc., surprising the player and strongly attracting the player's interest. Even in this case, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the protruding force of the button body 351, so that the strength of the wind pressure hitting the player's fingers, etc., can suggest to the player how much he or she is looking forward to the game.

Furthermore, as an effect of protruding the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be protruded upward regardless of the detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detector 352. In this case, if the button body 351 is protruded with a strong protruding force by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes forcefully and generates a sound (protruding sound), so that the protruding sound can surprise the player. Also, if the button body 351 is protruded with a weak protruding force by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes quietly, making it difficult for the player to notice the protrusion of the button body 351, and the player can be surprised by the button body 351 protruding without his realizing it.

As an effect after the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is protruded, the force of the lifting spring 365 may be weakened by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, and an effect may be executed in which the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed in the same way as a general press button. Alternatively, the force of the lifting spring 365 may be increased by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, and an effect may be executed in which the player is forced to press the button body 351 with a strong force.

In addition, after the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is protruded, a performance may be executed in which the protruding button body 351 is touched. At this time, since the contact detector 352 has a downward extension piece 352a that extends downward, the side of the button body 351 may be touched. At this time, it is also preferable to increase the biasing force of the lift spring 365 by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, so that the protruding button body 351 can be made difficult to move and the button body 351 (touch operation unit 302) can be easily touched.

In the above, an example of the effect of protruding the effect operation unit 350 is shown in which the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise using the operation button lifting drive motor 367, moving the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, causing the button base 354 (button body 351) to protrude from the lowered position to the raised position in one go, but this is not limiting.

For example, in the normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is engaged with the engagement portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 and the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the lifting cam member 371 can be rotated clockwise in a plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 to move the guide pin 354c from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 can be stopped midway through the third cam 371e, so that the button body 351 stops protruding upward at a position between the lowered position and the raised position. At this time, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

In this way, even if the third cam 371e of the lift-down cam member 371 causes the button body 351 to protrude partway, the button body 351 can be pressed and can function as the pressing operation unit 303, allowing the player to enjoy a player-participation type presentation. In this case, the amount by which the button body 351 protrudes upward can be varied depending on the rotational position of the lift-down cam member 371, so that the degree of expectation for the game can be suggested depending on the amount by which the button body 351 protrudes, entertaining the player.

Furthermore, as a performance in which the protruding performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is pressed, after the performance operation unit 350 is protruding, the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward to minimize the compression of the lift spring 365. As a result, the force of the lift spring 365 is in the weakest state, so that the performance operation unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, improving the operability of the pressing operation and making the pressing operation enjoyable. Also, as a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is pressed, the lift spring lower holding member 385 may be placed in an appropriate position in the vertical direction to set the force of the lift spring 365 to any strength between the strongest and the weakest depending on the special lottery result. This allows the player to press the performance operation unit 350 firmly or lightly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operating force of the performance operation unit 350, and a wider variety of performances can be presented, making it less likely that the player will become bored.

In addition, as a presentation using the presentation operation unit 300, multiple threshold levels may be set according to the capacitance of the contact detector 352 so that the contact of the player's fingers, etc. with the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected at multiple contact stages (approach stages), and the presentation may be changed according to each stage. In other words, focusing on the fact that the capacitance of the contact detector 352 increases as the player's fingers, etc. approach the button body 351 (contact detector 352), multiple threshold levels may be set for the magnitude of the capacitance to detect it in multiple stages and to use it in the presentation. Specifically, for example, by dividing the stage into a stage where the player's fingers are more than a predetermined distance away from the button body 351, a stage where the player's fingers are not touching the button body 351 within a predetermined distance from the button body 351, and a stage where the player's fingers are touching the button body 351, and changing the presentation according to each stage, it is possible to present a variety of presentations to the player with just one contact detection sensor body 358, making it less likely for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, the normal state of the performance operation unit 300 is shown in FIG. 55(a) with the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) in the lowered position and the lift spring lower holding member 385 moved upward. However, this is not limited to this, and the performance operation unit 350 may be in the lowered position and the lift spring lower holding member 385 moved downward as shown in FIG. 56(a). As a result, in the normal state, the lift spring 365 is not strongly compressed, so that early deterioration (fatigue) of the lift spring 365 can be suppressed. In addition, the biasing force of the strongly compressed lift spring 365 can suppress early deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the lift spring lower holding member 385.

In this way, the presentation operation unit 300 of this embodiment can be used for various patterns of player participation presentations, allowing players to enjoy a wide variety of presentations, preventing players from becoming bored and reducing a decline in interest.

The performance operation unit 300 has a circular (two arcs combined) performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 on the top of the spherical performance operation unit cover unit 310, and a contact detection sensor body 358 is provided on the performance operation unit unit 350, which rises and falls inside the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320. In addition, a button middle decorative board 364, which is fixed in position, is provided inside the button sleeve 353 of the performance operation unit 350. This contact detection sensor body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, so when the performance operation unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor body 358 (sensor electrode) approaches the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 and the button middle decorative board 364, and the capacitance of the sensor electrode changes due to the approach of the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 and the button middle decorative board 364, which may cause the contact detection sensor body 358 to make a false detection.

Therefore, a conductive shield (e.g., punched metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) connected to ground (GND) may be provided between the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the button inner decorative board 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. As a result, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 or the button inner decorative board 364 changes by moving the performance operation unit unit 350 up and down, the shield connected to ground (GND) does not change the distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 or the button inner decorative board 364, and can reduce the effect of the change in capacitance due to the approach of the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 or the button inner decorative board 364, and can prevent erroneous detection in the contact detection sensor main body 358.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of the plate unit]
Next, the plate unit 200 of an embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 59 to 61. Fig. 59 is a plan view of a performance operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are provided in the performance operation unit of the performance operation unit. Fig. 60(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a switching unit is provided between the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detection bodies in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, and the performance operation unit of the plate unit are made movable in the forward and backward directions and contact detection bodies are provided on the front and rear sides of the performance operation unit. Fig. 61(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a contact detection body having decorative properties, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing another embodiment of the performance operation unit. Note that in Figs. 59 to 61, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those described above.

59, the contact detector 352 is divided into a left contact detector 390L and a right contact detector 390R on the lower side of the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350, and the left contact detector 391L and the right contact detector 390R are connected to the left contact detector 390L and the right contact detector 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, when a player moves his/her finger from the left side to the right side on the upper surface of the button body 351, when the player's finger is positioned on the left side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detector 390L changes and the left contact detector 391L becomes detected, while the capacitance of the right contact detector 390R does not change and the right contact detector 391R remains undetected. When the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the capacitance of both the left contact detector 390L and the right contact detector 390R changes, causing both the left contact detector body 391L and the right contact detector body 391R to detect. Furthermore, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detector 390L returns to its original state, causing the left contact detector body 391L to become undetectable, while the capacitance of the right contact detector 390R changes, causing the right contact detector body 391R to remain detected.

In this way, the movement of the player's fingers, etc. can be detected by the combination of detection/non-detection by the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R of the left contact detection sensor main body 391L and the right contact detection sensor main body 391R, and the pattern of changes. This makes it possible to detect a wider variety of contact operations, and to present the player with a player-participation presentation that allows a wider variety of contact operations to be performed on the contact operation unit 302, while also making the player-participation presentation of operating the contact operation unit 302 even more enjoyable. Furthermore, by adding more contact detection bodies, it becomes possible to detect even more complex movements.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60(a) is an example in which multiple contact detectors 393 are connected to one contact detector sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, with multiple contact detectors 393 provided at multiple different locations, one contact detector sensor main body 392 can detect contact with a human body or the like at any of the contact detectors 393.

For example, by distributing multiple contact detectors 393 on the inside (underside) of the button body 351, when the player's fingers or the like touch any part of the surface of the button body 351, the contact can be detected by any of the contact detectors 393, thereby improving the detection accuracy of contact with the contact operation unit 302.

In addition, multiple contact detectors 393 may be provided in areas of the pachinko machine 1 that should not be touched by the player (for example, areas where the player may be injured, areas where other players may be inconvenienced, areas where fraudulent activity may occur, etc.), and when any of the contact detectors 393 detects a human body or the like, a warning or alert may be issued.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60(b) is an example in which a switching unit 394 is provided between one contact detection sensor main body 392 and multiple contact detection bodies 393, which connects only one of the contact detection bodies 393 to the contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, the switching unit 394 switches the connection to one of the multiple contact detection bodies 352, making it possible to detect contact with a human body or the like only at a desired location (contact detection body 352). Examples of the switching unit 394 include "one that switches using a switching circuit using a relay or transistor," "one that switches using other electronic circuits," and "one that switches in response to the movement of a movable member (for example, the movable left plate decoration unit 270, right plate decoration unit 275, and performance operation unit 300 as shown in FIG. 60(c))."

For example, in the presentation operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302), multiple contact detectors 393 may be distributed and when a player participation type presentation is performed in which the player touches the parts detected by each contact detector 393 in order, the contact detectors 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 may be switched in the touch order by the switching unit 394 to detect whether the player's fingers or the like have made contact with the contact detector 393. This makes it possible to present the player with a highly game-like player participation type presentation using multiple contact detectors 393, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

Also, as shown in FIG. 60(c), if the left plate decorative unit 270, the right plate decorative unit 275, and the performance operation unit 300 are made capable of moving forward and backward, a first contact detector 393a may be provided on the front side of the performance operation unit 300, and a second contact detector 393b may be provided on the rear side of the performance operation unit 300, and when the performance operation unit 300 etc. is to be protruded forward, the first contact detector 393a may be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 by the switching unit 394, and when the performance operation unit 300 etc. is to be retreated, the switching unit 394 may be switched to connect the second contact detector 393b to the contact detection sensor main body 392.

As a result, when the performance operation unit 300 etc. is protruded (moved) forward, the first contact detector 393a detects contact or approach of the player and stops the forward movement of the performance operation unit 300 etc. This makes it possible to prevent the performance operation unit 300 etc. from unnecessarily pressing against the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and to avoid causing discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, when the performance operation unit 300 etc. is projected forward, a gap may be formed on the rear side of the performance operation unit 300 etc., and if the performance operation unit 300 etc. is moved back to the initial position with the player's fingers etc. inserted in the gap, the player's fingers etc. may be pinched and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the performance operation unit 300 etc. that has been moved forward is moved backward, the switching unit 394 switches so that the second contact detection body 393b is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. Then, when the second contact detection body 393b detects the player's fingers etc., the rearward movement of the performance operation unit 300 etc. is stopped, and the player is notified of the instruction to remove the fingers etc. from the rear side of the performance operation unit 300 etc., and the performance operation unit 300 etc. is moved backward only when the second contact detection body 393b is not detected, and the performance operation unit 300 etc. is returned to the initial state. This prevents players from being injured due to gaps behind the performance operation unit 300, etc., and improves the safety of the pachinko machine 1.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(a), the contact detector 395 that detects contact with the player's fingers or the like has a star-shaped outer shape to provide decorativeness (design). The shape of the decorative contact detector 395 is not limited to a star shape, but may be a circle, a polygon, a geometric pattern, a shape imitating a specific character, a shape imitating a specific item, a shape imitating a specific logo, a picture frame, or the like. As a result, the contact detector 395 visible through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), so the contact detector 395 itself can improve the appearance of the button body 351 and therefore the pachinko machine 1, and a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players can be provided.

In addition, while the above embodiment shows the contact detector 352 formed from punched metal, this is not limited to this, and the contact detector may be formed from metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, etc., and the same effects as those described above can be achieved. It is preferable that the contact detector is provided on the back side of a transparent surface member so that it is not directly touched by the player's fingers, etc. This prevents wear on the contact detector and also makes the surface member smooth to the touch.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a button-inside decorative board 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact detector 352, but this is not limited to the above. As shown in FIG. 61(b), a contact detector 397 may be provided below a transparent surface member 396, and a decorative body 398 may be provided below that. This allows the decorative body 398 to be visible through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397, thereby enhancing the decorativeness of the performance operation unit on which the surface member 396 is provided, and improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In the embodiment of FIG. 61(b), the contact detector 397 is formed by metal deposition, and under normal conditions, the metallic luster of the contact detector 397 makes the decorative body 398 below it invisible. However, when contact with the surface member 396 is detected, the decorative body 398 is illuminated by an LED provided below the contact detector 397, so that the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397.

The contact detector 352 may be formed so as to be unnoticeable to the player. Examples of unnoticeable contact detectors include "those formed from transparent materials" and "those formed so as to be seen as one with the decoration of the surface member of the button body, etc." As a result, the performance operation unit 301 in which the contact detector 352 is provided cannot recognize the contact detector 352, and the player is given the illusion that it does not detect or operate the contact of fingers, etc. For example, when a predetermined player participation performance is executed and the player's fingers, etc., contact or approach the button body 351, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the button body 351 to protrude upward, and the player is first aware of the presence of the contact detector 352 (contact operation unit 302), which greatly surprises the player and entertains the player, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 62 to 65. Figure 62(a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. Figure 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and Figure 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. Figure 65 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line U-U in Figure 62(a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 420 is composed of a door frame left side base 421 that is attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 that is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421 and has a plurality of first LEDs 422a installed vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, and a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 that is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421 and has a plurality of first LEDs 423a installed vertically at regular intervals on the front surface. The door frame includes a lower left side decorative board 423 attached to the left side of the door frame, an upper left side reflector 424 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, a lower left side reflector 425 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and a left side decorative body 426 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front sides of the upper left side reflector 424 and the lower left side reflector 425.

The door frame left side unit 420 also includes an upper left side light guiding member 427 that guides light forward from the first LED 422a on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, a middle left side light guiding member 428 that guides forward light from the first LED 423a above the vertical center on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and a lower left side light guiding member 429 that guides forward light from the first LED 423a below the vertical center on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame.

The door frame left side base 421 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the front. The door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with synthetic resins of different colors and translucency (light transmittance). In detail, the door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, like the above-mentioned handle cover 295, and a circular or radial pattern is formed by a part of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. In other words, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the door frame upper left side decorative board 422, multiple first LEDs 422a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 422b are mounted two by two, vertically aligned, between the first LEDs 422a. In addition, the door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 422c with a unique address for illuminating the first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b.

This door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is equipped with a total of 12 full-color LEDs, including four first LEDs 422a and eight second LEDs 422b. The first LED 422a, which has second LEDs 422b on both the top and bottom, is located in the center (the center between) of the second LEDs 422b. At least the second LEDs 422b are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can irradiate light within a 130-degree angle range centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the decorative board 422 on the upper left side of the door frame, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets, the top two and the remaining two. The eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets, the top two, the third to fifth three from the top, and the sixth to eighth three from the top. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and controls the two sets of four first LEDs 422a and the three sets of eight second LEDs 422b with three systems per set, for a total of 15 systems, so that they can each emit full color light.

Although not shown, this door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four electric wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 422c of this door frame upper left side decorative board 422 receives a command addressed to that address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can make the four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups emit light with the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

The door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, with the right side formed unevenly. On the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, multiple first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 423b are mounted two by two, vertically lined up between the first LEDs 423a. In addition, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is equipped with a 24-bit LED driver 423c with a unique address for illuminating the first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b.

This door frame lower left side decorative board 423 is equipped with a total of 18 full color LEDs, including six first LEDs 423a and twelve second LEDs 423b. The first LED 423a, which has second LEDs 423b on both the top and bottom, is located in the center (the center between) of the second LEDs 423b. At least the second LEDs 423b are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can irradiate light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Fig. 72, in the door frame lower left side decorative board 423, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three groups, two in each group from the top. The twelve second LEDs 423b are divided into four groups: the first to third three from the top, the fourth to sixth three from the top, the seventh to ninth three from the top, and the tenth to twelfth three from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and controls the three groups of six first LEDs 423a and the four groups of twelve second LEDs 423b with three systems per group, for a total of 21 systems, so that they can each emit full color.

Although not shown, this door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four electric wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 423c of this door frame left side lower decorative board 423 receives a command addressed to that address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can make the six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups emit light with the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

The upper left side reflector 424 has a through hole 424a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, and a cylindrical retaining tube 424b that extends from front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 422a. The upper left side reflector 424 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 424a abuts against the front surface of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, and the periphery of the front side of the through hole 424a is formed in a dish shape that widens toward the front. This allows the light from the second LED 422b to be diffused widely forward.

The retaining tube 424b of the upper left side reflector 424 holds the cylindrical light guide shaft 427a of the upper left side light guide member 427 described later in a straight line in the front-rear direction. This retaining tube 424b is provided in the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft 427a of the upper left side light guide member 427 that protrudes forward through the retaining tube 424b, the light from the second LED 422b of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame that is exposed from the through holes 424a on both the top and bottom sides is irradiated with an equal amount of light from both the top and bottom sides to the light guide shaft 427a, thereby preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft 427a from being cast on the back side of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame.

The upper left side reflector 424 also has a mounting hole in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a for mounting to the left side door frame base 421. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from being projected onto the back side of the left side door frame decorative body 426.

The left side lower reflector 425 has a through hole 425a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and a cylindrical retaining tube 425b that extends from front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 423a. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 425a abuts against the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the periphery of the front side of the through hole 425a is formed in a dish shape that widens toward the front. This allows the light from the second LED 423b to be diffused widely forward.

The retaining tube 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425 is inserted with the cylindrical light guide shaft 428a of the left-side middle light guide member 428 and the cylindrical light guide shaft 429a of the left-side lower light guide member 429, which will be described later, to hold the light guide shaft 428a and the light guide shaft 429a straight in the front-rear direction. This retaining tube 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, which protrude forward through the retaining tube 425b, the light from the second LED 423b of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 facing through the through holes 425a on both the top and bottom sides is irradiated with an equal amount of light from both the top and bottom sides onto the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a, preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from being cast on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The lower left side reflector 425 also has a mounting hole in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a for mounting to the left side door frame base 421. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from being projected onto the back side of the left side door frame decorative body 426.

The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a milky white color with translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a shape in which a semicircular arc bulges forward and extends up and down. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a semitubular shape that is open to the rear. This door frame left side decorative body 426 has multiple openings 426a that penetrate from front to back at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The multiple openings 426a are provided at positions corresponding to the retaining tube 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the retaining tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. The respective tips of the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are inserted from the rear into these openings 426a. This door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed from a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. In addition, the door frame left side decorative body 426 further has a decorative part 426b that is recessed in an arc shape to avoid the multiple openings 426a and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction.

The left-side upper light guide member 427 has four cylindrical light guide shafts 427a extending forward and backward, and a runner portion 427b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shafts 427a, and is made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 427a are provided at regular intervals up and down to correspond to the four retaining tubes 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424. The light guide shafts 427a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 424b. Each light guide shaft 427a penetrates the retaining tube 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip surface is in a state of being aligned with the surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. This left side upper light guide member 427 can guide light from the first LED 422a on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 forward using the light guide shaft 427a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 to be brightly illuminated.

The left side center light guide member 428 has three cylindrical light guide shafts 428a extending forward and backward, and a runner portion 428b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shafts 428a, and is made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 428a are provided at regular intervals up and down to correspond to the upper three retaining tubes 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. In addition, the light guide shafts 428a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately the same as the inner diameter of the retaining tube 425b. Each light guide shaft 428a penetrates the retaining tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip surface is in a state of being aligned with the surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. This left side center light guide member 428 can guide light from the first LED 423a on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 forward using the light guide shaft 428a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 to be brightly illuminated.

The left-side lower light guide member 429 has three cylindrical light guide shafts 429a extending forward and backward, and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shafts 429a, and is made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 429a are provided at regular intervals above and below to correspond to the three retaining tubes 425b on the lower side of the left-side lower reflector 425. The light guide shafts 429a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 425b. Each light guide shaft 429a penetrates the retaining tube 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip surface is in a state of being flush with the surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. This left-side lower light-guiding member 429 can guide light from the first LED 423a on the left-side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame forward through the light-guiding shaft 429a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 426a of the left-side door frame decorative body 426 to be brightly illuminated.

In this embodiment, the door frame left side unit 420 has the circular or radial patterned parts of the door frame left side base 421 formed in the same color as the circular or radial patterned parts of the handle cover 295, and the parts outside the circular or radial pattern of the door frame left side base 421 formed in the same color as the parts outside the circular or radial pattern of the handle cover 295.

In this embodiment, the portion of the door frame left side unit 420 above the center in the vertical direction protrudes slightly forward more than the portion below, and the lower end is gently curved to the right. The upper end of this door frame left side unit 420 is located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and the lower end is located below the door window 101a and above the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. The upper part of the door frame left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, making it look like a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded in it.

According to the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are provided at a position some distance behind the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted thereon is sufficiently spread out and is irradiated onto the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426, allowing the door frame left side decorative body 426 to be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

In addition, the light from the first LED 422a on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame and the first LED 423a on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, which are located away from the front surface of the left side decorative body 426 toward the rear, can be guided (guided) forward by the light guiding shaft 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, the light guiding shaft 428a of the middle left side light guiding member 428, and the light guiding shaft 429a of the lower left side light guiding member 429, so that the opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame can be illuminated in a spot-like manner more brightly than other areas.

In addition, the first LED 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the light guiding shaft portion 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, the light guiding shaft portion 428a of the middle left side light guiding member 428 and the light guiding shaft portion 429a of the lower left side light guiding member 429 are arranged in the center between two adjacent second LEDs 422b and second LEDs 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with an even amount of light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b on both sides, so even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected from behind onto the door frame left side decorative body 426, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be illuminated and decorated in an even, planar manner.

Furthermore, the door frame left side decorative body 426 has a decorative part 426b that extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the multiple openings 426a. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft parts 427a, 428a, and 429a are projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b, the shadows of the light guide shaft parts 427a, 428a, and 429a can be made less noticeable because the decorative part 426b is located at the location where the shadows are projected, and the appearance of the luminous decoration of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 66 to 70. Figure 66(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. Figure 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and Figure 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. Figure 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-E in Figure 66(a). Figure 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along line O-O in Figure 66(a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the play area 5a when viewed from the front.

The right-side door frame unit 430 includes a right-side door frame base 431 attached to the right outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, an upper right-side door frame decorative board 432 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the right-side door frame base 431 and having a plurality of first LEDs 432a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, a lower right-side door frame decorative board 433 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the right-side door frame base 431 and having a plurality of first LEDs 433a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, a right-side door frame reflector 434 attached to the right-side door frame base 431 so as to cover the front sides of the upper right-side door frame decorative board 432 and the lower right-side door frame decorative board 433, and a right-side door frame decorative body 435 attached to the right-side door frame base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right-side door frame reflector 434.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 is equipped with an upper right side light guiding member 436 that guides light forward from the first LED 423a on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, and a lower right side light guiding member 437 that guides light forward from the first LED 433a on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 is provided with a door frame right side left side decorative body 438 that is attached to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 431 and has multiple decorative holes 438a that penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape, a right side left lens 439 that is provided between the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side base 431 and has a translucent decorative part 439a that is fitted to close the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, a door frame right side right side decorative body 440 that is attached to cover the right side of the door frame right side base 431 and has multiple decorative holes 440a that penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape, and a right side right lens 441 that is provided between the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the door frame right side base 431 and has a translucent decorative part 441a that is fitted to close the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440.

The door frame right side base 431 extends vertically with a generally constant width on both sides. The rear end of the door frame right side base 431 extends vertically over its entire height, and the front end extends downward from the top end in a generally straight line to near the center in the vertical direction, where it curves rearward and extends diagonally backward, then curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the bottom end.

The door frame right side base 431 has a number of reflector parts 431a recessed from the left and right side surfaces and extending forward to the front end at the height where the decorative hole 438a on the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the decorative hole 440a on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame (decorative part 439a on the right side left lens 439 and decorative part 441a on the right side right lens 441) are provided. These reflector parts 431a have their rear ends inclined toward the side surfaces, which are inside the decorative parts 439a and 441a, and their bottom surfaces are curved.

The door frame right side base 431 has a reflector portion 431a that corresponds to the decorative hole 438a and decorative hole 440a (decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441) provided rearward of the center in the fore-and-aft direction in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and the front portion excluding the portion inside the decorative portion 439a and decorative portion 441a penetrates in the left-right direction (it is recessed from the left and right side surfaces and connected to each other).

These reflector parts 431a of the door frame right side base 431 reflect the light irradiated rearward from the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, described below, in the left and right directions, causing the decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441 to emit light and be decorated (see Figure 70, etc.).

The door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, multiple first LEDs 432a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 432b are mounted two by two between the first LEDs 432a. In addition, on the rear surface of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, multiple third LEDs 432c are mounted at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for illuminating the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, and third LED 432c.

This door frame upper right side decorative board 432 is equipped with a total of 16 full-color LEDs: four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c. The first LED 432a, which has second LEDs 432b on both the top and bottom, is located in the center (the center between) the second LEDs 432b. At least the second LED 432b and third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can irradiate light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the decorative board 432 on the upper right side of the door frame, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the top two and the remaining two. The eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets, the top two, the three from the third to fifth from the top, and the three from the sixth to eighth from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the top two and the remaining two.

The door frame upper right side decorative board 432 is divided into two sets of first LEDs 432a, three sets of second LEDs 432b, and two sets of third LEDs 432c, so that each of the first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c is illuminated in full color, for a total of 21 systems, with three systems per set. In contrast, the LED driver 432d of the door frame upper right side decorative board 432 can control up to 24 systems, so in addition to the 21 systems mentioned above, it controls a total of 24 systems, including the upper set of three third LEDs 433c, which are divided into two sets on the door frame lower right side decorative board 433, which will be described later.

Although not shown in the figure, a wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected to this decorative board 432 on the upper right side of the door frame. The wiring cable consists of two power lines (one of which is an earth wire) that supply power to drive the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, the two third LEDs 433c on the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, and the LED driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 432d of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to that address via a control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board), it can, in response to that command, cause the four first LEDs 432a divided into two groups, the eight second LEDs 432b divided into three groups, the four third LEDs 432c divided into two groups, and the two third LEDs 433c in the upper group of the two groups on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame to emit light of the appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, multiple first LEDs 433a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 433b are mounted two by two between the first LEDs 433a. In addition, on the rear surface of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, multiple third LEDs 433c are mounted at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for illuminating the first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and third LED 433c.

This door frame lower right side decorative board 433 is equipped with a total of 22 full-color LEDs: six first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and four third LEDs 433c. The first LED 433a, which has second LEDs 433b on both the top and bottom, is located in the center (the center between) the second LEDs 433b. At least the second LED 433b and third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can irradiate light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the door frame right lower decorative board 433, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three groups, with two in each group starting from the top. The twelve second LEDs 433b are divided into four groups: the first to third LEDs from the top, three from the fourth to sixth LEDs from the top, three from the seventh to ninth LEDs from the top, and three from the tenth to twelfth LEDs from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two groups, the top two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into three sets of the first LED 433a, four sets of the second LED 433b, and two sets of the third LED 433c, so that each of the first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and third LED 433c is illuminated in full color, for a total of 27 systems, with three systems per set. In contrast, the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 can only control a maximum of 24 systems, so in the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the upper set of three systems of the third LED 433c, which is divided into two sets, is controlled by the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the front first LED 433a and second LED 433b, and the lower two of the rear third LED 433c) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. This helps prevent an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although not shown, this door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four electric wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the two lower third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the LED driver 433d of this door frame right side lower decorative board 433 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can make the six first LEDs 433a divided into three groups, the twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four groups, and the two third LEDs 433c in the lower group of the two groups emit light with appropriate colors and intensities for each group in response to the command.

The right side reflector 434 has a through hole 434a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 432b of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the second LED 433b of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and has a cylindrical retaining tube 434b that extends from front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 434a abuts against the front of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and the periphery of the front side of the through hole 434a is formed in a dish shape that widens toward the front. This allows the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b to be diffused widely forward.

The holding tube 434b of the right side reflector 434 holds the light guide shaft 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 (described later) straight in the front-rear direction by inserting them. This holding tube 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a that protrude forward through the retaining tube 434b, the light from the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the second LED 433b of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 that are exposed through the through holes 434a on both the top and bottom sides is irradiated with an equal amount of light from both the top and bottom sides onto the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from being cast on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The right side reflector 434 also has a mounting hole in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a for mounting to the door frame right side base 431. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from being projected onto the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a milky white color with translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a shape in which a semicircular arc bulges forward and extends up and down. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. This door frame right side decorative body 435 has multiple openings 435a that penetrate forward and backward at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The multiple openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the retaining tube 434b of the right side reflector 434. The respective tips of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted from the rear into these openings 435a. This door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed of a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decorative body 426. In addition, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further has a decorative part 435b that is recessed in a circular arc shape to avoid the multiple openings 435a and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction.

The right-side upper light guide member 436 has four cylindrical light guide shafts 436a extending forward and backward, and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shafts 436a, and is made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 436a are provided at regular intervals from the top of the right-side reflector 434 to correspond to the four retaining tubes 434b. The light guide shafts 436a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tube 434b. Each light guide shaft 436a penetrates the retaining tube 434b of the right-side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right-side decorative body 435, so that the tip surface is in a state of being flush with the surface of the door frame right-side decorative body 435. This right-side upper light-guiding member 436 can guide light from the first LED 432a on the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 forward through the light-guiding shaft 436a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 435a of the door frame right-side decorative body 435 to be brightly illuminated.

The right side lower light guide member 437 has six cylindrical light guide shafts 437a extending forward and backward, and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shafts 437a, and is made of a transparent material. The six light guide shafts 437a are provided at regular intervals from the bottom of the right side reflector 434 to correspond to the six retaining tubes 434b. The light guide shafts 437a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 434b. Each light guide shaft 437a penetrates the retaining tube 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435, so that the tip surface is in a state of being flush with the surface of the door frame right side decoration 435. This right-side lower light-guiding member 437 can guide light from the first LED 433a on the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433 forward through the light-guiding shaft 437a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 435a of the door frame right-side decorative body 435 to be brightly illuminated.

The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has multiple decorative holes 438a penetrating in the left-right direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a shape whose front end side follows the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is two-color molded with synthetic resins of different colors and translucency (light transmittance). In detail, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is two-color molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, like the above-mentioned handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421, and a circular or radial pattern is formed by a part of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. In other words, part of the circular and radial patterns that appear on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71 (a)). When molding the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right-side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right) surface of the door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438, and has a decorative part 439a that protrudes to the left and fits into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 from the inside (right side). When fitted into the decorative hole 438a, the surface of the decorative part 439a matches the outer (left) surface of the door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 (see Figure 70). This right-side left lens 439 is formed from a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438. The decorative part 439a of the right-side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector part 431a in the door frame right-side base 431, and can be illuminated and decorated with light from the third LED 432c of the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433.

The right side left lens 439 is also formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative part 439a exposed through the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 looks the same as the part with the radial pattern molded in two colors on the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, making it difficult to distinguish from the part of the decorative part 439a that is illuminated and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has multiple decorative holes 440a that penetrate in the left-right direction in a specific shape (radial pattern shape). The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame also has a cylinder insertion opening 440b into which a cylindrical part having a keyhole 132 at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed so that the vertical direction is approximately the same as the overall height of the door frame 3. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is also formed so that the front end side from the top end to the cylinder insertion opening 440b is shaped to follow the rear end of the right side decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame.

The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). In detail, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and a circular or radial pattern is formed by a part of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. In other words, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71 (a)). When molding the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right lens 441 on the right side is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, and has a decorative part 441a that protrudes to the right and fits into the decorative hole 440a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame from the inside (left side). When fitted into the decorative hole 440a, the surface of the decorative part 441a matches the outer (right) surface of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame (see Figure 70). This right lens 441 on the right side is made of a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. The decorative portion 441a of the right lens 441 on the right side of the right door frame is located to the right of the reflector portion 431a on the right side base 431 of the door frame, and can be illuminated and decorated with light from the third LED 432c on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the third LED 433c on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame.

The right lens 441 on the right side is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative part 441a exposed through the decorative hole 440a on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame looks the same as the part with the radial pattern molded in two colors on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, making it difficult to distinguish from the part of the decorative part 441a that is illuminated and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In this embodiment, the door frame right side unit 430 has the circular or radial patterned parts on the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame formed in the same color as the circular or radial patterned parts on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame, and the outer parts of the circular or radial pattern on the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame are formed in the same color as the outer parts of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame.

In this embodiment, the portion of the right door frame unit 430 above the vertical center protrudes further forward than the portion of the left door frame unit 420 on the opposite side at the same height. This right door frame unit 430 is formed at approximately the same height as the door frame 3 from its top to its bottom. The upper portion of the right door frame unit 430 is located on the outer right side of the door frame top unit 450.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 430 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 appears to have a cylindrical fluorescent lamp embedded in it.

The door frame right side unit 430 protrudes forward from the top to about half its height, forming a screen. This makes it difficult for players seated in front of the pachinko machine installed adjacent to the right side of the island equipment in the gaming hall to see inside the door window 101a (play area 5a). Therefore, because the door frame right side unit 430 is formed like a screen, it can block the line of sight of players located nearby, making it difficult for other players to see the entire play area 5a, and by making it difficult for players to feel like they are being watched by other players, other players can play without feeling embarrassed.

According to the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are provided at a position some distance behind the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435, so that the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted thereon is sufficiently spread out and is irradiated onto the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435, allowing the door frame right side decorative body 435 to be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

The door frame right side unit 430 also guides (guides) light forward from the first LED 432a on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame and the first LED 433a on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, which are located away from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435 toward the rear, by the light guiding shaft portion 436a of the upper right side light guiding member 436 and the light guiding shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guiding member 437, allowing the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 to emit light in a spot-like manner that is brighter than other areas.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 can illuminate the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and can illuminate and decorate the decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 fitted in the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441 fitted in the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 through the reflector part 431a of the door frame right side base 431. In addition, since it is possible to illuminate and decorate a part of the left and right sides of the screen-shaped door frame right side unit 430 (the parts of the decorative part 439a and the decorative part 441a), it is possible to make the present pachinko machine 1 stand out to other players, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the front side of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 435 at the front end side, and the third LED 432c on the rear side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c on the rear side of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 illuminate and decorate the door frame right side left side decorative body 435 behind the door frame right side decorative body 435. 8 and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame are illuminated, so that the presence of the upper decoration board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decoration board 433 on the right side of the door frame can prevent the light from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b from illuminating the left side decoration 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame on the rear side, and from illuminating the right side decoration 435 on the front side of the door frame. This allows the right side decoration 435 of the door frame and the left side decoration 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame on the rear side to be illuminated and decorated completely independently, so that a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that can present a more effective illumination performance to the player.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 has the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, located in the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 432b and second LEDs 433b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are irradiated with an equal amount of light from the second LEDs 432b and second LEDs 433b on both sides, so that even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portions 436a and 437a are projected from behind onto the door frame right side decorative body 435, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be illuminated and decorated in a planar manner without unevenness.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 is configured so that the door frame right side decorative body 435 has a decorative part 435b that extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the multiple openings 435a. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft parts 436a and 437a are projected onto the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b, the shadows of the light guide shaft parts 436a and 437a can be made less noticeable because the decorative part 435b is located at the location where the shadows are projected, and the appearance of the luminous decoration of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be improved.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper portions of the left and right side units 420, 430.

The door frame top unit 450 comprises a door frame top base 451 that is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a top upper cover 452 that is attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both the left and right sides and the upper front surface of the door frame top base 451, a door frame top decorative body 453 that is attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) that connects the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 to the lower end of the door frame top base 451.

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a door frame top central decorative board 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface, a door frame top left decorative board 456 that is attached to the left of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top right decorative board 457 that is attached to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (see Figure 72).

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front of the door frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers (not shown) provided on both the left and right outer sides of the pair of top center speakers, a top lower cover 465 attached to the underside of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top center speaker and the top side speaker, a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end of the front of the door frame top base 451, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451.

The door frame top base 451 extends left and right with a length that is approximately the same as the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top upper cover 452 protrudes forward in a semicircular arc shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is cut out significantly from the rear end toward the front. This opening 452a is closed by the door frame top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color with translucency. In a plan view, the door frame top decorative body 453 extends left and right in a semicircular arc shape along the front end of the top upper cover 452. The door frame top decorative body 453 is also formed with a semicircular arc on the front side so that the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top central decorative board 455 has multiple LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface, which are full-color LEDs. This door frame top central decorative board 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 455a.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top left decorative board 456 has multiple LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface, which are full-color LEDs. This door frame top left decorative board 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 456a.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top right decorative board 457 has multiple LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface, which are full-color LEDs. This door frame top right decorative board 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 457a.

The pair of top center speakers are spaced apart on the left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers that output sounds such as voice and music over a wide frequency range. The pair of top side speakers are tweeters that output high-frequency sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of a punched metal plate with numerous through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker and top side speakers is emitted forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board is intended to relay the connection between the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, the top center speaker, and the top side speaker and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top upper cover 452, and its front end is engaged with the top upper cover 452 while its rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The door frame top unit 450 is connected so that both the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 sink from the front to a position rearward of the inside of the upper part of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame top unit 450 can also output sounds such as voice and music to the player through a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 28 and Figure 71. Figure 71(a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the two-color molded outer layer of the door frame in an opaque state, and (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the outer layer in a transparent state while leaving the inner layer as it is in (a). As shown in the figures, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically in the center when viewed from the front, which is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160. The door frame 3 has its outer periphery surrounded by the left dish decorative body 271 and right dish decorative body 276 of the dish unit 200, the unit top cover 312 and button body 351 of the performance operation unit 300, the left door frame decorative body 426 of the left door frame side unit 420, the right door frame decorative body 435 of the right door frame side unit 430, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

The left dish decoration 271, right dish decoration 276, left door frame decoration 426, right door frame decoration 435, and top door frame decoration 453, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, are formed in a semi-tubular shape, allowing the player to see a decoration that looks as if the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, the left dish decorative board 273, the right dish decorative board 278, the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320, the upper left door frame decorative board 422 and the lower left door frame decorative board 423, the upper right door frame decorative board 432 and the lower right door frame decorative board 433, the central door frame top decorative board 455, the top left door frame decorative board 456, and the top right door frame decorative board 457 are arranged behind or below the left dish decorative body 271, the right dish decorative body 276, the unit top cover 312, the left door frame decorative body 426, the right door frame decorative body 435, and the top door frame decorative body 453, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs of these decorative boards, it is possible to illuminate the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a, or to show the player an illuminated performance as light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

A spherical performance operation unit 300 with a diameter larger than the front-to-back distance of the upper tray 201 is attached to the left-right center of the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3. This increases the visual impact of the large spherical performance operation unit 300 being located in the center of the tray unit 200, and makes the performance operation section 301 (touch operation section 302 and pressing operation section 303) of the performance operation unit 300 stand out.

In addition, in the normal state, the top surface of the button body 351 serving as the performance operation unit 301 is flush with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to form a single sphere, making it difficult for the player to recognize that the performance operation unit 301 (button body 351) is operable, and the performance operation unit 300 consisting of a giant sphere allows the player to recognize at a glance that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines, strongly attracting the player's interest and increasing the appeal to the player, making it easier for the player to select this pachinko machine 1 as the machine to play.

In addition, in the dish unit 200, the center (centre) of the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 is positioned forward of the apex of the spherical performance operation unit 300, so that the top surface of the performance operation section 301 (the touch operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303) faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, for a player who recognizes that the giant sphere located in the center of the dish unit 200 is the performance operation section 301, the entirety of the performance operation section 301 can be easily seen, making the performance operation section 301 appear larger. In addition, the player can be made to strongly desire to operate the giant spherical presentation operation unit 301, which can heighten the player's anticipation for the execution of a player-participation type presentation in which the player operates the presentation operation unit 301, and when a player-participation type presentation is executed, the player can be made to actively operate the presentation operation unit 301, which can allow the player to enjoy the player-participation type presentation by operating the presentation operation unit 301, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

Next, as shown in Figures 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 in this embodiment has multiple circular and radial patterns on its outer surface. In Figure 71, the door frame right side unit 430 is shown as an example of part of the exterior of the door frame 3.

More specifically, the multiple circular and radial patterns on the exterior surface of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding using two types of synthetic resin with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is two-color molded using two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and the circular and radial patterns are formed by part of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface.

For example, taking the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in Figure 71 (a), if a honeycomb pattern is applied to the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, the honeycomb pattern of the inner layer 3a will be visible in the circular pattern areas, and the opaque outer layer 3b will be visible in areas other than the pattern, resulting in an exterior appearance that emphasizes the circular and radial patterns.

In contrast, as shown in Figure 71 (b), if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb pattern applied to the inner layer 3a becomes visible through the outer layer 3b, and the circular and radial patterns become relatively difficult to see. In other words, the exterior has an appearance in which the honeycomb pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

In FIG. 71, the decorative part 441a fitted into the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, which is molded in two colors as part of the exterior, is a separate member from the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 as part of the right side right lens 441, so even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative part 441a) does not change.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the main components that make up the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, so by appropriately selecting and combining the colors and light transmittance of the materials (synthetic resins) used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, the appearance can be greatly changed without changing the shape.

Therefore, for example, when making minor changes, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed at no cost by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a is visible.

Alternatively, the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b can be changed for each production lot, and different lots of pachinko machines 1 can be shipped to the same game hall and installed in the island equipment, giving them a colorful feel and increasing their appeal to players.

In the above embodiment, two-color molding is shown, but this is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may also be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, a two-color molded right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is combined with a right lens 441 on the right side to form the exterior, but three-color molding may be used in which the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame and the right lens 441 on the right side are integrally formed.

In addition, in the above embodiment, circular and radial patterns are shown, but this is not limited to this and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

In this way, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the decorative bodies such as the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, which are provided on the outside of the door window 101a through which the play area 5a in the door frame 3 faces forward, are two-color molded (multi-color molded) using two synthetic resins with different light transmittances, and the polka dot decoration is applied by this two-color molding. Therefore, the decorative body is formed into the desired shape and the desired decoration is applied to the decorative body at the same time, so there is no need to form the decorative body into the desired shape and then apply the desired decoration by painting, etc., as with the decorative bodies of conventional pachinko machines, and this eliminates the effort required for decoration and suppresses increases in costs.

In addition, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (outer appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. In detail, when forming a polka dot decoration by two-color molding, if the inner layer 3a constituting the inside of the polka dot circle and the outer layer 3b constituting the outside of the circle are formed with the same color but with different light transmittance, the polka dot circle becomes difficult to see because the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are the same color, and the appearance looks as if the polka dot decoration is not applied. On the other hand, if the inner layer 3a constituting the inside of the polka dot circle is white and the outer layer 3b constituting the outside of the circle is pink, the polka dot circle becomes clearly visible due to the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and the appearance looks like a white polka dot decoration on a pink background. In this way, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used when forming the decorative body, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed, and the cost of changing the appearance can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, when forming the decorative body, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used. Therefore, if the combination of synthetic resins used is changed for each production lot and different lots of this pachinko machine 1 are shipped to the same gaming hall and installed in a row in the island equipment, the island equipment can be made to have a colorful feel, which can make a strong impact on players wandering around the gaming hall, and a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can attract players can be provided.

Furthermore, the handle cover 295, which has decorations molded in two colors from multiple synthetic resins with different light transmittances, the left side base 421 of the door frame, the left side decoration 438 on the right side of the door frame, and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame are provided on the outer side of the door window 101a, which faces forward into the play area 5a of the door frame 3, so that the outside of the door window 101a can be decorated with these decorations to improve its appearance.

In addition, the outer layer 3b of the two-color molded decorative body is made of a synthetic resin with a lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, making it difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. In comparison, the boundaries of the decoration (polka dot pattern) made up of the inner layer 3a become clearly visible, making the decoration clearly visible.

In addition, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. Therefore, in the initial model, the outer layer 3b has a low light transmittance so that the inner layer 3a cannot be seen through from the outside, and when changing the model, a synthetic resin with a high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through, which can greatly change the way the decoration of the decorative body is viewed, and the appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without changing the shape of the decorative body.

As described above, the outer layer 3b has a low light transmittance, making it difficult to see the inner layer 3a. Therefore, a pattern (a pattern based on the shape, or a pattern based on painting, printing, sticker application, etc.) can be applied to the surface of the inner layer 3a. In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b has a low light transmittance, making it impossible for the pattern of the inner layer 3a to be seen through the outer layer 3b. When a model change is made, a transparent synthetic resin can be used for the outer layer 3b, allowing the pattern of the inner layer 3a to be seen through. This allows the appearance (decoration) of the decorative body to be significantly changed without changing the shape of the decorative body, and prevents increases in costs associated with model changes.

Furthermore, the third LED 432c on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the third LED 433c on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame that can emit light are provided on the inside of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, and the inner layer 3a is formed of a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the others, so that the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided on the inside of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame are illuminated. This allows the inner layer 3a (polka dot area) of the decorations formed on the surface of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame to be brightly illuminated, and by illuminating the outside of the door window 101a overlooking the play area 5a, it is possible to improve the appearance and allow the player to enjoy the illuminated decorations of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, preventing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the outer layer 3b can also be illuminated and decorated by the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c that is irradiated onto the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a, so that the entire left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame can be illuminated and decorated, making the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame look beautiful and creating a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of players.

As described above, the decorations of the left side decoration 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame are formed by two-color molding (multicolor molding) of multiple synthetic resins with different light transmittances, so that the decorations visible when the LEDs (light-emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c are not lit can be made different from the decorations visible when the LEDs are lit, depending on the number of layers to the surface and the difference in light transmittance of the synthetic resins used, and the change in decoration can strongly attract the interest of the player. In more detail, for example, if a hole of a predetermined shape is formed in the part of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, only the part exposed to the surface of the inner layer 3a can be seen when the LEDs are not lit. On the other hand, when the LED is illuminated, the light from the LED is directly irradiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion where the hole is formed in the inner layer 3a, so that the shape of the hole in the inner layer 3a is visible on the surface of the outer layer 3b, and the portion exposed on the surface of the inner layer 3a and the portion of the hole are visible, and a different decoration is seen when the LED is not illuminated. Alternatively, for example, if the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED is illuminated in yellow, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is illuminated. On the other hand, when the LED is illuminated in green (or white), both the portion of the inner layer 3a and the portion of the outer layer 3b on the surface are illuminated, so that the color of the light emitted by the LED can change the portion of the decorative body that is illuminated and the decoration that is illuminated can be changed. In this way, the decoration of the decorative body can be changed by the illumination of the LED, which strongly attracts the interest of the player and entertains the player. Furthermore, by making the LEDs light up depending on the game status, the changes in the decoration of the ornamental body can suggest to the player the arrival of an opportunity or a change in the hitting operation (for example, "hit to the right"), etc., providing a pachinko machine 1 capable of a variety of presentations.

In addition, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, which are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (play area 5a), have different amounts of protrusion in the front-to-rear direction, so that the impression (appearance) of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front left and the front right can be made to differ. Therefore, even if a player wanders around the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed passes in front of the pachinko machine 1, when he approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the other side, the appearance will be different from when he last wandered around, attracting the interest of the pachinko machine 1. This makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing, capable of attracting players wandering around the game hall to choose a pachinko machine 1 to play.

[3-10. LED placement and system on door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 72 and 73. Fig. 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and Fig. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board of the part of the performance operation unit of the door frame. As shown in Fig. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, which the player rotates to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5. This handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b extending outward from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b, and has an appearance similar to that of a steering wheel of an automobile.

The front side of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 is covered by the handle front lens 185, and a handle decoration board 184 with multiple LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface is provided between the handle front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. In addition, a handle cover decoration board 293 with multiple LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface is provided behind the outer circumferential ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

The handle decoration board 184 has a total of 10 LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) mounted in triple concentric circles: one in the center, three at regular intervals around the circumference in the middle, and six at regular intervals around the outer periphery. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle connected by dashed lines in FIG. 72, and two at the top left of the outer periphery, two at the top right of the outer periphery, and two at the bottom of the outer periphery, all connected by dashed lines. These five groups of LEDs 184a are controlled by an LED driver 184b in 15 systems, and each group of LEDs 184a can emit full color light of the appropriate color.

On the other hand, 12 LEDs 293a are arranged in a row on the handle cover decorative board 293 with intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into six groups from the center, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72, with two at the bottom left, two on the left, two at the top left, two at the top right, two on the right, and two at the bottom right. These six groups of LEDs 293a are controlled by an LED driver 293b in 18 systems, and each group of LEDs 293a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

In this way, because the handle 195 is provided with the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293, the player can see light-emitting effects such as light rotating around the handle 195, light-emitting effects concentrating toward the center of the handle 195, and light-emitting effects spreading toward the outside of the handle 195. In addition, the LEDs 293a of the handle cover decoration board 293 can be used to light up and decorate the outside and inside of the handle cover 295.

As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a generally rectangular door window 101a extending vertically in the center when viewed from the front, which is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160. The door frame 3 has the door window 101a surrounded on its entire periphery by the left dish decorative body 271 and right dish decorative body 276 of the dish unit 200, the performance operation unit 300, the left door frame decorative body 426 of the left door frame unit 420, the right door frame decorative body 435 of the right door frame unit 430, and the top door frame decorative body 453 of the top door frame unit 450.

The left dish decoration 271, right dish decoration 276, left door frame decoration 426, right door frame decoration 435, and top door frame decoration 453, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, are formed in a semi-tubular shape, allowing the player to see a decoration that looks as if the door window 101a is surrounded almost entirely by fluorescent lights.

As shown in Figure 72, in this door frame 3, the left decorative board 273 behind the left decorative body 271 that surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the right decorative board 278 behind the right decorative body 276, the upper left decorative board 422 and the lower left decorative board 423 behind the left side decorative body 426, the upper right decorative board 432 and the lower right decorative board 433 behind the right side decorative body 435, the central door frame top decorative board 455, the top left decorative board 456 and the top right decorative board 457 behind the top decorative body 453 are arranged facing forward.

In more detail, the left dish decorative board 273 is equipped with four LEDs 273a mounted on the front in a row in the left-right direction, and an LED driver (not shown) for illuminating the LEDs 273a and the LEDs 273a on the right dish decorative board 278 described below. These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a dashed line in Figure 72. These two sets of LEDs 273a are controlled by an LED driver in six systems, and each set of LEDs 273a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The right plate decorative board 278 is equipped with four LEDs 278a mounted on the front in a row running left to right. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by the dashed line in Figure 72. These two sets of LEDs 278a are controlled by the LED driver of the left plate decorative board 273 in six systems, and each set of LEDs 278a can emit light in the full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is equipped with four first LEDs 422a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, eight second LEDs 422b mounted in pairs vertically between the first LEDs 422a, and an LED driver 422c for illuminating the total of 12 first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a on the door frame upper left side decorative board 422 are divided into two sets of the top two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets of the top two, the three from the third to the fifth from the top, and the three from the sixth to the eighth from the top, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. 72. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled by an LED driver 422c in 15 systems, and each group of the first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is equipped with six first LEDs 423a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, twelve second LEDs 423b mounted in pairs between the first LEDs 423a, and an LED driver 423c for emitting light from a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b. The first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted on the front. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three groups, two in each group from the top, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. The twelve second LEDs 423b are divided into four groups, three from the first to third from the top, three from the fourth to sixth from the top, three from the seventh to ninth from the top, and three from the tenth to twelfth from the top, as shown by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 72. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups are controlled by an LED driver 423c in 21 systems, and the first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b of each group can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is equipped with four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, eight second LEDs 432b mounted on the front surface in a row between the first LEDs 432a, and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. The door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is also equipped with an LED driver 432d for emitting light from a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c, and two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. The eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three groups, the top two, the third to fifth, and the sixth to eighth, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 72. The four third LEDs 432c are divided into two groups, the top two and the remaining two, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 72. The two groups of first LEDs 432a, the three groups of second LEDs 432b, the two groups of third LEDs 432c, and the upper group of the two groups of third LEDs 433c on the lower right side of the door frame are controlled by the LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and each group of first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, third LEDs 432c, and third LEDs 433c can emit light in a full color of an appropriate color.

The door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is equipped with six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, twelve second LEDs 433b mounted on the front surface in pairs vertically aligned between the first LEDs 433a, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, and an LED driver 433d for illuminating the first LEDs 433a, the second LEDs 433b, and the two lower third LEDs 433c. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three groups, with two in each group starting from the top, as connected by a two-dot chain line in Figure 72. Also, the 12 second LEDs 433b are divided into 4 groups, as shown by dashed lines in FIG. 72, consisting of 3 LEDs from the top, 1st to 3rd, 3 LEDs from the top, 4th to 6th, 3 LEDs from the top, 7th to 9th, and 3 LEDs from the top, 10th to 12th. Furthermore, the 4 rear third LEDs 433c are divided into 2 groups, consisting of the top 2 LEDs and the remaining 2 LEDs, as shown by dashed lines in FIG. 72. The 3 groups of 6 first LEDs 433a, the 4 groups of 12 second LEDs 433b, and the lower group of 2 third LEDs 433c are controlled by the LED driver 433d in 24 systems, and the first LEDs 433a, second LEDs 433b, and third LEDs 433c of each group can emit light in full color of appropriate colors.

In this embodiment, the upper left side decorative board 422 and the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the upper right side decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame provided on the right side of the door window 101a are formed in an asymmetric shape with the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction as the boundary. In addition, the upper left side decorative board 422 and the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame and the upper right side decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 have different shapes in the front-to-back direction.

The door frame upper left side decorative board 422 and lower left side decorative board 423, and the door frame upper right side decorative board 432 and lower right side decorative board 433 have the same number of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b, and first LEDs 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, second LED 433b mounted on their respective front surfaces, and are arranged symmetrically (systems connected by dashed lines and dashed double-dot lines in Figure 72). This makes it easy to create data for the lighting patterns of the LEDs to create light-emitting effects.

The door frame top center decorative board 455 is equipped with six LEDs 455a mounted on the front with spaces between them in the left-right direction, and an LED driver (not shown) for illuminating the LEDs 455a, the LEDs 456a on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the LEDs 457a on the door frame top right decorative board 457. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two from the left, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72. The six LEDs 455a divided into three groups are controlled by the LED driver in nine systems, and each group of LEDs 455a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 has four LEDs 456a mounted on the front, spaced apart in the left and right directions. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by the dashed line in Figure 72. The four LEDs 456a divided into two sets are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decorative board 455, and each set of LEDs 456a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 has four LEDs 457a mounted on the front, spaced apart in the left and right directions. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by the dashed line in Figure 72. The two sets of four LEDs 457a are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decorative board 455, and each set of LEDs 457a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

According to the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the light from the first LED 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 432a on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the first LED 433a on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is guided by the light guiding shaft portion 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, the light guiding shaft portion 428a of the middle left side light guiding member 428, the light guiding shaft portion 429a of the lower left side light guiding member 429, the light guiding shaft portion 436a of the upper right side light guiding member 436, and the light guiding shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guiding member 437 to the opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame, and is irradiated outward (forward). This allows the player to see a bright, dot-like light emission effect on the front of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435, and the player can be taken aback by the dot-like, sparkling light emission effect that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the left dish decorative board 273, the LED 278a of the right dish decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, the second LED 423b of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, the second LED 432b of the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, the second LED 433b of the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, the LED 455a of the top center decorative board 455 of the door frame, the LED 456a of the top left decorative board 456 of the door frame, and the LED 457a of the top right decorative board 457 of the door frame can be appropriately illuminated to illuminate the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a, or the player can be shown an illuminated effect as light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In other words, in the door frame 3, the LED system connected by the two-dot chain line in Figure 72 can be used to create a lighting effect that emits spot light on the front of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the LED system connected by the one-dot chain line in Figure 72 can be used to create a lighting effect in which the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit light in a planar manner (surface emission).

In addition, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided by the light guiding shaft portion 427a, the light guiding shaft portion 428a, the light guiding shaft portion 429a, the light guiding shaft portion 436a, and the light guiding shaft portion 437a to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame, and is irradiated forward from there, so that the areas of the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be illuminated with bright, high-luminance spot light compared to the general surfaces of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame. In this case, since the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are positioned outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, even if the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435 are illuminated with high brightness, the glare does not make it difficult to see inside the game area 5a facing through the door window 101a, and the game ball B, performance images, decorations, etc. in the game area 5a can be clearly seen through the door window 101a.

In addition, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are protruded forward from the door window 101a (play area 5a), and the openings 426a and 435a that emit high-intensity spot light are provided at the ridges (on the vertical line connecting the front ends that protrude forward in an arc shape in a plan view) of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 that protrude forward, so the spot light is not irradiated to the rear side (door window 101a side). Therefore, the spot light emitted from the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 is reflected toward the player by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and the inside of the play area 5a behind the door window 101a is not difficult to see, and the high-intensity spot light can attract the attention of other players to this pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, the spot light emitting portion is provided on the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435, which protrude forward outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3, so that the spot light emitting portion is located at approximately the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the player will not block the spot light because the spot light emitting portion is located outside the player. As a result, when the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are made to emit spot light, the high-brightness spot light is visible to other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, so the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, which can strongly attract the interest of players, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be highly appealing, capable of attracting players who are wandering around the game hall to choose a pachinko machine to play.

It is preferable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) on both sides of the spot LED (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for spot-illuminating the front of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 belong to the same system. As a result, the surface LEDs on both sides of the light guide pin (light guide shaft 427a, light guide shaft 428a, light guide shaft 429a, light guide shaft 436a, and light guide shaft 437a) that guides the light of the spot LEDs are in the same lighting state, so that the same amount of light is irradiated from both sides of the light guide pin at the same time, making it even more difficult to see the shadow of the light guide pin on the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the touch operation section 302 in the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300, and is equipped with a circular performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 with 31 LEDs 320a mounted on the upper surface. This performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is equipped with two LED drivers for illuminating the 31 LEDs 320a. The performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is divided into two parts, a front decorative board 321 and a rear decorative board 322.

Eighteen of the 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decorative board 321 of the outer decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit. Of the 18 LEDs 320a on the front decorative board 321, six are spaced apart on a circumference close to the inner circumference, three are spaced apart on a circumference midway between the inner and outer circumferences, and the remaining nine are spaced apart on a circumference close to the outer circumference.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decorative board 322 of the outer decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit. Of the 13 LEDs 320a on the rear decorative board 322, four are provided with twos spaced apart near both ends of the arc on a circumference close to the inner circumference, three are provided with twos spaced apart on a circumference midway between the inner and outer circumferences, and the remaining six are provided with threes spaced apart near both ends of the arc on a circumference close to the outer circumference.

The 18 LEDs 320a on the front decorative board 321 are divided into a total of nine groups, as shown by the dashed lines in Fig. 73: six on the inner circumference are divided into three groups of two in the circumferential direction, three on the middle circumference are divided into three groups of one each, and nine on the outer circumference are divided into three groups of three in the circumferential direction. The 18 LEDs 320a on the rear decorative board 322 are divided into a total of seven groups, as shown by the dashed lines in Fig. 73: four on the inner circumference are divided into two groups of two near both ends, three on the middle circumference are divided into three groups of one each, and nine on the outer circumference are divided into two groups of three near both ends. In other words, in the performance operation unit outer circumference decorative board 320, the 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 groups. These 16 groups of LEDs 320a are controlled by two LED drivers in 48 systems, and each group of LEDs 320a can emit light in the appropriate full color.

With this decorative board 320 around the outer periphery of the effect operation unit, the 31 LEDs 320a (48 systems) can be appropriately illuminated to show the player light-emitting effects such as rotating light in the effect operation unit 301, light-emitting effects where light is concentrated in the center, and light-emitting effects where light spreads outward.

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided on the outside of one side and the other side of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, which extend up and down along the door window 101a so that the amount of protrusion in the front-to-rear direction differs from each other. Behind each of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, there is a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted, a door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted, and A door frame right side upper decorative board 432 on which a number of first LEDs 432a and second LEDs 432b are mounted, and a door frame right side lower decorative board 433 on which a number of first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b are mounted are provided. In addition, a light guide shaft portion 427a of a left side upper light guide member 427, a light guide shaft portion 428a of a left side middle light guide member 428, a light guide shaft portion 429a of a left side lower light guide member 429, and a light guide shaft portion 436 of a right side upper light guide member 436 are provided, which guide the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 and irradiate it forward. 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right-side lower light guide member 437 are provided. Therefore, by illuminating the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b of the door frame left-side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left-side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433, the door frame left-side decorative body 426 and the door frame right-side decorative body 435 can be illuminated in a planar light-emitting decoration (surface illumination). 3a, when the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a are illuminated, the light irradiated forward is guided by the columnar light guiding shaft 427a, light guiding shaft 428a, light guiding shaft 429a, light guiding shaft 436a, and light guiding shaft 437a to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, and then radiated forward from their front ends (front end faces), allowing the areas corresponding to the tips of the light guiding shaft 427a, light guiding shaft 428a, light guiding shaft 429a, light guiding shaft 436a, and light guiding shaft 437a on the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 to be illuminated in a dot-like manner (spot illumination).

Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame which are provided outside the play area 5a (door window 101a) can be illuminated. The entire right side decorative body 435 can be decorated with a surface-like light emission, parts of the left side decorative body 426 and the right side decorative body 435 can be decorated with point-like light emission, or the entire left side decorative body 426 and the right side decorative body 435 can be decorated with a surface-like light emission while parts of them can be decorated with point-like light emission, allowing players to see a variety of light-emitting effects, preventing players from getting bored and keeping them entertained, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In this case, the system in which the multiple first LEDs 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, and second LED 423b of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are separated is symmetrical to the system in which the multiple first LEDs 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are separated, and the multiple first LEDs 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a and the multiple second LEDs 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b are in different systems, so that the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b on the door frame left side decorative body 426 side and the first LED 432a, second LED 423b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b on the door frame right side decorative body 435 side are in different systems. When creating data for the lighting patterns of D432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b, for example, it is possible to reuse data for the left side door frame decoration 426 as data for the right side door frame decoration 435, or to make the data flow similar for the left side door frame decoration 426 and the right side door frame decoration 435. This makes it possible to simplify the work required to create lighting pattern data, and makes it easier to build more complex lighting pattern data (with the same creation time). This allows players to see a variety of lighting patterns and a variety of lighting effects with high performance effects, and provides a pachinko machine 1 that can provide sufficient performance effects for the lighting effects in the left side door frame decoration 426 and the right side door frame decoration 435 on both the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a.

In addition, the two second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b arranged between the first LED 422a, 423a, 432a, and 433a are in the same system, so the two second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b arranged to sandwich the first LED 422a, 423a, 432a, and 433a (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a) are always lit at the same time, so that the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a are always lit at the same time. By irradiating light from both sides of the light axis portion 429a, the light guide axis portion 436a, and the light guide axis portion 437a, the shadows of the light guide axis portion 427a, the light guide axis portion 428a, the light guide axis portion 429a, the light guide axis portion 436a, and the light guide axis portion 437a caused by the light from the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b become lighter and are cancelled out, making it difficult to see the shadows of the light guide axis portion 427a, the light guide axis portion 428a, the light guide axis portion 429a, the light guide axis portion 436a, and the light guide axis portion 437a projected onto the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, and allowing the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 to be illuminated and decorated in a flat manner without unevenness.

The left door frame decoration 426 and the right door frame decoration 435, which are illuminated and decorated in a surface by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, can illuminate and decorate the areas corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a in a point-like manner by the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a. This allows players to see illumination effects that could not be seen in previous pachinko machines, such as surface illumination and partial point illumination, and can strongly attract the interest of players with illumination effects that emit bright point illumination, and can startle players with illumination effects that emit bright point illumination, which have not been seen in previous pachinko machines. This makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, the door frame upper left side decorative board 422 and lower left side decorative board 423 on one side (left side) in the left-right direction and the door frame upper right side decorative board 432 and lower right side decorative board 433 on the other side (right side) are asymmetrical in shape, so that the door frame upper left side decorative board 422, the door frame lower left side decorative board 423, the door frame upper right side decorative board 432, and the door frame lower right side decorative board 433 can be distinguished at a glance, making it possible to avoid making mistakes when assembling the door frame upper left side decorative board 422, the door frame lower left side decorative board 423, the door frame upper right side decorative board 432, and the door frame lower right side decorative board 433 during the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1, thereby improving the ease of assembly and suppressing increases in costs.

[3-11. Identification of decorative substrate]
Next, the identification of various decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted in this pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Fig. 74, using the door frame 3 as an example. Fig. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative board provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the following boards provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 are described in detail, taking as examples the left dish decorative board 273, the right dish decorative board 278, the upper left door frame decorative board 422, the lower left door frame decorative board 423, the upper right door frame decorative board 432, the lower right door frame decorative board 433, the top center door frame decorative board 455, the top left door frame decorative board 456, and the top right door frame decorative board 457.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a white board is used for the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted, and the non-white LED drivers and connection connectors that are mounted on the decorative board are mounted on the rear side of the board. This allows the light from the LEDs mounted on the front side of the decorative board to be reflected forward, making the decorations in front more brightly lit and decorative, while also making the decorative board less noticeable from the front (player's side).

The white decorative board may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the board material itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decorative boards, a different identification section 7 is provided on the rear surface of each decorative board to make it easy to identify each one (see Figure 74). This identification section 7 has a character identification section 7a with characters such as kanji, kana, alphabet, symbols, numbers, model numbers, etc., and a color identification section 7b with different colors (shown in Figure 74 with different shades of shading).

In more detail, the character identification section 7a is provided with the characters "lower left" on the left side decorative board 273, "lower right" on the right side decorative board 278, "upper left" on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, "lower left" on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, "upper right" on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, "lower right" on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, "upper middle" on the top center decorative board 455 of the door frame, "upper left" on the top left decorative board 456 of the door frame, and "upper right" on the top right decorative board 457 of the door frame.

The color identification portion 7b is a different color for each decorative board and is applied across almost the entire front surface of the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification portion 7b is applied partially, not across the entire rear surface, so as not to interfere with the soldering of LEDs and other components mounted on the decorative board.

The identification portion 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silkscreen printing), attaching a sticker, applying paint, etc.

In the above, the decorative board provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 has been described as an example, but identification units 7 such as character identification units 7a and color identification units 7b may also be provided on various decorative boards provided on the handle unit 180, the performance operation unit 300, the game board 5, etc.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the identification unit 7 is shown to have both the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b, but this is not limited to this, and it may be the character identification unit 7a only, or the color identification unit 7b only.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted is provided with an identification section 7 (character identification section 7a and color identification section 7b), so decorative boards of similar shapes can be easily distinguished, preventing the wrong decorative board from being installed during assembly work and improving the workability of assembly.

In addition, with the pachinko machine 1, the identification unit 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, so the front side of the decorative board can be made as white as possible, and the light from the LEDs mounted on the front side of the decorative board can be reflected forward by the front side of the decorative board, allowing the front decorations to be more brightly illuminated and decorated, while also making the decorative board less noticeable from the front (player's side), improving its appearance.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the color identification portion 7b as the identification portion 7 is applied over almost the entire decorative board, so that it is possible to recognize whether or not the decorative board is the desired one (desired color) just by looking at a part of the decorative board. Therefore, even if multiple types of decorative boards are overlapping during assembly, etc., the desired decorative board can be easily found as long as a part of the decorative board is visible, and the effort required for assembly can be simplified.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, the color of the color identification portion 7b is different for each decorative board, so that when preparing the decorative boards required for one pachinko machine 1 during assembly, if there is a decorative board with the same color identification portion 7b, it is easy to recognize that the same decorative board has been prepared in duplicate. Or, if there is not enough color in the color identification portion 7b of the prepared decorative board, it is easy to recognize that there is a decorative board that has not been prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decorative boards required for the assembly of the pachinko machine 1, it is easy to recognize that an excess decorative board has been prepared or that the prepared decorative board is insufficient, so that it is possible to reliably prepare only the necessary amount of decorative boards, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 easy to set up during assembly. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed smoothly, and the time required for assembly can be shortened to suppress an increase in costs.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, the rear surface of the decorative board is provided with a character identification section 7a as an identification section 7 for distinguishing it from other boards, so that an operator can easily tell which part the decorative board belongs to by reading the characters on the character identification section 7a, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the front and rear of each decorative board are white, and an identification part 7 is provided on the rear, so that even if the decorative body provided in front of the decorative board is highly transparent, the decorative board is less noticeable from the front (player's side), improving the appearance of the decorative body, and the white front of the decorative board makes it possible to reflect the light from the LED forward, allowing the decorative body to emit light more brightly, and the highly effective light-emitting effect entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, functional components such as LED drivers are provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate and are not visible from the front (player side), which makes it possible to avoid the poor appearance caused by the functional components being visible through the decorative body, and improves the appearance of the decorative body (gaming machine). Furthermore, since the functional components are not visible by being provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, there is no need to color the functional components white (or yellow) so that they are not noticeable, and the functional components can be used as is, which eliminates the effort of coloring the functional components and suppresses increases in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

[3-12. Function and effect of door frame]
According to this embodiment, the switching unit 394 is used to switch between a contact detection body 393 provided at a desired location where it is desired to detect the approach or contact of a player and the contact detection sensor main body 392, for a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different locations in the pachinko machine 1. When a player approaches or touches the contact detection body 393 at the desired location, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes, and the change in capacitance can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393. As a result, the approach or contact of the player to the desired location can be detected, and predetermined control can be executed by control means such as the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control unit 1511, and performance display control unit 1512 in response to the detection by the contact detection sensor main body 392. On the other hand, when the switching unit 394 connects the contact detection body 393 at the desired location to the contact detection sensor main body 392, the connection between the contact detection body 393 at other locations and the contact detection sensor main body 392 is cut off. Therefore, even if the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 at other locations changes when the player approaches or touches the other locations, the change in capacitance of the contact detection body 393 is not detected because the contact detection body 393 has been cut off by the switching unit 394, and only the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 at the desired location can be reliably detected, preventing erroneous detection.

In this way, the contact detector 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394 for multiple contact detectors 393 installed at different positions, so that it is possible to detect the capacitance of multiple contact detectors 393 with one contact detection sensor main body 392, and the number of channels required for detecting the approach or contact of the player in the control means such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the performance display control unit 1512 can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for performance can be relatively increased. Therefore, since it is possible to control more performance means (for example, movable decorations, luminous decorations, performance display devices, etc.) by the control means, a more diverse performance can be presented to the player by increasing the number of performance means, making it less likely for the player to get bored and allowing the player to fully enjoy the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, by providing contact detectors 393 at multiple locations on the pachinko machine 1 that should not be touched by the player, and by connecting the contact detectors 393 provided at the desired locations to the contact detection sensor body 392 by a switching unit 394 depending on the game status, it is possible to detect the player's approach to or contact with the desired locations and to cause control means such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the performance display control unit 1512 to issue a specified warning or alarm. This makes it possible to monitor a wide area of the pachinko machine 1 with one contact detection sensor body 392 while relatively increasing the number of channels that can be used for performance, and to achieve the same effects as those described above.

In addition, since the capacitance of multiple contact detectors 393 is detected by one contact detection sensor body 392, each contact detector 393 and the contact detection sensor body 392 are located apart, so the sensor body containing electronic components such as a sensor IC and output circuit can be located in a location that is difficult for players to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing its appeal to players.

Furthermore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with connection terminals for electrically connecting multiple contact detection bodies 393, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 simply by connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392, which simplifies the process of assembling the pachinko machine 1 and suppresses increases in the costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with a connection terminal in advance, and the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be connected simply by connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392. This reduces the number of parts compared to when a conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detection body 393 via the conductive member, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and eliminating the need to design the layout of the conductive member for connecting to the contact detection body 393. This increases the freedom of arrangement of the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392, making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, a switching unit 394 is provided for switching the contact detector 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392, and the contact detector 393 to be detected can be selected by the switching unit 394. For example, when a player-participation type presentation is performed in which multiple contact detectors 393 are distributed and the multiple distributed contact detectors 393 are touched in a predetermined order, the switching unit 394 switches the contact detector 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 at the timing when the player touches the contact detectors 393 in order, so that it is possible to detect whether the player touched the contact detectors 393 in the correct order. This makes it possible to realize a highly game-like player-participation type presentation with a single contact detection sensor main body 392, and a pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to players can be provided.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the presentation operation unit 300 in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, when the player's finger approaches or touches the button body 351 in the presentation operation unit 350 that can be pressed by the player, the player approaches the contact detector 352 made of a punched metal plate whose player side is covered by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detector 352 changes. Since the capacitance of this contact detector 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358, it is possible to detect the change in capacitance of the contact detector 352, and therefore it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350) via the contact detector 352.

In this way, when the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350 is detected using the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, a predetermined performance is output to the player side through the contact detector 352 and the button main body 351 by the performance means such as the button outer decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button inner decorative board 364, and the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, so that the player can be entertained by the performance and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. At this time, when the player approaches or contacts the performance operation unit 350, a predetermined performance is output, so that the performance operation unit 350 can function as a non-contact operation unit or a contact operation unit by the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. Furthermore, because the presentation operation unit 350, which functions as a non-contact operation unit and a contact operation unit, can be pressed by the player when it is extended, a variety of presentation operations such as non-contact operations, contact operations, and pressing operations can be performed with the presentation operation unit 350, making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 with an appearance that differs from conventional pachinko machines equipped with operation buttons that can only be pressed, and by differentiating it from other pachinko machines, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, a predetermined effect is output to the player in response to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detector 352 by the contact sensor main body 358, and since the capacitance differs depending on the distance between the contact detector 352 (button main body 351) and the player, it is possible to set multiple capacitance thresholds and output different effects for each threshold. Therefore, it is possible to detect the time (distance) from when the player approaches the button main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) to when the player makes contact in multiple stages, and by outputting effects according to each stage, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, making it less likely for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is located away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor main body 358, which has electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit, can be located in a part of the performance operation unit 350 that is difficult for the player to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing its appeal to players.

In addition, as described above, the operation unit can perform a variety of presentation operations such as non-contact operations, contact operations, and pressing operations. By implementing a player-participation presentation that allows the player to operate the presentation, it is possible to allow the player to enjoy a variety of presentation operations, making it less likely for the player to become bored, and allowing the player to enjoy the player-participation presentation, which can prevent the player's interest in the game from declining.

Furthermore, since the contact detector 352, whose capacitance is detected by the contact sensor main body 358, is a punched metal made of a metal plate with multiple holes formed therein, the multiple holes can reduce the capacitance of the contact detector 352 when the player is not approaching or touching the button main body 351, thereby preventing erroneous detection by the contact sensor main body 358. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of the multiple holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detector 352 while suppressing an increase in capacitance, and therefore the range in which the contact detector 352 detects the player's approach or contact with the button main body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be widened. This allows the contact detector 352 to be enlarged to widen the detection range, so if the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) that the player can press is enlarged as in the above embodiment, and the contact detector 352 is made the same size as the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, when the player is required to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) due to the execution of a player-participation type performance, the contact detector 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, so the movement distance for the player's fingers to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 is shortened, and the performance operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, making it difficult to miss the operation timing in the player-participation type performance and allowing the player to reliably participate in the player-participation type performance, and the performance can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, because the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, the light emission effects from the LEDs 364a of the button decorative board 364, which acts as an effect means and is provided on the opposite side of the contact detector 352 from the player side, can be output to the player side through multiple holes formed in the contact detector 352, ensuring that the player can enjoy the light emission effects and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the touch detector 352 is provided on the presentation operation unit 350 (button body 351) that can be operated by pressing, the presentation operation unit 350 can be reinforced by the touch detector 352 made of punched metal, which is a metal plate with a certain degree of strength and rigidity, and the presentation operation unit 350 is less likely to deform or break even if the player presses or hits the presentation operation unit 350 (button body 351) hard when performing a pressing operation. Therefore, since the touch detector 352 makes it difficult to damage the presentation operation unit 350, the player can press the presentation operation unit 350 without any worries, and the player can enjoy the player-participation type presentation in which the presentation operation unit 350 is operated, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, and compared to a case in which the contact detector 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate of the same thickness, the thickness of the contact detector 352 can be made thinner. This makes it easier to secure space for the contact detector 352, makes it easier to install the contact detector 352, and increases the degree of design freedom, making it easier to design a pachinko machine 1 that is more appealing to players.

In addition, because the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, the plate thickness is consistent compared to expanded metal, making it easy to process the contact detector 352 into a desired three-dimensional shape by pressing. This makes it easier to make the contact detector 352 into an optimal shape for detecting the player's approach to or contact with the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350), and ensures the realization of the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, in the performance operation unit 350, the button body 351 covers the player side of the contact detector 352, so the button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact detector 352, which is made of punched metal with multiple holes formed therein. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when touching the contact detector 352 with multiple holes formed therein, and allows the player to operate the button body 351 without feeling unnatural in a player-participation performance in which the button body 351 is used as the operation unit, allowing the player to enjoy the performance and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because the player side of the contact detector 352 made of punched metal is covered by the button body 351, the multiple holes formed in the contact detector 352 do not become contaminated with dust, food, drink, or other contaminants, making cleaning much easier and reducing the burden on the gaming hall that installs the pachinko machine 1 as an easy-to-clean pachinko machine 1.

In addition, presentation means such as the button outer decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, presentation operation unit lifting mechanism 360, button inner decorative board 364, and protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 are provided on the opposite side of the contact detector 352 from the player side, making it possible to output a specified presentation to the player side through the contact detector 352 and the button body 351.When the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350), a specified presentation is output through the multiple holes formed in the contact detector 352 and the transparent button body 351, so that the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the presentation operation unit 350, and the presentation output through (via) the presentation operation unit 350 can be enjoyed reliably, preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the presentation means such as the button outer decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, presentation operation unit lifting mechanism 360, button inner decorative board 364, and protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 are arranged on the opposite side of the contact detector 352 from the player side, so that the presentation means is covered by the contact detector 352, and the contact detector 352 (presentation operation unit 350) and presentation means can be compactly arranged. This makes it easier to arrange the presentation operation unit 350 and presentation means that achieve the above-mentioned effects in the desired location on the pachinko machine 1, making it easier to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is appealing and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when a player approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) that is provided in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 and is movable in the vertical direction, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 of the performance operation unit 350 changes, so that the capacitance of the contact detector 352 can be detected by the contact detection sensor body 358 to detect the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350. When the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350, the performance operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360. Therefore, when the performance operation unit 350 protrudes when the player is not in contact with the performance operation unit 350, it abuts (collides) with the player, and when the performance operation unit 350 protrudes when the player is in contact with the performance operation unit 350, a performance by a physical force such as pushing the player can be presented to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make a strong impact on the player with a performance that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines, strongly drawing the player's attention to the performance operation unit 350, and reliably making the player aware of the protruding performance operation unit 350.

When the performance operation unit 350 is protruded, if the lift spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved in the direction (upward) toward the upper end side of the lift spring 365, the compression of the lift spring 365 becomes stronger and the biasing force can be increased, and if it is moved in the direction (downward) away from the upper end side of the lift spring 365, the compression of the lift spring 365 becomes weaker and the biasing force can be decreased. By moving the lift spring lower holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the biasing force of the performance operation unit 350 by the lift spring 365 can be changed. In this way, since the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded with various protruding forces, the variety of performances by physical forces can be increased, the player can be less likely to get bored, and the player can enjoy the performance by the protrusion of the performance operation unit 350, which can suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the thrust force of the presentation operation unit 350 is changed according to the game state, so that when a player approaches or touches the presentation operation unit 350 with a strong force, a strong impact is given to the player, making the player strongly believe that something good is about to happen (for example, the occurrence of a favorable game state that gives the player an advantage), heightening anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the performance operation unit 350 is a pressing operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing, when a player-participation type performance is executed, the player can be made to press the performance operation unit 350, thereby making it possible for the player to participate in the player-participation type performance, and thus making the player enjoy pressing the performance operation unit 350 and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the performance operation unit 350 can be operated by pressing, for a player who places his/her fingers on the performance operation unit 350 (the upper surface of the button body 351) so that he/she can press it at any time, when a player-participation performance is executed in which the performance operation unit 350 is pressed, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the performance operation unit 350 to protrude, allowing the player to quickly recognize the start of the player-participation performance without being notified of the start of the player-participation performance by performance images, sounds, etc., and this increases the player's desire to press the performance operation unit 350, making the player-participation performance even more enjoyable.

Furthermore, because the performance operation unit 350 is protruded by the force of the lifting spring 365 in the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded easily and forcefully compared to a case in which the performance operation unit 350 is protruded using a drive motor, making it easier to achieve the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, the contact sensor body 358 detects the capacitance of the contact detector 352 to detect the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350. Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 varies depending on the distance between the performance operation unit 350 and the player, multiple capacitance thresholds can be set and the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded with a different protruding force for each threshold. Therefore, the contact sensor body 358 can detect the distance from the approach of the player's fingers to the performance operation unit 350 in multiple stages, and by protruding with a protruding force according to each stage, a more diverse performance can be presented to the player, making it less likely for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when the player approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350, which is arranged to be movable forward and backward by popping up the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 by executing a player participation type performance, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 that the player touches on the performance operation unit 350 changes. On the other hand, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided away from the contact detector 352 on the performance operation unit 350 detects the capacitance of the contact detector 352, and can capture the change in capacitance of the contact detector 352 due to the approach or contact of the player, so it can detect the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the player by capacitance. Then, when the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the movement of the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward (pressing) by the player, a specific performance is executed by the performance means such as the performance operation unit outer decorative board 320, the button outer decorative board 355, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button inner decorative board 364, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, and the performance display device 1600. In other words, a specific performance is executed when the player moves the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward or approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350, so that the player can be entertained by the performance and the decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350, a performance is executed, so that the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) can be made to function like a performance operation unit (non-contact operation unit, contact operation unit). On the other hand, when the player moves the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward (presses), a performance is executed, so that the performance operation unit 350 can be made to function like a performance operation unit (pressing operation unit). As a result, the player can perform a variety of performance operations, so by executing a player-participation type performance that allows the player to operate the performance, it is possible to enjoy a variety of performance operations, making it difficult for the player to become bored, and it is possible to allow the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance, which can suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

The player is detected by the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided near the part of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 that the player touches (below the upper surface 351a). The capacitance of the contact detector 352 varies depending on the distance between the contact detector 352 (button body 351) and the player, so it is possible to provide multiple capacitance thresholds for executing a predetermined effect and execute a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, it is possible to detect the time (distance) from when the player's fingers approach the effect operation unit 350 to when the player touches it in multiple stages, so that by presenting effects according to each stage, a wider variety of effects can be presented to the player, making it less likely for the player to get bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, a predetermined effect is executed when the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 detect the player, so that the effect can impart a sense of operation to the effect operation (non-contact operation, contact operation) using the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, allowing the player to enjoy the effect operation even more.

Furthermore, since the device is equipped with a performance operation unit 350 that can be advanced and retreated (pressed) by the player, and a contact detector 352 and a contact detection sensor main body 358 that can detect the player's approach or contact with the performance operation unit 350, it is possible to request the player to perform a variety of operations in a player-participation type performance, such as an operation to advance and retreat the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation) or an operation to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 with a finger (non-contact operation, contact operation). The various operations can increase the player's motivation to participate in the player-participation type performance, making it easier for the player to participate in the player-participation type performance. And, when the player participates in the player-participation type performance, the various operations using the performance operation unit 350, the contact detector 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can prevent the player from getting bored, and can enjoy the player-participation type performance, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the performance operation unit 350 can be locked so that it cannot move forward or backward by engaging the locking portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 in the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360. Therefore, by keeping the performance operation unit 350 unable to move forward or backward by the guide pin 354c and the lifting cam member 371 until a performance is performed that moves the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward, it is possible to prevent the performance operation unit 350 from moving or shaking on its own. This makes it possible to avoid the player feeling distrustful or uneasy due to the performance operation unit 350 moving or shaking on its own, and allows the player to enjoy the performance by the performance operation unit 350 more.

Furthermore, in the performance operation unit 350, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is arranged at a position away from the contact detector 352, so that the contact detection sensor main body 358, which contains electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit, can be arranged in a location that is difficult for the player to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the contact detector 352 for detecting capacitance and the contact sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC and output circuit that detects the capacitance of the contact detector 352 are separate, the shape and material of the contact detector 352 can be selected appropriately regardless of the contact sensor main body 358. This allows the contact detector 352 to be made to optimally correspond to the shape, form, and specifications of the button main body 351 of the performance operation unit 350, and ensures the realization of a pachinko machine 1 that provides the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, when a player approaches or touches the button body 351 or surface member 396 covering the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398 with his/her fingers, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 provided between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398 changes, and in response to this change, a predetermined performance is executed in which light is irradiated toward the player by the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398, so that the light irradiated toward the player can strongly attract the player's attention to the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398, and the executed performance can entertain the player. In this case, the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 provided between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the outer button decorative substrate 355 or inner button decorative substrate 364 or decorative body 398 is formed to conform to the decorative portion provided on the button body 351 or surface member 396, giving the player the illusion that the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is part of the decorative portion, making it impossible for the player to recognize that the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is intended to detect the player.

In this way, since the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 cannot be recognized by the player, even if the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 blocks part of the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decoration 398 (effect), the player will not be bothered by the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397, and even if the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is placed in front of the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decoration 398, the presence of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 will not cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the effect of the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decoration 398 can be shown to the player in good condition, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like to the button body 351 or surface member 396 by the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397, an effect is executed in which light is irradiated towards the player from the button outer decorative substrate 355, button inner decorative substrate 364 or decorative body 398, which are covered by the button body 351 or surface member 396. This makes it possible to make the button body 351 or surface member 396 function like the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), and gives the player the feeling of operating through light. Therefore, for example, when a player participation type performance is executed, the player's fingers or the like approach or contact the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and when the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 detects the approach or contact of the fingers or the like, a performance is executed by the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398, allowing the player to participate in the player participation type performance and to enjoy the player participation type performance.

Furthermore, since the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 detects the player's approach to or contact with the button body 351 or surface member 396, it is possible to vary the presentation provided by the button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364, or decoration 398 depending on the distance between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the player's fingers, etc., so that the presentation provided by the button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364, or decoration 398 can be changed depending on the movement (position) of the player's fingers, etc., allowing the player to see a more diverse presentation, which makes it less likely for the player to become bored, and prevents the player's interest from declining.

In addition, the change in capacitance of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is detected, and when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 or surface member 396, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 located between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364, or decorative body 398 changes, so that the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc. to the button body 351 or surface member 396 can be easily detected, and a pachinko machine 1 that provides the above-mentioned effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, since the change in capacitance is detected by the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 can be made of a conductive material. For example, if the contact detector 397 is made of a metal vapor deposition film, the vapor deposition film can be made thin to make it transparent, and if the vapor deposition film is made thick to give it a metallic luster, it can be made to look like part of the decoration. Alternatively, if the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 are made of punched metal with a decorative shape such as a star or heart shape, the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 can be made to look like part of the decoration. In this way, the contact detector 352, the contact detector 395, and the contact detector 397 can be made unrecognizable to the player, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the capacitance changes when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the transparent button body 351 covering the upper side (surface side), and this change causes the contact detector 395 etc. (including contact detector 352, left contact detector 390L, right contact detector 390R, contact detector 393, contact detector 397, etc.) to present a predetermined performance by the performance presentation means such as the button outer decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, button inner decorative board 364, protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and performance display device 1600, to be formed into a predetermined outer peripheral shape with a design, so that the contact detector 395 itself can decorate the pachinko machine 1, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that looks good and has a high appeal to players. In addition, the front side of the contact detector 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, and a predetermined effect is presented by the effect presenting means through the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 etc. in response to a change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 etc. due to the approach of the player's finger etc. to the contact detector 395, so that the button body 351 can function as the effect operation unit 301. And, since the contact detector 395 etc. visible through the button body 351 has design, the effect operation unit 301 appears to have design, so that the pachinko machine 1 can have a strong impact on the player as a pachinko machine 1 equipped with the effect operation unit 301 not found in previous pachinko machines, and can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. In addition, as described above, the design of the contact detector 395 etc. can make a strong impact on the player, which can strongly stimulate interest in the contact detector 395 etc. (button body 351) and heighten anticipation for operating the button body 351 (performance operation unit 301). In addition, when a player-participation performance in which the player operates the button body 351 is executed, the player can enjoy operating the button body 351, and the player's interest can be prevented from declining.

In addition, the contact detector 395, which detects the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like to the button body 351, is formed into an outer peripheral shape with a design, so that at first glance, some players may not notice the presence of the performance operation unit 301 (button body 351) for presenting a performance by the performance presentation means. Therefore, when a player-participation performance in which the performance operation unit 301 is operated is executed, the player is prompted to approach or touch the button body 351, which makes the player realize for the first time that the button body 351 is the performance operation unit 301 by the contact detector 395, etc., and the player can enjoy the player-participation performance more by adding an element of surprise. Alternatively, when a player-participation type presentation is being executed by operating the presentation operation unit 301, if the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with a finger or the like without realizing that it is the presentation operation unit 301, the capacitance of the contact detector 395, etc. will change and a presentation will be presented by the presentation presentation means, surprising the player and entertaining the player with the presented presentation, preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because the effects are presented by the effect presentation means in response to changes in capacitance in the contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to easily detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395, etc., and it is easy to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects. Also, because the effects are presented in response to changes in capacitance in the contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to detect the time (distance) from when the player's fingers, etc., approach the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395, etc., to when they make contact in multiple stages, so by presenting effects according to each stage, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, making it less likely for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, because the outer periphery of the contact detector 395, etc. is formed into a predetermined shape, even if inorganic materials such as punched metal, expanded metal, or wire mesh are used as the conductive contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to impart design to the contact detector 395, etc., prevent the contact detector 395, etc. from deteriorating the appearance, and make the contact detector 395, etc. stand out, making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, because the outer periphery of the contact detector 395 and the like is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a design that has appeal even if the contact detector 395 and the like is not formed into a three-dimensional shape. Therefore, the contact detector 395 and the like can be formed into a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the manufacturing costs of the contact detector 395 and the like can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the surface side of the contact detector 395, etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink does not adhere to the contact detector 395, etc., and the effort required for cleaning can be reduced. In more detail, since the contact detector 395, etc. is made of uneven material such as punched metal, dirt such as dust and food and drink easily adheres to the unevenness, and cleaning the dirt is time-consuming. However, since the surface side of the contact detector 395, etc. is covered with the button body 351, even if the contact detector 395, etc. is made of uneven material such as punched metal, the button body 351 can prevent dirt from adhering, and the easy cleaning reduces the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, the surface side of the contact detector 395, etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351 to prevent the player from touching the contact detector 395, etc. Therefore, if a material that enhances the design, such as a metal deposition film or foil stamping, is used as the contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to prevent early wear due to the player's touch, and to increase the durability of the contact detector 395, etc.

Furthermore, the surface side of the contact detector 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, and as described above, the transparent button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact detector 395 etc., making it possible to use contact detectors 395 etc. that are unpleasant to the touch or that may cause discomfort to the player. This increases the freedom in the materials used for the contact detector 395 etc., and allows the contact detector 395 etc. to be formed from materials suited to needs.

In addition, when the capacitance of the contact detector 395 etc. is changed by bringing the player's finger etc. close to or into contact with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 etc., a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 etc., and the effect presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 etc. allows the player to intuitively recognize that the player has brought the finger etc. close to or into contact with the button body 351, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the finger etc.

In addition, effects are presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, etc., and effects presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, etc. are executed when the player's fingers, etc. approach or touch the button body 351, which covers the contact detector 395, etc., so that the button body 351 can function like a touch operation unit, and the presented effects can give the player a sense of operation, allowing the player to enjoy operations using the button body 351 (player-participation effects).

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, which is capable of multiple operations, the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with his/her fingers, etc., and when the contact detector 352 (contact detection sensor body 358) detects the entry of the fingers, etc. into the detection area, a light emission effect is executed in which light is irradiated to the player through the button body 351 by the emission of the multiple LEDs 355a on the button outer decorative board 355 and the multiple LEDs 364a on the button inner decorative board 364, an effect in which the player's fingers, etc. that are in contact through (via) the button body 351 by the vibration motor 356, an effect in which the button body 351 is protruded upward by the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, and an effect in which an impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. are applied to the player through (via) the button body 351, etc. are executed, so that the button body 351 can function as the contact operation unit 302, and the player can be entertained. At this time, effects such as light, vibration, impact, pushing up, and wind pressure are given to the player through the button body 351, so that the effects can surprise and entertain the player, increasing the player's motivation to operate the button body 351. Then, when the player's fingers or the like are in contact with the button body 351, the player can appropriately move the fingers or the like to press the button body 351 downward, so that the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, the contact operation by the contact detector 352 detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like and the pressing operation of the button body 351 can allow the player to enjoy a variety of performance operations, making it difficult for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

The detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., is composed of the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detector 352 is provided near the back surface of the top surface 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358, which is provided with a detection circuit, is located on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353, away from the top surface 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detector 352 can detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., on the top surface 351a of the button main body 351, and the same effect as above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., is configured with the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358, which is provided with a detection circuit, can be positioned on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the top surface portion 351a (contact detector 352) of the button main body 351, so that the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be positioned in an inconspicuous location, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the back (bottom) of the button body 351 is provided with an outer button decorative board 355, an inner button decorative board 364, and a performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, which make it easier for the player to experience effects such as light, vibration, impact, upward pressure, and wind pressure through the button body 351, achieving the same effects as described above.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 81. Figure 75 is a front view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine, and Figure 76 is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. Figure 77 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front right, Figure 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front left, and Figure 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. Figure 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear.

The main frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a play area 5a where a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and is used to pay out the game ball B to the player and to eject the game balls B used in the game to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is removably stored inside from the front. The main frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3 is attached so that the open front side can be closed.

The main body frame 4 is provided with a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, a main body frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached, and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 attached to the lower end of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached.

The main frame 4 also includes a main frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, a ball launching device 540 attached to the lower front side of the main frame base unit 500 for shooting game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper and left sides of the rear side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, a payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the payout base unit 550 for paying out game balls B to the player, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear side of the main frame base unit 500, a back cover 640 attached to the rear side of the main frame base unit 500 so as to be openable and closable, and covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 attached to the right side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, for locking the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

The main frame base unit 500 includes a main frame base 501 that is formed into a vertically extending rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, a connection cable guide member 502 that guides a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3, and a game board lock member 505 that detachably holds the game board 5.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, a ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551, a box-shaped tank that extends left and right and is open upward, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extends leftward in a groove-like shape that is open upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left when viewed from the front, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, a payout device 580 that pays out the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 or the board unit 620.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main frame base 501, a number of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the door frame 3, a number of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653 up and down, a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hooks 652 downward and the outer frame hooks 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hooks 653 downward.

[4-1. Main frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 83. Figure 82(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame when the door frame is opened relative to the main body frame. Figure 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened or closed relative to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear portion inserted into the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main frame base unit 500 is equipped with a main frame base 501 that is formed into a vertically extending rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, a connection cable guide member 502 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main frame base 501 and guides the connection cable 503, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower front surface of the main frame base 501 around an axis that extends forward and backward and that detachably holds the game board 5.

The main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 is equipped with a base main body 501a that is formed into a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a game board insertion opening 501b that penetrates the base main body 501a from a position slightly below the top end to a height of about 3/4 of the total height and through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front, a game board placement section 501c that forms the bottom edge of the game board insertion opening 501b and on which the game board 5 is placed, and a game board restriction section 501d that protrudes upward from the left-right center of the game board placement section 501c and restricts the left-right and rearward movement of the bottom end of the game board 5.

The main frame base 501 also has a launcher attachment section 501e, which is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board placement section 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, for attaching the ball launcher 540; a cylinder insertion opening 501f, which penetrates the launcher attachment section 501e from front to back on the right side of the front view, through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted; a circular speaker opening 501g, which penetrates the game board placement section 501c from front to back on the lower left side of the front view, through which the main frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the board unit 620 faces forward; a cable attachment recess 501h, which is recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extends left and right, and to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached; and a cable insertion opening 501i, which penetrates the cable attachment recess 501h from front to front at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h as viewed from the front.

The main frame base 501 further includes a plate-like extension extending rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, a rear extension portion 501j to the rear end of which the rear cover 640 is rotatably attached, and an upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l formed near both the upper and lower ends of the left end when viewed from the front on the rear surface of the base main body 501a for attaching the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520.

In addition, the main frame base 501 is provided with a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, which is attached to the front surface of the base body 501a below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) relative to the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch is released and the opening of the door frame 3 can be detected. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633. In addition, the main frame base 501 is provided with a main frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, which is attached to the rear surface of the base body 501a below the position where the door frame opening switch is attached. When the main frame 4 is opened (opened) relative to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch is released and the opening of the main frame 4 can be detected. The detection signal from the main frame open switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633.

A game board locking member 505 is attached to the main frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward, below the game board placement portion 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board locking member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b, thereby making it possible to attach and detach the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position below the portion where the game board locking member 505 is attached, to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed to a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis that extends vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame base unit 500 comprises a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, a pair of band-shaped frame pieces 502b that protrude forward from both the upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extend further to the right than the right end of the guide body 502a, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a number of through holes 502d that penetrate the guide body 502a from front to back at both the upper and lower ends and are arranged in a row in the left and right direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a left-right length that is slightly shorter than the left-right length of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and is formed to a size that can be accommodated within the cable mounting recess 501h. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached so that the mounting shaft 502c can rotate around an axis that extends vertically near the right end within the cable mounting recess 501h. This allows the connection cable guide member 502 to rotate (hinge rotate) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is made up of multiple wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the opposite end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3.

Next, the effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 etc., the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the main frame base 501 so that its end (right end) opposite the side (left side) where the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached in the left-right direction is rotatable around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is attached to the guide body 502a by being fastened together with the guide body 502a by a cable tie 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same left-right position out of the multiple through holes 502d formed on both the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, with the side connected to the interface board 635 abutting against the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame 4 is located behind the main relay board 104 and the sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and closed against the main frame 4 (see FIG. 83(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, then bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and extends into the door frame relay board cover 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is positioned to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hingedly rotated so as to open relative to the main frame 4, the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 that is attached to the door frame 3, and the connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the attachment shaft 502c at the right end. In this case, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is formed to satisfy α/2 ≧ β (preferably α/3 ≧ β) (see FIG. 83(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but once the opening angle α exceeds a certain value (e.g., approximately 90 degrees), the increase stops. In this embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501. As a result, the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, and the connection cable 503 can be prevented from dangling between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When closing the open door frame 3, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively backward, so that the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 is pressed backward by the connection cable 503, and the connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the attachment shaft 502c so that the left end moves backward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is open at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly. In addition, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and it is possible to prevent malfunctions of the connection cable 503.

When the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees, so that the folded back portion of the connection cable 503 can be given a fold. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the 180 degree folded portion of the connection cable 503 changes to open, the fold acts on the connection cable 503 to close it. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the fold prevents the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and also guides the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) in the closing direction, allowing the door frame 3 to be closed smoothly.

Furthermore, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis core) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main body frame 4, the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a.

In addition, in this embodiment, the angle between the tangent to a circle passing through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502, centered on the central axis (axis) of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126, and the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 of the speaker duct 103 from the cable holder 103a, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is configured to be 45 degrees or less. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts against the connection cable 503, so that the tip side of the open connection cable guide member 502 can be pressed in the closing direction via the connection cable 503, and therefore the connection cable guide member 502 can be closed smoothly as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed reliably. In addition, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502, which rotates (opens and closes) in conjunction with the opening and closing of the door frame 3, can be set to 45 degrees or less, so that when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, achieving the same effect as described above.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and also rotatably attaches the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3.

The main frame upper hinge member 510 comprises an upper hinge body 511, which is a horizontally extending flat plate material with its rear portion bent downward into an L-shape, and a main frame upper hinge pin 512 which protrudes upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511 in a cylindrical shape and is journaled by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a which penetrates the main frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and which journals the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

The upper hinge member 510 of the main frame is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 by bending the upper hinge body 511 downward and extending vertically. The upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 is inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 of the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and journaled. The upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame allows the upper hinge pin 122 of the upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 to be rotatably inserted from below into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge body 511.

The upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame cooperates with the lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that it can rotate along a hinge, and also attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so that it can rotate along a hinge.

[4-3. Main body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to a lower hinge attachment portion 501l in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and has the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached thereto.

The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a lower hinge first body 521, which is a horizontally extending flat plate material with its rear portion bent upward into an L-shape, and a lower hinge second body 522, which is disposed above the lower hinge first body 521 and is a horizontally extending flat plate material with its rear portion bent upward into an L-shape. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 disposed at a distance above the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, and a vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521.

The lower hinge first body 521 has an outer frame lower hinge hole 521a that penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion and into which the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

The second lower hinge body 522 is provided with a lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame that penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion and into which the lower hinge pin 126 of the lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above, and a restricting piece 522b that extends upward from a position rearward of the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and restricts the rotation range of the door frame 3. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge body 511 of the upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame.

The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 at the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main frame upper hinge member 510 to mount the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinged rotatable, and also mount the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so as to be hinged rotatable.

[4-4. Main body reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view that is U-shaped with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is formed from an extruded metal profile.

The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 has two left position restriction members 531 attached to the rear side of the section extending rightward from the front end, spaced apart vertically, to restrict the forward and vertical movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501.

The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 has a groove 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side, which is formed in a U-shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed on the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcement frame 111 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into this groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcement frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 and the left reinforcement frame 111 becomes serpentine in a plan view, which prevents an illegal tool from being inserted inside from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and prevents an illegal tool from being inserted into the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side through the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84(a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame seen from the front, and FIG. 84(b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the back. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower front part of the main body frame base unit 500, and is for shooting the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. The ball launcher 540 can shoot the game ball B with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 comprises a flat launching base 541 attached to the launching device mounting portion 501e of the main frame base 501 in the main frame base unit 500, a launching solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid attached to the rear surface of the right part of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front and whose rotation axis extends forward through the launching base 541, a striking hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation axis of the launching solenoid 542, and a launching rail 544 attached to the front surface of the launching base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left from near the tip of the striking hammer 543 and along which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is designed so that game ball B is supplied from the ball supply unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launching rail 544. When the handle 195 is rotated while game ball B is supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launching rail 544, the launch solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the angle of rotation, and the game ball B is hit by the striking mallet 543. The game ball B hit by the striking mallet 543 is guided through the launching rail 544 to the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and is hit into the play area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the play area 5a due to factors such as the hitting strength of the game ball B, it will fall between the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) into the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150, pass through the foul cover unit 150, and be discharged into the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Payment base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 85. Figure 85 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit seen from the rear. The dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L-shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The dispensing base unit 550 is equipped with a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main frame base 501 in the main frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-to-rear direction, a left side plate portion 551b extending long downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a as viewed from the front with a width substantially the same as that of the top plate portion, a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a as viewed from the front with a width substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a, a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a left side plate portion 551b extending long downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a as viewed from the front with a width substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a. The base 551 is provided with a left back plate portion 551e extending from a position forward of the rear edge of the left back plate portion 551b to the right at a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the lower end, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right edge of the left back plate portion 551e to the same position as the rear edge of the left side plate portion 551b, a bottom plate portion 551g extending rightward from the front of the lower edge of the left side plate portion 551b to the same position as the right edge of the left back plate portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right edge of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower edge of the inner side plate portion 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate 551a that extends left and right with a length approximately equal to the left-right width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main frame base 501, and a left side plate 551b that extends up and down with a length approximately equal to the up-down height of the game board insertion opening 501b. The front ends of the top plate 551a, left side plate 551b, and right side plate 551c of the payout base 551 are attached to the rear side of the main frame base 501.

The dispensing base 551 also has a shallow recessed portion that is open to the rear and extends vertically, and is formed by the left side plate portion 551b, the left back plate portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, to which the dispensing unit 560 is attached. The dispensing base 551 also has a rear cover attachment portion 551i that protrudes to the right at the top of the right side of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and to which the rear cover 640 is attached.

The payout base unit 550 comprises a ball tank 552 that is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, is box-shaped and opens upward, and is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 above the part of the payout base 551 that extends left and right, and is a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 above the part that extends left and right, and is a groove-like shape that is open upward and extends to the left.

The dispensing base unit 550 also includes a first rail cover 554 attached midway in the left-right direction at the top end of the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 attached to the top end of the tank rail 553 at a distance to the left of the first rail cover 554 when viewed from the front and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the top end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the bottom end of the tank rail 553 near the left end when viewed from the front.

The ball tank 552 is formed with a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the left-right width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-to-rear direction that is shorter than the front-to-rear depth of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position toward the right in the left-to-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end is lower. The left end of the ball tank 552 is connected to the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 is formed in a shape in a plan view that extends diagonally from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 to the left and rear so that the depth in the front-to-rear direction changes from a depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B to a depth of approximately one, and then extends straight to the left with a depth in the front-to-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

The upper end of the tank rail 553, which extends straight to the left, is inclined at a steeper angle to the horizontal than the bottom surface so that the left end is lower at a height slightly greater than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left roughly coincides with the rear edge of the top plate 551a. A first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball straightening member 556, and a ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 which extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are intended to prevent the front-to-rear depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B inside the tank rail 553.

The ball straightening member 556 is attached between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, with the end on the first rail cover 554 side rotatable around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction. The ball straightening member 556 is equipped with a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-to-right direction (see Figure 91). This straightening piece 556a slows down the flow of game balls B on the upper tier of game balls B circulating in two tiers, and straightens them so that they flow in a single tier on the downstream side, preventing balls from clogging even if the height inside the tank rail 553 becomes low.

The ball stopping member 557 is attached to the underside of the tank rail 553 near the left end when viewed from the front, so that it can slide left and right. By sliding it left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, preventing game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit.

The payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal board 558 attached to the left of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes an earth connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main frame base 501. An earth wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the earth connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of the dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. Figure 86(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as seen from the rear. Figure 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left part 551e of the back plate of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, a payout device 580 that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and pays out the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 or the board unit 620.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Under normal conditions, the payout device 580 releases game balls B from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side based on instructions from the payout control board 633, and releases game balls B from the ball removal passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit 600 side when the ball removal lever 593 is operated.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides downward the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball removal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and guides the game balls B released from the ball removal passage 580b to the base unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball Guidance Unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left part 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and serves to receive the game ball B from the tank rail 553 and guide the game ball B to the payout device 580.

The ball guide unit 570 is equipped with a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open to the front and has a meandering guide passage 570a through which game balls B can flow, a flat guide passage front cover 572 that closes the front side of the guide unit base 571, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by game balls B flowing through the guide passage 570a, and a ball out detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of game balls B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573 (see Figure 91).

The ball guidance unit 570 has a vertically extending rectangular shape in front view of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front cover 572. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the center of the height of the guidance unit base 571, then bends to the right, and extends downward in a serpentine manner while repeatedly folding back between the left and right width of the guidance unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guidance unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed so that its depth in the front, back and right directions and its width in the left and right directions are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game balls B in the direction in which the game balls B flow, allowing the game balls B to be guided in a single line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top so that it can move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. More specifically, the upper part of the movable piece member 573 is attached so that it can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward at the outer right part of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and is formed so that a part of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. When the game ball B abuts against the part of this movable piece member 573 that protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a to a state where it no longer protrudes.

The ball cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and detects the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when a game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when a game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main frame 4, the upstream end of the guide passage 570a is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570a is connected to the upstream end of the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580. Since the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B extends in a serpentine shape, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many game balls B can be stored in the guide passage 570a. In addition, the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of game balls B in the guide passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, and can detect the presence or absence of game balls B in the ball tank 552 via the guide passage 570a.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 to 89. Figure 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-to-rear direction. Figure 89(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-to-rear direction when the ball removal movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in (a). The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the underside of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the left part 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout device 580 is equipped with a payout device main body 581 that is box-shaped and open to the rear, has a payout passage 580a through which game balls B can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a, a flat payout device rear cover 582 that closes the payout device main body 581 from the rear, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front cover 583 that is attached to the front of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear.

The dispensing device 580 also includes a dispensing motor 584 attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and having a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, a spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached to the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 meshing with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and a second transmission gear 588. The device is equipped with a dispensing gear member 588 having a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a meshing with the delivery gear 587 and multiple detection pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a, which is rotatably attached between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, a dispensing blade 589 having multiple blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 and protrude into the dispensing passage 580a, and a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the dispensing device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

The payout device 580 further includes a payout detection sensor 591 that detects the game ball B and is attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, a ball removal movable piece 592 that is attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 at the point where it branches off from the payout passage 580a so as to be able to open and close the ball removal passage 580b, and a ball removal lever 593 that can be held in a position where the ball removal movable piece 592 closes the ball removal passage 580b and is attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so as to be able to slide up and down.

The payout device 580 is shaped like a rectangle extending vertically in a plan view. The payout device 580 is shaped so that its left-right width is greater to the right when viewed from the front than the left-right width of the ball guiding unit 570.

As shown in Fig. 88, the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 opens upward at a position toward the left of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear, and the downstream end opens downward at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. The dispensing passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top for about 1/3 of the total height, gradually moving leftward as it moves downward from the upstream end, then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right, and then bends at about 1/3 of the left-right width and extends downward approximately vertically toward the center (rotation axis) of the dispensing blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, it bends to the right when viewed from behind at a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, then extends downward in an arc concentric with the payout blade 589 so that a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is formed between it and the outer periphery of the payout blade 589, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the payout blade 589 when viewed from behind.

In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is located below the dispensing blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball removal passage 580b extends diagonally downward from the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580a, branches off at a point where it bends to the right, extends vertically along the left edge as viewed from the rear to the bottom end, and opens downward near the left end of the bottom surface as viewed from the rear.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are provided with a main body guide wall 581a and a rear cover guide wall 582a, which are formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the payout path 580a and the ball removal path 580b in the rear view, and which face each other and protrude backward and forward from the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout path 580a and the ball removal path 580b branch off, and which are formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the payout path 580a and the ball removal path 580b in the rear view. The main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a are formed at a position on the left side of the part where the payout path 580a branches off from the ball removal path 580b and extends to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. The main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are formed mainly to constitute the side walls of the ball removal path 580b. The ball removal movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the payout passage 580a in the payout device main body 581 when viewed from the rear, at the point where it extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, first transmission gear 586, second transmission gear 587, and payout gear member 588 are disposed in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered by the payout device front cover 583. The payout gear member 588 has three flat detection pieces 588b extending outward, spaced at 120 degree intervals in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape, spaced at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade pieces 589a extend from the top of the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extend to the right when viewed from the rear, and protrude into the payout passage 580a so that the distance between the blade pieces 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The payout blade 589 is provided with a ball storage section 589b between the three blade pieces 589a, which is recessed toward the center in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B. This ball storage section 589b is capable of storing only one game ball B. As a result, the vane 589 can restrict the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream of the vane 589 by using the vane piece 589a, and can move the game ball B contained in the ball container 589b downstream by rotating in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear.

The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are attached to the dispensing device rear cover 582 and the dispensing device front cover 583 so that they can rotate together on the same axis. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is located to the left of the rotation axis of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588, which rotates together with the dispensing blade 589, to detect the rotation of the dispensing blade 589.

The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball removal movable piece 592 is bent in an L-shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces inside the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removal movable piece 592 is formed so that its depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, and it can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retract out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so that it can slide up and down on the left side when viewed from the rear near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. A part of the ball removal lever 593 protrudes rearward through the payout device rear cover 582, and it can be slid by operating the protruding part. When the ball removal lever 593 is positioned at the lower end, the lower part can abut against the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear can be restricted, and the ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. When the ball removal lever 593 is positioned at the upper end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated outside the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. 89).

When the ball removal lever 593 is raised to make the ball removal movable piece 592 rotatable, the game balls B that were strung together upstream of the ball removal movable piece 592 will flow over the ball removal movable piece 592 and down the ball removal passage 580b. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends in a straight line from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game balls B that have flowed down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a will flow straight down the ball removal passage 580b, and since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b is connected to the island equipment side, there is nothing to suppress the flow of the game balls B, such as the payout vane 589, so the game balls B will flow down faster than the payout passage 580a.

In this way, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down the ball removal passage 580b at a high speed, so that the game ball B hits the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b with great force. However, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can move outside the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b through between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves outside the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of the hit. Therefore, the ball removal movable piece 592 is not pinched between the wall surface of the ball removal passage 580b and the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from applying a strong force to the ball removal movable piece 592, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in durability or damage to the ball removal movable piece 592 due to the collision of the game ball B.

As a result, the ball removal movable piece 592 is less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island equipment downstream of the ball removal passage 580b, which reduces the time required for replacement and maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 and reduces the burden on the game hall.

In addition, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, which is spaced narrower than the game ball B. Therefore, when the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b and the ball removal movable piece 592 moves outward through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, even if the game ball B moves to the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, which is spaced narrower than the game ball B.

The game ball B is prevented from moving outward between the main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a, causing the game ball B to separate from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent movement of the ball removal movable piece 592 is due to inertial force, so no strong force acts on the ball removal movable piece 592, making it less likely to be damaged, and the game ball B will not fly out of the ball removal passage 580b from between the main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a, ensuring that the game ball B can flow downstream of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the rear lower part of the left part 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610. The upper full ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 comprises a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear end, a box-shaped upper full-tank cover 602 that is attached to the rear of the upper full-tank base 601 and has an open front end, and a dispensing device pressing member 603 that is rotatably attached near the top end of the upper full-tank cover 602 and can press the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full-tank base 601 protrudes to the right from the right edge when viewed from the front, and is equipped with a rear cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the rear cover.

In addition, the upper full ball path unit 600 is made up of an upper payout ball receiving passage 600a that opens upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height, an upper ball storage passage 600b that is connected to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right to the front for about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height, and a lower ball storage passage 600b that is connected to the upper ball receiving passage 600a and extends to the right to the front for about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. It is equipped with an upper normal dispensing passage 600c that extends toward the upper side and opens downward on the underside, an upper full tank dispensing passage 600d that is adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c, extends downward from the right side as viewed from the front from the center of the left-right direction of the upper ball storage passage 600b, and opens downward on the underside, and an upper ball removal passage 600e that opens upward near the right end as viewed from the front on the upper side, extends downward approximately vertically, and then opens downward near the right end of the lower side (see Figure 91).

On the underside of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side when viewed from the front, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are lined up in order and open downward. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upstream end of the upper ball removal passage 600e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and is released downward from either the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. In addition, the game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball removal passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the base unit 620 side. The lower full ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 is equipped with a lower full base 611 having a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full payout path 610b, and a lower ball removal path 610c, extending in the front-to-rear direction and opening upward, a lower full cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full base 611, a payout path opening/closing door 613 attached rotatably around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction to the front end of the lower full base 611 and capable of opening and closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout path 610a and the lower full payout path 610b, and a closing spring 614 that biases the payout path opening/closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout path 610a and the lower full payout path 610b.

The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 has, on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end, the lower normal dispensing path 610a, the lower full-tank dispensing path 610b, and the lower ball removal path 610c, lined up from the left when viewed from the front, with their upstream ends opening upward. The lower normal dispensing path 610a and the lower full-tank dispensing path 610b extend forward lined up side by side, and open forward at the front end of the lower full-tank ball path unit 610. The lower full-tank dispensing path 610b extends forward slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing path 610a. The lower ball removal path 610c extends forward along the right side of the lower full-tank dispensing path 610b when viewed from the front, and opens to the right halfway in the fore-and-aft direction.

The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b. This dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614, and in the normal state, it closes the front end openings (downstream end openings) of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is provided with an operating protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. This operating protrusion 613a is formed to abut against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f of the fall cover unit 150 on the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which open upward at the upper rear end, are located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600, respectively. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d flows through the lower full payout passage 610b, and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball removal passage 600e flows through the lower ball removal passage 610c.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b open immediately after the through ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. The downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c opens to face the ball removal guide section 627 that opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main body frame 4), the lower full ball path unit 610 rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front against the biasing force of the closing spring 614 as the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f of the fall cover unit 150. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are open, and are connected to the through ball passage 150a and full ball receiving port 150b of the fall cover unit 150.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 moves away from the door opening/closing abutment 150f of the fall cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 rotates in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front due to the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b can no longer move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, the game balls B will not spill out of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game ball B in the payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. When the payout unit 560 is assembled to the main body frame 4, it is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551. In the normal state, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball removal path 580b branching off from the payout path 580a is closed at the branching portion. In addition, in the lower full ball path unit 610, the payout path opening and closing door 613 is in the open state.

The ball tank 552, which is open upward, is supplied with a predetermined number of game balls B from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on detection of ball exhaustion by the ball exhaustion detection sensor 574 of the ball guide unit 570. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent, aligned in a row by the tank rail 553, through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout blade 589, and multiple game balls B are retained upstream of the payout blade 589.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 presses against the movable piece member 573, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. This indicates that the game ball B is stored at least in the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout motor 584 rotates the payout blade 589 in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, the game ball B stored in the ball storage section 589b moves in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, and is released downstream of the payout blade 589 in the payout passage 580a. The game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball storage section 589b) is then detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and is then sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball passage unit 600.

Under normal conditions, the game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 flows through the upper ball storage passage 600b and down to the upper normal payout passage 600c located directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. The game ball B that flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c then passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and is released into the upper tray 201 from the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 in the tray unit 200.

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 becomes full of game balls B, it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 become stuck in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and as more game balls B are paid out, they also become stuck in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600, which is connected upstream to the lower normal payout passage 610a. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with game balls B and more game balls B are paid out, the game balls B begin to accumulate in the upper ball storage passage 600b, which is connected to the upper normal payout passage 600c on the upstream side, and begin to flow down the upper full payout passage 600d, which is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

The game ball B that flows down to the upper full payout passage 600d passes through the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 and is received by the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. The game ball B received in the full ball receiving port 150b is then released into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball release port 150d, and the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. This allows the game ball B to be automatically paid out to the lower tray 202 when the upper tray 201 is full of game balls B and more game balls B are paid out.

When the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B and further game balls B cannot be released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, if more game balls B are dispensed, the game balls B will be retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 upstream of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the player is informed by voice (e.g., "Please remove the balls!") that the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are full of game balls B, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is no longer in detection mode.

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are to be discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is slid upward from the lower end position to the upper end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, and the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a and is pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. This allows the game ball B to enter the ball removal passage 580b branching off from the payout passage 580a, and the game balls B on the upstream side are released downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the area of the ball removal movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down hits the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball removal movable piece 592, making the ball removal movable piece 592 less likely to be damaged.

The game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, and is released from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide section 627 of the base unit 620, and then passes through the discharged ball receiving section 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the game hall).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 92 to 96. Fig. 92(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and Fig. 92(b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear. Fig. 93 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear and below. Fig. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the front, with each main component disassembled, and Fig. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear, with each main component disassembled. Fig. 96 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower part of the pachinko machine cut in the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 below the game board placement section 501c, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker unit 620a from behind, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d from behind.

The speaker unit 620a comprises a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 in the main frame base unit 500 below the game board placement section 501c, a main frame speaker 622 attached facing forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main frame speaker 622 and open forward.

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction and is equipped with a circular speaker mounting portion 621a that is formed of multiple slits that penetrate from front to back near the left end when viewed from the front and extend up and down, a front recessed portion for space 621b that is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front, and a connection portion 621c that protrudes downward from the underside of the front recessed portion for space 621b, extends in the left-right direction, and opens diagonally downward toward the rear.

The main frame speaker 622 is attached from the rear side to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 facing forward. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that its lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. The main frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs low-pitched sounds.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, with the part behind the main frame speaker 622 protruding rearwards the most, and is formed so that the protrusion rearwards becomes smaller in a stepped manner as it moves to the right as viewed from the front. This ensures that there is sufficient space behind the speaker box 623 to the right of the center as viewed from the front, allowing the base unit 620b, power supply unit 620c, etc. to be placed. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface except for the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621.

The speaker unit 620a, together with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623, forms part of an enclosure 624 that contains the sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622. This enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting part 621a in the front view of the speaker cover 621, so even though the speaker box 623 is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount of protrusion rearward decreases as it moves to the right, a sufficiently large space is secured to the right of the main frame speaker 622.

When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a has the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 connected to the connection tube portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and the space behind the main frame speaker 622 is connected to the inner space 40a of the curtain board of the outer frame 2. Therefore, a large enclosure 624 can be formed behind the main frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, speaker box 623, curtain board front member 42, and curtain board rear member 43, and sound outputted to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 can be outputted (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain board front member 42.

In more detail, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main frame speaker 622 (part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right when viewed from the front with a relatively wide depth and is connected to the lower frame assembly 40 via the connection part 621c and the connection tube part 43a. Therefore, the sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622 can be transmitted to the lower frame assembly 40 without attenuating the low-frequency range in particular, and the transmitted low-frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42.

In this case, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 is radiated in an inverted phase, so that it resonates to amplify the sound output from the front of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200, and a loud sound with deep bass can be output even if the diameter of the main frame speaker 622 is small.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, allowing the player to hear deep bass sounds. This allows the player to hear a rich bass sound from the sound output from the front of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the platter unit 200, and the sound output from the rear of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2.

The speaker unit 620a has a through hole 621d formed in the speaker cover 621, penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower part of the speaker mounting part 621a and the front recess for space 621b, and a through tube 623a formed in the speaker box 623, which extends cylindrically and penetrates in the front-rear direction, communicating with the through hole 621d. When assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted into the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the circuit board unit 620 includes a front base 625 that is attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a portion of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a rear base 626 that is attached to the rear side of the front base 625 and has a power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface.

The base unit 620b is formed by the front base 625 and the rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and includes a ball removal guide section 627 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full-ball path unit 610 and guides it to the right when viewed from the front, a discharged ball receiving section 628 that opens upward to the right when viewed from the front downstream of the ball removal guide section 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5, and a ball discharge port 629 that discharges the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guide section 627 and the discharged ball receiving section 628 downward.

The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens to the left at the top of the left side when viewed from the front, and the downstream end opens to the left end side of the discharged ball receiving section 628. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball removal guide section 627 faces so that the opening of the upstream end coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, and can receive the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c and guide it to the discharged ball receiving section 628.

The discharged ball receiving section 628 is open upward and extends left and right. The bottom surface of the discharged ball receiving section 628 is connected to the bottom surface of the ball removal guide section 627 at the left end when viewed from the front, and is inclined so that it becomes lower as it goes to the right.

The base unit 620b guides game balls B removed from the ball tank 552 and game balls B discharged from the game board 5 to the right as viewed from the front using the ball removal guide section 627 and discharged ball receiving section 628, and then discharges them downward from the ball discharge port 629, making it easier to ensure a wider space to the left of the center in the left-right direction as viewed from the front. This makes it possible to make the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a wider, allowing the player to hear a sound with richer bass than conventional pachinko machines.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover 631 attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 96) housed in the payout control board box 632. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 or the like, by pressing the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the tray unit 200, or the like. The payout control board box 632 is formed so that it leaves a trace of opening and closing. This makes it possible to detect any illegal modifications to the payout control board 633, thereby enhancing the deterrent effect against illegal acts.

The interface unit 620e includes a board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 so as to cover the rear side of the interface board 635.

The board base 634 is attached to the rear of the speaker box 623 at the part that protrudes furthest to the rear, behind the main frame speaker 622. One end of the connection cable 503 (on the main frame 4 side) is connected to the interface board 635. The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, etc., and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the board base 634 (interface board 635) when viewed from the front, so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The rear cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 81. The rear cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The right side of the rear cover 640 in a front view is attached to the rear end extending vertically of the rear extension part 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and the left side is attached to the rear cover attachment part 551i of the payout base 551 and the rear cover attachment part 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The rear cover 640 is formed in a shape such that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front, and is formed so that when assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear surface is positioned approximately on the same plane as the rear surface of the upper part 551d of the back plate of the payout base 551. The rear cover 640 has multiple slits 641 formed therein that penetrate from front to back and extend vertically. In this embodiment, the rear cover 640 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be seen from the rear of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 97. Fig. 97(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit seen from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 is equipped with a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side of the rear extension 501j of the main frame base 501 and extends vertically, a number of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the door frame 3, a number of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the outer frame 2, and a transfer cylinder 654 that protrudes forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 and moves the door frame hooks 652 or outer frame hooks 653 up and down depending on the direction of rotation.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from a position above the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651 and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main frame 4, the multiple (three) door frame hooks 652, the transmission cylinder 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 protrude forward from the front surface of the main frame base 501. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main frame base 501, and when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, the front end of the transmission cylinder 654 engages with the rotation transmission member 133 of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

The locking unit 650 has multiple (three) door frame hooks 652 that engage with the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and multiple (two) outer frame hooks 653 that engage with the upper hook member 24 and lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key that corresponds to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front, the multiple door frame hooks 652 move upward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the main frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the multiple outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4, sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward moves the multiple outer frame hooks 653 downward, and the main frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. In this way, the lock between the main frame 4 and the door frame 3, or between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2, can be unlocked.

When locking between the main frame 4 and the door frame 3, or between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the hooks for the door frame 652 and the hooks for the outer frame 653 are inclined so that the tips become thinner, so that when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, or the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the hooks for the door frame 652 and the hooks for the outer frame 653 move downward or upward to overcome the hooking member 116, the upper hooking member 24, and the lower hooking member 25, and then are locked by the biasing force of the locking spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 98 to 105. Figure 98(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line B-B in (a). Figure 99 is an enlarged view of the upper part of the main body frame in a perspective view seen from the rear. Figure 100(a) is a perspective view seen from the front and above in a state in which the tank rail and the like are assembled to the ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front and below. Figure 101 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of Figure 100(a). Figure 102 is an explanatory diagram showing the area through which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame flow. Figure 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. Figure 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. Figure 105 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the rear of the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 is made up of a frame-shaped main body frame base 501 whose rear portion can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and which is detachably and hinge-rotatably attached to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; an inverted L-shaped payout base 551 attached along the upper and left edges of the rear side of the main body frame base 501 when viewed from the front; a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551, which is box-shaped (container-shaped) and extends left and right, and is open upward; and a tank 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552, which is groove-shaped and opens upward, and extends leftward. The tank rail 553 includes a first rail cover 554 attached to a portion of the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, spaced to the left of the first rail cover 554 when viewed from the front, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 for paying out game balls B to the player.

The ball tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a that is shaped like a rectangle extending in the left-right direction when viewed from the top, with the left side slanted lower when viewed from the front, a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c that extend upward from the front and rear edges of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e that extend upward from the left and right edges of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed like a container with an open top. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from island facilities such as an amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

The spherical tank 552 also has an overflow section 552f that is cut out from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining upper outer periphery edge. This overflow section 552f is formed over a length of approximately 3/4 of the left-right length of the front wall 552b, from the end side of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b to the end side on the opposite side (the right side wall 552e side).

The right end (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the inside of the ball tank 552 in front view, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide section 553a that extends from the upstream area to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B. The main guide section 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower as it approaches the left side when viewed from the front. In addition, the main guide section 553a is formed in a crank shape that extends from the right end side to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in a plan view, parallel to the axis extending from the right end side to the left in the left-right direction, and then extends diagonally from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it moves to the left, and then extends from there to the left end in parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. In the main guide section 553a, the tank rail 553 has a section that extends parallel to the axis extending from the left end to the right in the left-right direction, and extends to the upper end with the same width, and the upper end of this section is closed by attaching the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 to the upper end. In addition, in the section where the upper side is closed, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end), and at the downstream end, it is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) that allows only one game ball B to flow.

The tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed above the main guide section 553a, and has a bulging section 553b that bulges out wider than the width of the main guide section 553a so that multiple game balls B are lined up in a width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game balls B, and narrows in width from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guide section 553a. This bulging section 553b allows multiple game balls B that were wide in the width direction on the upstream side to be aligned so that the width becomes the width of one game ball B as they move downstream. The bulging section 553b is also formed so that the width becomes narrower as it moves from the upper end side to the lower main guide section 553a. As a result, the tank rail 553 can align multiple game balls B flowing through the bulging section 553b in a line in the width direction as they move downstream and downward.

The bulge 553b of the tank rail 553 has a three-dimensional curved shape with the center of curvature located on the inner side. The center of curvature of the bulge 553b is located above the main guide section 553a, so that the tank rail 553 has a slightly chamfered corner at the boundary between the main guide section 553a and the bulge 553b. In addition, the bulge 553b is formed with a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulge 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge 553b side acts changes in various directions depending on the position of the bulge 553b that it abuts, and the occurrence of ball jamming in the bulge 553b can be suppressed. In more detail, if the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends in a constant direction, a reaction force always acts on the game ball B circulating inside the bulging portion 553b from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b in a constant direction, and the reaction force is difficult to disperse, so the game ball B inside is always pushed in a constant direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and making it easier for ball jamming to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B, and the pushing direction of the multiple game balls B circulating inside is dispersed, making it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape and making it easier for ball jamming to occur.

The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if ball jamming occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location of the ball jam can be quickly identified. Therefore, ball jamming in the tank rail 553 can be quickly resolved, so that the interruption of play due to ball jamming can be shortened as much as possible, and the decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of play can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 can be seen from the rear through the tank rail 553, so when a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit of the game board 5, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, and belts can be confirmed with the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4, and the same effect as above can be achieved.

The main body frame 4 is provided in front of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and extends outward (to the left) from the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side when viewed from the front). It is equipped with an overflow surface 501m whose rear end side is at the same height as the overflow section 552f and inclined so that the front end side is higher in order to return the game balls B that have overflowed forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, and a bypass passage 552g that extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface 501m to above the bulge section 553b whose upper side is open on the tank rail 553, inclined so that the rear end side is lower, and inclined so that the side away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction (left side) is lower, and guides some of the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface section 501m.

The main frame 4 is provided with a discharge section 551j, which is provided on the opposite side of the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both the left and right outer sides of the bypass passage 552g, with a width in the left and right direction greater than the outer diameter of the game ball B and a bottom surface lower than the upper open portion of the tank rail 553, an external terminal board 558, which is provided on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g across the discharge section 551j and at a position lower than the overflow surface section 501m, and has multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and a terminal cover 551k which covers the upper side of the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558) and has an upper surface extending horizontally at a position higher than the overflow surface section 501m.

The overflow surface 501m is formed on the main frame base 501. The overflow surface 501m extends rearward in a flat plate shape from a position two to four times the outer diameter of the game ball B lower than the upper edge of the rear surface of the base main body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The overflow surface 501m is formed with a length in the left-right direction that is about 1/3 of the left-right length of the main frame base 501, and the left end when viewed from the front is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction from the left end of the main frame base 501. The overflow surface 501m is formed with a height from the front end to the rear end that is about 1/2 the outer diameter of the game ball B. When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, a gap of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflow surface 501m and the outer frame upper member 30.

The main frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m, and has flat left and right step portions 501n and 501o that extend approximately horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface 501m, and a plurality of ribs 501p that extend in the front-rear direction on both the left and right outer sides of the left and right step portions 501n and 501o with their upper ends higher than the left and right step portions 501n and 501o, and are arranged in a row in the left and right direction at intervals narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The left step portion 501n is formed so that its left-right length is shorter than its front-rear length. In addition, the left step portion 501n is inclined so that the rear right corner is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front. The right step portion 501o is formed so that its left-right length is longer than its front-rear length. Additionally, the right section 501o is inclined so that the rear left corner is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front.

The multiple ribs 501p of the main frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the gap between the outer frame 2 and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main frame base 501 is assembled to the main frame 4, in a front view, the right end of the overflow surface 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow section 552f of the spherical tank 552 in the left-right direction, the left end of the overflow surface 501m is aligned with the left end of the bypass passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step 501o is aligned with the right side wall 552e of the spherical tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the spherical tank 552. In the following, the container-like area surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as the spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g has a passage surface 552h that extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 in a flat plate shape, with the front end at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end inclined so as to be lower, and a weir portion that extends upward from the end edge of the passage surface 552h opposite the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end edge of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g in a front view extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the spherical tank 552, and extends obliquely so as to move forward from the left end side toward the right end side. Note that the left-right inclination of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may be horizontal.

When assembled to the main frame 4, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends along the front end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in a crank-like shape in the left-right direction and that extends diagonally to the left-right direction. In other words, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends diagonally to the left-right direction. As a result, the flow direction of the game ball B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g changes from the diagonal rear end to a direction perpendicular to the diagonal rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends approximately parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction approximately perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, so that the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g can be received at the wide portion of the tank rail 553. In addition, the game balls B are supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction approximately perpendicular (perpendicular) to the flow direction of the game balls B, which makes it difficult for the game balls B from the bypass passage 552g to cause ball clogging in the tank rail 553.

The bypass passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so that its rear end moves rearward as it approaches the downstream side of the tank rail 553. Therefore, when the game ball B is released from the bypass passage 552g toward the tank rail 553, the rear end that extends diagonally allows the game ball B to be released toward the upstream side, where the tank rail 553 is wider, rather than the downstream side, where the tank rail 553 is narrower. By releasing the game ball B into the wider area, it is possible to prevent ball jamming inside the tank rail 553.

In addition, the portion of the tank rail 553 where the game balls B are guided by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the rear of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left portion of the rear wall 552c when viewed from the front. Game balls B that pass under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flow through this portion. For this reason, in the portion behind the bypass passage 552g on the tank rail 553, the height of multiple game balls B stacked up in the vertical direction does not exceed the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). Therefore, a space (empty space) can be secured downstream of the ball tank 552 on the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, allowing game balls B to be stacked upwards, so that game balls B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and game balls B will not spill rearward from the tank rail 553.

The spherical tank 552 has a flat guide surface portion 552j that extends downward to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j is formed in such a shape that, in a front view, the right edge extends obliquely rearward from a position at about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position at about 1/9 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position at about 1/2 of the total length of the front-to-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, and from there extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position at about 1/3 of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-to-right direction.

The spherical tank 552 has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate the area surrounded by the right end edge of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-mentioned shape in a plan view and a straight line connecting the end of the right end edge on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side in the vertical direction. In addition, the spherical tank 552 has flat flange portions 552l extending outward in the left-right direction and in the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b at the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. The upper edge of the part of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edges of the two flange portions 552l are formed higher than the upper edges of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the upper surfaces of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o of the main body frame base 501).

When the spherical tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end (the right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the spherical tank 552. In addition, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends left and right in a crank shape in a plan view, and the portion to the left of it that extends straight left and right, are located (protrude) rearward from the spherical tank 552. The rear end edge of the left bypass passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends left and right in a crank shape in a plan view.

The discharge section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge section 551j extends rearward from the rear side of the flange section 552l on the left side as viewed from the front of the spherical tank 552 to the tank rail 553 so that it lowers in a stepped manner rearward from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the spherical tank 552, then extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (a position near the center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555), and then extends rearward.

The external terminal board 558 has multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a attached to the rear surface in a line in the left-right direction. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal whose grip opens by operating a lever to grip the tip of an electric wire. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the external terminal board 558 is disposed in front of the area where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at approximately the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, as shown by the white arrows in FIG. 102, the overflow surface 501m, the left stage 501n, the right stage 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are inclined so that the rear ends of the overflow surface 501m and the bypass passage 552g are lower, and the rear right corner of the left stage 501n and the rear left corner of the right stage 501o are lower. In addition, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide section 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end is lower when viewed from the front. In addition, the guide surface section 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side opposite the bottom wall 552a is lower.

And when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to supply from the island equipment, they can first flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552 over the overflow section 552f, which is the lowest part of the outer periphery upper edge, and the game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface section 501m, and the game balls B that flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface section 501m can be returned to the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface section 501m (see Figure 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent any further increase in the game balls B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from pressing against each other strongly in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure), and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball jamming) due to the game balls B interlocking with each other in the ball tank 552.

In addition, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. This makes it possible to avoid the game balls B that have accumulated on the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and prevents the game balls B from clogging in the ball tank 552. In addition, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to prevent the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m from spilling outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a malfunction in which the game balls B that have spilled outside the main body frame 4 are pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, making it impossible to open or close the main body frame 4.

Furthermore, some of the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 onto the overflow surface 501m can be guided downstream of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position along the left side away from the ball tank 552. This allows the flow (pressure) of the game balls B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g to be directed downstream of the tank rail 553, preventing the game balls B from pushing against each other too strongly inside the tank rail 553 and preventing the game balls B from clogging.

In addition, at the outer circumferential upper edge of the ball tank 552, the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow section 552f is made higher than the overflow section 552f, so that the upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is higher than the overflow section 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface section 501m. As a result, the game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552 over the overflow section 552f and overflow into the overflow surface section 501m and flow from the overflow surface section 501m to the bypass passage 552g are blocked by the left side wall 552d on one side of the ball tank 552, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls B on the bypass passage 552g side from returning to the ball tank 552 side from the bypass passage 552g, and it is possible to prevent the game balls B from clogging in the ball tank 552 by pressing the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is higher than the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g), so that the game ball B can be prevented from overflowing from the ball tank 552 into the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. This prevents the game ball B from flowing in from the side (ball tank 552) into the bypass passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g can be made to flow in a constant direction from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the tank rail 553 on the rear end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be made to be in a constant direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pushed against each other and getting caught in the tank rail 553 due to the pressure being applied to the game balls B being in different directions, and it is possible to prevent the game balls B from becoming clogged.

In addition, the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guide section 553a that extends to the downstream end, so that when the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide section 553a, they are lined up in a row in the left-right direction, so that the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the downstream payout device 580. In addition, the tank rail 553 has a wide bulge section 553b in which multiple game balls B can be lined up in the open upper portion, so that the game balls B released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the portion closed at the top, and narrows in width from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guide portion 553a, so that as the multiple game balls B move downstream in the bulging portion 553b, they can be aligned in a line in the width direction. In addition, the portion closed at the top of the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow decreases toward the downstream end, so that the multiple game balls B that were stacked in multiple layers in the height direction on the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) can be aligned in a line by circulating them downstream through the portion closed at the top of the tank rail 553. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide the multiple game balls B in a line aligned in a line to the downstream side (payout device 580 side).

Furthermore, since it is equipped with the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and since the tank rail 553 is equipped with the bulge portion 553b, the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, so that in combination with the ball tank 552, more game balls B can be stored.

In addition, on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge section 551j in between, there is an external terminal board 558 with multiple wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the multiple wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558). Therefore, the wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game balls B supplied from the island equipment bounce or are supplied with force at the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface section 501m, it is difficult for them to reach (contact) the wire connection terminals 558a, etc., and there is no problem such as a short circuit or disconnection of the electrical wiring due to the game balls B contacting them.

In addition, since the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a face rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface 501m, even if the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces off the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, it is difficult for it to land on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. Even if the game ball B does land on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it is difficult for it to fall from the rear side, making it easier to avoid the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Furthermore, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 103) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing downstream against the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and makes it possible to prevent clogging of the game ball B in the ball tank 552.

In addition, even if the game ball B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island equipment bounces off the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m and lands on the left step 501n or right step 501o on both sides of the overflow surface 501m, as shown in Figure 103, the slope of these parts can guide the game ball B to the overflow surface 501m or the bypass passage 552g, preventing problems caused by the game ball B spilling outside the main frame 4.

In addition, because the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j when they flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553, the guide surface portion 552j can regulate the amount (height) of game balls B stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 so that it does not exceed the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) on the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, space (empty space) can be secured in which game balls B can be stacked on the upper side, and game balls B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are positioned in front of the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B will not be received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B inside the tank rail 553 and causing a malfunction.

[4-12. Other embodiments of tank rails, etc.]
Next, another embodiment of the tank rail 553 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 106 to 110. Fig. 106 is a perspective view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail when a pachinko machine equipped with a tank rail of another embodiment is viewed from the rear. Fig. 107(a) is a plan view showing the tank rail of Fig. 106 assembled together with a ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail of (a) viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the tank rail of (a) viewed from the rear. Fig. 108(a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail of Fig. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail of Fig. 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. Fig. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail of Fig. 107(a) cut along the kerk line. Fig. 110 is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the tank rail of Fig. 107 in cross section. In a tank rail 553A etc. of another embodiment different from the above, in addition to the tank rail 553A, a first rail cover 554A, a second rail cover 555A, and a ball straightening member 556A differ from the tank rail 553, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, and ball straightening member 556 of the above embodiment, and similar configurations are described using the same symbols.

The tank rail 553A in this embodiment straightens the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers them to the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560. This tank rail 553A extends to the left in the shape of a groove that is open upward. A first rail cover 554A is attached to the tank rail 553A so as to close the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A is provided to the left of the first rail cover 554A when viewed from the front, and a ball straightening member 556A is provided on the upper side of the second rail cover 555A. A ball stopper member 557 capable of preventing the flow of game balls B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107(a) and other figures, the tank rail 553A has a serpentine portion 553c that snakes back and forth downstream of the bulge portion 553b. This serpentine portion 553c can suppress the flow speed of the game balls B. The first rail cover 554A is attached upstream of the serpentine portion 553c (toward the ball tank 552).

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the serpentine portion 553c at the open upper end side of the tank rail 553A. The second rail cover 555A has a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A, a pair of protective walls 555b that extend upward from both front and rear ends upstream of the left-right center of the cover portion 555a, and an opening 555c that penetrates the cover portion 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a serpentine shape following the serpentine portion 553c at the portion where the serpentine portion 553c of the tank rail 553A is provided. The rectifying piece 556a of the spherical rectifying member 556A described later is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

The ball straightening member 556A has an upstream end that extends forward and backward and is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis. The ball straightening member 556A is provided between a pair of protective walls 555b above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A, and has a flat straightening piece 556a that penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A and protrudes into the tank rail 553A. This ball straightening member 556A abuts from above against the game balls B stacked in multiple layers in the tank rail 553A, making it easier to break up the layers of game balls B and align them in a row, and also prevents the uppermost game ball B from moving quickly downstream, preventing ball biting on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 553A etc. of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball straightening member 556A is located between the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A and below the upper end of the protective wall 555b. This makes it possible to prevent the electric wire (shown by the broken line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 provided on the front upper side of the part where the ball straightening member 556A is attached in the tank rail 553A from contacting the ball straightening member 556A from above. However, if the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a contacts the ball straightening member 556A from above, the weight of the electric wire may prevent the ball straightening member 556A from rotating upward even if the game ball B abuts against the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556A, and the ball straightening member 556A may not be able to fully exert its straightening effect on the game ball B. In contrast, in this embodiment, a pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball straightening member 556A, so that when a game ball B comes into contact with the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556A, the ball straightening member 556A can rotate upward, fully exerting the straightening effect and preventing ball jamming or ball clogging within the tank rail 553A.

In addition, since the tank rail 553A is provided with a serpentine portion 553c, the flow speed of the game balls B can be suppressed by the serpentine portion 553c. However, in the tank rail 553A, where the height narrows toward the downstream side, if the upper game balls B among the game balls B stacked in multiple layers move downstream first, ball biting is likely to occur. In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the flow speed of the game balls B can be suppressed by the serpentine portion 553c, so that the upper game balls B can be prevented from moving downstream first, and the occurrence of ball biting can be reduced.

As described above, the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevents the electric wires from coming into contact with the ball straightening member 556A, preventing ball clogging. This allows the tank rail 553A to be positioned near a terminal board (e.g., external terminal board 558) or control board to which many electric wires are connected, or allows the terminal board or control board to be positioned near the tank rail 553A to which many electric wires are connected, providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in the positioning of the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), terminal board, etc.

[4-13. Another embodiment of the board unit]
Next, a board unit 620A of another embodiment (second embodiment) different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 111 to 116. Fig. 111(a) is a front view of the board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the right front, and (c) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the left front. Fig. 112(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of Fig. 111(a) seen from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of Fig. 111(a) seen from the lower right rear. Fig. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Fig. 111(a) seen from the front, and Fig. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Fig. 111(a) seen from the rear. Fig. 115(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line KI-KI in Fig. 111(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line COOK in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line KE-KE in (a). Fig. 116 is a bottom view showing the rear part of the door frame in a pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of Fig. 111(a).

The board unit 620A of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 described above. In the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 described above. Here, the same reference numerals are used for configurations similar to those of the board unit 620 described above, and detailed explanations are omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 below the game board placement section 501c, a base unit 660 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker unit 620a from behind, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d from behind.

The base unit 660 is provided between the front base 661 and the rear base 662, and is made up of a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, a rear base 662 attached to the rear side of the front base 661 and having a power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface, and an out ball passage 663 through which game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5 flow, and a detection unit 666 for detecting game balls B flowing through the out ball passage 663 one by one. It is equipped with an out sensor 664 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and guides it to the right when viewed from the front, a ball removal and discharge passage 665 that is located behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and through which the game ball B guided by the ball removal and discharge section 627 flows, and a passage wall member 666 that is attached to the rear base 662 to close the rear side of the ball removal and discharge passage 665.

The front base 661 is formed in a box shape that is long from side to side and open to the front. The rear base 662 has a flat partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a roughly constant height in the vertical direction, with an out ball passage 663 and a ball removal guide portion 627 formed in front of the partition wall portion 662a, and a ball removal discharge passage 665 formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear on the side rear of the partition wall portion 662a.

The base unit 660 has a front base 661, a rear base 662, and a passage wall member 666 formed from transparent materials. Therefore, the ball removal guide section 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 are also formed transparent. Therefore, the inside of the ball removal guide section 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 can be clearly seen from the top and bottom of the base unit 660, making it easy to check for ball blockages, etc.

The out ball passage 663 is formed in front of a flat partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction of the rear base 662, with the front end open, and the open front end is closed by the front base 661.

The out-ball passage 663 has a ball discharge receiving section 663a that opens upward at approximately the center of the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1 and extends left-right, an out-ball straightening section 663b that straightens the game balls B received by the ball discharge receiving section 663a into a line while causing them to snake widely left-right, a downward guide section 663c that guides the game balls B straightened into a line by the out-ball straightening section 663b downward, and an out-ball discharge port 663d that opens downward at the lower end of the downward guide section 663c and discharges the game balls B downward from the underside of the base unit 660. The out-ball discharge port 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 116).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed so that its depth in the front-to-rear direction is approximately 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end is lower.

The out ball straightening section 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a toward the bottom of the ball discharge receiving section 663a so that the left end is lower. In addition, the depth of the out ball straightening section 663b in the front-to-back direction narrows as it moves downstream (leftward), and near the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving section 663a, the depth is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. In addition, the height of the part of the out ball straightening section 663b to the left of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a decreases as it moves downstream (leftward), and near the downstream end, the height is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. This allows the game balls B to be aligned in a row in the out ball straightening section 663b.

The lower guide portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball straightening portion 663b, which is below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and is curved in a small crank shape backward in the middle of the vertical direction so that the front wall is on the same plane as the rear wall (partition wall portion). As a result, the downstream end of the lower guide portion 663c (out-ball discharge port 663d) is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. The out sensor 664 is provided upstream of the cranked portion of the lower guide portion 663c. The cranked portion of the lower guide portion 663c is curved so that it does not have a portion extending horizontally, so that even if the game ball B passes through the out sensor 664 and hits the cranked portion, it will not jump up to the upper out sensor 664 side, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out sensor 664.

The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch that is highly durable and has a long lifespan, since the game ball B passes through it frequently.

The ball removal guide section 627 is located to the left of the ball discharge receiving section 663a in the out ball passage 663. The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens to the left at the top of the left side when viewed from the front, and the downstream side bends backward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall section 662a of the rear base 662, and is connected to the upstream end of the ball removal and discharge passage 665 (see Figure 115 (a) etc.).

The ball ejection passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. The ball ejection passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 in a state where it is open to the rear, and its rear end side is closed by a passage wall member 666. The rear end of this ball ejection passage 665 is located about one outer diameter of a game ball B forward of the rear end of the rear base 662. In other words, a gap of at least one game ball B is formed between the ball ejection passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

The ball ejection passage 665 has an upstream end (left end) connected to the downstream end of the ball ejection guide section 627, and has a horizontal guide section 665a that extends to the right of the ball ejection receiving section 663a at the same inclination as the ball ejection receiving section 663a of the out ball passage 663, a vertical guide section 665b that extends vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the horizontal guide section 665a to the underside of the rear base 662, and a ball ejection outlet 665c that opens downward at the downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide section 665b. The ball ejection outlet 665c is located slightly rearward of the out ball outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see Figure 116).

The ball ejection passage 665 also has multiple protrusions 665d that protrude inward alternately at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide section 665b. The ball ejection passage 665 allows the game ball B flowing through the vertical guide section 665b, which extends vertically downward, to alternately come into contact with the multiple protrusions 665d, thereby causing the game ball B to flow down in a zigzag pattern, thereby suppressing an increase in its flow speed, and suppressing the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection outlet 665c.

This ball removal and discharge passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage consisting of a horizontal guide section 665a and a vertical guide section 665b, so that when the ball removal lever 593 is operated to discharge the game balls B in the ball tank 552, many game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B that is shot into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then detected by the out sensor 664 and discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (remove) the game ball B in the ball tank 552, etc., the game ball B discharged to the ball removal passage 580b side by operating the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall through the ball removal guide portion 627 and the ball removal discharge passage 665, which are separate and independent from the out ball passage 663. As a result, only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately counted. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can calculate an accurate payout rate (ball payout rate) of game balls B based on the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664.

The number of game balls B (number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is the sum of the number of game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a and received by the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the special winning opening 2006, etc., and discharged from the game board 5, and the number of game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a and then received by the out opening 1008 without being received by any of the winning openings, and is the number of game balls B shot into the game area 5a (number of shot balls).

Note that the payout rate (ball output rate) changes depending on the game status, so the payout rate within a specified period (for example, per unit time, per specified time, per day, etc.) is calculated as follows: "Number of payouts within a specified period ÷ Number of balls out within a specified period = Payout rate within a specified period."

In addition, according to this embodiment, the base unit 620A of the main frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with an out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows, and the game ball B flowing through the out ball passage 663 is detected by an out sensor 664. Since the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected, there is no need to provide an out ball detection unit on the game board 5 that detects "out balls," and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified to reduce costs.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the rear end of the ball ejection passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. This means that the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665 are located away from the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, etc., and this reduces the impact on the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, etc., of electrical noise caused by static electricity and induced currents generated by the flow of many game balls B through the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is less likely to malfunction due to the flow of game balls B.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the game ball B, whose flow speed has been suppressed by the out ball straightening section 663b of the out ball passage 663, is detected by the out sensor 664. This makes it possible to weaken the impact on the out sensor 664 caused by the flow of the game ball B, thereby reducing the risk of the out sensor 664 being worn out and damaged early.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, the player will want many game balls B to be paid out, so if the displayed payout rate is high, the player will immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out many game balls B, making it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 to play on. Also, if the payout rate is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, if a player commits a fraudulent act that pays out many game balls B, the displayed payout rate will be higher than normal, making it easier for other players and staff at the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to notice the fraudulent act, which will make the player hesitate to commit the fraudulent act, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that cannot be seen by the player, amusement hall staff can see it and detect fraudulent activity for the same reasons as above. Also, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, this may be due to a malfunction within the pachinko machine 1 (e.g., obstructing nails N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay board, connectors, wiring cables, various sensors, etc.), making it possible to respond to the malfunction early and reducing the burden on the amusement hall.

Furthermore, since an out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows, there is no need to provide a structure (e.g., an out ball detection unit) for detecting game ball B discharged to the game board 5, which reduces the cost of the game board 5 and makes it possible to secure space on the game board 5 for the structure for detecting the game ball B being discharged. By providing a presentation device in the secured space, a pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be made that provides more entertainment for players.

In addition, since the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 has a vertical guide section 665b with multiple protrusions 665d protruding alternately, the speed at which the game balls B flow through the vertical guide section 665b can be reduced, thereby preventing damage to the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 caused by the impact of the circulating game balls B, and damage to the island equipment of the game hall that receives the game balls B discharged from the ball ejection/discharge passage 665.

In addition, a meandering out-ball straightening section 663b is provided in the out-ball passage 663, and a vertical guide section 665b with multiple protrusions 665d is provided in the ball removal and discharge passage 665, which can suppress the circulation speed of the game balls B, thereby reducing the electrical noise emitted from the game balls B circulating in the out-ball passage 663 and the ball removal and discharge passage 665. This reduces the impact on the power supply board 630 and payout control board 633, which are located nearby, and allows the pachinko machine 1 to malfunction less due to the circulation of game balls B.

In addition, because the out ball discharge port 663d and the ball ejection discharge port 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665, respectively, are opened downward, the game balls B are ejected downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665, so that the game balls B are less likely to collide with other pachinko machines or walls, etc., installed behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment, and damage to the other pachinko machines or walls, etc. can be avoided. In addition, because the game balls B are ejected downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665, the ejected game balls B are less likely to scatter, and it is possible to easily collect the game balls B ejected from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 on the island equipment side.

Furthermore, a base unit 660 having a ball ejection passage 665 and an out ball passage 663 is provided below the portion of the main frame 4 where the game board 5 is attached. This allows the game ball B that has been shot into the game area 5a on the game board 5 to be delivered to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660 simply by ejecting it downward. This allows the configuration for ejecting the game ball B on the game board 5 to be simple (easy) and reduces the cost of the game board 5.

In addition, since the ball ejection/discharge opening 665c of the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 and the out-ball ejection opening 663d of the out-ball passage 663 are located behind the outer frame 2, it is possible to prevent the game balls B discharged from the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 or the out-ball passage 663 from colliding with the outer frame 2. This prevents the game balls B flowing with force through the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 or the out-ball passage 663 from colliding with the outer frame 2, which would damage the outer frame 2, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is less likely to be damaged.

In addition, since the ball ejection/discharge opening 665c of the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection opening 663d of the out ball passage 663 are located behind the outer frame 2, there is no need to advance the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) that collects the game balls B on the island equipment side to a position overlapping with the outer frame 2, which reduces the effort required to set up the pachinko machine 1 and the effort required to move the pachinko machine 1.

[4-13a. Another embodiment of ball ejection in the base unit]
Next, another embodiment of the ball discharge in the above-mentioned substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 117 and Fig. 118. Fig. 117 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out-ball discharge port of the out-ball passage. Fig. 118(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is removable, and Fig. 118(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the out sensor in Fig. 118(a) has been removed.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 117 has a guide piece 667 for guiding the game ball B rearward provided at the out ball outlet 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. In more detail, in this embodiment, near the downstream end of the out ball passage 663, there is a junction 663e that joins with the ball removal and discharge passage 665. The junction 663e opens downward, and its open end serves as the out ball outlet 663d (ball removal and discharge outlet 665c). The guide piece 667 protrudes rearward a short distance from the front wall of the out ball outlet 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 117, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d abuts against the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally downward and rearward. As a result, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of a game hall, it is possible to easily release the game ball B to the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game ball B that is located behind the front of the island equipment (within the island equipment), and it is possible to reliably collect the game ball B on the island equipment side.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment shown in Figure 117, the guide piece 667 can direct the release direction of the game ball B diagonally downward and rearward, so that even if the out ball discharge outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663 is located near a position directly below the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 (a position near the front within the island equipment), the game ball B can be reliably received into a bucket or the like within the island equipment. Therefore, since it is possible to position the out ball passage 663 (out ball discharge port 663d) as far forward as possible, the space behind the out ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4 can be made wider, and the out ball passage 663 is moved away from the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc., which reduces the impact on the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc. of electrical noise caused by static electricity and induced currents generated by the flow of many game balls B through the out ball passage 663, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is less likely to malfunction due to the flow of game balls B.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 118, the out sensor 664 is detachably attached from below to the out ball discharge port 663d in the out ball passage 663. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the downstream end of the downward guide section 663c in the out ball passage 663, and is open downward to accommodate the out sensor 664, and a sensor cover 668 is provided to restrict the downward movement of the out sensor 664 accommodated in the sensor mounting recess 663f.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end of the lower guide section 663c, which is connected to the downstream end of the out-ball straightening section 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. In this embodiment, the base unit 660 is also formed from a transparent material, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be seen from the top and bottom of the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 has a main body 668a that extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and has its base end rotatably attached to the base unit 660, a through hole 668b that passes through the game ball B at a position that coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the main body 668a, and an elastically deformable locking claw portion 668c that is provided on the opposite side of the base end of the main body 668a.

The base end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the outer side of the sensor mounting recess 663f on the base unit 660, opposite the out ball straightening section 663b. The locking claw section 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to a locking section 663g provided on the outer side of the out ball straightening section 663b side relative to the sensor mounting recess 663f on the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 is rotated so that the locking claw portion 668c moves upward with the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 coincides with the out ball passage 663, and the locking claw portion 668c is locked with the locking portion 663g to close the sensor cover 668. The main body portion 668a abuts against the underside of the out sensor 664, restricting the downward movement of the out sensor 664, and the out sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 118 (a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and the game ball B that has flowed through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664 and then discharged downward through the through hole 668b. The through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663.

When replacing (removing) the out sensor 664, the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw portion 668c and release it from the locking portion 663g. Then, the sensor cover 668 is rotated around the base end side of the main body portion 668a so that the locking claw portion 668c moves downward, and the main body portion 668a of the sensor cover 668 moves away from the underside of the out sensor 664, and the out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 118(b)).

As shown in FIG. 118(b), in this embodiment, when the sensor cover 668 is rotated open, a certain amount of gap is created between the bottom end of the sensor cover 668 and the top end of the object at risk of contact, as indicated by the two-dot chain line (e.g., the top surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2, the top end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43, etc.), or between the sensor cover 668 and the bottom end of the main body frame 4. As a result, even if the main body frame 4 is opened or closed relative to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with the object at risk of contact, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 118, the out sensor 664 detects all game balls B that are inserted into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and so there is a risk that the out sensor 664 will wear out quickly and become damaged as many game balls B are circulated. However, as described above, the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, so that the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced.

In addition, according to this embodiment, even if the main frame 4 is opened and closed relative to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with objects that may come into contact with the outer frame 2 or the like, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. In detail, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, there is a risk that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 will come off due to vibrations caused by the contact of many game balls B, causing the sensor cover 668 to open. If the sensor cover 668 opens during play and the out sensor 664 falls downward, the out sensor 664 will no longer detect the game ball B even though the game ball B has been shot into the play area 5a, and the occurrence of an abnormality will be reported by the main control board 1310, etc. When this abnormality is reported, the game center staff will open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2 to check for the abnormality, but because there is a gap between the bottom end of the open sensor cover 668 and objects that may come into contact with it, such as the outer frame 2, the main frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with objects that may come into contact with it, preventing damage to the sensor cover 668.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment of FIG. 118, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at the outer portion opposite the out ball straightening portion 663b in the sensor mounting recess 663f, and since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be clearly seen from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out sensor 664. Therefore, when the game ball B becomes stuck in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be seen from the outside, so that the location where the game ball B is stuck can be identified at a glance, and the jam of the game ball B can be quickly resolved.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and stood upright, and it is easy to replace the out sensor 664 by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, and to check inside the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal and discharge passage 665 from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660, etc.

In addition, according to this embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so that a game that was interrupted due to damage to the out sensor 664 can be resumed early, which reduces the player's frustration caused by the interruption of the game and prevents a decrease in interest. It also prevents a decrease in the operating rate of this pachinko machine 1, and reduces the burden on the game hall.

Furthermore, one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660. Therefore, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when replacing the out sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 remains suspended from the base unit 660 and will not fall off, preventing the sensor cover 668 from being lost.

In addition, the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from below is attached rotatably around an axis in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction) at an outer portion near the out ball passage 663 through which many game balls B flow in the base unit 660. Therefore, the distribution of the downward force applied to the sensor cover 668 through the out sensor 664 due to the flow of the game balls B is large on the side (one end side) that is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, and relatively small on the side (other end side) of the locking claw portion 668c that is locked to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, even if a downward force acts on the sensor cover 668 through the out sensor 664 as many game balls B pass through the out sensor 664, most of it can be received on the one end side that is rotatably attached, so that the locking at the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side is less likely to be released, and the sensor cover 668 can be reduced from opening and causing the out sensor 664 to fall off.

[4-14. Third embodiment of substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 700 of the third embodiment, which is different from the above, will be described in detail with reference to Figures 119 to 128. Figure 119(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment, with the power supply unit, the dispensing control unit, and the interface unit omitted, as seen from the right front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the left front. Figure 120(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of Figure 119 as seen from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the lower right rear. Figure 121(a) is a plan view of the board unit of Figure 119, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line C-C-C in (a), (c) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line S-S in (a), and Figure 122 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line C-S in Figure 121(a).

Figure 123 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Figure 119 when disassembled and viewed from the front, and Figure 124 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Figure 119 when disassembled and viewed from the rear. Figure 125 (a) is an oblique view of the ball path member of the board unit of Figure 119 when viewed from the front, and (b) is an oblique view of the ball path member of the board unit of Figure 119 when viewed from the rear. Figure 126 is an explanatory diagram showing the elimination of ball jams in the board unit of Figure 119. Figure 127 is an explanatory diagram showing the prevention of the intrusion of linear illegal tools in the board unit of Figure 119. Figure 128 is an explanatory diagram showing the removal of debris in the board unit of Figure 119.

The board unit 700 of the third embodiment differs from the board unit 620 and board unit 620A described above only in the configuration of the base unit 710, and is otherwise identical in configuration. Therefore, here, the same reference numerals are used for configurations similar to those of the board unit 620 and board unit 620A described above, and detailed descriptions are omitted. Also, in Figures 119 to 128, the power supply unit 620c, dispensing control unit 620d, and interface unit 620e are not shown.

The board unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 or board unit 620A. The board unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 below the game board placement section 501c, a base unit 710 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 710, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d from the rear.

This board unit 700 is equipped with a first ball path 701 through which game ball B released downward from the game board 5 can flow, a second ball path 702 that is provided behind the first ball path 701 and through which game ball b released downward from the game board 5 can flow, a first ball sensor 703 that detects game ball B flowing through the first ball path 701, a second ball sensor 704 that detects game ball b flowing through the second ball path 702, and a ball removal path 705 through which game ball B released from the lower ball removal path 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 flows. The first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 each have an entrance that opens upward, and the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 detect game balls B one by one and then discharge them downward.

In this embodiment, the game ball B received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 on the game board 5 is configured to circulate through the first ball path 701, and the game ball b received in the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the large winning port 2005, and the special winning port 2006 on the game board 5 is configured to circulate through the second ball path 702. In other words, the out balls are configured to circulate through the first ball path 701, and the safe balls are configured to circulate through the second ball path 702, so that the number of all out balls can be counted by the first ball sensor 703, and the number of all safe balls can be counted by the second ball sensor 704. As a result, if fraudulent activity is committed against a winning hole (winning hole sensor) such as the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the large winning hole 2005, and the special winning hole 2006 on the game board 5, the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side will differ from the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704, making it possible to detect fraudulent activity against a winning hole.

In further detail, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 comprises a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a portion of the speaker box 623 from the rear, a rear base 712 attached to the rear side of the front base 711 and having a power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface and a ball removal passage 705, a ball path member 713 provided between the front base 711 and the rear base 712 and having a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702, a security cover 714 provided on the front base 711 and the rear base 712 in an openable and closable manner to eliminate clogging of the game ball B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 and to prevent the intrusion of illegal tools, a passage wall member 715 attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closing the rear end side of the ball removal passage 705, and a frame relay board 716 attached to the rear side of the rear base 712. In the base unit 710, the front base 711, rear base 712, ball path member 713, and passage wall member 715 are made transparent.

The front base 711 is formed in a box shape that is long from side to side and open to the rear and upward. The ball path member 713 is housed inside the front base 711 from the rear. The front base 711 closes the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 with the front wall. The front base 711 has a ball receiving opening 711a that opens long in the left-right direction in the upper peripheral wall portion, and a resolution opening 711b that opens at a position from the left-right center to the right of the lower peripheral wall portion. When the front base 711 houses the ball path member 713 inside, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball receiving opening 711a. In addition, the front base 711 supports the security cover 714 on the front end side of the resolution opening 711b so that it can rotate around an axis extending in the left-right direction.

The rear base 712 is formed in a box shape that is long from side to side and open to the rear. The rear base 712 closes the rear end side of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 with its front wall. The rear base 712 has a ball removal path 705 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal path 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, guides it to the right when viewed from the front, and then guides it downward and discharges it. The ball removal path 705 is provided in the box-shaped rear base 712 and is entirely open to the rear. The rear end side of the ball removal path 705 is closed by the path wall member 715. The part of the ball removal path 705 of the rear base 712 that is located above the speaker box 623 (the part on the left end side when viewed from the front) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711 and the rear side is closed by the path wall member 715.

The rear base 712 also has a first discharge guide section 712a that receives the game ball B that has flowed through the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward, and a second discharge guide section 712b that receives the game ball B that has flowed through the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward. The inlet sides of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b protrude forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, and the inlet of the first discharge guide section 712a opens forward, while the inlet of the second discharge guide section 712b opens upward. The outlets of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b are provided at the same position in the front-to-rear direction. The rear side of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b is open backward from the front wall, and the rear end side is closed by the passage wall member 715.

In the rear base 712, the outlets of the ball removal passage 705, the first discharge guide section 712a, and the second discharge guide section 712b are located to the left of the release opening 711b of the front base 711 when viewed from the front, and are arranged in order from left to right. The outlet of the ball removal passage 705 is wider forward at the front end and narrower rearward at the rear end than the outlets of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b (see FIG. 120(b)). In other words, the outlet of the ball removal passage 705 is larger (wider) in the front-to-rear direction than the outlets of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted from the rear into the box-shaped front base 711 and housed therein. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702. The ball path member 713 has a left wall portion 713a extending vertically downward from the upper end at the right end, an upper left shelf portion 713b sloping downward from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a toward the right, a stepped wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, an upper right shelf portion 713d sloping downward from the lower end of the stepped wall portion 713c toward the right, a straightening wall portion 713e extending diagonally downward to the left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a straightening wall portion 713e extending diagonally downward to the right from the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e. It has a lower shelf 713f that rises to the right from a position separated to the right of the upper right shelf 713d and extends further to the right than the upper right shelf 713d, a right wall 713g that extends vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf 713f to approximately the same height as the upper end of the left wall 713a, an upper wall 713h that extends leftward from the upper end of the right wall 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf 713d, and a U-shaped groove wall 713i that is connected to the left end of the upper wall 713h and opens upward. The left end of the groove wall 713i is located to the right of the center of the upper right shelf 713d in the left-right direction.

The ball path member 713 also has an upper lower wall portion 713j extending leftward from the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e, a middle wall portion 713k extending vertically upward from the left end of the upper lower wall portion 713j to the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b, a eaves portion 713l extending leftward from the middle of the left side of the middle wall portion 713k, a hanging wall portion 713m extending vertically downward from near the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, and a lower lower wall portion 713n extending leftward from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 713m in parallel with the upper lower wall portion 713j. The portion of the lower lower wall portion 713n located below between the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is cut out at the top and bottom to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through.

The ball path member 713 further includes a plurality of blocking ribs 713o that extend downward from the undersides of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h and are spaced apart in the left-right direction. The ball path member 713 also includes a flat partition wall portion 713p that divides the space surrounded by the left wall portion 713a, the upper left shelf portion 713b, the step wall portion 713c, the upper right shelf portion 713d, the straightening wall portion 713e, the lower shelf portion 713f, the right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the upper lower wall portion 713j, the middle wall portion 713k, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower lower wall portion 713n into front and rear portions.

The ball path member 713 also has a number of notches 713q in the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f, which are recessed from the front and rear ends of each of the notches 713q toward the partition wall portion 713p. Each of the notches 713q is arranged so that when assembled to the board unit 700, a gap is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712 that is smaller in the front-to-rear direction than the radius of the game ball B, and dirt and dust in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward through the gap.

The ball path member 713 is provided in a region between the flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has multiple guide protrusions 713r extending to the left and right.

Furthermore, the ball path member 713 has a front sensor accommodating section 713s that is surrounded by the upper lower wall section 713j, the hanging wall section 713m, and the lower lower wall section 713n in front of the partition wall section 713p and accommodates the first ball sensor 703, and a rear sensor accommodating section 713t that is surrounded by the upper lower wall section 713j, the hanging wall section 713m, and the lower lower wall section 713n in rear of the partition wall section 713p and accommodates the second ball sensor 704.

The first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are accommodated in the front sensor housing 713s and the rear sensor housing 713t so that the detection holes of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are located below the area between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, that is, with the detection holes facing right. Although not shown in the figure, the wiring cables extending from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 extend leftward from the front sensor housing 713s and the rear sensor housing 713t beyond the middle wall portion 713k.

The ball path member 713 has a first ball guide section 713u that is provided on the underside of the lower wall section 713n at a position forward of the partition wall section 713p, and that protrudes downward and is open to the rear. When the first ball guide section 713u is assembled to the board unit 700, the right half of the rear end side is closed by the front face of the rear base 712, and the left half faces the inlet side of the first discharge guide section 712a of the rear base 712. The first ball guide section 713u can guide the game ball B that flows downward from between the straightening wall section 713e and the lower shelf section 713f in front of the partition wall section 713p to the right and then to the rear, and deliver it to the first discharge guide section 712a of the rear base 712.

On the other hand, behind the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, below the portion of the lower wall portion 713n that opens downward (the portion of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing portion 713t), there is an inlet that opens upward to the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712. This allows the game ball B that flows downward from between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f behind the partition wall portion 713p to be handed over to the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the resolution opening 711b in the front base 711. The right end of the upper right shelf 713d is located to the right of the right end of the resolution opening 711b in the front base 711. The left end of the lower shelf 713f is located to the left of the left end of the resolution opening 711b in the front base 711. Therefore, the upper part directly above the resolution opening 711b of the front base 711 is covered by the straightening wall 713e. The upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f are inclined in a straight line. On the other hand, the straightening wall 713e is inclined in a curved line, and is curved so that the left end side faces vertically downward. The distance (height) between the flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is inclined to become narrower toward the left so that the left end is at a height that allows one game ball B to pass through. The flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f can straighten multiple game balls B in a line and guide them downward.

As described above, the space between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is formed so that the vertical dimension narrows as it moves to the left (the downstream direction of the flow of the game balls B). Therefore, depending on the amount of game balls B in circulation, there is a risk that multiple game balls B may get caught between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, causing ball jamming (see FIG. 126). Since the straightening wall portion 713e is located above the release port 711b, if ball jamming occurs between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 is opened to open the release port 711b, and a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f from below through the release port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f, and the tool can be used to poke the game balls B that have gotten caught to release the ball jamming.

The lower shelf 713f is provided with a notch 713q for clearing jammed balls and allowing dirt and dust to fall downward, so there is a risk that a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire or a catheter could be inserted from below through the notch 713q into the upper part of the lower shelf 713f (the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702), and the tip of the illegal tool could be extended upward from the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702), allowing a fraudulent act to be committed against the game board 5 located above. The insertion of such illegal tools is not limited to the lower shelf 713f, and there is a similar risk in the upper left shelf 713b and upper right shelf 713d, where the notch 713q is provided.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the lower surface of the upper wall portion 713h are provided with a plurality of flat blocking ribs 713o spaced apart in the left-right direction and extending downward, so that even if the tip of a linear illegal tool tries to move along the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it abuts against the blocking rib 713o and can prevent the tip from moving, thereby preventing further insertion of the illegal tool (see FIG. 127). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of illegal acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the present pachinko machine 1 is installed, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

In addition, in the areas to the right of the middle wall 713k in the upper right shelf 713d and the upper left shelf 713b, the lower and left and right sides are closed off by the flow straightening wall 713e, the upper lower wall 713j, and the middle wall 713k, which do not have the notch 713q. Therefore, unauthorized tools cannot be inserted from below through the notch 713q in the corresponding areas of the upper right shelf 713d and the upper left shelf 713b, and unauthorized acts cannot be performed through the notch 713q in those areas.

As described above, the ball path member 713 has multiple notches 713q on the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f, so that dirt and dust can be discharged downward through the notches 713q (see FIG. 128). Dirt and dust discharged downward through the notches 713q located above the front sensor housing portion 713s and the rear sensor housing portion 713t on the upper left shelf portion 713b is contained in the space surrounded by the straightening wall portion 713e, the upper lower wall portion 713j, and the middle wall portion 713k. This prevents dirt and dust from adhering to the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 contained in the front sensor housing portion 713s and the rear sensor housing portion 713t.

In addition, a wiring cable is connected by a connector to the left end side of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the front sensor housing section 713s and the rear sensor housing section 713t, and the wiring cable and the connector protrude to the left from the front sensor housing section 713s and the rear sensor housing section 713t. In other words, the wiring cable and the connector of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 protrude to the left beyond the middle wall section 713k. In this middle wall portion 713k, the eaves portion 713l extends to the left from the upper portion of the front sensor housing portion 713s and the rear sensor housing portion 713t on the left side surface, so that dirt and dust that falls downward through the cutout portion 713q formed in the upper left shelf portion 713b is guided to the left by the inclination of the eaves portion 713l and is prevented from falling onto the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, which protrude leftward beyond the middle wall portion 713k, thereby avoiding the occurrence of problems caused by dirt, etc.

The base unit 710 forms a first ball path 701 by the left wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, step wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, straightening wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, groove wall portion 713i, first ball guide portion 713u on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, and the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712, and forms a second ball path 702 by the left wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, step wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, straightening wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, groove wall portion 713i on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, and the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The security cover 714 is formed in a flat plate shape, and is attached near the front end of the resolution opening 711b of the front base 711 in a state in which the front end side can rotate around an axis in the left-right direction. The security cover 714 also has an elastic locking part 714a at the rear end side that is locked to the rear base 712. As shown in FIG. 122, when the security cover 714 is locked to the rear base 712 with the elastic locking part 714a locked horizontally, the resolution opening 711b is closed, and when the security cover 714 is unlocked and rotated so that the rear end side is positioned downward and is locked vertically, the resolution opening 711b is opened. In other words, the security cover 714 can open and close the resolution opening 711b.

The security cover 714 can close the elimination opening 711b of the front base 711 by closing it, so that it is possible to prevent a linear illegal tool from being inserted into the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702) through the elimination opening 711b. In addition, when a ball jam occurs between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713, the security cover 714 can open the elimination opening 711b of the front base 711 by opening it, so that a rod-shaped tool can be inserted between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f from below through the elimination opening 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f to eliminate the jammed game ball B. This ball jam elimination work is performed with the main body frame 4 open forward relative to the outer frame 2.

When the release opening 711b is open (vertical), the lower end (the end on the elastic locking portion 714a side) of this security cover 714 is located below the height (here, the height shown by the dashed line in FIG. 122) of the object at risk of contact (here, the connecting tube portion 43a of the back panel member 43 in the outer frame 2). Therefore, even if the main frame 4 is opened forward relative to the outer frame 2 to release the ball jam of the game ball B in the ball path member 713, and then the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 with the security cover 714 open, the open security cover 714 abuts against the object at risk of contact (the connecting tube portion 43a of the back panel member 43), and the main frame 4 cannot be closed. This makes it possible to avoid forgetting to close the security cover 714, and ensures that the security cover 714 is closed, thereby enabling the security cover 714 to exert its security function.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the security cover 714 opens for some reason while the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, opening the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 in this state will cause an object that may be in danger of coming into contact with the open security cover 714 from the front. However, since the front end of the security cover 714 is attached so as to be rotatable about an axis in the left-right direction, when an object that may be in danger of coming into contact with the security cover 714 comes into contact with the security cover 714 from the front, the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction. This allows the main frame 4 to be opened without the security cover 714 getting caught on an object that may be in danger of coming into contact, thereby preventing damage to the security cover 714 or the object that may be in danger of coming into contact.

In addition, in this embodiment, the security cover 714 is designed to remain closed because it is rare for game balls B to become stuck between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f. Therefore, the elastic locking portion 714a is set to lock tightly so that the security cover is difficult to open.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712, and closes the rear end side of the ball removal passage 705, which is open to the rear. The passage wall member 715 also closes the portion of the rear base 712 that is open to the rear at the outlet side of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b, and can discharge the game balls B that have circulated through the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b downward. Furthermore, the passage wall member 715 and the rear base 712 sandwich the frame relay board 716, and cover the rear side of the frame relay board 716.

The frame relay board 716 is sandwiched between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715. The frame relay board 716 is for relaying the connection between the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704 of the door frame 3 and the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 121(a), the base unit 710 of this embodiment has the upper left shelf 713b and a part of the upper right shelf 713d of the ball path member 713 facing upward from the ball receiving port 711a of the front base 711, and can receive all game balls B released downward from the game board 5. The game balls b that fall to the upper left shelf 713b or the upper right shelf 713d through the ball receiving port 711a roll to the right and flow down from the right end of the upper right shelf 713d onto the lower shelf 713f. The game balls B that flow down to the lower shelf 713f roll to the left on the lower shelf 713f. At this time, if multiple game balls B are stacked up and down on the lower shelf 713f, they are broken up by the upper straightening wall 713e so that they are lined up as they move to the left.

The game ball B that rolls to the left on the lower shelf 713f falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf 713f, and if it is forward of the partition wall 713p, it is detected by the first ball sensor 703 housed in the front sensor housing 713s, passes through the first ball guide 713u, and is discharged downward through the first discharge guide 712a of the rear base 712. On the other hand, if it is behind the partition wall 713p, it is detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing 713t, and is discharged downward through the second discharge guide 712b of the rear base 712.

In this way, in the base unit 710 of this embodiment, the game ball B flows through separate paths in front of and behind the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 and is discharged downward, with the first ball path 701 being the side in front of the partition wall portion 713p and the second ball path 702 being the side behind the partition wall portion 713p. Therefore, the game ball B that falls forward of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 from the game board 5 flows through the first ball path 701 and can be discharged downward after being detected by the first ball sensor 703. On the other hand, the game ball B that falls backward of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 from the game board 5 flows through the second ball path 702 and can be discharged downward after being detected by the second ball sensor 704.

The base unit 710 can also discharge game balls B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 to remove game balls B from the ball tank 552, etc., downward through the ball removal passage 705 of the rear base 712. Game balls B discharged downward from the first discharge guide section 712a (first ball path 701), second discharge guide section 712b (second ball path 702), and ball removal passage 705 of the base unit 710 are delivered to a section (out receiving section, bucket, etc.) on the island equipment side that collects game balls B.

According to the base unit 710 in the board unit 700 of this embodiment, multiple notches 713q are provided in the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f, so that dirt and dust can fall through the notches 713q and be removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, thereby preventing dirt and the like from interfering with the flow of the game ball B and suppressing the occurrence of ball clogging, etc.

In addition, since the front base 711, rear base 712, ball path member 713, and passage wall member 715 are made transparent, by opening the door frame 3 forward relative to the main body frame 4 and removing the game board 5 from the main body frame 4, it is possible to easily check from above the base unit 710 (substrate unit 700) whether or not game ball B is stuck in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702). In addition, in the area where the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713 align the game balls B in a row, a notch portion 713q is provided in the lower shelf portion 713f. Therefore, if balls become jammed between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, by opening the main body frame 4 forward relative to the outer frame 2 and opening the security cover 714, a rod-shaped tool can be inserted from below between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the release opening 711b and the notch portion 713q, and the ball jam can be released using the tool.

Furthermore, a downwardly opening release port 711b is provided below the flow straightening wall portion 713e in the lower shelf portion 713f, and a security cover 714 is provided to close the release port 711b. As a result, the ball jam can be released through the release port 711b as described above. In addition, by keeping the release port 711b closed by the security cover 714 under normal conditions, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools from being inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 from the release port 711b, and a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against illegal activities can be provided.

In addition, the security cover 714, which opens and closes the release opening 711b, is opened and closed by rotating it around a left-right axis at the front end. Therefore, if an attempt is made to close the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 while forgetting to close the security cover 714, the security cover 714 will come into contact with an object that may be in danger of contact (the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43), making it impossible to close the main frame 4. This makes it possible to make the user aware that the security cover 714 has been left closed, and allows the security cover 714 to be closed reliably, thereby enabling the security cover 714 to exert its security function.

Furthermore, the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the lower surface of the upper wall portion 713h are provided with a plurality of flat blocking ribs 713o spaced apart in the left-right direction and extending downward, so that even if the tip of a linear illegal tool tries to move along the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it abuts against the blocking rib 713o and the tip movement is prevented, and further insertion of the illegal tool can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of illegal acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall where the present pachinko machine 1 is installed, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

In addition, as described above, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are configured to form a complex distribution path that meanders and cranks due to the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713, so that even if a linear illegal tool is inserted from the exit side of the first discharge guide portion 712a or the second discharge guide portion 712b, the intrusion can be prevented by the complex path, and the intrusion of the illegal tool into the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be prevented.

In addition, since the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can detect (count) all game balls B released from the game board 5, there is no need to provide a structure (e.g., an out ball detection unit) for detecting game balls B discharged onto the game board 5, which reduces the cost of the game board 5 and makes it possible to secure space on the game board 5 for the structure for detecting the game balls B being discharged. By providing a presentation device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be made to be more entertaining to players.

In addition, because out balls circulate along the first ball path 701 and safe balls circulate along the second ball path 702, by comparing the number of safe balls counted on the game board 5 with the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704, it is possible to determine whether or not fraudulent activity is occurring on the game board 5, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, the player will want many game balls B to be paid out, so if the displayed payout rate is high, the player will immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out many game balls B, making it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 to play on. Also, if the payout rate is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, if a player commits a fraudulent act that pays out many game balls B, the displayed payout rate will be higher than normal, making it easier for other players and staff at the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to notice the fraudulent act, which will make the player hesitate to commit the fraudulent act, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that cannot be seen by the player, amusement hall staff can see it and detect fraudulent activity for the same reasons as above. Also, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, this may be due to a malfunction within the pachinko machine 1 (e.g., obstructing nails N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay board, connectors, wiring cables, various sensors, etc.), making it possible to respond to the malfunction early and reducing the burden on the amusement hall.

In addition, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separate from the ball removal passage 705 for discharging the game balls B in the ball tank 552, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 do not count the game balls B that have been removed. Therefore, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can accurately count only the game balls B that have been released from the game board 5.

In the above embodiment, out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, but this is not limited to the above. Safe balls may flow through the first ball path 701 and out balls may flow through the second ball path 702, or game ball B discharged from the game board 5 may flow through either the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 regardless of whether it is a safe ball or an out ball.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the release opening 711b is opened and closed by rotating the security cover 714, but this is not limited to this, and the release opening 711b may be opened and closed by sliding it back and forth or left and right.

In the above embodiment, a single partition wall portion 713p is used to separate the game ball B that is released downward from the game board 5, and the game ball B is discharged through one of two ball paths separated at the front and rear of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. However, this is not limited to this, and the game board 5 may be provided with three or more ball paths separated at the front and rear by multiple partition wall portions, and the game ball B that is released from the game board 5 may be discharged downward through one of the ball paths.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 129 to 137. Fig. 129 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine with the center gadgets and the like made opaque. Fig. 130 is a perspective view of the game board in Fig. 129 as seen from the right front, Fig. 131 is a perspective view of the game board in Fig. 129 as seen from the left front, and Fig. 132 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the back. Fig. 133 is a schematic explanatory diagram of the wiring from the function display unit in the main control board. Fig. 134 is a front view of the game board with the center gadgets and the like made transparent. Fig. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components as seen from the front, and Fig. 136 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components as seen from the back. Fig. 137 is a front view of the game board in a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the game area in which the game balls circulate and the obstacle nails.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is inserted by a player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. The game area 5a is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, and a special winning opening 2006, which provide a player with a predetermined privilege (e.g., the payment of a predetermined number of game balls B) by receiving or passing through the game ball B. This game board 5 is for playing an entertaining game in which the handle 195 is operated to strike the ball B and the ball B circulates within the game area 5a so that the ball B is received by or passes through the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the gate 2003, the second starting hole 2004, the big winning hole 2005, and the special winning hole 2006 within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 comprises a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular external shape when viewed from the front, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, and a number of magnetic sensors 1050 that detect magnetic fields that act illegally within the game area 5a. A number of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 137, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 also includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit 1300 attached to the rear of the board holder 1200 and having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 169, etc.) that controls the game content that is played by shooting the game ball B into the game area 5a.

The game board 5 further includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, a peripheral control unit 1500 that is located on the rear side of the game panel 1100, a performance display device 1600 that is located in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined performance image, a panel relay board 1710 that is located on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a rear unit 3000 that is attached to the rear of the game panel 1100.

The performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear of the rear unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear of the performance display device 1600. A panel relay board 1710 is attached behind the performance display device 1600 on the rear of the rear unit 3000. The panel relay board 1710 is for relaying the connection between the main control board 1310 and the general winning port sensor 3001, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the large winning port sensor 2402, the special winning port sensor 2601, the V winning port sensor 3003, the losing port sensor 3004, the start port solenoid 2412, the attacca solenoid 2414, the special winning port solenoid 2612, the V distribution solenoid 3007, the magnetic sensor 1050, etc.

The front unit 2000 comprises a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 which are always open to receive game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a, a first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive game balls B at a different position in the game area 5a from the plurality of general winning openings 2001, a gate 2003 which is always open to receive game balls B at a further different position in the game area 5a, a second starting opening 2004 which is capable of receiving game balls B depending on the result of a general lottery which is drawn when game ball B is received by gate 2003, and a ball input to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. The large prize opening 2005 allows the game ball B to be received depending on the first or second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B, the special prize opening 2006 allows the game ball B to be received depending on the first or second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, the V prize opening 2007 and the losing opening 2008 provide an opportunity to receive the game ball B received into the special prize opening 2006, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 that detect magnetic fields acting fraudulently within the game area 5a.

The front unit 2000 also includes a start port unit 2100 that is attached directly above the bottom end of the play area 5a in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002; a side unit 2200 that is attached to the left of the start port unit 2100 as viewed from the front, along the inner rail 1002, and has three general winning ports 2001; an upper left side unit 2300 that is attached slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 as viewed from the front; a first attacca unit 2400 that is located to the right of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the play area 5a as viewed from the front, as viewed from the front, and has a second start port 2004, a large winning port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2021; and a frame-shaped center device 2500 that is located above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the play area 5a as viewed from the front.

The front unit 2000 also includes a second attacca unit 2600, which is located above the first attacca unit 2400 to the right of the center reel 2500 and has a reel winning port 2006, a side right middle unit 2700, which is located above the second attacca unit 2600 and has one general winning port 2001 and a second sub-out port 2022, and a gate member 2800, which is located above the side right middle unit 2700 and has a gate 2003.

The first attacker unit 2400 is provided with a second start port sensor 2401 that detects game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and a large prize port sensor 2402 that detects game ball B received in the large prize port 2005. The second attacker unit 2600 is provided with a role winning port sensor 2601 that detects game ball B received in the role winning port 2006. The gate member 2800 is provided with a gate sensor 2801 that detects game ball B passing through the gate 2003.

The rear unit 3000 comprises a rear box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and is box-shaped with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a locking mechanism (not shown) which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 and allows the performance display device 1600 to be detachably attached. The rear unit 3000 also has a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 provided in the front unit 2000, a first start port sensor 3002 that detects a game ball B received in the first start port 2002, a V winning port sensor 3003 that detects a game ball B that is received in the special winning port 2006 and then allocated to the V winning port 2007, and a losing port sensor 3004 that detects a game ball B that is received in the special winning port 2006 and then allocated to the losing port 2008 (see FIG. 169, etc.).

The rear unit 3000 also includes a V winning port door 3006 that can move back and forth to open and close the V winning port 2007, and a V distribution solenoid 3007 that moves the V winning port door 3006 back and forth to distribute the game ball B received in the role winning port 2006 to either the V winning port 2007 or the losing port 2008.

Furthermore, the rear unit 3000 includes a rear front performance unit 3100 located near the front end of the rear box 3010, a rear upper performance unit 3200 located at the upper part of the rear box 3010 behind the rear front performance unit 3100, and a rear lower performance unit 3300 located at the lower part of the rear box 3010 below the rear upper performance unit.

[5-1. Previous components]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 138 and 139. Figure 138(a) is a perspective view of the front component and game panel of the game board as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and game panel as seen from the back. Figure 139(a) is a front view showing an enlarged upper right corner of the front component and game panel, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the soot line in (a), and (c) is an exploded perspective view of (a) disassembled into main components as seen from the front.

The front component 1000 is formed to be entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has an outer shape of an approximately square in front view, an inner shape of an approximately circular shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the play area 5a. This front component 1000 is equipped with an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in front view, along the clockwise circumferential direction, passing the upper end of the center in the left-right direction in front view, and extending to the upper right diagonal direction, an inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left diagonal direction in front view, and an out guide portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the play area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

The component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that slopes linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 when viewed from the front to near the right side of the component 1000, with the right end being slightly higher; a right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the lower right rail 1004 along the right side of the component 1000 to below the upper end of the outer rail 1001, with the upper part curved inward of the component 1000; and a collision stop section 1006 that connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 to the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and comes into contact with the game ball B that rolls along the outer rail 1001.

The component 1000 is also provided with a backflow prevention member 1007 that is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and can rotate only between a closed position in which it extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 to close the gap with the outer rail 1001, and an open position in which it rotates clockwise when viewed from the front to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is provided with an outlet 1008 that penetrates from front to back at the rear end of the out guide section 1003, at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 is discharged through the outlet 1008 to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component 1000 is provided with security recesses 1009 recessed rearward from the front end at the outside of the areas near the bottom ends of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extend approximately vertically, the underside of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 on the door frame 3 is inserted into this security recess 1009. As a result, the area between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area 5a through the gap between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

The component 1000 also has a notch 1010 that is cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 pass through the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 and face forward.

Furthermore, the component 1000 is provided with a function display unit mounting portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a stamp attachment portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner.

Also, the front component 1000 is made almost entirely transparent, allowing the game panel 1100 located at the rear to be viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 139, the component 1000 is recessed rearward from the front surface in a predetermined range along the right rail 1005 from the impact stopper 1006 in the upper right corner when viewed from the front, and is provided with a spec sticker attachment section 1021 on which a spec sticker 1020 showing the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 is attached, an insertion pin 1022 protruding cylindrically from the rear of the spec sticker attachment section 1021 for positioning the impact stopper 1006, and a separation hole 1023 penetrating forward and backward at the center of the insertion pin 1022.

The spec sticker attachment section 1021 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the spec sticker 1020, and is recessed backwards to a depth (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) greater than the thickness of the spec sticker 1020 (see FIG. 139(b)). In this spec sticker attachment section 1021, the horizontally extending portion at the bottom end and the straight portion of the portion extending vertically upward from the right end of said portion are set as contact surfaces for attaching the spec sticker 1020.

The insertion pin 1022 extends rearward from the rear surface of the spec sticker attachment portion 1021 to the same position as the rear end of the front component 1000. The impact stop portion 1006 is positioned by inserting the insertion pin 1022.

The separation hole 1023 penetrates the component 1000 from the front to the rear. The separation hole 1023 is circular and extends forward and backward with a constant inner diameter. When assembled to the game board 5, the front side of this separation hole 1023 is closed by the spec sticker 1020 affixed to the spec sticker attachment portion 1021, and the rear side is closed by the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, so that the inside of the separation hole 1023 is a closed space (closed space). As shown in the figure, the separation hole 1023 is provided at a position near the edge of the spec sticker attachment portion 1021 (spec sticker 1020).

In this embodiment, the separation hole 1023 has an inner diameter within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1023 is smaller than this, the diameter of the rod-shaped separation member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1023 will be smaller, making it easier to bend and potentially making it impossible to sufficiently press the spec seal 1020. If the separation hole 1023 is larger than this, bending will occur in the area of the separation hole 1023 in the spec seal 1020, potentially deteriorating the appearance of the spec seal 1020.

According to the component 1000 of this embodiment, if the spec sticker 1020 cannot be properly attached to the spec sticker attachment portion 1021 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1023 from the rear of the component 1000 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the spec sticker 1020 from the rear to the front, so that the edge of the spec sticker 1020 can be rolled forward and removed. The worker can then pull the rolled-up portion to easily remove the spec sticker 1020 from the spec sticker attachment portion 1021, and the spec sticker 1020 can be reattached.

In addition, with the component 1000 and the game panel 1100 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1023 from the rear of the component 1000 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the spec sticker 1020 from behind, making it easy to remove the spec sticker 1020 from the spec sticker attachment portion 1021, facilitating the replacement of the spec sticker 1020 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are separated, the spec sticker 1020 can be easily removed from the spec sticker attachment portion 1021 using the separation hole 1023, which makes it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, thereby reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, by attaching the spec sticker 1020 to the spec sticker attachment section 1021, the separation hole 1023 can be hidden from the front, which prevents the separation hole 1023 from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the presence of the separation hole 1023, making it difficult for players to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1023.

In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1023 is closed from the rear by the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 to which the spec sticker 1020 is affixed, and since there is no hole that penetrates all the way to the rear as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole, thereby preventing illegal acts.

In addition, because the separation hole 1023 is closed from the rear by the game panel 1100, even if an illegal tool is inserted from the front through the spec seal 1020 and into the separation hole 1023, the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) can prevent the illegal tool from being inserted further rearward (intrusion). This prevents the illegal tool from intruding into the game board 5 from the front through the separation hole 1023, preventing illegal acts from being committed. In addition, because the illegal tool penetrates the spec seal 1020 and leaves a mark on the spec seal 1020, it makes players hesitate to commit illegal acts, and a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against illegal acts can be provided.

In the above embodiment, the separation hole 1023 is provided in the spec sticker attachment section 1021, but this is not limited to this, and the separation hole may be provided in the area where the sticker is attached, such as the stamp attachment section 1012.

[5-2. Game Panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 138 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 are attached to it. The game panel 1100 is equipped with a flat panel board 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and made of transparent synthetic resin, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110, is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and has the rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 137 and the like).

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed from a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is set to the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that is sufficient to hold the obstacle nails N planted on the front side and the front unit 2000 attached. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is at the lowest position within the play area 5a, and the position corresponding to the outlet 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the bottom end. The panel plate 1110 also has multiple openings 1112 that penetrate from front to back and are used to attach the front unit 2000.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has multiple positioning holes formed as round holes and short long holes penetrating from front to back, and multiple engagement steps formed with a thin plate thickness that are spaced apart in the left-right direction at the upper and lower edges. The positioning holes are for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting protruding pins (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement steps are for removably attaching to the panel holder 1120 by engaging with engagement claws (not shown) or engagement pieces (not shown) of the panel holder 1120.

As shown in FIG. 138, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center gadget 2500, which is offset to the upper right and above the center when viewed from the front. This makes the panel plate 1110 frame-shaped, and the width perpendicular to the flow direction of the game balls B (the circumferential direction of the frame) when viewed from the front is wide enough to line up multiple game balls B on the left and below the center, and narrow enough that multiple game balls B cannot be lined up on the upper side.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has an external shape that is roughly rectangular and large enough to encompass the panel board 1110, and is thicker than the panel board 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (e.g., thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step (not shown) that is roughly the same size as the panel board 1110 and recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a through hole 1121 that penetrates the holding step in the front-to-rear direction and is roughly the same size as the game area 5a.

The panel holder 1120 also has a notch 1122 cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the previous component 1000, so that when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 penetrate the notch 1010 and the notch to face forward.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The out recess 1123 has an upper portion that communicates with the out port 1008.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of protruding pins that protrude forward from the holding step and are inserted into a plurality of positioning holes in the panel plate 1110, three engagement claws that are disposed outside the holding step and elastically engage with engagement steps at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and a pair of engagement pieces that protrude upward from the lower outer side of the holding step and respectively engage with two engagement steps at the lower edge of the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 can detachably attach the panel plate 1110 in a state where it is housed in the holding step by engaging the engagement steps at the lower edge of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement pieces from the front diagonally above, and then moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 backward to elastically engage the engagement steps at the upper and lower left inclined portions with the engagement claws. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position relative to the panel holder 1120.

This game panel 1100, together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, is formed transparent, so when assembled to the game board 5, the boundaries of the game area 5a are less clearly visible, giving the player a sense of openness, and although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change, the game area 5a appears larger (wider) to the player.

In addition, because the game panel 1100, along with the front component 1000, is made transparent, the light from the performance display device 1600, front unit 2000, rear unit 3000, etc. can be reflected or refracted forward (towards the player) to appear as if it is emitting light, further enhancing the overall decorativeness of the game board 5.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 135 and 136. The board holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 has an ejection part 1201 that is cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. When assembled to the game board 5, this board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the bottom and rear, and the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge section 1201 is located directly above the discharged ball receiving section 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. This allows it to receive all game balls B discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1008, and game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and rear unit 3000, and discharge them from the discharge section 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharged ball receiving section 628 below or the out ball passage 663 (see Figure 115). The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 135 and 136. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see Figure 169) that controls the game content and the payout of game balls B, a setting change board 1311 (see Figure 133) that can set game performance, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. The internal space formed by the cover body and the base body can accommodate the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311. Since the cover body and the base body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and back side of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether or not unauthorized modification has been performed, or whether or not an unauthorized IC is installed) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. In addition, the main control board box 1320 has multiple sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320, and traces of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be detected, enhancing the deterrent effect against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1311. The main control board 1310 is also connected to the function display unit 1400, the general prize opening sensor 3001, the first start opening sensor 3002, the gate sensor 2801, the second start opening sensor 2401, the large prize opening sensor 2402, the special prize opening sensor 2601, the V prize opening sensor 3003, the loss opening sensor 3004, the start opening solenoid 2412, the attacca solenoid 2414, the special prize opening solenoid 2612, the V distribution solenoid 3007, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the like.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is equipped with a setting key switch 1311a that can change and check the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, a setting change button 1311b that can select and change the setting value, and a setting change permission lamp 1311c that indicates the state in which changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (inter-board connection) (the connectors SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may be electrically connected via a harness). By this connector connection (inter-board connection), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the signal from the setting change button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The vertical distance dimension of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 is approximately the same as the vertical distance dimension of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310, and the horizontal distance dimension of the setting change board 1311 is shorter than the horizontal distance dimension of the main control board 1310, and the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 coincides with the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 with the center of its vertical distance dimension on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is arranged along the left side of the main control board 1310 with the center of its vertical distance dimension on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and turned is arranged below the center line of the setting change board 1311, a setting change button 1311b having a pressing operation portion is arranged above the center line of the setting change board 1311, and a setting change permission lamp 1311c that can emit light in a single color (for example, red) is arranged on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and to the upper left of the setting key switch 1311a (below the left of the setting change button 1311b). A setting display 1310g consisting of a single seven-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is located above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, a base monitor 1310h consisting of a row of six seven-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dot) is located below the center line of the main control board 1310 from the center to the right side, and a RAM clear switch 1310f with a push button is located near the center of the bottom side of the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is in the OFF state as the initial position when the setting key is ready to be inserted into the socket formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular socket is along the vertical direction). When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the socket and can be removed from the socket. Note that in this embodiment, the depth dimension of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so that even if the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 with the setting key inserted into the socket, the setting key and the components of other pachinko machines (or components of the island equipment of the game hall) installed in a row facing each other on the island equipment of the game hall will not interfere with each other and will not be damaged.

The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Also, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this embodiment, the two completely different functions of the setting key ON function and the decision key ON function can be realized by the setting key switch 1311a alone, depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated, and the setting key ON operation and the decision key ON operation can be performed together by the setting key switch 1311a alone.

Although the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body for each of these openings to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the "gaps" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and their corresponding openings to tamper with the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. The setting display 1310g and base monitor 1310h are housed in an internal space formed by the cover body and base body and cannot be touched at all, but because the cover body is molded transparent as described above, the setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be seen through the cover body.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern through which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be spaced apart, and on the main control board 1310 The wiring patterns through which various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are transmitted (i.e., the wiring pattern through which the signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the signal of the decision key ON of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern through which the signal of the OFF of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other), and the wiring patterns through which the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted are also formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, setting change button 1311b, and setting display 1310g are briefly described below. First, the case where the setting value is changed is briefly described, followed by the case where the current setting value is displayed for confirmation. Note that the setting key is an important key that can be used to change the setting value as well as to confirm the current setting value, so only a limited number of people, including the arcade manager, are permitted to possess it, and it is limited to two or three people.

When changing the setting value, when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage that causes a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key must be inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a into the setting key ON state, and the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" must be met. In other words, the person who actually changes the setting value must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation to turn the setting key switch 1311a into the setting key ON state, thereby turning the power to the pachinko machine 1 on. The above-mentioned "predetermined setting value change permission condition" may further include a condition that the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated to input an operation signal. In other words, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON state, and the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated. In this case, the setting value can be changed if the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" is satisfied.

A person who changes the setting value must first make sure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON. Next, the power switch 630a in Figure 7 is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1. This causes a setting key ON signal to be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value among setting values 1 to 6 set at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first time) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1311c from an off state to an on state.

When a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, a detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Each time a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current setting value by one based on the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. When it reaches the maximum setting value of 6, it returns to the initial value of 1, increases by one again, and controls the setting value to be displayed on the setting display 1310g.

When a person who changes the setting value decides on a setting value, he or she rotates the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (i.e., rotates the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to turn it OFF, and then rotates it another 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON state. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the changed and decided setting value in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, when the setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (i.e., the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), the decision key ON signal may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this case, the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g by pressing the pressing operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, and then the setting value can be decided and the setting key can be removed from the setting key cylinder simply by turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF, improving operability.

A person who wishes to change the setting value turns off the setting key switch 1311a by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to return it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key was pressed to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from a state in which the setting value is displayed to a state in which it is not displayed, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1311c from a state in which it is lit to a state in which it is turned off. That is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned ON back to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and this "predetermined setting value change end condition" is met, thereby ending the period during which the setting value can be changed (the period during which the setting value can be changed).

The person who changes the setting value removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, completing the work of changing the setting value.

When checking and displaying the currently set setting value, when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key must be inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion hole of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON state, and the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" must be met. In other words, a person who actually checks and displays the currently set setting value must first check that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (a state in which power has been restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), and then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion hole of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON state.

A person who checks and displays the currently set setting value must first check that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (a state in which power has been restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a setting key ON. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value that is set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first ON operation) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the setting change permission lamp 1311c remains off, and even if a person who wants to confirm and display the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, the setting value does not change at all in response to this pressing operation, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g does not change either.

When the person who checks and displays the currently set setting values has finished checking the currently set setting values, they turn the setting key switch 1311a OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from a display state to a non-display state of the setting value. That is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned ON to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a), thereby turning OFF the setting key switch 1311a, and the period during which the setting value can be confirmed (the period during which the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g) ends when the "predetermined setting value display end condition" is met.

The person who wishes to confirm and display the currently set setting value removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, completing the confirmation and display of the currently set setting value.

As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions require that, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, a setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation to turn the setting key ON, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated to input an operation signal. Meanwhile, the predetermined setting value display permission conditions require, as described above, that, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, a setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation to turn the setting key ON. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition have a common requirement in that the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. However, they differ in that the predetermined setting value change permission condition requires "when power is restored," whereas the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires "after power is restored." In addition, as a setting value change permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), a setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation to turn the setting key ON, and the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated to input an operation signal. As a setting value display permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), a setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation to turn the setting key ON. The fact that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 may not be included in the setting value change permission condition and the setting value display permission condition.

Here, to briefly explain the setting values, the "setting values" can change the probability for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a small jackpot has been won by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won by lottery when transitioning from a special probability mode to a normal mode, the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (i.e., the number of game balls B that the player can acquire can be increased) is preset. In this embodiment, setting values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player from setting value 1 to setting value 6 is preset. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects various tables (e.g., a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of jackpot determination values indicating that a jackpot has been won is specified, a jackpot pattern determination table in which the ratio of determination values for determining a jackpot pattern is specified, a small jackpot determination table in which the ratio of small jackpot determination values indicating that a small jackpot has been won is specified, a small jackpot pattern determination table in which the ratio of determination values for determining a small jackpot pattern is specified, a normal time transition determination table in which the ratio of determination values for transition determination from a probability change to a normal time is specified, etc.) used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values, or selects various tables (e.g., an allocation table in which the allocation time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values. In the various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values, various determination values are allocated at a predetermined ratio. In addition, the various tables used in the various lottery judgments are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used in the various allocation rates are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and some are set so that the values are different based on the relationship between a table corresponding to a block that manages the drive of one electric drive source and a table corresponding to a block that manages the drive of another electric drive source. In addition, the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, but the range may be smaller or larger than this. For example, it may be four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4, or eight setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the setting value, but also checks the contents of its own built-in RAM when the main control MPU 1310a restores power to determine whether there is an abnormality, and if it determines that there is an abnormality and the main control side power cut processing does not end normally when the power is cut off, it displays an error message to inform the user that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in its own built-in RAM are unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

Next, to briefly explain the base monitor 1310h, the base monitor 1310h displays the number of game balls B that have been collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5, out of the game balls B that have been launched into the game area 5a. Of the game balls B that have been launched into the game area 5a, the game balls B that have been collected by the outlet 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 169, etc.), and this detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 1710.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of its built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the determination key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the setting key switch 1311a may also be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned ON as the decision key, and this decision key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a' may be described as "variant example (1) of the decision key").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, a decision key button having a press operation portion may be provided on the setting change board 1311. In this case, the pressing operation part of the decision key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the decision key button, and a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot be inserted through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the corresponding opening to modify the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. When the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the decision key button, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is not pressed.

The position of the decision key button on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a or near the setting switch button 1311b. The cover of the main control board box 1320 has stickers with the names of each button printed on them affixed to the positions corresponding to the decision key button and the setting switch button 1311b so that the decision key button and the setting switch button 1311b are not confused (instead of stickers, the names of each button may be molded into the cover). In addition, in order to prevent the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b from being confused, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the decision key button or the setting switching button 1311b (the cover needs to be opened to press the pressing operation portion) may be used, the pressing operation portion may be different in color, the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b may have different external shapes or pressing operation portion shapes, or other types of switches not having a pressing operation portion may be used as the decision key button. Examples of other types of switches not having a pressing operation portion as the decision key button include various switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. In addition, when a decision key button and a setting switching button 1311b are provided on the setting change board 1311, in order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switching button 1311b are routed so that they are not close to each other (spaced apart) on the setting change board 1311, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed so that they are spaced apart, and on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern through which the detection signal from the decision key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also formed so that they are not close to each other (spaced apart). Also, if a confirmation key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the form of the confirmation key button (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variant form of the confirmation key (2)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 13 of the main control board 1310. 10a, but instead, a detection signal from a handle touch sensor 192 in the handle unit 180, which detects whether or not the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and a detection signal from a single button operation sensor 194, which detects whether or not the player wants to forcibly stop the shooting of the game ball B, may be branched in the payout control board 633 and input via the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and whether or not the decision key is ON may be determined based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, but can determine that the decision key is not ON when the palm or fingers are not touching the handle 195, and/or can determine that the decision key is ON when the shooting of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194, but can determine that the decision key is not ON when the shooting of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped (the aspect of the handle touch sensor (which may include the aspect of the single button operation sensor) may be described as "variant embodiment of the decision key (3)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, a firing reference pulse from a firing timing control circuit provided in the firing control unit 633b of the dispensing control board 633 described later can be branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON can be determined based on these firing reference pulses. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be shot per minute toward the game area 5a, and is generated based on a clock signal from an oscillator circuit. In this case, when the firing reference pulse is input from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON, whereas when the firing reference pulse is not input, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is not ON (the form of the firing reference pulse may be described as "variant embodiment of the decision key (4)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON for the second time, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is then sent from the setting change board 1311 to In the past, the signal was input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but if a distance measuring sensor capable of detecting the movement of a player seated opposite the pachinko machine 1 is provided on the game board 5 and the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via a relay board, the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor may be branched in the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on this detection signal. The distance measuring sensor detects the movement of a player by transmitting light emitted by a light emitting unit through a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and reflecting on the arm or hand of the player within a predetermined distance dimension, and the reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by a light receiving unit. In this case, when the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the distance sensor via the relay board, it determines whether or not there is motion based on this detection signal, and if it determines that there is motion, it can determine that the decision key is ON, whereas if it determines that there is no motion, it can determine that the decision key is not ON (the aspect of the distance sensor is sometimes referred to as "variant embodiment of the decision key (5)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Also, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Also, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a serial output circuit that can serially output information conveying the setting key ON, decision key ON, and OFF to the outside as serial information. This improves security against signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a on which this serial output circuit is provided was provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or on the dispensing control board 633. When the serial information outputted serially from this serial output circuit is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the received serial information whether it conveys the setting key ON, the decision key ON, or the decision key OFF (the embodiment of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "variant (6) of the decision key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON state, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Also, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON state, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Also, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to return to its original position, which is the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a pulse output circuit that can output information conveying the setting key ON, decision key ON, and OFF as a pulse signal to the outside. This can improve security against signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a on which this pulse output circuit is provided is provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the dispensing control board 633. For example, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is set to 1 ms when the information conveys the setting key ON, the pulse width is set to 3 ms when the information conveys the decision key ON, and the pulse width is set to 5 ms when the information conveys the OFF. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the input pulse signal whether the information conveys the setting key ON, the decision key ON, or the OFF (the embodiment of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be described as "variant (7) of the decision key").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON, and this decision A setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the decision key ON signal, The voltage level of the ON signal and the voltage level of the OFF signal may be set to an intermediate potential (e.g., a potential of 2V to 3V out of a range of 0V to 5V) between the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310, and a comparator circuit may be provided in the main control board 1310. The comparison results of the comparator circuit may be input to the main control MPU 1310a, so that the main control MPU 1310a may determine the ON/OFF state of the setting key ON signal, the ON/OFF state of the decision key ON signal, and the ON/OFF state of the OFF signal. This improves security for signals from the setting key switch 1311a (the embodiment of the setting key switch that uses an intermediate potential may be referred to as "variant embodiment of the decision key (8)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a decision key button having a press operation portion may be provided on the dispensing control board 633. In this case, the pressing operation part of the decision key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the dispensing control board box 632 corresponding to the decision key button, and a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the corresponding opening to modify the dispensing control board 633. When the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the dispensing control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the decision key button, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is not pressed.

The position where the decision key button is placed on the dispensing control board 633 may be near the error release switch having a pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the dispensing control board 633, stickers with the names of each button printed on them are attached at positions corresponding to the decision key button and the error release switch so that the decision key button and the error release switch are not confused (instead of stickers, the names of each button may be molded into the cover body). In addition, in order to prevent the decision key button and the error release switch from being confused, a button with a cover that covers the pressing operation unit of either the decision key button or the error release switch (the cover needs to be opened to press the pressing operation unit) may be used, a pressing operation unit with a different color may be used, the outer shape or the pressing operation unit of the decision key button and the error release switch may be different, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation unit may be used as the decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation part as the decision key button include, for example, various switches such as a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide part, a rotary switch with a rotation operation part, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. In addition, when the decision key button and the error release switch are provided on the dispensing control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the error release switch are formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other) on the dispensing control board 633, and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the dispensing control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be separated from each other, and in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the decision key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted are also formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other). In addition, if a confirmation key button is provided on the dispensing control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the form of the confirmation key button (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variant form of the confirmation key (9)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, a signal from an error release switch having a pressing operation unit on the dispensing control board 633 may be branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input via the dispensing control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on this signal. As described above, the error release switch is for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display, and when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup after power is restored (the power-on processing of various control boards has been completed and interrupt processing is being performed) and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is such that no error has occurred, the pressing operation part of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation part of the error release switch is operated based on a signal from the error release switch, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation part of the error release switch is not operated based on a signal from the error release switch. This can improve security with respect to the presence or absence of the decision key being ON (the form of the error release switch may be described as "variant embodiment of the decision key (10)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. The error reset switch is input to the main control MPU 1310a, but instead of this, the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 may monitor the logic of the signal from the error reset switch having a push operation part on the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, create a command, send the created command in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that received this command may determine whether the decision key is ON. As described above, the error reset switch is for resetting the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup after power recovery (the power-on process of various control boards has been completed and interrupt processing is being performed), and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the push operation part of the error reset switch is not operated at all. Therefore, in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt process described below, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the dispensing control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is operated based on a signal from the error release switch and receives a command to that effect, while it can determine that the decision key is not ON when the dispensing control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on a signal from the error release switch and receives a command to that effect. This improves security with respect to whether the decision key is ON or not (mode 2 of the error release switch may be described as "variant embodiment of the decision key (11)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON for the second time, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is set In the past, the operation signal was input from the constant change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f can be provided on the dispensing control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f can be input to the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633, and also branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on the operation signal input. As described below, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or when a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described below), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of its built-in RAM by turning on the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a confirmation key, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, while it can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. This improves security with respect to whether the confirmation key is ON or not.

The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the dispensing control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the dispensing control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body so that a wire or the like cannot be inserted through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the corresponding opening to tamper with the dispensing control board 633.

The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the dispensing control board 633 may be near the error release switch having a push operation unit described later. On the cover body of the dispensing control board 633, stickers with the names of each button printed on them are attached at positions corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused (the names of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of these stickers). In addition, in order to prevent the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch from being confused, a button with a cover covering the push operation unit of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error release switch (the cover needs to be opened to operate the push operation unit by pushing it) may be used, a push operation unit with a different color may be used, a RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch with a different external shape or a push operation unit with a different shape may be used, or another type of switch that does not have a push operation unit may be used as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation part as the RAM clear switch 1310f include various switches such as a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide part, a rotary switch with a rotation operation part, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. In addition, when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error reset switch are provided on the dispensing control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error reset switch are formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other) on the dispensing control board 633, and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the dispensing control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be separated from each other, and even in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern through which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the detection signal from the error reset switch is transmitted are also formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other). In addition, if a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the dispensing control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the form of the RAM clear switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as a "variant of the decision key (12)").

In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON for the second time, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 13 In the past, the signal was input to the main control MPU 1310a of 10, but instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f can be provided on the dispensing control board 633, and the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 can monitor the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f in the port input processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, create a command, and send the created command to the main control board 1310 in the command sending processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below.The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command can determine whether the decision key is ON or not. As described below, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or when a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described below), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a will always clear a specified area of its built-in RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a confirmation key, and in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt processing described below, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 and receives a command to that effect, while the payout control MPU can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f has not been operated based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 and receives a command to that effect. This improves security regardless of whether the Enter key is ON or not (RAM clear switch mode 2 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' mode) may be referred to as "Decision key variation (13)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the determination key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the determination key ON. This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the bulb cut detection sensor 574, or the dispensing detection sensor 591 is input to the dispensing control board 633. The signal is input to the main control MPU, and is branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on these detection signals, or the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 may monitor the logic of the detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, the bulb out detection sensor 574, or the dispensing detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, and create a command, and send the created command to the main control board 1310 in the command sending processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 which receives this command may determine whether the decision key is ON or not. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the configuration of the dispensing unit (which may include the configuration of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as a "variant of the determination key (16)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main frame opening switch, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the main frame 4 remains open against the outer frame 2. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the form of the main body frame opening switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variant form of the decision key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the setting value must close the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2 to turn on the decision key, and after turning on the decision key, must open the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2 again.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the door frame 3 remains closed relative to the main frame 4. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the door frame opening switch (which may include the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variant (17) of the decision key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in order to turn ON the decision key, and after turning ON the decision key, must close the door frame 3 again relative to the main frame 4, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2.

In the above embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the determination key ON, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310 (the aspect of the setting key switch may be described as "variant example (18) of the determination key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to return to the original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the setting key switch 1311a is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key ON to the initial position, and this OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, so that the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the OFF signal is input, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the OFF signal is not input. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (setting key switch mode 2 (which may include the setting key switch mode 1311a') may be described as "decision key variation (19)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a decision key button having a press operation portion may be provided on the main control board 1310. In this case, the pressing operation part of the decision key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the decision key button, and a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot be inserted through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the corresponding opening to tamper with the main control board 1310. When the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the decision key button, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is not pressed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be near the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, stickers with the names of the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f printed on them are attached at positions corresponding to the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused (the names of the buttons may be molded on the cover body instead of stickers). Also, in order to prevent the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f from being confused, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation part of either the decision key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (the cover needs to be opened to press the pressing operation part) may be used, a pressing operation part with a different color may be used, the outer shape or the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f may be different, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation part may be used as the decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation part as the decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide part, a rotary switch with a rotation operation part, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and other switches. In addition, when the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f are formed so that they do not approach each other (are separated from each other) on the main control board 1310 in order to prevent unauthorized tampering. In addition, when the decision key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the setting key button mode 2 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' mode) may be described as "variant of the decision key (20)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, the presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. As described below, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or when a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described below), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of its built-in RAM by turning on the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. This improves security with respect to whether the decision key is ON or not. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (RAM clear switch mode 3 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' mode) may be described as "variant of the decision key (21)"). Note that the period during which the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 as described later, so if the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also function as an error release switch described later, the payout control board 633 does not need an error release switch.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON for the second time, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main The input signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310, but instead, the main control MPU 1310a to which detection signals from the gate sensor 2801 of the gate 2003, various sensors of various winning ports (e.g., the second start port sensor 2401, the large winning port sensor 2402, the accessory winning port sensor 2601, the general winning port sensor 3001, the first start port sensor 3002), and the out sensor 664 of the main frame 4, which are provided on the game board 5, may be input and determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (the aspects of the various sensors (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "various determination key modifications (22)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 and send a game ball B to the gate 2003, to the various winning holes, or to the outlet 1008 in order to turn on the decision key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is then transmitted to the setting change board 1311. to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, when the main control MPU 1310a controls the operation of the movable body (gimmick) by controlling the drive of an electric drive source such as a stepping motor, a DC motor, a solenoid, etc., and determines the original position or operating position of the movable body (gimmick) based on a detection signal from an optical sensor (photo sensor, distance sensor, etc.), the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of the decision key ON based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (the aspect of the optical gadget sensor (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variation example of the decision key (23)"). In this case, the person changing the setting must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 and move the movable body (part) so that the optical sensor can detect the original position, operating position, etc. of the movable body (part).

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a, which receives an input of a detection signal from a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects unauthorized magnetism within the play area 5a, may determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the form of the magnetic sensor (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as a "variant of the determination key (24)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must bring a magnet from the front of the pachinko machine 1 toward the front of the game board 5 in order to set the determination key to ON.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. 1310a, but instead of this, if a vibration sensor is provided on the game board 5 to detect fraudulent behavior by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 to enter various winning holes or gates (gates) provided on the game board 5, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of fraudulent behavior based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor and may also determine the presence or absence of the determination key ON based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is set ON (the mode of the vibration sensor (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variant embodiment of the determination key (25)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 to turn on the decision key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON for the second time, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1 Instead, if a radio wave sensor is provided on the game board 5 or the payout device 580 to detect fraudulent acts of illegally acquiring game balls B by irradiating radio waves to the pachinko machine 1 to cause malfunctions of various sensors of various winning slots provided on the game board 5 or various sensors provided on the payout device 580, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not there is fraudulent acts based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may also determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is set ON (the aspect of the radio wave sensor (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variant embodiment of the determination key (26)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the decision key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MP of the main control board 1310. Instead, a detection signal from the pressing detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 350 and a detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the contact of the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 350 may be input to the peripheral control board 1510, branched in the peripheral control board 1510 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (the aspect of the performance operation button unit (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as a "variant of the decision key (27)").

In the above embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320, which is composed of a cover body and a base body. However, the setting change board 1311 may be housed in a separate setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part. This crimping part is a sealing mechanism, and is provided in multiple parts. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part using one sealing mechanism, and then, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. In other words, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation part of the decision key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to each of them, but a wire intrusion prevention part is molded in the cover body so that a wire or the like cannot be intruded through the "gaps" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the openings corresponding to each of them to modify the setting change board 1311. Note that, as the structure of the setting change board box, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, if the cover body is configured to be opened or closed from the base body, a setting change board cover body opening/closing switch that can detect the opening of the cover body may be provided on the base body. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover body opening/closing switch may be configured to be directly input to the main control board 1310, or may be configured to be (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. The above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission conditions can include a case where the cover body is opened from the base body based on a detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body (the aspect of the setting change board box may be described as a "variant of the decision key (28)").

In the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are configured to be connected to each other, and in order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the decision key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the setting key switch 1311a OFF, and a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal from the setting switching button 1311b are provided. The wiring for the setting change board 1311 and the setting change board 1311 are formed so that they are not close to each other (are spaced apart from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be spaced apart. Also on the main control board 1310, a wiring pattern for transmitting various signals from the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the enter key of the setting key switch 1311a, The wiring pattern for transmitting the ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a and the wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting change button 1311b were also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). However, for either the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a or the wiring pattern for transmitting the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, The connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately from the connector SMCN of 1311 via another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately, and the other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 may be electrically connected to the other connector provided on the main control board 1310 via a harness (the manner in which the wiring pattern is routed may be described as "variant example of the determination key (29)").

Also, the above-mentioned modified enter key configurations (1) to (29) may be appropriately selected and combined to adopt the configuration (the selected combination of modified configurations may be referred to as "modified enter key configuration (30)").

In addition, the above-mentioned setting values can change the probability for determining whether or not a big win has been obtained by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a small win has been obtained by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a big win has been obtained by lottery when transitioning from a probability change to a normal time, the allocation rate to an area that is advantageous to the player, etc., and a probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (i.e., the number of game balls B that the player can obtain can be increased) is preset. In this embodiment, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player from setting value 1 to setting value 6 is preset. Incidentally, although there are multiple setting values ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, there are also other pachinko machines that have a single setting value in which a probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is preset. That is, there are game specifications in which the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player exists as multiple preset values, such as the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, and settings need to be changed, and there are game specifications in which the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player exists as a single preset value, and settings do not need to be changed at all. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is redesigned according to such game specifications, and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is redesigned or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will depend on the game specifications, and the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will have similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, there is a need for a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 that can be used in common without being dependent on the game specifications, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in game specifications where the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is preset to a single value and no setting changes are required, there is no need to use the setting value as the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player, so this can be addressed by changing the design of the software to assign setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 as follows:

For example, the main control MPU 1310a can use these as setting values to set multiple actual machine confirmation operation patterns (allowing for variation in the method of starting up the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM) after clearing a specified area (the entire area of the RAM excluding a specific area) of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, for the operation of the movable body (gimmick object) and the lighting of light-emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs that are the objects of control by the main control MPU 1310a, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "all operations (movement of movable body (gimmick object), lighting of light-emitting bodies)" is assigned as setting value 1, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "movement of movable body (gimmick object)" is assigned as setting value 2, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of light-emitting bodies" is assigned as setting value 3, and actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "detailed operation of movable body (gimmick object) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, movement over other structures and other movable bodies)" is assigned as setting value 4. An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 is assigned which specifies "operations such as checking for interference with moving objects (gimmicks), and operation order with other moving objects (gimmicks)" as a setting value 5, an actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 is assigned which specifies "lighting of light-emitting objects by one port unit (lighting of light-emitting objects by a predetermined output port unit (i.e., by one output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)" as a setting value 5, and an actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 is assigned which specifies "no operation" as a setting value 6 (the change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after the RAM is cleared may be described as "variation example (1) based on a common hardware configuration"). Note that the main control MPU 1310a performs the actual machine confirmation operation after the RAM is cleared by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing described later to operate the moving objects (gimmicks) and turn on light-emitting objects such as lamps and LEDs. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can operate the movable body (gimmick) and light the light-emitting body that are the object of control by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the setting value included in the setting change command (actual machine confirmation operation pattern). Depending on the manner in which the setting of the actual machine confirmation operation is changed after the RAM is cleared, it is possible to provide a variety of methods for starting the pachinko machine 1 after the RAM is cleared.

Also, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set multiple times from the end of the pattern change to the start of a demonstration (a demonstration performance performed in a player waiting state). In this case, a time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 1, a time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 2, a time setting pattern 3 that specifies "20 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 3, a time setting pattern 4 that specifies "25 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 4, a time setting pattern 5 that specifies "30 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 5, and a time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 6 (the manner of changing the time from the end of the pattern change to the start of a player waiting state may be described as "variation example (2) based on a common hardware configuration"). In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 that receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start a demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the setting for the time between when the pattern changes and when the player waits, it is possible to vary the time between when the pattern changes and when the demonstration begins.

Also, for example, it can be used as a setting value that allows multiple settings of the contents of the demonstration (demo performance performed in a player waiting state) performed after the end of the pattern change. In this case, demo performance setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical performance" is assigned as setting value 1, demo performance setting pattern 2 that specifies "comical performance, movable body (gimmick) operation performance" is assigned as setting value 2, demo performance setting pattern 3 that specifies "serious performance" is assigned as setting value 3, demo performance setting pattern 4 that specifies "serial performance, movable body (gimmick) operation performance" is assigned as setting value 4, demo performance setting pattern 5 that specifies "period drama style performance" is assigned as setting value 5, and demo performance setting pattern 6 that specifies "period drama style performance, movable body (gimmick)" is assigned as setting value 6 (the manner of changing the demo performance contents may be described as "variation example (3) based on common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demo performance (demo performance setting pattern) that corresponds to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner in which the content of the demo performance is changed, it is possible to provide variation in the content of the demo performance that is performed after the pattern change has ended.

Also, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set multiple default volumes adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The volume adjustment switch can be rotated to increase or decrease the volume from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2, volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3, volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as setting value 4, volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "volume 5" is assigned as setting value 5, and volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "volume 6" is assigned as setting value 6 (the aspect of changing the default volume may be described as "variant (4) based on the common hardware configuration"). Note that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a sets the default volume to a volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. The default volume of "Volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 may be muted when the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction to decrease the volume (moved in the opposite direction to increase the volume) and is adjusted to the minimum volume by completing the movement to the minimum volume end, or may be a volume that can be recognized when standing in front of the pachinko machine. The default volume of "Volume 6" assigned to setting value 6 may be the maximum volume when the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction to increase the volume (moved in the opposite direction to decrease the volume) and is adjusted to the maximum volume by completing the movement to the maximum volume end, or may be a volume that is a predetermined percentage of the maximum volume (e.g., 85%). This aspect of changing the default volume setting allows for variation in the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

It can also be used as a setting value that allows multiple settings for the volume of error notification sounds for various malfunctions, goto, errors, and other error notifications. The various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (i.e., they are not dependent on it), and while setting them to maximum volume makes it easier for game parlor staff and other attendants to notice the pachinko machine that is emitting the error notification sound, it may be unpleasant to players playing other pachinko machines. Therefore, there is also a demand for something that allows the volume of the various error notification sounds to be adjusted. In this case, error notification volume setting pattern 1 specifying "error notification volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, error notification volume setting pattern 2 specifying "error notification volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2, error notification volume setting pattern 3 specifying "error notification volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3, error notification volume setting pattern 4 specifying "volume 4" is assigned as setting value 4, error notification volume setting pattern 5 specifying "error notification volume 5" is assigned as setting value 5, and error notification volume setting pattern 6 specifying "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as setting value 6 (the manner of changing the setting of the volume of the error notification sound may be described as "variant example (5) using a common hardware configuration"). The volume of the error alarm is set to increase from setting value 1 (a volume that is not muted and allows the error alarm to be heard when standing in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error alarm) to setting value 6 (maximum volume that allows the error alarm to be fully heard even when several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error alarm). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a controls the error alarm to be emitted at a volume (error alarm volume setting pattern) that corresponds to the setting value included in the setting change command. This change in the volume of the error alarm can provide variation in the volume of the error alarm during error notifications.

It can also be used as a setting value that can set multiple default luminances for light-emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs. The luminance of the light-emitting body that is the object of control by the main control MPU 1310a can be increased or decreased from the default luminance. In this case, a default luminance setting pattern 1 that specifies "luminance 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, a default luminance setting pattern 2 that specifies "luminance 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, a default luminance setting pattern 3 that specifies "luminance 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, a default luminance setting pattern 4 that specifies "luminance 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, a default luminance setting pattern 5 that specifies "luminance 5" is assigned as the setting value 5, and a default luminance setting pattern 6 that specifies "luminance 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of changing the default luminance may be described as "variation example (6) based on a common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the luminance of the light-emitting body by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, thereby lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light-emitting body. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can adjust the brightness of the light-emitting element that is the target of control by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command, and can turn on, blink, or set a gradation point for the light-emitting element. Depending on the manner in which the content of the default brightness is changed, it is possible to provide variation in the default brightness of light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs.

It can also be used as a setting value that allows multiple settings of the brightness of light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs in error notifications for various malfunctions, glitches, and errors. For the lamps controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, an error notification brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification brightness 1" is assigned as setting value 1, an error notification brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification brightness 2" is assigned as setting value 2, an error notification brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification brightness 3" is assigned as setting value 3, an error notification brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "error notification brightness 4" is assigned as setting value 4, an error notification brightness setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification brightness 5" is assigned as setting value 5, and an error notification brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)" is assigned as setting value 6 (the aspect of changing the brightness setting of the light-emitting elements in error notifications may be described as "variation example (7) based on a common hardware configuration"). The lamp brightness is set to increase from setting value 1 (the lamp brightness is low, but does not go out, and an error notification can be recognized when standing in front of the pachinko machine) to setting value 6 (maximum brightness). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light-emitting body in the error notification by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, and turns on, blinks, or sets a gradation point for the light-emitting body. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can adjust the brightness of the light-emitting body that is the target of control by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command, and turns on, blinks, or sets a gradation point for the light-emitting body. Depending on the manner of changing the brightness of the light-emitting body in the error notification, it is possible to provide variation in the brightness of the light-emitting body such as a lamp or LED in the error notification.

The various setting values assigned to the above-mentioned common hardware configuration variants (1) to (7) are displayed on the setting display 1310g when a predetermined setting value display permission condition is met in the setting value confirmation display process performed by the main control MPU 1310a (described later), but they may also be displayed on the setting display 1310g at all times from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on until it is powered off (the manner of displaying the setting values may be referred to as "common hardware configuration variant (8)").

Furthermore, any one of the variations (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration described above may be appropriately selected and adopted for the determination key variation (30) described above.

The above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission conditions required that when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on process described later, and then proceeds with the game by performing interrupt permission settings, etc. Also, when the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process described later to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. In other words, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, if the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1, in either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on process described later, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f may also be pressed (sometimes referred to as a "variant of the predetermined setting value change permission condition").

In addition, the above-mentioned predetermined setting value display permission conditions required that when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON, and the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d is not operated. In addition, when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting value confirmation display processing after a predetermined modified setting value display permission condition is met, the interrupt permission setting has not yet been made, so the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the main control side timer interrupt processing, and does not read the detection signal from the main frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a into the setting key ON state, and stores these in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as input information described later. Therefore, when a variation of a predetermined setting value display permission condition is met and the setting value confirmation display process is performed, the main control MPU 1310a reads a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch to detect the opening of the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and a setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a.

By adopting both the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage that causes a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. When the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process described later, clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc., whereas when the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on process described later, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. By adopting this mode, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the game, the setting value confirmation display process is never performed. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the game by setting interrupt permission, etc., it never displays the currently set setting value on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected by the out ball passage 663 of the main frame 4 through the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 in a ball counting process of the main control side power-on process described later, and outputs the counted number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008 to the base monitor 1310h in a port output process of the main control side power-on process described later, and displays the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008 on the base monitor 1310h. Therefore, the current setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h (sometimes referred to as a "variant example of the method of using the base monitor"). As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can use the base monitor 1310h to display the current setting values that have been set during the period from when power is restored until when game progress begins by setting interrupt permission, etc., and once power is restored and game progress begins by setting interrupt permission, etc., the number of game balls B that have been collected by the outlet 1008 (out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) can be displayed, eliminating the need to provide a setting display 1310g and contributing to cost reduction.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value change permission conditions, the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value display permission conditions, and the above-mentioned variations of the method of using the base monitor may be appropriately selected and adopted as the above-mentioned variation of the decision key (30).

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value change permission conditions, the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value display permission conditions, and the above-mentioned variations of the method of using the base monitor may be appropriately selected and adopted in the variations (1) to (8) based on the above-mentioned common hardware configuration.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 129 etc. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. When assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the function display unit 1400 can be seen from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. This function display unit 1400 uses multiple LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game status (game situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

The function display unit 1400, although not shown in detail, is equipped with a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that displays the game status, a normal pattern indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the normal lottery result that is drawn when game ball B is received by gate 2003, and a normal hold indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holds related to the reception of game ball B by gate 2003.

The function display unit 1400 also includes a first special pattern display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the first special lottery result drawn by the reception of game ball B into the first starting port 2002, a first special reserved number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number related to the reception of game ball B into the first starting port 2002, a second special pattern display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of game ball B into the second starting port 2004, and a second special reserved number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number related to the reception of game ball B into the second starting port 2004.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is equipped with a round display consisting of five LEDs that displays the number of times (number of rounds) that the opening and closing pattern of the large prize opening 2005 is repeated when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "win" or the like.

This functional display unit 1400 can display the number of reserved items, designs, etc., by turning on, off, blinking, etc. the LEDs provided as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 132 and 136. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see Fig. 169) that controls the performance presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission performance, sound performance, moving performance, etc., and a performance display control unit 1512 for controlling performance images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the performance operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the performance display device 1600, etc. (see Figure 169).

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 135 and 136. The effect display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is disposed behind the game panel 1100. The performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear side of the rear unit 3000 via the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The performance display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the rear box 3010 at approximately the center. When the game board 5 is assembled, 1600 can be seen from the front (player's side) through the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame of the frame-shaped center device 2500.

The performance display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color LCD display device with white LEDs as a backlight, and is installed in a portrait orientation. The performance display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display specified still images and videos.

The performance display device 1600 has one left fixed piece 1601 protruding leftward from the left side and two right fixed pieces 1602 protruding rightward from the right side. With the LCD screen facing forward, the performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear box 3010 by inserting the two right fixed pieces 1602 from the diagonal rear of the rear box 3010 into two fixing grooves 3010c opening into the right inner surface of the frame-shaped LCD mounting part 3010b of the rear box 3010 described later, then moving the left fixed piece 1601 side forward to insert the left fixed piece 1601 into the opening of the locking mechanism, and sliding the locking mechanism upward in rear view.

[5-8. Overall structure of the table unit]
The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 140 and Fig. 144. Fig. 140(a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and Fig. 140(b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. Fig. 144 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow path of the game ball on the right side of the front unit. Fig. 145 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the first and second attacca units in Fig. 144. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, with the front end protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and a part of the rear end protruding into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100.

The front unit 2000 comprises a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 which are always open and capable of receiving game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a, a first starting opening 2002 which is always open and capable of receiving game balls B at a different position in the game area 5a from the plurality of general winning openings 2001, a gate 2003 which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of game ball B, a second starting opening 2004 which is capable of receiving game ball B depending on the result of a general lottery which is drawn when game ball B passes through gate 2003, and the first starting opening 2002. Or, the large prize winning port 2005 that can receive the game ball B depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2004, the special prize winning port 2006 that is provided at a position different from the large prize winning port 2005 and can receive the game ball B depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the V prize winning port 2007 that is given the opportunity to receive the game ball B received into the special prize winning port 2006.

Three of the general winning holes 2001 (four in this example) are located on the left side of the horizontal center in the lower part of the play area 5a, and the remaining one is located above the vertical center in the right part of the play area 5a. The first starting hole 2002 is located directly above the out hole 1008 at the bottom in the horizontal center of the play area 5a. The gate 2003 is located at about 3/4 height from the bottom in the vertical direction near the right end of the play area 5a when viewed from the front. The second starting hole 2004 is located at a height slightly higher than the general winning hole 2001 at the left end in the lower right corner of the play area 5a. The large winning hole 2005 is located between the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004. The special winning hole 2006 is located above the second starting hole 2004 and directly below the general winning hole 2001 on the right side. The V winning hole 2007 is located at the rear of the game panel 1100, at a height between the special winning hole 2006 and the second starting hole 2004.

The first sub-outlet 2021 is located below the second starting port 2004, and the second sub-outlet 2022 is located to the right of the general winning port 2001 on the right side.

The front unit 2000 is provided with a start port unit 2100 that is attached directly above the bottom end of the play area 5a in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002, a side unit 2200 that is provided to the left of the start port unit 2100 as viewed from the front, along the inner rail 1002, and has three general winning ports 2001, an upper left side unit 2300 that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 as viewed from the front, a first attacca unit 2400 that is provided to the right of the start port unit 2100 as viewed from the front, which is the lower right corner of the play area 5a as viewed from the front, and has a second start port 2004, a large winning port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2021, and a frame-shaped center device 2500 that is provided above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the play area 5a as viewed from the front.

The front unit 2000 also includes a second attacca unit 2600, which is located above the first attacca unit 2400 to the right of the center reel 2500 and has a reel winning port 2006, a side right middle unit 2700, which is located above the second attacca unit 2600 and has one general winning port 2001 and a second sub-out port 2022, and a gate member 2800, which is located above the side right middle unit 2700 and has a gate 2003.

[5-8a. Starting unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Fig. 140 etc. The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed directly above the outlet 1008 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and is attached from the front to the game panel 1100. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that is always open upward and has a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

When the start hole unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100, the first start hole 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and opens upward, and is located directly below the center of the center gimmick 2500 in the left-right direction.

When attached to the game panel 1100, the starting port unit 2100 can guide the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the second discharge passage 3182 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 140 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting hole unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 has three general winning holes 2001 that are open so as to be able to receive the game ball B at all times. The three general winning holes 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in a circular arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning holes 2001 on the right side open upward, and the general winning hole 2001 on the left side opens toward the upper left.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the three general winning openings 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. This side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the first discharge passage 3181 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000.

[5-8c. Upper left side unit]
Next, the upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Fig. 140 etc. The upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the gaming panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 to the left of the side unit 2200 within the gaming area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to be lower to the right.

When the upper left side unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The upper left side unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center device 2500 to the right side below the center device 2500 by the shelf portion 2301.

[5-8d. First Attacker Unit]
Next, the first attacca unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 140 to 145. The first attacca unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is located in the game area 5a, to the right of the starting hole unit 2100 as seen from the front, which is the lower right corner as seen from the front, and is attached from the front to the front of the game panel 1100. This first attacca unit 2400 includes a gate 2003, a second starting hole 2004, and a big prize hole 2005 (see Figure 144, etc.).

When viewed from the front, the first attacker unit 2400 has the second starting hole 2004 located at the top and to the right of the center in the left-right direction, the large prize hole 2005 located to the left of the center in the left-right direction and lower than the second starting hole 2004, and the first sub-out hole 2021 located below the second starting hole 2004 and lower than the large prize hole 2005.

The first attacker unit 2400 also includes a second start opening sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, a large prize opening sensor 2402 that detects a game ball B received in the large prize opening 2005, and a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects unauthorized magnetism (see FIG. 169, etc.). Two large prize opening sensors 2402 are provided in parallel.

The first attacker unit 2400 is equipped with a second start gate 2411 capable of guiding a game ball B to the second start gate 2004, a start gate solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the second start gate 2411 in response to the result of a normal lottery drawn by the passage of the game ball B through the gate 2003, a large prize gate 2413 that can open and close the large prize gate 2005, and an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the large prize gate 2413 in response to the result of a first special lottery or a second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start gate 2002 or the second start gate 2004.

As shown in FIG. 144, the first attacker unit 2400 has a first shelf 2421 extending from the upper right corner toward the left in a front view, and a second shelf 2422 extending from the left end of the first shelf 2421 toward the left at a distance slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B and shorter than the first shelf 2421, from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf 2421 and lowering toward the left, forming a second starting hole 2004 between the first shelf 2421 and the second shelf 2422. , a third shelf 2423 that extends shorter than the second shelf 2422 from a position lower than the diameter of the game ball B to the left of the left end of the second shelf 2422, and a fourth shelf 2424 that extends leftward from the left end of the third shelf 2423 at a distance of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B and from a position lower than the third shelf 2423, and forms a large prize opening 2005 between the third shelf 2423 and the fourth shelf 2424.

The right end of the first shelf 2421 is located to the left from the right side of the first attacker unit 2400 by a distance slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The first shelf 2421, the second shelf 2422, and the third shelf 2423 are each inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf 2424 is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf 2421 etc.

The first attacker unit 2400 also includes a first standing wall portion 2425 extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2421, a second standing wall portion 2426 extending vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2421 to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2425, and a third standing wall portion 2427 extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2422 to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2425. a fourth standing wall portion 2428 extending vertically downward from the right end of the third shelf portion 2423 to the bottom edge of the first attacker unit 2400, a fifth standing wall portion 2429 extending downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2423, a sixth standing wall portion 2430 extending downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2424, and a seventh standing wall portion 2431 extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2424.

The fifth standing wall 2429 extends downward from the left end of the third shelf 2423 to a position lower than the fourth shelf 2424, then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to become lower to the left, and then extends further downward to the bottom edge of the first attacca unit 2400. The sixth standing wall 2430 extends downward from the right end of the fourth shelf 2424 to a position lower than the fourth shelf 2424, then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to become lower to the right, and then extends further downward to the bottom edge of the first attacca unit 2400. The left-right distance between the lower parts of the fifth standing wall 2429 and the sixth standing wall 2430 is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

The first attacka unit 2400 further includes a first horizontal wall portion 2432 that connects the lower ends of the first vertical wall portion 2425, the second vertical wall portion 2426, and the third vertical wall portion 2427, and a second horizontal wall portion 2433 that slopes downward to the left from a position lower than the lower end of the first vertical wall portion 2425 on the right side of the first attacka unit 2400, leaving a gap between the first horizontal wall portion 2432 that allows the game ball B to flow through, and then slopes upward toward the middle of the fourth vertical wall portion 2428 on the left. The second horizontal wall portion 2433 is formed so that the portion of the first sub-out port 2021 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

The first attacker unit 2400 also has a third horizontal wall portion 2434 that extends from near the bottom of each of the fifth vertical wall portion 2429 and the sixth vertical wall portion 2430 in a direction approaching each other to near the center between the fifth vertical wall portion 2429 and the sixth vertical wall portion 2430, and a partition portion 2435 that connects the opposing ends of the two third horizontal wall portions 2434 and extends upward.

Furthermore, the first attacka unit 2400 has an upper shelf portion 2436 that extends in a stepped manner along the top edge so as to become lower to the left, and is provided between the second shelf portion 2422 and the third shelf portion 2423 with a gap that allows the game ball B to flow through. The right end of the upper shelf portion 2436 is located directly above the left end of the first shelf portion 2421, and the left end is located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2424. The upper shelf portion 2436 is also inclined so that the area near the right end becomes lower to the right.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the first attacker unit 2400 has a plurality of abutment parts that are triangular in plan view and protrude into the space between the upper shelf 2436 and the large prize opening 2005, where game balls B can flow to the left, so that they are staggered left and right from the front and rear walls that form the space. These abutment parts allow game balls B rolling on the large prize opening door 2413 to flow in a large zigzag pattern in the front-to-back direction when the large prize opening 2005 is closed.

This second starting port door 2411 is arranged to move in the forward and backward directions. When the starting port solenoid 2412 is not energized, the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 protrudes due to the spring force, causing the second starting port door 2411 to move forward and close the second starting port 2004. When the starting port solenoid 2412 is energized, the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 retracts against the spring force, causing the second starting port door 2411 to move backward and open the second starting port 2004.

When not energized, the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and when energized, the plunger retracts.

The large prize opening door 2413 is a long flat plate that extends from side to side and is set up to move back and forth. The large prize opening door 2413 can open and close the large prize opening 2005 by the forward and backward movement of the plunger of the attacca solenoid 2414. When the attacca solenoid 2414 is not energized, the large prize opening door 2413 moves forward as the plunger of the attacca solenoid 2414 protrudes due to the spring force, and closes the large prize opening 2005. When the attacca solenoid 2414 is energized, the large prize opening door 2413 moves backward as the plunger of the attacca solenoid 2414 retreats against the spring force, and opens the large prize opening 2005.

When the Attacka solenoid 2414 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and when electricity is applied, the plunger retracts.

In the normal state of the first attacca unit 2400, the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacca solenoid 2414 are both de-energized (OFF). In this normal state, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2412 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the second start port door 2411 protrudes forward. In this state, the second start port door 2411 is located above the second start port 2004, and the second start port door 2411 makes it impossible for the second start port 2004 to receive a game ball B. In other words, the second start port 2004 is closed by the second start port door 2411 (see Figures 144 and 145).

In addition, in the normal state, the plunger of the attacca solenoid 2414 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the large prize opening door 2413 protrudes forward. In this state, the large prize opening door 2413 is located above the large prize opening 2005, and the large prize opening 2005 cannot receive a game ball B. In other words, the large prize opening 2005 is closed by the large prize opening door 2413 (see Figures 144 and 145).

In this normal state, when a game ball B flows down onto the first shelf 2421, the inclination of the first shelf 2421 causes the game ball B to roll to the left, roll over the top surface of the second starting gate door 2411 and the second shelf 2422, and then is released to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2422. The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 falls onto the third shelf 2423 or the big prize gate door 2413 depending on its momentum, and rolls to the left due to the inclination of these. Note that when the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 hits the underside of the upper shelf 2436 and bounces off to the right, it may enter the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423.

At this time, the game ball B rolling on the large prize opening door 2413 that closes the large prize opening 2005 alternately comes into contact with multiple abutment parts provided in the space between the upper shelf 2436 and the large prize opening 2005, and rolls to the left while zigzagging back and forth. After rolling to the left on the large prize opening door 2413, the game ball B rolls on the fourth shelf 2424 and is then released from its left end outside the first attacker unit 2400.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when a game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf 2421, it passes along the right side of the first standing wall 2425, falls near the right end of the second horizontal wall 2433, and rolls to the left due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall 2433, entering the first sub-outlet 2021. Also, when a game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423, it passes between the third standing wall 2427 and the fourth standing wall 2428, falls near the left end of the second horizontal wall 2433, and rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall 2433, entering the first sub-outlet 2021.

The game ball B that enters the first sub-outlet 2021 is handed over to the fifth discharge passage 3185 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a, and is discharged from the fifth discharge passage 3185 onto the lower board holder 1200. In this first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B that flows along the right side of the first shelf 2421 and the game ball B that passes through the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423 are both formed to enter the first sub-outlet 2021, and essentially two first sub-outlets 2021 are provided.

In this normal state, when the starting port solenoid 2412 is energized (ON) in accordance with the result of the normal lottery drawn when game ball B passes through gate 2003, the plunger retracts against the spring force, and the second starting port door 2411 moves rearward. Then, as the second starting port door 2411 moves rearward, the top of the second starting port 2004 is opened, making it possible to receive game ball B into the second starting port 2004. In other words, the second starting port 2004 is in an open state.

When the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, if a game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it flows down between the second standing wall portion 2426 and the third standing wall portion 2427, and after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, it is released rearward from the first attacca unit 2400. The game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 and released rearward from the first attacca unit 2400 is handed over to the third discharge passage 3183 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, and is discharged from the third discharge passage 3183 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

Meanwhile, in the normal state, when the attacca solenoid 2414 is energized (ON) in accordance with the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) that is determined by receiving the game ball B in the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, the plunger moves back against the spring force, and the large prize opening door 2413 moves rearward. By the large prize opening door 2413 moving rearward, the large prize opening 2005 is opened upward, and the large prize opening 2005 can receive the game ball B. In other words, the large prize opening 2005 is in an open state.

When the large prize opening 2005 is open, the game ball B is received in the large prize opening 2005, passes between the fifth vertical wall 2429 and the sixth vertical wall 2430, passes between the fifth vertical wall 2429 and the partition 2435, or between the sixth vertical wall 2430 and the partition 2435, is detected by one of the two large prize opening sensors 2402, falls onto the third horizontal wall 2434, and is released backward from the first attacca unit 2400. The game ball B received in the large prize opening 2005 and released backward from the first attacca unit 2400 is delivered to the fourth discharge passage 3184 of the back front lower performance unit 3160 in the back front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the fourth discharge passage 3184 onto the board holder 1200 below.

In this way, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of this embodiment, the game ball B received in the large prize opening 2005 is divided into two by the partition 2435, and each is detected by a different large prize opening sensor 2402 before being released to the rear. This makes it possible to prevent game ball B from becoming stuck between the large prize opening 2005 and the large prize opening sensor 2402, and also makes it possible to receive a large number of game balls B in a short period of time.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center role 2500 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 140 and 141. Figure 141 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the right lower guide passage in the center role, and (b) is a side cross-sectional view of the center role cut left and right at the separation hole in the front member in front of the right lower guide passage in the center role, and viewed from the right. The center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 is located in the game area 5a, above the starting port unit 2100, and slightly above the center in the front view, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. The center role 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and the performance display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and various performance units provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen from the front.

The frame-shaped center device 2500 has a portion that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 all around, so that the game ball B that is shot into the game area 5a cannot enter the frame.

The center role 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also called a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, a flat flange portion 2502 protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abutting the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a flat support portion 2503 protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. When assembled to the game board 5, the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. In addition, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape that follows the inner periphery of the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 into which the center role 2500 is inserted. When assembled to the game board 5, this peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering from the outside of the center role 2500 to the inside of the frame.

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-to-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

The support parts 2503 are provided partially on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501. The support parts 2503 are provided in the parts of the peripheral wall part 2501 where the flange part 2502 does not protrude, and reinforce the peripheral wall part 2501. The end edges of the support parts 2503 protruding from the peripheral wall part 2501 are formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall part 2501 or in a straight line, so that the support parts 2503 are not noticeable. The amount of protrusion of the support parts 2503 from the peripheral wall part 2501 is within the range from the thickness of the support parts 2503 to the thickness of the panel board 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), so that the support parts 2503 are not noticeable to players while still providing a reinforcing effect.

The center device 2500 also has a transparent flat closing plate 2505 that closes the rear end of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501. This closing plate 2505 prevents the game ball B from passing through the frame of the center device 2500 and entering the rear (back unit 3000).

The center gadget 2500 is provided with a warp entrance 2511 that is open to allow the game ball B in the game area 5a to enter, at a portion on the left side of the peripheral wall 2501 when viewed from the front and forward of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), a warp exit 2512 that is open in the frame behind the front surface of the game panel 1100 and allows the game ball B that entered the warp entrance 2511 to be released, a stage 2513 that can release the game ball B released from the warp exit 2512 into the game area 5a after rolling it in the left-right direction, and a stage cover 2515 that is provided to cover the top of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 138, etc.). The stage cover 2515 prevents the game ball B from entering the frame of the center gadget 2500 from outside by bouncing the game ball B that bounces on the stage 2513 back toward the stage 2513.

The stage 2513 of the center role 2500 is curved with a recessed center in the left-right direction, and is formed in a wavy (W-shape) such that the position corresponding to directly above the first starting hole 2002 of the starting hole unit 2100, that is, the approximate center position in the left-right direction when the center role 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, is slightly higher than both the left and right sides. This stage 2513 is inclined so that the part (center release part 2513a) that is slightly higher than both the left and right sides in the left-right center and the lowest part on both the left and right sides (side release part 2513b) are lower toward the front, and the game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from these parts.

When the center device 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the elevated portion in the center of the stage 2513 in the left-right direction (the central release section 2513a) is located directly above the first starting hole 2002 of the starting hole unit 2100. As a result, when a game ball B is released from the central release section 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received by the first starting hole 2002 with an extremely high probability.

The center device 2500 is also provided with a guide passage group 2520 in the upper right corner, which consists of two passages through which the game ball B can flow. When assembled to the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center device 2500) is approximately in contact with the inner periphery of the game area 5a (the right rail 1005 near the impact stopper 1006 of the front component 1000), and the game ball B that is shot to the upper right side of the center device 2500 always passes through the guide passage group 2520.

The guide passage group 2520 has a vertical length of approximately 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each guide passage group 2520 is formed in a groove shape that is open to the front, so that the game ball B flowing inside can be clearly seen from the front.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role-piece 2500, and is composed of a first guide passage 2521 that is separated from the peripheral wall portion 2501, and a second guide passage 2522 that extends along the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the right of the first guide passage 2521. The entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are separated from each other on the left and right. The exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and open diagonally downward and to the right along the arc of the upper part of the right rail 1005.

The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate 2003 when the center device 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. The right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located directly below the lower end of the impact stopper 1006 of the front component 1000, and is formed so that most of the game balls B that come into contact with the impact stopper 1006 enter the first guide passage 2521.

The center device 2500 also has a lower right guide passage 2530 that protrudes to the right from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall 2501 and guides the game ball B from above to the right and then releases it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an entrance that opens upward across the front width in the left-right direction, and an exit that opens diagonally to the lower left with a width equivalent to one game ball B.

When assembled to the game board 5, the right end of this lower right guide passage 2530 is approximately in contact with the right rail 1005, and it is located between the first attacca unit 2400 and the second attacca unit 2600. Therefore, between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530, the second attacca unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged.

To go into further detail about the center gadget 2500, the center gadget 2500 comprises a frame-shaped transparent center base plate 2540 having a peripheral wall portion 2501, a flange portion 2502, a support portion 2503, etc., a transparent, flat front member 2531 attached to the center base plate 2540 so as to close the front side of the lower right guide passage 2530, and a lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 attached to the front surface of the front member 2531 and having a predetermined decoration printed on it (see FIG. 141).

The center base plate 2540 has a guide passage flange portion 2540a that forms part of the flange portion 2502 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front and extends to the right in a flat shape, a guide passage wall 2540b that extends to the right from a portion in front of the flange portion 2502 on the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2501 along the lower edge of the guide passage flange portion 2540a and shorter than the guide passage flange portion 2540a so that the right end side is lower, a flat vertical wall portion 2540c that extends up and down along the right end edge near the right end of the guide passage flange portion 2540a and extends forward to the same position as the front surface of the guide passage wall 2540b, and a left guide portion 2540d that is continuous with the lower end edge of the vertical wall portion 2540c, extends diagonally downward to the left, and then extends diagonally downward to the right and bends. Between the guide passage wall 2540b and the vertical wall portion 2540c, a gap is formed that allows one game ball B to pass through.

The center base plate 2540 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down from above onto the guide passage wall 2540b to the right by the guide passage wall 2540b, and then allow it to flow downward between the guide passage wall 2540b and the vertical wall portion 2540c, and then release it diagonally downward and to the left by the left guide portion 2540d. The center base plate 2540 can form most of the lower right guide passage 2530 by the guide passage flange portion 2540a, the guide passage wall 2540b, the vertical wall portion 2540c, and the left guide portion 2540d.

The front member 2531 extends in the left-right direction from the same position as the inner circumferential surface of the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the same position as the right edge of the guide passage flange portion 2540a, with its upper edge positioned above the upper edge of the guide passage flange portion 2540a and its lower edge positioned below the guide passage wall 2540b.

The front member 2531 has an attachment recess 2531a recessed rearward from the front surface to follow the outer peripheral shape, a separation hole 2531b penetrating the attachment recess 2531a from front to rear at a location coinciding with the guide passage wall 2540b in a front view, and multiple mounting bosses 2531c protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape from the rear surface for mounting to the center base plate 2540.

The attachment recess 2531a is recessed backwards to a depth (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) greater than the thickness of the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 (see FIG. 141(b)). In the attachment recess 2531a, the left edge and the upper edge adjacent to the left edge are set as contact surfaces for attaching the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532.

The separation hole 2531b is a round hole with a circular inner shape. When assembled to the center role piece 2500, the front side of this separation hole 2531b is closed by the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 attached to the attachment recess 2531a, and the rear side is closed by the front surface of the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540, making the inside of the separation hole 2531b a closed space.

In this embodiment, the separation hole 2531b has an inner diameter in the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 2531b is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 2531b will be smaller, making it easier to bend and potentially unable to sufficiently press the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532. If the separation hole 2531b is larger than this, bending will occur at the separation hole 2531b in the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, potentially causing the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 to look unattractive.

According to the center gadget 2500 of this embodiment, if the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 cannot be properly attached to the attachment recess 2531a of the front member 2531 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 2531b from the rear of the front member 2531, and the tip of the rod can be used to press the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 from rear to front, so that the edge of the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 can be rolled forward and removed. By having an operator pull the rolled-up portion, the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2531a, and the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 can be reattached.

In addition, with the front member 2531 and the center base plate 2540 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 2531b from the rear of the front member 2531 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 from behind, making it easy to remove the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 from the attachment recess 2531a, facilitating the replacement of the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the front member 2531 and the center base plate 2540 are separated, the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2531a using the separation hole 2531b, making it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, and reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, by attaching the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 to the attachment recess 2531a, the separation hole 2531b can be hidden from the front, which prevents the separation hole 2531b from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 2531b, making it difficult for players to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 2531b.

In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 2531b is closed from the rear by the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540, which is attached to the rear side of the front member 2531 to which the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 is affixed. Since there is no hole that passes through to the rear as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted through the hole into the game board 5 or the area where the game balls B are circulated, and thus prevent illegal acts from being performed.

In addition, because the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540 closes the separation hole 2531b from the rear, even if an illegal tool is inserted from the front through the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 and into the separation hole 2531b, the guide passage wall 2540b can prevent the illegal tool from being inserted further rearward (entering). This prevents the illegal tool from entering the game board 5 or the area through which the game balls B flow from the front through the separation hole 2531b, preventing illegal acts from being performed. In addition, because the illegal tool penetrates the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 and leaves a mark on the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, it is possible to deter illegal acts, and a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against illegal acts can be provided.

Furthermore, according to the center reel 2500 of this embodiment, a support portion 2503 is provided that protrudes inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501. Therefore, in the area where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 becomes the outer edge of the center reel 2500. This allows the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (within the frame of the center reel 2500) to be relatively wider, and the performance image of the performance display device 1600 at the rear and the decoration of the back unit 3000 can be more easily seen through the frame of the center reel 2500.

In addition, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward is provided in a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. This makes it possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 from being deformed or damaged even if the game ball B abuts against the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided. In addition, since the support portion 2503 can increase the strength of the center role 2500, the center role 2500 can be removed from the injection molding die without being deformed.

In addition, the transparent support portion 2503 protrudes slightly from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and is provided partially around the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, so that the support portion 2503 can reduce interference with the visibility of the decorative body of the rear unit 3000 provided at the rear, the performance image of the performance display device 1600, etc.

Furthermore, by providing the support portion 2503, there is a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided, so that in the portion of the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110) close to the support portion 2503, the obstacle nails N can be planted as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. This allows the playing area with multiple obstacle nails N within the playing area 5a to be as wide as possible, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that allows players to enjoy playing as they intended.

In addition, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is on the same plane as the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503 is provided on approximately the same plane as the front surface of the panel plate 1110. This makes it possible to make the support portion 2503 less noticeable to the player, and makes it possible to make the center gimmick 2500 appear to be integrated with the panel plate 1110.

Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the circumference of the center role device 2500, the inside of the frame of the center role device 2500 can be made wider than when the support portion 2503 is provided around the entire circumference, and the display screen of the performance display device 1600 provided at the rear can be made easier to see. In other words, if it is desired to make the non-circulating area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center role device 2500 look larger, the support portion 2503 may be provided on a part of the circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 extends to an extent that it does not overlap with the display screen of the performance display device 1600 provided at the rear when viewed from the front.

In the above embodiment, one separation hole 2531b is provided in the front member 2531, but this is not limited thereto, and multiple separation holes 2531b may be provided in a portion that coincides with the guide passage wall 2540b in a front view.

Alternatively, the separation hole 2531b may be provided in a portion (right side portion in front view) inside the bent left guide portion 2540d in the center base plate 2540. When the separation hole 2531b is provided in that portion, the rear side of the separation hole 2531b is not directly closed by the center base plate 2540, but since the guide passage flange portion 2540a and the game panel 1100 are located behind the separation hole 2531b, the hole continuing to the separation hole 2531b does not penetrate to the rear of the game board 5, so that the same effect as above can be achieved. In this case, even if an illegal tool is inserted from the front into the separation hole 2531b through the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, the left guide portion 2540d can prevent the tip of the illegal tool from entering the area where the game ball B is circulating, such as the lower right guide passage 2530. Furthermore, in this case, because the right side of the left guide section 2540d is open, by using a linear tool bent in a J shape, it is possible to insert the tool into the separation hole 2531b from the rear even when the front member 2531 is still assembled, and the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be removed.

[5-8f. Second Attack Unit]
Next, the second attacca unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 140 to 145. The second attacca unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is located to the right of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500, between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the center of the vertical direction of the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The second attacca unit 2600 has a role winning opening 2006 that opens openably toward the left.

The second attacca unit 2600 includes a prize winning port sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the prize winning port 2006, and a magnetic sensor 1050 (see FIG. 146) that detects unauthorized magnetism acting near the prize winning port 2006. The second attacca unit 2600 also includes a prize winning port door 2611 for closing the prize winning port 2006 so that it can be opened and closed, a prize winning port solenoid 2612 for moving the prize winning port door 2611 to open and close the prize winning port 2006, a transmission member (not shown) that transmits the forward and backward movement of the plunger of the prize winning port solenoid 2612 to move the prize winning port door 2611, and a guide passage 2613 that guides the game ball B received in the prize winning port 2006 and releases it backward.

The second attacca unit 2600 has a prize winning opening 2006 that opens to the left at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction, and a prize winning opening door 2611 is provided to close the prize winning opening 2006 from the left.

The prize winning door 2611 is formed in a so-called wing shape, consisting of a semicircular lower side that bulges downward, a right side that contacts the right end of the lower side and extends in a straight line upward, and an arc-shaped left side that contacts the left side of the lower side so as to bulge to the left from the upper end of the right side. The prize winning door 2611 has a cylindrical rotation shaft 2611a that extends in the front-to-rear direction with the center of the semicircular lower side as the axis, and a link pin (not shown) that protrudes cylindrically backward from a position away from the rotation shaft. The lower rotation shaft of the prize winning door 2611 is attached so that the upper end can move to the left.

The special feature winning port solenoid 2612 is not shown in detail, but is attached with the plunger protruding downward. The transmission member (not shown) has a base attached to the tip of the plunger of the special feature winning port solenoid 2612, and a slit that penetrates in the front-to-back direction and extends in the left-to-right direction and into which the link pin of the special feature winning port door 2611 is slidably inserted, and is attached so as to be slidable in the up-down direction.

When assembled to the game board 5, the second attacca unit 2600 is positioned so that its right side is approximately in contact with the right rail 1005 of the previous component 1000, and a space is formed between the device winning opening 2006 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center device 2500 through which the game ball B can flow. In addition, when assembled to the game board 5, the rear surface of the second attacca unit 2600, including the rear end of the guide passage 2613, protrudes rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100.

In the normal state of this second attacca unit 2600, the reel prize opening solenoid 2612 is de-energized (OFF), and the plunger protrudes downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the reel prize opening door 2611 is upright, and the reel prize opening 2006 is closed by the reel prize opening door 2611. In other words, in the normal state, game ball B cannot be received by the reel prize opening 2006.

In this normal state, when the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) is determined by receiving the game ball B in the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, the special prize winning hole solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the special prize winning hole door 2611 inserted in the slit of the transmission member is pulled upward and slides within the slit, causing the special prize winning hole door 2611 to rotate counterclockwise around the rotation axis 2611a.

As a result, the upper end of the reel prize winning door 2611 moves to the left, opening the reel prize winning door 2006 to the left, and the right end of the reel prize winning door 2611 tilts lower. In other words, the reel prize winning door 2006 is open. In this state, when game ball B that has flowed down hits the reel prize winning door 2611, it rolls to the right due to the tilt and is accepted by the reel prize winning door 2006. After being detected by the reel prize winning door sensor 2601, game ball B is guided by the guide passage 2613 and released rearward. The game ball B released rearward from the guide passage 2613 is delivered to the distribution passage 3158 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, and after being distributed to either the V winning port 2007 or the losing port 2008, it is discharged onto the lower board holder 1200 via the rear front lower performance unit 3160.

[5-8g. Side right center unit]
Next, the side right center unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 140 and 144. The side right center unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is disposed directly above the second attacka unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. This side right center unit 2700 has one general winning port 2001 and a second sub-out port 2022.

The side right center unit 2700 has a general winning opening 2001 that is always open facing upward with a width of one game ball B in the left-right direction, and a second sub-out opening 2022 that is always open facing upward with a width of two game balls B adjacent to the right side of the general winning opening 2001.

The side right center unit 2700 also has a first guide passage 2701 that guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 backward, and a second guide passage 2702 that guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out opening 2022 backward. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape, extending backward from the general winning opening 2001, then bending to the right and then bending further backward. The second guide passage 2702 extends from the second sub-out opening 2022 below the first guide passage 2701, then bending backward. The exit of the first guide passage 2701 and the exit of the second guide passage 2702 are lined up one above the other.

When this side right center unit 2700 is assembled to the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100.

When assembled to the game board 5, the side right center unit 2700 has its right end approximately in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, its bottom end approximately in contact with the top end of the second attacca unit 2600, and a space through which the game ball B can pass is formed between its left end and the right side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center gadget 2500. In this side right center unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 opens upward at a position slightly to the left of the gadget winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2022 opens upward over almost the entire area between the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005 (see FIG. 144).

The side right center unit 2700 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guide passage 2701, and then deliver it to the first back guide passage 3156 of the back front right decorative unit 3140 in the back front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. The game ball B delivered to the first back guide passage 3156 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3001, and is discharged onto the board holder 1200 below through the back front lower performance unit 3160. In addition, the side right center unit 2700 can guide the game ball B received in the second sub-outlet 2022 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 by the second guide passage 2702, and then deliver it to the second back guide passage 3157 of the back front right decorative unit 3140 in the back front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. The game ball B delivered to the second back guide passage 3157 is discharged through the back front lower performance unit 3160 onto the board holder 1200 below.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 142 and 143. Figure 142(a) is a perspective view of the gate member as seen from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member as seen from the front, and (c) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member as seen from the rear. Figure 143(a) is a front view of the gate member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the C-line in (a).

The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is disposed within the game area 5a between the guide passage group 2520 of the center gimmick 2500 and the side right center unit 2700, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The gate member 2800 has a gate 2003 where a normal lottery result is drawn, which opens and closes the second starting opening 2004 when game ball B passes through, and a gate sensor 2801 for detecting that game ball B has passed through the gate 2003. The detection hole in the gate sensor 2801 for detecting game ball B is the gate 2003.

The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 that protrudes diagonally downward and to the left from near the right end of the bottom surface. The guide piece 2802 is intended to guide the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2003 downward and to the left. When assembled to the game board 5, this guide piece 2802 is inclined so that its extension passes near the left end of the general winning opening 2001 in the side right center unit 2700.

When assembled to the game board 5, the gate member 2800 is located approximately in the center between the right rail 1005 of the previous component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center device 2500, forming gaps on both the left and right sides through which the game ball B can pass. This gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of directly below the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center device 2500, and is located to the right of directly above the general winning opening 2001 of the side right center unit 2700.

To describe the gate member 2800 in further detail, the gate member 2800 has a gate body 2810 that is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) and holds a gate sensor 2801, and a gate seal 2811 that is attached to the front of the gate body 2810 and has a predetermined decoration printed on it. The gate body 2810 is formed to be transparent.

The gate body 2810 is provided with a front plate portion 2810a that is elongated in the left-right direction, a horizontally elongated, approximately rectangular attachment recess 2810b that is recessed rearward on the front surface of the front plate portion 2810a, an erroneous attachment prevention portion 2810c that is provided in the upper left corner of the attachment recess 2810b, a separation hole 2810d that penetrates the front plate portion 2810a in the front-rear direction near the right end of the attachment recess 2810b, a pair of arms 2810e that extend rearward from both the left and right end edges of the front plate portion 2810a, and flat flange portions 2810f that extend outward in the left-right direction from the rear ends of the pair of arms 2810e and are connected to each other at a location below the front plate portion 2810a.

The opposing faces of the pair of arm portions 2810e are spaced apart by a distance greater than the diameter of the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801. The flange portion 2810f is attached to the panel plate 1110 with its rear surface abutting against the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100.

The gate body 2810 also includes a storage groove 2810g that is recessed at a certain height in the vertical direction on the rear surface of the front plate portion 2810a and on each of the opposing surfaces of the pair of arm portions 2810e to store the gate sensor 2801, a rear extension portion 2810h that extends rearward from the rear end of the left arm portion 2810e so as to extend the arm portion 2810e and the storage groove 2810g, and a locking portion 2810i that extends rearward from the rear end of the right arm portion 2810e beyond the rear extension portion 2810h, has its rear end bent to the left, and is used to lock the gate sensor 2801 stored in the storage groove 2810g.

Furthermore, the gate body 2810 has a protrusion 2810j that protrudes into the accommodation groove 2810g at the intersection of the front plate portion 2810a and the left arm portion 2810e. The protrusion portion 2810j is formed in a shape that corresponds to the notch portion 2801a of the gate sensor 2801. The gate body 2810 also has an induction piece 2802 that extends downward from the underside of the right arm portion 2810e.

The attachment recess 2810b of the gate body 2810 is recessed backwards to a depth (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) greater than the thickness of the gate seal 2811 (see FIG. 143(b)). The misapplication prevention portion 2810c is formed in a C-chamfered shape that is larger than the chamfers of the other corners of the attachment recess 2810b. In this gate member 2800, since the gate seal 2811 (attachment recess 2810b) is rectangular in shape, which is long from side to side, it is difficult to determine the up-down direction of the gate seal 2811, and there is a risk that the gate seal 2811 will be attached upside down. However, the misapplication prevention portion 2810c allows the attachment direction of the gate seal 2811 to be specified, and the gate seal 2811 can be attached in the correct direction (the notch 2811a of the gate seal 2811 matches the misapplication prevention portion 2810c). If the gate seal 2811 is attached upside down to the attachment recess 2810b, the erroneous attachment prevention portion 2810c will cause part of the gate seal 2811 to protrude from the attachment recess 2810b, making it possible for the worker to notice that the gate seal 2811 has been attached incorrectly.

In this application recess 2810b, the left edge and the diagonal portion of the misapplication prevention portion 2810c are set as the contact surface for applying the gate seal 2811. This ensures clearance for applying the gate seal 2811 not only in the up-down and left-right directions, but also in the vertical direction of the diagonally extending portion of the misapplication prevention portion 2810c. In other words, there are three effective clearance directions when applying the gate seal 2811: up-down, left-right, and diagonal, making application easy (see FIG. 207(a)).

The separation hole 2810d is a rectangular hole that extends vertically. When assembled to the gate member 2800, the front side of this separation hole 2810d is closed by the gate seal 2811 attached to the attachment recess 2810b, and the rear side is closed by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 housed in the housing groove 2810g, making the inside of the separation hole 2810d a closed space.

In this embodiment, the separation hole 2810d has long and short sides each having a length within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 2810d were any smaller, the diameter of the rod-shaped separation member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 2810d would be smaller, making it easier to bend and potentially unable to sufficiently press the gate seal 2811. If the separation hole 2810d were any larger, the gate seal 2811 would bend at the separation hole 2531b, potentially causing the gate seal 2811 to look unattractive.

The right inner peripheral surface of this separation hole 2810d is flush with the bottom surface (surface facing left) of the storage groove 2810g formed in the right arm portion 2810e. In addition, the vertical dimension of the locking portion 2810i is smaller than the vertical dimension of the separation hole 2810d, and the rear end (claw portion) of the locking portion 2810i protrudes slightly to the left compared to the horizontal dimension of the separation hole 2810d.

In addition to its function of removing the gate seal 2811 described below, this separation hole 2810d can also function as an insertion hole through which a core is inserted to form the rear end of the lower engaging portion 2810i when injection molding the gate body 2810, making it easier to injection mold the gate body 2810.

The gate seal 2811 is offset inwards by a certain distance from the outer shape of the attachment recess 2810b, and is slightly longer in the left-right direction. The upper left corner of the gate seal 2811 has a C-chamfered cutout 2811a that corresponds to the misapplication prevention section 2810c, allowing the correct attachment direction (up and down in this case) to the attachment recess 2810b to be determined. The entire back surface of this gate seal 2811 is an adhesive surface with adhesive properties.

According to the gate member 2800 of this embodiment, if the gate seal 2811 cannot be properly attached to the attachment recess 2810b of the gate body 2810 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 2810d from the rear of the gate body 2810 (front plate portion 2810a) and the tip of the rod can be used to press the gate seal 2811 from rear to front, so that the edge of the gate seal 2811 can be rolled forward and removed. The gate seal 2811 can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2810b by having an operator pull the rolled-up portion, and the gate seal 2811 can be reattached.

In addition, with the gate body 2810 and the gate sensor 2801 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 2810d from the rear of the gate body 2810 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the gate seal 2811 from behind, making it easy to remove the gate seal 2811 from the attachment recess 2810b, which makes it easy to replace the gate seal 2811 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the gate body 2810 and the gate sensor 2801 are separated, the gate seal 2811 can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2810b using the separation hole 2810d, which makes it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, thereby reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, by attaching the gate seal 2811 to the attachment recess 2810b, the separation hole 2810d can be hidden from the front, which prevents the separation hole 2810d from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 2810d, making it difficult for players to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 2810d.

In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 2810d is closed from the rear by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 housed in the housing groove 2810g of the gate body 2810 to which the gate seal 2811 is affixed, and since there is no hole that passes through to the rear as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted through the hole into the game board 5 or the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801, thereby preventing illegal acts.

In addition, because the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 closes the separation hole 2810d from the rear, even if an illegal tool is inserted from the front through the gate seal 2811 and into the separation hole 2810d, the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 can prevent the illegal tool from entering the game board 5 or the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801 from the front through the separation hole 2810d, preventing illegal acts from being committed. In addition, because an illegal tool penetrates the gate seal 2811 and leaves a mark on the gate seal 2811, it is possible to deter illegal acts, and a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against illegal acts can be provided.

Furthermore, since the attachment recess 2810b to which the gate seal 2811 is attached is provided with an erroneous attachment prevention portion 2810c, if the gate seal 2811 is attached upside down, it is possible to prevent the gate seal 2811 from being attached correctly. This makes it possible for the worker to notice that the gate seal 2811 has been attached upside down, and also allows the worker to attach the gate seal 2811 in the correct orientation, thereby preventing the gate seal 2811 from being shipped in a state where it is attached upside down.

In addition, since the gate body 2810 has a protrusion 2810j in the storage groove 2810g, if the gate sensor 2801 is inserted from the rear into the storage groove 2810g in an orientation in which the protrusion 2810j and the cutout portion 2801a of the gate sensor 2801 do not match, the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 will abut against the protrusion 2810j before abutting against the rear surface of the front plate portion 2810a, making it impossible for the engaging portion 2810i to engage with the rear surface of the gate sensor 2801. In other words, the locking portion 2810i is locked to the rear end of the gate sensor 2801 and the gate sensor 2801 is held in place only when the gate sensor 2801 is inserted into the storage groove 2810g with the projection 2810j and the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801 aligned in the same direction. This makes it possible to avoid assembling the gate sensor 2801 in the wrong direction and suppresses the occurrence of problems with the gate sensor 2801.

Furthermore, by storing the gate sensor 2801 from the rear in the storage groove 2810g of the gate body 2810 and by locking the locking portion 2810i to the gate sensor 2801, the storage groove 2810g, the locking portion 2810i, and the rear side of the attachment recess 2810b can restrict the movement of the gate sensor 2801 in the up-down, left-right, and front-rear directions and position it, making it easier to assemble the pachinko machine 1 (gate member 2800) and reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1. At this time, since the separation hole 2810d is located in the front part of the storage groove 2810g in the gate body 2810, when the gate sensor 2801 is stored in the storage groove 2810g, the separation hole 2810d is closed from the rear by the front end of the gate sensor 2801. Therefore, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 2810d is closed from the rear by the gate sensor 2801 attached to the rear side of the gate body 2810 to which the gate seal 2811 is attached (pasted), and since there is no hole that passes through to the rear as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the hole, thereby preventing illegal acts.

As described above, the gate sensor 2801 can be restricted from moving forward and backward by engaging the locking portion 2810i of the gate body 2810. Even if the gate sensor 2801 is pressed backward by an unauthorized tool that penetrates the gate seal 2811 and the separation hole 2810d from the front, the gate sensor 2801 can be prevented from moving backward by the locking of the locking portion 2810i. This keeps the gate sensor 2801 from closing the separation hole 2810d from the rear, preventing unauthorized activity.

In addition, because the locking portion 2810i of the gate body 2810 protrudes within the front projection range of the separation hole 2810d, the separation hole 2810d can also be used as an insertion hole through which a core for forming the locking portion 2810i is inserted, and the gate body 2810 can be formed by injection molding.

From the above, we can grasp the following technical ideas A to C.

[Technical Concept A]
In the gaming machine,
"An ornamental body with a specified decoration,
A front member having a decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached from the front, and a separation hole that penetrates the decorated portion from the front to the rear and allows the attached decorative body to be separated by pressing it from the rear;
a passage member provided on the rear side of the front member so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, the passage member having a passage portion through which the game medium can flow;
The front member is
The decorative portion extends rearward from the rear side thereof, is recessed forward from the rear end thereof, the separation hole is located on the front end side thereof, and further has a storage portion capable of storing at least a portion of the passage member from the rear.

Here, the gate seal 2811 corresponds to the decorative body, the gate body 2810 corresponds to the front member, the attachment recess 2810b corresponds to the part to be decorated, the gate 2003 (detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) corresponds to the passage part, the gate sensor 2801 corresponds to the passage member, and the storage groove 2810g corresponds to the storage part.

As a result, since the separation hole is located in the front part of the storage section in the front member, when at least a portion of the passage member is stored in the storage section, the separation hole can be closed from the rear by the front end of the passage member, providing a gaming machine that provides the same effect as described above.

In addition, since the front member has a storage section, by storing at least a portion of the passage member in the storage section from the rear, the storage section can regulate and position the passage member in the up-down, left-right, and forward movement, making it easier to assemble the gaming machine and reducing the costs associated with the gaming machine.

[Technical Concept B]
In the gaming machine,
"An ornamental body with a specified decoration,
A front member having a decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached from the front, and a separation hole that penetrates the decorated portion from the front to the rear and allows the attached decorative body to be separated by pressing it from the rear;
a passage member provided on the rear side of the front member so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, the passage member having a passage portion through which the game medium can flow;
The front member is
The present invention is characterized in that it further has a locking portion that protrudes rearward of the decorated portion within the front projection range of the separation hole and is used to lock the passage member.

Here, the gate seal 2811 corresponds to the decorative body, the gate body 2810 corresponds to the front member, the attachment recess 2810b corresponds to the part to be decorated, the gate 2003 (detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) corresponds to the passage part, the gate sensor 2801 corresponds to the passage part, and the locking part 2810i corresponds to the locking part.

As a result, the locking portion that is locked to the passage member protrudes within the front projection range of the separation hole, so that when the passage member is locked to the locking portion, the passage member is sandwiched between the rear side of the covering decorative portion and the locking portion so as to close the separation hole from behind, allowing the passage member to close the separation hole and also restricting the movement of the passage member in the front-to-rear direction.

As described above, by engaging the passage member with the locking portion, movement in the forward and backward directions can be restricted. Therefore, even if the passage member is pushed backwards by an illegal tool that penetrates the ornament and the separation hole from the front, the backward movement of the passage member can be prevented by the locking portion, and the passage member can be kept closed from the rear of the separation hole, preventing illegal acts.

Furthermore, because the locking portion of the front member protrudes within the front projection range of the separation hole, the separation hole can also be used as an insertion hole through which a core for forming the locking portion is inserted, and the front member can be formed by injection molding.

[Technical Concept C]
In the gaming machine,
"An ornamental body with a specified decoration,
a front member having a decorated part which is recessed rearward relative to the front-to-rear depth of the decorative body and to which the decorative body is attached from the front, a separation hole which penetrates the decorated part from front to back and allows the attached decorative body to be separated by pressing it from behind, a storage section which extends rearward from the rear side of the decorated part and is recessed from the rear end toward the front with the separation hole located on the front end side, and a locking section which protrudes rearward from the decorated part and within the front projection range of the separation hole;
The present invention is characterized in that it is provided with a passage member, at least a portion of which is accommodated in the accommodation portion from the rear so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, and which is engaged with the engagement portion and has a passage portion through which the game medium can flow.

Here, the gate seal 2811 corresponds to the decorative body, the gate body 2810 corresponds to the front member, the attachment recess 2810b corresponds to the part to be decorated, the gate 2003 (detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) corresponds to the passage part, the gate sensor 2801 corresponds to the passage member, the storage groove 2810g corresponds to the storage part, and the locking part 2810i corresponds to the locking part.

As a result, the decorative body with a specified decoration is attached to the decorated part, which is the front surface of the front member provided in front of the passage member having a passage section through which the gaming medium flows, and the decoration of the decorative body can improve the appearance of the passage member. Also, since the decorated part to which the decorative body is attached is recessed further rearward than the depth of the decorative body in the front-to-rear direction, when the decorative body is attached to the decorated part, the surrounding part of the decorated part in the front member protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative body, so that the decorative body can be set off by being bordered by the forward-protruding part of the front member, making it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the decorative body and improving the appearance of the gaming machine.

In addition, because the part to which the decorative body is attached is recessed toward the rear, the decorative body can be attached using the protruding periphery of the decorated part on the front member as a guide, making it easier to attach the decorative body in the correct position, reducing failures in attaching the decorative body and suppressing increases in the costs of the gaming machine.

In this gaming machine, the decorated part of the front member is recessed backward, so that when the decorative body is attached to the decorated part, the contact surface between the decorative body and the decorated part is in a recessed position, so that even if you try to remove the decorative body attached to the decorated part, it is difficult to hook the decorative body from the front side, and it takes a lot of time to remove it. In contrast, a separation hole is provided in the decorated part, so that by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole from the rear of the front member and pushing the decorative body forward, the attachment to the decorated part can be easily released, and the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated part. Therefore, if the decorative body cannot be properly attached to the decorated part of the front member during manufacturing, the attachment to the decorated part can be easily released by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole from the rear of the front member and pressing the decorative body from the rear with the tip of the rod-shaped member, so that the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated part and reattached. In addition, when the front member and the passage member are separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body from behind, which can easily release the attachment to the decorated part, making it easy to remove the decorative body from the decorated part and facilitating the replacement work of the decorative body when changing models. Furthermore, as described above, when the front member and the passage member are separated, the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated part using the separation hole, making it easier to separate the components of the gaming machine by material, and reducing the cost of disposing of the gaming machine.

In addition, because a separation hole is provided in the decorated part, the separation hole can be made less visible or hidden from the front by attaching a decorative body to the decorated part, which prevents the separation hole from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the presence of the separation hole, making it difficult for players to plan fraudulent acts through the separation hole.

At least a part of the passage member is accommodated in the accommodation section of the front member from the rear, and the locking section is engaged with the passage member, so that the accommodation section, the locking section, and the rear side of the decorated section can restrict the passage member from moving in the up-down, left-right, and front-rear directions and position it, which makes it easier to assemble the gaming machine and reduces the cost of the gaming machine. At this time, since the separation hole is located in the front part of the accommodation section in the front member, when at least a part of the passage member is accommodated in the accommodation section, the separation hole is closed from the rear by the front end of the passage member. Therefore, when assembled into the gaming machine, the separation hole is closed from the rear by the passage member attached to the rear side of the front member to which the ornament is attached, and since there is no hole that passes through to the rear side as in conventional gaming machines, it is possible to avoid inserting a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire into the gaming machine through the hole, and to prevent illegal acts.

In addition, because the separation hole is closed from the rear by the passage member, even if an illegal tool is inserted from the front through the decoration and into the separation hole, the passage member can prevent it from being inserted (entered) further rearward. This prevents the illegal tool from entering the passage from the front through the separation hole, preventing illegal acts from being committed. In addition, because the illegal tool leaves a mark on the decoration when it penetrates the decoration, it makes people hesitate to commit illegal acts, and a gaming machine with a high deterrent effect against illegal acts can be provided.

As described above, by engaging the passage member with the locking portion, movement in the forward and backward directions can be restricted. Therefore, even if the passage member is pushed backwards by an illegal tool that penetrates the ornament and the separation hole from the front, the backward movement of the passage member can be prevented by the locking portion, and the passage member can be kept closed from the rear of the separation hole, preventing illegal acts.

In addition, because the locking portion of the front member protrudes within the front projection range of the separation hole, the separation hole can also be used as an insertion hole through which a core for forming the locking portion is inserted, and the front member can be formed by injection molding.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the play area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 137, 144, 145, etc. When assembled on the play board 5, the center role 2500 is provided in the approximate center of the play area 5a. In the play area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on both the left and right outer parts and the lower part of the center role 2500. In addition, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided on the left side of the center role 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300.

The multiple obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center device 2500 are adjusted so that the game ball B driven into the left side of the center device 2500 mainly enters the area to the right of the center of the windmill W, and is also adjusted so that the game ball B enters the area to the left of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability. This allows the game ball B to enter the warp entrance 2511 of the center device 2500 with a certain degree of probability by driving it so that it flows down the left side of the center device 2500.

The multiple obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center device 2500 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that the game ball B that has passed through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 has a higher probability of passing through the gate 2003 than the game ball B that has passed through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. Also, the multiple obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that the game ball B mainly passes through the left side of the gate member 2800 rather than the right side.

The multiple obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right center unit 2700 are adjusted so that the game ball B flows mainly to the left of the side right center unit 2700.

In the play area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and is shot upward from the left side along the periphery of the play area 5a. When the game ball B is shot into the play area 5a so as to flow along the left side of the center device 2500, as shown in FIG. 137, the game ball B is guided by the multiple obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center device 2500 to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center device 2500 or a part to the right of the center of the windmill W, and is guided to enter a part to the left of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than either of these.

The game ball B guided to the left of the center of the windmill W is guided to the right by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that the game ball B may be received by the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. The game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then handed over to the first discharge passage 3181 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and discharged onto the board holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a special prize of a predetermined number of game balls B is awarded. The game ball B guided to the left of the center of the windmill W is almost never received by the first starting opening 2002. Any game balls B that are not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 are discharged from the outlet 1008 outside the game area 5a.

A game ball B guided to the right of the center of the windmill W is guided toward the center in the left-right direction (first starting hole 2002) by multiple obstacle nails N arranged diagonally along the bottom side of the center device 2500, and may be accepted by the first starting hole 2002. In addition, a game ball B guided to the right of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through between multiple obstacle nails N arranged diagonally, and may be accepted by the general winning hole 2001 of the side unit 2200.

The game ball B that enters (is accepted by) the warp entrance 2511 of the center device 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls back and forth on the stage 2513 and is released forward from the center in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central release section 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, there is a high probability that it will be accepted by the first starting opening 2002, since the central release section 2513a is located directly above the first starting opening 2002. When the game ball B is released from the side release sections 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release section 2513a, there is a certain probability that it will be accepted by the first starting opening 2002.

The game ball B received by the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then handed over to the second discharge passage 3182 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, where it is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002 and discharged onto the board holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002, a lottery is held to determine the first special lottery result, and a special bonus is awarded, such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out. Game balls B that are released from the stage 2513 and not received by the first starting port 2002 are discharged from the out port 1008 outside the game area 5a.

In addition, game ball B that circulates to the left of the center device 2500 in the game area 5a has no chance of passing through gate 2003 or being accepted into the second starting gate 2004, the big prize gate 2005, or the device prize gate 2006.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the probability that the game ball B shot into the left side of the center device 2500 will be accepted by the first start hole 2002 is set higher than the probability that the game ball B shot into the right side of the center device 2500 will be accepted by the second start hole 2004. This encourages the player to shoot the game ball B into the left side of the center device 2500 ("left hit") when the big prize hole 2005 and the device prize hole 2006 are not open.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, when the game ball B is hit with enough force to enter the upper part of the part of the upper edge of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center role 2500 that becomes lower from near the center in the left-right direction toward the right, the game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

To be more specific, when game ball B is hit with enough force to strike the impact stop 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms part of the periphery of the play area 5a (so-called right strike), game ball B that strikes the impact stop 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. Game ball B that enters this first guide passage 2521 is released downward at a position slightly to the right of directly above the gate 2003.

The game ball B released downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is guided by a number of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 to the left side of the gate member 2800, gate 2003, and the right side of the gate member 2800 in the order of decreasing probability, and flows down toward the side right center unit 2700.

On the other hand, when game ball B shot into the upper right side of the center device 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the second guide passage 2522, it is released downward from the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521. Game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is guided so that the probability of it landing on the gate 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 is approximately the same, and the probability of it landing on the right side of the gate member 2800 is lower, and it flows down toward the side right center unit 2700.

The game ball B that passes through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received by the second sub-outlet 2022. The game ball B received by the second sub-outlet 2022 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and handed over to the second back guide passage 3157 of the back front right decorative unit 3140 in the back front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then discharged outside the game area 5a through the back front lower performance unit 3160. In addition, the game ball B that passes through the gate 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2801 and then released toward the side right center unit 2700. Upon detection of the game ball B by this gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery result is drawn, in which the second starting port 2004 opens and closes.

The game ball B that passes through the gate 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 flows down the left side of the side right center unit 2700 with a high probability due to the multiple obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right center unit 2700, and is sometimes received by the general winning port 2001 of the side right center unit 2700, and is rarely received by the second sub-out port 2022. The game ball B received by the general winning port 2001 of the side right center unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then handed over to the first back guide passage 3156 of the back front right decorative unit 3140 in the back front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is detected by the general winning port sensor 3001 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 through the back front lower performance unit 3160. At this time, a bonus of a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is given.

The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right center unit 2700 is guided by multiple obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right center unit 2700, and flows down to the left of the role winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600.

At this time, if game ball B is received by the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "perfect prize" is drawn as the first or second special lottery result, the prize winning port 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the side right center unit 2700 is received by the prize winning port 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the bonus prize opening 2006 is detected by the bonus prize opening sensor 2601, and is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a, and then handed over to the distribution passage 3158 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000. When the bonus prize opening sensor 2601 detects the game ball B, a bonus is awarded in which a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

Then, the game ball B delivered to the distribution passage 3158 is distributed to either the V winning port 2007 or the losing port 2008 by the drive of the V distribution solenoid 3007. The game ball B distributed to the V winning port 2007 is detected by the V winning port sensor 3003 and discharged onto the board holder 1200. On the other hand, the game ball B distributed to the losing port 2008 is detected by the losing port sensor 3004 without being detected by the V winning port sensor 3003, and is discharged onto the board holder 1200. When the game ball B is received by this V winning port 2007, a special privilege is given in which the large winning port 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern.

In addition, game ball B that is not accepted by the reel winning opening 2006 and flows down the left side of the reel winning opening 2006 enters the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center reel 2500 and is released from the exit of the lower right guide passage 2530 toward the first attacca unit 2400.

The game ball B released downward (diagonally downward and left) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center device 2500 flows down onto the first shelf 2421 of the first attacca unit 2400. Note that, because multiple obstacle nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacca unit 2400, the game ball B does not flow down from the lower right guide passage 2530 directly to the right side of the first standing wall 2425 of the first attacca unit 2400.

The game ball B that flows down to the first shelf 2421 of the first attacca unit 2400 rolls to the left due to its inclination, rolls over the top surface of the second starting gate 2411 and the second shelf 2422, and is released to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2422. Then, the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 falls onto the third shelf 2423 or the large prize gate 2413 depending on its momentum, rolls to the left due to their inclination, rolls from the large prize gate 2413 to the fourth shelf 2424, and is released from the fourth shelf 2424 to the left outside the first attacca unit 2400.

Depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center device 2500, it may come into contact with multiple obstacle nails N and flow down to the upper shelf 2436 instead of the first shelf 2421. The game ball B that flows down to the upper shelf 2436 rolls leftward due to its inclination and is released to the left from the left end of the upper shelf 2436, then comes into contact with an obstacle nail N planted on the left side and turns downward, flowing down near the left end of the top surface of the large prize opening door 2413, and then rolls leftward over the large prize opening door 2413 and the fourth shelf 2424 to be released outside the first attacca unit 2400. Therefore, even if game ball B rolls on the upper shelf 2436, it may be accepted by the large prize opening 2005 depending on the timing when game ball B is released from the upper shelf 2436 and the timing when the large prize opening 2005 opens.

Depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center device 2500, it may bounce to the right and flow down onto the first shelf 2421 due to contact with the obstacle nail N or the right end of the upper shelf 2436, and roll to the right against the inclination of the first shelf 2421, and be released to the right (downward) from the right end of the first shelf 2421. The game ball B released to the right from the right end of the first shelf 2421 passes between the first upright wall 2425 and the right rail 1005 of the previous component 1000, flows down near the right end of the second side wall 2433, and rolls to the left due to the inclination of the second side wall 2433 and is received by the first sub-out port 2021. The game ball B received by the first sub-outlet 2021 is not returned to the game area 5a but is handed over to the fifth discharge passage 3185 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, and is discharged from the fifth discharge passage 3185 onto the board holder 1200 below.

When game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center device 2500, if a "normal win" is drawn as the normal lottery result due to the passage of game ball B through gate 2003, the second start port door 2411 moves and the second start port 2004 opens in a predetermined pattern, so that game ball B rolling to the left on the first shelf section 2421 may be received by the second start port 2004. When game ball B is received by the second start port 2004, it is detected by the second start port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the play area 5a. When game ball B is detected by the second start port sensor 2401, a second special lottery result is drawn and a special bonus such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is given.

In addition, when the game ball B is released to the left from the second shelf 2422, if the game ball B is received by the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 and a "jackpot" is drawn as the first or second special lottery result, the large prize opening door 2413 moves and the large prize opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 is highly likely to be received by the large prize opening 2005. The game ball B received by the large prize opening 2005 is detected by the large prize opening sensor 2402 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the play area 5a. The detection of the game ball B by the large prize opening sensor 2402 provides a bonus of a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out.

Depending on the momentum of the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422, it may come into contact with a step on the underside of the upper shelf 2436, and flow diagonally downward to the right and enter the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423. The game ball B that enters the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423 passes between the third upright wall 2427 and the fourth upright wall 2428, falls near the left end of the second horizontal wall 2433, and rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall 2433 to be received by the first sub-outlet 2021.

If the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center device 2500 toward the first attacka unit 2400 is not accepted by any of the second starting opening 2004, the big prize opening 2005, or the first sub-out opening 2021, it is discharged from the out opening 1008 at the bottom end of the game area 5a to the lower rear of the game panel 1100, outside the game area 5a.

For this reason, in order to open and close the big prize opening 2005 and the special prize opening 2006, it is necessary to receive a game ball B into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 and draw a first or second special lottery result such as a "special prize" or a "big prize". While the first start opening 2002 is always open, the second start opening 2004 requires a game ball B to pass through the gate 2003 to draw (draw) a "normal prize" as a normal lottery result, so the opportunity to receive a game ball B into the second start opening 2004 is lower than that of the first start opening 2002.

Therefore, under normal conditions, the player can perform an operation to shoot the game ball B so that the game ball B flows down the left side of the center device 2500 so that the game ball B can be received by the first starting hole 2002. By seeing the movement of the game ball B guided by the multiple obstacle nails N, the player can enjoy the original gameplay of the pachinko machine 1 and can heighten the anticipation of the game ball B being received by the first starting hole 2002.

When game ball B is accepted into first starting opening 2002 and a "hit" or "big win" is selected as the first special lottery result, large prize opening 2005 or special prize opening 2006 opens and closes, so that game ball B can be accepted into large prize opening 2005 or special prize opening 2006, the operation of hitting game ball B can be changed to "hit from the right" to increase the anticipation of game ball B being accepted into large prize opening 2005 or special prize opening 2006.

At this time, a guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center device 2500, and depending on the guide passage through which the game ball B is circulated, it is easier for the game ball B to pass through the gate 2003 or to be easily accepted by the second sub-outlet 2022. Therefore, the strength of the shot of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B flows through the desired guide passage, allowing the player to enjoy the operation of shooting the game ball B.

In addition, by performing a "right hit", it is possible that a "normal hit" will be drawn by passing game ball B through gate 2003, which will open second starting port 2004, and it is possible that a "gimmick hit" or "jackpot" will be drawn by receiving game ball B into the open second starting port 2004, which can increase anticipation for the game and prevent a decline in interest.

[5-8j. Magnetic sensor]
Next, the multiple magnetic sensors 1050 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 146 to 148. Figure 146 is a front view of the game board showing the arrangement of the magnetic sensors. Figure 147(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting magnetic lines from a magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor unable to detect magnetic lines from a magnet, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic perspective view of the detection range of the magnetic sensor, (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body in which magnetic lines from a magnet are undetectable, and (e) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body in which magnetic lines from a magnet are detectable. Figure 148(a) is an oblique view showing a state in which the magnetic sensor is held by a holding member, (b) is an exploded oblique view showing a state in which the holding member and the magnetic sensor are separated, and (c) is an exploded view showing a cross section of the holding member.

The magnetic sensors 1050 are provided in multiple locations on the game board 5, and are intended to detect unauthorized magnetism (magnetic lines of force) acting within the game area 5a. As shown in FIG. 148(c), the magnetic sensor 1050 comprises a sensor body 1051 for detecting magnetism, a sensor board 1052 with a white surface on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted, and a transparent sensor case 1053 that covers the sensor board 1052 and the sensor body 1051. Although not shown, in addition to the sensor body 1051, ICs, transistors, resistors, diodes, connectors, etc. are mounted on the sensor board 1052.

The magnetic sensor 1050 is rectangular in plan view and is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped with a height shorter than the length of the short side of the rectangle, and one portion of the side in the height direction is chamfered. The magnetic sensor 1050 allows the internal sensor body 1051 and sensor board 1052 to be viewed from the outside through the transparent sensor case 1053.

The magnetic sensor 1050 can detect the passage of magnetic lines parallel to the longest side of the rectangular parallelepiped. Therefore, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1050 and the positional relationship with the magnet 1055 are as shown in FIG. 147(a), the magnetic lines of the magnet 1055 pass in a direction parallel to the long side, so the magnetism (magnetic lines of force) of the magnet 1055 can be detected.

On the other hand, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1050 and the positional relationship with the magnet 1055 are as shown in FIG. 147(b), the magnetic lines of force of the magnet 1055 pass perpendicular to the long side (perpendicular to the rectangular surface formed by the long and short sides), so the magnetism (magnetic lines of force) of the magnet 1055 cannot be detected.

For this reason, the magnetic sensor 1050 has a magnetic detection area DA of the magnet 1055 on one side and the other side of the long side direction centered on the magnetic sensor 1050, as shown by the hatched area in Figure 147 (c). In other words, the magnetic sensor 1050 has a gourd-shaped detection area DA formed by combining two spheres.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146, multiple magnetic sensors 1050 are provided, each facing in an appropriate direction. Each magnetic sensor 1050 is positioned so that it can detect illegal magnetism acting near the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the special winning opening 2006, and the warp entrance 2511 in the game area 5a. In other words, each magnetic sensor 1050 is positioned in an appropriate direction so that the area in the game area 5a where illegal acts using magnets are expected to occur is included in the detection area DA of the magnetic sensor 1050 (the area shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 146).

In addition, on the game board 5, each magnetic sensor 1050 is designed so that its detection area DA does not come into contact with the solenoids or drive motors so as not to detect magnetism (magnetic lines of force) from the start port solenoid 2412, the attacca solenoid 2414, the role winning port solenoid 2612, the V-distribution solenoid, and the drive motor provided in the back unit 3000, etc.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(d), if a magnetic body 1056 is placed in parallel to a magnetic sensor 1050 capable of detecting magnetic lines of force from a magnet 1055, the magnetic lines of force will be attracted to the magnetic body 1056, reducing the number of magnetic lines of force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050, and the magnetic sensor 1050 may no longer be able to detect the magnetic lines of force (magnetism) from the magnet 1055.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 147(e), when a magnetic body 1057 is arranged in series with a magnetic sensor 1050 capable of detecting magnetic lines of force from a magnet 1055, the magnetic body 1057 attracts the magnetic lines of force, thereby increasing the number of magnetic lines of force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. This makes it possible to detect the magnetic field of a magnet 1055 that is far away or a magnet 1055 with weak magnetic force.

However, in conventional pachinko machines, the magnetic sensor is attached to the game board using a screw made of a magnetic material. Depending on the relative positions of the magnetic sensor and the screw, the magnetic field from the magnet used to commit fraud can be attracted to the screw, which has a high magnetic permeability, reducing the magnetic field passing through the magnetic sensor, which can cause the machine to be unable to detect the approach of the magnet. In contrast, in this embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached without using a screw.

To be more specific, as shown in FIG. 148, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached to the game board 5 via a holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material (here, synthetic resin). The holding member 1060 has a storage section 1061 capable of storing the magnetic sensor 1050 from one side, and an elastic claw 1062 that engages with the magnetic sensor 1050 stored in the storage section 1061. The holding member 1060 also has a protrusion 1063 that protrudes from the leg of the elastic claw 1062 into the storage section 1061. The holding member 1060 is made of a transparent synthetic resin.

When the magnetic sensor 1050 is inserted from the outside into the storage section 1061, the elastic claw 1062 of the holding member 1060 elastically deforms in a direction away from the storage section 1061, and when the magnetic sensor 1050 is stored in the storage section 1061, the elastic claw 1062 returns to its original position and engages with the magnetic sensor 1050. At this time, the protrusion 1063 provided on the leg of the elastic claw 1062 abuts against the magnetic sensor 1050, pressing the magnetic sensor 1050 against a portion of the inner surface of the storage section 1061 opposite the elastic claw 1062.

The elastic claw 1062 engages the magnetic sensor 1050, preventing it from moving out of the housing 1061 and preventing it from falling off. In addition, the protrusion 1063 abuts against the magnetic sensor 1050, pressing it into the housing 1061, preventing the magnetic sensor 1050 from rattling inside the housing 1061.

In this way, because the holding member 1060 is made of a non-magnetic material, it is possible to prevent the holding member 1060 from attracting the magnetic lines of force from the magnet when the magnet is brought close to the play area 5a, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the magnetic lines of force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the magnetism acting on the play area 5a, and it is possible to detect fraudulent behavior using magnets at an early stage, and it is possible to discourage fraudulent behavior by reporting the detection of suspicious magnetism by the magnetic sensor 1050, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent behavior.

In addition, the retaining member 1060, which is made of a non-magnetic material, prevents the magnetic lines from being attracted from the magnet and prevents a decrease in the magnetic lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. This makes it possible to effectively detect the magnetic field acting on the play area 5a with a smaller number of magnetic sensors 1050 than in conventional pachinko machines, and therefore allows the number of magnetic sensors 1050 to be reduced compared to conventional pachinko machines, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1062 of the holding member 1060, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached and detached from the holding member 1060. This means that the magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached using the elastic claws 1062 without using metal screws made of magnetic material as in conventional pachinko machines. This also simplifies the process of assembling the pachinko machine 1, and helps prevent an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is biased (pressed) toward the storage section 1061 by the protrusion 1063 of the holding member 1060, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be prevented from vibrating finely due to the biasing force of the protrusion 1063, and therefore the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 can be prevented from coming loose or causing poor contact due to the vibration, thereby ensuring reliable operation of the magnetic sensor 1050.

In addition, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is held by the holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material and is attached to the game board 5, the portion of the holding member 1060 that is attached to the game board 5 can be located away from the magnetic sensor 1050, or outside the magnetic detection area DA in the play area 5a. This reduces the influence of magnetic materials such as screws used to attach the holding member 1060 to the game board 5 as much as possible, allowing the magnetic sensor 1050 to reliably detect the magnetic field acting on the play area 5a, providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly deterrent to fraudulent activities using magnets.

In addition, the magnetic sensor 1050 is held visibly by the transparent holding member 1060, and the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is transparent, so the sensor body 1051 mounted on the sensor board 1052 can be seen by the player through the transparent sensor case 1053. At this time, since the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor body 1051 of a different color (for example, black) can be made to stand out. Therefore, the player can be made to strongly recognize that the magnetic sensor 1050 is not a dummy but a real one, and the visibility of the magnetic sensor 1050 can make those who would like to commit fraud using magnets hesitate to commit fraud, and can increase the deterrent effect against fraud, thereby reducing the burden on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, in the magnetic sensor 1050, the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted is white, making the sensor board 1052 less noticeable and preventing the sensor board 1052 from being mistaken for a decorative board on which an LED is mounted. Therefore, even if the sensor board 1052 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is visible, it will not bother a normal player, and it is possible to avoid the appearance of the play area 5a being impaired.

In addition, because the sensor body 1051 of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be seen from the outside, it is possible to check from the outside whether the sensor body 1051 is damaged or not, which simplifies the maintenance work required for the pachinko machine 1 and reduces the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the rear unit 3000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 149 etc. Fig. 149(a) is a perspective view of the rear unit of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rear unit of the game board seen from the back. The rear unit 3000 of the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the performance display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The rear unit 3000 is equipped with a rear box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, is box-shaped with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a locking mechanism (not shown) that is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 and allows the performance display device 1600 to be detachably attached.

The rear unit 3000 also includes a rear front performance unit 3100 located near the front end of the rear box 3010, a rear upper performance unit 3200 located at the top of the rear box 3010 behind the rear front performance unit 3100, and a rear lower performance unit 3300 located at the bottom of the rear box 3010 below the rear upper performance unit.

The rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 is box-shaped with an open front and a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall, a flat frame-like LCD mounting section 3010b that protrudes rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed from the inside of the frame toward the right on the right side of the LCD mounting section 3010b into which the right fixing piece 1602 of the performance display device 1600 is inserted, and a cutout 3010d cut from the rear end to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 near the vertical center of the left side of the LCD mounting section 3010b, into which a locking mechanism is attached.

The opening 3010a of the rear box 3010 is formed to be approximately the same size as the display screen of the performance display device 1600. The LCD mounting section 3010b is also formed to be large enough to fit the performance display device 1600 into the frame. The rear box 3010 has a locking mechanism attached to the left side of the cutout section 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from behind, so that it can slide up and down.

The rear box 3010 also has a flat fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece 3010e is attached to the gaming panel 1100 with its front surface abutting the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100. The rear box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes formed at appropriate positions for mounting the rear front performance unit 3100, etc.

The rear unit 3000 also has a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 provided in the front unit 2000, a first start port sensor 3002 that detects a game ball B received in the first start port 2002, a V winning port sensor 3003 that detects a game ball B that is received in the special winning port 2006 and then allocated to the V winning port 2007, and a losing port sensor 3004 that detects a game ball B that is received in the special winning port 2006 and then allocated to the losing port 2008 (see FIG. 169, etc.).

The back unit 3000 further includes a V winning port door 3006 that can move back and forth to open and close the V winning port 2007, and a V distribution solenoid 3007 that moves the V winning port door 3006 back and forth to distribute the game ball B received in the device winning port 2006 to either the V winning port 2007 or the losing port 2008. The general winning port sensor 3001, the first start port sensor 3002, the V winning port sensor 3003, the losing port sensor 3004, the V winning port door 3006, and the V distribution solenoid 3007 are provided in the back front performance unit 3100.

［5-9a. Backstage Production Unit］
Next, the back front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 150 to 160. Figure 150 is a front view of the back front performance unit in the back unit. Figure 151 (a) is a perspective view of the back front performance unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front performance unit in the back unit seen from the back. Figure 152 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the back front performance unit cut near the center in the vertical direction and seen from above, (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the left part in (a), and (c) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the right part in (a). Figure 153 is an exploded perspective view of the back front left decorative unit of the back front performance unit seen from the front together with the light guide plate. Figure 154 is an exploded perspective view of the back front left decorative unit seen from the back, with only the back front left first decorative body, the back front left second decorative body, the back front left third decorative body, and the back front left decorative body base being disassembled. Figure 155 (a) is a front view of the first back front left decorative body shown in a transparent state, (b) is a front view of the second back front left decorative body shown in a transparent state, (c) is a front view of the third back front left decorative body shown in a transparent state, and (c) is a front view of the back front left decorative body base shown in a transparent state.

Figure 156 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate in the back front performance unit and the decorative board for illuminating and decorating the light guide plate and the back front left decorative unit from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate in the back front performance unit and the decorative board for illuminating and decorating the decorative body of the back front lower performance unit from the front. Figure 157 is a front view showing the back front left decorative unit in an illuminating and decorated state. Figure 158 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate is illuminating, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is illuminating. Figure 159 is an explanatory diagram showing the illuminating configuration of the second pattern of the light guide plate. Figure 160 is a front view of the back front performance unit shown in a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is illuminating.

The rear front performance unit 3100 in the rear unit 3000 is attached to the front end inside the rear box 3010. The rear front performance unit 3100 is equipped with a transparent flat light guide plate 3110 located in the center when viewed from the front, a rear front left decorative unit 3120 located on the left end side of the light guide plate 3110, a rear front right decorative unit 3140 located on the right end side of the light guide plate 3110, a rear front lower performance unit 3160 located on the lower end side of the light guide plate 3110 and connecting the lower ends of the rear front left decorative unit 3120 and the rear front right decorative unit 3140, and an upper connecting base 3190 connecting the upper ends of the rear front left decorative unit 3120 and the rear front right decorative unit 3140.

The rear front right decorative unit 3140 is equipped with a general winning port sensor 3001 which detects a game ball B accepted into the general winning port 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a V winning port sensor 3003 which detects a game ball B accepted into the special winning port 2006 of the second attacca unit 2600 and then allocated to the V winning port 2007, and a losing port sensor 3004 which detects a game ball B accepted into the special winning port 2006 of the second attacca unit 2600 and then allocated to the losing port 2008. In addition, the rear front right decorative unit 3140 is equipped with a V winning port door 3006 for distributing the game ball B received in the role winning port 2006 of the second attacca unit 2600 to either the V winning port 2007 or the losing port 2008, and a V distribution solenoid 3007 for moving the V winning port door 3006 back and forth (opening and closing).

The rear front lower performance unit 3160 is equipped with a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 of the side unit 2200, and a first starting port sensor 3002 that detects a game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100.

[5-9a-1. Light guide plate]
The light guide plate 3110 in the back front performance unit 3100 reflects only the light from the left and right to the front to produce a first pattern 3111 (see FIG. 158(a)) that is illuminated and displayed, and a second pattern 3112 that is illuminated and displayed only by the light from a specific portion below. The light guide plate 3110 is provided with a second pattern 3112 (see FIG. 158(b)) that is illuminated by reflecting the light forward. A plurality of LEDs 3128g for the light guide plate of the decorative substrate 3128, a plurality of LEDs 3128g for the light guide plate of the rear front right first decorative substrate 3148, a rear front right second decorative substrate 3149, and a plurality of LEDs 3128g for the rear front right light guide plate of the rear front right decorative unit 3140, When the LED for the light guide plate is turned on, the first image 3111 can be illuminated and displayed. In addition, when the multiple LEDs 3176 on the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate of the back front lower performance unit 3160 are illuminated, the second image 3112 can be illuminated and displayed.

As shown in the figure, the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of a stylized letter "A" in the center and "wings" on both the left and right sides of the letter "A" that are spread out. As shown in the figure, the first pattern 3111 is configured so that the shading and brightness of the light-emitting display differ depending on the part of the pattern, enhancing the design and decorativeness of the pattern. In more detail, in FIG. 158(a), the first pattern 3111 is configured so that the part with the darkest shading is composed of multiple points that emit the same color of light from the LED, the part with the lightest shading is composed of multiple points that emit light by splitting the cocktail light from the LED, and the other parts with the same shading are composed of multiple lines that emit the same color of light from the LED.

Here, cocktail light refers to light of a color that includes two or more of the three primary colors of light. For example, when yellow light, which is a mixture of red and green light, is irradiated onto the spectral light-emitting unit as cocktail light, the yellow light components are split into red and green light, and parts that look red or green appear in the relevant area. Alternatively, when white light is irradiated onto the spectral light-emitting unit as cocktail light, the white light components are split into red, green, and blue light, and parts that look red, green, or blue appear in the relevant area, or light of a color that is a suitable mixture of these, resulting in a sparkling rainbow-colored light emission. Note that when light of only one of the three primary colors of light is irradiated onto this spectral light-emitting unit, the light of that color is emitted because there is no component that is split into the relevant color. For this reason, the spectral light-emitting unit can emit light in a single color or in multiple sparkling colors depending on the color of the light it irradiates, allowing for a more diverse light-emitting performance.

LEDs (such as LEDs 3128g for light guide plate) for illuminating and displaying the first pattern 3111 are mounted on the rear-front-left decorative board 3128 of the rear-front-left decorative unit 3120, and the rear-front-right first decorative board 3148, rear-front-right second decorative board 3149, and decorative board 3150 for the rear-front-right light guide plate of the rear-front-right decorative unit 3140.

The second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of multiple lines 3113 (straight lines) extending radially upward from multiple locations spaced apart in the left-right direction near the bottom end. Each line 3113 of the second pattern 3112 is composed of multiple points that emit light in the same color as the light from the LEDs 3176 on the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate, which will be described later. The multiple lines 3113 that make up the second pattern 3112 are formed to reflect only the light from the corresponding LED 3176 forward, and are formed so that each can emit light independently.

In the second pattern 3112, the multiple lines 3113 are divided into five line groups 3114, from the left: first line group 3114a, second line group 3114b, third line group 3114c, fourth line group 3114d, and fifth line group 3114e. Each line group 3114 is made up of five lines 3113, from the left: first line 3113a, second line 3113b, third line 3113c, fourth line 3113d, and fifth line 3113e. The five lines 3113 in one line group 3114, the first line 3113a to the fifth line 3113e, have their respective bottom ends positioned at the same position, and extend radially upward from the position of their bottom ends.

The illuminated display of the second image 3112 allows the player to see an illumination effect similar to that of a searchlight shining from below on a concert stage, making the play area 5a look dazzling and entertaining the player, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The LEDs 3176 for illuminating the second image 3112 are mounted on the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate of the back front lower performance unit 3160 in the back front performance unit 3100.

[5-9a-2. Back front left decorative unit]
The back front left decorative unit 3120 in the back front performance unit 3100 forms a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) and has a long back front left logo decorative part 3121 consisting of multiple alphabetical characters, a back front upper left logo decorative part 3122 located above the back front left logo decorative part 3121 and featuring a stylized letter "A", and a back front left sub-decorative part 3123 located to the left of the back front left logo decorative part 3121.

The back front left decorative unit 3120 comprises a transparent back front left first decorative body 3124 which has a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a transparent back front left second decorative body 3125 provided behind the back front left first decorative body 3124, a transparent back front left third decorative body 3126 provided behind the back front left second decorative body 3125, and a transparent back front left decorative body base 3127 provided behind the back front left third decorative body 3126.

The back front left decorative unit 3120 also includes a back front left decorative substrate 3128 for illuminating and decorating the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, the back front left logo decorative portion 3121, the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122, and the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123, a back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 for illuminating and decorating the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122, and a back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 for illuminating and decorating the back front left logo decorative portion 3121 and the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123.

Furthermore, the rear-front-left decorative unit 3120 includes a rear-front-left reflector 3131 provided on the right side of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128, a rear-front-upper-left reflector 3132 provided below the rear-front-upper-left decorative board 3129, and a rear-front-lower-left reflector 3133 provided above the rear-front-lower-left decorative board 3130.

The back front left decorative unit 3120 also includes a left diffusion lens 3134 that is provided between the back front left third decorative body 3126 and the back front left decorative body base 3127.

The rear-front-left first decorative body 3124 is attached to the front of the rear-front-left decorative body base 3127 so as to sandwich the rear-front-left second decorative body 3125, the rear-front-left third decorative body 3126, the left diffusion lens 3134, and the left end of the light guide plate 3110. The rear-front-left first decorative body 3124 is formed in a transparent flat plate shape that is long vertically. The rear-front-left first decorative body 3124 has a partition decorative part 3124a at a location approximately 3/4 of the height from the bottom that extends left and right and penetrates front and rear.

The rear front left first decorative body 3124 also has multiple through decorative parts 3124b that penetrate from front to back. The multiple through decorative parts 3124b are provided near the upper and lower ends, and near the upper right end of the dividing decorative part 3124a. The through decorative parts 3124b are formed in a rhombus shape, with the four sides of a square replaced by arcs bulging inwards.

The back front left first decorative body 3124 has a first front left logo decoration 3124c that is provided below the dividing decoration 3124a on the front surface and forms part of the back front left logo decoration 3121, and a relief-shaped first back left logo decoration 3124d that is provided in a position corresponding to the first front left logo decoration 3124c on the back surface. The right side of the back front left first decorative body 3124 is formed in a shape that follows the logo character strings of the first front left logo decoration 3124c and the first back left logo decoration 3124d.

The back front left first decorative body 3124 has a first upper left logo decorative part 3124e, which is provided in relief above the dividing decorative part 3124a on the back surface and forms part of the back front left upper logo decorative part 3122, and a number of first left sub-decorative parts 3124f, which are provided in relief to the left of the first back left logo decorative part 3124d on the back surface and form part of the back front left sub-decorative part 3123. The first upper left logo decorative part 3124e forms the outermost part of the back front left upper logo decorative part 3122. The first left sub-decorative part 3124f is formed in a cloisonné pattern made by stacking quarters of the same sized circles and extracting a part of one circle, and a diamond pattern with the outer circle of the cloisonné pattern removed, and are arranged in a row vertically.

The back front left first decorative body 3124 is shown as opaque in Figures 153 and 154, but is actually transparent, so that the first back left logo decorative part 3124d, the first upper left logo decorative part 3124e, and the first left sub-decorative part 3124f, which are provided on the rear surface, can be seen from the front as shown in Figure 155(a).

When assembled to the back-front-left decorative unit 3120, the back-front-left first decorative body 3124 is located in front of the back-front-left second decorative body 3125, and is attached at an angle so that the right side is located rearward relative to the left side (see Figure 152). When assembled, the back-front-left first decorative body 3124 is located so that its left side is in contact with the right side of the board holding portion 3125b of the back-front-left second decorative body 3125, and the first lower LED 3128a and first upper LED 3128b of the back-front-left decorative board 3128 are located to the left of it. When assembled, the back-front-left first decorative body 3124 has the first LED of the back-front-left upper decorative board 3129 located above the top surface, and the first LED 3130a of the back-front-left lower decorative board 3130 located below the bottom surface.

When the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front left lower decorative board 3130 of the back front left first decorative body 3124 are illuminated, the first front left logo decorative part 3124c, the first back left logo decorative part 3124d, and the first left sub decorative part 3124f are illuminated and decorated by light entering the interior from a part lower than the partition decorative part 3124a on the left side surface through the board holding part 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and light entering the interior from the underside. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative part 3124a and the inner surface of the through decorative part 3124b provided near the lower end are also illuminated and decorated.

In addition, in the partition decorative part 3124a, when the light incident from the first lower LED 3128a of the rear front left decorative board 3128 or the first LED 3130a of the rear front left lower decorative board 3130 reaches the lower inner circumferential surface, a part of the light that reaches the inner circumferential surface is reflected to the lower inner side of the partition decorative part 3124a, and the remainder is radiated from the inner circumferential surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative part 3124a. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the partition decorative part 3124a reaches the inner circumferential surface on the opposite side, a part of it is reflected to the inside of the partition decorative part 3124a, and the remainder is incident from the inner circumferential surface to the upper inner side of the partition decorative part 3124a. In this way, the light from the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front left lower decorative board 3130 is greatly dimmed by passing through the partition decorative part 3124a, so the first upper left logo decorative part 3124e above the partition decorative part 3124a is hardly illuminated (illuminated decoration) by the light from the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front left lower decorative board 3130, and only the first front left logo decorative part 3124c, first back left logo decorative part 3124d, and first left sub decorative part 3124f can be brightly illuminated.

In addition, when the first upper LED 3128b of the back-front-left decorative board 3128 and the first LED of the back-front-left upper decorative board 3129 of the back-front-left first decorative body 3124 are illuminated, the first upper-left logo decorative part 3124e is illuminated and decorated by light entering the interior from a portion above the partition decorative part 3124a on the left side via the board holding part 3125b of the back-front-left second decorative body 3125 and light entering the interior from the top. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative part 3124a and the through decorative part located above the partition decorative part 3124a are also illuminated and decorated.

In addition, in the partition decorative part 3124a, when the light incident on the inside from the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 or the first LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 reaches the upper inner circumferential surface, a part of the light that reaches the inner circumferential surface is reflected to the upper inner side of the partition decorative part 3124a, and the remainder is radiated from the inner circumferential surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative part 3124a. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the partition decorative part 3124a reaches the inner circumferential surface on the opposite side, a part of it is reflected to the inside of the partition decorative part 3124a, and the remainder is incident from the inner circumferential surface to the lower inner side of the partition decorative part 3124a. In this way, the light from the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 is greatly dimmed by passing through the partition decorative part 3124a, so the first front left logo decorative part 3124c and the first back left logo decorative part 3124d and the first left sub-decorative part 3124f below the partition decorative part 3124a are hardly illuminated (illuminated decoration) by the light from the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and only the first upper left logo decorative part 3124e and the upper through decorative part 3124b are brightly illuminated.

In this way, the first decorative body 3124 on the front left of the back is configured so that the upper and lower sides can be illuminated (illuminated) independently, with the dividing decorative portion 3124a as the boundary.

The back-front-left second decorative body 3125 is entirely transparent and has a flat decorative plate portion 3125a parallel to the back-front-left first decorative body 3124, and a board holding portion 3125b provided on the periphery (left side, upper side, lower side) of the decorative plate portion 3125a except for the right side. The board holding portion 3125b extends outward from the decorative plate portion 3125a, protrudes forward, and is recessed forward from the rear side. The board holding portion 3125b cooperates with the board holding portion 3127b of the back-front-left decorative body base 3127 to clamp and hold the back-front-left decorative board 3128, the back-front-left upper decorative board 3129, and the back-front-left lower decorative board 3130. The front of the back front left second decorative body 3125 is parallel to the front of the game panel 1100, while the decorative plate portion 3125a is inclined so that the right side is positioned further back than the left side.

The rear front left second decorative body 3125 also has a partition decorative part 3125c that extends left and right and penetrates front and back at a location about 3/4 of the height from the bottom of the decorative plate part 3125a. This partition decorative part 3125c is formed to be the same size and height as the partition decorative part 3124a of the rear front left first decorative body 3124.

The back front left second decorative body 3125 also has a relief-shaped second back left logo decorative part 3125d that is provided below the dividing decorative part 3125c on the rear surface and forms part of the back front left logo decorative part 3121. The right side of the back front left second decorative body 3125 is formed in a shape that follows the text of the logo on the second back left logo decorative part 3125d.

The back front left second decorative body 3125 also has a second upper left logo decorative part 3125e, which is provided in relief above the dividing decorative part 3125c on the back surface and forms part of the back front left upper logo decorative part 3122, and a plurality of second left sub-decorative parts 3125f, which are provided in relief to the left of the second back left logo decorative part 3125d on the back surface and form part of the back front left sub-decorative part 3123. The second upper left logo decorative part 3125e is formed to be one size smaller than the first upper left logo decorative part 3124e of the back front left first decorative body 3124. The second left sub-decorative parts 3125f are provided at a position corresponding to the first left sub-decorative part 3124f, and are formed to be one size smaller and have a similar shape.

The back front left second decorative body 3125 is shown as opaque in Figures 153 and 154, but is actually transparent, so that the second back left logo decorative part 3125d, the second upper left logo decorative part 3125e, and the second left sub-decorative part 3125f, which are provided on the rear surface, can be seen from the front as shown in Figure 155(b).

When the rear-front-left second decorative body 3125 is assembled to the rear-front-left decorative unit 3120, as shown in FIG. 152 etc., the rear-front-left first decorative body 3124 is located in front of the decorative plate portion 3125a, and the rear-front-left third decorative body 3126 is located behind it. In addition, when the rear-front-left second decorative body 3125 is assembled, the front end sides of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128 and the rear-front-left reflector 3131, the front end sides of the rear-front-left upper decorative board 3129 and the rear-front-left upper reflector 3132, and the front end sides of the rear-front-left lower decorative board 3130 and the rear-front-left lower reflector 3133 are inserted into the board holding portion 3125b which is recessed forward. The second lower LED 3128c and second upper LED 3128d of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128 are located to the left of the left surface of the decorative plate portion 3125a, the second LED of the rear-front-left upper decorative board 3129 is located above the top surface, and the second LED 3130b of the rear-front-left lower decorative board 3130 is located below the bottom surface.

When the second lower LED 3128c of the back-front-left decorative board 3128 and the second LED 3130b of the back-front-left lower decorative board 3130 are illuminated, the second back-left logo decorative part 3125d and the second left sub-decorative part 3125f are illuminated and decorated by light entering the interior from a portion below the partition decorative part 3125c on the left surface of the decorative plate part 3125a and light entering the interior from the underside of the decorative plate part 3125a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative part 3125c is also illuminated and decorated.

In addition, in the partition decorative part 3125c, when the light incident from the second lower LED 3128c of the rear front left decorative board 3128 or the second LED 3130b of the rear front left lower decorative board 3130 reaches the lower inner circumferential surface, a part of the light that reaches the inner circumferential surface is reflected to the lower inner side of the partition decorative part 3125c, and the remainder is emitted from the inner circumferential surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative part 3125c. Then, when the light emitted to the inside of the partition decorative part 3125c reaches the inner circumferential surface on the opposite side, a part of it is reflected to the inside of the partition decorative part 3125c, and the remainder is incident from the inner circumferential surface to the upper inner side of the partition decorative part 3125c. In this way, the light from the second lower LED 3128c of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED 3130b of the back front left lower decorative board 3130 is greatly dimmed by passing through the partition decorative part 3125c, so that the second upper left logo decorative part 3125e above the partition decorative part 3125c is hardly illuminated (illuminated decoration) by the light from the second lower LED 3128c of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED 3130b of the back front left lower decorative board 3130, and only the second back left logo decorative part 3125d and the second left sub decorative part 3125f can be brightly illuminated.

In addition, when the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 are illuminated, the second upper left logo decorative part 3125e is illuminated and decorated by light entering the interior from a portion above the partition decorative part 3125c on the left surface of the decorative plate part 3125a and light entering the interior from the top surface of the decorative plate part 3125a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative part 3125c is also illuminated and decorated.

In addition, in the partition decorative part 3125c, when the light incident from the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative board 3128 or the second LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 reaches the upper inner circumferential surface, a part of the light that reaches the inner circumferential surface is reflected to the upper inner side of the partition decorative part 3125c, and the remainder is radiated from the inner circumferential surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative part 3125c. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the partition decorative part 3125c reaches the inner circumferential surface on the opposite side, a part of it is reflected to the inside of the partition decorative part 3125c, and the remainder is incident from the inner circumferential surface to the lower inner side of the partition decorative part 3125c. In this way, the light from the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 is greatly dimmed by passing through the dividing decorative part 3125c, so that the second back left logo decorative part 3125d and the second left sub-decorative part 3125f below the dividing decorative part 3125c are hardly illuminated (illuminated decoration) by the light from the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and only the second upper left logo decorative part 3125e is brightly illuminated.

In this way, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is configured so that the upper and lower sides can be illuminated (illuminated) independently, with the dividing decorative portion 3125c as the boundary.

The rear front left third decorative body 3126 is entirely transparent and has a flat decorative plate portion 3126a parallel to the decorative plate portions 3125a of the rear front left first decorative body 3124 and the rear front left second decorative body 3125, and a flange portion 3126b extending rearward from the periphery (left side, upper side, lower side) of the decorative plate portion 3126a except for the right side. The rear surface of the flange portion 3126b of the rear front left third decorative body 3126 is parallel to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, while the decorative plate portion 3126a is inclined so that the right side is positioned further rearward than the left side.

The rear front left third decorative body 3126 also has a partition decorative part 3126c that extends left and right and penetrates front and back at a location about 3/4 of the height from the bottom of the decorative plate part 3126a. This partition decorative part 3126c is formed to be the same size and height as the partition decorative part 3124a of the rear front left first decorative body 3124.

The back front left third decorative body 3126 also has a relief-shaped third back left logo decorative part 3126d that is provided below the dividing decorative part 3126c on the rear surface and forms part of the back front left logo decorative part 3121. The right side of the back front left third decorative body 3126 is formed in a shape that follows the text of the logo on the third back left logo decorative part 3126d.

The back front left third decorative body 3126 has a third upper left logo decorative part 3126e, which is provided in relief above the partition decorative part 3126c on the back surface and forms part of the back front left upper logo decorative part 3122, and a plurality of third left sub-decorative parts 3126f, which are provided in relief to the left of the third back left logo decorative part 3126d on the back surface and form part of the back front left sub-decorative part 3123. The third upper left logo decorative part 3126e is formed to be one size smaller than the second upper left logo decorative part 3125e of the back front left second decorative body 3125. The third left sub-decorative part 3126f is provided at a position corresponding to the first left sub-decorative part 3124f, and is formed to be a similar shape with a size between the first left sub-decorative part 3124f and the second left sub-decorative part 3125f.

The back front left third decorative body 3126 is shown as opaque in Figures 153 and 154, but is actually transparent, so that the third back left logo decorative part 3126d, the third upper left logo decorative part 3126e, and the third left sub-decorative part 3126f, which are provided on the rear surface, can be seen from the front, as shown in Figure 155 (c).

When the rear-front-left third decorative body 3126 is assembled to the rear-front-left decorative unit 3120, as shown in FIG. 152 etc., the decorative plate portion 3125a of the rear-front-left first decorative body 3124 and the rear-front-left second decorative body 3125 are located in front of the decorative plate portion 3126a, and the light guide plate 3110 and the left diffusion lens 3134 are located behind it. In addition, when the rear-front-left third decorative body 3126 is assembled, the third lower LED 3128e and the third upper LED 3128f of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128 are located to the left of the left surface of the decorative plate portion 3126a, the third LED of the rear-front-left upper decorative board 3129 is located above the top surface, and the third LED 3130c of the rear-front-left lower decorative board 3130 is located below the bottom surface.

When the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED 3130c of the back front left lower decorative board 3130 are illuminated, the third back left logo decorative part 3126d and the third left sub-decorative part 3126f are illuminated and decorated by light entering the interior from a portion below the partition decorative part 3126c on the left surface of the decorative plate part 3126a and light entering the interior from the underside of the decorative plate part 3126a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative part 3126c is also illuminated and decorated.

In addition, in the partition decorative part 3126c, when the light incident from the third lower LED 3128e of the rear front left decorative board 3128 or the third LED 3130c of the rear front left lower decorative board 3130 reaches the lower inner circumferential surface, a part of the light that reaches the inner circumferential surface is reflected to the lower inner side of the partition decorative part 3126c, and the remainder is emitted from the inner circumferential surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative part 3126c. Then, when the light emitted to the inside of the partition decorative part 3126c reaches the inner circumferential surface on the opposite side, a part of it is reflected to the inside of the partition decorative part 3126c, and the remainder is incident from the inner circumferential surface to the upper inner side of the partition decorative part 3126c. In this way, the light from the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED 3130c of the back front left lower decorative board 3130 is greatly dimmed by passing through the dividing decorative part 3126c, so that the third upper left logo decorative part 3126e above the dividing decorative part 3126c is hardly illuminated (illuminated decoration) by the light from the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED 3130c of the back front left lower decorative board 3130, and only the third back left logo decorative part 3126d and the third left sub-decorative part 3126f can be brightly illuminated.

In addition, when the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 are illuminated, the third upper left logo decorative part 3126e is illuminated and decorated by light entering the interior from a portion above the partition decorative part 3126c on the left surface of the decorative plate part 3126a and light entering the interior from the top surface of the decorative plate part 3126a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative part 3126c is also illuminated and decorated.

In addition, in the partition decorative part 3126c, when the light incident on the inside from the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative board 3128 or the third LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 reaches the upper inner circumferential surface, a part of the light that reaches the inner circumferential surface is reflected to the upper inner side of the partition decorative part 3126c, and the remainder is radiated from the inner circumferential surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative part 3126c. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the partition decorative part 3126c reaches the inner circumferential surface on the opposite side, a part of it is reflected to the inside of the partition decorative part 3126c, and the remainder is incident from the inner circumferential surface to the lower inner side of the partition decorative part 3126c. In this way, the light from the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 is greatly dimmed by passing through the dividing decorative part 3126c, so that the third back left logo decorative part 3126d and the third left sub-decorative part 3126f below the dividing decorative part 3126c are hardly illuminated (illuminated decoration) by the light from the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and only the third upper left logo decorative part 3126e is brightly illuminated.

In this way, the rear front left third decorative body 3126 is configured so that the upper and lower sides can be illuminated (illuminated) independently, with the dividing decorative portion 3126c as the boundary.

The rear front left decorative body base 3127 is entirely transparent and has a flat decorative plate portion 3127a and a board holding portion 3127b provided on the periphery (left side, top side, bottom side) of the decorative plate portion 3127a, excluding the right side. The decorative plate portion 3127a is parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100.

The board holding portion 3127b extends outward further than the decorative plate portion 3127a, and its rear surface is located rearward, recessed rearward from the front side. The board holding portion 3127b cooperates with the board holding portion 3125b of the back-front-left second decorative body 3125 to clamp and hold the back-front-left decorative board 3128, the back-front-left upper decorative board 3129, and the back-front-left lower decorative board 3130. The board holding portion 3127b has the left end of the upper connecting base 3190 attached to its upper portion, and the left end of the upper end of the unit base 3178 of the back-front-lower performance unit 3160 attached to its lower portion.

The back front left decorative body base 3127 also has three back front left band decorative parts 3127c that extend across the entire width at a constant vertical height near the vertical center of the rear surface of the decorative plate part 3127a and are spaced apart vertically, and a base upper left logo decorative part 3127d that is provided in relief near the upper part of the rear surface of the decorative plate part 3127a and forms part of the back front upper left logo decorative part 3122. The base upper left logo decorative part 3127d is formed to be one size smaller than the third upper left logo decorative part 3126e of the back front left third decorative body 3126.

The back front left decorative body base 3127 is shown as opaque in Figures 153 and 154, but is actually transparent, so that the back front left band decorative part 3127c and the upper left logo decorative part 3127d on the base can be seen from the front, as shown in Figure 155(d).

When the back-front-left decorative body base 3127 is assembled to the back-front-left decorative unit 3120, as shown in FIG. 152 etc., the light guide plate 3110 and the left diffusion lens 3134 are located in front of the decorative plate portion 3127a. In addition, when the back-front-left decorative body base 3127 is assembled, the rear end sides of the back-front-left decorative board 3128 and the back-front-left reflector 3131, the rear end sides of the back-front-left upper decorative board 3129 and the back-front-left upper reflector 3132, and the rear end sides of the back-front-left lower decorative board 3130 and the back-front-left lower reflector 3133 are inserted into the board holding portion 3127b, which is recessed toward the rear. The base-under LED 3128h and base-upper LED 3128i of the back-front-left decorative board 3128 are located to the left of the left surface of the decorative plate portion 3127a.

When the LED 3128h below the base of the back-front-left decorative board 3128 is illuminated, the back-front-left decorative body base 3127 can illuminate and decorate the back-front-left band decorative part 3127c of the decorative plate part 3127a. Each of the three back-front-left band decorative parts 3127c can be illuminated and decorated independently. In addition, when the LED 3128i above the base of the back-front-left decorative board 3128 is illuminated, the back-front-left decorative body base 3127 can illuminate and decorate the base upper left logo decorative part 3127d.

The back-front-left decorative board 3128 is a long, flat board that faces in the left-right direction. The back-front-left decorative board 3128 is positioned to the left of the decorative board portion 3125a of the back-front-left first decorative body 3124, the decorative board portion 3126a of the back-front-left third decorative body 3126, and the decorative board portion 3127a of the back-front-left decorative body base 3127. The back-front-left decorative board 3128, together with the back-front-left reflector 3131, is sandwiched between the board holding portion 3125b of the back-front-left second decorative body 3125 and the board holding portion 3127b of the back-front-left decorative body base 3127.

The back-front-left decorative board 3128 is located to the left of the back-front-left first decorative body 3124 and includes a plurality of first lower LEDs 3128a arranged below the partition decorative portion 3124a, a plurality of first upper LEDs 3128b arranged to the left of the back-front-left first decorative body 3124 and above the partition decorative portion 3124a, a plurality of second lower LEDs 3128c arranged to the left of the decorative plate portion 3125a of the back-front-left second decorative body 3125 and below the partition decorative portion 3125c, and a plurality of back-front-left second decorative It is equipped with a plurality of second upper LEDs 3128d located to the left of the decorative plate portion 3125a of the body 3125 and arranged above the dividing decorative portion 3125c, a plurality of third lower LEDs 3128e located to the left of the decorative plate portion 3126a of the rear front left third decorative body 3126 and arranged below the dividing decorative portion 3126c, and a plurality of third upper LEDs 3128f located to the left of the decorative plate portion 3126a of the rear front left third decorative body 3126 and arranged above the dividing decorative portion 3126c.

The back-front-left decorative substrate 3128 also includes a number of LEDs 3128g for the light guide plate located to the left of the left diffusion lens 3134 (light guide plate 3110), three below-base LEDs 3128h located to the left of the back-front-left band decorative portion 3127c in the decorative plate portion 3127a of the back-front-left decorative body base 3127, and a number of above-base LEDs 3128i located to the left of the base upper-left logo decorative portion 3127d in the decorative plate portion 3127a of the back-front-left decorative body base 3127.

When the multiple first lower LEDs 3128a of the back front left decorative board 3128 are illuminated, the first front left logo decoration 3124c and the first back left logo decoration 3124d of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple first upper LEDs 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 are illuminated, the first upper left logo decoration 3124e of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple second lower LEDs 3128c of the back front left decorative board 3128 are illuminated, the second back left logo decoration 3125d of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple second upper LEDs 3128d of the back front left decorative board 3128 are illuminated, the second upper left logo decoration 3125e of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be illuminated and decorated.

In addition, when the multiple third lower LEDs 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128 are illuminated, the third back left logo decorative portion 3126d of the back front left third decorative body 3126 and the like can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple third upper LEDs 3128f of the back front left decorative board 3128 are illuminated, the third upper left logo decorative portion 3126e of the back front left third decorative body 3126 and the like can be illuminated and decorated.

When the multiple light guide plate LEDs 3128g on the back front left decorative board 3128 are illuminated, the first pattern 3111 on the light guide plate 3110 can be illuminated and displayed via the left diffusion lens 3134. When the multiple (three) under-base LEDs 3128h on the back front left decorative board 3128 are illuminated, the back front left band decorative portion 3127c of the back front left decorative body base 3127 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple above-base LEDs 3128i on the back front left decorative board 3128 are illuminated, the base upper left logo decorative portion 3127d of the back front left decorative body base 3127 can be illuminated and decorated.

The first lower LED 3128a, first upper LED 3128b, second lower LED 3128c, second upper LED 3128d, third lower LED 3128e, third upper LED 3128f, LED for light guide plate 3128g, lower base LED 3128h, and upper base LED 3128i mounted on the right surface of the rear front left decorative board 3128 are full color LEDs.

The front left decorative board 3128 is coated on the surface with a white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist makes the front left decorative board 3128 less visible and reflects the light from the mounted LEDs, allowing the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, the front left logo decoration 3121, the front left upper logo decoration 3122, the front left sub decoration 3123, etc. to be more brightly illuminated and decorated. In addition, the front left decorative board 3128 has letters and symbols printed on it by screen printing using ink of a high brightness and saturation (e.g., yellow) to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards. This makes the letters and symbols less noticeable. In addition, although not shown, the front left decorative board 3128 is also equipped with connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc. in addition to the LEDs.

The upper left back front decorative board 3129 is a long flat plate with its plate surface facing up and down. The upper left back front decorative board 3129 is positioned above the decorative plate portion 3125a of the first front left decorative body 3124, the second front left decorative body 3125, the decorative plate portion 3126a of the third front left decorative body 3126, and the decorative plate portion 3127a of the back front left decorative body base 3127. The upper left back front decorative board 3129, together with the upper left back front reflector 3132, is sandwiched between the board holding portion 3125b of the second front left decorative body 3125 and the board holding portion 3127b of the back front left decorative body base 3127.

The upper back-front-left decorative board 3129, although not shown in the figure, is equipped with a number of first LEDs provided above the first back-front-left decorative body 3124, a number of second LEDs provided above the decorative plate portion 3125a of the second back-front-left decorative body 3125, and a number of third LEDs provided above the decorative plate portion 3126a of the third back-front-left decorative body 3126.

When the multiple first LEDs on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 are illuminated, the first upper left logo decoration 3124e of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple second LEDs on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 are illuminated, the second upper left logo decoration 3125e of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple third LEDs on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 are illuminated, the third upper left logo decoration 3126e of the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be illuminated and decorated.

The multiple first LEDs, second LEDs, and third LEDs mounted on the underside of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 are full color LEDs.

The front left top decorative board 3129 is coated on its surface with a white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist makes the front left top decorative board 3129 less visible and reflects the light from the mounted LEDs, allowing the front left top logo decoration 3122 and other parts to be more brightly lit and decorated. The front left top decorative board 3129 also has letters and symbols printed on it using ink of high brightness and saturation (e.g., yellow) to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards. This makes the letters and symbols less noticeable. Although not shown in the figure, the front left top decorative board 3129 also has connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc. mounted on it in addition to the LEDs.

The back-front-left lower decorative board 3130 is a long, flat board that faces in the vertical direction. The back-front-left lower decorative board 3130 is disposed below the decorative board portion 3125a of the back-front-left first decorative body 3124, the decorative board portion 3126a of the back-front-left third decorative body 3126, and the decorative board portion 3127a of the back-front-left decorative body base 3127. The back-front-left lower decorative board 3130, together with the back-front-left lower reflector 3133, is sandwiched between the board holding portion 3125b of the back-front-left second decorative body 3125 and the board holding portion 3127b of the back-front-left decorative body base 3127.

The rear front left lower decorative board 3130 is equipped with a plurality of first LEDs 3130a provided below the rear front left first decorative body 3124, a plurality of second LEDs 3130b provided below the decorative plate portion 3125a of the rear front left second decorative body 3125, and a plurality of third LEDs 3130c provided below the decorative plate portion 3126a of the rear front left third decorative body 3126.

When the multiple first LEDs 3130a on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 are illuminated, the first front left logo decoration 3124c and the first back left logo decoration 3124d of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple second LEDs 3130b on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 are illuminated, the second back left logo decoration 3125d of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple third LEDs 3130c on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 are illuminated, the third back left logo decoration 3126d of the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be illuminated and decorated.

The first LED 3130a, second LED 3130b, and third LED 3130c mounted on the underside of the rear front left lower decorative board 3130 are full color LEDs.

The front left lower decorative board 3130 is coated on its surface with a white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist makes the front left lower decorative board 3130 less visible and reflects the light from the mounted LEDs, allowing the front left logo decoration 3121 and other parts to be more brightly lit and decorated. The front left lower decorative board 3130 also has letters and symbols printed on it by screen printing using ink of a high brightness and saturation (e.g., yellow) to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards. This makes the letters and symbols less noticeable. Although not shown in the figure, the front left lower decorative board 3130 also has connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc. mounted on it in addition to the LEDs.

The left diffusion lens 3134 is disposed between the light guide plate 3110 and the rear front left decorative substrate 3128 (rear front left reflector 3131), and is sandwiched between the rear front left third decorative body 3126 and the rear front left decorative body base 3127. The left diffusion lens 3134 diffuses the light from the multiple light guide plate LEDs 3128g on the rear front left decorative substrate 3128, and irradiates it onto the left side of the light guide plate 3110.

As shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decorative unit 3120 is formed by overlapping the first front left logo decorative portion 3124c and the first back left logo decorative portion 3124d of the back front left first decorative body 3124, the second back left logo decorative portion 3125d of the back front left second decorative body 3125, and the third back left logo decorative portion 3126d of the back front left third decorative body 3126, forming a single back front left logo decorative portion 3121. Since the first front left logo decorative portion 3124c and the first back left logo decorative portion 3124d, the second back left logo decorative portion 3125d, and the third back left logo decorative portion 3126d are positioned differently in the front to back direction, when the player's eye position moves, the degree of overlap changes, making a specified logo consisting of multiple letters appear three-dimensional.

In addition, the back front left decorative unit 3120 can illuminate the first lower LED 3128a, second lower LED 3128c, and third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128, and the first LED 3130a, second LED 3130b, and third LED 3130c of the back front left lower decorative board 3130 appropriately, thereby independently illuminating and decorating the first front left logo decoration 3124c and the first back left logo decoration 3124d, the second back left logo decoration 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration 3126d, and can illuminate and decorate the back front left logo decoration 3121 in a variety of illumination modes.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decorative unit 3120 forms a single back front left upper logo decoration 3122 by overlapping the first upper left logo decoration 3124e of the back front left first decorative body 3124, the second upper left logo decoration 3125e of the back front left second decorative body 3125, the third upper left logo decoration 3126e of the back front left third decorative body 3126, and the base upper left logo decoration 3127d of the back front left decorative body base 3127. Since the first upper left logo decoration 3124e, the second upper left logo decoration 3125e, the third upper left logo decoration 3126e, and the base upper left logo decoration 3127d are positioned differently in the front to back direction, when the player's eye position moves, the degree of overlap changes, making the logo with a stylized letter "A" appear three-dimensional.

In addition, even if the back front left decorative unit 3120 has a logo such as the first upper left logo decoration 3124e, the second upper left logo decoration 3125e, the third upper left logo decoration 3126e, and the base upper left logo decoration 3127d, which are located in approximately the same position when viewed from the front, by sequentially lighting up and decorating the back front left first decoration 3124, the back front left second decoration 3125, the back front left third decoration 3126, and the back front left decoration base 3127, a pseudo animation with movement can be shown to the player, making a strong appeal to the player. This animation-like lighting effect can also be achieved by sequentially lighting up and decorating the first front left logo decoration 3124c, the first back left logo decoration 3124d, the second back left logo decoration 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration 3126d.

In addition, the back front left decorative unit 3120 can illuminate the first upper LED 3128b, second upper LED 3128d, third upper LED 3128f, base upper LED 3128i of the back front left decorative board 3128, and the first LED, second LED, and third LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 appropriately, thereby independently illuminating and decorating the first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, second upper left logo decoration part 3125e, third upper left logo decoration part 3126e, and base upper left logo decoration part 3127d, and can illuminate and decorate the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 in a variety of illumination modes.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decorative unit 3120 forms a single back front left sub-decorative part 3123 by overlapping the first left sub-decorative part 3124f of the back front left first decorative body 3124, the second left sub-decorative part 3125f of the back front left second decorative body 3125, and the third left sub-decorative part 3126f of the back front left third decorative body 3126 in the front-to-back direction. Because the first left sub-decorative part 3124f, the second left sub-decorative part 3125f, and the third left sub-decorative part 3126f are positioned at different front-to-back positions, when the player's eye position moves, the degree of overlap changes, making the back front left sub-decorative part 3123 appear three-dimensional.

In addition, the back-front-left decorative unit 3120 can illuminate the first lower LED 3128a, the second lower LED 3128c, and the third lower LED 3128e of the back-front-left decorative board 3128, and the first LED 3130a, the second LED 3130b, and the third LED 3130c of the back-front-left lower decorative board 3130 appropriately, thereby independently illuminating and decorating the first left sub-decorative part 3124f, the second left sub-decorative part 3125f, and the third left sub-decorative part 3126f, and the back-front-left sub-decorative part 3123 can be illuminated and decorated in a variety of illumination modes.

Furthermore, the back front left decorative unit 3120 is equipped with a dividing decorative portion 3124a of the back front left first decorative body 3124, a dividing decorative portion 3125c of the back front left second decorative body 3125, and a dividing decorative portion 3126c of the back front left third decorative body 3126, so that the luminous decorations on the lower side (back front left logo decoration portion 3121, back front left sub-decorative portion 3123) and the upper side (back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122) can be clearly divided by the dividing decorative portion 3124a, dividing decorative portion 3125c, and dividing decorative portion 3126c, thereby further enhancing the decorative effect of the luminous decorations of the back front left logo decoration portion 3121 and the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123 and the luminous decoration of the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122. At this time, the partition decorative parts 3124a, 3125c, and 3126c are also illuminated, improving the appearance of the partition decorative parts 3124a, 3125c, and 3126c while allowing the enjoyment of the illuminated decoration.

In addition, when the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front left lower decorative board 3130 are illuminated, the through decorative part 3124b below the partition decorative part 3124a of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated and decorated. In addition, when the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 are illuminated, the through decorative part 3124b above the partition decorative part 3124a of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated and decorated. The illuminated decoration of these through decorative parts 3124b can also improve the appearance.

In addition, the rear-front-left decorative unit 3120 can illuminate the light guide plate LEDs 3128g of the rear-front-left decorative substrate 3128 to cooperate with the light guide plate LEDs of the rear-front-right first decorative substrate 3148, the rear-front-right second decorative substrate 3149, and the rear-front-right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 in the rear-front-right decorative unit 3140 to illuminate and display the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110.

In this way, the back front left decorative unit 3120 can improve the appearance of the playing area 5a with transparent, three-dimensional decorations such as the back front left logo decorative portion 3121, the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122, and the back front left sub decorative portion 3123, providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, the back front left logo decoration 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration 3122, and the back front left sub decoration 3123 can be illuminated in a variety of lighting modes, making it possible to prevent players from becoming bored with the diverse lighting effects and to prevent a decline in player interest.

In the above, the partition decorative portion 3124a, partition decorative portion 3125c, and partition decorative portion 3126c that block light from the LED are shown as penetrating from front to back, but this is not limited to this and they may also be groove-shaped or ridged. Also, a protrusion may be provided on the back front left second decorative body 3125 to be inserted into the penetrating decorative portion 3124b of the back front left first decorative body 3124, so that the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be positioned by inserting the protrusion. In other words, the penetrating decorative portion 3124b may be a positioning hole.

[5-9a-3. Back front right decorative unit]
The back front right decorative unit 3140 in the back front performance unit 3100 forms a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) and has a long back front right logo decorative part 3141 consisting of multiple alphabetical characters, a back front upper right logo decorative part 3142 (see Figure 151 (b)) located above the back front right logo decorative part 3141 and which is a stylized letter "A", and a back front right sub-decorative part (not shown) located near the back front right logo decorative part 3141.

The back front right decorative unit 3140 comprises a transparent back front right first decorative body 3144 which has a vertically long shape when viewed from the front, a transparent back front right second decorative body 3145 provided behind the back front right first decorative body 3144, a transparent back front right third decorative body 3146 provided behind the back front right second decorative body 3145, and a transparent back front right decorative body base 3147 provided behind the back front right third decorative body 3146 (see Figure 152).

The right end of the upper connecting base 3190 is attached to the upper part of the back front right decorative body base 3147, and the right end of the upper end of the unit base 3178 of the back front lower performance unit 3160 is attached to the lower part. In addition, the back front right decorative body base 3147 has three back front right band decorative parts 3147a that extend across its entire width at a constant height vertically near the center in the vertical direction and are spaced apart vertically (see Figure 151 (b)).

The back front right decorative unit 3140 also includes a back front right first decorative substrate 3148 and a back front right second decorative substrate 3149 for illuminating and decorating the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, the back front right logo decorative portion 3141, the back front right upper logo decorative portion 3142, and the back front right sub decorative portion, a back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 for illuminating and decorating the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, a back front right upper decorative substrate 3151 for illuminating and decorating the back front right upper logo decorative portion 3142, and a back front right lower decorative substrate 3152 for illuminating and decorating the back front right logo decorative portion 3141 (see FIG. 156).

The back front right decorative unit 3140 also includes an upper right diffusion lens 3153 provided between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front right first decorative substrate 3148, a middle right diffusion lens 3154 provided between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front right second decorative substrate 3149, and a lower right diffusion lens 3155 provided between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front right decorative substrate 3150 (see FIG. 156). The upper right diffusion lens 3153, middle right diffusion lens 3154, and lower right diffusion lens 3155 are provided between the back front right third decorative body 3146 and the back front right decorative body base 3147.

Furthermore, the back front right decorative unit 3140 is provided with a first back guide passage 3156 that receives the game ball B that is received by the general winning port 2001 of the side right center unit 2700 and guided backward by the first guide passage 2701 and guides it downward, and a second back guide passage 3157 that receives the game ball B that is received by the second sub-out port 2022 of the side right center unit 2700 and guided backward by the second guide passage and guides it downward. One general winning port sensor 3001 is provided in the first back guide passage 3156. The game ball B guided to the first back guide passage 3156 and the second back guide passage 3157 is discharged to the lower board holder 1200 via the back front lower performance unit 3160.

The rear front right decorative unit 3140 also includes a distribution passage through which game balls B that are received by the device winning port 2006 of the second attacca unit 2600 and guided rearward by the guide passage 2613 circulate, and through which a V winning port 2007 and a losing port 2008 are provided, a V winning port door 3006 that moves back and forth within the distribution passage to distribute the game balls B received by the device winning port 2006 to either the V winning port 2007 or the losing port 2008, a V distribution solenoid 3007 that moves the V winning port door 3006 back and forth, a V winning port sensor 3003 that detects the game balls B that have been distributed to the V winning port 2007, and a losing port sensor 3004 that detects the game balls B that have been distributed to the losing port 2008. The game ball B detected by the V winning hole sensor 3003 or the losing hole sensor 3004 is discharged to the lower board holder 1200 via the back front lower performance unit 3160.

The configuration of the back front right logo decoration part 3141, the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, the back front right sub decoration part, etc. of the back front right decorative unit 3140 is the same as that of the back front left decorative unit 3120, and detailed explanation will be omitted.

In addition, the back front right first decorative body 3144, the back front right second decorative body 3145, and the back front right third decorative body 3146 of the back front right decorative unit 3140 have a partition decorative part 3144a that extends left and right and penetrates front and back between the back front right logo decorative part 3141 and the back front right upper logo decorative part 3142. This partition decorative part 3144a allows the back front right logo decorative part 3141 and the back front right upper logo decorative part 3142 to be illuminated and decorated independently.

Furthermore, the rear front right first decorative body 3144 has multiple through decorative parts 3144b that penetrate from front to back. These multiple through decorative parts 3144b can achieve the same effect as the through decorative part 3124b of the rear front left first decorative body 3124.

In this way, with the back front right decorative unit 3140, like the back front left decorative unit 3120, the transparent, three-dimensional decorations such as the back front right logo decoration 3141, the back front upper right logo decoration 3142, and the back front right sub decoration can improve the appearance within the game area 5a, providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, the back front right logo decoration 3141, the back front right logo decoration 3142, and the back front right sub decoration can be illuminated in a variety of lighting modes, making it possible to prevent players from becoming bored with the diverse lighting effects and to prevent a decline in player interest.

In addition, by sequentially lighting up the back front right first decorative body 3144, the back front right second decorative body 3145, the back front right third decorative body 3146, and the back front right decorative body base 3147 in the back front right logo decorative body 3141 and the back front right upper logo decorative body 3142, which are located in approximately the same position when viewed from the front, a dynamic pseudo-animation can be shown to the player, making a strong appeal to the player.

[5-9a-4. Back front lower performance unit]
The back-front-lower performance unit 3160 in the back-front performance unit 3100 comprises a disk-shaped back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 with the word "SPIN" written on the top center in the left-right direction, a back-front-lower rotation drive motor (not shown) that rotates the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 about an axis in the front-to-back direction, and a back-front-lower lifting drive motor 3162 that raises and lowers the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161. The back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 is translucent.

The back-front-lower performance unit 3160 also includes a disk-shaped back-front-lower left inner decorative body 3163 of the same size that is provided to the left of the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161, a disk-shaped back-front-lower left outer decorative body 3164 of the same size that is provided to the left of the back-front-lower left inner decorative body 3163, a disk-shaped back-front-lower right inner decorative body 3165 of the same size that is provided to the right of the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161, and a disk-shaped back-front-lower right outer decorative body 3166 of the same size that is provided to the right of the back-front-lower right inner decorative body 3165. The back-front-lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back-front-lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back-front-lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the back-front-lower right outer decorative body 3166 are translucent.

In addition, the back front lower performance unit 3160 is provided to the left of the back front lower left outer decoration 3164, and is equipped with a back front lower logo decoration 3167 with the word "Queen" engraved on it. The back front lower logo decoration 3167 is translucent.

Furthermore, the back-front-lower performance unit 3160 includes a back-front-lower middle decorative board 3168 for illuminating and decorating the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161, a back-front-lower left inner decorative board 3169 for illuminating and decorating the back-front-lower left inner decorative body 3163, a back-front-lower left outer decorative board 3170 for illuminating and decorating the back-front-lower left outer decorative body 3164, a back-front-lower right inner decorative board 3171 for illuminating and decorating the back-front-lower right inner decorative body 3165, a back-front-lower right outer decorative board 3172 for illuminating and decorating the back-front-lower right outer decorative body 3166, and a back-front-lower logo decorative board 3173 for illuminating and decorating the back-front-lower logo decorative body 3167 (see Figure 156 (b)).

The back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172 and back front lower logo decorative board 3173 are located behind the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 and back front lower logo decorative body 3167.

In addition, the back front lower middle decorative board 3168, the back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, the back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, the back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, the back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, and the back front lower logo decorative board 3173 have multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the front and are coated with white solder resist (protective material) on the surface. This white solder resist allows light from the LEDs and the front to be reflected, allowing the decorative bodies installed in front of each board to be brightly illuminated and decorated.

In addition, the back front lower middle decorative board 3168, the back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, the back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, the back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, the back front lower right outer decorative board 3172 and the back front lower logo decorative board 3173 have letters and symbols applied by screen printing using ink of a high brightness and saturation color (e.g. yellow) to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards. This makes it possible to make the letters and symbols less noticeable through the decorative body installed in front, ensuring that the decorative effect of the decorative body can be exerted.

The multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 are top-view type LEDs. On the other hand, the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, the back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, the back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, the back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, and the back front lower logo decorative board 3173 are side-view type LEDs.

In addition, these decorative boards are provided with non-light-emitting components other than the LEDs (e.g., connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) on the rear (back) side so as not to interfere with the illuminated decoration.

The back front lower middle decorative body 3161, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, and the back front lower logo decorative body 3167 are located above the bottom end of the light guide plate 3110, as shown in FIG. 156. This makes the bottom end of the light guide plate 3110 invisible to the player (from the front). In addition, the upper ends of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 are positioned below the lower end of the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 as shown in Figure 160, and are arranged in the left-right direction at intervals corresponding to each of the line groups 3114 that make up the second pattern 3112.

In more detail, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is arranged to correspond to the third line group 3114c, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163 to the second line group 3114b, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164 to the first line group 3114a, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165 to the fourth line group 3114d, and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 to the fifth line group 3114e. Therefore, when the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 are illuminated (either by illuminating only the upper end or by illuminating the entire body), the player is given the illusion that the lines 3113 of the second pattern 3112 are illuminated by light from the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, and the player can be shown an illumination effect that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines.

In addition, the back front lower performance unit 3160 is located behind the back front lower middle decorative board 3168, the back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, the back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, the back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, the back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, and the back front lower logo decorative board 3173, and is equipped with a light guide plate left decorative board 3174 and a light guide plate right decorative board 3175 for illuminating (illuminating decoration) the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 (see Figure 156 (a)).

The left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate each have five LED groups 3177 consisting of five LEDs 3176. The five LEDs 3176 included in each LED group 3177 are arranged in the following order from the right: first LED 3176a, second LED 3176b, third LED 3176c, fourth LED 3176d, fifth LED 3176e. Each LED group 3177 corresponds to each line group 3114 in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and is arranged in the following order from the left: first LED group 3177a, second LED group 3177b, third LED group 3177c, fourth LED group 3177d, fifth LED group 3177e.

The LEDs 3176 of the first LED group 3177a and the second LED group 3177b are mounted on the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate. The LEDs 3176 of the third LED group 3177c, the fourth LED group 3177d, and the fifth LED group 3177e are mounted on the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate.

The LEDs 3176 mounted on the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate are side-view type full-color LEDs. The left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate are coated on the surface with a white solder resist (protective material), and this white solder resist makes the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate less noticeable from the front. In addition, the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate are screen-printed with letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as the LEDs 3176 and other decorative boards, using ink of a high brightness and saturation color (e.g., yellow). This makes it possible to make the letters and symbols less noticeable through the decorative body provided in front, and ensures that the decorative effect of the decorative body can be exerted.

In each LED group 3177, the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate can illuminate the first line 3113a of the corresponding line group 3114 in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 by illuminating the first LED 3176a. In addition, when the second LED 3176b is illuminated, the second line 3113b in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be illuminated (illuminated decoration). In addition, when the third LED 3176c is illuminated, the third line 3113c in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be illuminated (illuminated decoration). Furthermore, when the fourth LED 3176d is illuminated, the fourth line 3113d in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be illuminated (illuminated decoration). Furthermore, when the fifth LED 3176e is illuminated, the fifth line 3113e in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be illuminated (illuminated decoration).

This allows each of the multiple lines 3113 that make up the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 to be illuminated (illuminated decoration) independently, allowing the player to see a variety of illuminated effects while preventing the player from becoming bored and reducing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the back front lower performance unit 3160 supports the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, the back front lower logo decorative body 3167, the back front lower middle decorative board 3168, the back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, the back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, the back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, the back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, the back front lower logo decorative board 3173, the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175, etc., and is provided with a flat unit base 3178 that is long from side to side. The lower ends of the back front left decorative unit 3120 and the back front right decorative unit 3140 are attached near the left and right ends of the upper end of the unit base 3178.

In addition, the back front lower performance unit 3160 has a first discharge passage 3181 that receives the game ball B received in the three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 and discharges it to the lower board holder 1200, a second discharge passage 3182 that receives the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 and discharges it to the lower board holder 1200, and a second discharge passage 3183 that receives the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 of the first attacker unit 2400. It is equipped with a third discharge passage 3183 that receives the game ball B and discharges it to the substrate holder 1200 below, a fourth discharge passage 3184 that receives the game ball B received by the large prize opening 2005 of the first attacka unit 2400 and discharges it to the substrate holder 1200 below, and a fifth discharge passage 3185 that receives the game ball B received by the first sub-out opening 2021 of the first attacka unit 2400 and discharges it to the substrate holder 1200 below.

The first discharge passage 3181 has three delivery ports corresponding to the three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200, and three general winning port sensors 3001 corresponding to each delivery port. In addition, the second discharge passage 3182 has a first starting port sensor 3002.

This back-front-lower performance unit 3160 can decorate the lower part of the game area 5a with the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161, the back-front-lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back-front-lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back-front-lower right inner decorative body 3165, the back-front-lower right outer decorative body 3166, and the back-front-lower logo decorative body 3167, improving the appearance and entertaining the player with the light-emitting performance by making them illuminate. In addition, the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 can be rotated by the back-front-lower rotation drive motor and can be raised and lowered by the back-front-lower lift drive motor 3162, entertaining the player with the movable performance.

In addition, the back-front lower performance unit 3160 can illuminate the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 using multiple LEDs 3176 on the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate, allowing the player to enjoy the illuminated performance using the second pattern 3112.

[5-9b. Backstage Upper Production Unit]
Next, the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 129 and 149. The rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 is attached to the upper rear of the rear front performance unit 3100 inside the rear box 3010. The rear upper performance unit 3200 comprises a rear upper movable decorative body 3210 which is rotatable around an axis extending to the left and right and which can be raised and lowered, a rear left side decorative body 3220 which has three rear left band decorative parts 3221 extending in the front-to-back direction so as to be continuous with the three rear left band decorative parts 3127c at the rear front left decorative body base 3127 of the rear front left decorative unit 3120, and a rear right side decorative body 3230 (see Figure 131) which has three rear right band decorative parts 3231 extending in the front-to-back direction so as to be continuous with the three rear front right band decorative parts 3147a at the rear front right decorative body base 3147 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140.

The upper rear movable decorative body 3210 has a first upper rear decorative part 3211 (see FIG. 129, etc.) on which five 7-segment display parts are arranged on the left and right, and a second upper rear decorative part 3212 (see FIG. 162) on the back side of the first upper rear decorative part 3211 on which predetermined letters (here, "JACKPOT") are arranged in a row.

The first decorative part 3211 on the upper rear of the movable decorative body 3210 on the upper rear has five seven-segment display sections that each allow each segment to emit light independently, and a variety of letters, numbers, pictures, etc. can be displayed by combining each segment. This makes it possible to display the expectation of whether the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 is a "jackpot". Also, the second decorative part 3212 on the upper rear of the movable decorative body 3210 on the upper rear allows each character to emit light independently.

In the normal state, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is in a raised position with the rear upper first decorative part 3211 facing forward. Depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, or depending on the reception (allocation) of the game ball B into the V winning opening 2007, this rear upper movable decorative body 3210 rotates 180 degrees around an axis extending left and right to face the rear upper second decorative part 3212 forward or move from the raised position to the lowered position (see Figures 161 and 162).

This movable decorative body 3210 on the rear upper side can rotate and rise and fall, suggesting to the player that an opportunity is coming, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

The three rear left band decorative parts 3221 of the rear left side decorative body 3220 are arranged to extend rearward from the right end of each of the three rear left band decorative parts 3127c extending left and right on the rear left decorative body base 3127 of the rear left decorative unit 3120. Each of the rear left band decorative parts 3221 is capable of emitting light independently, and is capable of emitting light so that the light flows in the front and rear directions.

The three rear right band decorative parts 3231 of the rear right side decorative body 3230 are arranged to extend rearward from the right end of each of the three rear right band decorative parts 3147a extending left and right on the rear right decorative body base 3147 of the rear right decorative unit 3140. Each of the rear right band decorative parts 3231 is capable of emitting light independently, and is capable of emitting light so that the light flows in the front and rear directions.

[5-9c. Backstage Production Unit]
Next, the rear lower performance unit 3300 in the rear unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to 135 etc. The rear lower performance unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 is attached below the rear upper performance unit 3200 at the lower rear of the rear front performance unit 3100 within the rear box 3010.

The rear lower performance unit 3300 has a rear left movable decorative body 3301 and a rear right movable decorative body 3302, whose base ends adjacent to each other on the left and right are supported so that they can rotate around axes in the front-to-back direction and can be raised and lowered. The rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 are formed to rotate in opposite directions as the base ends are raised and lowered.

In the normal state, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 rotate with their respective tips moving away from each other, and are in a retracted position hidden behind the rear front performance unit 3100 and not visible from the front (player side) (see Figure 129, etc.).

The rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 rotate around the base end so that their respective tips move upward and rise, depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the right side of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the left side of the rear right movable decorative body 3302 come into contact with each other. As a result, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 become one body to form a single large decorative body, and are in an appearance position that can be seen from the front (see Figure 163).

As a result, a large decorative element with a stylized letter "A" appears in the center of the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302, surprising the player and making the player think that something good is about to happen, preventing a decline in interest. The rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 are provided with a decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted, and the lighting decoration using multiple LEDs makes the item look attractive and attracts the player's attention.

As shown in FIG. 167, when in the appearing position, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 are positioned so as to overlap the rear of the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110. This allows the large decorative body consisting of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 to be illuminated and decorated by the first pattern 3111, so that the player can see a decoration with depth due to the three-dimensional decoration by the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 and the two-dimensional illuminated display by the first pattern 3111, which can make a strong impact on the player and strongly attract the player's interest, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[5-10. Effects on the game board]
Next, the main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 161 to 168. Fig. 161 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the first back-upper decorative part of the back-upper movable decorative body in the back-upper performance unit of the back unit is moved to a lowered position while facing forward. Fig. 162 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the second back-upper decorative part is facing forward while the back-upper movable decorative body in the back-upper performance unit of the back unit is moved to a lowered position. Fig. 163 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-upper left movable decorative body and the back-upper right movable decorative body in the back-upper performance unit of the back unit are moved to the appearance position. Fig. 164 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-upper middle decorative body in the back-upper performance unit of the back-upper performance unit of the back unit is raised.

Figure 165 is a front view of a game board showing the state in which the back front left logo decoration, the back front upper left logo decoration, the back front left sub decoration, and the back front left band decoration of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front performance unit of the back unit are illuminated. Figure 166 is a front view of a game board showing the state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate in the back front performance unit of the back unit is illuminated. Figure 167 is a front view of a game board showing the state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate in the back front performance unit of the back unit is illuminated and the back rear left movable decoration and the back rear right movable decoration in the back rear lower performance unit are moved to their appearance positions. Figure 168 is a front view of a game board showing the state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate in the back front performance unit of the back unit is illuminated.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, the game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the upper left side unit 2300, the first attacca unit 2400, the center gimmick 2500, the second attacca unit 2600, the side middle right unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed to be almost entirely transparent, so that in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 134, the back front performance unit in the back unit 3000 located behind the game panel 1100 can be seen through them. The left front decorative unit 3120, the right front decorative unit 3140, the middle front decorative body 3161, the left front lower inner decorative body 3163, the left front lower outer decorative body 3164, the right front lower inner decorative body 3165, the right front lower outer decorative body 3166, the lower front logo decorative body 3167, the upper rear upper movable decorative body 3210, the left rear side decorative body 3220, and the right rear side decorative body 3230 of the upper rear upper performance unit 3200 can be clearly seen, and the performance image displayed on the performance display device 1600 can be clearly seen through the frame of the center gadget 2500.

In more detail, the rear front left first decorative body 3124 of the rear front left decorative unit 3120 is located near the left edge of the center gimmick 2500, with about half of it located within the frame of the center gimmick 2500. In addition, the rear front right first decorative body 3144 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140 is located near the right edge of the center gimmick 2500, with a portion of it located within the frame of the center gimmick 2500. The rear front lower performance unit 3160 extends left and right at the bottom of the play area 5a, and can be seen through the transparent play panel 1100 and the center gimmick 2500, with a portion of it being clearly visible through the frame of the center gimmick 2500.

In addition, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the back front lower performance unit 3160 is located above the first starting opening 2002 and behind the stage 2513 of the center gimmick 2500. The back front lower left inner decorative body 3163 and the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164 are located above the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 and near the bottom edge of the center gimmick 2500. The back front lower right inner decorative body 3165 and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 are located above the large winning opening 2005 of the first attacca unit 2400 and near the bottom edge of the center gimmick 2500. The back front lower middle decorative body 3161, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 have their upper parts located within the frame of the center gimmick 2500. The rear front lower logo decoration 3167 is located outside the center gimmick 2500 in the lower left corner of the play area 5a.

In addition, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 is located in a raised position, so it extends left and right at the top of the game area 5a, and the upper part to the left of the center in the left-right direction can be seen through the transparent game panel 1100 and the center device 2500, and a part of it can be seen well through the frame of the center device 2500. The rear upper movable decorative body 3210 has a rear upper first decorative part 3211, which has multiple seven-segment parts, facing forward.

The rear left movable decoration 3301 and rear right movable decoration 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300 are in a retracted position behind the front lower performance unit 3160 and cannot be seen from the front (player side).

Depending on the first or second special lottery result that is determined when the game ball B is received in the first or second starting hole 2002 or 2004, the back front performance unit 3100, back upper performance unit 3200, and back lower performance unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 perform a predetermined moving performance or light-emitting performance.

Specifically, as a movable performance using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 161, the rear upper first decorative part 3211 having five 7-segment parts is moved from a raised position to a lowered position while facing forward. As a result, most of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is located within the frame of the center gimmick 2500, so that the rear upper first decorative part 3211 can be viewed in good condition. At this time, the five 7-segment parts of the rear upper first decorative part 3211 are displayed in a variable manner, which strongly attracts the player's attention and makes the player feel anxious and excited depending on whether the desired numbers or pictures are displayed on the five 7-segment parts.

In addition, as an example of a performance using the movable decorative body 3210 on the rear side, as described above, the first decorative part 3211 on the rear side is moved to a lowered position while facing forward, and then, as shown in FIG. 162, it is rotated 180 degrees around a left-right axis to face the second decorative part 3212 on the rear side, which has multiple character strings, forward. This causes the letters "JACKPOT" to face forward, allowing the player to recognize that they have won the jackpot, and heightening the player's sense of anticipation for a favorable gaming state (a "jackpot" gaming state) that gives the player an advantage, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a performance using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, when rotating around a left-right axis, it may be arranged so that the rotation is repeated forward and backward at a portion intermediate between the rear upper first decorative part 3211 and the rear upper second decorative part 3212, and either the rear upper first decorative part 3211 or the rear upper second decorative part 3212 is stopped rotating forward. This makes the player nervous and thrilled depending on whether the "JACKPOT" of the rear upper second decorative part 3212 faces forward or not, heightening the player's sense of expectation and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, as a performance using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, it may be rotated 180 degrees around a left-right axis while remaining in the raised position, so that the rear upper second decorative part 3212 faces forward.

In addition, as an example of a performance using the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 163, from a retracted position in which the tips of each are located downward and away from each other, the base ends of each are rotated in opposite directions around an axis extending forward and backward so that the tips of each rise and touch each other, and are raised and moved to an appearance position in which they abut each other. As a result, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 form a single large decorative body with a stylized letter "A" and appear in the center of the game area 5a in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600, which can greatly surprise the player, strongly attract the player's interest, and make the player think that something good is going to happen, increasing the player's expectations for the game and suppressing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as an example of a performance using the back front lower middle decoration 3161 in the back front lower performance unit 3160 of the back front performance unit 3100, as shown in FIG. 164, it can be raised or rotated around a front-to-back axis. As a result, the back front lower middle decoration 3161 rotates in the lower center of the game area 5a, making the player think that something good is going to happen, and increasing the player's expectations for the game. In addition, since the back front lower middle decoration 3161 is located directly above the first starting hole 2002 and behind the stage 2513, the back front lower middle decoration 3161 can rotate and rise and fall to encourage the player to shoot the game ball B aimed at the first starting hole 2002, allowing the player to enjoy the original shooting operation of the game ball B of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, as an example of a performance using the back front left decorative unit 3120 of the back front performance unit 3100, as shown in FIG. 165, by appropriately illuminating the LEDs mounted on the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and the back front lower left decorative board 3130, a light-emitting performance can be performed in which the back front left logo decorative part 3121, the back front upper left logo decorative part 3122, the back front left sub decorative part 3123, the back front left band decorative part 3127c, etc. are illuminated. For example, in the back front left logo decorative part 3121, the first front left logo decorative part 3124c and the first back left logo decorative part 3124d, the second back left logo decorative part 3125d, and the third back left logo decorative part 3126d are illuminated in order, thereby creating a light-emitting performance like a neon sign that flows back and forth, which can entertain the player.

Although not shown in the figures, the rear front right decorative unit 3140 can also produce lighting effects similar to those of the rear front left decorative unit 3120, entertaining players.

Furthermore, as an example of a performance using the light guide plate 3110 of the back front performance unit 3100, as shown in FIG. 166, the multiple light guide plate LEDs 3128g of the back front left decorative board 3128 in the back front left decorative unit 3120 and the multiple light guide plate LEDs of the back front right first decorative board 3148, the back front right second decorative board 3149, and the back front right light guide plate decorative board 3150 in the back front right decorative unit 3140 are illuminated to illuminate the first pattern 3111 (illuminated decoration). As a result, a large first pattern 3111 with a stylized letter "A" is illuminated and displayed in the center of the game area 5a in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600, which can surprise the player and make the player think that something good is about to happen, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, as an example of a performance using the light guide plate 3110, as shown in FIG. 167, the first pattern 3111 is illuminated and the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300 are moved from a retracted position to an appearing position. This causes the first pattern 3111 and the large decorative body consisting of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 to overlap front to back, making a strong impact on the player and entertaining the player, while making the player think that a favorable game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) that gives the player an advantage may occur, increasing anticipation for the game.

As an example of a performance using the light guide plate 3110, as shown in FIG. 168, the multiple LEDs 3176 on the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175 of the back front lower performance unit 3160 are appropriately illuminated to illuminate the second pattern 3112 (illuminated decoration). As a result, multiple lines 3113 extending upward from the upper parts of the five decorative bodies, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 in the back front lower performance unit 3160, are illuminated, so that the player can see an illumination performance that is like a searchlight from below on a concert stage, and the inside of the game area 5a can be made to look dazzling and entertain the player.

In addition, as an example of a performance using the light guide plate 3110, as shown in FIG. 168, with the second pattern 3112 illuminated, the upper ends or the entirety of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 in the back front lower performance unit 3160 may be illuminated. Alternatively, the decorative body located below the illuminated line group 3114 in the second pattern 3112 may be illuminated. This gives the player the illusion that the lines 3113 that make up the second pattern 3112 are illuminated by light from the decorative elements such as the back front lower middle decorative element 3161, the back front lower left inner decorative element 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative element 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative element 3165, and the back front lower right outer decorative element 3166, providing the player with an unprecedented light-emitting effect that they can enjoy.

Furthermore, although not shown in the figures, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 may be illuminated and the upper rear movable decorative body 3210 may be moved to a lowered position. This allows the player to see an illumination effect as if the upper rear movable decorative body 3210 were being illuminated from below by a searchlight, making the upper rear movable decorative body 3210 look gorgeous and entertaining.

In addition, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, the light-emitting effects and moving effects described above can be appropriately combined, and can also be combined with the effect images (display effects) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. As a result, by appropriately combining light-emitting effects, display effects, etc., a variety of patterns of effects can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to become bored, and the player can be entertained by various effects, preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

6. Control Configuration
Next, the control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 169 and the like. FIG. 169 is a block diagram showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine in outline. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, as shown in the figure, and each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a performance display control unit 1512 that controls the display of performance images on the performance display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. The payout control board 633 is equipped with a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but includes a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands and a RAM that temporarily stores data, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, a setting display 1310g for displaying setting values and displaying errors, and a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a also includes a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU 1310a has built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), as well as a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The main control MPU 1310a also has built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a as a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) to identify the individual unit. Once this ID code is assigned, it cannot be rewritten even using an external device, as it is stored in the non-volatile RAM. The main control MPU 1310a is capable of retrieving the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and referencing it.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when it is affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a specified register of the main control MPU 1310a, and if the register changes to an inconsistent content, it forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a as being affected by electrical noise. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be disabled by controlling it with a user program. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing described later, and the main control side power on processing described later is executed again. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, as described later, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased (cleared). Furthermore, even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a does not output a reset signal to the dispensing control board 633, so only the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the dispensing control board 633 remains in an activated state.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in hardware random number circuit") that uses hardware to update special random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a big win game state or a small win game state, among various random numbers related to the game. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), and is configured so that the predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (i.e., the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first selects one value within a predetermined numerical range as the initial value, and then rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the main control MPU 1310a), and when all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts one value within the predetermined numerical range, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such rapid lottery selection, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time when it obtains a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number.

The main control input circuit does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals, which are detection signals from the various sensors, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown). In other words, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit in which information based on detection signals from the various sensors input to its various input terminals is not reset by a main control system reset, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects a game ball B received in the first start opening 2002, a second start opening sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2801 that detects a game ball B that has passed through the gate 2003, a large winning opening sensor 2402 that detects a game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005, a special winning opening sensor 2402 that detects a game ball B received in the special winning opening 2006, and a special winning opening sensor 2403 that detects a game ball B received in the special winning opening 2007. Detection signals from the device winning port sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the V winning port 2007, the V winning port sensor 3003 that detects the game ball B received in the losing port 2008, the out sensor 664 that detects the game ball B discharged from the game board 5, the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism within the game area 5a, and the vibration sensor that detects vibrations acting on the game board 5, etc. are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main frame opening switch are input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633 (i.e., directly, without passing through the dispensing control input circuit and dispensing control output circuit described below), and are then input to the input terminals of the specified input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first start port sensor 3002, and the second start port sensor 2401 are input directly to the main control board 1310 without going through other boards, and are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. In contrast, the detection signals from the general prize port sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2801, the large prize port sensor 2402, the accessory prize port sensor 2601, the V prize port sensor 3003, the loss port sensor 3004, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the vibration sensor are input indirectly to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of its specified output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, and outputs the respective drive signals from the main control solenoid drive circuit to the start port solenoid 2412, the attacca solenoid 2414, the role winning port solenoid 2612, and the V distribution solenoid 3007 via the panel relay board 1710, i.e. indirectly, or outputs the respective drive signals from the output terminal of its specified output port to the status indicator, normal pattern indicator, normal hold indicator, first special pattern indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special pattern indicator, second special hold number indicator, and round indicator of the function display unit 1400, directly, i.e. without going through other boards. Also, based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of its specified output port to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information related to the game (game information) from the output terminal of the specified output port, outputs a signal (power failure clear signal) to the power failure monitoring circuit by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the specified output port, and outputs a launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch game ball B from the output terminal of the specified output port to the payout control board 633. The logic of this launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch is set to launch permission logic when launch is permitted, and is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the launch permission logic when launch is not permitted. The logic of the firing permission signal is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the initial value (default) is set to firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) which is the inversion of the firing permission logic from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when power is restored) until the firing permission signal setting process in the main control timer interrupt process described below is started.

In this embodiment, the first start gate sensor 3002, the second start gate sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the big prize gate sensor 2402, the accessory prize gate sensor 2601, the V prize gate sensor 3003, the miss gate sensor 3004, and the out sensor 664 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches, whereas the general prize gate sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON/OFF operation mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first start gate 2002, the second start gate 2004, and the gate 2003, so the first start gate sensor 3002, the second start gate sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801 also frequently detect the game ball B. For this reason, the first start gate sensor 3002, the second start gate sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801 use proximity switches that are highly durable and have a long lifespan.

In addition, when a favorable game state (such as a "jackpot" game) occurs that is advantageous to the player, the large prize opening 2005 is opened and game ball B enters the opening frequently, so the large prize opening sensor 2402 also frequently detects game ball B. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the large prize opening sensor 2402. In addition, since a large amount of game ball B shot into the game area 5a is collected by the out opening 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5, the out sensor 664 also frequently detects game ball B. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the out sensor 664. In contrast, the general prize opening 2001, where game ball B does not enter frequently, is not frequently detected by the general prize opening sensor 3001. For this reason, a mechanical switch with a shorter life than a proximity switch is used for the general prize opening sensor 3001. Furthermore, regardless of whether game balls B frequently enter the general winning hole 2001, a highly durable and long-life proximity switch may be used.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payouts to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of game presentations and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. Note that, when the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, which will be described in detail later, it formats these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630, which supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310, is equipped with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in RAM during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. This stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the dispensing control board 633.

The main control board 1310 is also provided with a power outage monitoring circuit. This power outage monitoring circuit monitors drops in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and when these voltages fall below the power outage warning voltage, it outputs a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning. This power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the dispensing control board 633, etc.

[6-2. Dispense control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of game balls B, is equipped with a payout control unit 633a which performs various controls related to payout, a launch control unit 633b which controls launch using the launch solenoid 542 and controls ball supply using the ball supply solenoid 145, an error LED indicator which displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch having a push operation unit for releasing an error displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball removal switch which, during maintenance, discharges the game balls B in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guidance unit 570, and payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) and initiates the ball removal operation.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The dispensing control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to dispensing in the dispensing control board 633, is equipped with a dispensing control MPU, which is a microprocessor with built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and RAM for temporarily storing data, a dispensing control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the dispensing control MPU is operating normally, a dispensing motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 584 of the dispensing device 580, and a dispensing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to dispensing are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the dispensing control MPU also has built-in functions for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, and receives the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port. In addition, it also receives detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball out detection sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590.

The detection signals from the ball out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

In addition, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch, which detects the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and the main frame opening switch, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, are input to the dispensing control input circuit and input to the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control I/O port.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the fall cover unit 150, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310, and the error release signal from the error release switch are input to a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator to the error LED indicator via the payout control I/O port, transmits commands for indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, and outputs the number of game balls B actually paid out to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's play by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display that displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The error LED display may display and notify the user of the following: For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it notifies that it is "normal", when the number "0" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633), when the number "1" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "ball out" (specifically, that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580 based on a detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574), when the number "2" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "ball stuck" (specifically, that a game ball B is stuck between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589 based on a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, making it difficult for the payout blade 589 to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 59 When the number "5" is displayed, it indicates a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit); when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates a "full" state (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the fault cover unit 150 based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154); when the number "7" is displayed, it indicates a "CR not connected" state (the electrical connection has been cut somewhere between the payout control board 633 and the CR unit); and when the number "9" is displayed, it indicates a "stocking" state (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a preset number).

The ball loan request signal for game ball B from the ball loan button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be loaned in accordance with the ball loan request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls B loaned, and outputs a display signal of the remaining balance to the ball loan operation unit 220, and this signal is input to the ball loan display section 226 of the ball loan operation unit 220 and displayed.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on this clock signal, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and a ball delivery solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball delivery solenoid 145 based on the launch reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are launched per minute toward the game area 5a and outputs it to the launch solenoid drive circuit, and generates a ball delivery reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the launch reference pulse and outputs it to the ball delivery solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the detection signals from the handle touch sensor 192, which detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and the single button operation sensor 194, which detects whether the player will forcibly stop shooting the game ball B, are input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the detection signals are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then to the launch timing control circuit. The launch permission signal from the main control board 1310, which conveys permission to shoot the game ball B, is input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. The signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the strength with which the game ball B is shot toward the play area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 195, is input to the launch solenoid drive circuit.

Unless launch condition 1 is met, that is, the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 based on a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, launch condition 2 is met, that the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected based on a CR connection signal, and launch condition 3 is met, that the launch of game ball B is permitted based on a launch permission signal from the main control board 1310, the launch timing control circuit will not output a launch reference pulse to launch game ball B toward the play area 5a. For example, the launch solenoid drive circuit will not output a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 and game ball B cannot be launched.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this launch solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive current to the launch solenoid 542 to launch the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 195, triggered by the input of a launch reference pulse. On the other hand, the ball delivery solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball delivery solenoid 145 triggered by the input of a ball delivery reference pulse, thereby receiving one game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 into the ball delivery unit 140, and sends the received game ball B to the ball launch device 540 by stopping the output of the constant current triggered by the end of the input of the ball delivery reference pulse. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball delivery solenoid drive circuit to the ball delivery solenoid 145 is controlled to be constant.

In this embodiment, the launch control unit 633b, which controls launch by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery by the ball delivery solenoid 145, is provided on the payout control board 633, but it may also be configured to be provided on the power supply board 630. In this case, the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be input directly to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board (not shown).

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a performance display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control unit 1511.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1511, which controls the performance on the peripheral control board 1510, is not shown in detail, but is equipped with a peripheral control IC in which a CPU, RAM, and various I/O interfaces are integrated onto a single semiconductor chip, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC that produces high-quality sound, and a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referenced by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control IC has multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on a single semiconductor chip, and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC transmits game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands, and transmits game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the drive motors that operate the various presentation units provided on the game board 5 from the serial I/O port for the game board decoration drive board to the drive motors or drive solenoids of the game board 5. The door side drive light emission data, which is composed of door side drive data for outputting drive signals to the vibration motor 356, operation button lift drive motor 367, and protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381, etc., provided on the door frame 3, and door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, control data (display commands) indicating the screen to be displayed on the performance display device 1600 is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the display control unit to the performance display control unit 1512, and a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the contact detection sensor body 358, the pressure detection sensor 373, the lift detection sensor 374, and the protrusion force detection sensor 375 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 indicating that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and monitors the operation of the performance display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and controls the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, etc., which are provided on the door frame 3 and main frame 4, so that music and sound effects corresponding to various performances are played. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch protruding backward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, by sending audio signals (e.g., 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) as sound information to the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the peripheral control unit 1511 also has an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses both the built-in WDT and the external WDT to diagnose whether its own system is out of control.

The display commands output from the CPU of this peripheral control IC to the performance display control unit 1512 are sent via a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (the amount of data that can be sent per unit time) is set to 19.2 kilobits per second (bps). On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side light flashing command, game board side light flashing command, movable body drive command, etc., output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are sent via multiple serial input/output ports different from the display commands, and in this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

[6-3b. Production display control section]
The performance display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the performance display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands, and the like. A display control ROM for storing various data, a VDP (short for Video Display Processor) for controlling the display of the performance display device 1600, an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the performance display device 1600, and a display control ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the performance display device 1600. and an image RAM to which various data stored in the ROM is transferred and copied.

This display control MPU has built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the drawing of the performance display device 1600. When the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to inform the same. The display control MPU also receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of this execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

In addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the performance display device 1600, the display control ROM stores multiple items such as schedule data corresponding to control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the control data (display commands). The schedule data is composed of screen data that specifies the screen configuration arranged in chronological order, and specifies the order in which the screens are drawn on the performance display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is composed of non-resident area transfer data that specifies the order in which the various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM, arranged in chronological order. This non-resident area transfer data specifies the order in which the various data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance for the screen data to be drawn on the performance display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts the screen data following the first screen data from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the display control ROM, starting from the first screen data, and outputs it to the VDP.

When the VDP receives screen data output from the display control MPU, it extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the performance display device 1600, and outputs this generated drawing data to the performance display device 1600. When the performance display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to inform the display device 1600 of this. The VDP uses a line buffer system. This "line buffer system" is a system in which one line's worth of drawing data that draws the left and right directions of the performance display device 1600 is stored in a line buffer, and the one line's worth of drawing data stored in the line buffer is output to the performance display device 1600.

The image ROM stores a large amount of sprite data, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the performance display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and this affects the speed at which data is drawn on the performance display device 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is the base data, which is the data before the sprite is expanded into bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Now, to explain what a "sprite" is, a "sprite" is an image that is displayed as a unit on the performance display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the performance display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite." As a result, when displaying multiple people on the performance display device 1600, multiple sprites are used. In addition to people, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be treated as a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the performance display device 1600 after their positions on the screen and their hierarchical relationship when sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as the "order of sprite overlapping") are set.

A sprite is made up of multiple rectangular areas of 64 pixels each. The data used to draw these rectangular areas is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be represented using one sprite character, while relatively large sprites such as people can be represented using a total of six sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 x 3. Even larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using even more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be specified arbitrarily for each sprite.

The performance display device 1600 is driven by a main scan that sets the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels, from left to right when viewed from the front, and a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in a direction that intersects with the one direction. When one line of drawing data output from the performance display control unit 1512 is input to the performance display device 1600, the performance display device 1600 outputs the data to each of the pixels in one line, from left to right when viewed from the front of the performance display device 1600, as a main scan. When the output of one line is completed, the performance display device 1600 moves to the line directly below as a sub-scan, and when the drawing data for the next line is input in the same way, the performance display device 1600 outputs the data to each of the pixels in one line, from left to right when viewed from the front of the performance display device 1600, as a main scan based on the drawing data for the next line.

[7. Configuration of Peripheral Control Unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 170 to 172. Figure 170 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, Figure 171 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and Figure 172 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500. Note that in Figure 171, the terminals of various connectors are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the terminals of various connectors protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, but are omitted for ease of viewing.

As shown in Figs. 170 and 171, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a cover body 1501 that is open at the rear and has a box shape that is longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction, a peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the presentation based on commands from the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 that is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, a liquid crystal output board 1530 that is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a base body 1502 that covers the opening of the cover body 1501. Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached at predetermined positions within the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 form a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) by closing the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502.

[7-1. Cover body]
In addition to the peripheral control board 1510, the various boards attached to the internal space of the cover body 1501 include a peripheral data ROM board 1520 capable of storing various control information (peripheral data) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing images on the performance display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape with about two-thirds of the area when viewed from the back of the cover body 1501, and is arranged on the left side of the cover body 1501. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged in such a way that, of the remaining about one-third of the area when viewed from the back of the cover body 1501, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a square shape and is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501, while the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a square shape twice as large as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and is arranged on the lower right side of the cover body 1501.

The peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected to each other by a board-to-board connector, which will be described later, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to each other by a board-to-board connector, which will be described later. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4.

The cover body 1501 is made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color. When viewed from the front, the cover body 1501 is formed into a box shape with an opening by having cover side walls 1501b-1501e protruding rearward (toward the front of the pachinko machine 1) on the top, left, bottom, and right sides of the horizontally long rectangular cover plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm).

When viewed from the front, the cover plate 1501a is located slightly above and to the right of the center, at a position corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and a square-shaped FAN mounting recess 1501aa for mounting the air-cooling fan FAN is formed protruding toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa along a plurality of concentric circles centered on the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. Also, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the square air-cooled fan FAN, cylindrical guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 having a predetermined height (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air-cooled fan FAN) that are inserted into the through holes th1 to th4 are formed protruding toward the opposite side to the opening side of the cover body 1501. Note that by forming the slit holes 1501aaa as arc-shaped holes, it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1, aac2 are formed diagonally near the FAN mounting recess 1501aa in the cover plate 1501a. When the air-cooled fan FAN is pressed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and attached, the front surface of the air-cooled fan FAN and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. In this state, by screwing a metal pan head screw (not shown) (a screw with a pan head and flat washer integrated) into each of the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1, aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a, the flat washer that forms the seat of the pan head screw comes into contact with the front of the air-cooled fan FAN and the front of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, preventing the air-cooled fan FAN from jumping out of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, a gap with a specified distance dimension (2.3 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the part number and model number are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa.

The cover plate 1501a is connected to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, and is formed with a wiring pull-out recess 1501ab protruding toward the opening of the cover body 1501 at a position higher than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a shorter distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). When the air-cooled fan FAN is attached and fixed to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, multiple wires from the air-cooled fan FAN can be pulled out from the wiring pull-out recess 1501ab.

When viewed from the front, the cover plate 1501a is formed such that along its lower edge, a position corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, is a single closed, approximately horizontally elongated rectangular area (more precisely, a convex area with the volume adjustment switch 1510d and connector CN1 at the top and connectors CN2 to CN7 at the bottom), and the connector recess 1501ac is formed at a lower position than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) and protrudes toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac mostly occupies the area on the lower right side when the cover plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, to prevent insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) caused by the increased area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, two elongated reinforcement ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac at a position that does not interfere with the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8, and protrude forward at a specified interval.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8, respectively, formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac.

When viewed from the front, the cover plate 1501a is formed such that the position corresponding to the connectors CN8, CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a is a closed horizontally elongated rectangular area along its lower side, with the connector recess 1501ad at a position lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) and protruding toward the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the bottom surfaces of the connector recess 1501ad and connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad, respectively.

When viewed from the front, the cover plate 1501a has a wiring outlet opening 1501ae formed along its left side at a position corresponding to the CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. A mounting recess 1501af for mounting a wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape that is connected to the wiring outlet opening 1501ae and can cover the wiring outlet opening 1501ae is formed at a position higher than the bottom surface of the above-mentioned FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) and protrudes toward the opening of the cover body 1501. The mounting recess 1501af is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503, with a cylindrical protrusion 1501afa having a predetermined height (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503) that is inserted into the through hole 1503a protruding toward the opposite side of the opening side of the cover body 1501, and mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 are formed at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503, respectively.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. In this state, the wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, it closes the wiring pull-out opening 1501ae and functions as a cover that protects the flexible flat cable (FFC (short for Flexible Flat Cable. A flexible flat cable has multiple flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting drawing data to the performance display device 1600, and these multiple flat conductors are covered with an insulator.)) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of conductive resin that contains carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color.

When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, the left cover side wall 1501c is provided with plate-shaped guide parts 1501ca and 1501cb that protrude outward at the top and bottom with a predetermined distance in between, near the opening side of the cover body 1501, and also with a hinge hook part 1501cc located above the guide part 1501ca and protruding outward, and a hinge hook part 1501cd located below the guide part 1501cb and protruding outward. The rear side of the left ends of the guide parts 1501ca and 1501cb are chamfered. In contrast, the front side of the left ends of the hinge hook parts 1501cc and 1501cd are provided with L-shaped hook parts 1501cca and 1501cda that protrude forward. In addition, a cover side seal portion 1501ea that protrudes outward is formed in the center of the cover body 1501 on the right cover side wall 1501e.

In order to position the peripheral control board 1510 closely to the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501, the cover plate 1501a has four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 that protrude from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the back surface. Around the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, there are formed circular soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, and circular soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, and wiring patterns are formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so that these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are each electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on their surfaces is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is faced toward the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are positioned to align with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. Metal pan head screws (not shown) are then inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, thereby fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a, and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws. Furthermore, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal pan head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a.

As described above, the cover body 1501 is made of conductive resin that contains carbon in polycarbonate, so that the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1-1510rf4, 1510rb1-1510rb4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via metal pan head screws. This electrically connects the cover body 1501 to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and they are the same ground (GND). Therefore, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw, and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to each other and are the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are positioned inside the opening end faces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 (i.e., so as not to protrude outside the opening end faces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

In order to position the peripheral data ROM board 1520 on the upper right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501, the cover plate 1501a is formed with a pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1, 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1, 1501ai2 diagonally protruding from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back surface. Around the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, there are formed circular soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and circular soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and wiring patterns are formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so that these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4, 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are each electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Furthermore, these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4, 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on their surfaces is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is faced toward the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1, 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1, 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. Metal pan head screws (not shown) are then inserted into the through holes 1520r2, 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1, 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, thereby fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501i1 and 1501i2 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, respectively, and the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back side (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are in contact with the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws. Furthermore, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal pan head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

As described above, the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin that contains carbon in polycarbonate, so that the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4, 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via metal pan head screws. This electrically connects the cover body 1501 to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and they are the same ground (GND). Therefore, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan head screw, and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are positioned inside the open end faces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 (i.e., so as not to protrude outside the open end faces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and the back side (solder side) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the back side (solder side) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane.

In order to position the liquid crystal output board 1530 on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501, the cover plate 1501a is formed with a pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1, 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1, 1501an2 diagonally protruding from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 when viewed from the back surface. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530, soldering copper foil (so-called "lands") 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 having a circular shape are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and soldering copper foil (so-called "lands") 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and wiring patterns are formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 so that these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4, 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are each electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Furthermore, these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4, 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on their surfaces is not exposed.

When attaching the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1530 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is faced toward the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2, 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1, 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1, 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1, 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, thereby fixing the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a, respectively, and the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are in contact with the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws. Furthermore, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal pan head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a.

As described above, the cover body 1501 is made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, so that the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1530rf1-1530rf4, 1530rb1-1530rb4 formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 via metal pan head screws. This electrically connects the cover body 1501 to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and they are the same ground (GND). Therefore, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal pan head screw, and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected to each other and are the same ground (GND).

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 are positioned inside the end faces of the opening sides of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 (i.e., so as not to protrude outside the end faces of the opening sides of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and the back side (solder side) 1530y of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the back side (solder side) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the back side (solder side) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane.

In this way, when various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed in a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, a space having a predetermined height distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface of the various boards (the surface facing the back side of the cover plate 1501a) and the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, a gap having the above-mentioned predetermined distance dimension (2.3 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the part number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa.

The cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 has a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the right side, lower right side, lower left side, and left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades, and air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, thereby cooling the inner space of the cover body 1501 (particularly the peripheral control IC 1510a). These ventilation holes 1501az are formed with a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the up-down direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, gaps are formed between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501, and a gap is formed between the volume adjustment switch 1510d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501. When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, gaps are formed between the two connectors CN8, CN9 on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9, 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501. Therefore, when the blades of the cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the blades to blow air from the inner space of the cover body 1501 toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, thereby taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the above-mentioned ventilation holes 1501az, and also blowing air into the above-mentioned gaps (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the ventilation holes 1501 formed in the cover body 1501). The signal is taken in through the gaps formed between the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 on the peripheral control board 1510, the gap between the volume adjustment switch 1510d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 on the cover body 1501, and the gaps formed between the two connectors CN8 and CN9 on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 on the cover body 1501).

The sum of the areas of the multiple arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is smaller than the sum of the area of the multiple ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the area of the above-mentioned gaps (the gaps formed between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501, the gap formed between the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and the gaps formed between the two connectors CN8, CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9, 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501). Therefore, when the blades of the air-cooled fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the multiple ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, the flow rate of the air flowing into each of the multiple ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be kept low.

When the blades of the air-cooled fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be forced out toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades, so that when air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the multiple ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, the flow rate of the air flowing into each of the multiple ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be kept low. However, when the blades of the air-cooled fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation may also cause air to be sucked in through the blades and sent out toward the peripheral control IC 1510a. In other words, the main purpose of the cooling fan FAN may not be to exchange air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may be to simply cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

[7-2. Base body]
The base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color, and when viewed from the front, it is formed into a box shape with an opening by base side walls 1502b to 1502e that protrude forward (toward the back side of the pachinko machine 1) from the upper, left, lower, and right sides of a horizontally long rectangular base flat plate 1502a. The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is formed to be slightly larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. As a result, when the base body 1502 is placed over the cover body 1501 to cover the opening of the cover body 1501, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in inscribed (surface contact).

When viewed from the front, the base plate 1502a has vertically elongated breakage prevention ribs 1502aa1-1502aa3 formed at predetermined intervals along the lower side at positions that do not interfere with the connectors CN2-CN7 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, the terminals of the connectors CN2-CN7 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, and protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510). These prevent the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being broken due to the force applied when inserting connectors for connecting wiring to these connectors CN2-CN7.

When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engagement portion 1502ca that protrudes outward is formed near the opening side of the base body 1502 on the left base side wall 1502c. This engagement portion 1502ca has guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed at positions corresponding to the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed at positions corresponding to the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad have U-shaped groove-shaped pouch portions 1502cae and 1502caf formed therein.

The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca, 1501cb formed on the above-mentioned cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa, 1502cab, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the above-mentioned cover body 1501 are inserted into the U-groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad. The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are then wrapped around the U-groove-shaped pocket portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad in abutting contact with them, so that the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 can be hooked and engaged with the U-groove-shaped pocket portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad.

In addition, a base side seal portion 1502ea that protrudes outward is formed in the center of the right base side wall 1502e at a position corresponding to the cover side seal portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. In addition, through holes 1502eb1, 1502eb2 are formed on the upper and lower sides of the right base side wall 1502e, respectively, for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5.

[7-3. Various Connectors]
The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 attached in the internal space of the cover body 1501 is provided with a peripheral control IC 1510a in which a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), and various I/O interfaces are integrated on one semiconductor chip, a control ROM 1510b in which various programs for controlling the progress of game presentations and demonstrations (demonstration presentations performed in a player waiting state) and various schedule data (presentation data) for defining the progress of presentations are stored in advance, and a Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory (SDRAM) 1510b in which various control information (peripheral data) stored in a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be transferred and stored. The device is equipped with an SDRAM 1510c consisting of SDRAM memory 1510c1 and 1510c2, a slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d for adjusting the volume, a backup power supply 1510e for supplying power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is cut off, a power supply generating circuit (not shown) for generating various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. The backup power supply 1510e is accommodated in a holder (not shown).

As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is a semiconductor chip in which the CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces are integrated, and it combines the functions of the peripheral control unit 1511 (excluding the functions of the various ROMs) and the performance display control unit 1512 (excluding the functions of the various ROMs) described above.

The control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 includes the functions of the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 described above and the functions of the display control ROM of the performance display control unit 1512 described above, and has a storage capacity of 256 Mbit (or 128 Mbit), and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbit. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

The various I/O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I/O, various parallel I/O, etc. The various serial I/O include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication, etc.

In this embodiment, UART communication is used as the communication method for receiving commands from the main control board 1310 (communication occurs via connector CN5), and SPI communication or I2C communication is used as the communication method for transmitting control data to the various boards provided on the game board 5 side and the various boards provided on the door frame side (communication occurs via the corresponding connector among connectors CN3, CN6, and CN7).

In this embodiment, SPI communication and I2C communication are used to send drive data to the drive control IC that drives the electric drive source (e.g., various motors and various solenoids, communicating via connector CN6) on the game board 5 side and the electric drive source (e.g., various motors and various solenoids, communicating via connector CN3) on the door frame 3 side, send light emission data to the LED control IC for the multiple LEDs (communicating via connector CN7) on the game board 5 side and the multiple LEDs (communicating via connector CN3) on the door frame 3 side, receive signals from various sensors (communicating via connector CN6) on the game board 5 side as detection data, and receive signals from various sensors (communicating via connector CN3) on the door frame 3 side as detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer speed by SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer speed by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

The various parallel I/Os include GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output, general-purpose IO). In this embodiment, a signal from the air-cooled fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 that conveys the rotation state of the air-cooled fan FAN is input to the GPIO (via connector CN1), signals from various sensors that check the operation and origin position of a control object (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side are input to the GPIO (via connector CN6), control signals for a control object (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side are output from the GPIO (via connector CN6), and a signal is output from the GPIO to an LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 to notify that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to connector CN1, SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to connector CN3 (i.e., connector CN3 is assigned as a connector where SPI communication and I2C communication coexist), UART communication is assigned to connector CN5, SPI communication and GPIO are assigned to connector CN6 (i.e., connector CN6 is assigned as a connector where SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and SPI communication is assigned to connector CN7.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication with the peripheral data ROM 1520a on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 that conforms to the SATA standard, achieving a high transfer speed of 2 Gbps (up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can transfer various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 at high speed to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, or to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, according to instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

SDRAM1510c1, 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) that can achieve high data communication speeds. Various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred to SDRAM1510c1, 1510c2 at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for inter-board connection with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a special connector SCN2 for inter-board connection with the liquid crystal output board 1530. The surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510. The surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as a performance display device from the special connector SCN2 in a plurality of types of video signal formats. The plurality of types of video signal formats include, for example, the RGB format, the LVDS format, the MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface) format, the eDP (Embedded DisplayPort) format, and the clockless format. In this embodiment, four formats (four in total) are adopted: one RGB format, two LVDS formats (first LVDS format, second LVDS format), and the MIPI format. In this embodiment, one of the two LVDS formats (for example, the first LVDS format) is adopted as the format of the video signal input to the performance display device 1600. It is also possible to create a peripheral control board 1510 that uses, for example, the eDP system instead of the MIPI system, and has one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and one eDP system.

The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 further includes LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. The peripheral control board 1510 is supplied with various voltages (+24V, +12V, and +5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 via the interface 635. LEDML1 checks (monitors) the state in which +5V is being supplied, and remains lit when +5V is being supplied. LEDML2 checks (monitors) the state in which +12V is being supplied, and remains lit when +12V is being supplied. LEDML3 checks (monitors) the state in which +24V is being supplied, and remains lit when +24V is being supplied. LEDML4 checks (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and remains lit when the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed in predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, as described above, a space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surfaces of the various boards (the surfaces facing the back side of the cover plate 1501a) and the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The space thus formed can be brightly illuminated by lighting the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are equipped with a floating mechanism, and are structured completely differently from the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 to CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Each of these connectors CN1 to CN10 is a socket, and the socket and plug are fitted together by inserting and pushing the plug of the corresponding connector vertically into the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. When the sockets of connectors CN1 to CN10 are mated, they are designed so that they do not move vertically at all when viewed from the front of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are each plugs, and the special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are each sockets.

The socket of the special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, so that the socket and plug fit together. The socket of the special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is structured with a floating mechanism that, when fitting, moves a predetermined distance in the front-to-rear direction (the direction between the back and front of the pachinko machine 1) when viewed from the front of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) to absorb any errors in the front-to-rear direction that occur when the socket is pushed in. In addition, when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum extent of the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, a gap is formed between the front (top) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the back of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so that the front (top) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 does not come into contact with the back of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

The socket of the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, so that the socket and plug fit together. The socket of the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is structured with a floating mechanism that, when fitting together, moves the socket in the front-to-back direction (the direction between the back and front of the pachinko machine 1) a predetermined distance range in the front-to-back direction when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510), absorbing any errors in the front-to-back direction that occur when the socket is pushed in. In addition, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, even if the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) moves to the maximum extent within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, a gap is formed between the front (top) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 and the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so that the front (top) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 does not come into contact with the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

Here, we will briefly explain the reason for adopting the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is equipped with a peripheral data ROM 1520a (including the image ROM function of the performance display control unit 1512 described above) that can store various control information (peripheral data) that is the object of control of the peripheral control board 1510. Examples of various control information (peripheral data) include image data such as background images, character images, and pattern images for drawing various performance images on the performance display device 1600, light emission data that specifies the light emission modes (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs mounted in multiple numbers on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, sound data such as music, voice, warning sounds, and notification sounds, and drive data for driving and controlling various movable performance bodies provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND type flash (non-volatile) memory, which is cheaper and has a larger capacity than a NOR type flash (non-volatile) memory, and can write various data quickly. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can reduce power consumption, and can achieve high transfer speeds through communication that complies with the SATA standard.

In this way, by adopting a NAND type flash (non-volatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, costs can be reduced, power consumption can be reduced, and various stored data can be read at a high transfer speed. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can reduce power consumption due to its low operating voltage, the low operating voltage makes it susceptible to noise. In addition, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected to each other via wiring (harness), but are electrically connected to each other via a board-to-board connector, thereby reducing the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission path.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 needs to have the socket of the special connector SCN3 on its own surface (mounting surface) 1520x inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and then the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 need to be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the floating mechanism described above, the front-to-rear error that occurs when fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 can be absorbed, preventing damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket, and enabling a transmission path to be reliably formed between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

As described above, the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, so that the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, even if it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the floating mechanism described above, the front-to-rear error that occurs when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the warped cover plate 1501a can be absorbed, preventing damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket, and allowing a transmission path to be reliably formed between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 is an important board that outputs the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the performance display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 from the connector CN10, and thereby displays on the performance display device 1600 the progress of the game performance (for example, an image that informs the player that a jackpot game state that is more advantageous than the normal state will occur, an image that informs the player that a jackpot game state will not occur, an image that informs the player that a jackpot game state has not occurred but that the game is approaching a state in which a jackpot game state will occur compared to the normal state, etc.) and a demonstration (a demonstration performance performed in a state waiting for the player) as an image. For this reason, it is necessary to transmit the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the performance display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530 accurately and reliably. Therefore, in this embodiment, instead of electrically connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by an inter-board connector, thereby reducing the effect of noise entering the inter-board transmission path.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the socket of the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 must be inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and then the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 must be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the floating mechanism described above, the front-to-back error that occurs when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 can be absorbed, thereby preventing damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket, and a transmission path can be reliably formed between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530.

As described above, the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, so that the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, even if it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the floating mechanism described above, the front-to-rear error that occurs when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the warped cover plate 1501a can be absorbed, thereby preventing damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket, and enabling a transmission path to be reliably formed between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530.

When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, as described above, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510, the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the back side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the same plane. Therefore, compared to a three-dimensional arrangement in which the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the front side of the peripheral control board 1510, the distance dimension in the front-to-back direction (i.e., the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be made smaller. This can contribute to ensuring the distance dimension in the depth direction for arranging a large movable presentation unit (an electric drive source and a drive mechanism that can operate a movable presentation body, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position) on the game board 5.

[7-4. How to assemble the peripheral control unit]
Here, a method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Next, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

Next, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are faced toward the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

Next, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r2, 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1, 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1, 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1, 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a to fix the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

Then, the through holes 1510r1-1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1-1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1510r1-1510r4 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1-1501ag4 to fix the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this way, of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed last to the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is restricted from moving in the up, down, left and right directions by being inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1, 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is restricted from moving in the up, down, left and right directions by being inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501an1, 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 does not have any mounting boss protrusions formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a to restrict movement in the up, down, left and right directions. This is because the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, thereby restraining them in the up, down, left and right directions, and the dimensional errors caused by such restraints can be absorbed by the dimensional margins provided in the through holes 1510r1-1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1-1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

Next, with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, liquid crystal output board 1530, and peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the rear side of the cover plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide parts 1501ca, 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving parts 1502caa, 1502cab formed on the engagement part 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped hook parts 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hook parts 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the U-groove-shaped pouch parts 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving parts 1502cac, 1502cad formed on the engagement part 1502ca of the base body 1502.

Next, with the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 abutting against the U-groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad, the base body 1502 is caused to wrap around to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501, and with the base body 1502 placed over the cover body 1501, a metal one-way screw with a metal anchor rivet (not shown) inserted therein is inserted into the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501, and screwed into the base side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base side sealing portion 1502ea, sealing the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in contact with each other (surface contact), and the front of the disconnection prevention rib parts 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, so that the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are in a conductive state. Note that when releasing such a sealed state, the cover side sealing part 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505, which is composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, can be detected, enhancing the deterrent effect against unauthorized acts on the peripheral control board box 1505.

Then, the air-cooled fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and multiple wires from the air-cooled fan FAN are pulled out from the wire pull-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and metal washer-mounted pan head screws (not shown in the figure, which are screws with a pan head and flat washer integrated into one shape) are screwed into the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

Next, a connector for connecting multiple wiring (harness) to the performance display device 1600 is inserted and attached to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 through the wiring pull-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 are screwed from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively, to fix the wiring cover body 1503 to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the multiple wiring is covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner to the gaming panel 1100 provided on the gaming board 5, when looking at the peripheral control unit 1500 from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided on the gaming panel 1100, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1502eb1, 1502eb2 formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and screwed into mounting holes (not shown) provided on the gaming panel 1100 to secure the unit in place.

In the above-mentioned assembly method, the procedure for mounting various boards within the internal space of the cover body 1501 includes, for example, first fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the above-mentioned predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is located on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the rear), and then fixing the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the above-mentioned predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is located on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the rear), The socket of the special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the socket of the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby fixing the peripheral control board 1510 in the above-mentioned specified position (the peripheral control board 1510 is positioned to the left of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back of the cover body 1501). Even in these mounting procedures for various boards, by using the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4, which are provided with the floating mechanism described above, the forward and backward errors that occur when pushing in can be absorbed, preventing damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket, and allowing the transmission paths to be reliably formed between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510, as well as the transmission paths to be reliably formed between the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510.

There are several types of game boards with different game specifications that can be installed in pachinko machines. In this embodiment, the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 is divided into three parts so that various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board installed in the pachinko machine, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is a board that depends on the game specifications of the game board by storing peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board in the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board that depends on the type of video signal input to the performance display device 1600.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that is not dependent on the game specifications of the game board, and is also a board that is not dependent on the type of video signal input to the performance display device 1600, and since it is a common board, it can be reused (reused repeatedly). In addition, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 equipped with the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-mentioned board-to-board connector, so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced to match the game specifications of the game board.

As described above, there are several types of video signal formats input to a display device such as a performance display device, such as the RGB format, the LVDS format, the MIPI format, the eDP format, and the clockless format. The liquid crystal output board 1530 corresponding to these several types of formats and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described above. In other words, the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be easily replaced according to the format of the video signal input to the performance display device 1600. In this embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is adopted as the format of the video signal input to the performance display device 1600, so the liquid crystal output board 1530 that matches the format of the video signal input to the performance display device 1600 (LVDS system) is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the board-to-board connector described above.

In addition, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and when various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) with metal pan head screws, they are electrically connected to these grounds (GND) and become the same ground (GND). Therefore, noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is sent to the board ground (the ground (GND) of the various boards), and the noise can be removed (hereinafter, this may be described as "noise countermeasure effect by the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin"). This eliminates the need to provide each of the various boards with a dedicated filter to remove such noise, which can contribute to reducing the cost of the various boards.

Here, we will explain the arrangement of the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. As described above, these multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az can cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have the function of checking for the presence or absence of tampering.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 172, the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are arranged in a distributed manner so as to be larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b, so that the product number and model number (or control number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b can be visually confirmed, that is, so that the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins can be confirmed from multiple angles. This makes it possible to confirm any alterations to the control ROM 1510b through the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az. In addition, the LEDML1 located near the control ROM 1510b is designed to remain lit when +5V is being supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 via the interface board 635, so while it originally has the function of checking (monitoring) the state in which +5V is being supplied, it also has the function of a spotlight that brightly illuminates the control ROM 1510b, thereby contributing to improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins.

In addition, the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) so that the connection status of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed, and are furthermore each dispersedly arranged so that the part number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the status of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a can be visually confirmed, that is, so that the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the status of the IC pins can be confirmed from multiple angles. This makes it possible to confirm the modification of the inter-board connectors by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 through the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az. In addition, the LEDML3 arranged near the special connector SCN1 is kept lit when +24V is being supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 via the interface board 635. Therefore, although it originally has the function of checking (monitoring) the state in which +24V is being supplied, it also has the function of a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector formed by the special connector SCN1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, thereby contributing to improving the visibility of the inter-board connector formed by the special connector SCN1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

In addition, the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are each dispersed and arranged to occupy an area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be confirmed. This makes it possible to confirm the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az. In addition, the LEDML4 located near the special connector SCN2 is designed to remain lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, so it originally has the function of checking (monitoring) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, but it also has the function of a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector made up of the special connector SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, thereby contributing to improving the visibility of the inter-board connector made up of the special connector SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530.

In addition, the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are arranged in a distributed manner so as to be larger than the shape of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, so that the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be visually confirmed, that is, so that the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the state of the IC pins can be confirmed from multiple angles. This makes it possible to check any modifications to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 through the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az. In addition, the LEDML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c consisting of SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is designed to remain lit when +12V is being supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 via the interface board 635, so while it originally has the function of checking (monitoring) the state in which +12V is being supplied, it also has the function of a spotlight that brightly illuminates the SDRAM 1510c, thereby contributing to improving the visibility of the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (i.e., SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2) and the state of the IC pins.

In addition, the part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from the gaps between the multiple blades that make up the blades of the air-cooled fan FAN (specifically, the gaps between the blades when an inspector rotates the blades of the air-cooled fan FAN). This makes it possible to check, via the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az, whether or not an unauthorized board has been placed around the peripheral control IC 1510a.

In this embodiment, the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface-mounted with a wide angle of about 120 degrees and a weak directivity, so they are also suitable for use as lighting. When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, as described above, a space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface of the various boards (the surface facing the back side of the cover plate 1501a) and the back side of the cover plate 1501a. By lighting the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting, the space thus formed can be brightly illuminated.

In addition, in the area on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 facing the light emitting surfaces of LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and around it, there are formed reflective sections (not shown) that reflect the light emitted by LEDML1 to LEDML4 and direct it back toward the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. These reflective sections (not shown) may be colored paint with a bright color such as white, or may be colored paint with a glossy finish, or a glossy metal sheet may be attached.

In addition, in the vicinity of the game board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged to the side of the game board 5, so that the game balls rub against each other in the ball path formed by these, become charged, and become a noise source by electrostatic discharge. Therefore, the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed is an environment that is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game balls. In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 is lined up with its back to the island equipment of the game hall, other pachinko machines may become noise sources and cause noise effects. In this way, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise effects. Therefore, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, and a configuration is adopted in which they are electrically connected to the same ground (GND) as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. This allows noise that enters through the cover body 1501 and base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 to flow to the board grounds (grounds (GND) of various boards) of the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530, etc., and eliminates the noise.

[7-5. Implementation of Control ROM]
Here, a method of mounting the control ROM 1510b on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to Figs. 173 to 176. Fig. 173 is a perspective view (a) of a ROM socket having a conversion board, and a top view (b) of a control ROM having a leadless package mounted in the ROM socket. Fig. 174 is a view seen from the arrow P in Fig. 173(a). Fig. 175 is a cross-sectional view of a through hole showing an outline of the positional relationship between a through hole formed in the peripheral control board and a through hole formed in the conversion board. Fig. 176 is a perspective view (a) of a control ROM and a ROM socket having a leadless package mounted on a conversion board, and a top view (b) of a control ROM having a leadless package mounted in the ROM socket.

First, as shown in Figures 173 to 176, a surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the control ROM 1510b is arranged has a plurality of rectangular pads 1510v formed thereon and arranged in two rows spaced apart by a predetermined distance. Specifically, the pads 1510v are arranged at positions corresponding to a plurality of lead terminals protruding outward from both longitudinal sides of a lead-type ROM socket to which the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package (SSOP (Shrink Small Outline Package), hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "lead-type package") is detachably attached. A lead terminal of a lead-type ROM socket is soldered to a pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby fixing the lead-type ROM socket to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The pad 1510v is disposed near the peripheral control IC 1510a described above.

In addition to the control ROM 1510b, which is a surface-side mounted electronic component, the surface-side notation 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 includes a surface-side notation indicating the attributes of the surface-side electronic components, such as the component number of the surface-side electronic component, an area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is to be placed (which may further include the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the model of the surface-side electronic component), which is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist with white paint that stands out against the green (for example, the component number 1510v1 of the control ROM 1510b in FIG. 173(b), the position where the control ROM 1510b is to be placed (the inner area indicated by the symbols indicating the four corners (L-shaped symbols)) 1510v2, and the mounting orientation of the control ROM 1510b (mounting direction, symbol indicating the placement position of the first terminal (triangle symbol (△))) 1510v3).

In addition, on the rear surface 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 (the surface on which the control ROM 1510b is not mounted, and may be referred to as the "non-mounted surface" below) are, in addition to the rear surface mounted electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and various ICs, a rear surface notation section indicating the attributes of the rear surface electronic components, such as the component numbers of the rear surface electronic components and the areas indicating the positions at which the rear surface electronic components are to be placed (which may further include the shape of the rear surface electronic components, the size of the rear surface electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the rear surface electronic components, and the model of the rear surface electronic components) is silk-screened on a solid green resist with white paint that stands out against the green.

In this embodiment, the control ROM 1510b has a lead-type package and a memory capacity of 256 Mbits, with 35 lead terminals protruding outward from each of the two longitudinal sides (70 lead terminals in total on both sides).

Although the control ROM 1510b has a lead-type package, in the event of a supply shortage or discontinuation, it is necessary to substitute it with another package. However, when the package is changed, in a leadless type (so-called LGA (Land Grid Array)) package (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "leadless type package"), the lead terminals do not protrude from the side of the leadless type package, but the connection terminals are arranged on the bottom surface of the leadless type package, so it is necessary to modify the shape and arrangement of the pads 1510v and the routing of the wiring pattern to the pads 1510v. Therefore, it is necessary to manufacture the peripheral control board 1510 due to the package change, even though there are no electrical problems with other circuits.

Therefore, the pads 1510v are formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be arranged at positions corresponding to the multiple lead terminals protruding outward from both longitudinal sides of the lead-type ROM socket to which the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is attached and detached, and a mechanism is adopted that can accommodate package changes by changing the object soldered to the pads 1510v. In other words, even if the package of the control ROM 1510b is changed, there is no need to modify the shape and arrangement of the pads 1510v of the peripheral control board 1510 and the wiring pattern to the pads 1510v (the shape and arrangement of the pads 1510v and the wiring to the pads 1510v become the same), and the mechanism allows common use, and 35 pads 1510v per row are aligned in two rows spaced apart by a predetermined distance and formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

As mentioned above, the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b with a lead-type package are 70 in total, whereas the connection terminals of the control ROM 1510b with a leadless package are fewer, with 56 terminals (the number of connection terminals may be less than 56) arranged on the bottom surface of the leadless package. This is because there are fewer power supply terminals to which an external control power supply is electrically connected, ground terminals electrically connected to ground (circuit ground) (GND), and NC terminals that are unconnected (non-connected).

When the package of the control ROM 1510b is changed from a lead type package to a leadless type package, as shown in FIG. 173(a), it is possible to use a ROM socket 1510s that can detachably mount the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package, and a conversion board 1510t that changes the number of terminals. The ROM socket 1510s allows the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type to be attached and detached using a dedicated tool, and is mainly composed of a mounting portion 1510sa, a pair of rotating holding pieces 1510sb, 1510sb, and multiple lead terminals 1510sc. The mounting portion 1510sa is where the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is placed, and the pair of rotating holding pieces 1510sb, 1510sb are in an open state when the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is placed on the mounting portion 1510sa, whereas when the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is placed and held on the mounting portion 1510sa, they are in a closed state where they rotate and hold the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package such that a force acts on the top surface of the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package toward the bottom surface.

When the pair of rotating retaining pieces 1510sb, 1510sb are in a closed state, a force acting on the top surface of the control ROM 1510b with a leadless package toward the bottom surface is maintained, and the 56 connection terminals on the bottom surface of the control ROM 1510b with a leadless package placed on the mounting portion 1510sa are electrically connected to one end of each of the corresponding lead terminals 1510sc (56 terminals).

The 56 lead terminals 1510sc are fixed by soldering to pads 1510ta (56 pieces) on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, which is formed to correspond to these lead terminals 1510sc.

The shape of the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is the same as the shape of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (e.g., a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm x 0.5 mm), the size is the same, and the distance dimension (so-called pitch) between the pads is also the same (e.g., 0.8 mm). The distance dimension between the two rows of pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is smaller than the distance dimension between the two rows of pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

The outer shape of the conversion board 1510t is a rectangular plate that is larger than the outer shape of the IC package and is almost the same as the outer shape of the lead-type ROM socket into which the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is attached and detached.

The thickness of the conversion board 1510t is thinner (0.8 mm or 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the peripheral control board 1510 (1.6 mm), and a green resist layer is formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x and the back surface (solder surface, non-mounting surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 by applying a green resist liquid to the layer (copper plane) on which the pads 1510ta, wiring patterns, and lands are formed. The conversion board 1510t has a plurality of through holes (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "through holes") having lands electrically connected to the wiring patterns formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty, and the inner walls of the through holes are copper-plated to have conductivity. The holes of the through holes, excluding the end face through holes 1510tb described below, are filled with insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that blocks the holes of the through holes are processed so that they are flush with the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty, respectively, and together with the lands, one end and the other end of the insulating resin that blocks the holes of the through holes are completely covered with a green paint film (referred to as "filled with resin").

As shown in FIG. 174, on both longitudinal sides of the conversion board 1510t, semicircular end face through holes 1510tb are formed at positions corresponding to a plurality of lead terminals protruding outward from both longitudinal sides of a lead type ROM socket to which a control ROM 1510b having a lead type package is attached and detached, and the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb is copper plated to have conductivity. The end face through hole 1510tb is formed in a circular shape during manufacturing, and then shaped into a semicircular shape by router processing. In addition, lands are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the end face through hole 1510tb, respectively.

The end face through holes 1510tb formed on both longitudinal sides of the conversion board 1510t are positioned at the same positions as the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package, and are the same (e.g., 0.8 mm) as the distance dimension (so-called pitch) between the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

The difference between the control ROM 1510b with a lead-type package and the control ROM 1510b with a leadless package is, as described above, the number of power terminals to which the external control power supply is electrically connected, the ground terminals to which the ground (circuit ground) (GND) is electrically connected, and the NC terminals that are unconnected (non-connected). For this reason, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are arranged so that the connection terminals of the control ROM 1510b with a leadless package are electrically connected to the end surface through holes 1510tb so that the number of power terminals, ground terminals, and NC terminals match, and the wiring pattern is routed so that it is electrically connected to the end surface through holes 1510tb in the arrangement of the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b with a lead-type package.

Returning to FIG. 173, the positional relationship between the total of 56 pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t and the total of 70 end face through holes 1510tb formed on both longitudinal side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t is such that the point (center point) where the line connecting the center of the upper and lower sides of the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t intersects with the point (center point) where the line connecting the center of the upper and lower sides of the ROM socket 1510s intersects with the line connecting the center of the left and right sides of the ROM socket 1510s, as shown in FIG. 173(b), so that the pads 1510ta and the end face through holes 1510tb are spaced apart by a distance dimension zd that is predetermined as a clearance so as not to come into electrical contact.

A total of 70 end face through holes 1510tb formed on both longitudinal sides of the conversion board 1510t are fixed in a state where the back face (non-mounting face) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t is in surface contact with the surface (mounting face) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 by soldering the inner circumferential walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb to the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting face) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (i.e., the conversion board 1510t is surface-mounted on the surface (mounting face) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, with no gaps).

The exposed copper surfaces on the front (mounting surface) 1510tx and back (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t have solder applied (coated with solder) by a solder lifter, and are treated to protect the exposed copper surfaces and improve wettability during mounting. The solder lifter for the conversion board 1510t may be a water-soluble flux.

When the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t is soldered to the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the land of the end face through hole 1510tb comes into surface contact with the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and becomes electrically conductive. This is because the surfaces of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 have been treated with a solder lifter and have solder already present thereon (coated with solder), and the lands of the end-face through-holes 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t have also been treated with a solder lifter and have solder already present thereon (coated with solder).Therefore, when the inner wall 1510tba of the end-face through-holes 1510tb is soldered to the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands of the end-face through-holes 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are in surface contact with the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The solder lifter for the peripheral control board 1510 may be a water-soluble flux.

In the end face through hole 1510tb, a land is formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, but it is not necessary to form a land. In this case, it is preferable that the pad 1510ta formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the end face through hole 1510tb and the end face through hole 1510tb formed on both sides of the end face through hole 1510tb are arranged at a distance zd (for example, 0.5 mm or more) that is determined in advance as a clearance so as not to be in electrical contact. In this case, a lower pad that is electrically connected to the lower end side of the end face through hole 1510tb may be formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t. The shape of this lower pad is smaller (e.g., a rectangular shape of 1.5 mm to 1.6 mm by 0.5 mm to 0.55 mm) than the shape of the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (e.g., a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm by 0.5 mm), and the distance dimension between the pads (so-called pitch) is the same (e.g., 0.8 mm) as the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the lower pad has solder placed thereon (coated with solder) by a solder lifter, and is treated to protect the surface of the exposed copper part and improve wettability during mounting. Even with this configuration, the lower pad electrically connected to the lower end side of the end face through hole 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t is in surface contact with the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and becomes electrically conductive, when the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb is soldered to the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, by configuring it in this manner, when the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the lower pad formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are soldered to the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the peel strength of the pad 1510v against peeling from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510 can be further increased.

In addition to the ROM socket 1510s, which is a surface-side mounted electronic component, the surface-side notation 1510t of the conversion board 1510t includes a surface-side notation indicating the attributes of the surface-side electronic component, such as the component number of the surface-side electronic component, an area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is to be placed (which may further include the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the model of the surface-side electronic component), which is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist with white paint that stands out against the green (for example, the component number 1510s1 of the ROM socket 1510s, the position where the ROM socket 1510s is to be placed (the inner area indicated by the symbols indicating the four corners (L-shaped symbols)) 1510s2, and the mounting orientation of the ROM socket 1510s (mounting direction, symbol indicating the placement position of the first terminal (triangle symbol (△))) 1510s3).

The number of pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is 56 in total, while the number of pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is 70 in total, which is more than the number of pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t. Also, as described above, the shape of the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is the same as the shape of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the size is also the same. Furthermore, the contact area (bonding area) between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is compared with the contact area (bonding area) between the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t and the land (or the above-mentioned lower pad instead of the land) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. , the bonding strength between the inner walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on both sides of the conversion board 1510t and the lands (or the lower pads described above instead of the lands) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is higher than the bonding strength between the lead terminals 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t.

Therefore, the peel strength at which the pad 1510ta peels off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t when the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s is soldered to the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is smaller than the peel strength at which the pad 1510v peels off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510 when the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the land formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are soldered to the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

In other words, when an external force is applied to the ROM socket 1510s, the peel strength at which the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t peels off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t is smaller than the peel strength at which the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 peels off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510. Since the pad 1510ta can be peeled off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t, the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 soldered to the land formed on the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t can be prevented from peeling off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby preventing damage to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when force is applied to the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s in the peeling direction, the soldered portion between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t is easily deformed because it is a thin metal wire, and therefore the load on each of the lead terminals 1510sc increases, and a force is applied that peels off the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t and the wiring pattern formed on the conversion board 1510t. As a result, the soldering portion on the ROM socket 1510s side, which has a thin metal wire, is highly likely to experience pattern peeling, but the soldering portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the soldering portion between the land (or the lower pad described above instead of the land) formed on the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510) is less likely to experience pattern peeling.

In this way, by adopting a new configuration in which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted on the conversion board 1510t rather than directly on the peripheral control board 1510, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 caused by external forces applied to the ROM socket 1510s can be reduced. This allows for a new method of mounting the control ROM 1510b, which is an electronic component, on the peripheral control board 1510, making it more convenient.

In addition, as described above, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x and the back surface (solder surface, non-mounting surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 and the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are both coated with a green resist layer to give them a unified color. In this way, by making the resist of the peripheral control board 1510 and the conversion board 1510t the same color (green), it is possible to make the presence of the conversion board 1510t difficult for the peripheral control board 1510 to notice, making it difficult for them to recognize it as a target of fraud.

In addition, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the mounting orientation of the control ROM 1510b (symbol (triangle symbol (△)) indicating the mounting direction and position of the first terminal) 1510v3 is silk-screened on a solid green resist with white paint that stands out against the green resist. As a result, if the resists of the peripheral control board 1510 and the conversion board 1510t are the same color (green), it is difficult to determine the orientation of the conversion board 1510t when mounting, so by indicating the 1st pin location (position of the first terminal) with white resist that is easily recognizable against the green resist, the orientation of the conversion board 1510t can be made easier to determine. In other words, the peripheral control board 1510 has one pin location (location of the first terminal) and the conversion board 1510t also has one pin location (location of the first terminal), so even if the resists of the peripheral control board 1510 and the conversion board 1510t are the same color (green), the orientation of the conversion board 1510t can be easily determined.

In addition, the holes of the through holes, except for the end face through holes 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t, are filled with insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin blocking the holes of the through holes are processed so as to be flush with the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, respectively, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin blocking the holes of the through holes, together with the lands of the through holes, are completely covered with a green paint film (resin filling). This eliminates the exposed metal parts of the through holes, making it possible to avoid contact with the exposed metal parts of the through holes, for example, formed on the peripheral control board 1510, and prevent electrical problems from occurring.

This will be briefly explained with reference to FIG. 175. For example, as shown in FIG. 175, the through-holes formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the through-holes formed in the conversion board 1510t may or may not happen to overlap. If they happen to overlap, the through-holes formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the through-holes formed in the conversion board 1510t will be electrically connected and conductive, and to avoid this, the holes of the through-holes formed in the conversion board 1510t are filled with the resin described above.

In addition, for example, if a connector for connecting to the peripheral control board 1510 is provided on the board on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted, and an electrical connection is made by connecting to the connector on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the mounted control ROM will be close to the cover plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505, and the influence of external noise will be strong. In contrast, the conversion board 1510t of this embodiment is connected by the above-mentioned soldering with the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t in a face-to-face contact state, so that the mounted control ROM 1510b can be kept away from the cover plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505, making it less susceptible to the influence of external noise.

The pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are 70 in number to correspond to the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package, whereas the connection terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package are 56 on the bottom surface of the leadless package (the number of connection terminals may be less than 56). For this reason, some of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged with an excessive number of NC terminals that are pre-assigned to the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package and are not connected (non-connected). The presence of such excess pads 1510v has the effect of reinforcing the soldering portion on the peripheral control board 1510 (the soldering portion between the land formed on the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510), and contributes to the strength of the joint surface of the soldering portion on the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, the number of NC terminals is purposely increased to strengthen the joint surface of the soldering portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the soldering portion between the land formed on the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510).

In addition, the inner walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t are connected by lands (or the above-mentioned lower pads instead of lands) (copper foil) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, thereby increasing the bonding strength compared to soldering using a simple pad. The soldering portion on the conversion board 1510t side (the soldering portion between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t) is a pad only on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, and the soldering portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the land (the above-mentioned lower pad instead of the land) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t) is a pad only on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t. The soldered portion between the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the land (or the above-mentioned lower pad instead of the land) (copper foil) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, so the soldered portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side can be configured to have a stronger bond strength than the soldered portion on the conversion board 1510t side.

In addition, the shape of the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is the same as the shape of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (e.g., a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm x 0.5 mm), the size is the same, and the distance dimension between the pads (so-called pitch) is also the same (e.g., 0.8 mm), and the distance dimension between the two rows of pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is smaller than the distance dimension between the two rows of pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and is longer than the distance dimension (pitch) between the pads. The end face through holes 1510tb formed on both sides of the conversion board 1510t are the same (for example, 0.8 mm) as the distance dimension (so-called pitch) between the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The distance dimension of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on both sides of the conversion board 1510t (i.e., the distance dimension between both sides of the conversion board 1510t) is larger than the inner distance dimension of the pads 1510v between the two rows of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and is smaller than the outer distance dimension of the pads 1510v between the two rows, and is longer than the distance dimension between the two rows of the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t. This increases the pitch of the joint between the land (or the lower pad described above instead of the land) formed on the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, and the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby improving the deflection prevention effect of the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, in order to further improve the deflection prevention effect of the peripheral control board 1510, for example, the board thickness of the conversion board 1510t can be increased.

In addition, the soldering portion on the conversion board 1510t side (the soldering portion between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t) and the soldering portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the soldering portion between the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the land (or the above-mentioned lower pad instead of the land) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510) are configured so that they can be surface mounted with the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 being in surface contact with each other, as described above. This allows the conversion board 1510t and the peripheral control board 1510 to be electrically connected without any gaps, and the distance between them and the cover plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505 can be increased, making it a connection method that is resistant to noise.

In addition, the land (or the lower pad described above instead of the land) formed on the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are soldered to the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and are electrically connected via this solder. This allows the conversion board 1510t and the peripheral control board 1510 to be electrically connected without any gaps, and the distance between the cover plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505 can be increased, making it a connection method that is resistant to noise.

In addition, the holes of the through holes, except for the end face through holes 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t, are filled with insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin blocking the holes of the through holes are processed so as to be flush with the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, respectively. Together with the lands of the through holes, one end and the other end of the insulating resin blocking the holes of the through holes are completely covered with a green paint film (resin filled), and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 can be surface mounted in a state of surface contact, thereby preventing a short circuit between the conversion board 1510t and the peripheral control board 1510, which are connected without any gaps.

Although the control ROM 1510b is attached to and detached from the ROM socket 1510s, this operation may involve human intervention and accidentally damage the control ROM 1510b or the wiring pattern. For this reason, if the ROM socket 1510s is mounted on the conversion board 1510t and the control ROM 1510b or the wiring pattern formed on the conversion board 1510t is damaged, the conversion board 1510t can be removed from the peripheral control board 1510 and replaced with a new one, allowing the peripheral control board 1510 to be used as is (the same one).

In addition, only the ROM socket 1510s is mounted on the conversion board 1510t. This means that if the ROM socket 1510s or the conversion board 1510t is damaged and needs to be replaced, only the smallest units, the ROM socket 1510s and the conversion board 1510t, are required.

In addition, the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which are soldered to the lands (or the above-mentioned lower pads instead of the lands) formed on the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, are arranged near the peripheral control IC 1510a described above. The peripheral control IC 1510a is an IC with a large package and is a surface-mount type electronic component, so such surface-mount type electronic components are particularly vulnerable to bending of the board (the connection terminals and lead terminals of the electronic component may peel off from the surface of the board). Therefore, by mounting the conversion board 1510t near the peripheral control IC 1510a, the peripheral control board 1510 can be reinforced against bending.

In addition, even if there is a need to change from a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package to a control ROM 1510b having a leadless package, this can be handled by mounting a conversion board 1510t having a ROM socket 1510s to which the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package can be attached on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, even if the package of the control ROM 1510b is changed, there is no need to modify the shape and arrangement of the pads 1510v of the peripheral control board 1510 or the routing of the wiring pattern to the pads 1510v (the shape and arrangement of the pads 1510v and the routing of the wiring to the pads 1510v become the same), and the control ROM 1510b can be commonly used.

In addition, when the control ROM 1510b is removed from the ROM socket 1510s using a special tool in a case where the peripheral control board 1510 is reused and a sampling inspection (sample) is performed to check for defects in the manufacturing process, even if the control ROM 1510b gets caught in the ROM socket 1510s and an external force is applied to the ROM socket 1510s, the peel strength at which the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t peels off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t is as low as the peel strength at which the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 peels off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t, as described above. Because this is smaller than the peel strength at which the control board 1510 peels off from the base material, the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t soldered to the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s can be prevented from peeling off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t, thereby preventing the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 soldered to the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t from peeling off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby preventing damage to the peripheral control board 1510. This allows the conversion board 1510t on which the damaged ROM socket 1510s is mounted to be removed from the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the conversion board 1510t on which a new ROM socket 1510s is mounted to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, allowing the peripheral control board 1510 itself to be used without having to be replaced with a new peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, since the conversion board 1510t is surface-mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and fixed without any gaps, it is difficult to improperly place electronic components in the gaps between the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, when changing from a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package to a control ROM 1510b having a leadless package, as described above, it is necessary to use a conversion board 1510t. However, since the thickness of the conversion board 1510t is thinner (0.8 mm or 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the peripheral control board 1510 (1.6 mm) as described above, when the peripheral control board 1510 is contained and sealed in the peripheral control board box 1505 (sealing board box), the predetermined height distance dimension from the top surface of the control ROM 1510b mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505 is at most about the thickness of the conversion board 1510t, and high noise resistance can be maintained against noise entering from the cover body 1501.

As described above, when the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, the control ROM 1510b is removed from the ROM socket 1510s using a special tool when performing a sampling inspection (sample) to check for defects in the manufacturing process. In other words, when the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, the conversion board 1510t on which the control ROM 1510b is mounted is removed from the ROM socket 1510s using a special tool when performing a sampling inspection (sample) to check for defects in the manufacturing process. When changing from a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package to a control ROM 1510b having a leadless package, as described above, it is necessary to use a conversion board 1510t. However, since the lead terminals do not protrude outward from the conversion board 1510t, even if a person using a special tool to remove the conversion board 1510t on which the control ROM 1510b is mounted from the ROM socket 1510s accidentally drops the conversion board 1510t on which the control ROM 1510b is mounted, the lead terminals will not bend as with the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package, and it is possible to prevent the conversion board 1510t from becoming unusable.

In addition, as described above, end face through holes 1510tb having a semicircular shape are formed on both longitudinal side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t, and the diameter of the end face through holes 1510tb is formed to be approximately the same as the width dimension (0.5 mm) of the shape (e.g., a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm x 0.5 mm) of the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t. Alternatively, the diameter of the end face through holes 1510tb may be larger (e.g., 0.6 mm to 0.7 mm) than the width dimension (0.5 mm) of the shape (e.g., a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm x 0.5 mm) of the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t. In this case, the end face through holes 1510tb have a shorter arc shape than a semicircle.

In addition, pad 1510v is formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be positioned at positions corresponding to a plurality of lead terminals protruding outward from both longitudinal sides of a lead-type ROM socket to which a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is attached and detached, and a mechanism is adopted in which changes in the package can be accommodated by changing the object soldered to this pad 1510v, but other mechanisms may also be adopted. For example, as shown in FIG. 176(a), the lead terminals 1510sc (70 in total) of a lead-type ROM socket 1510s' to which a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is attached and detached are soldered to pads 1510v (i.e., the conventional ROM socket 1510s' is reused as is), and a conversion board 1510t' to which a control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is soldered is placed on the mounting portion 1510sa' of the ROM socket 1510s', and the pair of rotating holding pieces 1510sb', 1510sb' is closed. In addition, the mounting portion 1510sa', the pair of rotating holding pieces 1510sb', 1510sb', and the multiple lead terminals 1510sc' have the same functions as the mounting portion 1510sa, the pair of rotating holding pieces 1510sb, 1510sb, and the multiple lead terminals 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s shown in FIG. 173(a), so a description thereof will be omitted here.

A green resist layer is formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx' and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty' of the conversion board 1510t' by applying a green resist liquid to the layer (copper plane) on which the pads, wiring patterns, and lands are formed, on which the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is soldered. The conversion board 1510t' has a plurality of through holes (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "through holes") having lands electrically connected to the wiring patterns formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty, and the inner walls of the through holes are copper-plated to make them conductive. The through-holes are filled with insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that blocks the through-holes are processed so that they are flush with the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx' and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty', respectively, and together with the land, one end and the other end of the insulating resin that blocks the through-holes are completely covered with a green coating (resin filled).

In addition, downward protrusions are formed on both longitudinal ends of the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty' of the conversion board 1510t', and pads are formed on these protrusions. These pads are arranged at positions corresponding to the lead terminals 1510sc' of the ROM socket 1510s', and a total of 70 pads are formed, 35 on one end and 35 on the other end.

When the conversion board 1510t' to which the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is soldered is placed on the mounting portion 1510sa' of the ROM socket 1510s' and the pair of rotating holding pieces 1510sb', 1510sb' is closed, as shown in FIG. 176(b), the conversion board 1510t' is arranged so that the point (center point) where the line connecting the centers of the upper and lower sides of the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx' of the conversion board 1510t' intersects with the line connecting the centers of the left and right sides of the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx' of the conversion board 1510t' coincides (or almost coincides with) with the point (center point) where the line connecting the centers of the upper and lower sides of the ROM socket 1510s intersects with the line connecting the centers of the left and right sides of the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx' of the conversion board 1510t'.

When changing from a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package to a control ROM 1510b having a leadless package, it is necessary to modify the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the modification of the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly explained with reference to FIG. 177. FIGS. 177(a) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing the board management number of the peripheral control board. Note that if the components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 are changed, it becomes necessary to change the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510.

As shown in FIG. 177(a), a foil cut area KBRGN (i.e., an area formed by cutting out the copper foil on the copper foil surface on which the wiring pattern is formed, excluding the terminals and wiring pattern) is formed in a predetermined position on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, one of the four corners of the peripheral control board 1510), and within this foil cut area KBRGN, foil cut letters KBNUM are formed in the wiring pattern, starting from the left, with the common part of the management number (in the figure, "XYZA") as the board management number, and the foil cut area KBRGN and foil cut letters KBNUM are each covered with a green resist liquid that is solidly applied to the surface (mounting surface) 1510 of the peripheral control board 1510.

When changing from a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package to a control ROM 1510b having a leadless package, for example, as shown in FIG. 177(b), the symbol HKBNUM (the letter A in the figure) is printed using a laser marker following the foil-punched letters KBNUM arranged left-justified in the foil-punched area KBRGN (digging along the symbol HKBNUM to a predetermined depth from the surface), and by using a laser marker, the symbol HKBNUM can be printed following the foil-punched letters KBNUM each time the conversion board 1510t is replaced (including repair), making it possible to create a board management number (in the figure, "XYZAA"). Note that the board management number may be changed by erasing part of the foil-punched letters with a laser marker, or the board management number may be changed by both erasing part of the foil-punched letters and adding letters.

For example, as shown in FIG. 177 (c), the common part of the management number (in the figure, "XYZ-") is used as the board management number to form the foil cut letters KBNUM using a wiring pattern, and foil cut areas RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 are formed in a nearby area separate from foil cut area KBRGN (in the figure, directly below foil cut area KBRGN), and foil cut letters are formed using the wiring pattern as symbols (in the figure, the letters A, B, and C), within foil cut areas RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3, and the foil cut area KBRGN and areas RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 are each covered with a green resist liquid that is applied in a solid color to the surface (mounting surface) 1510 of the peripheral control board 1510. Perforations are made around the periphery of the regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 by a router, allowing the regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 to be removed from the peripheral control board 1510. When the regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 are not removed from the peripheral control board 1510, the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510 is "XYZA-ABC." When changing from a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package to a control ROM 1510b having a leadless package, the board management number can be set by removing one, two, or all of the regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 from the peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a power supply circuit (not shown) that generates various power supply voltages. This power supply circuit is a rectangular board on which various electronic components are mounted, and the back side of this board is directly soldered to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 in surface contact. The surface (mounting surface) of this board is covered by a metal cover that is crimped to clamp the end pieces of the board. When the power supply circuit board is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is not a removable electronic component, and if the power supply circuit is damaged, the power supply circuit board is replaced and a new board is not directly soldered to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 in surface contact, but rather the peripheral control board 1510 itself is replaced.

Gaming machines equipped with a performance control board on which electronic components such as ROM are mounted have been known for some time (for example, JP 2017-217381 A (paragraph [0061], Figure 5)). However, there is room for improvement in the method of mounting electronic components on the control board in conventional gaming machines.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 170 is provided as a performance control means for controlling performance related to the game. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 173, which is a control board, a ROM socket 1510s of FIG. 173, which is a ROM socket in which a control ROM 1510b of FIG. 173, which is a ROM in which performance data is stored, is mounted, and a conversion board 1510t of FIG. 173, which is a specific board on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted. The surface (mounting surface) 1510x, which is a surface portion of the peripheral control board 1510, is formed with a position 1510v2 for arranging the control ROM 1510b of FIG. 173, which is a specific board mounting area in which the conversion board 1510t is mounted so as to overlap. Only the ROM socket 1510s is soldered and mounted on the conversion board 1510t.

In this way, by adopting a new configuration in which the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 but is mounted on the conversion board 1510t, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 caused by external forces applied to the ROM socket 1510s can be reduced. Therefore, a new method of mounting the control ROM 1510b, which is an electronic component, on the peripheral control board 1510 can be achieved, making it more convenient.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 170 is provided as a performance control means for controlling performance control related to the game. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 173, which is a control board, a ROM socket 1510s of FIG. 173, which is a ROM socket in which a control ROM 1510b of FIG. 173, which is a ROM in which performance data is stored, is mounted, and a conversion board 1510t of FIG. 173, which is a specific board on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted. The surface (mounting surface) 1510x, which is a surface portion of the peripheral control board 1510, is provided with a position 1510v2 for arranging the control ROM 1510b of FIG. 173, which is a specific board mounting area in which the conversion board 1510t is mounted so as to overlap. The conversion board 1510t has pads 1510ta formed on a surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t in FIG. 173 which is a first board surface portion that can be soldered, and inner walls 1510tba of side through holes 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t in FIG. 173 which is a second board surface portion. The ROM socket 1510s and the conversion board 1510t have lead terminals 1510sc which are lead terminal portions of the ROM socket 1510t and inner walls 1510tba of the side through holes 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t in FIG. The pad 1510ta, which is the plate surface portion, is connected by soldering (electrically connected by soldering), and the peripheral control board 1510 conversion board 1510t is connected by soldering between the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 in FIG. 173, which is the plate surface portion of the peripheral control board 1510, and the inner wall 1510tba of the side through hole 1510tb, which is the second plate surface portion of the conversion board 1510t (electrically connected by soldering).

In this way, by adopting a new configuration in which the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 but is mounted on the conversion board 1510t, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 caused by external forces applied to the ROM socket 1510s can be reduced. Therefore, a new method of mounting the control ROM 1510b, which is an electronic component, on the peripheral control board 1510 can be achieved, making it more convenient.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, it is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1500 of Fig. 170, which is a presentation control means that controls presentation control related to the game. The peripheral control unit 1500 is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510 of Fig. 173, which is a control board, a ROM socket 1510s of Fig. 173, which is a ROM socket in which a control ROM 1510b of Fig. 173, which is a ROM in which presentation data is stored, is attached, and a conversion board 1510t of Fig. 173, which is a specific board on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted. The conversion board 1510t is provided with a pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t in FIG. 174, which is a first terminal portion for electrically connecting the ROM socket 1510s to the mounting surface on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted, and an inner wall 1510tba of a side through hole 1510tb formed on both sides of the conversion board 1510t, which is a second terminal portion for electrically connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the mounting surface on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted. The first terminal portion and the second terminal portion are in different forms, and the second terminal portion is electrically connected to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x, which is the plate surface of the peripheral control board 1510, via solder.

In this way, by adopting a new configuration in which the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 but is mounted on the conversion board 1510t, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 caused by external forces applied to the ROM socket 1510s can be reduced. Therefore, a new method of mounting the control ROM 1510b, which is an electronic component, on the peripheral control board 1510 can be achieved, making it more convenient.

[8. Power Supply System]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 178. Fig. 178 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of a pachinko game machine. First, the power supply board will be described, followed by the backup power supply and the power supplied to each control board. Note that the board ground (GND) of each board and the board ground (GND) of each terminal board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board]
The power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the board unit 620 shown in Figures 94 and 95 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the island equipment of the game hall. In the island equipment of the game hall, a system is usually adopted in which, for example, four pachinko machines 1 are treated as one group and AC power (AC 24V) is supplied to each of them by one transformer. For example, in the island equipment of a game hall in which 20 pachinko machines 1 are installed in one row, the four pachinko machines 1 are managed as five groups, and one transformer is provided for each group (a total of five transformers) and AC power (AC 24V) is supplied to each of them, so a transformer with a maximum allowable capacity of 1000VA is provided.

When the power switch 630a is turned ON, the AC power (AC 24V) supplied from the island equipment of the game hall is supplied to the power supply board 630, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on. On the other hand, when the power switch 630a is turned OFF, the AC power (AC 24V) supplied from the island equipment of the game hall is no longer supplied to the power supply board 630, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be cut off. The power switch 630a is usually kept in the ON state, and when a staff member of the game hall starts business, the power of the pachinko machines 1 arranged in a row on the island equipment of the game hall is turned ON (on) to turn on the breaker installed in the game hall all at once. Then, after business ends, the staff member of the game hall turns OFF (off) the breaker installed in the game hall to turn off the power of the pachinko machines 1 arranged in a row on the island equipment of the game hall all at once. For this reason, examples of cases in which the power is turned on or off for each of the pachinko machines 1 that are lined up in an island facility in an amusement hall include a case in which a staff member or other attendant at the amusement hall turns off the power switch 630a when performing maintenance and turns the power switch 630a back on when the maintenance is completed, and a case in which a staff member or other attendant at the amusement hall turns off the power switch 630a for a pachinko machine 1 that has developed some kind of trouble in order to resolve the trouble and turns the power switch 630a back on when the trouble is resolved.

As shown in FIG. 178, the power supply board 630 includes, in addition to the power switch 630a, fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, a noise suppression circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power supply breakdown circuit 630g, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply creation circuit 630f, and a backup power supply circuit 630h. Regardless of whether the power switch 630a is turned on or off, the AC power (AC 24V (hereinafter referred to as "AC 24V")) supplied from the island equipment of the game hall is supplied to the interface board 635 via the power supply board 630, and is then supplied from this interface board 635 to a ball dispensing machine (e.g., a CR unit) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1.

When the power switch 630a is turned on, the AC 24V supplied from the island equipment of the game hall is supplied to the noise countermeasure circuit 630b via the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 and the power switch 630a, and the noise is removed in the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. The noise-removed AC 24V is supplied to the rectifier circuit 630c, which rectifies it (converts AC to DC (AC-DC conversion)) to become a DC power supply. This rectified DC power supply is supplied to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the power supply breakdown circuit 630g, and the power factor correction circuit 630d creates a DC +35V (hereinafter referred to as "+35V") with an improved power factor. This created +35V is supplied to the smoothing circuit 630e, where the ripple of +35V is removed and smoothed. This smoothed +35V is supplied to the power supply circuit 630f.

When the voltage supplied to the power supply destruction circuit 630g exceeds a predetermined voltage, it passes a large current exceeding the allowable current upper limit (predetermined cut-off current) through fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, melting them and electrically cutting off the 24V AC supplied from the island equipment of the amusement hall. When a large current (abnormal current) that exceeds the allowable current upper limit (cut-off current) flows through fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the element parts of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 melt and cut off the 24V AC supplied to the subsequent equipment via fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2.

The power supply circuit 630f, to which the smoothed +35V is supplied, includes a +5V power supply circuit 630fa, a +12V power supply circuit 630fb, and a +24V power supply circuit 630fc. The +5V power supply circuit 630fa generates DC +5V (hereinafter referred to as "+5V") from the +35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. The +12V power supply circuit 630fb generates DC +12V (hereinafter referred to as "+12V") from the +35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. The +24V power supply circuit 630fc generates DC +24V (hereinafter referred to as "+24V") from the +35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. +5V, +12V, and +24V are supplied to the payout control board 633 and the interface board 635, respectively. The power supply line (power supply system) created by the power supply board 630 to which +5V is applied and supplied is the +5V power supply line, the power supply line (power supply system) created by the power supply board 630 to which +12V is applied and supplied is the +12V power supply line, and the power supply line (power supply system) created by the power supply board 630 to which +24V is applied and supplied is the +24V power supply line.

[8-2. Backup power supply]
The backup power supply circuit 630h includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in RAM") built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 supplies backup power to the RAM (hereinafter referred to as the "dispense control built-in RAM") built into the dispensing control MPU 633aa of the dispensing control unit 633a in the dispensing control board 633.

The +5V created by the +5V power supply creating circuit 630fa of the power supply creating circuit 630f is supplied to the dispensing control board 633. The +5V supplied to the dispensing control board 633 becomes the +5V power supply line in the dispensing control board 633 via the dispensing control filter circuit 633h, and is applied to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 633aa and is applied to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. The +12V created by the +12V power supply creating circuit 630fb of the power supply creating circuit 630f is supplied to the +5V creating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633. This +5V creating circuit 1310g creates +5V as a local power supply that becomes the control power supply of the main control MPU 1310a from the +12V from the dispensing control board 633. The +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "main control board side generated +5V") becomes the main control board side generated +5V power line in the main control board 1310 via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is supplied to the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is also supplied to the power terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. Note that the +5V generated by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 and the +5V (main control board side generated +5V) generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected and are independent of each other.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM of the dispensing control board 633, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the dispensing control board 633. In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 flows as a current toward the power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 633aa, and the current flows in the forward direction from the power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 by the diode PD0.

In this way, the capacitor BC1 can be charged by being supplied with +5V by an electrical connection method in which the +5V created by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 is supplied to the dispensing control board 633, and then returns from the dispensing control board 633 to the power supply board 630. As a result, when the +5V created by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f is no longer supplied to the dispensing control board 633, the charge stored in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the dispensing control board 633 as dispensing VBB, so that the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 633aa due to the diode PD0, and the dispensing control MPU 633aa does not operate, but the dispensing control built-in RAM's power terminal is supplied with dispensing VBB, so the memory contents of the dispensing control built-in RAM are maintained.

The negative terminal of capacitor BC0 on the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, while the positive terminal of capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of diode MD0 on the main control board 1310. In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g (+5V generated by the main control board) flows as a current toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the current flows in the forward direction from the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM to the positive terminal of capacitor BC0 via diode MD0.

In this way, capacitor BC0 can be charged by being supplied with +5V created on the main control board side through an electrical connection method in which the +5V (+5V created on the main control board side) created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied to the main control board 1310, and then from the dispensing control board 633 to the power supply board 630. As a result, when the +12V generated by the +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb of the power supply generating circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 is no longer supplied to the +5V generating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the output control board 633 and the +5V generating circuit 1310g is no longer able to generate +5V (main control board side generated +5V), the charge stored in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the output control board 633 as the main VBB. Therefore, since the current is prevented from flowing to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a by the diode MD0, the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, but the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, so the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are maintained.

[8-3. Power supply to each control board, etc.]
Next, we will provide an overview of the power supply supplied to each control board, etc., and then we will explain the power supply supplied mainly to the dispensing control board and the power supply supplied to the main control board.

The three types of power supplies, +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V, respectively created by the +5 V power supply creation circuit 630fa, +12 V power supply creation circuit 630fb, and +24 V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630, are supplied to the dispensing control board 633 as shown in FIG. 178, and of these three types of power supplies, two types of power supplies, +12 V and +24 V, are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633. In addition, the three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, respectively generated by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa, the +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb, and the +24V power supply generating circuit 630fc of the power supply generating circuit 630f in the power supply board 630, are supplied to the interface board 635, and are also supplied via this interface board 635 to the peripheral control board 1510, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc.

The three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied to the interface board 635, door frame main relay board 104, door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., respectively, may be provided with +5V fuses (not shown), +12V fuses (not shown), and +24V fuses (not shown), which can be blown by an overcurrent flowing through each of these power supply lines, on the interface board 635, door frame main relay board 104, door frame clothing relay board 105, etc.

In particular, the +12V power line and the +24V power line are monitored for a drop in potential by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, as described below. When the potential of the +12V power line or the potential of the +12V power line drops and a power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 or the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power failure processing in the main control side power-on processing described below to stop the progress of the game, and the payout control MPU 633aa performs the payout control unit power failure processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described below to stop the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls).

Therefore, when a +12V fuse (not shown) and a +24V fuse (not shown) are provided on the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., respectively, the configuration can be such that when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, if an electrical trouble occurs for some reason in the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., causing a leakage current or a short circuit in the +12V power line or +24V power line of the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., causing an overcurrent to flow in the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., the +12V fuse and the +24V fuse provided on the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc. will melt. This suppresses a drop in the potential of the +12V power line and the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

The three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are supplied to the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 via +5V fuses, +12V fuses, and +24V fuses, not shown.

The capacity of the +5V fuse (not shown) is preset based on the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself in the +5V power line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the current used by subsequent boards via the peripheral control board 1510, and can pass current up to the +5V power line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit (cut-off current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the +5V power line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit flows, the element part of the +5V fuse (not shown) melts, cutting off the +5V power line to the subsequent line that is supplied via the +5V fuse (not shown).

The capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) is preset based on the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself in the +12V power line of the peripheral control board 1510, the current used by subsequent boards such as various decorative boards of the game board 5 via the peripheral control board 1510, and the current used by subsequent devices via the peripheral control board 1510, and can pass current up to the +12V power line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit (cut-off current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the +12V power line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit flows, the element part of the +12V fuse (not shown) melts and cuts off the +12V power line to the subsequent line supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown).

The capacity of the +24V fuse (not shown) is preset by taking into account the current used by the subsequent boards through the peripheral control board 1510 in the +24V power line of the peripheral control board 1510, and can pass current up to the +24V power line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit (cut-off current). In addition, when the peripheral control board 1510 uses +24V to provide an electric drive source (e.g., a drive solenoid) as a +24V system driver circuit, the capacity of the +24V fuse (not shown) is preset by taking into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself in the +24V power line and the current used by the subsequent boards through the peripheral control board 1510. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the +24V power line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit flows, the element part of the +24V fuse (not shown) melts and cuts off the +24V power line to the subsequent power line supplied through the +24V fuse (not shown).

The +5V fuse, +12V fuse, and +24V fuse (not shown) are the main fuses that supply the +5V, +12V, and +24V power lines from the peripheral control board 1510 to subsequent boards. Since the current flowing through them is large and they may generate heat, it is preferable to place them away from the electronic components (e.g., microprocessor, VDP, etc.) of the peripheral control unit 1511 and the performance display control unit 1512 to prevent failures caused by thermal shutdown built into the IC due to the influence of this heat, and it is preferable to place them near the connectors that supply +5V, +12V, and +24V from the interface board 635 (especially near the connectors of the terminals to which the power lines that supply +5V, +12V, and +24V from the interface board 635 are connected).

The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a control power supply creation circuit (not shown) that creates DC 3.3V (hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") as a local power supply that serves as the control power supply for the peripheral control unit 1511 and the performance display control unit 1512 from +12V supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown). The +3.3V created by the control power supply creation circuit (not shown) is supplied to the electronic components of the peripheral control unit 1511 and the performance display control unit 1512 via a control power supply fuse (not shown). The +3.3V created by the control power supply creation circuit (not shown) becomes the +3.3V power supply line in the peripheral control board 1510 via a control power supply fuse (not shown). Even if an abnormal current flows through the +5V power line supplied through a +5V fuse (not shown) and/or the +24V power line supplied through a +24V fuse (not shown) and blows, except for the +12V power line supplied through a +12V fuse (not shown), the control power supply creation circuit (not shown) can create a local power supply of +3.3V from the +12V power line to serve as the control power supply for the peripheral control unit 1511 and the performance display control unit 1512, so the peripheral control unit 1511 and the performance display control unit 1512 do not stop but continue to operate, and although it becomes difficult to drive the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) if the +24V fuse (not shown) is blown, the performance can continue to proceed.

The control power supply generating circuit (not shown) may generate multiple control power supplies (e.g., DC 1.5V (hereinafter referred to as "+1.5V"), DC 1.25V (hereinafter referred to as "+1.25V"), etc.) corresponding to each device such as the control ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 as a local power supply in addition to +3.3V. In this case, control power supply fuses (not shown) are provided corresponding to the multiple control power supplies (e.g., a +3.3V fuse for +3.3V, a +1.5V fuse for +1.5V, and a +1.5V fuse for +1.25V, and a +3.3V power supply line is provided via the +3.3V fuse, a +1.5V power supply line is provided via the +1.5V fuse, and a +1.25V power supply line is provided via the +1.25V fuse).

The control power supply fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and the current used by subsequent boards via the peripheral control board 1510 on the +3.3V power line, and can pass current up to the +3.3V power line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit (cut-off current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the +3.3V power line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit flows, the control power supply fuse (not shown) element melts down, cutting off the +3.3V power line to the subsequent power supply that is supplied via the control power supply fuse (not shown). In addition, when a control power supply fuse (not shown) is provided corresponding to each of the multiple control power supplies (for example, a +3.3V fuse for +3.3V, a +1.5V fuse for +1.5V, and a +1.25V fuse for +1.25V), the capacity is preset by taking into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and the current when used by a subsequent board via the peripheral control board 1510, and current can flow up to the power line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit (cut-off current) of each of the multiple control power supplies. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the power line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit of each of the multiple control power supplies flows, the element part of the control power supply fuse (not shown) provided corresponding to each of the multiple control power supplies melts, and the power line of the control power supply to the subsequent supply is cut off via the blown control power supply fuse (not shown).

The control power supply fuse (not shown) is the main fuse for the +3.3V power supply line that serves as the control power supply for the peripheral control unit 1511, the performance display control unit 1512, etc., and since it has a large current flowing through it and may generate heat, it is preferable to place it away from certain electronic components in the peripheral control unit 1511 and the performance display control unit 1512 to prevent failures caused by thermal shutdown built into certain electronic components in the peripheral control unit 1511 and the performance display control unit 1512 due to the effects of this heat, and it is preferable to place it near the control power supply creation circuit (especially near the terminal that creates +3.3V and supplies it as the +3.3 power supply line).

In this embodiment, the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, and control power supply fuse (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses that melt when a current flows that exceeds a predetermined allowable current limit (each has a predetermined cutoff current). Unlike resettable fuses, once melted, they are electronic components that cannot supply power to the following even if the current drops.

In addition, the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, and control power supply fuse of the peripheral control board 1510 (not shown) may be replaced with a lead type fuse instead of an SMD type chip fuse. Also, the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, and control power supply fuse of the peripheral control board 1510 (not shown) may be resettable fuses such as SMD type or lead type thermistors. In this way, when a resettable fuse is used, if a current that exceeds a predetermined allowable current limit flows, the power line cannot be supplied to the following, but if the current decreases, the power line can be supplied to the following again.

Of the three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied to subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, +5V is supplied to an input buffer circuit, etc., not shown, via a +5V fuse, not shown; +24V is supplied to a +24V driver circuit, not shown, that drives and controls the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5, via a +24V fuse, not shown; and +12V is supplied to a +12V driver circuit, not shown, that drives and controls the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, via a +12V fuse, not shown, and is also supplied to multiple decorative boards provided on the game board 5 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "each decorative board of the game board 5").

The capacity of the +5V fuse (not shown) is preset taking into account the current used by the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 itself in the +5V power supply line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, and can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (cut-off current) of the subsequent board of the +5V power supply line. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the subsequent board of the +5V power supply line flows, the element part of the +5V fuse (not shown) melts and cuts off the +5V power line to the subsequent line that is supplied via the +5V fuse (not shown).

The capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) is preset based on the current used by the peripheral control board 1510's subsequent boards (excluding the decorative boards of the game board 5) in the +12V power line of the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 itself, and the current used by each decorative board of the game board 5, and can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (cut-off current) of the subsequent boards on the +12V power line. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the subsequent board on the +12V power line flows, the element part of the +12V fuse (not shown) melts and cuts off the +12V power line to the subsequent boards that are supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown).

The capacity of the +24V fuse (not shown) is preset taking into account the current used by the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 itself in the +24V power line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, and can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (cut-off current) of the subsequent board of the +24V power line. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the subsequent board of the +24V power line flows through the +24V fuse (not shown), the element part of the +24V fuse (not shown) melts, cutting off the +24V power line to the subsequent line that is supplied via the +24V fuse (not shown).

The +5V fuse, +12V fuse, and +24V fuse (not shown) are fuses that supply the +5V power line, +12V power line, and +24V power line, and although the current flowing through them is smaller than that of the original +5V fuse, +12V fuse, and +24V fuse in the peripheral control board 1510, the current flowing through them is large and they may generate heat. Therefore, it is preferable to place them away from electronic components such as the +12V driver circuit (not shown) so that, for example, a failure due to shutdown caused by the thermal shutdown unit built into the +12V driver circuit (not shown) does not occur due to the influence of this heat, and it is preferable to place them near the connector to which +5V, +12V, and +24V are supplied from the peripheral control board 1510 (especially near the connector of the terminal to which the power lines to which +5V, +12V, and +24V are supplied from the peripheral control board 1510 are connected).

The input buffer circuit (not shown) receives a control signal (which may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510, removes noise from the control signal, and outputs the control signal to a +24V driver circuit (not shown) and a +12V driver circuit (not shown). Specifically, the input buffer circuit (not shown) is configured as a circuit in which one end of a resistor to which +5V supplied via a +5V fuse (not shown) is applied and one end of a resistor grounded to ground (GND) are electrically connected to multiple wiring (harnesses) electrically connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, and the noise resistance can be improved by removing noise that has entered the multiple wiring (harnesses).

The +24V driver circuit (not shown) is mainly composed of a driver IC that drives the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5, and a fuse (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "a fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown)") that cuts off overcurrent to the driver IC. The +24V supplied via the +24V fuse (not shown) is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse.

The fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 and the +24V driver circuit (not shown) in the +24V power line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, and can pass current up to the game board side drive solenoid allowable current limit (cut-off current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the game board side drive solenoid allowable current limit flows, the element part of the fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown) melts and cuts off the +24V power line to the subsequent line that is supplied via the fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown).

The +12V driver circuit (not shown) is mainly composed of a driver IC that drives the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, and a fuse that cuts off overcurrent to this driver IC (hereinafter, may be referred to as "a fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown)"). The +12V supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown) is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse.

The fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the +12V driver circuit (not shown) in the +12V power line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, and can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (cut-off current) of the drive motor on the game board side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side flows, the element part of the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) melts, cutting off the +12V power line to the subsequent line that is supplied via the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown).

In this embodiment, the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, fuses provided in the +24V driver circuit, and fuses provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses that melt when a current exceeds a predetermined allowable current limit (each a predetermined cut-off current) flows, and unlike resettable fuses, once melted, they are electronic components that cannot supply a power line to the subsequent boards even if the current decreases. Note that the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, fuses provided in the +24V driver circuit, and fuses provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 may be lead type fuses instead of SMD type chip fuses. In addition, resettable fuses such as SMD or lead type thermistors may be used as the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, fuses provided in the +24V driver circuit, and fuses provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510. In this way, when resettable fuses are used, if a current that exceeds a predetermined allowable current limit flows, the power line cannot be supplied to the subsequent boards, but if the current decreases, the power line can be supplied to the subsequent boards again.

The +12V supplied to each decorative board of the game board 5 is supplied to an LED constant current drive circuit that controls various light emission such as turning on, off, blinking, and gradation lighting of multiple LEDs such as full color LEDs and single color LEDs provided on the game board 5 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "various LEDs of the game board 5") via a +12V fuse (not shown). The LED constant current drive circuit is mainly composed of a sink type constant current drive circuit that can pass a constant current to the various LEDs of the game board 5, and a maximum current setting circuit that can set the maximum current to be passed to the various LEDs of the game board 5. If an input buffer circuit is not provided in the LED constant current drive circuit, an input buffer circuit may be provided in front of the LED constant current drive circuit.

The capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) is preset in consideration of the current used by each decorative board on the game board 5 in the +12V power line of each decorative board on the game board 5, and it can pass current up to the upper limit of the decorative board's allowable current (shutoff current) on the game board side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the decorative board's allowable current on the game board side flows through the +12V fuse (not shown), the element part of the +12V fuse (not shown) melts, cutting off the +12V power line to the following that is supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown).

The +12V fuse (not shown) is a fuse that supplies the +12 power line, and although it passes a smaller current than the original +12V fuse in the peripheral control board 1510, the current is large and it may generate heat. Therefore, to prevent the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board from being damaged by the heat generated, it is preferable to place it away from the various LEDs and the LED constant current drive circuit, and preferably near the connector to which +12V is supplied (especially near the connector of the terminal to which the power line to which +12V is supplied is connected).

In this embodiment, the +12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the game board 5 is a surface mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuse that melts when a current that exceeds a predetermined allowable current limit (each predetermined cut-off current) flows. Unlike a resettable fuse, once melted, it is an electronic component that cannot supply a power line to the following even if the current drops. Note that the +12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the game board 5 may be a lead type fuse instead of an SMD type chip fuse. Also, a resettable fuse such as an SMD type or lead type thermistor may be used as the +12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the game board 5. In this way, when a resettable fuse is used, when a current that exceeds a predetermined allowable current limit flows, the power line cannot be supplied to the following, but when the current drops, the power line can be supplied to the following again.

The three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied to the door frame wiring board 105 are supplied to the door frame side drive board (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "each drive board of the door frame 3") and the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "each decorative board of the door frame 3"), which each require their own power supplies, and fuses (not shown) corresponding to the power supplies are provided on each board.

In addition to fuses (e.g., +5V fuses, +24V fuses, +12V fuses) corresponding to the power source, each drive board of the door frame 3 is also provided with fuses (e.g., fuses for +24V system driver circuits that drive and control +24V system electric drive sources (e.g., drive solenoids), fuses (e.g., fuses for +12V system driver circuits that drive and control +12V system electric drive sources (e.g., drive motors), etc. The fuses (e.g., fuses for +24V system driver circuits that drive and control +12V system electric drive sources (e.g., drive motors)) corresponding to the power source are preset in capacity in consideration of the current used by each drive board of the door frame 3 in the power supply lines corresponding to the power supply of each drive board of the door frame 3, and can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of each power line drive board on the door frame side (e.g., upper limit of the allowable current (breaking current) of the door frame side +5V power line drive board, upper limit of the allowable current (breaking current) of the door frame side +24V power line drive board, and upper limit of the allowable current (breaking current) of the door frame side +12V power line drive board). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) flows that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of each power line driving board on the door frame side (for example, the upper limit of the allowable current of the +5V power line driving board on the door frame side, the upper limit of the allowable current of the +24V power line driving board on the door frame side, and the upper limit of the allowable current of the +12V power line driving board on the door frame side), the element part of the fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power source melts down, cutting off the power line to the subsequent power supply that is supplied via the fuse (not shown) corresponding to the blown power source.

The fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 and the +24V driver circuit in the +24V power line of each drive board of the door frame 3, and can pass current up to the door frame side drive solenoid allowable current upper limit (shutoff current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the door frame side drive solenoid allowable current upper limit flows, the fuse element part provided in the +24V driver circuit melts, cutting off the subsequent +24V power line supplied via the fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit. The fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 and the +12V driver circuit in the +12V power line of each drive board of the door frame 3, and can pass current up to the door frame side drive motor allowable current upper limit (cut-off current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the door frame side drive motor allowable current upper limit flows, the element part of the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit melts, cutting off the +12V power line to the subsequent supply via the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit.

The fuses (not shown) of each decorative board of the door frame 3 have a capacity that is preset taking into account the current used by each decorative board of the door frame 3 in the +12V power line of each decorative board of the door frame 3, and can pass current up to the upper limit of the decorative board's allowable current (shutoff current) on the door frame side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the decorative board's allowable current flows through the fuses (not shown) of each decorative board of the door frame 3, the element portion of the fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the door frame 3 melts, cutting off the +12V power line to the subsequent line that is supplied via the fuses (not shown) of each decorative board of the door frame 3.

For example, if one, multiple, or all of the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +12V, the voltage is supplied to a +12V driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of the drive motor, which is the electric drive source provided in the door frame 3, via a +12V fuse (not shown). The +12V driver circuit is mainly composed of a driver IC (not shown) that drives the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3, and a fuse (not shown) that cuts off overcurrent to the driver IC. The +12V supplied via the +12V fuse is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse. The capacity of the fuse of the +12V driver circuit is preset in consideration of the current used by the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 and the +12V driver circuit in the +12V power line of the drive board, and the fuse can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (cutoff current) of the door frame side drive motor. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame drive motor flows through the fuse of the +12V driver circuit, the element part of the fuse of the +12V driver circuit melts, cutting off the +12V power line to the subsequent lines that are supplied via the fuse of the +12V driver circuit.

A +5V fuse (not shown) and an input buffer circuit (not shown) are provided for the drive boards on which the +12V driver circuit is provided (implemented or mounted), and a control signal (this control signal may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 is input, and noise is removed from the input control signal and output to the +12V driver circuit. Specifically, the input buffer circuit is configured as a circuit in which one end of a resistor to which +5V supplied via the +5V fuse is applied and one end of a resistor grounded to ground (GND) are electrically connected to the multiple wiring (harness) electrically connecting the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 and the drive board of the door frame 3, and the noise resistance can be improved by removing noise that has entered the multiple wiring (harness). The same effect (i.e., improved noise resistance) can be achieved by supplying +12V through a +12V fuse instead of the +5V supplied to this resistor.

In addition, for example, when one, multiple, or all of the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +24V, the power is supplied to a +24V driver circuit (not shown) that controls the driving of the electric drive source (e.g., drive solenoid) provided in the door frame 3 via a +24V fuse (not shown). The +24V driver circuit is mainly composed of a driver IC (not shown) that drives the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid, drive motor) of the door frame 3, and a fuse (not shown) that cuts off overcurrent to the driver IC. The +24V supplied via the +24V fuse is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse. The capacity of the fuse of the +24V driver circuit is preset in consideration of the current used by the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid, drive motor) of the door frame 3 and the +24V driver circuit in the +24V power line of the drive board, and the fuse can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (cutoff current) of the drive solenoid on the door frame side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame drive solenoid flows, the element of the fuse in the +24V driver circuit melts, cutting off the +24V power line to the downstream that is supplied via the fuse in the +24V driver circuit.

A +5V fuse (not shown) and an input buffer circuit (not shown) are provided for the drive boards on which the +24V driver circuit is provided (implemented or mounted), and a control signal (this control signal may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 is input, and noise is removed from the input control signal and output to the +24V driver circuit. Specifically, the input buffer circuit is configured as a circuit in which one end of a resistor to which +5V supplied via the +5V fuse is applied and one end of a resistor grounded to ground (GND) are electrically connected to the multiple wiring (harness) electrically connecting the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 and each drive board of the door frame 3, and the noise resistance can be improved by removing noise that has entered the multiple wiring (harness). Instead of the +5V supplied to this resistor, +24V supplied through a +24V fuse, or +12V supplied through a +12V fuse when +12V is also supplied, can achieve the same effect (i.e. improved noise resistance).

Also, for example, when one, multiple, or all of the decorative boards of the door frame 3 require +12V, the power is supplied to an LED constant current drive circuit that controls various light emission such as turning on, off, blinking, and gradation lighting of multiple LEDs such as full-color LEDs and single-color LEDs (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "various LEDs of the door frame 3") provided on the door frame 3 via a +12V fuse (not shown). The LED constant current drive circuit is mainly composed of a sink type constant current drive circuit that can pass a constant current to the various LEDs of the door frame 3, and a maximum current setting circuit that can set the maximum current to be passed through the various LEDs of the door frame 3. The capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) is preset in consideration of the current used by each decorative board of the door frame 3 in the +12V power line of the decorative board, and can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (cut-off current) of the decorative board on the door frame side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame side decorative board flows, the element part of the +12V fuse (not shown) melts, cutting off the +12V power line to the subsequent supply that is supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown).

In addition, if one of the decorative boards of the door frame 3 is not provided with an LED constant current drive circuit and the light emission of the multiple LEDs mounted on the one decorative board itself is controlled by an LED constant current drive circuit provided on another decorative board of the door frame 3, a +12V fuse (not shown) may or may not be provided on the one decorative board. Also, if the LED constant current drive circuit does not have an input buffer circuit provided (mounted or mounted) on the drive board of the door frame 3, an input buffer circuit may be provided in front of the LED constant current drive circuit.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned fuses provided on the door frame 3 side are surface mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses that melt when a current that exceeds a predetermined allowable current limit (each predetermined cut-off current) flows. Unlike resettable fuses, once melted, they are electronic components that cannot supply a power line to the following even if the current drops. Note that the above-mentioned fuses provided on the door frame 3 side may be lead type fuses instead of SMD type chip fuses. Also, resettable fuses such as SMD type or lead type thermistors may be used as the above-mentioned fuses provided on the door frame 3 side. In this way, when resettable fuses are used, when a current that exceeds a predetermined allowable current limit flows, a power line cannot be supplied to the following, but when the current drops, the power line can be supplied to the following again.

[8-3-1. Voltage supplied to the dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 178, the dispensing control board 633 includes a dispensing control MPU 633aa, a dispensing control filter circuit 633h, etc. This dispensing control filter circuit 633h is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 630 and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the dispensing control MPU 633aa and the dispensing control input circuit 633ab of the dispensing control unit 633a. The +12V from the power supply board 630 is supplied to, for example, the dispensing control input circuit 633ab of the dispensing control unit 633a, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 558z of the external terminal board 558 via the dispensing control board 633. The external communication circuit 558z of this external terminal board 558 is a circuit that outputs signals conveying the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. The hall computer monitors the player's play by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signals output from the external communication circuit 558z. Note that +24 from the power supply board 630 is not used at all in the payout control board 633, but is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

[8-3-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in Fig. 178, the main control board 1310 includes, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, a +5V generating circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, etc. The +5V generating circuit 1310g receives +12V from the power supply board 630 via the output control board 633, and generates +5V from this +12V, which is the control power source for the main control MPU 1310a. In this embodiment, the circuit is configured so that the +5V created by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 and the main control board side created +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected, so the +5V created by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 are not electrically connected to the various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the main control board side created +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected to the various electronic components of other boards, etc. other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V (+5V generated on the main control board) generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a and the main control input circuit 1310b. The +12V from the dispensing control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and the +24V from the dispensing control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 630 via the dispensing control board 633, and monitors signs of a power failure or momentary interruption of these +12V and +24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of a power failure or momentary interruption of +12V and +24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. The power failure warning signal is input to the dispensing control MPU 633aa via the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control input circuit 633ab of the dispensing control board 633. The power failure warning signal is also input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to the two power lines, the +12V power line and the +24V power line, respectively, and is therefore able to more accurately detect signs of a power failure or momentary interruption, compared to monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line.

Thus, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, of the three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, respectively created by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa, +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb, and +24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630, the two types of power supplies, +12V and +24V, are supplied to various boards such as the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, as described above. In other words, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, the +12V power supply is at the same potential on the various boards, and the +24V power supply is at the same potential on the various boards. In addition, the +5V generated by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 and the +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected, but are at the same potential.

In addition, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, as described above, except for the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided (mounted or equipped) with a +12V fuse (not shown) and a +24V fuse (not shown), and the subsequent boards to the peripheral control board 1510 are provided (mounted or equipped) with a +12V fuse (not shown) and a +24V fuse (not shown).

Furthermore, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, as described above, the +12V power supply and the +24V power supply are both monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

In other words, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, the +12V power supply monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, the +12V fuse (not shown) provided (implemented, mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510, and the +12V fuse (not shown) provided (implemented, mounted) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 are at the same potential, and the +24V power supply monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, the +24V fuse (not shown) provided (implemented, mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510, and the +24V fuse (not shown) provided (implemented, mounted) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 are at the same potential.

Furthermore, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, if one, multiple, or all of the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +12V, as described above, it is supplied to a +12V driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of the drive motor, which is the electrical drive source provided in the door frame 3, via a +12V fuse (not shown), and if one, multiple, or all of the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +24V, as described above, it is supplied to a +24V driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of the electrical drive source (e.g., drive solenoid, drive motor) provided in the door frame 3, via a +24V fuse (not shown). In this case, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, the power supply is +12V, which is monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, a +12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5, a +12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, mounted) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5, and a +12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, mounted) on the drive board of the door frame 3. are at the same potential, and the +24V power supply monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, the +24V fuse (not shown) provided (implemented, mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5, the +24V fuse (not shown) provided (implemented, mounted) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5, and the +24V fuse (not shown) provided (implemented, mounted) on the drive board of the door frame 3 are at the same potential.

[9. Circuit of main control board, circuit of dispensing control board]
Next, the circuits of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 will be briefly described with reference to Figs. 179 to 182. Fig. 179 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, Fig. 180 is a circuit diagram showing the main control input circuit with an error detection function, Fig. 181 is a circuit diagram showing the power outage monitoring circuit, and Fig. 182 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the dispensing control board. First, the circuit of the main control board 1310 will be described, and then the circuit of the dispensing control board 633 will be described. Here, an example will be described in which the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the above-mentioned setting change board 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310, and only the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320. In addition, the wiring to the power supply and input signal board in the circuits of various boards will also be appropriately described.

[9-1. Main control board circuit]
Of the power sources in the circuit of the main control board 1310, the control power source of the main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor, is supplied with +12V from the +12V power source generating circuit 630fb of the power source generating circuit 630f in the power source board 630 via the output control board 633, and +5V is generated from this supplied +12V in the +5V generating circuit 1310g as a local power source that serves as the control power source for the main control board 1310. This local power source +5V has the same potential as the +5V generated by the +5V power source generating circuit 630fa of the power source generating circuit 630f in the power source board 630.

As shown in FIG. 179, +5V is first input to the main control filter circuit 1310h as a local power supply that serves as the control power supply for the main control board 1310 in the +5V generating circuit 1310g. This main control filter circuit 1310h is mainly composed of the main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit that is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 has +5V from the +5V generating circuit 1310g applied to its terminal 1, its terminal 2 electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and +5V with noise components removed is output from its terminal 3. The +5V applied to terminal 1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), so that ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) are first removed and the voltage is smoothed.

The +5V output from terminal 3 is electrically connected to one end of capacitor MC1 and electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), which are electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), to further remove ripple and smooth the voltage. This smoothed +5V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Note that if a momentary power outage occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the momentary power outage occurs.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC3, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal of a diode MD0. The +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by the capacitor MC3 to further remove ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0. In addition, the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor MC4, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and is also electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via resistor MR0. As a result, the main VBB from the backup power circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is supplied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, via resistor MR0, while the diode MD0 prevents the main VBB from the backup power circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 from being supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, via resistor MR0.

Of the input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310, for example, the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3001, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2401, the detection signal from the setting key switch 13100a, etc. are input to the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function or the main control input circuit 1310b2 with an error detection function.

Specifically, for example, the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via a main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "main control input circuit 1310b"), and the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b and the logic inversion circuit 1310iv. In contrast, the detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 3001, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 2401, etc. are input to the input terminals PA1 to PA4 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function.

The power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is output to the payout control board 633 and the performance display device 1600 via the main control output circuit 1310c. The input ports PA and PB are composed of 8 bits. In addition, detection signals from other sensors are input to the specified input terminals of the input ports PA and PB via the main control input circuit 1310b or the main control input circuit with error detection function 1310b2, and the input terminals that become vacant terminals are electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground) as a vacant terminal processing.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs various signals from the output terminal of the specified output port via the main control output circuit 1310c. For example, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a power outage clear signal from the output terminal of the specified output port via the main control output circuit 1310c to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, and outputs a drive signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d via the main control output circuit 1310c.

Note that detection signals from other sensors may be input to specific input terminals of port PC in addition to port PB via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the input terminals that are free terminals in port PC are electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground) as a free terminal process. Port PC is configured with 8 bits, just like input ports PA and PB.

[9-1-1. Main control input circuit]
Next, the main control input circuit 1310b will be described. Since the main control input circuit 1310b is the same circuit, here, the main control input circuit 1310b to which the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is input, and the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input will be described.

[9-1-1a. Main RWM signal from RWM switch]
The main control input circuit 1310b, to which the main RWM signal is input from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR2 electrically connected to the +12V power line (the other end of the resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power line (i.e., the +12V power line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f, as shown in FIG. 179, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor MTR0 via a resistor MR3. In addition to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR4, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR5 electrically connected to a +5V power supply line (a +5V power supply line created by a +5V power supply circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, which is different from the power supply line (i.e., +5V power supply line) created and supplied by a +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f) at one end, and is electrically connected to an input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as an RWM signal via the main control input circuit 1310b.

The other end of resistor MR2 may be electrically connected to one end of a capacitor electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 in order to adjust the waveform to match that of the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633.

In addition, when the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor electrically connected inside the main control MPU 1310a by a +5V power line created on the main control board (a +5V power line created by the +5V power creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power creation circuit 630fa of the power creation circuit 630f), the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 may be electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a without mounting the resistor MR5 on the main control board 1310.

[9-1-1b. Detection signal from setting key switch]
The setting key switch 1311a has a COM1 terminal, a COM2 terminal, a terminal A, and a terminal B, the B terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the A terminal are electrically connected. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the A terminal are electrically connected in an internal circuit, and the internal circuits of the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the A terminal are in a conductive state, whereas when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal are electrically connected in an internal circuit, and the internal circuits of the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal are in a conductive state, and are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a electrically connects the COM1 and COM2 terminals to the A terminal in the internal circuit, whereas when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the COM1 and COM2 terminals are electrically connected to the B terminal in the internal circuit and are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 179, the main control input circuit 1310b, to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR10 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V power supply circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, which is different from the power supply line (i.e., the +5V power supply line) created and supplied by the +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f). In addition, one end of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC10 electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor MTR10 via a resistor MR11. The base terminal of the transistor MTR10 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR12, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, in addition to the resistor MR11. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR10 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR10 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR13 electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board side (a +5V power line created by the +5V power creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line created and supplied by the +5V power creation circuit 630fa of the power creation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power line)), and is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the logic inversion circuit 1310iv.

The logic inversion circuit 1310iv is a circuit that inverts the logic of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a input via the main control input circuit 1310b. The logic inversion circuit 1310iv is composed of resistors MR14, MR15, MR16, and a transistor MTR11. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR10 that constitutes the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR13, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board side (a +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power creation circuit 630fa of the power creation circuit 630f). The other end of the resistor MR13 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR11 via the resistor MR14. The base terminal of the transistor MTR11 is electrically connected to the resistor MR14 and the other end of a resistor MR15, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR11 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR11 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR16, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board side (a +5V power line created by a +5V creating circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power creating circuit 630fa of the power creating circuit 630f), and is also electrically connected to an input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b and the logic inversion circuit 1310iv.

In addition, when the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor inside the main control MPU 1310a, which is electrically connected to a +5V power line created on the main control board side (a +5V power line created by the +5V power creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power creation circuit 630fa of the power creation circuit 630f), the collector terminal of transistor MTR11 may be electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a without implementing resistor MR16 on the main control board 1310. In addition, even if the input terminals PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA and the other input terminals PA1 to PA4, PA6 to PA7 are electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +5V power line (a +5V power line created by the +5V power creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power creation circuit 630fa of the power creation circuit 630f) inside the main control MPU 1310a, the collector terminal of the transistor may be electrically connected to the input terminals PA1 to PA4, PA6 to PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a without being electrically connected to the other end of the resistor electrically connected to the +5V power line created by the main control board, that is, without mounting this resistor on the main control board 1310.

When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the COM1 and COM2 terminals and the A terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit, so that the voltage of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is pulled up to +5V on the main control board side by resistor MR10 in the main control input circuit 1310b, causing the logic to become HI, turning ON transistor MTR10 in the main control input circuit 1310b. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR10 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) side of the main control board 1310, and the transistor MTR11 of the logic inversion circuit 1310iv is turned OFF, and the voltage of the collector terminal of this transistor MTR11 is pulled up to the +5V side of the main control board by the resistor MR16 of the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, and the setting key signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. In other words, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the logic of the setting key signal becomes HI (logic that conveys a setting disabled state) and is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

In contrast, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal and the B terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit and are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, so that the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a has a logic LOW and the transistor MTR10 of the main control input circuit 1310b is turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR10 is pulled up to +5V on the main control board by the resistor MR13 of the main control input circuit 1310b, turning on the transistor MTR11 of the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, and the voltage of the collector terminal of this transistor MTR11 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the setting key signal whose logic is now LOW is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. In other words, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the logic of the setting key signal becomes LOW (logic that conveys a setting possible state) and is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the push operation part of the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is not operated, the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is not electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633 as described below, and therefore the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is pulled up to the power supply (+5V) created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f by the resistor PR50 of the dispensing control input circuit 633ab provided on the dispensing control board 633 described below, and the transistor PTR60 of the dispensing control output circuit 633ac provided on the dispensing control board 633 described below is turned ON, and the voltage of the collector terminal of this transistor PTR60 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) side of the dispensing control board 633, and the logic of the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d becomes LOW and is input to the main control board 1310. When the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d whose logic is LOW is input to the main control input circuit 1310b, the transistor MTR0 of the main control input circuit 1310b turns OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5V side on the main control board side by the resistor MR5 of the main control input circuit 1310b, and the RWM signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. In other words, when the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is not operated, the logic of the RWM signal becomes HI (logic that conveys a non-pressing operation state) and is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

On the other hand, when the push operation part of the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is operated, the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633 as described below, so that the transistor PTR60 of the dispensing control output circuit 633ac provided on the dispensing control board 633 is turned OFF, and the voltage of the collector terminal of this transistor PTR60 is pulled up to the +5V side on the main control board side by resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b provided on the main control board 1310, and the logic of the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d becomes HI. As a result, the transistor MTR0 of the main control input circuit 1310b turns ON, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the RWM signal whose logic is now LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. In other words, when the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is being operated, the logic of the RWM signal becomes LOW (logic that conveys the pressing operation state) and is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the logic of the setting key signal conveying this is made HI by the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, and when the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is operated, the logic of the RAW signal conveying this is made HI. Also, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the logic of the setting key signal conveying this is made LOW by the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, and when the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not operated, the logic of the RAW signal conveying this is made LOW. In other words, the logic that conveys that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON and the logic that conveys that the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is being operated are the same logic (HI), and the logic that conveys that the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF (not turned ON) and the logic that conveys that the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not being operated are the same logic (LOW).

[9-1-2. Main control input circuit with error detection function]
Next, the main control input circuit 1310b2 with the error detection function will be described. Since the main control input circuit 1310b2 with the error detection function is the same circuit, the main control input circuit 1310b with the error detection function to which the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input will be described here.

The main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function, to which the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input, is mainly composed of a processing circuit 1310b2a, as shown in FIG. 180. The processing circuit 1310b2a receives the +5V power line (a +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power creation circuit 630fa of the power creation circuit 630f) created by the main control board side and supplied via the VCC terminal, and supplies the various internal circuits with the ground (GND) of the various internal circuits electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 via the GND terminal.

The processing circuit 1310b2a also includes a power supply terminal circuit that monitors the power supply of the +12V power supply line (the power supply line (i.e., the +12V power supply line) generated and supplied by the +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb of the power supply generating circuit 630f) supplied via the VS terminal, a disconnection monitoring circuit that monitors the presence or absence of a disconnection based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 input via the input terminal, a short circuit monitoring circuit that monitors the presence or absence of a short circuit based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 input via the input terminal, a comparison circuit that compares the presence or absence of a game ball passing based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 input via the input terminal with a predetermined threshold value, an abnormality processing circuit that determines the presence or absence of an abnormality based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit such as the power supply monitoring circuit, the disconnection monitoring circuit, and the short circuit monitoring circuit, and performs abnormality processing, an error output circuit that notifies the user of an abnormality based on the inspection results from each monitoring circuit, and an output circuit that outputs the comparison result from the comparison circuit.

When the abnormality processing circuit determines that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit (when an error is detected), it sets and controls the logic for outputting that information (that an abnormality has occurred) from the error output circuit to the outside via the ER terminal, and also sets and controls the logic for outputting the halt of the comparison results by the comparison circuit, which are output from the output circuit, to the outside via the output terminal.

The VS terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the +12V power line (the power line (i.e., the +12V power line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f), and is also electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR50 and to the other end of a capacitor MC50, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

The input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50 in addition to being electrically connected to the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801. In order to adjust the waveform of the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a may be further electrically connected to one end of a capacitor whose other end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

The VCC terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC51, the other end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

The output terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR51, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board (a +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power creation circuit 630fa of the power creation circuit 630f), and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input as a gate signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b2a with error detection function.

The ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR52 electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board (a +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power creation circuit 630fa of the power creation circuit 630f), and is electrically connected to the input terminal PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, the ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the ER terminal of another main control input circuit 1310b2 with an error detection function. In other words, the signals from the ER terminals of multiple main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection functions are OR-connected. The signal from the ER terminal of the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function is input to the input terminal PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a as a sensor error signal.

Here, the state of the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred (when an error is detected) based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit such as the power supply monitoring circuit, the disconnection monitoring circuit, and the short circuit monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a will be described. When the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring results from the power supply monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (when an error is detected), the logic of the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is indefinite as a power supply abnormality. When the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring results from the disconnection monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (when an error is detected), the logic of the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is HI as a disconnection. When the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring results from the short circuit monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (when an error is detected), the logic of the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes LOW, indicating that a short circuit has occurred.

In addition, in the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a, the state of the output terminal and the ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a when it is determined that an abnormality exists (when an error is detected) based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a, such as the power supply monitoring circuit, the open circuit monitoring circuit, and the short circuit monitoring circuit. When the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring results from the power supply monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (when an error is detected), the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a sets and controls the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the output terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes LOW in order to stop the comparison result by the comparison circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a being output from the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a as a power supply abnormality, and sets and controls the error output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes HI in order to notify that an abnormality has occurred.

When the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring results from the disconnection monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (when an error is detected), the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a sets and controls the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the output terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes LOW in order to stop the comparison result by the comparison circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a being output from the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a as a disconnection, and also sets and controls the error output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes HI in order to notify that an abnormality has occurred.

When the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring results from the short circuit monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (when an error is detected), the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a sets and controls the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the output terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes LOW in order to stop the comparison result by the comparison circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a being output from the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a as a short circuit, and also sets and controls the error output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes HI in order to notify that an abnormality has occurred.

[9-1-3. Power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 178, the main control board 1310 receives two types of power: +12 V from a +12 V power supply generating circuit 630fb of the power supply generating circuit 630f in the power supply board 630, and +24 V from a +24 V power supply generating circuit 630fc of the power supply generating circuit 630f in the power supply board 630. The voltage is supplied via the dispensing control board 633, and +12V and +24V are input to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e.

The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of a power outage or momentary power outage of +12V and +24V, and when it detects signs of a power outage or momentary power outage, it outputs a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning to the main control MPU 1310a, as well as to the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the performance display device 1600, etc. When a power outage warning signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, for example, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below and stops the progress of the game, the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 performs the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below and stops the payout progress (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls), the peripheral control board 1510 performs backup processing of the performance information, and the performance display device 1600 turns off the inverter (not shown) that creates the power supply for the backlight to cut power consumption to ensure that the main control side power off processing by the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control unit power off processing by the payout control 633aa can be completed reliably, and the performance progress is stopped.

Here, we will first explain the configuration of the power outage monitoring circuit, then explain the monitoring of +24V power outages or momentary power outages, the monitoring of +12V power outages or momentary power outages, and the output of the power outage warning signal.

[9-1-3a. Configuration of power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 181, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is mainly composed of a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR20, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board (a +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f), and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (set to 2.495V in this embodiment) that becomes the comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC20, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (substrate ground), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is smoothed by removing ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is electrically connected to ground (GND) (substrate ground).

The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitored voltage V1 (hereinafter referred to as the "+24V monitored voltage V1") of the +24V power line (the power line (i.e., the +24V power line) created and supplied by the +24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f) with a reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC21B) is used to compare the monitored voltage V1 of the +12V power line ( It is used to compare the monitored voltage V2 (hereinafter, referred to as "+12V monitored voltage V2") of the power line (i.e., the +12V power line) generated and supplied by the +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb of the power supply generating circuit 630f with the reference voltage Vref. A +24V monitored voltage V1 is applied to terminal 3, which is the positive terminal of MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to terminal 2, which is the negative terminal of MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is applied to terminal 5, which is the positive terminal of IC21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to terminal 6, which is the negative terminal of MIC21B. The comparison results are input to D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to one end of capacitor MC21, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The +5V generated by the main control board side applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of comparator MIC21, is smoothed by removing ripples by capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground).

[9-1-3b. Monitoring of +24V power outage or momentary power outage]
As described above, the monitoring of a +24V power outage or momentary power outage is performed by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. The 3rd terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR21 electrically connected to the +24V power line (the power line (i.e., the +24V power line) generated and supplied by the +24V power supply generating circuit 630fc of the power supply generating circuit 630f, as shown in FIG. 181, and to the other end of a resistor MR22 electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground), and to the other end of a capacitor MC23 electrically connected to the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and to the ground (GND) (board ground). The terminals are electrically connected to the terminal 3. The +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the terminal 3, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC23. The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are set so that the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref when the +24V power starts to drop from +24V and reaches a preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment) in the event of a power failure or momentary interruption.

The output terminal of comparator MIC21A, terminal 1, is an open collector output, with one end electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line on the main control board, and one end electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC24, which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 acts as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is pulled up to +5V on the main control board side by pull-up resistor MR23, and the signal with a logic HI is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is pulled down to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side, and the signal with a logic LOW is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-1-3c. Monitoring of +12V power outage or momentary power outage]
As described above, the monitoring of a +12V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. The 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR24 electrically connected to the +12V power line (the power line (i.e., the +12V power line) generated and supplied by the +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb of the power supply generating circuit 630f, as shown in FIG. 181, and to the other end of a resistor MR25 electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground), and to the other end of a capacitor MC25 electrically connected to the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and to the ground (GND) (board ground). The terminals are electrically connected to the terminal 11. The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC25. The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are set so that when the +12V power is interrupted or momentarily interrupted, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref when the voltage starts to drop from +12V to a preset power interruption detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment).

Terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A described above. One end is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC24, which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. As described above, capacitor MC24 plays the role of a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is pulled up to +5V on the main control board by pull-up resistor MR23, and the signal with a logic HI is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is pulled down to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side, and the signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-1-3d. Power outage warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, in response to a change in edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and outputs this stored value (logic) from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and also outputs the inverted value of the stored value (logic) from the negative logic 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. When a signal with a logic LOW is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latched state and outputs a signal with the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, a signal with the logic of the signal output from 1Q inverted, that is, a signal with the same logic as the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal). On the other hand, when a signal with a logic HI is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latched state. In addition, when a signal with a logic HI is input to the clear terminal CLR terminal to set the latched state, D-type flip-flop MIC22 maintains a state in which a signal with a logic LOW is input to the preset terminal PR terminal, so that the D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a signal with a logic HI from the output terminal 1Q terminal (at this time, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 maintains a state in which a signal with the logic of the inverted signal output from 1Q is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal).

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured such that the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, and the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground), respectively, so that there is no change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal from the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors for a power outage or momentary interruption of +24V, and a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors for a power outage or momentary interruption of +12V, at the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, and outputs a signal from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC22, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The +5V generated by the main control board and applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has ripples removed and is smoothed by the capacitor MC22. The GND terminal, which is a ground terminal, is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, is not electrically connected to the outside.

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit 1310c at the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal. This power outage clear signal is output during the main control side power-on process performed by the main control MPU 1310a, which will be described later, and is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310c with its logic set to LOW. When a power outage clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latched state, and at this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, is inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit 1310c and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power outage clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is set to a latched state, and the logic becomes LOW at the PR terminal to latch the input state.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal. In addition, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310c, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is output from the main control output circuit 1310c to the payout control board 633 as a payout power outage warning signal, and is output to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

As shown in Fig. 181, the main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR26, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line on the main control board, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via a resistor MR27. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27 and to the other end of a resistor MR28, which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to ground (GND) (substrate ground), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR29, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control substrate, and is also electrically connected to input terminal PB0 of input port PB of main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, when the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor electrically connected to a +5V power line created on the main control board (a +5V power line created by the +5V creating circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power creating circuit 630fa of the power creating circuit 630f), the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 may be electrically connected to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a without mounting the resistor MR29 on the main control board 1310.

In addition, even if the other input terminals PB1 to PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a are electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor electrically connected to a +5V power line created on the main control board (a +5V power line created by the +5V creating circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power creating circuit 630fa of the power creating circuit 630f), the collector terminal of the transistor may be electrically connected to the input terminals PB1 to PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a without being electrically connected to the other end of the resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board, that is, without mounting this resistor on the main control board 1310.

In addition to the input ports PA and PB of the main control MPU 1310a, when the input terminals PC0 to PC7 of the input port PC of the main control MPU 1310a are electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor electrically connected to a +5V power line created on the main control board (a +5V power line created by the +5V creating circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power creating circuit 630fa of the power creating circuit 630f), the collector terminal of the transistor may be electrically connected to the input terminals PC0 to PC7 of the input port PC of the main control MPU 1310a without being electrically connected to the other end of the resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board, that is, without mounting this resistor on the main control board 1310.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR27 and MR28 and transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side, the transistor MTR20 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side on the main control substrate side, the transistor MTR20 is turned ON, and the switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the conditions that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, a signal with a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, turning the transistor MTR20 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side on the main control board side by the resistor MR29, and a power failure warning signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a.

On the other hand, when either the condition that the voltage of +24V is less than the power failure detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of +12V is less than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, a signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, turning the transistor MTR20 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side, and a power failure warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a.

The main control output circuit 1310c, which outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 633 as a dispensing power outage warning signal, is configured as an open collector output type circuit as shown in FIG. 181, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 via resistor MR30. The base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to resistor MR30 and is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR31, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line on the main control board, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage via resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and is electrically connected to the dispensing control board 633 via wiring (harness). In addition, when the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the dispensing control board 633 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to a power line (i.e., a +12V power line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the dispensing control input circuit 633ab of the dispensing control board 633, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 633aa.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR30, MR31 and the front-stage transistor MTR21 is the front-stage switch circuit, and the circuit consisting of resistors MR33, MR34 and the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is the rear-stage switch circuit, which is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side, turning transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage and the preceding switch circuit also turns OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR22 in the succeeding stage, is pulled up to +5V on the main control substrate side by resistor MR32, turning transistor MTR22 in the succeeding stage and the succeeding switch circuit also turns ON. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V on the main control board, turning the transistor MTR21 ON and the switch circuit in the previous stage ON, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the next stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) side, turning the transistor MTR22 in the next stage OFF and the switch circuit in the next stage OFF.

When both the conditions that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, a signal with a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the +5V side on the main control board by resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, turning the succeeding transistor MTR22 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) side in the dispensing control board 633 via the wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the dispensing control board 633.

On the other hand, when either the condition that the voltage of +24V is less than the power failure detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of +12V is less than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, a signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND) (substrate ground) and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, turning the succeeding transistor MTR22 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the downstream transistor MTR22 is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor in the dispensing control input circuit 633ab of the dispensing control unit 633a in the dispensing control board 633 via wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 633.

The main control output circuit 1310c, which outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, is configured as an open collector output type circuit as shown in FIG. 181, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35 and the other end of the resistor MR36, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wire (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to a power line (i.e., a +12V power line) generated and supplied by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f in the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) in the peripheral control board 1510, and is also electrically connected to an input terminal of a specified input port of the peripheral control unit 1511.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR35 and MR36 and transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side, the transistor MTR23 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side on the main control substrate side, the transistor MTR23 is turned ON, and the switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the conditions that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, a signal with a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, turning the transistor MTR23 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and a peripheral power failure warning signal with a logic HI is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either the condition that the voltage of +24V is less than the power failure detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of +12V is less than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, a signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, turning the transistor MTR23 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and a peripheral power failure warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b, which transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal, and the main control output circuit 1310c, which outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, each have one transistor, and the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510 are While the logic is the same, the main control output circuit 1310c, which outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 633 as a dispensing power outage warning signal, has two transistors, one in the front stage and one in the back stage, and the logic of the dispensing power outage warning signal is the inverse of the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

In addition, the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side, and to the input terminal of input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a, while the collector terminal of transistor MTR22 in the rear stage of the main control output circuit 1310c is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to the other end of a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, in the dispensing control input circuit 633ab of the dispensing control unit 633a in the dispensing control board 633, and the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 of the main control output circuit 1310c is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, in the dispensing control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 1510. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are mounted on the main control board 1310, and therefore a power outage warning is issued by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage warning signal using the +5V created by the main control board, which is the control power source of the main control MPU 1310a. However, between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633, and between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards, a power outage warning is issued by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage warning signal using, for example, +12V, which is a DC power source higher than +5V, which is the control power source of the main control MPU 1310a, the dispensing control MPU 633aa, and the peripheral control unit 1511.

In this way, the power line created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 (i.e. the +12V power supply line) is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, as described above, as well as the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 633, the control power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510, the +12V driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board, the LED constant current drive circuit of each decorative board of the game board 5, the liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600, the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600, etc. In other words, the +12V power line is supplied to not only the main control board 1310, but also the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, the various decorative boards of the game board 5, the performance display device 1600, etc., and therefore even if the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, for example, an electrical problem due to some reason in the control power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 may cause an overcurrent to flow to the control power supply creation circuit (not shown), lowering the potential of the +12V power line, or an electrical problem due to some reason in the liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600, the liquid crystal panel, backlight, or drive circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600 may cause a The potential of the +12V power line will drop if an overcurrent flows to any of the liquid crystal panel, backlight, drive circuit, etc. (not shown); when the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is being driven by a +12V driver circuit (not shown) on a subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 (or when waiting for the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 to be driven), an overload or electrical trouble for some reason will cause an overcurrent to flow to the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or a +12V driver circuit (not shown), causing the potential of the +12V power line to drop; or an electrical trouble for some reason will cause an overcurrent to flow to the LED constant current drive circuit of the decorative board of the game board 5, causing the potential of the +12V power line to drop. In addition, if there is some electrical trouble with the wiring patterns formed on the boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the boards following the peripheral control board 1510, the performance display device 1600, and the decorative boards of the game board 5, or the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards, leakage current or a short circuit occurs, the potential of the +12V power line will drop due to overcurrent. If this happens, the power outage warning signal will be output by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 to the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control MPU 1310a will perform the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below and stop the progress of the game.

In addition, the power line (i.e., the +24V power line) created and supplied by the +24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f is supplied, as described above, to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d of the main control board 1310, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, as well as to the discharge control board 633 (the main control board 1310 is supplied with a +12V power line via the discharge control board 633), the peripheral control board 1510, and a +24V driver circuit (not shown) on the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, since the +24V power line is supplied to the main control board 1310, as well as the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, and subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, even if the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, when the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is being driven by the +24V system driver circuit not shown in the figure of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 (or when waiting for the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 to be driven), due to overload or electrical trouble for some reason, an overcurrent will flow to the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 or the +24V system driver circuit not shown, causing the potential of the +24V power line to drop. In addition, if there is some electrical trouble with the wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510 that supplies the +24V power line, the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, or the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards, a leakage current or a short circuit occurs, and the potential of the +24V power line also drops. If this happens, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 outputs a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power off process in the main control side power on process described below, and stops the progress of the game.

[9-1-4. Overcurrent protection for +12V power line and +24V power line]
[9-1-4a. Overcurrent protection for +12V power line]
Therefore, in this embodiment, as an overcurrent protection for the +12V power line, as a countermeasure against overcurrent, a +12V fuse (not shown) capable of passing current up to the +12V power line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit is provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a +12V fuse (not shown) capable of passing current up to the allowable current upper limit is provided in the performance display device 1600 as the main fuse of the performance display device 1600, a +12V fuse (not shown) capable of passing current up to the allowable current upper limit of the branch first system that branches off from the +12V fuse (not shown) into two systems is provided in the performance display device 1600, and a +12V fuse (not shown) capable of passing current up to the allowable current upper limit of the branch first system is provided in the performance display device 1600 as the fuse of the branch second system that branches off from the +12V fuse (not shown) into two systems. A +12V fuse (not shown) capable of passing current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the +12V power line performance drive board is provided on a subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, a fuse capable of passing current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the game board side drive motor is provided in a +12V driver circuit (not shown) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, and a +12V fuse (not shown) capable of passing current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the game board side decorative board is provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 on which an LED constant current drive circuit is implemented (note that a +12V fuse (not shown) capable of passing current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the game board side decorative board may be provided for all decorative boards of the game board 5 to which a +12V power line is supplied, regardless of whether or not an LED constant current drive circuit is present). In addition, the +12V supplied through a +12V fuse (not shown) as the fuse of the first branch system creates a liquid crystal panel power supply in a liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit (not shown), and this liquid crystal panel power supply is supplied to the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600.Therefore, the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600 are supplied with the liquid crystal panel power supply created from the +12V supplied through a +12V fuse (not shown) as the fuse of the first branch system, and +12V supplied through a +12V fuse (not shown) as the fuse of the second branch system.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the control power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 in the +12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510, causing an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current in the +12V power supply line peripheral control board to flow to the control power supply creation circuit (not shown), the +12V fuse (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 will melt. In this way, a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided on the peripheral control board 1510 so that the +12V fuse (not shown) will blow if an overcurrent exceeds the upper limit of the peripheral control board's allowable current for the +12V power line. This prevents a drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue playing the game without performing the main control side power failure processing in the main control side power-on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power failure processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600 in the +12V power line of the performance display device 1600, causing an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the first branch system to flow to the liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit (not shown), the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the first branch system of the performance display device 1600, will melt. In addition, in this embodiment, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the liquid crystal panel, backlight, or drive circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600, causing an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the first branch system to flow to the liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit (not shown) that creates the liquid crystal panel power supply from +12V supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) as the fuse of the second branch system, the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the first branch system of the performance display device 1600, will melt, and if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the liquid crystal panel, backlight, or drive circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600, causing an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the second branch system to flow to any of the liquid crystal panel, backlight, drive circuit, etc. (not shown) of the performance display device 1600, the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the second branch system of the performance display device 1600, will melt. In this embodiment, the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the master fuse of the performance display device 1600, is selected in advance to have a capacity larger than either of the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the first branch system, and the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the second branch system, and smaller than the combined capacity of both. Therefore, the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the master fuse, may blow if an overcurrent still flows through the system of the blown fuse and exceeds the master allowable current upper limit, even if an overcurrent flows through either of the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the first branch system, and the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the second branch system, in the +12V power line and either of the fuses blows. In addition, if the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the main fuse of the performance display device 1600, is set to be the same as the sum of the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the first branch system, and the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the second branch system, then the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the main fuse, will blow if an overcurrent flows in the +12V power line and either of the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the first branch system, or the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the second branch system, melts, and if an overcurrent still flows in the system of the blown fuse and exceeds the main fuse allowable current upper limit, the +12V fuse (not shown), will blow; or, if an overcurrent flows in the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the first branch system, and the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the second branch system, and both fuses melt. In this way, the performance display device 1600 is provided with a +12V fuse (not shown) which is the main fuse of the performance display device 1600, a +12V fuse (not shown) which is the fuse of the first branch system, and a +12V fuse (not shown) which is the fuse of the second branch system, so that the +12V fuse (not shown) which is the main fuse, the +12V fuse (not shown) which is the fuse of the first branch system, and the +12V fuse (not shown) which is the fuse of the second branch system will melt due to an overcurrent. By suppressing the drop in the potential of the +12V power line, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, if the +12V power line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 drives the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 by the +12V driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board (or is waiting for the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 to be driven), and an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the drive motor on the game board side flows to the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the +12V driver circuit (not shown) due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) will melt. The +12V supplied through a +12V fuse (not shown) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to each decorative board of the game board 5 in addition to the +12V driver circuit (not shown), so the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) is selected in advance based on the maximum allowable current of the game board side drive motor of the +12V driver circuit (not shown) and the maximum allowable current of each decorative board of the game board 5.

The +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 requires a considerable amount of current to operate, so between the effects produced by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the light-emitting effects of the various LEDs on each decorative board of the game board 5, the light-emitting effects of the various LEDs on each decorative board of the game board 5 are given priority over and continue to be produced by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5. For this reason, the capacity of the +12V fuses (not shown) of each decorative board of the game board 5 and the capacity of the fuses (not shown) of the +12V driver circuits (not shown) of the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 are preselected so that the fuses in the +12V driver circuits (not shown) of the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 blow before the +12V fuses (not shown) of each decorative board of the game board 5 blow. The capacity of the +12V fuses (not shown) of the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 is preselected so that the light emission effects of the various LEDs of each decorative board of the game board 5 can be continued with priority over the effects of the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5.

In the case where the illumination effects of the various LEDs of each decorative board of the game board 5 are given priority over the effects of the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, for example, the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is greater than the capacity selected for each decorative board of the game board 5 to use up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side, and is smaller than the sum of this selected capacity and the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown). If selected in advance, the +12V fuse (not shown) may blow if, when each decorative board of the game board 5 is using up to the game board decorative board allowable current limit, an overcurrent exceeding the game board side drive motor allowable current limit flows to the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the +12V driver circuit (not shown) and causes the fuse in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) to melt, but if an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the +12V power line performance drive board allowable current limit. Also, for example, if the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is selected in advance to be the same as the capacity selected for each decorative board of the game board 5 to use up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side, plus the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown), the +12V fuse (not shown) may blow when each decorative board of the game board 5 is used up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side, even if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side flows to the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the +12V driver circuit (not shown) of the game board and the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) blows. If an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the +12V power line performance drive board, the fuse may blow.

In addition, in contrast to the case where the performance by the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the light-emitting performance of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 are prioritized over the performance by the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and continued, if the performance by the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is prioritized over the light-emitting performance of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5, the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 will blow. Moreover, the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the game board 5 and the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 are selected in advance so that the +12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the game board 5 blows first, and the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is set in advance so that the performance by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 can be given priority over the light emission performance of the various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5.

In addition, if an overcurrent flows through the 12V power line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 due to some overload or electrical trouble on the 12V power line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, and both the performance by the +12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the light emission performance of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 are stopped, the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 will be preset to be equal to or less than the capacity of the smaller fuse between the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 and the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the game board 5.

In this way, a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, and a fuse is provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) so that the +12V fuse (not shown) and the fuse of the +12V driver circuit (not shown) will blow due to an overcurrent. This prevents a drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power off process in the main control side power on process described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off process in the payout control unit power on process described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, if an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the game board side flows through each LED of the game board 5 or the decorative board of the game board 5 due to a +12V fuse (not shown) of the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is implemented in the +12V power line of each decorative board of the game board 5, the +12V fuse (not shown) of the decorative board of the game board 5 will melt. In addition, if a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided that can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the game board side to all decorative boards of the game board 5 that are supplied with a +12V power line regardless of whether or not an LED constant current drive circuit is present, if an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the game board side flows through each LED of the game board 5 or all decorative boards of the game board 5, the +12V fuse (not shown) of all decorative boards of the game board 5 will melt. In this way, a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided on the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted among the decorative boards of the game board 5, so that the +12V fuse (not shown) will blow due to an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the game board side (Note that, in the case of providing a +12V fuse (not shown) that can pass a current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the game board side for all decorative boards of the game board 5 to which a +12V power line is supplied, regardless of the presence or absence of an LED constant current drive circuit, a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided on all decorative boards of the game board 5, so that the +12V fuse (not shown) will blow due to an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the game board side Since the fuse is designed to blow), a drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, if an electrical trouble occurs for some reason in the +12V power line of the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, the performance display device 1600, each decorative board of the game board 5, etc., causing a leakage current or a short circuit, and an overcurrent flows in the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, the performance display device 1600, each decorative board of the game board 5, etc., the + Since the 12V fuses are each designed to blow, a drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa.The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below. In addition, if a leakage current or a short circuit occurs due to some electrical trouble with the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, an overcurrent will flow in the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 and also in the peripheral control board 1510, which is the higher-level board of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, causing the +12V fuse (not shown) provided in the peripheral control board 1510 to melt.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame side drive motor flows to the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) or the +12V system driver circuit of the door frame 3 due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason in the +12V power line of each drive board of the door frame 3 when the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 is driven by the +12V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3 (or when the drive of the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 is waiting), the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit is melted. The capacity of the +12V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 is selected in advance based on the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame side drive motor of the +12V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. The +12V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 is designed to blow if an overcurrent continues to flow and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame side +12V power line drive board, even if an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame side drive motor flows to the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) or +12V driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3 and causes the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit to blow. In this way, a +12V fuse is provided on each drive board of the door frame 3, and a fuse is provided in the +12V driver circuit so that the +12V fuse and the fuse of the +12V driver circuit will blow due to an overcurrent. This prevents a drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power off process in the main control side power on process described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off process in the payout control unit power on process described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, if an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the door frame side flows through each LED of the door frame 3 or the decorative board of the door frame 3 in the +12V power line of each decorative board of the door frame 3 due to the +12V fuse of the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is implemented, the +12V fuse of the decorative board of the door frame 3 is melted. In addition, if a +12V fuse that can pass a current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the door frame side is provided for all decorative boards of the door frame 3 to which the +12V power line is supplied regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit, the +12V fuse of all decorative boards of the door frame 3 is melted when an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the door frame side flows through each LED of the door frame 3 or all decorative boards of the door frame 3. In this way, a +12V fuse is provided on the decorative board on the door frame 3 on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted, and the +12V fuse is blown by an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the door frame side (note that, regardless of the presence or absence of an LED constant current drive circuit, if a +12V fuse that can pass a current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the game board side is provided for all decorative boards on the door frame 3 to which a +12V power line is supplied, then a +12V fuse is provided on all decorative boards on the door frame 3, and the +12V fuse is blown by an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the door frame side. This prevents a drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue playing the game without performing the main control side power off process in the main control side power on process described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off process in the payout control unit power on process described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the +12V power lines of each drive board of the door frame 3, each decorative board of the door frame 3, etc., causing a leakage current or a short circuit in each drive board of the door frame 3, each decorative board of the door frame 3, etc., and an overcurrent flows in each drive board of the door frame 3, each decorative board of the door frame 3, etc., the +12V fuse provided on each board is blown, and thus the main control board 1310, the dispensing control board 63 By suppressing the drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to 3, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

[9-1-4b. Overcurrent protection for +24V power line]
In addition, in this embodiment, as an overcurrent protection for the +24V power line, as a countermeasure against overcurrent, a +24V fuse (not shown) capable of passing current up to the +24V power line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit is provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a +12V fuse (not shown) capable of passing current up to the allowable current upper limit is provided in the performance display device 1600 as the master fuse for the performance display device 1600, a +24V fuse (not shown) capable of passing current up to the allowable current upper limit of the +24V power line performance drive board is provided in the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, and a fuse capable of passing current up to the allowable current upper limit of the game board side drive solenoid is provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown) in the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the peripheral control board 1510 itself and/or any subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, causing an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current in the +24V power line of the peripheral control board to flow in the +12V power line of the peripheral control board 1510, the +24V fuse (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 will melt. In this way, a +24V fuse (not shown) is provided on the peripheral control board 1510 so that the +24V fuse (not shown) will blow if an overcurrent exceeds the upper limit of the peripheral control board's allowable current for the +24V power line. This prevents a drop in the potential of the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue playing the game without performing the main control side power failure process in the main control side power-on process described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power failure process in the payout control unit power-on process described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, if the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is driven by the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 in the +24V power line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 (or when the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is waiting to be driven) and an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the drive solenoid on the game board side flows to the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 or the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) will melt. The +24V fuse (not shown) is designed to blow if an overcurrent continues to flow and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the +24V power line production drive board even if the fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown) blows. In this way, a +24V fuse (not shown) is provided on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, and a fuse is provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown) so that the +24V fuse (not shown) and the fuse of the +24V driver circuit (not shown) will blow due to an overcurrent. This suppresses a drop in the potential of the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power off process in the main control side power on process described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off process in the payout control unit power on process described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the +24V power line of the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, etc., causing a leakage current or a short circuit, and an overcurrent flows in the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, etc., the +24V fuse (not shown) provided on each board is blown, thereby causing the main control board 1310, suppressing a drop in the potential of the +24V power line supplied to the payout control board 633, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout progress (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, if an overcurrent exceeding the door frame side drive solenoid allowable current limit flows to the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) or +24V system driver circuit of the door frame 3 due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason in the +24V power line of each drive board of the door frame 3 when the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 is driven by the +24V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3 (or when the drive of the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 is waiting), the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit is melted. The capacity of the +24V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 is selected in advance based on the door frame side drive solenoid allowable current limit of the +24V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. The +24V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 is designed to blow if an overcurrent continues to flow and exceeds the door frame side +24V power line drive board allowable current upper limit, even if an overcurrent that exceeds the door frame side drive solenoid's allowable current upper limit flows to the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) or +24V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3 and causes the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit to blow. In this way, a +24V fuse is provided on each drive board of the door frame 3, and a fuse is provided in the +24V driver circuit so that the +24V fuse and the fuse of the +24V driver circuit will blow due to an overcurrent. This prevents a drop in the potential of the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power off process in the main control side power on process described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off process in the payout control unit power on process described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the +24V power lines of the drive boards of the door frame 3, causing a leakage current or a short circuit, and an overcurrent flows in each drive board of the door frame 3, the +24V fuse provided in each board is blown, and the +24V power lines supplied to the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 are blown. By suppressing the drop in the potential of the input, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

[9-2. Circuit of the dispensing control board]
Of the power supplies in the circuit of the dispensing control board 633, the control power supply for the microprocessor, the dispensing control MPU 633aa, is supplied with +5 V from the +5 V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, and the backup power supply supplied to the dispensing control built-in RAM of the dispensing control MPU 633aa is supplied as dispensing VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630.

As shown in FIG. 182, the +5V from the +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f of the power supply board 630 is first input to the payout control filter circuit 633h. This payout control filter circuit 633h is mainly composed of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit with excellent attenuation characteristics and magnetically shielded with ferrite. The payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has +5V applied to its first terminal from the +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, its second terminal is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and +5V with noise components removed is output from its third terminal. The +5V applied to terminal 1 is electrically connected to one end of capacitor PC0, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (substrate ground), so that ripple (AC components superimposed on the voltage) is first removed and the voltage is smoothed.

The +5V output from terminal 3 is electrically connected to one end of capacitor PC1 and electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), thereby further removing ripple and smoothing the voltage. This smoothed +5V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa. Note that in the event of a momentary power outage causing the power supply from the gaming hall to be cut off, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor PC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the momentary power outage occurs. In addition, since the power consumption of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is larger than that of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)) is selected to be larger than the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)). As a result, when a momentary power outage occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the charges stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 are applied as +5V to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, respectively, for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the momentary power outage.

The VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 633aa is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC3, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (substrate ground), and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal of a diode PD0. The +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by the capacitor PC3, which further removes ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the dispensing control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to ground (GND) (substrate ground).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0. In addition, the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor PC4, which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) at one end, and is also electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the backup power circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via the resistor PR0. As a result, the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, is supplied with the payout VBB from the backup power circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via the resistor PR0, while the diode PD0 prevents the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, from being supplied with the payout VBB from the backup power circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via the resistor PR0.

Of the input signals in the circuit of the dispensing control board 633, for example, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the bulb cut detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, and the signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 are each input to the dispensing control input circuit 633ab.

The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the bulb out detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, and the signal from the RWM switch 633d are each input to input terminals PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) to PA4 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 633aa via the dispensing control input circuit 633ab. This input port PA is composed of 8 bits.

The power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. The input ports PA and PB are configured with 8 bits. In addition, detection signals from other sensors are input to the specified input terminals of the input ports PA and PB via the payout control input circuit 633ab, and the input terminals that become vacant terminals are electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground) as a vacant terminal processing.

[9-2-1. Payout control input circuit]
Next, the dispensing control input circuit 633ab will be described. Since the dispensing control input circuit 633ab is the same circuit, here, the dispensing control input circuit 633ab to which the signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is input, and the dispensing control input circuit 633ab to which the dispensing power failure notice signal, which is a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input will be described.

First, the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 has the following functions: a RAM clear switch (RAM clear button) that can clear (erase) various information (game information) stored (memorized) in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 and the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on; a setting change button that can select and change a setting value for a predetermined period of time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on; and an error release button that can release an error when an error is notified after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

[9-2-1a. Signal from RWM switch]
The RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 has terminals 1 to 4, with the terminals 1 and 2 electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633, and the terminals 3 and 4 electrically connected. When the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not pressed, the terminals 1 and 2 and the terminals 3 and 4 are not electrically connected in the internal circuit, whereas when the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is pressed, the terminals 1 and 2 and the terminals 3 and 4 are electrically connected in the internal circuit, and the internal circuits of the terminals 1 and 2 and the terminals 3 and 4 are conductive and electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633.

When the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not pressed, the signal from the RWM switch 633d is such that terminals 1 and 2 and terminals 3 and 4 are not electrically connected in the internal circuit, whereas when the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is pressed, the internal circuit between terminals 1 and 2 and terminals 3 and 4 is conductive and electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633.

As shown in FIG. 182, the dispensing control input circuit 633ab, to which the signal from the RWM switch 633d is input, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50, one end of which is electrically connected to the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC50, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR50 via the resistor PR51. The base terminal of the transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR52, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633, in addition to the resistor PR51. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633. The collector terminal of the transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR53, the other end of which is electrically connected to a power line (i.e., a +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f, and is also electrically connected to an input terminal PA4 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 633aa. A signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is input to the input terminal PA4 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 633aa as an RWM signal 2 via the dispensing control input circuit 633ab.

The other end of the resistor PR50 and the other end of the capacitor PC50 are electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR51 (opposite the other end of the resistor PR51 electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR50), and are also electrically connected to the payout control output circuit 633ac. The payout control output circuit 633ac is composed of resistors PR60, PR61, and a transistor PTR60. The other end of the resistor PR50 and the other end of the capacitor PC50 are electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR51 (opposite the other end of the resistor PR51 electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR50), and are also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60 via the resistor PR60. The base terminal of the transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR61, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633, in addition to the resistor PR60. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633. The collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness) and is electrically connected to the main control input circuit 1310b shown in FIG. 179 (one end of the resistor MR2 electrically connected to the +12V power line (the other end of the resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power line (i.e., the +12V power line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f). The signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 in the dispensing control output circuit 633ac of the dispensing control board 633 is input to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness) as a main RWM signal.

[9-2-1b. Power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit]
The payout control input circuit 633ab, to which the payout power failure warning signal, which is a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input, as shown in FIG. 182, is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line (the power line (i.e., the +12V power line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via a resistor PR41. In addition to the resistor PR41, the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR42, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633. The collector of the transistor PTR40 is connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633. The terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to a power line (i.e., a +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the payout control MPU 633aa. The payout power outage notice signal, which is a power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the payout control MPU 633aa as a power outage notice signal 2 via the payout control input circuit 633ab. In addition, the other end of the resistor PR40 may be electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, in order to adjust the waveform of the payout power outage notice signal, which is a power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

[10. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game will be described with reference to Fig. 183. Here, an example will be described in which the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above is mounted on the main control board 1310, and only the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320. Fig. 183 is a perspective view (a) of the main control board box showing a state before the main control board is attached to the cover body and the base body is slid to cover the opening side of the cover body, and a perspective view (b) of the main control board box in which the cover body and the base body are sealed by a sealing mechanism.

In the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 is an important board that controls the progress of the game. For this reason, it is necessary to protect the main control board 1310 from those who may make illegal modifications to it in order to obtain illegal game balls. Therefore, the main control board 1310 is housed in a main control board box 1320 that is composed of a transparent cover body 1301 and a transparent base body 1302, and the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are crimped together by, for example, a one-way screw of the crimping section 1303, which is a sealing mechanism.

The crimping portion 1303 is a sealing mechanism, and there are multiple crimping portions. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 using one sealing mechanism with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping portion 1303, and then, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed. In other words, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed.

As described above, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded to be transparent. The internal space formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body is capable of housing the main control board 1310. Since the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are molded to be transparent from polycarbonate resin, the state of the mounting surface (front surface) and the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized modification has been performed, or whether or not an unauthorized IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. In addition, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320, and a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be detected, enhancing the deterrent effect against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

To briefly explain the method of assembling the main control board box 1320, as shown in Figure 183 (a), the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310 is placed facing (facing) the bottom surface of the cover body 1301, and the various connectors MCN1 to MCN8 and parts of the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310 are exposed from the corresponding openings formed in the cover body 1301. Next, the main control board 1310 can be fixed in the inner space of the cover body 1301 by inserting fixing screws from the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board into through holes formed in the four corners of the main control board 1310 and screwing them into mounting boss holes formed in the inner four corners of the cover body 1301. Next, the base body 1302 is placed in a predetermined position so as to substantially close the opening side of the cover body 1301, and the base body 1302 is slid (movement distance dimension sd) along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301 in a specific direction (the direction of the arrow in the figure) until the outer peripheral surface of the base body 1302 fits within the inner peripheral surface of the cover body 1301, completely closing the opening side of the cover body 1301, and the main control board 1310 is accommodated in the space formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. Next, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are screwed and crimped with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping portion 1303, so that the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are fixed as shown in FIG. 183(b), and the main control board box 1320 is sealed (i.e., the main control board box 1320 can be closed).

The inner wall of the cover body 1301 is provided with a plurality of cover body side ribs 1301rb spaced apart by a predetermined distance, which can come into contact with the outer periphery of the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310 when the main control board 1310 is attached to the bottom surface of the cover body 1301. The base body 1302 is provided with a plurality of base body side ribs 1302rb spaced apart by a predetermined distance, which can come into contact with the outer periphery of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board 1310 is placed (sandwiched) in a gap (space) formed by the plurality of cover body side ribs 1301rb formed on the cover body 1301 and the plurality of base body side ribs 1302rb formed on the base body 1302.

The base body 1302 is also formed with a protrusion 1302p that can come into contact with the solder surface (rear surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. When a setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a, the force of the insertion causes the main control board 1310 to bend and warp. By coming into contact with the solder surface (rear surface) of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 is prevented from bending and warping any further, and the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 is prevented from being broken or the solder from peeling off.

[11. Setting key switch]
Next, the setting key switch 1311a will be described with reference to Fig. 184. Fig. 184 is a front perspective view of the setting key switch as seen from the diagonal right, a front perspective view of the setting key switch as seen from the diagonal left, and a top view of the setting key switch as seen from the diagonal left. Here, an example will be described in which the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above is mounted on the main control board 1310.

The setting key switch 1311a is of a type in which a resin setting key cylinder is housed inside a resin outer tube into which a setting key is inserted and turned (hereinafter, this may be referred to as a "resin type setting key switch 1311a"), and of a type in which a metal setting key cylinder is housed inside a metal cylindrical outer tube into which a setting key is inserted and turned (hereinafter, this may be referred to as a "metal type setting key switch 1311a"). The resin type setting key switch 1311a and the metal type setting key switch 1311a have the same structure, but are made of some different materials.

[11-1. Resin type setting key switch]
As shown in Figures 184(a) and (b), the resin-type setting key switch 1311a is composed of a cylindrical outer tube 1311aa made of non-conductive resin, a setting key cylinder 1311ab made of non-conductive resin into which a setting key is inserted and turned, a rectangular parallelepiped base body 1311ac made of non-conductive resin which is connected to the outer tube 1311aa and in which a circuit is formed for turning a contact on or off by turning the setting key cylinder 1311ab, and a metal frame plate 1311ad which has a hole penetrating the outer tube 1311aa at a position corresponding to the outer tube 1311aa and is bent so as to cover the front and side surfaces of the base body 1311ac and has a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on both side surfaces (the front side surface and the rear side surface in the figure) which protrude rearward from the base body 1311ac.

The front of the outer cylinder 1311aa is disposed on approximately the same plane as the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. The front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is provided with an insertion port 1311aba for inserting a metal setting key. As shown in FIG. 184(c), when the rotation position of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is in the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa (that is, when the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a (the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion port 1311aba is aligned vertically)), the metal setting key can be inserted into the insertion port 1311aba and removed from the insertion port 1311aba. The base body 1311ac has two brass lead terminals formed on both sides (the right side and the left side in the figure) that are spaced a specified distance from the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on the frame plate 1311ad and the side rotated 90 degrees.

In the figure, the COM1 terminal, which is the upper lead terminal on the left side, and the COM2 terminal, which is the lower lead terminal on the left side, are common terminals, and either one of the terminals or both can be used. The A terminal, which is the upper lead terminal on the right side, and the B terminal, which is the lower lead terminal on the right side, are electrically connected to the COM1 terminal and the COM2 terminal and the A terminal for conduction, and electrically disconnected to the COM1 terminal and the COM2 terminal and the B terminal for interruption, by a circuit formed in the base body 1311ac, when the rotation position of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is at the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa (thereby, the setting key of the setting key switch 1311a - An OFF signal is transmitted.) On the other hand, when the rotational position of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees from the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa, the circuit formed on the base body 1311ac electrically disconnects and cuts off the COM1 and COM2 terminals from the A terminal, and electrically connects and establishes continuity between the COM1 and COM2 terminals and the B terminal (this transmits an ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a). Note that the distance between the COM1 and COM2 terminals is the same as the distance between the A and B terminals.

A pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada extending from a metal frame plate 1311ad to the rear of the base body 1311ac are soldered to the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 to fix the setting key switch 1311a to the main control board 1310. The A terminal, B terminal, COM1 terminal, and COM2 terminal of the base body 1311ac are soldered to the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310. A cylindrical protrusion (not shown) is formed on the back surface of the base body 1311ac to specify the orientation of the setting key switch 1311a so that the insertion/removal reference position 1311aa faces upward as shown in the figure when the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. This cylindrical protrusion prevents the setting key switch 1311a from being soldered upside down (by mistake) when the worker at the manufacturer mounts the setting key switch 1311a on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310.

When a metal setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba formed on the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, even if electromagnetic noise enters through the metal setting key, as described above, the resin type setting key switch 1311a has an outer cylinder 1311aa, setting key cylinder 1311ab, and base body 1311ac molded from non-conductive resin, so there is no effect on the A terminal, B terminal, COM1 terminal, and COM2 terminal.

[11-2. Metal type setting key switch]
Next, the metal type setting key switch 1311a has the same structure as the resin type setting key switch 1311a, in that the material is different from the resin type setting key switch 1311a, in that the metal cylindrical outer tube 1311aa and the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab into which the setting key is inserted and rotated are the same structure as the resin type setting key switch 1311a. The outer tube 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are molded from metal, and the outer tube 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected. The outer tube 1311aa is connected to a non-conductive resin base body 1311ac, but the metal frame plate 1311ad has a hole penetrating the outer tube 1311aa at a position corresponding to the outer tube 1311aa, and covers the surface and side of the base body 1311ac. In other words, when a metal setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba formed on the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, if electromagnetic noise enters through this metal setting key, there is a risk that the electromagnetic noise will enter the metal frame plate 1311ad, because, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected.

[11-3. Relationship between the setting key switch and the cover of the main control board box]
Here, the relationship between the setting key switch 1311a and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 will be described with reference to Fig. 185. Fig. 185 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting key switch and the cover body of the main control board box.

As described above, the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is provided with an insertion port 1311aba for inserting a metal setting key. When the main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320, the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) is exposed from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box, so that the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is formed with a tubular rib portion 1301za (the thickness of the tubular rib portion 1301za is the same as the thickness of the cover body 1301) having a predetermined distance dimension toward the main control board 1310 along the inner circumference of a through hole 1301z having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab (for example, a diameter 2 mm larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) at a position corresponding to the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, as shown in FIG. 185. The inner circumference of the through hole 1301z and the inner circumference of the tubular rib portion 1301za are connected to form the same inner circumference surface without any steps. This allows the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer tube 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box to be arranged on the same plane (flush).

The through hole 1301z is also the part that the finger or fist of a person accessing the setting key switch 1311a comes into contact with, so the rib portion 1301za is designed to increase the strength of the periphery of the through hole 1301z. This prevents a person from pushing in the periphery of the through hole 1301z with force, bending the periphery of the through hole 1301z and widening the gap between the through hole 1301z and the setting key cylinder 1311ab, or from damaging the periphery of the through hole 1301z and widening the gap between the through hole 1301z and the setting key cylinder 1311ab by increasing the outer diameter of the through hole 1301z. This contributes to preventing a person from inserting a thin unauthorized tool such as a wire into the gap between the through hole 1301z and the setting key cylinder 1311ab, even if the person who illegally accesses the setting key switch 1311a intentionally pushes in the periphery of the through hole 1301z with his or her finger or fist.

The diameter of the through hole 1301z is designed to fit inside the rectangular surface shape of the base body 1311ac, which has a rectangular parallelepiped shape of the setting key switch 1311a. The end of the rib portion 1301za is separated from the surface of the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a by a distance dimension d1 (approximately 2 mm in this embodiment), so that the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a cannot be directly touched by anyone accessing the setting key switch 1311a.

As a result, even if a thin, tampering tool such as a wire is inserted into the "gap" (in this embodiment, the diameter of the through hole 1301z is 2 mm larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, resulting in a gap of 1 mm) between the through hole 1301z and rib portion 1310za of the cover body 1301 and the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, the diameter of the through hole 1301z is formed to fit inside the rectangular shape that is the surface shape of the base body 1311ac, which has a rectangular parallelepiped shape of the setting key switch 1311a, so that the tip of the thin, tampering tool will hit the surface of the base body 1311ac and bend, preventing it from penetrating toward the main control board 1310. In other words, it is possible to prevent tampering with the main control board 1310.

In addition, as described above, in the resin type setting key switch 1311a, the outer tube 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are each molded from non-conductive resin, so that even if a person carrying static electricity brings their finger close to or touches the front of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front of the outer tube 1311aa and the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab), electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge can be prevented from entering the main control board 1310 via the setting key switch 1311a. In addition, the end of the rib portion 1301za formed along the outer periphery of the through hole 1301z of the non-conductive resin cover body 1301 and the surface of the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are separated by a distance dimension d1 (about 2 mm in this embodiment). Even if a person carrying static electricity approaches or touches the through hole 1301z of the non-conductive resin cover body 1301 or its surroundings, it is difficult for electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge to penetrate into the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a via the through hole 1301z and the rib portion 1301za, and therefore it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic noise from penetrating into the main control board 1310 via the setting key switch 1311a.

In the metal-type setting key switch 1311a, as described above, the outer tube 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are molded from metal, and the outer tube 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected. The outer tube 1311aa is connected to a non-conductive resin base body 1311ac, but the metal frame plate 1311ad has holes penetrating the outer tube 1311aa at positions corresponding to the outer tube 1311aa, and covers the surface and sides of the base body 1311ac. In other words, if a person carrying static electricity approaches or touches the through hole 1301z or its surroundings of the non-conductive resin cover body 1301, electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge may enter the metal frame plate 1311ad because the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected. Therefore, if a person carrying static electricity approaches or touches the through hole 1301z or its surroundings of the non-conductive resin cover body 1301, electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge may enter the metal frame plate 1311ad and enter the main control board 1310 via the setting key switch 1311a.

In addition, since the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are arranged on the same plane (flush), when a worker attaches the game board 5 to the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the island equipment of an amusement hall, the game board 5 is first temporarily placed on or around the front surface of the pachinko machine 1. This prevents the setting key switch 1311a from colliding with the floor and being damaged if the worker accidentally hits the temporarily placed game board 5 with his or her foot during work, causing it to fall over. In addition, the front of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are arranged on the same plane (flush), so even when the game board 5 is removed from the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the removed game board 5 is temporarily placed in front of or around the pachinko machine 1, so that if the temporarily placed game board 5 accidentally falls over due to the worker's foot hitting it during the work, the setting key switch 1311a will not collide with the floor and be damaged.

In addition, since the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are arranged on the same plane (flush), a protective cover (made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparent) to protect the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) may be provided on the cover body 1301.

[11-4. Relationship between the setting key switch and the base body of the main control board box]
Here, the relationship between the setting key switch 1311a and the base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 will be described with reference to Figs. 185 to 187. Fig. 186 is a diagram (a) showing the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted, a diagram (part 1) (b) showing the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding solder surface (back side) of the main control board, and a diagram (part 2) (c) showing the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding solder surface (back side) of the main control board. Fig. 187 is a continuation of Fig. 186, and is a diagram (part 3) (d) showing the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding solder surface (back side) of the main control board, and a diagram (part 4) (e) showing the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding solder surface (back side) of the main control board.

When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, as described above, the main control board 1310 is arranged (sandwiched) in a gap (space) formed by the cover body side rib portions 1301rb formed in multiple numbers on the cover body 1301 and the base body side rib portions 1302rb formed in multiple numbers on the base body 1302. In addition, as described above, the base body 1302 is formed with a protrusion 1302p that can abut against the solder surface (rear surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. When a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, if the force of the insertion causes the main control board 1310 to bend and warp, the protrusion 1302p comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310, thereby preventing the main control board 1310 from bending and warping any further, and preventing breaks in the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 and peeling of the solder.

When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and a metal setting key is not inserted into the socket 1311aba formed on the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab (or when the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, and the setting key is released and the pressure from the setting key is released), as shown in FIG. 185, the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 and the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p are separated by a distance dimension d2 (approximately 1 mm in this embodiment) as a clearance, and when the setting key cylinder 1311ab is not pressed, the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 and the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p do not come into contact.

The protrusion 1302p is either cylindrical or has a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 (in this embodiment, the constant width is the same as the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 1302p). Here, we will first explain how to route the wiring pattern to the setting key switch 1311a, and then explain the cylindrical protrusion 1302p and the protrusion 1302p with a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302.

[11-4-1. Wiring to the setting key switch 1311a]
186(a), the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310 so that the side of the rectangular parallelepiped base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a (the side opposite to the side below the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa) is parallel to the bottom edge of the main control board 1310. In other words, the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x so that the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa faces the top edge of the main control board 1310.

Specifically, long through holes SLH1, SLH2 (hereinafter, simply referred to as "long through holes SLH1, SLH2") having a pair of opposing lands having a long hole shape along the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) of the main control board 1310 through which a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on a metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted are formed in the up-down direction of the main control board 1310, and two lead terminals, A terminal and B terminal, formed on the right side surface of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a, can be inserted. Through holes SLTH1, SLTH2 (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "through holes SLTH1, SLTH2") having a pair of lands through which the COM1 terminal and the COM2 terminal, which are two lead terminals formed on the left side surface of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a, can be inserted, and through holes SLTH3, SLTH4 (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "through holes SLTH3, SLTH4") having a pair of lands through which the COM1 terminal and the COM2 terminal, which are two lead terminals formed on the left side surface of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a, can be inserted, are formed on the main control board 1310 at a 90-degree rotation angle with the pair of opposing long through holes SLH1, SLH2.

In addition, a through hole SSTD through which a cylindrical protrusion (not shown) that specifies the orientation of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the back side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted is formed on the center line in the left-right direction of the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, within an area surrounded by through holes SLTH1, SLTH2, SLTH3, SLTH4 and long through holes SLH1, SLH2.

As shown in FIG. 186(b), for example, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a vertical straight wiring pattern SPTN1 is formed by being drawn in a straight line along the vertical direction of the main control board 1310, electrically connecting the through hole SLTH4 into which the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, and the through hole SLTH3 into which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered. In other words, the vertical straight wiring pattern SPTN1 is drawn in a straight line from through hole SLTH4 to through hole SLTH4, and therefore its length is the minimum length.

In addition, on the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a left-right straight wiring pattern SPTN2 is formed in a straight line along the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) of the main control board, electrically connecting the through hole SLTH3 into which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, and the through hole SLTH1 into which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered. In other words, the left-right straight wiring pattern SPTN2 is routed in a straight line from the through hole SLTH3 to the through hole SLTH1 in parallel with the bottom side of the main control board 1310, and therefore its length is the minimum length.

The solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 has a through hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, and a bent wiring pattern SPTN3 electrically connecting the main control input circuit 1310b shown in FIG. 179 (one end of the resistor MR10 electrically connected to the +5V power line on the main control board, or the other end of the capacitor MC10 electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground)). The bent wiring pattern SPTN3 is bent in multiple directions and routed around the main control board 1310.

In addition, the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 does not have any wiring patterns electrically connected to the through hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, but is electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the mounting surface (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

The various wiring patterns that form the setting signal transmission path extending from the through hole SLTH1, through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, to a specific input terminal of the main control MPU 1310a (input terminal PA5 of input port PA) are formed on the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310. In other words, the setting signal transmission path does not include a through hole that electrically connects the various wiring patterns of the mounting surface (front side) 1310x and the solder surface (back side) 1310y, so that even if the mounting surface (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is visible, it is not possible to know how the wiring patterns electrically connected to the various terminals of the setting key switch 1311a are routed.

As described above, the main control board 1310 is attached to the bottom surface of the cover body 1301 and fixed to the inner space of the cover body 1301. The base body 1302 is arranged in a predetermined position so as to substantially block the opening side of the cover body 1301, and the base body 1302 is slid in a specific direction along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301 (movement distance dimension sd) to completely block the opening side of the cover body 1301. Therefore, when the base body 1302 is slid in a specific direction along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301, the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also slides in the specific direction together with the base body 1302. During this sliding movement, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p may come into contact with and rub against the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, which may damage the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, various wiring patterns are arranged so that they are not routed around the area where the protrusion 1302p slides and around it. In other words, various wiring patterns are arranged so that the protrusion 1302p does not straddle the various wiring patterns when it slides. This makes it possible to prevent the various wiring patterns from being damaged by the sliding protrusion 1302p when the main control board box 1320 is being assembled.

On the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the copper foil is removed around the through-hole SLTH4 into which the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, the through-hole SLTH3 into which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, and the through-hole SLTH1 into which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered. The copper foil is removed around the various wiring patterns (e.g., the vertical straight wiring pattern SPTN1, the horizontal straight wiring pattern SPTN2, the bent wiring pattern SPTN3, etc.) that form the setting signal transmission path, and the copper foil is removed around the through-hole SSTD into which a cylindrical protrusion (not shown) that specifies the orientation of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted.

In contrast, the copper foil is removed from the mounting surface (front side) 1310x and the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 almost entirely around the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2, and thermal patterns (cross-shaped patterns) are formed in the areas at both ends of the longitudinal direction of each long hole. The thermal patterns (cross-shaped patterns) electrically connect the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 to the solid ground (board ground) of the mounting surface (front side) 1310x and the solid ground (board ground) of the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310. In addition, the copper foil is removed from the mounting surface (front side) 1310x and the soldering surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 almost around the through hole SLTH2 into which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, and a thermal pattern (cross-shaped pattern) is formed. The thermal pattern (cross-shaped pattern) electrically connects the through hole SLTH2 to the solid ground (board ground) of the mounting surface (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground (board ground) of the soldering surface (back side) 1310y.

As shown in Figures 186(a) and 186(b), the entire mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are provided with various through holes (for example, through holes into which lead terminals of electronic components are inserted and soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, through holes that electrically connect the wiring patterns of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, and through holes that connect the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solid ground (GND) of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y). A resist liquid of a predetermined color (green in this embodiment) having insulating properties is applied to cover the thin copper layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns and various through holes are formed, except for certain through holes (for example, through holes that electrically connect the wiring patterns of the mounting surface (front side) 1310x and the solder surface (back side) 1310y) among the through holes (electrically connecting the mounting surface (front side) 1310x and the solder surface (back side) 1310y and fixing electronic components), to form a mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr and a solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr. Furthermore, on the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr, an area SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is to be placed is printed as a silk screen print with insulating paint of a color (white in this embodiment) different from the predetermined color of the resist liquid as a solid line. Instead of green, the color of the resist liquid may be red, yellow, orange, blue, white, or black, and the color of the silk-screen paint may be any of green, red, yellow, orange, blue, white, or black, as long as it is different from the color of the resist liquid.

The size of area SSLKSW1 is formed to be larger than the outline of the setting key switch 1311a, and when the setting key switch 1311a is arranged and mounted in area SSLKSW1 (soldered on the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310), the lines of area SSLKSW1 (solid lines of a rectangle) are arranged outside the outline of the setting key switch 1311a. In other words, even when the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, the lines of area SSLKSW1 (solid lines of a rectangle) do not overlap with the setting key switch 1311a.

[11-4-2. Cylindrical protrusion]
When the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a cylindrical shape, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p has a circular shape. As described above, the distance between the COM1 terminal and the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a and the distance between the A terminal and the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a are the same. The outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 1302p is smaller than half the distance between the A and B terminals of the setting key switch 1311a, and even if the front surface of the sliding protrusion 1302p comes into contact (abuts) with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 during the work of assembling the main control board box 1320, the front surface of the sliding protrusion 1302p will not come into contact with the land of the through-hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, or the land of the through-hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered.

When a metal setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba formed on the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, the force of the insertion causes the main control board 1310 to bend and flex, causing the front of the circular protrusion 1302p to come into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. When the front surface of the circular protrusion 1302p comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr, which is formed by applying a resist liquid of a specific color (green in this embodiment) having insulating properties on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, is rubbed by the front surface of the protrusion 1302p, the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr is scraped off, and there is a risk of damaging the solid ground (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, in the area of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p abuts and around it, a foil cut area SINSy having a circular shape where the copper foil has been cut out is formed, as shown in FIG. 186(b). This makes it possible to prevent damage to the solid ground (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 by the protrusion 1302p even if the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr is scraped off by the protrusion 1302p. The foil cut area SINSy having a circular shape where the copper foil has been cut out safely and effectively utilizes the limited board area.

When assembling the main control board box 1320, as described above, it is necessary to slide the base body 1302 in a specific direction (movement distance dimension sd) along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301. At this time, the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also slides in the specific direction together with the base body 1302 (movement distance dimension sd).

Therefore, in the area where the protrusion 1302p slides and around it, a foil punching area SINSy having a long hole shape where the copper foil has been punched out may be formed, as shown in FIG. 186(c). This prevents damage to the solid ground (board ground) on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 by the protrusion 1302p sliding (movement distance dimension sd) when assembling the main control board box 1320, even if the solder side insulating coating 1310yr is scraped off by the protrusion 1302p that slides (movement distance dimension sd). The foil punching area SINSy having a long hole shape where the copper foil has been punched out safely and effectively utilizes the limited board area.

[11-4-3. Protruding portion having a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body]
When the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 (in this embodiment, the constant width is the same as the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 1302p), the front surface of the protrusion 1302p has a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302. Note that both ends of the front surface of the protrusion 1302p having a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 are rounded to have a circular shape. As described above, the distance between the COM1 and COM2 terminals of the setting key switch 1311a and the distance between the A and B terminals of the setting key switch 1311a are the same. The outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 1302p is smaller than half the distance between the A and B terminals of the setting key switch 1311a, and even if the front surface of the sliding protrusion 1302p comes into contact (abuts) with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 during the work of assembling the main control board box 1320, the front surface of the sliding protrusion 1302p will not come into contact with the land of the through-hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, or the land of the through-hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered.

When a metal setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba formed on the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, the force of the insertion causes the main control board 1310 to bend and warp, causing the front of the protrusion 1302p, which has a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302, to come into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. When the front surface of the protrusion 1302p, which has a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302, comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr, which is formed by applying a resist liquid of a specific color (green in this embodiment) having insulating properties on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, is rubbed by the front surface of the protrusion 1302p, the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr is scraped off, and there is a risk of damaging the solid ground (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 187(d), in the area of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p abuts and around it, a foil punching area SINSy is formed in which the copper foil has been punched out and which has a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302. The foil punching area SINSy has a rounded portion at both ends and has a circular shape. This prevents the protrusion 1302p from damaging the solid ground (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, even if the solder surface insulating coating 1310yr is scraped off by the protrusion 1302p. The foil punching area SINSy, which has a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 and where the copper foil has been punched out, safely and effectively utilizes the limited board area.

When assembling the main control board box 1320, as described above, it is necessary to slide the base body 1302 in a specific direction along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301. At this time, the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also slides in the specific direction together with the base body 1302.

Therefore, in the area where the protrusion 1302p slides and around it, a foil punching area SINSy having a long hole shape where the copper foil has been punched out may be formed, as shown in FIG. 187(e). This prevents damage to the solid ground (board ground) on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 by the protrusion 1302p sliding (movement distance dimension sd) when assembling the main control board box 1320. The foil punching area SINSy having a long hole shape where the copper foil has been punched out safely and effectively utilizes the limited board area.

[11-5. Notification of the location of the RWM switch used for changing settings]
The main control board 1310 on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted is housed in a main control board box 1320, and this main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 of the game board 5. On the other hand, the payout control board 633 on which the RWM switch 633d is mounted is housed in a payout control board box 632, and this payout control board box 632 is attached to the rear side of the power board cover 631 in the board unit 620 of the main frame 4. In this way, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are arranged on separate boards, and the targets to which the boards are attached are also different, so that the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d can be separated. If the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are arranged together on one board, it is only necessary to make unauthorized modifications to one board, which is not preferable from the perspective of crime prevention. Therefore, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are each placed on separate boards, and a configuration is adopted in which the boards are attached to different objects, thereby improving the security of the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d.

The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) controls game preparation and game (controls game after controlling game preparation). The control of game preparation is composed of a first process (determination of step S14 in the main control side power-on processing described later, processing of step S16A) in which the setting value can be changed based on a signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310, and a second process (determination of step S216 in the setting change processing described later, processing of step S218) in which the setting value can be selected and changed based on a signal from the RWM switch 633d of the payout control board 633 (here, it functions as a setting change button for selecting and changing the setting value). Following the control of game preparation, the control of game is composed of the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing described later and the main control side timer interrupt processing described later.

Although this improves security, by placing the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d on separate boards and adopting a configuration in which the boards are attached to different objects, while there is no need to specifically communicate where the setting key switch 1311a is located because the setting key switch 1311a is housed in the main control board box 1320, it may be difficult for the amusement hall manager, amusement hall staff, and other staff to know where the RWM switch 633d, which also functions as a setting change button, is located, as they may be unfamiliar with this.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d is attached to the main control board box 1320. Specifically, a sticker (not shown) that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d is attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. This sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet, and for example, "The RWM switch (setting change button) is located on the payout control board" is printed on this rectangular sheet in red semi-transparent letters (height: 7 mm). This makes it possible to convey the location of the RWM switch 633d (setting change button) to staff such as the manager of the game hall or staff of the game hall, so that the staff can easily find the RWM switch 633d when operating it and do not get dizzy. Therefore, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

This sticker does not impede visibility of the main control board 1310 even when it is affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. Also, instead of letters printed on the rectangular sheet of this sticker, symbols such as arrows may be used.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d, but instead, when the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is molded, concave or convex letters may be molded in as well (i.e., the cover body 1301 and the letters may be molded as a single unit). Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

In the above embodiment, a sticker was attached to the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. Instead of this, the characters (height: 7 mm) "The RWM switch (setting change button) is located on the dispensing control board" may be silk-screened in white on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310, or the characters (height: 7 mm) "RWM switch (setting change button)" may be silk-screened in white on the mounting surface (surface) of the dispensing control board 633. The silk-screening may be of the same color or different colors. Also, instead of silk-screened characters, a symbol such as an arrow may be used. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

In the above embodiment, a sticker was attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. Instead of this, the letter portion may be masked on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310 and cut-out letters (height: 7 mm) "The RWM switch (setting change button) is located on the dispensing control board" may be formed by resist, or the letter portion may be masked on the mounting surface (surface) of the dispensing control board 633 and cut-out letters (height: 7 mm) "RWM switch (setting change button)" may be formed by resist. The color of the resist may be the same, but it is preferable to use different colors so that the boards can be distinguished. Also, instead of cut-out letters, cut-out symbols such as arrows may be masked. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

In the above-described embodiment, a sticker was attached to the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. Alternatively, a similar sticker (this sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet, and on this rectangular sheet, for example, "The RWM switch (setting change button) is located on the dispensing control board" is printed in red semi-transparent letters (height: 7 mm)) may be attached to the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310, or a transparent rectangular sheet with the words "RWM switch (setting change button)" in red semi-transparent letters (height: 7 mm) may be attached to the mounting surface (surface) of the dispensing control board 633. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

In the above embodiment, a sticker was attached to the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d, but instead of this, an announcement voice may be played from various speakers to inform the user of where the RWM switch 633d is located, or an announcement image may be displayed on the performance display device 1600. Specifically, for example, when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1, a staff member such as the manager of the game hall or a staff member of the game hall operates the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 to display various setting screens on the performance display device 1600 and select an item regarding the location of the RWM switch 633d (setting switching button). As a result, an announcement voice is played from various speakers to inform the user of where the RWM switch 633d is located, saying, "The RWM switch is on the payout control board. The RWM switch also doubles as a setting change button," and an announcement image (which may be a photograph) informing the user of the location of the RWM switch 633d is displayed on the performance display device 1600. After the game parlor manager, game parlor staff, or other staff member has determined the location of the RWM switch 633d from this announcement voice or announcement image, they can shut off the power to the pachinko machine 1 and smoothly change the setting value. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily determined.

In the above embodiment, a sticker was attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d, but instead, when changing the setting value, an announcement voice may be played from various speakers to inform the user where the RWM switch 633d, which also functions as a setting change button, is located. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process that can change and determine the setting value, a predetermined command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and an announcement voice that informs the user where the RWM switch 633d is located by the control of the peripheral control board 1510, such as "The RWM switch is on the payout control board. The RWM switch also serves as a setting change button. Please operate the RWM switch to change the setting value" is repeatedly played from various speakers. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the setting change process, it sends a specified command to the peripheral control board 1510, which causes the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the audio announcement and proceed with various processes (such as proceeding with the performance or the performance of the waiting state (demo performance)) based on the received specified command. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily determined. Following this audio announcement, an audio announcement may be played from various speakers to explain how to operate the setting key after the setting value has been determined. Also, while the audio announcement is being played, an image saying "Setting" may be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In the above embodiment, a sticker was attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d, but in addition to this, when changing the setting value, an announcement voice may be played from various speakers to inform the user where the RWM switch 633d, which also functions as a setting change button, is located. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process that can change and determine the setting value, a predetermined command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and an announcement voice that informs the user where the RWM switch 633d is located by the control of the peripheral control board 1510, "The RWM switch is on the payout control board. The RWM switch also serves as a setting change button. Please operate the RWM switch to change the setting value" is repeatedly played from various speakers. This eliminates the need to search for the sticker attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. Although such announcements are repeatedly played from various speakers, in case the contents of the announcements are missed, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be known by visually checking the sticker attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 before the next announcement begins. In addition to "The RWM switch is on the dispensing control board. The RWM switch also serves as a setting change button. Please operate the RWM switch to change the setting value," the announcement may also include information on where the sticker indicating the location of the RWM switch is attached. When the RWM switch is operated, the main control MPU 1310a transmits a specified command to the peripheral control board 1510, which causes the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the announcement. Even if the person who changes the setting value becomes accustomed to changing the setting value and finds it unpleasant to the ear, by operating the RWM switch immediately after starting the work, the announcement voice can be stopped quickly. Also, in the case where the work needs to be performed after the opening of the game hall, the announcement voice can be stopped quickly by operating the RWM switch immediately after starting the work so as not to inconvenience the players. Following such announcement voice, an announcement voice that explains how to operate the setting key after the setting value is determined may be played from various speakers. Also, while the announcement voice is being played, an image saying "Setting" may be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

[11-6. Procedures for changing settings and for displaying and confirming settings]
Next, a brief description will be given of the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board 1310, the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front side) of the payout control board 633, and the base monitor 1310h mounted on the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board 1310, which also functions as a setting display. Here, a brief description will be given of the case where the setting value is changed, and a brief description will be given of the case where the current setting value is displayed for confirmation. Note that the setting key is an important key that can be used to change the setting value as well as to confirm the currently set setting value, so only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, are allowed to possess it, and is limited to two or three people.

To change the setting value, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 must be opened relative to the outer frame 2, a setting key must be inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310, the setting key cylinder 1311ab must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, turning the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON, and the pressure operation portion of the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633 must be operated, thereby satisfying the "predetermined setting value change permission condition." In other words, the person who actually changes the setting value must first make sure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert a metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it ON by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON, and then operate the power switch 630a while operating the pressing portion of the RWM switch 633d to power on the pachinko machine 1.

A person who changes the setting value must first make sure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert a metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and turn the setting key cylinder ON by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise. Next, while operating the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d, the power switch 630a is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1. This causes a setting key ON signal to be input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value among setting values 1 to 6 set at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM on the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display.

As described above, the base monitor 1310h is configured with six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a row, and can display values up to six digits. When the base monitor 1310h functions as a setting display, the setting value may be displayed on the 7-segment LED display located at the rightmost position of the six 7-segment LED displays arranged in a row (i.e., the one digit that displays the ones digit of the six digits) (in this case, the dot may be lit or unlit. If the dot is also configured to function as a setting change permission lamp, it may be lit when a setting change is being made and unlit when the setting change is completed), or the setting value may be displayed on one, multiple, or all of the six 7-segment LED displays arranged in a row (in this case, the dot may be lit or unlit. If the dot is also configured to function as a setting change permission lamp, it may be lit when a setting change is being made and unlit when the setting change is completed).

When a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633, a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input from the dispensing control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Each time a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current setting value by one based on the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d. When it reaches the maximum setting value of 6, it returns to the initial value of 1, increases by one again, and displays the setting value on the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display.

When a person who changes the setting value decides on a setting value, they turn off the setting key switch 1311a by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by the setting change in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, switches the setting value on the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display device, from a state in which it is displayed to a state in which it is not displayed, and then, or immediately thereafter, controls the base monitor 1310h to display, from a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, the number (total number) of game balls collected through the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned off on the game board 5. That is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned ON back to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and this "predetermined setting value change end condition" is met, thereby ending the period during which the setting value can be changed (the period during which the setting value can be changed).

The person who changes the setting value removes the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and completes the work of changing the setting value.

In order to display and check the currently set setting value, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 must be opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key must be inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder 1311ab must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, turning the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON, and the pressing section of the RWM switch 633d must not be operated, thereby satisfying the "predetermined setting value display permission condition." In other words, a person who actually checks and displays the currently set setting value must first make sure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert a metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it ON by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON, and then operate the power switch 630a to power on the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d.

A person who checks and displays the currently set setting values must first make sure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert a metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and turn the setting key cylinder ON by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise. Then, without operating the pressing part of the RWM switch 633d, the power switch 630a is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1. This causes a setting key ON signal to be input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value among setting values 1 to 6 set at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display. At this time, even if a person who wants to check and display the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d, the setting value does not change at all in response to this pressing operation, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g does not change either.

As described above, the base monitor 1310h is composed of six seven-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a row, and is capable of displaying numerical values up to six digits. When the base monitor 1310h functions as a setting display, the setting value may be displayed on the rightmost 7-segment LED display of the six aligned 7-segment LED displays (i.e., the one digit that displays the ones digit of the six digits) (in this case, the dot may be lit or unlit. If the dot is also used as a setting change permission lamp, it may be lit when the currently set setting value is being confirmed and unlit when confirmation of the currently set setting value is completed). The setting value may be displayed on one, multiple, or all of the six aligned 7-segment LED displays (in this case, the dot may be lit or unlit. If the dot is also used as a setting change permission lamp, it may be lit when the currently set setting value is being confirmed and unlit when confirmation of the currently set setting value is completed).

When the person who checks and displays the currently set setting value has finished checking the currently set setting value, he or she turns the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to return it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). This setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting value from being displayed to not being displayed on the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display device, and then or immediately thereafter, controls the base monitor 1310h to display the number of game balls (total number) collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 from a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

The person who wishes to confirm and display the currently set setting value removes the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and completes the confirmation and display of the currently set setting value.

As described above, the predetermined conditions for permission to change the setting value are that when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage that causes a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, and the pressing portion of the RWM switch 633d is operated. In contrast, the predetermined conditions for permission to display the setting value are, as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, a setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, and the pressure operation portion of the RWM switch 633d is not operated. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions and the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are that when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage that causes a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, thereby turning the setting key ON. There is a common requirement between the two, but the predetermined setting value change permission conditions require that "the push operation part of the RWM switch 633d is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage that causes a momentary power outage)," whereas the predetermined setting value display permission conditions require that "the push operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage that causes a momentary power outage)," and are different in that

[12. Wiring pattern of setting key switch and RWM switch on main control board]
Next, the wiring pattern for transmitting a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the wiring pattern for transmitting a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 will be described with reference to Figs. 188 and 189. Fig. 188 is a schematic diagram for explaining the layout of various electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board, and Fig. 189 is a schematic diagram of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board for explaining the outline of various wiring patterns to the main control MPU of the main control board. Here, an example will be described in which the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the above-mentioned setting change board 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310, and only the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320.

DIP-type electronic components such as connectors MCN1 to MCN8, crystal oscillators, and various ICs, and lead-type electronic components such as setting key switches 1311a, resistors, resistor arrays, diodes, capacitors, electrolytic capacitors, and transistors are mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The lead terminals of the DIP-type electronic components are inserted into through holes formed in the main control board 1310 from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 toward the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and are soldered and fixed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Each lead terminal of the lead-type electronic component is inserted into a through hole formed in the main control board 1310 from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and is soldered and fixed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

Various detection signals from various sensors input to the main control board 1310 are either input to the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function via connectors MCN1 to MCN5, or input to the main control input circuit 1310b without error detection function. Connectors MCN1 to MCN5 are arranged in order near the top edge of the main control board 1310 from the center of the top edge to the left edge, and connector MCN5 is arranged near the top edge of the main control board 1310 near the left edge.

The various detection signals input via connectors MCN1 to MCN3 are input to the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function, and the various detection signals input via connector MCN5 are either input to the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function or input to the main control input circuit 1310b (the circuit composed of resistors and transistors as mentioned above) that does not have an error detection function. Connector MCN4 is for outputting commands to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, multiple main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection (in this embodiment, eight main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection function) are mounted as integrated DIP type ICs (two in this embodiment). Note that instead of forming the multiple main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection into ICs, multiple main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection may be mounted individually on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

The connectors MCN6 to MCN8 are arranged in the order of connector MCN6, connector MCN7, setting key switch 1311a, and connector MCN8 near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, from the left edge to the center of the bottom edge, with connector MCN8 arranged near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, closer to the left side than the center of the bottom edge. Connector MCN6 outputs a signal that drives an electric drive source (solenoid) provided on the game board 5, and connector MCN7 inputs and outputs signals related to the exchange of commands with the payout control board 633, and inputs a detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633") mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633. Connector MCN8 is for exchanging various signals when performing inspection and matching.

The main control MPU 1310a is disposed above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the main control board 1310 and toward the right from the center of the main control board 1310 so as to be parallel to the bottom side (top side) of the main control board 1310 (i.e., along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310).
The lead terminals protruding vertically from the bottom surface of the main body of the main control MPU 1310a are alternately bent and arranged in two rows along the longitudinal direction of the bottom surface of the main body of the main control MPU 1310a. For convenience of explanation, the lead terminals arranged in two rows will be described as the lead terminals arranged in the upper row and the lead terminals arranged in the lower row.

Above the setting key switch 1311a, which is located near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, are a number of lead-type resistors, diodes, capacitors, etc., and above these, two lead-type resistor groups are arranged in a row on the left and right, parallel to the bottom edge of the main control board 1310. Above this lead-type left resistor group (i.e., in the direction away from the main control MPU 1310a), resistors MR2 and MR5 are arranged, which constitute the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 is input via the connector MCN7, and below this lead-type left resistor group (i.e., with the lead-type left resistor group as the boundary (protective wall)), resistors MR3 and MR4 and transistor MTR0 are arranged, which constitute the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 is input via the connector MCN7.

In other words, the main control input circuit 1310b, to which the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is input via the connector MCN7, is configured with the lead-type left-side resistor assembly as the boundary (protective wall), and the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 constituting the main control input circuit 1310b are arranged below the lead-type left-side resistor assembly, and the resistors MR2 and MR5 constituting the main control input circuit 1310b are arranged above the lead-type left-side resistor assembly. As a result, by using the lead-type left-side resistor assembly as a protective wall, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tampering with the resistors MR2 and MR5 arranged above the lead-type left-side resistor assembly, which can contribute to improving security. Furthermore, since the transistor MTR0 has resistors MR3 and MR4 built in as bias resistors, it is also possible to prevent unauthorized tampering with the resistors MR3 and MR4 in this respect, which can contribute to improving security.

Above the connector MCN8, which is located to the right of the setting key switch 1311a, which is located near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, are located resistors MR10-MR13, capacitor MC10, and transistor MTR10, which constitute the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input. Note that transistor MTR10 has resistors MR11 and MR12 built in as bias resistors. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized tampering with resistors MR11 and MR12, contributing to improved security.

To the right of the main control input circuit 1310b, to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, are resistors MR14-MR16 and transistor MTR11 that constitute the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, which inverts the logic of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a input via the main control input circuit 1310b. The transistor MTR11 has resistors MR14 and MR15 built in as bias resistors. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized tampering with the resistors MR14 and MR15, contributing to improved security.

When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, as described above, the connectors MCN1 to MC5 arranged in a row parallel to the top side near the top edge of the main control board 1310, the connectors MCN6 to MC8 arranged in a row parallel to the bottom side near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a are partially exposed from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, and it is possible to insert an unauthorized tool (for example, a thin wire) through the gap formed by the cover body 1301, the connectors MCN1 to MCN8, and the setting key switch 13111a, and to operate the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 unauthorizedly. Even if an attempt is made to tamper with the system, there are electronic components such as electrolytic capacitors, resistors, diodes, capacitors, resistor arrays, various ICs, and transistors located around the connectors MCN1 to MCN8 and the setting key switch 13111a, and there are electronic components such as resistors, diodes, capacitors, a crystal oscillator (located near the bottom of the main control MPU 1310a), resistor arrays, and various ICs located around the main control MPU 1310a. These electronic components act as obstacles or protective walls, making it necessary to bend the unauthorized tool (for example, a thin wire) multiple times, and in reality, the unauthorized tool (for example, a thin wire) cannot reach the main control MPU 1310a.

The main control board 1310 has a plurality of through holes through which the lead terminals of the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a are inserted. The lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a are inserted from the mounting surface (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and are soldered and fixed to the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

As shown in Fig. 189, the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 has a lead terminal of the main control MPU 1310a that is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Also, the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 has a +5V power supply wiring pattern that is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line (+5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310) of the lead terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main VBB power supply line supplied from the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630. In addition, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, an output signal wiring pattern that outputs various signals from the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, and an input signal wiring pattern that inputs various signals to the lead terminals are formed.

The input signal wiring pattern includes an RWM signal wiring pattern (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "various wiring patterns") that forms an RWM signal transmission path extending from the connector MCN7, to which a detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is input, to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and ... A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal The wiring pattern includes a setting key signal wiring pattern (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "various wiring patterns") that forms a setting signal transmission path extending from the 1Q terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 (MIC22A) that constitutes the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a.

On the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, there are formed foil cut-out areas where the copper foil is cut out around the through-holes through which the lead terminals of the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a are inserted, except for those electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground), around the +5V power supply wiring pattern, around the signal output wiring pattern, around the input signal wiring pattern, and around specific through-holes (for example, through-holes electrically connecting the output signal wiring patterns of the mounting surface (front side) 1310x and the solder surface (back side) 1310y).

Except for the areas on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 where various wiring patterns are formed, the areas where various through holes are formed, and the areas where foil cutouts are formed, the remaining areas are formed as a solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and a resist liquid of a specific color (green in this embodiment) having insulating properties is applied to cover the base material of the main control board 1310 and the thin copper layer (copper plane, copper foil surface) to form a solder side insulating coating film 1310yr over the entire area of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

In addition, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the copper foil around the through-holes through which the lead terminals of the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a are inserted, excluding those electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground), around the +5V power supply wiring pattern, around the output signal wiring pattern, and around specific through-holes (for example, through-holes electrically connecting the output signal wiring pattern between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y) is cut into foil. Although a cut-out area is formed, in the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a, between the lead terminals arranged in the upper row and the lead terminals arranged in the lower row, no foil cut-out area is formed along the longitudinal direction of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a (along the left-right direction of the main control board 1310, along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310, along the upper side of the main control board 1310 (parallel to the lower side or the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the main control board 1310), and a solid ground (GND) (board ground) is formed.

Apart from the area on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 where the output signal wiring pattern is formed, the area where various through holes are formed, and the area where the foil cutouts are formed, the other areas are formed as a solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and a resist liquid of a specific color (green in this embodiment) having insulating properties is applied to cover the base material of the main control board 1310 and the thin copper layer (copper plane, copper foil surface) to form a mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr over the entire area of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

In addition, in the copper foil layer (copper plane, copper foil surface) of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, various wiring patterns routed to the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a may form a small copper foil area surrounded by various wiring patterns and many lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, in order to stabilize the ground of the small copper foil area, a solid ground through hole is formed that electrically connects the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

The land size of the solid ground through hole comes in a variety of sizes, including ones that are the same size as the land size of the wiring pattern through hole that electrically connects the wiring pattern between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, ones that are the same size as the land size of the lead terminal through hole through which the lead terminal of the electronic component is inserted and soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, ones that are larger than the size of the land of the wiring pattern through hole and smaller than the size of the land of the lead terminal through hole, ones that are larger than the size of the land of the lead terminal through hole, and multiple solid ground through holes are scattered over almost the entire surface of the main control board 1310. This stabilizes the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the mounting surface (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to be the same ground (GND) (board ground).

In addition, the main control board 1310 does not have any through holes for wiring patterns electrically connecting the wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 for wiring patterns to which various signals are input, whereas multiple through holes for wiring patterns electrically connecting the wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 for wiring patterns to which various signals are output may be formed in order to prevent interference between the wiring patterns when the wiring patterns are routed.

It is preferable that the main control board 1310 has no through holes for wiring patterns that electrically connect the wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 for wiring patterns to which various signals are input. However, in order to avoid interference with other wiring patterns due to the routing of the wiring patterns, it is sometimes necessary to form through holes for wiring patterns that electrically connect the wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 for wiring patterns to which various signals are input.

However, if a tampering is made by electrically switching the wiring pattern through-holes (hereinafter referred to as "input signal wiring pattern through-holes") formed for the wiring pattern through which various signals are input to, for example, a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power line created on the main control board, there is a risk that a cheater will be able to obtain illegal game balls, since the main control MPU 1310a is an important electronic component that controls the progress of the game.

Therefore, it is necessary to take security measures for the through holes for the input signal wiring pattern.

[12-1. Security measures for through holes for input signal wiring patterns]
A configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the land of the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern as a security measure for the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern (hereinafter, "a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the land of the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first to fourth embodiments") will be described with reference to Figs. 190 to 193. Fig. 190 is a schematic diagram (a) for explaining a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the land of the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section along the X-X line in (a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of (b). Fig. 191 is a schematic diagram (a) for explaining a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the land of the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the second embodiment formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section along the X-X line in (a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of (b). Fig. 192 is a schematic diagram (a) for explaining a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the land of the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the third embodiment formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section along the X-X line in (a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of (b), and Fig. 193 is a schematic diagram (a) for explaining a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the land of the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the fourth embodiment formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section along the X-X line in (a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of (b). Note that in Figs. 190 to 193, the same reference numerals are used to denote parts that have the same functions.

The various through holes are copper-plated on the inner peripheral wall of the through hole, making them conductive. In addition to through holes, non-through holes are also provided in the main control board 1310. The non-through holes are significantly different from through holes that have copper plating on the inner peripheral wall of the through hole and have lands on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 in that the inner peripheral wall of the through hole is not copper-plated and the non-through holes do not have lands on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. The non-through holes are formed to attach the board to a member, or to fix electronic components (such as connectors to which wiring is attached and detached) to the board, which are subject to external force. Note that the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes with an insulating coating may be adopted for through holes for mounting electronic components (i.e., inserting the lead terminals of the electronic components). In addition, the configuration of covering the land of the through hole with an insulating film may be used for the land of the wiring pattern through hole (hereinafter, may be referred to as "through hole for output signal wiring pattern") formed for the wiring pattern to which various signals are output. In addition, the configuration of covering the land of the through hole with an insulating film may be used for the land of the through hole for the solid ground that electrically connects the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

[12-1-1. Configuration for covering lands of through holes for input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment with insulating film]
In the configuration in which the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film, as shown in Fig. 190(a) and (b), a thin through hole is formed in the board thickness direction (the surface perpendicular (reverse surface perpendicular) direction of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310), and the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the copper foil surface of the solder surface (reverse surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are punched to form the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (reverse surface) side land KRDy1, each having an outer diameter KTHD1, and the mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and the solder surface (reverse surface) side wiring pattern are formed. The through hole KTH1 is formed by plating the entire inner circumferential surface of the through hole with electrical conductivity. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are the same size, which is the outer diameter KTHD1.

The mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN is electrically connected to another mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

The solder surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of the solder surface (rear surface) wiring pattern formed on the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and the other end of the solder surface (rear surface) wiring pattern is electrically connected to the solder surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

The mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected via the through hole KTH1, and the mounting surface (front) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back) side wiring pattern formed on the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected via the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the through hole KTH1, and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

A green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to form a mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr, but in the area of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1, a mounting surface (front surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1.

In addition, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to form a solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr, but in the area of the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1, a solder surface (rear surface) side resist opening KByra is formed having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1.

The opening diameter KBxrD1 of the resist opening KBxra on the mounting surface (front side) and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the resist opening KByra on the solder surface (back side) are the same size.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting it out. A sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) is fixed to the manufacturing equipment and goes through a process of painting, a process of drying, a process of drilling holes, and other processes, and finally each board is cut out.

In this way, in the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, in the region of the mounting surface insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, a mounting surface (surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is formed, so that the outer peripheral portion of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is covered with green resist as an insulating coating from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 toward the center of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1. As a result, the entire outer peripheral portion of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be covered with green resist as an insulating coating, so that the area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed can be kept small. This makes it difficult to tamper with the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern by electrically switching them to, for example, a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power line on the main control board, and provides security measures for the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern. This contributes to improving security for the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern.

In addition, since the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 both have exposed copper foil, it is possible to perform an electrical inspection (checking operation and checking for abnormal potential) of the main control board 1310 by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 from the mounting surface (front surface) side of the main control board 1310, and it is also possible to perform an electrical inspection (checking operation and checking for abnormal potential) of the main control board 1310 by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 from the solder surface (back surface) side of the main control board 1310. In other words, when performing an electrical inspection of the main control board 1310, the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals. Note that the contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead that performs a continuity check with a so-called "tester".

In the configuration in which the lands of the through holes for the input signal wiring pattern are covered with an insulating coating in the first embodiment, in the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, in the region of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, a solder side (back side) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1 is formed, so that the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1 is The outer periphery of the solder side (rear) land KRDy1 toward the center of the solder side (rear) land KRDy1 was covered with a green resist as an insulating coating, but as shown in FIG. 190(c), a solder side (rear) resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD2 (>opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (rear) land KRDy1 may be formed in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (rear) land KRDy1. This is because the main control board 1310 is placed on the rear side of the game board 5 in a state where it is housed in the main control board box 1320 in the pachinko machine 1, and therefore, when tampering with the main control board 1310 in this state, only the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be visually observed. In addition, when an operator inspecting the main control board 1310 determines which of the multiple various through holes formed in the main control board 1310 is a through hole for an input signal wiring pattern, the operator can help determine whether or not the through hole is for an input signal wiring pattern by comparing the size of the land on the mounting surface (front side) 1310x and the land on the solder surface (back side) 1310y.

[12-1-2. Configuration in which an insulating film is covered on the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration in which the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the second embodiment is covered with an insulating film, as shown in Fig. 191 (a) and (b), a thin through hole is formed in the board thickness direction (the surface perpendicular (reverse surface perpendicular) direction of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310), and the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the copper foil surface of the solder surface (reverse surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are punched to form the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (reverse surface) side land KRDy1, each having an outer diameter KTHD1, and the mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and the solder surface (reverse surface) side wiring pattern are formed. The through hole KTH1 is formed by plating the entire inner circumferential surface of the through hole with electrical conductivity. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are outer diameter KTHD1 and are the same size, which is the same size as the outer diameter of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is covered on the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern in the first embodiment described above.

The mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN is electrically connected to another mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

The solder surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of the solder surface (rear surface) wiring pattern formed on the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and the other end of the solder surface (rear surface) wiring pattern is electrically connected to the solder surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

A green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to form a mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr, but in the area of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1, a mounting surface (front surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed having an opening diameter KBxrD1 that is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1, is even smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern in the first embodiment described above, and is larger than the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1. The inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 takes into account the resist liquid intrusion prevention area that spreads concentrically outward from the inner periphery of the through hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side, and is a resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension is at least 0.5 mm or more to prevent the green resist liquid from infiltrating the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, and 0.5 mm is used in the configuration in which the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern in the second embodiment is covered with an insulating film) from the inner periphery of the through hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (front surface). Therefore, the inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 is the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1 plus twice the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm), and is 1.0 mm larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1.

In contrast, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to form a solder side insulating coating 1310yr, but in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, a solder side (back side) resist opening KByra is formed having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment described above.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting it out. A sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) is fixed to the manufacturing equipment and goes through a process of painting, a drying process, a process of drilling holes, and other processes before each board is finally cut out.

In this way, in the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, in the region of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1, a mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 having an opening diameter KBxrD1 that is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1, and is even smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern in the first embodiment is covered with an insulating coating, and is larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1. Because the surface (surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed, the outer periphery of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, except for the resist liquid intrusion prevention area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 (i.e., the area extending from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 toward the center of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 to a position away from the inner periphery of the mounting surface (surface) side edge of the through hole KTH1 by the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm)), is covered with green resist as an insulating coating. As a result, the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be covered with green resist as an insulating film from almost the inside to the entire outer periphery (that is, the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 except for the resist liquid intrusion prevention area), and the area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on which the copper foil is exposed becomes the resist liquid intrusion prevention area, so that the area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on which the copper foil is exposed can be kept extremely small compared to the configuration in which the land of the input signal wiring pattern through hole in the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to make unauthorized modifications such as electrically switching the input signal wiring pattern through hole to, for example, a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power line created on the main control board side, and security measures can be taken for the input signal wiring pattern through hole. This can contribute to improving security for through holes for input signal wiring patterns.

In addition, since a resist liquid intrusion prevention area is provided for the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, when green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, even if the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is fixed to the manufacturing device so that it faces vertically upward (the main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single fixed-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) and finally cutting them out, so that the front surface of the single fixed-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) faces vertically upward) and the green resist liquid is actually applied, the green resist liquid will infiltrate the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 and dry without blocking the hole.

In addition, since the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 both have exposed copper foil, it is possible to perform an electrical inspection (checking operation and checking for abnormal potential) of the main control board 1310 by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 from the mounting surface (front surface) side of the main control board 1310, and it is also possible to perform an electrical inspection (checking operation and checking for abnormal potential) of the main control board 1310 by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 from the solder surface (back surface) side of the main control board 1310. In other words, when performing an electrical inspection of the main control board 1310, the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals. Note that the contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead that performs a continuity check with a so-called "tester".

In the configuration in which the lands of the through holes for the input signal wiring pattern are covered with an insulating coating in the second embodiment, in the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, in the region of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, a solder side (back side) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1 is formed, so that the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1 is The outer periphery of the solder side (rear) land KRDy1 toward the center of the solder side (rear) land KRDy1 was covered with a green resist as an insulating coating, but as shown in FIG. 191 (c), in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (rear) land KRDy1, a solder side (rear) resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD2 (> opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (rear) land KRDy1 may be formed. This is because the main control board 1310 is placed on the rear side of the game board 5 in a state where it is housed in the main control board box 1320 in the pachinko machine 1, and therefore, when tampering with the main control board 1310 in this state, only the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be visually observed. In addition, when an operator inspecting the main control board 1310 determines which of the multiple various through holes formed in the main control board 1310 is a through hole for an input signal wiring pattern, the operator can help determine whether or not the through hole is for an input signal wiring pattern by comparing the size of the land on the mounting surface (front side) 1310x and the land on the solder surface (back side) 1310y.

[12-1-3. Configuration in which an insulating film is covered on the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration in which the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the third embodiment is covered with an insulating film, as shown in Fig. 192 (a) and (b), a thin through hole is formed in the board thickness direction (the surface perpendicular (reverse surface perpendicular) direction of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310), and the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the copper foil surface of the solder surface (reverse surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are punched to form the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (reverse surface) side land KRDy1, each having an outer diameter KTHD1, and the mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and the solder surface (reverse surface) side wiring pattern are formed. The through hole KTH1 is formed by plating the entire inner peripheral surface of the through hole with electrical conductivity. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are outer diameter KTHD1 and are the same size, which is the same size as the outer diameter of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is covered on the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern in the first embodiment described above.

The mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN is electrically connected to another mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

A green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to form the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr, and the area of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is also applied with green resist liquid as an insulating coating to form the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting it out. A sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) is fixed to the manufacturing equipment and goes through a process of painting, a drying process, a process of drilling holes, and other processes, before each board is finally cut out. For this reason, when green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is fixed to the manufacturing device so that it faces vertically upward (the main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single fixed-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) and finally cutting it out, so that the front surface of the single fixed-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) faces vertically upward), and the green resist liquid penetrates the inner periphery of the mounting surface (surface) side of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 and blocks this hole. The green resist liquid that penetrates into the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 dries in a recessed state from the inner periphery of the mounting surface (surface) side of the through hole KTH1 toward the center of the hole due to its own weight.

In contrast, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to form a solder side insulating coating 1310yr, but in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, a solder side (back side) resist opening KByra is formed having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment described above.

In this way, on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the region of the mounting surface insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is also covered with green resist as an insulating coating, and green resist liquid has entered from the mounting surface (surface) side inner edge of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 to block this hole. This allows the entire mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 and the hole of the through hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to be covered with green resist as an insulating coating, so that the copper foil of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is not exposed, and the conductive plating portion applied to the entire inner surface of the hole of the through hole KTH1 is not exposed from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. In addition, the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 can be blocked. This makes it difficult to tamper with the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern by electrically switching it to, for example, a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power line created on the main control board, and provides security measures for the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern. This contributes to improving security for the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern.

Also, green resist liquid has seeped in from the inner periphery of the mounting surface (front surface) side of through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310, blocking the hole, but the solder surface (back surface) side of through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310 is open. In other words, the mounting surface (front surface) side of through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310 is blocked with green resist liquid, while the solder surface (back surface) side is open. This is because if green resist liquid seeps into the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 from the inner periphery on the mounting surface (front side) side, and air remains inside the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 while blocking the solder surface (back side) of the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, liquid such as resist remover may remain inside the through-hole KTH1, which may corrode the conductive plating inside the through-hole KTH1 and cause poor contact, or the liquid inside the through-hole KTH1 may instantly vaporize and expand (a so-called "steam explosion") during a soldering process (such as reflow) where heat is applied, damaging the conductive plating inside the through-hole KTH1 and causing an electrical disconnection of the through-hole KTH1.

Although the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 holes exist, their presence can be hidden by the green resist, so that the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 can be made less noticeable against the solid green resist applied to the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the through hole KTH1 hole can be made less noticeable. This makes it difficult for a fraudster who is attempting to make fraudulent modifications, such as electrically switching the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern to a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power line created on the main control board side, to find the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern (the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 holes).

In addition, since the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1 has exposed copper foil, it is possible to perform an electrical inspection (check for operation or abnormal potential) of the main control board 1310 by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1 from the solder side (rear) of the main control board 1310. In other words, when performing an electrical inspection of the main control board 1310, the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1 can be used as a check terminal. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead used to check continuity with a so-called "tester."

In addition, in the configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the third embodiment, in the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, in the region of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, a solder side (back side) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1 is formed, so that the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1 is The outer periphery of the solder side (rear) land KRDy1 toward the center of the solder side (rear) land KRDy1 was covered with a green resist as an insulating coating, but as shown in FIG. 192(c), a solder side (rear) resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD2 (>opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (rear) land KRDy1 may be formed in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (rear) land KRDy1. This is because the main control board 1310 is placed on the rear side of the game board 5 in a state where it is housed in the main control board box 1320 in the pachinko machine 1, and therefore, when tampering with the main control board 1310 in this state, only the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be visually observed. In addition, when an operator inspecting the main control board 1310 determines which of the multiple various through holes formed in the main control board 1310 is a through hole for an input signal wiring pattern, the operator can help determine whether or not the through hole is for an input signal wiring pattern by comparing the size of the land on the mounting surface (front side) 1310x and the land on the solder surface (back side) 1310y.

[12-1-4. Configuration in which an insulating film is covered on the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration in which the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the fourth embodiment is covered with an insulating film, as shown in Fig. 193 (a) and (b), a thin through hole is formed in the board thickness direction (the surface perpendicular (reverse surface perpendicular) direction of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310), and the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the copper foil surface of the solder surface (reverse surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are punched to form the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (reverse surface) side land KRDy1, each having an outer diameter KTHD1, and the mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and the solder surface (reverse surface) side wiring pattern are formed. The through hole KTH1 is formed by plating the entire inner circumferential surface of the through hole with electrical conductivity. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are outer diameter KTHD1 and are the same size, which is the same size as the outer diameter of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is covered on the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern in the first embodiment described above.

The mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN is electrically connected to another mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

On the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to form a mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr, and in the region of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1, a mounting surface (front surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is formed. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD1 is the same size as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment described above.

In contrast, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to form the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr, and the area of the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 is also applied with green resist liquid as an insulating coating to form the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting it out. A sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) is fixed to the manufacturing equipment and goes through a process of painting, a drying process, a process of drilling holes, and other processes, before each board is finally cut out. For this reason, when green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 is fixed to the manufacturing device so that the solder surface (back surface) 1310y faces vertically upward (the main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single fixed-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) and finally cutting it out, so that the rear surface of the single fixed-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) faces vertically upward), and the green resist liquid penetrates from the inner periphery of the solder surface (back surface) side of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 and blocks this hole. The green resist liquid that penetrates into the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 dries in a recessed state from the inner periphery of the solder surface (back surface) side of the through hole KTH1 toward the center of the hole due to its own weight.

In this way, on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, in the region of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, a mounting surface (surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, so that the outer periphery of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 toward the center of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is covered with green resist as an insulating coating. Also, on the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the area of the solder surface insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 is covered with green resist as an insulating coating, and green resist liquid penetrates from the inner periphery of the solder surface (rear surface) side of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 to block the hole. This allows the entire outer periphery of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to be covered with green resist as an insulating coating, so that the area of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed can be kept small, and the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 can be blocked. This makes it difficult to tamper with the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern by electrically switching them to, for example, a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power line on the main control board, and provides security measures for the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern. This contributes to improving security for the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern.

In addition, since the copper foil is exposed on the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, an electrical inspection (check for operation or abnormal potential) of the main control board 1310 can be performed by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 from the mounting surface (surface) side of the main control board 1310. In other words, when performing an electrical inspection of the main control board 1310, the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 can be used as a check terminal. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe, or a test lead used to check continuity with a so-called "tester."

Also, green resist liquid has seeped in from the inner edge of the solder side (back side) of through hole KTH1 in main control board 1310, blocking the hole, but the mounting side (front side) of through hole KTH1 in main control board 1310 is open. In other words, the solder side (back side) of through hole KTH1 in main control board 1310 is blocked with green resist liquid, while the mounting side (front side) is open. This is because if green resist liquid seeps into the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 from the inner periphery on the solder side (back side) and air remains inside the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, and the mounting side (front side) of the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 is blocked, liquid such as resist remover may remain inside the through-hole KTH1, which may corrode the conductive plating inside the through-hole KTH1 and cause poor contact, or the liquid inside the through-hole KTH1 may instantly vaporize and expand (a so-called "steam explosion") during a soldering process (such as reflow) where heat is applied, damaging the conductive plating inside the through-hole KTH1 and causing an electrical disconnection of the through-hole KTH1.

Although the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 hole exist, the presence of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 can be hidden by the green resist on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the presence of the through hole KTH1 hole can be hidden by the green resist on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 can be made less noticeable against the solid white resist applied to the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the hole of the through hole KTH1 can be made less noticeable. This makes it difficult for a tamper to discover the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern (the holes for the land KRDx1 and through-hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (front side)) for a tamperer who is attempting to electrically switch the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern to, for example, a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power line created on the main control board.

In addition, in the configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the fourth embodiment, in the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, in the region of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1, a mounting surface (front surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is formed, so that the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is smaller than the inner diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1. In the past, the outer periphery of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 toward the center was covered with white resist as an insulating coating, but as shown in FIG. 193(b), in a region of the mounting surface (surface) side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, a mounting surface (surface) side resist opening KBxra may be formed having an opening diameter KBxrD2 that is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, is even smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1, and is larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1. The inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 takes into account the resist liquid intrusion prevention area that spreads concentrically outward from the inner periphery of the through hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side, and is a distance dimension that prevents the resist liquid from intruding from the inner periphery of the through hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side (the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension must be at least 0.5 mm or more to prevent the white resist liquid from intruding into the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, and 0.5 mm is used in the configuration in which the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern in the fourth embodiment is covered with an insulating film). Therefore, the inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 is the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1 plus twice the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm), and is 1.0 mm larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1.

This allows the green resist to be covered as an insulating coating from almost the inside to the entire outer periphery of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 (i.e., the area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area). As a result, the area where the copper foil is exposed becomes the resist liquid intrusion prevention area, and the area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed can be kept extremely small.

In addition, since a resist liquid intrusion prevention area is provided for the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, when green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, even if the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is fixed to the manufacturing device so that it faces vertically upward (the main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single copper-clad laminate (substrate) of a fixed length and finally cutting them out, so that the front surface of the single copper-clad laminate (substrate) of a fixed length faces vertically upward) and the green resist liquid is actually applied, the green resist liquid will infiltrate the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 and dry without blocking the hole.

In addition, by covering the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 from almost the inside to the entire outer periphery (that is, the area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area) with green resist as an insulating coating, the exposed copper foil part becomes a resist liquid intrusion prevention area and is small, but since an electrical inspection of the main control board 1310 (operation check and abnormal potential check) can be performed by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 from the mounting surface (surface) side of the main control board 1310, the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 can be used as a check terminal when performing an electrical inspection of the main control board 1310. Note that the contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead for checking continuity with a so-called "tester".

[12-2. Wiring pattern to input terminal]

The detection signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 is input as a power failure warning signal to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB arranged third from the left in the figure among the lead terminals arranged in the upper row of the main control MPU 1310a through various wiring patterns (power failure warning signal wiring pattern) that transmit this detection signal. The detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is input as an RWM signal to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA arranged eighth from the left in the figure among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a through various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) that transmit this detection signal. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA, which is located 20th from the left in the figure (13th from the right in the figure) among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a, via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit this detection signal.

The various wiring patterns (power outage warning signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e on the main control board 1310, the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals (main RWM signals) from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633, and the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 are arranged close to each other and routed around the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 so as not to run parallel to each other (run side by side).

In addition, the various wiring patterns (power outage warning signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310, the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals (main RWM signals) from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633, and the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 are routed only to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 without passing through through holes that electrically connect the wiring patterns between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y.

In this way, various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a, which can change the setting probability of awarding a benefit to a player, are formed on the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, making it difficult to see how the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) are routed when viewed from the mounting surface (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which contributes to making it difficult to tamper with the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns).This therefore contributes to improved security. In addition, by forming various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals (main RWM signals) from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 used for changing settings on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, it is possible to make it difficult to visually determine how the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) are routed when viewed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which can contribute to making it difficult to tamper with the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns). Therefore, it can contribute to improving security. In addition, by forming various wiring patterns (power failure warning signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, it is possible to make it difficult to see how the various wiring patterns (power failure warning signal wiring patterns) are routed when viewed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which contributes to making it difficult to tamper with the various wiring patterns (power failure warning signal wiring patterns). Therefore, it can contribute to improving security.

When changing the setting value, as described above, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d are important signals that enable the setting of the probability of generating a game state advantageous to the player to be changed, and in the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, it is necessary to make it difficult for the hall staff to illegally change the setting to an unintended probability.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a, which allows the probability of awarding a benefit to the player to be changed, and the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d, are routed on the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 so as not to be placed close to each other and not to run parallel to each other (not running side by side). As a result, the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d are separated from each other and input to predetermined input terminals (PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), PA0 (RWM signal input terminal)) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, making it difficult to tamper with the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d at the same time. This can contribute to improving the security of setting changes.

The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal to a predetermined input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns), and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input as an RWM signal to a predetermined input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns). The input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA is arranged eighth from the left in the figure among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a, while the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA is arranged twentieth from the left in the figure (thirteenth from the right in the figure) among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a. In this way, the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal and the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input as an RWM signal are not arranged adjacent to each other. Between a specific input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a and a specific input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input as an RWM signal, other lead terminals (specifically, the 9th to 19th lead terminals from the left in the figure among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a, a total of 11 lead terminals arranged in the lower row) are arranged so as to be interposed.

As described above, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, foil punching areas are formed in which the copper foil is punched out around the through-holes into which the lead terminals of the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a are inserted, excluding those electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground), around the +5V power supply wiring pattern, around the signal output wiring pattern, around the input signal wiring pattern, and around specific through-holes (for example, through-holes electrically connecting the output signal wiring patterns between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y). In addition, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, as described above, the logic of the setting key signal becomes LOW (logic that conveys a setting possible state) and is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is operated, as described above, the logic of the RWM signal becomes LOW (logic that conveys a pressing operation state) and is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. This makes it difficult to make unauthorized tampering by electrically switching the input terminals PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and ground (GND) (board ground) by foil cutting around the input terminals PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), and can contribute to improving security.

In addition to between the terminals of the setting key signal input terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, which is electrically connected to various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the RWM signal input terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, which is electrically connected to various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633, The peripheral terminals (other adjacent terminals) of the setting key signal input terminal and the peripheral terminals (adjacent terminals) of the RWM signal input terminal may be electrically connected to wiring patterns that input other signals and wiring patterns that output other signals so that the logic of the RWM signal that sets the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d in a state where it is not operated is HI (logic that conveys a non-pressing operation state) and the logic of the setting key signal that sets the setting key switch 1311a in an OFF state is HI (logic that conveys a setting disabled state). This makes it difficult to make unauthorized changes to the RWM signal input terminal and the setting key signal input terminal, which contributes to improving security.

In addition, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal to a specified input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns), and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input as an RWM signal to a specified input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns).As a result, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d are input to lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a, but for example, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a may be input from the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a to the lead terminals arranged in the upper row. When the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal to a specific input terminal PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns), the input terminal PB7 of the input port PB is arranged as the 22nd from the left in the figure (11th from the right in the figure) of the lead terminals arranged in the upper row of the main control MPU 1310a. In this way, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input from the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a to the lead terminals arranged in the upper row, and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input to the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a, so that even if a configuration is adopted in which two detection signals are input to the lead terminals of the upper and lower rows, it can contribute to improving the security of setting changes.

The logical states of the input ports PA and PB of the main control MPU 1310a are treated as memory information in an address space using the memory-mapped I/O method, and for example, for input port PA, the main control MPU 1310a can simultaneously obtain the logical state of each input terminal at the same address. Similarly, for input port PB, the main control MPU 1310a can simultaneously obtain the logical state of each input terminal at the same address (an address different from that of input port PA). The input ports PA and PB of the main control MPU 1310a are input ports having 8 bits, and each of the input terminals PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) to PA7 and PB0 to PB7 of the input ports PA and PB is assigned in advance to one of the bits ranging from the 0th bit to the 7th bit.

[Summary A]
A1. As described above, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input to the input terminal PA5 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, but the wiring patterns electrically connecting the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a, the lead terminals (resistors MR10 to MR13, capacitor MC10, transistor MTR10) of the electronic components constituting the main control input circuit 1310b, and the lead terminal (input terminal PA5 of the input port PA) of the main control MPU 1310a are all formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, which is the surface opposite to the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

A2. In order to form a wiring pattern on the signal transmission path between the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a and the lead terminal (input terminal PA5 of input port PA) of the main control MPU 1310a by running it around to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, as described above, the through holes that electrically connect the wiring patterns between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are not formed in the main control board 1310 for this wiring pattern.

A3. In the signal transmission path between the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a and the lead terminal (input terminal PA5 of input port PA) of the main control MPU 1310a, it is difficult to route the wiring pattern only on the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and it is necessary to also use the mounting surface (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310. In this case, when forming a through hole that electrically connects the wiring pattern between the mounting surface (front side) 1310x and the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, as shown in Figures 190 to 193, the outer periphery of the land of the through hole or the entirety of the mounting surface (front side) 1310x and/or the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is covered with a green resist, which is an insulating coating.

A4. As described above, the main control board 1310 is housed and sealed in the main control board box 1320, which is made up of the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 and can be opened and closed by a longitudinal sliding method. The main control board box 1320 is attached to the back side of the cover body 1301 so that the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces the inside of the cover body 1301. In this state, when the base body 1302 is moved in the longitudinal direction to match a predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the outer peripheral surface of the base body 1302 fits within the inner peripheral surface of the cover body 1301, and the main control board 1310 is housed in the space formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. After that, the one-way screw or the like of the crimping portion 1303, which is the sealing portion, is screwed in to fix the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302, and the main control board box is sealed.

A5. The setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is rotated by inserting the setting key into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, as described above. When the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key switch 1311a is pressed and the main control board 1310 is bent and warped, which may cause the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 to break. Therefore, in order to prevent the main control board 1310 from bending, a protrusion 1302p shown in FIG. 185 is formed on the base body 1302 in an area corresponding to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which is the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310.

When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and the setting key switch 1311a is not pressed (when the setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated to release the pressure from the setting key, or when the setting key is not inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a), as described above, a distance dimension d2 (e.g., about 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. When the setting key switch 1311a is pressed, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, preventing the main control board 1310 from bending.

A6. As described above, a distance dimension d2 (e.g., approximately 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, so that when the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and the setting key switch 1311a is not pressed (when a setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated to release the pressure by the setting key, or when the setting key is not inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a in the first place), there is no contact between the front surface of the protrusion 1302p and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. In addition, when the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are slid when assembling the main control board box 1320, or when the main control board box is released from its sealed state and the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are slid when removing the main control board 1310, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p abuts against the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to prevent the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 from being damaged.

The front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 may come into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, in the area of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p may come into contact and the area corresponding to the surrounding area, the copper foil portion (copper foil layer, copper plane) is removed as shown in FIG. 186(b). The entire area from which the copper foil portion (copper foil layer, copper plane) has been removed is covered with a green resist insulating film. Even if the green resist insulating film formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is rubbed off by the front surface of the protrusion 1302p due to repeated pressing of the setting key switch 1311a, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p will not come into contact with the copper foil portion (copper foil layer, copper plane). This prevents the front surface of the protrusion 1302p from coming into contact with the wiring pattern or the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, preventing the wiring pattern from being damaged or broken by the front surface of the protrusion 1302p, and also preventing damage to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

A7. As described above, the main control board 1310 is housed and sealed in the main control board box 1320, which is composed of the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 and can be opened and closed by a longitudinal sliding method. The main control board box 1320 is attached to the back side of the cover body 1301 so that the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces the inside of the cover body 1301. In this state, when the base body 1302 is moved in the longitudinal direction to match a predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the outer peripheral surface of the base body 1302 fits within the inner peripheral surface of the cover body 1301, and the main control board 1310 is housed in the space formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. When the base body 1302 is moved in the longitudinal direction to match a predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also moves in the longitudinal direction. The solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the area where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves is formed so that the wiring pattern is not routed. This is because, although a distance dimension d2 (for example, about 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the front surface of the protrusion 1302p and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, when the base body 1302 is moved in the longitudinal direction to match the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 may rub against the green resist, which is an insulating coating formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board, and it is necessary to prevent the wiring pattern from being damaged or broken.

In addition, a solid ground (GND) (board ground) may not be formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the area where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 moves, in addition to the wiring pattern. This is because, although a distance dimension d2 (e.g., about 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the front surface of the protrusion 1302p and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, when the base body 1302 is moved in the longitudinal direction to match the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p may rub against the green resist, which is an insulating coating formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and therefore it is necessary to prevent damage to the solid ground (GND) (board ground).

A8. The protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a cylindrical shape. In this way, the area in which the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves can be the area in which the front surface (circular shape) of the cylinder that is the protrusion 1302p moves. Therefore, the area in which the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves can be reduced by the protrusion 1302p sliding parallel to the lower side of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), so that the distance dimension in the left-right direction is the length of the sliding movement of the protrusion 1302p, and the distance dimension in the up-down direction is the diameter of the cylinder. This can contribute to increasing the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern when routing the wiring pattern by avoiding the area in which the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves.

In addition, by sliding the protrusion 1302p parallel to the bottom edge of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), the vertical distance dimension in the area where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves becomes the diameter of a cylinder and is constant, and when the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to match a predetermined position of the cover body 1301, interference between the side surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the lead terminals of the electronic components soldered to the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 (the lead terminals of the setting key switch 1311a (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal)) can be prevented (suppressed).

A9. The protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 may be formed in a shape having a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 (a shape having a constant width dimension equal to the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 1302p). In this way, the region in which the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves is the length of the sliding movement of the protrusion 1302p in the left-right direction by the protrusion 1302p sliding in parallel along the lower edge of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), and the distance dimension in the up-down direction can be the constant width of the protrusion 1302p. As a result, when the wiring pattern is routed to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 near the position corresponding to the area where the protrusion 1302p moves, the wiring pattern can be routed to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 along the longitudinal shape of the protrusion 1302p, so that the wiring pattern and the longitudinal shape of the protrusion 1302p can be in a parallel positional relationship, and it is possible to prevent the front surface of the protrusion 1302p from rubbing against the green resist, which is an insulating coating formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and damaging or disconnecting the wiring pattern.

In addition, by sliding the protrusion 1302p parallel to the bottom edge of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), the vertical distance dimension in the area where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves becomes a constant width of the protrusion 1302p and is constant, and when the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to match a predetermined position of the cover body 1301, interference between the side surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the lead terminals of the electronic components soldered to the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 (the lead terminals of the setting key switch 1311a (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal)) can be prevented (suppressed).

A10. The protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 is not formed to have a long shape along the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. If the protrusion 1302p were formed to have a long shape along the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, when the base body 1302 is moved in the longitudinal direction to match a predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the side of the protrusion 1302p would interfere with the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the electronic components soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. For this reason, the protrusion 1302p is not formed to have a long shape along the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. In this way, when the base body 1302 is moved in the longitudinal direction to match the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, interference between the side surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the lead terminals of the electronic components soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 (the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a) can be prevented (suppressed).

A11. As shown in FIG. 184, the setting key switch 1311a is composed of a setting key cylinder 1311ab into which the setting key is inserted and turned, a rectangular parallelepiped base body 1311ac that is connected to the outer cylinder 1311aa and forms a circuit that turns the contacts ON or OFF by turning the setting key cylinder 1311ab, and a frame plate 1311ad in which a hole is formed through the outer cylinder 1311aa at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa, and a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada that protrude rearward from the base body 1311ac are formed on both sides by bending the frame plate 1311ad so as to cover the surface and side of the base body 1311ac. The setting key cylinder 1311ab is molded from a resin having non-conductivity, and the frame plate 1311ad is molded from a metal having conductivity. The setting key cylinder 1311ab and the frame plate 1311ad are not electrically connected and are non-conductive, being electrically insulated.

A12. The lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a are inserted into through holes from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and soldered protruding from the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and are electrically connected by the internal circuit of the setting key switch 1311a to a wiring pattern that forms a signal transmission path to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada is formed on the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a. As shown in FIG. 186, the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada are inserted into the long through holes SLH1, SLH2 from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310 of the main control board 1310 and soldered to protrude from the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, so that they are electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a and the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected.

The pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada of the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are inserted into the long through holes SLH1, SLH2 from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and soldered to protrude from the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, but are not electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a may be in an electrically floating state.

A13. The locking unit 650, which locks the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, is made of conductive metal. Unlike the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, the locking unit 650 is earthed to the island equipment of the game hall via an earth wire (not shown).

A14. The operator who operates the setting key switch 1311a must first release the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and must insert a key (this key is a conductive metal key. Hereinafter, it may be referred to as a "metal key") into the keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131 in the locking unit 650 and turn it. Even if the operator is charged with an electric potential, the electric potential of the operator can be released by being grounded to the island equipment of the game hall via the locking unit 650 and an earth wire (not shown) by the operator inserting the metal key into the keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131 in the locking unit 650, and the electric potential of the operator can be removed.

Even if an operator inserts a setting key into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, any charged potential on the operator has already been earthed to the island equipment of the amusement hall and removed, so damage to the setting key switch 1311a due to electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the charged potential on the operator can be prevented. Even if an operator inserts the setting key into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a while still charged, the setting key cylinder 1311ab and frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are electrically insulated as described above, so the charged potential on the operator does not penetrate through the setting key cylinder 1311ab to the conductive metal frame plate 1311ad connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and damage to the main control board 1310 can be prevented. (Naturally, the signal terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) which are the lead terminals of the setting key switch 1311a are insulated from the frame plate 1311ad and the setting key cylinder 1311ab.)

Furthermore, since the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a does not remain in a charged state.

In addition, if the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is not connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, together with the frame plate 1311ad, will not be electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. Even if an operator inserts a setting key into the socket 1311aba formed on the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab while the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected (insulated) to neither the frame plate 1311ad nor the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, the electric potential of the operator does not intrude into the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 via the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and damage to the main control board 1310 can be prevented. However, since the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, if the setting key switch 1311a becomes charged, it cannot discharge.

The long through holes SLH1', SLH2' to which the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada of the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are soldered are not electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 and are in an electrically floating state. Through hole SLTH4, through which the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted, through hole SLTH3, through which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted, and through hole SLTH1, through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted, are electrically connected to wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2, and through hole SLTH1 is further electrically connected to wiring pattern SPTN3, and through hole SLTH2, through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted, is electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

In this way, since the wiring patterns SPTN1 to SPTN3 and the through holes SLTH1 to SLTH4 are present around the long through holes SLH1', SLH2', a solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310 is formed between the long through holes SLH1', SLH2' and the wiring patterns SPTN1 to SPTN3, and a solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310 is formed between the long through holes SLH1', SLH2' and the through holes SLTH1 to SLTH4. By forming a land, if the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 and the setting key switch 1311a becomes charged, even if it is unable to discharge, it is necessary to ensure that the long through holes SLH1', SLH2' and the wiring patterns SPTN1 to SPTN3 are not adjacent to each other without the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 being interposed, so that there is no influence from this. Also, it is necessary to ensure that the long through holes SLH1', SLH2' and the through holes SLTH1 to SLTH4 are not adjacent to each other without the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 being interposed.

[Summary B]
B1. The setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633 is another lead terminal different from the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA.

The logical states of input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a are treated as memory information in an address space by the memory-mapped I/O method, and the main control MPU 1310a can simultaneously acquire them at the same address. In other words, as described above, input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a are each assigned in advance to one of the bits ranging from 0th bit to 7th bit for a given port having 8 bits.

As described above, the IC package of the main control MPU 1310a is a ZIP (Zigzag)
The main control MPU 1310a is an In-line Package, and the lead terminals protruding vertically from the bottom surface of the main body of the main control MPU 1310a are alternately bent and arranged in two rows along the longitudinal direction. The input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA are not arranged adjacent to each other in one of the two rows.

For example, when input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA are arranged in one of the two rows, other lead terminals are arranged between input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA so that input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA are not arranged next to each other.

B2. The setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633 is another lead terminal different from the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA. By electrically connecting them, the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA were arranged in one of the two rows, but the setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 may be electrically connected so that they are each arranged in separate rows of the two rows.

B3. The setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633 is another lead terminal different from the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and is connected to the input port The setting key signal input terminal to which the setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected and the RWM signal input terminal to which the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 is electrically connected may be obtained at different addresses. In other words, the setting key signal input terminal and the RWM signal input terminal may be assigned in advance to be able to be obtained separately by different input ports. When input terminals (lead terminals) are arranged together for each input port of the main control MPU 1310a, the setting key signal input terminal and the RWM signal input terminal can be separated from each other by making the addresses different.

B4. The logical state of the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and transmitted via the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, has a logic (HI) that conveys a setting disabled state and a logic (LOW) that conveys a setting enabled state. The logic (HI) that conveys a setting disabled state is that the voltage of the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) is raised to the +5V power line side created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, while the logic (LOW) that conveys a setting enabled state is that the voltage of the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) is lowered to the ground (GND) (board ground) side of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, the circuit is configured so that the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and other adjacent input terminals (or other input terminals around the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal)) are electrically connected to the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310. As a result, even if an unauthorized modification is made to short-circuit the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and other adjacent input terminals, the voltage of the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) is raised to the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and the logical state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a transmitted via the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), becomes a logic (HI) that indicates a setting disabled state, making it impossible to change the setting.

The logic state of the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 and transmitted via the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, is a logic (HI) that conveys a non-pressed operation state and a logic (LOW) that conveys a pressed operation state. The logic (HI) that conveys a non-pressed operation state is a logic that pulls up the voltage of the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) to the +5V power line side created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, while the logic (LOW) that conveys a pressed operation state is a logic that pulls down the voltage of the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) to the ground (GND) (board ground) side of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, like input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) is also configured so that other input terminals adjacent to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) (or other input terminals in the periphery of input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal)) are electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310. As a result, even if unauthorized modification is made to short-circuit another input terminal adjacent to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), the voltage of the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) is pulled up to the +5V power line side created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, so that the logical state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d transmitted via the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), will ultimately become a logic (HI) that conveys a non-pressed operation state, making it impossible to change the settings.

In addition to between the terminals of the setting key signal input terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, which is electrically connected to various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the RWM signal input terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, which is electrically connected to various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633, The peripheral terminals (other adjacent terminals) of the setting key signal input terminal and the peripheral terminals (adjacent terminals) of the RWM signal input terminal may be electrically connected to wiring patterns that input other signals and wiring patterns that output other signals so that the logic of the RWM signal that sets the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d in a state where it is not operated is HI (logic that conveys a non-pressing operation state) and the logic of the setting key signal that sets the setting key switch 1311a in an OFF state is HI (logic that conveys a setting disabled state). This makes it difficult to make unauthorized changes to the RWM signal input terminal and the setting key signal input terminal, which contributes to improving security.

B5. As described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the logic of the setting key signal becomes LOW (logic that conveys a settable state) and is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, no ground (GND) (board ground) is formed around the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and around the setting key signal wiring pattern that is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), and a foil cut-out area is formed to prevent the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and the setting key signal wiring pattern from being improperly short-circuited to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. In other words, a ground (GND) (board ground) that causes the logic of the setting key signal that sets the setting key switch 1311a to the ON state to be LOW (logic that conveys a setting possible state) is not formed (placed) around the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and around the setting key signal wiring pattern that is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal). This makes it possible to prevent the voltage applied to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and the setting key signal wiring pattern from being improperly pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

In addition, when the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is operated, as described above, the logic of the RWM signal becomes LOW (logic that conveys the pressing operation state) and is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, no ground (GND) (board ground) is formed around the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and around the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), and a foil cut-out area is formed so that the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and the RWM signal wiring pattern that are electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) are not improperly short-circuited to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. In other words, around the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and around the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), a ground (GND) (board ground) where the logic of the RWM signal that sets the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d in a state in which it is operated is LOW (logic that conveys the pressing operation state) is not formed (arranged). This makes it possible to prevent the voltage applied to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and the RWM signal wiring pattern from being improperly pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

B6. The logical state of the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and transmitted via the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, is a logic (HI) that indicates a setting disabled state and a logic (LOW) that indicates a setting enabled state. Also, the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633, which is transmitted via the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, The logical state of a certain operation signal is a logic (HI) that conveys a non-pressed operation state and a logic (LOW) that conveys a pressed operation state, and the logic (HI) that conveys a non-setting state and the logic (HI) that conveys a non-pressed operation state are the same logic (HI), and the logic (LOW) that conveys a settable state and the logic (LOW) that conveys a pressed operation state are the same logic (LOW). Alternatively, the logical states of the logic that conveys a non-setting state and the logic that conveys a pressed operation state may be the same logic (HI or LOW), and the logical states of the logic that conveys a settable state and the logic that conveys a non-pressed operation state may be the same logic (LOW or HI). Compared to using the same logic for communicating the settable state and the same logic for communicating the pressed state, using the same logic for communicating the settable state and the same logic for communicating the pressed state allows someone attempting to tamper with input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), setting key signal wiring pattern, input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), and RWM signal wiring pattern to take time to understand the logic of this combination, and ultimately results in one being shorted to ground (GND) (board ground) and the other to the power supply, which contributes to time-consuming and laborious work and makes it more difficult to tamper with the RWM signal input terminal, setting key signal wiring pattern, setting key signal input terminal, and RWM signal wiring pattern, thereby contributing to improved security.

In addition, when the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, as described above, the main control board 1310 is arranged (sandwiched) in a gap (space) formed by the cover body side rib portions 1301rb formed in multiple numbers on the cover body 1301 and the base body side rib portions 1302rb formed in multiple numbers on the base body 1302. In addition, as described above, the base body 1302 is formed with a protrusion 1302p that can abut against the solder surface (rear surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. When a metallic setting key is inserted into a socket 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the force of the insertion causes the main control board 1310 to bend and warp, the protrusion 1302p comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310, thereby preventing the main control board 1310 from bending and warping any further, and preventing disconnection of the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 and peeling of the solder. In the region of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 comes into contact and around the region, a foil cut-out region SINSy having a circular shape where the copper foil has been cut out is formed, as shown in FIG. 186(b). This prevents damage to the solid ground (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 by the protrusion 1302p, even if the solder surface insulating coating 1310yr is scraped off by the protrusion 1302p. The foil cut area SINSy, which has a circular shape where the copper foil has been cut out, safely and effectively utilizes the limited board area.

B7. The setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the RWM switch 633d is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633, so that the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are mounted on separate control boards. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5 and the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 provided on the main frame 4 are arranged apart from each other, so that even if someone tries to cheat, they need to tamper with both the setting key switch 1311a side and the RWM switch 633d side, which takes a very long time, so that a cheater who sees the arrangement of the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d will lose the motivation to tamper, making it difficult to cheat.

When actually changing the settings, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a, and then operate the power switch 630a to power on the pachinko machine 1 while operating the RWM switch 633d. The power switch 630a is mounted on the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c that is attached to the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, so the setting key switch 1311a, RWM switch 633d, and power switch 630a required to change the settings are each mounted on separate boards.

B8. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front side) of the dispensing control board 633 were input to specified input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b (an input circuit mainly composed of resistors and transistors and having a common circuit configuration) without an error detection function mounted on the mounting surface (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 179, but they may also be input to the specified input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via dedicated ICs each equipped with an input circuit (i.e., the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input via a dedicated IC for setting key input, and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input via a dedicated IC for RWM input). This makes it difficult to tamper with the logical state of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, which contributes to improved fraud prevention measures.

The main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is an input circuit mainly composed of resistors and transistors, and has a common circuit configuration, so the transistors of multiple main control input circuits 1310b may be combined into a single IC to form a DIP-type transistor array.

B9. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front side) of the dispensing control board 633 were input to specified input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b (an input circuit mainly composed of resistors and transistors and having a common circuit configuration) without an error detection function mounted on the mounting surface (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 179. However, they may also be input to the specified input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via dedicated ICs each equipped with an input circuit (i.e., the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input via a dedicated IC for setting key input, and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input via a dedicated IC for RWM input). In this case, resistors and transistors that make up the main control input circuit 1310b without other error detection functions are placed between the separate dedicated ICs. This makes it difficult to distinguish which circuit is receiving the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and which is receiving the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, which contributes to improving fraud prevention measures.

B10. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front side) of the dispensing control board 633 are input to specified input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function, as shown in FIG. 179. When using a DIP type transistor array in which multiple transistors of the main control input circuit 1310b are integrated into one IC, the input terminal of the DIP type transistor array to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input and the input terminal of the DIP type transistor array to which the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input are arranged so that they are not adjacent to each other, or the wiring pattern is arranged so that the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input to one of the multiple input terminals protruding from one side of the DIP type transistor array, and the wiring pattern is arranged so that the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input to one of the multiple input terminals protruding from the other side. This can contribute to improving fraud prevention measures.

B11. The voltages of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 are pulled up to the power line side by resistors MR16 and MR5, as shown in FIG. 179. These resistors MR16 and MR5 are pull-up resistors MR16 and MR5, and are arranged away from the setting key switch 1311a. Specifically, the resistor MR16 constituting the logic inversion circuit 1310iv has one end electrically connected to the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and the other end electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and is arranged to the right of the connector MCN8 arranged to the right of the setting key switch 1311a. Resistor MR2 constituting main control input circuit 1310b without error detection function has one end electrically connected to the +5V power line created by +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in main control board 1310, and the other end electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a, and is arranged above the lead type resistor group arranged above setting key switch 1311a. Since RWM switch 633d is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of dispensing control board 633, resistors MR16 and MR5 are arranged away from RWM switch 633d. If resistors MR16 and MR5 are tampered with, there is a risk that the logical state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and the logical state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, may be tampered with. Therefore, by separating resistors MR16 and MR5 from the setting key switch 1311a (RWM switch 633d), resistors MR16 and MR5 can be blended in with other electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the presence of important resistors MR16 and MR5 can be hidden.

In addition, by separating resistors MR16 and MR5 from the setting key switch 1311a (RWM switch 633d), even if unauthorized access is attempted by inserting a long, thin unauthorized tool such as a wire through a gap between the setting key switch 1311a and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, unauthorized tampering with resistors MR16 and MR5 is made more difficult, which contributes to improved security.

B12. The resistor MR16 constituting the logic inversion circuit 1310iv has one end electrically connected to the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and the other end electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and is located to the right of the connector MCN8 located to the right of the setting key switch 1311a. The resistor MR2 constituting the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function has one end electrically connected to the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and the other end electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and is located further above the lead-type resistor group located above the setting key switch 1311a. In this way, the resistors MR16 and MR5 are arranged at a distance. This makes resistors MR16 and MR5 blend in with other electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, making it difficult to notice that they are important electronic components related to the logical state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and the logical state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d.

In addition, by separating resistors MR16 and MR5 from each other, it becomes more difficult to tamper with resistors MR16 and MR5 simultaneously, which contributes to improved security.

B13. Between the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function, to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633 are input, and the main control MPU 1310a, various DIP type ICs, lead type resistors, lead type diodes, lead type capacitors, lead type electrolytic capacitors, and DIP type crystal oscillators are arranged as other circuits, as shown in FIG. 187. In this way, even if an attempt is made to insert a long and thin illegal tool such as a wire into the main control board box 1320 to short-circuit the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, the intrusion of the illegal tool can be prevented by the other circuits, and the short circuit to the other circuits can be induced, preventing the operation of the main control board 1310 and making it impossible to play. In addition, even if the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function, which receives the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633, is replaced with a dedicated IC equipped with an input circuit, another circuit is arranged between the dedicated IC. Even with this configuration, even if an attempt is made to insert a long, thin illegal tool such as a wire into the main control board box 1320 to short-circuit the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, the intrusion of the illegal tool can be prevented by the other circuit, and the operation of the main control board 1310 can be blocked by inducing a short circuit to another circuit, making it impossible to play.

B14. The detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633 may be configured to be transmitted by coupling the game board side drawer connector and the main frame side drawer connector. In this case, the wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d from the board on which the game board side drawer connector is mounted is formed on the surface opposite to the surface on which the game board side drawer connector is mounted (or is covered by the drawer connector even if it is formed on the mounting surface on which the game board side drawer connector is mounted), making it difficult to see, and the wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d from the board on which the main frame side drawer connector is mounted is formed on the surface opposite to the surface on which the main frame side drawer connector is mounted (or is covered by the drawer connector even if it is formed on the mounting surface on which the main frame side drawer connector is mounted), making it difficult to see.

Now, we will explain the drawer connector. The drawer connector is a connector that can automatically electrically connect the main frame 4 and the game board 5 simply by attaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4. A game board side drawer connector (convex type) is provided on the game board side relay board that is placed at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the game board 5, and a main frame side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on the main frame side relay board that is placed at a predetermined position on the front surface of the main frame 4.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided into the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4, and each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (concave type) of the game board 5 is electrically connected to each terminal of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4.

For example, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4 is described below. The main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) is made of a non-conductive resin, has a rectangular opening on the front side and a box-shaped main body that is long in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped base body that is long in the left-right direction is integrally formed on the rear side of the box-shaped main body, giving it an overall shape that resembles the letter T.

Around the opening of the box-shaped body, inclined portions are formed extending from the front of the opening toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped body for a predetermined distance to guide the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped body. In the central part (one place) of the inner top surface of the opening of the box-shaped main body and in the left and right parts (one place on the left part and one place on the right part) of the inner top surface, grooves are formed from near the front of the opening of the box-shaped main body to the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body to prevent the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 from being inserted upside down in a direction different from the normal direction into the main frame side drawer connector (concave type), and to prevent misalignment in the left and right direction between the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 and the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) when the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is inserted into the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) in the normal direction, thereby improving the fit between the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 and the main frame side drawer connector (concave type).

On the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body, two rows of pin-type terminals (six pin-type terminals in one row in the left-right direction) are arranged perpendicular to the bottom surface and penetrate the box-shaped main body and the base body.

Mounting through holes are formed on the left and right sides of the base body. When mounting a main frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the main frame side relay board, rivets are first inserted into the mounting through holes from the front of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) and the ends are crimped and plastically deformed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main frame side relay board. This fixes the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the main frame side relay board.

In addition, a cylindrical protrusion is formed on the back surface of the base body so that when the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) is mounted on the main frame side relay board, the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) is mounted in the correct orientation on the main frame side relay board.

The main frame side relay board is equipped with a small DIP (Dual Inline Package) type connector that is electrically connected to the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) in addition to the main frame side drawer connector (concave type), and is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness). When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided to the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4, and each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (concave type) is electrically connected to each terminal of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type), forming a control signal line that transmits various control signals from the main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5 and the payout control board 633 provided on the main frame 4 via the small DIP type connector and wiring (harness).

The main frame side drawer connector (concave type) electrically connects the main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5 to the payout control board 633 provided on the main frame 4, and also electrically connects to various power supply lines (including ground (GND)) that supply various power sources from the power supply board 630 to various boards provided on the game board 5. In addition to the main frame side drawer connector (concave type), another main frame side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on another main frame side relay board separate from the main frame side relay board. In addition to the other main frame side drawer connector (concave type), this other main frame side relay board is equipped with a small DIP (Dual Inline Package) type connector that is electrically connected to this other main frame side drawer connector (concave type), and is electrically connected to each decorative board and various sensors provided on the door frame 3 via wiring (harness). When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, another game board drawer connector (convex type) other than the game board drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 which is electrically connected to the main body frame drawer connector (concave type) is guided to the other main body frame drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4, and each terminal of the other game board drawer connector (convex type) is electrically connected to each terminal of the other main body frame drawer connector (concave type), thereby forming a control signal line that transmits various control signals and detection signals from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5, and the various decorative boards, various sensors, and various speakers provided on the door frame 3, via a small DIP type connector and wiring (harness). The structure of the other main frame side drawer connector (concave type) is the same as that of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type), and the method of fixing the other main frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the other main frame side relay board is the same as the method of fixing the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the main frame side relay board (fixing method using rivets).

The method of fixing the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4 to the game board side relay board, and the method of fixing the other game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the other main frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4 to the other game board side relay board (this other game board side relay board is different from the game board side relay board on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4 is mounted) are the same as the method of fixing the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the main frame side relay board (fixing method using rivets).

The reason why rivets are used when fixing the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the main frame side relay board is that, although the use of the drawer connector allows the main frame 4 and the game board 5 to be automatically electrically connected simply by mounting the game board 5 to the main frame 4, when mounting the game board 5 to the main frame 4, a large force may be applied from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 to the box-shaped main body of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type), and this large force is used to prevent the soldered surface of each pin-type terminal in the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) from peeling off from the back surface (solder surface) of the main frame side relay board. Note that when the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) is fixed to the main frame side relay board or when the game board side drawer connector (convex type) is fixed to the game board side relay board using bolts and nuts, there is a disadvantage that the nuts may loosen when the game board 5 is mounted on or removed from the main frame 4.

In this embodiment, pin-type terminals are used for the main frame side drawer connector (concave type), but if a bellows type terminal and contact are used, the following problem occurs. For example, if the terminals of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 are terminals and the terminals of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4 are contacts, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 with the power turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the contacts between the terminals and the contacts (specifically, the contacts for the various power supply lines through which a large current (inrush current) flows) will be welded. If you try to force the game board 5 into the main frame 4 in this welded state, the contacts of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) will bend and break, or when you remove the game board 5 from the main frame 4, the contacts will peel off and break from the main frame side drawer connector (concave type), making it impossible to use the main frame side drawer connector (concave type).

In addition, if the terminal and contact become welded together, this can damage the connector, which can cause various control boards to malfunction or damage the electronic components mounted on the various control boards, so there is a need to provide a dedicated circuit to prevent welding.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned problems do not occur at all because pin-type terminals are used for the main frame side drawer connector (concave type). In other words, even if an operator mistakenly attaches the game board 5 to the main frame 4 while the power is on to the pachinko machine 1, the terminals of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 and the terminals of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4 will not weld together, and there is no need to provide a dedicated circuit to prevent welding.

B15. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 may be a pulse signal or a serial signal (command transmission) instead of an ON signal or an OFF signal.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above is equipped with the game board 5 of FIG. 11 in which the game area 5a into which the released game balls flow down is defined, and is equipped with the main control board 1310 of FIG. 188 having a mounting surface (front surface) 1310x into which the lead terminals of the electronic components are inserted to mount the electronic components, and a soldering surface (back surface) 1310y into which the lead terminals of the electronic components inserted therein are soldered.

The mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is equipped with a ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a (see FIG. 188) as a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game, and also with a setting key switch 1311a (see FIG. 188) as an operating unit that is an electronic component that can change the probability of awarding a benefit to a player electrically connected to the main control MPU 1310a.

The lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a and the setting key switch 1311a are soldered to the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310. The wiring pattern electrically connecting the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a and the setting key switch 1311a is formed only on the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

In this way, by forming a wiring pattern that transmits a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, which is an operating unit that can change the setting of the probability of awarding a benefit to a player, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, it is possible to make it difficult to see how the wiring pattern is routed when viewed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which contributes to making the wiring pattern more difficult to tamper with. This therefore contributes to improved security.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above is equipped with the game board 5 of FIG. 11 in which the game area 5a into which the launched game balls flow is partitioned, and is equipped with a setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 of FIG. 188 as a first operation unit that can change the probability of awarding a profit to the player, a main control built-in RAM of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 188 as a storage unit that can store and hold game information, a main control board 1310 of FIG. 188 as a control board on which the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 188 is mounted as a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game, and an RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board of FIG. 182 as a second operation unit that can clear (erase) the game information stored (held) in the main control built-in RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a can change the setting of the probability of awarding a benefit to a player based on an operation signal that is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and an operation signal that is a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d.

The setting key signal wiring pattern is formed on the main control board 1310 as a first transmission path through which the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, is input to the main control MPU 1310a, and the RWM signal wiring pattern is formed as a second transmission path through which the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, is input to the main control MPU 1310a, so that they do not run parallel to each other.

In this way, the setting key signal wiring pattern, which is the first transmission path through which the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, which is the first operation unit that can change the setting probability of awarding a profit to a player, is input to the main control MPU 1310a, and the RWM signal wiring pattern, which is the second transmission path through which the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, which is the second operation unit that can clear (erase) the game information held in the main control built-in RAM provided in the main control MPU 1310a, is input to the main control MPU 1310a, are formed on the main control board 1310 so as not to run parallel to each other. As a result, the setting key signal wiring pattern, which is the first transmission path, and the RWM signal wiring pattern, which is the second transmission path, are input to the main control MPU 1310a separated from each other, making it difficult to tamper with the setting key signal wiring pattern, which is the first transmission path, and the RWM signal wiring pattern, which is the second transmission path, at the same time. This contributes to improving security.

[13. Game Contents]
The game contents of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 137, 144, and 145. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the player rotates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3, and the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 is shot into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and a game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B shot into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the shooting strength. The shooting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the rotation amount of the handle 195, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be shot, and up to 100 game balls B can be shot continuously in one minute, that is, at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, within the game area 5a, multiple obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed and various movements are imparted to the game ball B, allowing the player to enjoy its movements. In addition to the obstacle nails N, within the game area 5a, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided above the upper left side unit 2300 and to the left of the center role 2500.

When a game ball B is shot into the top of the center device 2500 and enters the area to the left of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center device 2500 when viewed from the front, it will flow down the area to the left of the center device 2500 while abutting against multiple obstacle nails N. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area to the left of the center device 2500 enters a warp entrance 2511 that opens into the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center device 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2513 from a warp exit 2512.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls back and forth on the stage 2513 and is released forward from the center in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central release section 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, there is a high probability that it will be received by the first starting hole 2002 because the central release section 2513a is located directly above the first starting hole 2002. When a game ball B is received in this first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (e.g., three) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the main control board 1310 draws a special lottery result (first special lottery result) that will generate a favorable game state (e.g., "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "gimmick hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit") that is favorable to the player.

The game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center device 2500 may be received by the first starting hole 2002 of the starting hole unit 2100.

If the game ball B that flows down to the left side of the center device 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it may be pushed toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 or the obstacle nails N, and may be accepted into the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, etc. Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, when a game ball B is shot into the upper part of the center device 2500 in the play area 5a and enters to the right of the highest part of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center device 2500, it passes through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 of the center device 2500, is released above the gate 2003, comes into contact with multiple obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate 2003, and there is a certain probability that it will pass through the gate 2003.

The guide passage group 2520 of the center role 2500 is composed of a first guide passage 2521 whose entrance opens near the impact stopper 1006, and a second guide passage 2522 whose entrance opens at a distance to the left of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. As a result, if the game ball B is hit with enough strength to hit the impact stopper 1006 (so-called right hit), it will enter the first guide passage 2521, and if the game ball B is hit with enough strength not to hit the impact stopper 1006 (somewhat weaker strength than right hit), it will enter the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. In other words, the game ball B hit into the upper right side of the center role 2500 will flow through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 depending on the hitting strength.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that the probability of game ball B passing through gate 2003 is higher when game ball B is caused to flow through second guide passage 2522 than first guide passage 2521. Also, the configuration is such that the probability of game ball B passing through gate 2003 and the left side of gate 2003 is higher when game ball B is caused to flow through second guide passage 2522 than first guide passage 2521.

When game ball B passes through this gate 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the result of the normal lottery is a "normal win," the second starting port 2004 in the first attacker unit 2400, which is closed, opens for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 to 10 seconds), allowing game ball B to be received at the second starting port 2004.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery that is conducted when game ball B passes through gate 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the indication of the normal lottery result (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also called the normal fluctuation time). This indication of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting gate 2004 opens after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

If game ball B passes through gate 2003 between the time when game ball B passes through gate 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot begin, so the start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is reserved until the previous suggestion of the normal lottery result has ended. Also, the number of reserved normal lottery results is limited to four, and any more than this are discarded rather than reserved, even if game ball B passes through gate 2003. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

A game ball B that passes through the gate 2003 and the left side of the gate 2003 flows down the left side of the side right center unit 2700 with a high probability due to the multiple obstacle nails N planted between the gate 2003 and the side right center unit 2700, and is sometimes received by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right center unit 2700, and rarely by the second sub-out opening 2022. When the game ball B is received by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right center unit 2700, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out, as with the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received by the second sub-out opening 2022, it is discharged outside the game area 5a without having a chance to be received by the special winning opening 2006, the second starting opening 2004, or the large winning opening 2005.

In addition, game ball B that passes to the right of gate 2003 is received by the second sub-out port 2022 of the side right center unit 2700, and is discharged outside the game area 5a without having the opportunity to be received by the general winning port 2001, the special winning port 2006, the second starting port 2004, or the large winning port 2005 of the side right center unit 2700.

In this way, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-outlet 2022 downstream of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is discharged outside the game area 5a, so the player can be encouraged to perform a shot operation that prevents the game ball B from being received by the second sub-outlet 2022. In this embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center role 2500, the second guide passage 2522 has a lower probability of receiving the game ball B than the first guide passage 2521, so the player can be encouraged to perform a shot operation of the game ball B aimed at the second guide passage 2522. In other words, it is possible to encourage a shot operation that requires delicate adjustment of the rotation operation of the handle 182 rather than a "right hit" in which the game ball B abuts against the impact stopper 1006, and the player can enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1 that mainly focuses on the shot operation of the game ball B.

The game ball B that passes the left side of the side right center unit 2700 is guided by a number of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right center unit 2700, passes to the left of the role winning hole 2006 in the second attacca unit 2600, and is then released to the first attacca unit 2400 side via the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500.

At this time, if game ball B is received by the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 and a "perfect prize" is drawn as the first or second special lottery result, the prize winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the side right center unit 2700 is highly likely to be received by the prize winning opening 2006. When the prize winning opening 2006 is open and game ball B is received by the prize winning opening 2006, a predetermined number (e.g., 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

Game ball B received by the special prize winning port 2006 and detected by the special prize winning port sensor 2601 flows through the distribution passage 3158 and is distributed to either the V prize winning port 2007 or the losing port 2008 by the V prize winning port door 3006 which moves back and forth. When game ball B is distributed to the V prize winning port 2007, the large prize winning port 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern as an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when game ball B is distributed to the losing port 2008, an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player does not occur.

The game ball B that is released to the first attacka unit 2400 side through the left side of the special prize winning opening 2006 rolls left over the first shelf 2421, the second starting opening door 2411, and the second shelf 2422, and is then released to the left, and then rolls left over the third shelf 2423, the large prize winning opening door 2413, and the fourth shelf 2424 before being released into the game area 5a.

When the game ball B is rolling on the second start gate door 2411, if the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball B through the gate 2003 is "normal hit" and the second start gate door 2411 is retracted, the game ball B is received by the second start gate 2004. When the game ball B is received by this second start gate 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the main control board 1310 draws a special lottery result (first special lottery result) that will generate a favorable game state (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "gimmick hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit") that is favorable to the player.

In addition, when game ball B is rolling on the large prize opening door 2413, if the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 is a special lottery result that generates a favorable game state (e.g., a "jackpot"), after the special fluctuation time has elapsed, the large prize opening 2005 will be in a state in which it is able to accept game ball B in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. When game ball B is accepted into the large prize opening 2005 while it is in the open state, a predetermined number (e.g., 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Therefore, when the large prize opening 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by having the large prize opening 2005 receive the game ball B, many game balls B can be paid out, providing entertainment to the player.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball B is received in the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004, the main control board 1310 draws a special lottery result that will generate a favorable game state that is favorable to the player (for example, a "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "gimmick hit", "probability-varying (probability-changing) hit", or "time-saving (time-saving) hit"). The drawn special lottery result is then displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0 The player is prompted to select the outcome over a period of time (1 to 360 seconds, also called the special variable time). The special lottery results that are drawn when game ball B is received by first start port 2002 and second start port 2004 include "miss," "small win," "2R jackpot," "5R jackpot," "15R jackpot," "probability change (changed probability) win," "time-saving (time-saving) win," "probability change time-saving win," "probability change without time-saving win," "second jackpot," etc.

If the special lottery result is a "hit," the special prize winning port 2006 repeats an opening and closing pattern multiple times (e.g., twice) in which it opens to receive the game ball B for a predetermined short time (e.g., between 0.2 and 0.6 seconds) and then closes. On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "jackpot," the big prize winning port 2005 repeats an opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is referred to as one round) in which it closes to receive the game ball B a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds) when either a predetermined time (e.g., about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the big prize winning port 2005 opens to receive the game ball B, or a predetermined number of game balls B (e.g., 10 balls) are received by the big prize winning port 2005. For example, a "2R jackpot" will repeat two rounds, a "5R jackpot" will repeat five rounds, and a "15R jackpot" will repeat 15 rounds, creating an advantageous gaming state for the player.

In addition, after the jackpot game ends, there are "hits" that change the probability of a special lottery result such as a "jackpot" being drawn ("probability hit"), or that change the display time of the presentation image suggesting the special lottery result ("time-saving hit").

If the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is a "second jackpot," the big prize winning port 2005 becomes capable of receiving the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, and then generates ST (Special Time) as an advantageous game state. This ST maintains the state of special bonus or time reduction for a specific number of predetermined fluctuations.

In this embodiment, if game ball B is received by the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 between the start of the special lottery and the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn by the reception of game ball B by the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, so the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for any more than this, the special lottery result is not reserved but discarded even if game ball B is received by the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special lottery result. The function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off multiple LEDs and flashing them for a predetermined period of time, and then suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the performance display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a performance image. The performance image suggesting the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 displays three picture rows consisting of multiple pictures lined up in the left-right direction, and changes each picture row, sequentially stopping and displaying the changing picture rows, and each picture row that is stopped and displayed is displayed so that the pictures of the three picture rows form a combination that corresponds to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "miss," after the three picture rows stop and each picture is stopped and displayed, a final image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and an advantageous game state (for example, "small win" game, "big win" game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

The time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) is different from the time indicating the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 (the time until the image row changes and the final image is displayed), and is set longer on the function display unit 1400.

In addition to displaying a performance image suggesting the result of the special lottery by the performance display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 can perform a player participation type performance in which the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 301 in the performance operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 are operated according to the special lottery result. In the player participation type performance, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised and made more prominent by the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the player can enjoy the player participation type performance by operating the performance operation unit 301.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 can appropriately use the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, the performance display device 1600, and the rear front performance unit 3100, rear upper performance unit 3200, and rear lower performance unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 to perform light-emitting performances and display performances, etc., allowing players to be entertained by various performances and preventing a decline in the players' interest in the game.

Furthermore, in a player-participation type presentation in which the player operates the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, if the player makes a mistake or fails to perform an operation that should be performed, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player so that the player can perform the correct operation.

[14. Second embodiment of the game board]
Next, the game board 5A of the second embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 194 to 196. Fig. 194(a) is a front view showing an enlarged part of the game board of the first embodiment, and (b) is a front view showing an enlarged part of the game board of the second embodiment at the same part as (a). Fig. 195(a) is a front view showing an enlarged part of the game board of the second embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the back front left decoration unit of the back front performance unit in (a) is illuminated. Fig. 196 is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the panel board of the game panel in Fig. 195(a) is illuminated.

The game board 5A of the second embodiment has the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, except that the component 1000A and the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 are made of a translucent milky white synthetic resin, and detailed descriptions of the parts with the same configuration will be omitted.

In the first embodiment of the game board 5, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110 and panel holder 1120) are made of transparent synthetic resin, so that the rear unit 3000 provided behind the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be seen from the front (player side) as shown in FIG. 194(a).

In contrast, in the game board 5A of this embodiment, the front component 1000A and the panel plate 1110A are formed from a milky white synthetic resin, so as shown in FIG. 194(b), the front component 1000 and the rear unit 3000 provided behind the game panel 1100, except for the inside of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110A, cannot be seen from the front (player side).

The component 1000A and the panel plate 1110A are formed from a milky white opaque synthetic resin that has translucency. The panel plate 1110A may be a plate made by cutting a milky white synthetic resin plate, or may be a plate made by injection molding using a milky white synthetic resin.

In the game board 5A of this embodiment, since the panel plates 1110A etc. of the game panel 1100 are milky white, it is possible to make a part of the rear unit 3000 provided at the rear (the part outside the opening 1112 when viewed from the front) invisible through the panel plates 1110A etc. This panel plate 1110A etc. is translucent, so when a decorative body provided at the rear is illuminated, the light from the decorative body at the rear passes through the panel plate 1110A, allowing the player to see the illuminated decoration of the decorative body.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 195(a), in the back front left decorative unit 3120 of the back front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided behind the panel board 1110A, the back front upper left logo decorative part 3122 and the back front left sub decorative part 3123, etc., which are located outside the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110A, are not visible from the front when viewed from the front. Then, when the back front left logo decorative part 3121, the back front upper left logo decorative part 3122, and the back front left sub decorative part 3123, etc. are illuminated, the light from the back front upper left logo decorative part 3122 and the back front left sub decorative part 3123, etc., which are provided at the rear, passes through the translucent panel board 1110A, as shown in FIG. 195(b), and the illuminated back front upper left logo decorative part 3122 and the back front left sub decorative part 3123, etc., become visible.

The panel boards 1110A and the like are milky white, so the luminous colors of the illuminated decorations such as the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 and the back front left sub decoration 3123 can be transmitted in their original colors, allowing the player to see a colorful illumination effect.

It is desirable for the translucent opaque material in panel 1110A to have a light transmittance of 2% to 80% and a haze value of 80% to 100%. If the transmittance is lower than this, it will be difficult to illuminate the material with sufficient brightness, and if the transmittance is higher than this, it will be difficult to obtain the opaque material. Also, if the haze value is lower than this, the shape and decoration of the components located to the rear will be easily discerned, and there is a risk that the dramatic effect of concealment will not be fully achieved.

In addition, the panel board 1110A etc. is milky white (Munsell value (10YR 9.2/0.5)), but the colors "White Munsell value (N 9.5)", "Whitewash Munsell value (2.5Y 9.2/0.5)", "Dark blue Munsell value (10Y 9/1)", "Ecru Munsell value (10YR 9/1)", "Lead white Munsell value (N 9)", "Oyster white Munsell value (5GY 8.5/0.3)", "Greyish white Munsell value (10YR 9/0.5)", "Indigo blue Munsell value (9.7BG 8.2/1.3)", "Secret color Munsell value (2B 8.5/2)", "Ivory color Munsell value (2.5Y 8.5/1.5)", "Cream yellow Munsell value (5Y 8.5/3.5)", "Cherry blossom color" are also available. It may also be a white-based color such as "Munsell value (10RP 9/2.5)".

However, since the panel board 1110A etc. is a milky white color with translucency, if a colored decoration such as black, red or blue is provided behind the panel board 1110A, depending on the color of the decoration, it may be visible through the panel board 1110A even when the decoration is not illuminated. And because the decoration can be seen through the panel board 1110A, the player may become aware of the presence of the decoration behind the panel board 1110A, which may reduce the impact (surprise) given to the player when the decoration is illuminated, and the desired presentation effect may not be achieved.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the back front left first decorative body 3124, the back front left second decorative body 3125, the back front left third decorative body 3126, and the back front left decorative body base 3127, which constitute the back front left upper logo decorative part 3122 and the back front left sub-decorative part 3123 of the back front left decorative unit 3120 provided behind the panel board 1110A, are formed from colorless and transparent materials, so that the back front left upper logo decorative part 3122 and the back front left sub-decorative part 3123 cannot be seen through the translucent milky white panel board 1110A. Therefore, when the back front left upper logo decorative part 3122 and the back front left sub-decorative part 3123 are not illuminated, they cannot be seen by the player, making it difficult for the player to notice their presence. Furthermore, when the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 and the back front left sub decoration 3123 are illuminated, they can be seen through the translucent milky white panel 1110A, surprising the player and allowing them to enjoy the illuminated effects, and the light from the illuminated decorations can be seen through the panel 1110A, making the playing area 5a look bright and beautiful, strongly attracting the player's attention.

In addition, the game board 5A of this embodiment is provided with a panel decoration substrate 1130 on the outside of the translucent milky white panel board 1110A, on which a plurality of LEDs 1130a are mounted to irradiate the outer peripheral surface of the panel board 1110A. The plurality of LEDs 1130a are full-color LEDs. When the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 are illuminated, the panel board 1110A can be illuminated and decorated, as shown by the cross-hatching in FIG. 196. This causes the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110A) in front of which the game ball B circulates to be in a self-illuminating state, thereby brightening the game area 5a, making it easier to see the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a, and improving the appearance of the game area 5a, thereby strongly attracting the interest of the player.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 is self-illuminating, the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be seen in silhouette, making it easier to see the game ball B and making it easier to make subtle adjustments to the launch strength. In addition, if the panel decoration board 1130 is provided on both the left and right sides of the panel board 1110A, the player can intuitively understand when advice is given to "hit right" or "hit left". In more detail, the LED 1130a of either the left or right panel decoration board 1130 is illuminated depending on the game situation, and the left and right parts of the panel board 1110A are illuminated and decorated, allowing the player to intuitively understand that advice is being given to "hit left" or "hit right". This allows the player to enjoy the operation of shooting the game ball B, and also allows the player to enjoy the new lighting effects that have not been seen in previous pachinko machines.

In more detail, in conventional pachinko machines, in a game board using opaque plywood as the game panel, a decorative film with a predetermined pattern or the like is attached to the front of the plywood to decorate the game area. However, when plywood is used for the game panel, the decoration with the decorative film does not look different from other game machines, and it is difficult to increase the appeal to players. On the other hand, when the panel board 1110 in front of which the game ball B flows is made transparent as in the game board 5 of the first embodiment, the decoration of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear and the performance image of the performance display device 1600 are easily visible, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to have an open feeling, but the game ball B flowing in front of the transparent panel board 1110 appears to be floating in the air, and depending on the player, it may be difficult to understand the movement of the game ball B.

In contrast, the game board 5A of this embodiment can illuminate and decorate the translucent panel board 1110A by using the multiple LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130, so that the decoration of the panel board 1110A can be varied by appropriately combining the luminous colors and luminous patterns of the LEDs 1130a. This allows the player to see the self-illuminating game board 5A that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines, and can strongly attract the player's interest, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players. In addition, because the panel board 1110A is self-illuminating due to the multiple LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130, the game ball B circulating in front of the panel board 1110A can be easily seen, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition to the effects described above, the game board 5A of this embodiment has a panel board 1110A and the like made of a milky white synthetic resin, and since it is sufficient to use a resin of a lower grade than transparent resin, the cost of the panel board 1110A can be reduced compared to when transparent resin is used.

In the above embodiment, the panel decoration substrate 1130 is provided on the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110A, but this is not limited to the above, and the panel decoration substrate 1130 may be provided behind the panel plate 1110A. This can achieve the same effect as above. In addition, compared to when the panel plate is transparent, the point-like light from the LEDs 1130a and the like provided at the rear can be diffused by the opalescent panel plate 1110A, which has luminous properties, so the panel plate 1110A can be softly illuminated and decorated, and glare can be suppressed to create a game board 5A that is gentle on the eyes.

In addition, in the game board 5A of this embodiment, although not shown, a decorative film (also called a cell) with a predetermined pattern may be attached to the front of the panel board 1110A. This can reduce wear on the panel board 1110A caused by the circulation of game balls B, and can improve the appearance by preventing the deterioration of the appearance of the game area 5a when the decoration at the rear is not illuminated by the cell pattern. Furthermore, the light from the LED installed at the rear of the panel board 1110A can illuminate the cell pattern together with the panel board 1110A, making the decoration of the panel board 1110A look even more beautiful.

In addition, as described above, when cells are provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110A, the pattern on the cell can be used as an outline to highlight the luminous decoration (electrical decoration) provided on the rear surface of the panel board 1110A, thereby further enhancing the decorative effect of the luminous decoration.

Furthermore, a cell may be provided on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A. This causes the shadow of the cell (or the pattern on the cell) to be cast on the panel plate 1110A by light from an LED or the like provided behind the panel plate 1110A (cell), so that the decoration of the panel plate 1110A can be changed by the light emitted by the LED, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest. The shadow cast on this panel plate 1110A may be text such as "right hit", "left hit", "chance", etc., which can entertain the player by suggesting a change in the game situation.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a decorative body (rear front left decorative unit 3120) with a fixed position is provided behind the milky white panel board 1110A, but this is not limited to this, and a movable decorative body that can move between a retracted position behind the panel board 1110A when viewed from the front and an emerging position inside the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110A may be provided behind the panel board 1110A.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the panel plate 1110A and the like are shown to be entirely milky white, including the interior, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the panel plate may be partially milky white, or the interior may be transparent with at least one surface being milky white. Specific examples include a panel plate two-color molded with a transparent resin and a milky white resin, a panel plate in which a transparent resin plate and a milky white resin plate are bonded together, a panel plate in which a milky white film (cell) is bonded to at least one surface of a transparent resin plate, a panel plate in which a shrinkage process is applied with ultraviolet curing ink to the rear surface of a transparent resin plate, and a panel plate in which a sandblasting process is applied to the rear surface of a transparent resin plate.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the panel boards 1110A, etc. are shown to be milky white, but this is not limited to this, and the panel boards may be any suitable color, such as red, blue, yellow, etc.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the front component 1000A is shown to be translucent milky white, but this is not limited to this, and the front component 1000 may be transparent like the game board 5 in the first embodiment, or may be a front component of a different color than the panel board 1110A.

[15. Third embodiment of the game board]
Next, the game board 5B of the third embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 197. Fig. 197 is an exploded perspective view of the panel board and the cells in the game board of the third embodiment, seen from the front. The game board 5B of the third embodiment has the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, except that the cells 1140 are provided behind the panel board 1110, and detailed descriptions of the parts having the same configuration will be omitted.

In the second embodiment, the game board 5B has a film-like cell 1140 with a predetermined pattern attached to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 in the game panel 1100, which is detachably provided. The cell 1140 is a synthetic resin film with a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm, and the predetermined pattern is printed on it. The material of the cell 1140 includes "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", "polyethylene resin", "polystyrene resin", "high impact polystyrene resin", "polyvinyl chloride", etc.

The cell 1140 is formed to a size that covers only a portion of the entire surface of the panel plate 1110 (here, the area extending from the left side of the center gimmick 2500 to the lower side). Although not shown in the figure, the cell 1140 is attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 using screws with a certain amount of play. This makes it easier to attach the cell 1140 compared to attaching it to the entire surface of the panel plate 1110, and also reduces the amount of cell 1140 used, thereby suppressing increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, because the cells 1140 are provided as part of the panel board 1110, a greater number of cells 1140 can be obtained from the resin sheet compared to conventional cells that are attached to the panel board, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, because the cells 1140 are attached to the panel plate 1110 in a loose state, even if the cells 1140 expand and contract due to changes in temperature, humidity, etc., the difference in expansion and contraction with the panel plate 1110 can be absorbed by the looseness. This makes it possible to prevent the cells 1140 from wrinkling or cracking even if the cells 1140 shrink relative to the panel plate 1110, and allows the decorative effect of the pattern on the cells 1140 to be maintained.

Furthermore, because the cells 1140 are attached to the panel plate 1110 with screws, the cells 1140 can be easily attached and detached from the panel plate 1110. Therefore, by replacing the cells 1140 with cells with different designs, it is possible to easily respond to changes in the specifications, model, or design of the pachinko machine 1, thereby suppressing increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1, and by replacing the cells 1140 with ones with designs that have a more decorative effect, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, because the cells 1140 are located behind the transparent panel board 1110, the distance between the player and the cells 1140 is greater than if they were located in front of the panel board 1110, reducing the sense of pressure felt by the player.

It is also desirable to make the cells 1140 translucent, so that the light from the LEDs provided behind the panel board 1110 (cells 1140) can illuminate the images on the cells 1140, improving the appearance within the play area 5a. The illuminated decoration of the cells 1140 can also strongly attract the attention of players, enhancing the appeal of the pachinko machine 1.

In the above embodiment, the cell 1140 is attached to the panel plate 1110 using screws, but this is not limited to this. For example, the cell 1140 may be attached by sandwiching it between the panel plate 1110 and the panel holder 1120.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the opening 1112 in which the center feature 2500 of the panel board 1110 is provided is shown to be positioned to the upper right (off-centered to the upper right) relative to the panel board 1110, but this is not limited thereto, and it may be positioned to the upper side (off-centered upwards) or to the left and right (off-centered left and right). By providing the cell 1140 behind the portion of the opening 1112 that becomes wider due to being off-centered (off-centered) to the left, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above.

The opening 1112 in which the center device 2500 is provided may be offset from the center or outer edge of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), or may be offset from the center or outer edge of the game area 5a. Therefore, for example, if the centers of the panel board 1110 and the game area 5a do not coincide with each other, the center of the opening 1112 that is offset from the center of the panel board 1110 may coincide with the center of the game area 5a, or the center of the opening 1112 that is offset from the center of the game area 5a may coincide with the center of the panel board 1110.

[16. Another embodiment of the function display unit]
Next, another embodiment of the function display unit 1400 provided on the game board 5 or the like will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 198 to 203. Fig. 198(a) is a front view of the function display unit of the second embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the line S-S in (a), (c) is a perspective view of the function display unit of (a) seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the function display unit of (a) seen from the back. Fig. 199 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit of Fig. 198 seen from the front, and Fig. 200 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit of Fig. 198 seen from the back. Fig. 201 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the function display unit of Fig. 198 and the player. Fig. 202 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the function display unit of the third embodiment and the player. Fig. 203 is a cross-sectional view of the function display unit of the fourth embodiment.

The function display unit 1400A of the second embodiment, like the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment described above, displays a variable display by blinking multiple LEDs 1401 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and then turns on or off each LED to form a predetermined combination to display the game status (game situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result), the number of reserved normal lottery results, the number of reserved special lottery results, the number of rounds in the event of a "jackpot", etc.

In more detail, in the game board 5 of the first embodiment, for example, when a game ball B is received in the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, the main control board 1310 draws a special lottery result as an internal process. The main control board 1310 then transmits a control signal to the function display unit 1400 to display the special lottery result, and the function display unit 1400 displays the special lottery result using the corresponding LED 1401.

The control signal of the special lottery result drawn on the main control board 1310 is also sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 displays a specified performance image on the performance display device 1600 as a performance suggesting the special lottery result. Since the performance image displayed on the performance display device 1600 is focused on entertaining the player, the special lottery result drawn on the main control board 1310 can be roughly recognized, but the details are difficult to understand. On the other hand, the function display unit 1400 accurately displays the special lottery result drawn, but because it is displayed by emitting light from multiple small LEDs 1401, it is difficult to understand what is displayed at a glance.

It is therefore conceivable that by photographing the function display unit 1400 with a digital camera or a camera attached to a mobile phone, the lighting state of the LEDs in the function display unit 1400 can be analyzed, and the contents displayed on the function display unit 1400 can be known as soon as possible.

However, if the result of the special lottery drawn can be easily determined by the illumination of the LEDs on the functional display unit 1400, when the special lottery result displayed on the functional display unit 1400 is a "lose", even if a performance image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the performance display device 1600, the player will not be able to enjoy the performance of the performance image because he or she already knows the result, and will wish for the performance image to end quickly, which may irritate some players and reduce their interest in the game.

In contrast, the functional display unit 1400A of the second embodiment allows the player to clearly see the illumination status of the multiple LEDs 1401, but when photographed with a digital camera or the like, the illumination status of the multiple LEDs 1401 becomes unclear, making it impossible to distinguish the displayed content.

Specifically, the functional display unit 1400A includes a functional display board 1402 having a number of LEDs 1401 mounted on the front surface thereof, a rear reflector 1403 provided in front of the functional display board 1402 and transmitting light from the LEDs 1401 forward independently, a light-transmitting sheet 1404 provided in front of the rear reflector 1403 and having light-transmitting properties, and a front reflector 1405 provided in front of the light-transmitting sheet 1404 and radiating the light from the LEDs 1401 that has transmitted through the rear reflector 1403 in different directions.

As shown in FIG. 199, multiple LEDs 1401 are randomly mounted on the functional display board 1402. The reflector back 1403 has multiple through holes 1403a that correspond to the LEDs 1401 on the functional display board 1402. The multiple through holes 1403a are arranged perpendicular to the front surface of the functional display board 1402 (see FIG. 198(b) etc.).

The front reflector 1405 has a number of display holes 1405a that correspond to the through holes 1403a of the rear reflector 1403 and penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. The rear end of each of the display holes 1405a is located just before the corresponding through hole 1403a of the rear reflector 1403, and the tip end is located at various distances from a vertical line on the front surface of the functional display substrate 1402 that passes through the center of the rear end. In other words, the axial direction of the display holes 1405a is oriented in various directions with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the functional display substrate 1402.

In addition, the front reflector 1405 has a dividing recess 1405b that is recessed from the front to the rear so as to connect the multiple display holes 1405a. The dividing recess 1405b divides the multiple display holes 1405a into two: the display holes 1405a (LED 1401) related to the first special lottery result, and the display holes 1405a (LED 1401) related to the second special lottery result.

As shown in FIG. 201, the multiple display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 are oriented in three directions, one visible only to the left eye, one visible only to the right eye, and one visible to both the left and right eyes, when viewed by a player seated 50 to 70 cm away from the functional display unit 1400A at the front of this pachinko machine 1. In other words, the multiple display holes 1405a are divided into three, one for the left eye, one for the right eye, and one for both eyes.

The function display unit 1400A of this embodiment allows the player to see the light from all of the LEDs 1401 with both eyes, so when a special lottery result or the like is displayed, the player can clearly see the light emission status of the multiple LEDs 1401, and the function can be performed in a manner comparable to that of the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment.

In addition, according to the functional display unit 1400A of this embodiment, when photographing with a digital camera or the like, since the digital camera or the like is monocular, either one for the left eye and one for both eyes, or one for the right eye and one for both eyes, is photographed, making it difficult to photograph the light emission status (light emission state) of all the LEDs 1401. In other words, when photographing with a digital camera or the like, the light emission status of the multiple LEDs 1401 can be unclear, making it difficult to distinguish the display content on the functional display unit 1400A. Therefore, based on the photograph taken, the display content on the functional display unit 1400A becomes clear, and the player can see whether the special lottery result is a "miss," a simple "jackpot," a "probable win," a "time-saving win," a "second jackpot (ST win)," etc., which makes it possible to avoid not being able to enjoy the presentation suggesting the special lottery result or not being able to enjoy an advantageous game state that is currently occurring (for example, a "jackpot" game), thereby entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, according to the functional display unit 1400A of this embodiment, the orientation of the display hole 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 is changed, and the display content is designed to be clearly visible according to the position of the player seated in front of this pachinko machine 1, so the display content of the functional display unit 1400A can be seen unclearly from behind the seated player. This makes it difficult for other players to grasp the game situation, reducing the chance of other players peering at the player, allowing the player to enjoy the game without worrying about other players.

In addition, as described above, the display contents are designed to be clearly visible according to the position of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, making it more difficult to photograph the display contents on the functional display unit 1400A with a digital camera or the like from a position behind the player, thereby ensuring the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, in the functional display unit 1400A, the display hole 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 is oriented in different directions not only left and right but also up and down, so that the display content can be seen clearly when viewed from eye height of a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. This means that when attempting to take a photograph with a digital camera or the like, it is necessary to adjust the height as well, making it more difficult to photograph the display content on the functional display unit 1400A.

In addition, the display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 are oriented in different directions for the left and right eyes, etc., which prevents the horizontal distance between the multiple LEDs 1401 on the functional display board 1402 from becoming too large, and reduces the horizontal width of the functional display unit 1400A.

In the above embodiment, the multiple display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 are oriented in different directions for the left eye, the right eye, etc., but this is not limited to this, and a functional display unit 1400B with a configuration as shown in FIG. 202 may also be used.

The functional display unit 1400B is equipped with a functional display board 1411 on the front of which are mounted a number of left LEDs 1411a and a number of right LEDs 1411b spaced a predetermined distance apart in the left-right direction (the distance between the player's left and right pupils), a rear reflector 1412 provided in front of the functional display board 1411 and transmitting light from the left LEDs 1411a and right LEDs 1411b forward independently, a translucent sheet 1413 provided in front of the rear reflector 1412, and a front reflector 1414 provided in front of the translucent sheet 1413 and radiating forward light from the left LEDs 1411a and right LEDs 1411b that has transmitted through the rear reflector 1412.

The left LED 1411a and right LED 1411b of the functional display board 1411 are spaced 40mm to 80mm apart in the left-right direction. The rear reflector 1412 has multiple through holes 1412a that correspond to the left LED 1411a and right LED 1411b of the functional display board 1411. The multiple through holes 1412a are arranged perpendicular to the front surface of the functional display board 1411. The front reflector 1414 has multiple display holes 1414a that correspond to the multiple through holes 1412a of the rear reflector 1412. The multiple display holes 1414a are arranged perpendicular to the front surface of the functional display board 1411.

This functional display unit 1400B is configured so that, when viewed by a player seated in front of this pachinko machine 1, the light from the left LED 1411a is visible only to the left eye, and the light from the right LED 1411b is visible only to the right eye. Therefore, when the player looks with both eyes, the light from both the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b is visible, so the functional display unit 1400 can perform functions comparable to those of the first embodiment.

Furthermore, according to the function display unit 1400B, the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b are separated in the left-right direction, so that only one of them can be photographed with a monocular digital camera or the like, and the same effect as the function display unit 1400A of the second embodiment can be achieved.

Furthermore, according to the functional display unit 1400B, the multiple display holes 1414a in front of the reflector 1414 are oriented in a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the functional display substrate 1411, so that the display contents cannot be clearly seen from any position other than the front of the functional display unit 1400B, making it difficult to photograph the display contents with a digital camera, etc.

Furthermore, according to the functional display unit 1400B, the multiple display holes 1414a in the front of the reflector 1414 are oriented in a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the functional display substrate 1411, and all face the same direction, so that the front of the reflector 1414 can be easily molded, and the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, functional display unit 1400A and functional display unit 1400B are shown, which are configured in a way that makes it difficult to capture images using a monocular digital camera or the like. However, this is not limited to this, and functional display unit 1400C may also be configured as shown in FIG. 203.

This functional display unit 1400C makes it difficult to distinguish the displayed content by emitting invisible light (infrared, ultraviolet, etc.) that can be captured by digital cameras, etc. Specifically, it includes a functional display board 1421 having multiple LEDs 1421a mounted on the front side, a rear reflector 1422 provided in front of the functional display board 1421, a flat light guide plate 1423 provided in front of the rear reflector 1422, an auxiliary board 1424 having invisible light LEDs 1424a mounted thereon that irradiate invisible light onto the side of the light guide plate 1423, and a front reflector 1425 provided in front of the light guide plate 1423.

The rear reflector 1422 has multiple through holes 1422a that correspond to the multiple LEDs 1421a of the functional display board 1421. When light from the invisible light LEDs 1424a of the auxiliary board 1424 is incident on the light guide plate 1423 from the side, at least the display holes 1425a of the front reflector 1425 emit light.

The invisible light LED 1424a of the auxiliary board 1424 emits either infrared or ultraviolet light as invisible light. When the multiple LEDs 1421a are displaying special lottery results or the like, the invisible light LED 1424a emits light and radiates invisible light from the light guide plate 1423. The front reflector 1425 has multiple display holes 1425a that correspond to the through holes 1422a of the rear reflector 1422. The multiple through holes 1422a of the rear reflector 1422 and the multiple display holes 1425a of the front reflector 1425 are arranged perpendicular to the front surface of the functional display board 1421.

With this functional display unit 1400C, even if the light guide plate 1423 emits invisible light due to the invisible light LED 1424a, the player cannot see the invisible light, so the light from the LED 1421a located at the rear is visible through the light guide plate 1423, allowing the display content to be viewed in good condition.

On the other hand, if this functional display unit 1400C is photographed with a digital camera or the like that is capable of photographing invisible light, all of the display holes 1425a will appear to be emitting light due to the light guide plate emitting invisible light, making the display content unclear and providing the same effect as above.

In the above embodiment, a reflector back 1403 (reflector back 1412) and a light-transmitting sheet 1404 (light-transmitting sheet 1413) are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. A reflector front 1405 (reflector front 1414) may be provided directly on the front surface of the functional display substrate 1402 (functional display substrate 1411).

In addition, as a configuration for making it difficult to photograph the display contents on the functional display unit with a digital camera or the like, for example, LEDs may be distributed over a range wider than the shooting range of a digital camera or the like, LEDs may be displayed by blinking at a speed that appears to be lit to the player but appears to be off when photographed with a digital camera or the like, LEDs unrelated to the display may be displayed in combination with multiple dummy LEDs that appear to be off to the player but appear to be lit or off when photographed with a digital camera or the like, or high-brightness LEDs may be placed near the functional display unit to cause halation when photographed with a digital camera or the like, preventing the display contents from being captured.

[17. Second embodiment of mounting of magnetic sensor]
Next, a second embodiment of the attachment of the magnetic sensor 1050, which is different from the above-mentioned game board 5 and the like, will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 204. Fig. 204(a) is a cross-sectional view showing the second embodiment of the attachment of the magnetic sensor, (b) is an explanatory view showing the attachment of the magnetic sensor in (a) in a perspective view, (c) is an exploded perspective view showing the attachment of the magnetic sensor in (b) in an exploded form, and (d) is an exploded perspective view showing the attachment of the magnetic sensor shown with a holding member different from that in (c).

The second embodiment of the magnetic sensor 1050 includes a holding member 1071 that is attached to a predetermined position on the game board 5 and has a pair of locking portions 1071a formed of through holes, and a holding container 1072 that has elastic claws 1072a that lock with the locking portions 1071a of the holding member 1071 and contains the magnetic sensor 1050. The holding member 1071 is made of synthetic resin. The holding container 1072 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the magnetic sensor 1050 can be seen from the outside. The holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 are made of non-magnetic material.

In addition, the holding container 1072 has a hole on the side opposite the elastic claw 1072a. Through this hole in the holding container 1072, the electric wire from the magnetic sensor 1050 housed in the holding container 1072 can be pulled out to the outside.

The holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 are made of non-magnetic material, so when a magnet is brought close to the play area 5a, the holding member 1071 etc. can be prevented from attracting magnetic lines from the magnet, and a decrease in the magnetic lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 can be prevented. This makes it easier to detect magnetism acting on the play area 5a, and allows for early detection of fraudulent behavior using magnets, while also discouraging fraudulent behavior by reporting the detection of suspicious magnetism by the magnetic sensor 1050, providing a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent behavior.

In addition, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and detached from the holding member 1071. Therefore, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached using the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 without using metal screws made of magnetic material as in conventional pachinko machines. This also simplifies the process of assembling the pachinko machine 1, and suppresses any increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, a locking portion 1071a is provided through the holding member 1071, and the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached by locking the elastic claw 1072a of the holding container 1072 to the locking portion 1071a. This simplifies the configuration of the holding member 1071 to which the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached, and reduces the cost of the holding member 1071.

Furthermore, since the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 are engaged with the engaging portions 1071a of the holding member 1071, as shown in FIG. 204(d), the holding member 1071 is provided with a plurality of sets of engaging portions 1071a in advance, and the position for attaching the magnetic sensor 1050 can be set arbitrarily by engaging the elastic claws 1072a with any of the engaging portions 1071a. Alternatively, the holding member 1071 may be provided with another engaging portion 1071a at a position different from the engaging portion 1071a to which the elastic claws 1072a are engaged. This allows the holding member 1071 to be changed in position or to add more magnetic sensors 1050 without replacing the holding member 1071 with a new one, reducing costs and increasing the versatility of the holding member 1071.

In addition, the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the holding container 1072 and is engaged with the engaging portion 1071a of the holding member 1071 by the elastic claw 1072a, which makes it easier to standardize the mounting structure of the magnetic sensor 1050 and reduces the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by providing the holding member 1071 with a plurality of locking portions 1071a in advance and locking the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 housing the magnetic sensor 1050 to the locking portions 1071a at appropriate positions, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be installed at any position or its position can be easily changed. Therefore, since the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily changed or an additional sensor can be installed, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can easily accommodate design changes and model changes while suppressing increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, a biasing portion such as a protrusion that presses against the housed magnetic sensor 1050 may be provided on the inside of the holding container 1072. This can suppress fine vibrations of the magnetic sensor 1050, reducing the risk of the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 coming loose or causing poor contact due to the vibrations, ensuring reliable operation of the magnetic sensor 1050.

In the above embodiment, the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071 is shown as a through hole, but this is not limited to this and may be a groove, slit, etc., as long as it has a shape that allows the elastic claw 1072a to be locked.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the holding container 1072 is shown as one that holds the magnetic sensor 1050 vertically, but this is not limited thereto, and the holding container may also hold the magnetic sensor 1050 horizontally.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in a holding container 1072 having elastic claws 1072a and attached to the holding member 1071, but this is not limited to the above. Elastic claws may be formed on the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 and engaged with the engaging portion 1071a of the holding member 1071.

Although the above describes the installation of the magnetic sensor 1050, this installation structure may also be used to install a vibration sensor. Specifically, the vibration sensor may be housed in a holding container with elastic claws, and the elastic claws may be engaged with the engagement portion of the holding member to install the vibration sensor. Although the vibration sensor is not affected by the surrounding magnetic materials, using an installation structure similar to that of the magnetic sensor 1050 is effective in changing or moving the installation location and reducing installation costs.

[18. Another embodiment regarding attachment of decorative body such as sticker]
Next, another embodiment of the attachment of a decorative body such as a sticker, which is different from the above embodiment, will be described in detail with reference to Figures 205 to 208. In this chapter, a member on which a predetermined decoration is applied will be referred to as a decorative body, a member on which the decorative body is attached to one side will be referred to as a first member, and a member on which the first member is attached to the other side will be referred to as a second member. Note that the decorative body, the first member, and the second member may be arranged in a front-to-back manner, a top-to-bottom manner, or a left-to-right manner.

Figure 205 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative body is also used as a positioning hole for the second member, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of an example in which a closed space is formed by the second member behind the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative body, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of the state in which decorative bodies of different thicknesses are attached in (b), and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative body is also used as an attachment hole for the decorative body. Figure 206 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the first member from the front with the decorative body attached, (b) is a cross section of (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the first member from the front with a decorative body different from (a) attached.

Figure 207 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a horizontally elongated rectangular decorative body and the first member, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a circular decorative body and the first member, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a symmetrically arranged decorative body and the first member, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a symmetrically arranged decorative body and the first member in a shape different from that of (c). Figure 208 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the decorative body and the movable first member from the front, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line T-T in (a), (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the decorative body and the first member in (a) and (c), (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a decorative body of a different shape from that of (a) and the movable first member from the front, and (e) is a cross-sectional view taken along line T-T in (d).

First, the embodiment shown in FIG. 205(a) comprises a decorative body 1801 made of a sheet-like sticker on which a predetermined decoration, lettering, etc. is printed, a first member 1821 to one side of which the decorative body 1801 is affixed, and a second member 1841 attached to the other side of the first member 1821.

The first member 1821 has a flat plate portion 1821a, an attachment recess 1821b recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1821a to which the decorative body 1801 is attached, a boss portion 1821c protruding from the other side of the flat plate portion 1821a opposite the attachment recess 1821b, a separation hole 1821d penetrating the boss portion 1821c and the flat plate portion 1821a, and a rib 1821e protruding from the other side of the flat plate portion 1821a to the same position as the tip of the boss portion 1821c. The attachment recess 1821b is recessed deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1801.

The second member 1841 has a base portion 1841a on one side of which the boss portion 1821c and the tip of the rib 1821e of the first member 1821 abut, and a positioning protrusion 1841b protruding from one side of the base portion 1841a and inserted into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821. The positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 is inserted into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821, thereby positioning the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 relative to each other.

When assembled, the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821 is closed on one side by the decorative body 1801 attached to the mounting recess 1821b, and on the other side by the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841, forming a closed space inside. The separation hole 1821d is provided in a position close to the edge of the mounting recess 1821b that is hidden by the decorative body 1801. This separation hole 1821d also serves as a positioning hole for positioning the first member 1821 to the second member 1841.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, if the decorative body 1801 cannot be properly attached to the mounting recess 1821b of the first member 1821 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1821d from the other side of the first member 1821, and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body 1801 from the other side to one side, so that the edge of the decorative body 1801 can be rolled up to one side and removed. The worker can then pull the rolled up portion to easily remove the decorative body 1801 from the mounting recess 1821b, and the decorative body 1801 can be reattached.

In addition, with the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1821d from the other side of the first member 1821 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body 1801 from the other side, making it easy to remove the decorative body 1801 from the mounting recess 1821b, facilitating the replacement of the decorative body 1801 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are separated, the ornament 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b using the separation hole 1821d, which makes it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, thereby reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, by attaching the decorative body 1801 to the mounting recess 1821b, the separation hole 1821d can be hidden from one side, which prevents the separation hole 1821d from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 1821d, making it difficult for players to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1821d.

In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 inserted into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached closes the separation hole 1821d from the other side, and since there is no hole that runs through the entire machine as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole from the other side of the second member 1841, and thus prevent illegal acts from being committed.

In addition, because the positioning projection 1841b of the second member 1841 closes the separation hole 1821d from the other side, even if an illegal tool is inserted from one side through the decorative body 1801 and into the separation hole 1821d, the positioning projection 1841b of the second member 1841 can prevent further insertion (intrusion) into the other side. This makes it possible to prevent the intrusion of the illegal tool into the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1821d, preventing illegal acts from being committed. In addition, because the illegal tool penetrates the decorative body 1801 and leaves a mark on the decorative body 1801, it is possible to discourage players from committing illegal acts, and a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against illegal acts can be provided.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1821 may be the front component member 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacca unit 2400, center gimmick 2500, second attacca unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), and the second member 1841 may be the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel holder 1120).

Examples of decorative body 1801 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metatic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 205(b) includes a decorative body 1801 made of a sheet-like sticker with a predetermined decoration, characters, etc. printed on it, a first member 1822 to one side of which the decorative body 1801 is affixed, and a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822. The second member 1842 is attached to the first member 1822 by a configuration not shown.

The first member 1822 has a flat plate portion 1822a, an attachment recess 1822b recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1822a to which the decorative body 1801 is attached, a separation hole 1822c penetrating the flat plate portion 1822a at the attachment recess 1822b, and a number of ribs 1822d protruding from the other side of the flat plate portion 1822a. The attachment recess 1821b is recessed deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1801. Although detailed illustration is omitted, at least some of the ribs 1822d are arranged to surround the separation hole 1822c.

When assembled, the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed on one side by the decorative body 1801 attached to the mounting recess 1822b, and the other side is open into a space surrounded and closed by the multiple ribs 1822d and one side of the second member 1842, making the entire space a closed space. The separation hole 1822c is located near the edge of the mounting recess 1822b that is hidden by the decorative body 1801.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, if the decorative body 1801 cannot be properly attached to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body 1801 from the other side to one side, so that the edge of the decorative body 1801 can be rolled up to one side and removed. The worker can then pull the rolled up portion to easily remove the decorative body 1801 from the mounting recess 1822b, and the decorative body 1801 can be reattached.

In addition, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body 1801 from the other side, making it easy to remove the decorative body 1801 from the mounting recess 1822b, facilitating the replacement of the decorative body 1801 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, the ornament 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b using the separation hole 1822c, which makes it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, thereby reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, by attaching the decorative body 1801 to the mounting recess 1822b, the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side, which prevents the separation hole 1822c from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 1822c, making it difficult for players to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1822c.

In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached, and since there is no hole that runs through the entire machine as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole from the other side of the second member 1842, thereby preventing illegal acts.

In addition, because the second member 1842 closes the separation hole 1822c from the other side, even if an illegal tool is inserted from one side through the decorative body 1801 and into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 can prevent further insertion (intrusion) into the other side. This makes it possible to prevent the intrusion of the illegal tool into the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c, preventing illegal acts from being committed. In addition, because the illegal tool penetrates the decorative body 1801 and leaves a mark on the decorative body 1801, it is possible to discourage people from committing illegal acts, and a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against illegal acts can be provided.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 may be the previous component member 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacca unit 2400, center gimmick 2500, second attacca unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), and the second member 1842 may be the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel holder 1120).

Examples of decorative body 1801 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metatic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

The embodiment shown in Figure 205(c) includes a decorative body 1802 made of a sticker with a certain thickness (e.g., 0.4 mm to 5 mm) decorated with a predetermined decoration, a first member 1822 to one side of which the decorative body 1802 is affixed, and a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822. The second member 1842 is attached to the first member 1822 by a configuration not shown.

The first member 1822 has a flat plate portion 1822a, an attachment recess 1822b recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1822a to which the decorative body 1802 is attached, a separation hole 1822c penetrating the flat plate portion 1822a at the attachment recess 1822b, and a plurality of ribs 1822d protruding from the other side of the flat plate portion 1822a. The attachment recess 1821b is recessed shallower than the thickness of the decorative body 1802. Although detailed illustration is omitted, at least some of the plurality of ribs 1822d are arranged to surround the separation hole 1822c.

When assembled, the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed on one side by the decorative body 1802 attached to the mounting recess 1822b, and on the other side is open into a space surrounded and closed by the multiple ribs 1822d and one side of the second member 1842, forming a closed space overall. The separation hole 1822c is located near the edge of the mounting recess 1822b that is hidden by the decorative body 1802.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, if the decorative body 1802 cannot be properly attached to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body 1802 from the other side to one side, so that the edge of the decorative body 1802 can be rolled up to one side and removed. The worker can then pull the rolled up portion to easily remove the decorative body 1802 from the mounting recess 1822b and re-attach the decorative body 1802.

In addition, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body 1802 from the other side, making it easy to remove the decorative body 1802 from the mounting recess 1822b, facilitating the replacement of the decorative body 1802 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, the ornament 1802 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b using the separation hole 1822c, which makes it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, thereby reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, by attaching the decorative body 1802 to the mounting recess 1822b, the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side, which prevents the separation hole 1822c from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 1822c, making it difficult for players to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1822c.

In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1802 is attached, and since there is no hole that runs through the entire machine as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole from the other side of the second member 1842, thereby preventing illegal acts.

In addition, because the second member 1842 closes the separation hole 1822c from the other side, even if an illegal tool is inserted from one side through the decorative body 1802 and into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 can prevent further insertion (intrusion) into the other side. This makes it possible to prevent the intrusion of the illegal tool into the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c, preventing illegal acts from being committed. In addition, because the illegal tool penetrates the decorative body 1802 and leaves a mark on the decorative body 1802, it is possible to discourage illegal acts from being committed, and a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against illegal acts can be provided.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 may be the previous component member 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacca unit 2400, center gimmick 2500, second attacca unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), and the second member 1842 may be the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel holder 1120). Alternatively, the first member 1822 may be a decorative holding member, and the second member 1842 may be a base member or decorative substrate, etc.

Examples of decorative body 1802 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metatic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc. Examples of decorative body 1802 include those formed by injection molding, vacuum molding, compressed air molding, high frequency molding, etc.

Next, the embodiment shown in FIG. 205(d) comprises a decorative body 1803 that is thick (e.g., 2 mm to 20 mm) and rigid and has a predetermined decoration, a first member 1822 to one side of which the decorative body 1803 is attached, and a second member 1842 that is attached to the other side of the first member 1822.

The decorative body 1803 has an attachment dowel 1803a protruding to the other side. The decorative body 1803 can be attached to the first member 1822 by pressing the attachment dowel 1803a into a separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822, which will be described later.

The first member 1822 has a flat plate portion 1822a, an attachment recess 1822b recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1822a against which the decorative body 1803 abuts, a separation hole 1822c that penetrates the flat plate portion 1822a at the attachment recess 1822b and into which the attachment dowel 1803a is pressed, and a number of ribs 1822d protruding from the other side of the flat plate portion 1822a. The attachment recess 1821b is recessed shallower than the thickness of the decorative body 1803. Although detailed illustration is omitted, at least some of the ribs 1822d are arranged to surround the separation hole 1822c.

When assembled, the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed on one side by the mounting dowel 1803a protruding from the decorative body 1803, and on the other side is open into a space surrounded and closed by multiple ribs 1822d and one surface of the second member 1842, forming a closed space overall. The separation hole 1822c is located in a position close to the edge of the mounting recess 1822b that is hidden by the decorative body 1803.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, if the decorative body 1803 cannot be properly attached to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the tip of the rod can be used to press the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 from the other side to one side, thereby moving the other side surface of the decorative body 1803 away from the surface of the mounting recess 1822b, making it easy to remove the decorative body 1803 from the first member 1822, and reattaching the decorative body 1803.

In addition, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 from the other side, making it easy to remove the decorative body 1803 from the first member 1822, facilitating the replacement of the decorative body 1803 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, the ornament 1803 can be easily removed from the first member 1822 using the separation hole 1822c, which makes it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, thereby reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, by pressing the mounting dowel 1803a into the separation hole 1822c and attaching the decorative body 1803 to the first member 1822, the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side, which prevents the separation hole 1822c from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 1822c, making it difficult for players to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1822c.

In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822, and since there is no hole that runs through the entire machine as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole from the other side of the second member 1842, and thus prevent illegal acts.

In addition, since the mounting dowel 1803a is pressed into the separation hole 1822c from one side and the decorative body 1803 has rigidity, even if an illegal tool is inserted from one side through the decorative body 1803 and into the separation hole 1822c, the rigidity of the decorative body 1803 and the mounting dowel 1803a can prevent the tool from penetrating. Even if the decorative body 1803 is penetrated from one side and inserted into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 can prevent further insertion (intrusion) to the other side, so that the intrusion of the illegal tool into the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c can be prevented, and illegal acts can be prevented, and since the illegal tool penetrates the decorative body 1803 and leaves a mark on the decorative body 1803, the illegal tool can be prevented from being performed, and therefore a pachinko machine 1 with high deterrent effect against illegal acts can be provided.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 may be the previous component member 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacca unit 2400, center gimmick 2500, second attacca unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), and the second member 1842 may be the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel holder 1120). Alternatively, the first member 1822 may be a decorative holding member, and the second member 1842 may be a base member or decorative substrate, etc.

The decorative body 1803 may be one that is decorated with a relief and formed by injection molding. The mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 may be integrally molded with the decorative body 1803, may be insert molded, or may be assembled separately.

The embodiment shown in Figures 206(a) and (b) includes a decorative body 1804 made of a sheet-like sticker on which a predetermined decoration, character, etc. is printed, and a first member 1823 on one side of which the decorative body 1804 is attached. Note that the configuration on the other side of the first member 1823 (including the second member) may include any of the configurations described above.

The decorative body 1804 is a sticker with a predetermined pattern, letters, etc. printed on its surface, and has translucency. This decorative body 1804 has an approximately square outer shape, with chamfered portions 1804a of a predetermined radius provided at three corners. This decorative body 1804 has an overall shape that makes it difficult to identify the orientation, so the shape of one corner is made different from the shape of the remaining corners to make it possible to identify the orientation. Note that, although the chamfered portions 1804a are shown here as R-chamfered, they may also be C-chamfered.

The decorative body 1804 also has an adhesive surface 1804b (the area shown shaded in Figure 206 (a)) on the back side that is provided along the outer periphery with a generally constant width (within the range of 3 mm to 6 mm). The width of the adhesive surface 1804b is set appropriately according to the size of the decorative body 1804. Limiting the adhesive surface 1804b to only the outer periphery in this way is often used, particularly with a transparent sticker (decorative body 1804), when it is desired to show off LEDs or other illumination or a design surface at the rear.

The first member 1823 has a flat plate portion 1823a, an attachment recess 1823b that is recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1823a to a size slightly larger than the decorative body 1804 and deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the decorative body 1804, to which the decorative body 1804 is attached, and a separation hole 1823c that penetrates the flat plate portion 1823a at the location of the attachment recess 1823b. This first member 1823 is formed to be transparent.

The separation hole 1823c is located close to the corner of the mounting recess 1823b and in a position (a position inside the adhesive surface 1804b) that is not covered by the adhesive surface 1804b when the decorative body 1804 is attached. This prevents the adhesive surface 1804b from covering the separation hole 1823c, which would otherwise reduce the adhesive strength of the decorative body 1804.

This separation hole 1823c is a round hole. In this embodiment, the separation hole 1823c has an inner diameter within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1823c is any smaller, the diameter of the rod-shaped separation member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1823c will be small, making it easier to bend and potentially making it impossible to sufficiently press the ornament 1804. If the separation hole 1823c is any larger, bending will occur at the separation hole 1823c in the ornament 1804, potentially deteriorating the appearance of the ornament 1804.

The first member 1823 is formed at three corners of the mounting recess 1823b and has chamfered portions 1823d that are larger (in radius) than the chamfered portion 1804a of the decorative body 1804. The remaining corner serves as an anti-misapplication portion 1823e. This gives the mounting recess 1823b a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1804. The two edges that make up the corner of the mounting recess 1823b where the chamfered portion 1823d is not provided are set as contact surfaces that serve as a reference for attaching the decorative body 1804. This ensures that there are at least two clearance directions for attaching the decorative body 1804, making the attachment work easier.

The first member 1823 also has an identification portion 1823f in the mounting recess 1823b that indicates the location of the contact surface. The identification portion 1823f is recessed below the surface of the mounting recess 1823b. By looking at this identification portion 1823f, the worker can immediately recognize the position of the contact surface for attaching the decorative body 1804, preventing mistakes in the position of the contact surface and making the attachment work easier.

In addition, in the first member 1823, it is desirable that the distance from the outer edge of the flat plate portion 1823a to the outer edge of the mounting recess 1823b be 0.5 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the outer part of the mounting recess 1823b will be easily chipped when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching the decorative body 1804 to the mounting recess 1823b, first, the corner of the decorative body 1804 where the chamfered portion 1804a is not provided is brought into contact with the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1823e) of the mounting recess 1823b indicated by the identification portion 1823f, and then the adhesive surface 1804b is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1823b from that portion to attach the decorative body 1804. Note that when the corner of the decorative body 1804 where the chamfered portion 1804a is provided is brought into contact with the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1823e), the shape of the misapplication prevention portion 1823e is different from that of the chamfered portion 1804a, so that the user is made aware that the decorative body 1804 has been attached in the wrong direction, and the decorative body 1804 can be attached in the correct direction.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1823c from the other side of the first member 1823, and the tip of the rod is used to press the decorative body 1804 from the other side to one side, so that the edge of the decorative body 1804 can be removed by rolling it up to one side. The worker can then pull the rolled-up portion to easily remove the decorative body 1804 from the mounting recess 1823b (first member 1823), achieving the same effect as the other configurations described above.

In addition, the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is located at a position that does not overlap the adhesive surface 1804b when the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting recess 1823b. This prevents the adhesive surface 1804b from overlapping the separation hole 1823c, thereby preventing the decorative body 1804 from losing its adhesive strength, and makes it difficult for the decorative body 1804 to come off.

Furthermore, the mounting recess 1823b of the first member 1823 to which the decorative body 1804 is attached is provided with an anti-misapplication section 1823e. If an attempt is made to attach the decorative body 1804 in an orientation other than the correct one, the difference between the shape of the chamfered section 1804a of the decorative body 1804 and the shape of the anti-misapplication section 1823e will alert the user to the incorrect orientation of the decorative body 1804. This allows the decorative body 1804 to be attached to the first member 1823 in the correct orientation, and also prevents the decorative body 1804 from being shipped with the decorative body 1804 attached in the incorrect orientation.

In addition, the mounting recess 1823b of the first member 1823 is provided with an identification portion 1823f that indicates the contact surface, allowing the worker to immediately recognize the position of the contact surface that serves as the reference for attaching the decorative body 1804, preventing mistakes in the position of the contact surface and making the attachment work easier.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1823 may be the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacca unit 2400, center role 2500, second attacca unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), or it may be a member (decorative holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or back unit 3000.

Examples of decorative body 1804 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metatic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

The embodiment of Fig. 206(c) is the same as the embodiment of Figs. 206(a) and (b), except that the adhesive surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804 is provided on a diagonal line in addition to the area along the outer periphery. The rest of the configuration is the same as the embodiment of Figs. 206(a) and (b), and a description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, in addition to achieving the same effects as above, the adhesive surface 1804b is provided diagonally on the back surface of the decorative body 1804, which increases the adhesive strength and makes the decorative body 1804 less likely to come off. Even if the decorative body 1804 shrinks at a rate different from that of the first member 1823 due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity, the center is attached by the diagonal adhesive surface 1804b, which prevents the decorative body 1804 from swelling or rippling, and prevents the decorative body 1804 from becoming unattractive.

In addition, because the adhesive surface 1804b is provided on the diagonal line, the adhesive surface can be reduced compared to when the entire surface of the decorative body 1804 is provided with an adhesive surface, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. In addition, because the adhesive strength of the decorative body 1804 is lower compared to when the entire surface is provided with an adhesive surface, the work of removing the decorative body 1804 using the separation hole 1823c can be made easier.

Next, the embodiment shown in FIG. 207(a) comprises a horizontally elongated rectangular decorative body 1805 (shaded portion) made of a sheet-like sticker with a predetermined decoration, character, etc. printed thereon, and a first member 1824 to one side of which the decorative body 1805 is affixed. Note that the configuration on the other side of the first member 1824 (including the second member) may comprise any of the configurations described above. Also, in this embodiment, the description of the separation hole and identification portion indicating the contact surface in the first member 1824 has been omitted.

The decorative body 1805 is a sticker with a predetermined pattern, letters, etc. printed on its surface. This decorative body 1805 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, with one corner (the lower left corner in the figure) having a chamfered C-shaped portion 1805a cut out at an angle. Since the shape of this decorative body 1805 makes it difficult to determine the up-down orientation, the shape of one corner is made different from the shape of the remaining corners, making it possible to determine the orientation. The adhesive surface of the decorative body 1805 may be provided at a fixed width along the outer periphery as in Figure 206(a) etc., or it may be provided over the entire surface.

The first member 1824 has a flat plate portion 1824a and an attachment recess 1824b that is recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1824a to a size slightly larger than the decorative body 1805 and deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the decorative body 1805, to which the decorative body 1805 is attached.

The first member 1824 also has a C-chamfered misapplication prevention portion 1824c that protrudes into the mounting recess 1824b at one corner (the lower left corner in the figure). This makes the mounting recess 1824b similar in shape to the decorative body 1805. In this first member 1824, the diagonally extending end edge of the misapplication prevention portion 1824c and the short side portion connected to the misapplication prevention portion 1824c are set as the contact surface that serves as the reference for attaching the decorative body 1805. This ensures that the clearance direction for attaching the decorative body 1805 is in three directions: the short side direction of the mounting recess 1824b, the long side direction, and the perpendicular direction to the oblique side of the misapplication prevention portion 1824c, making the attachment work easier.

In addition, in the first member 1824, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat portion 1824a to the mounting recess 1824b be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1824b will be easily chipped when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching the decorative body 1805 to the mounting recess 1824b, first, the oblique side of the chamfered portion 1805a of the decorative body 1805 and the short side connected to the chamfered portion 1805a are abutted against the contact surface of the mounting recess 1824b (the oblique side of the misapplication prevention portion 1824c and the short side connected to the misapplication prevention portion 1824c), and from that point, the adhesive surface on the back side is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1824b to attach it.

When attempting to bring the corner of the decorative body 1805 where the chamfered portion 1805a is not provided into contact with the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1824c), the shape of the misapplication prevention portion 1824c is different from that of the chamfered portion 1805a, making it possible to make the worker realize that the decorative body 1805 is applied in the wrong direction, and to make the decorative body 1805 be applied in the correct direction. Also, if the decorative body 1805 is applied to the mounting recess 1824b in the wrong direction, the right-angled corner of the decorative body 1805 will protrude from the mounting recess 1824b at the location of the misapplication prevention portion 1824c, making it possible for the worker to realize that the decorative body 1805 has been applied incorrectly.

According to this embodiment, the mounting recess 1824b of the first member 1824 to which the decorative body 1805 is attached is provided with an erroneous attachment prevention section 1824c. If an attempt is made to attach the decorative body 1805 in an orientation other than the correct one, the shape of the corner of the decorative body 1805 where the chamfered section 1805a is not provided differs from the shape of the erroneous attachment prevention section 1824c, making it possible to make the decorative body 1805 be attached to the first member 1824 in the correct orientation and also preventing the decorative body 1805 from being shipped with the decorative body 1805 attached in the wrong orientation.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1824 may be the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacca unit 2400, center role 2500, second attacca unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), or it may be a member (decorative holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or back unit 3000.

Examples of decorative body 1805 include PET seals, flex metal seals (product name), metallic seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

Next, the embodiment shown in FIG. 207(b) comprises a circular decorative body 1806 (shaded portion) made of a sheet-like sticker with a predetermined decoration, lettering, etc. printed thereon, and a first member 1825 to one side of which the decorative body 1806 is affixed. Note that the configuration on the other side of the first member 1825 (including the second member) may comprise any of the configurations described above. Also, in this embodiment, the description of the separation hole and identification portion indicating the contact surface in the first member 1825 has been omitted.

The decorative body 1806 is a sticker with a predetermined pattern, letters, etc. printed on its surface. This decorative body 1806 has a circular outer shape, with a notch 1806a cut into an arc shape from the outside (lower part in the figure). Since the shape of this decorative body 1806 makes it difficult to determine its orientation, the notch 1806a is provided to make it possible to determine its orientation. The adhesive surface of the decorative body 1806 may be provided at a fixed width along the outer periphery as in Figure 206(a) etc., or it may be provided over the entire surface.

The first member 1825 has a flat plate portion 1825a and an attachment recess 1825b that is recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1825a to a size slightly larger than the decorative body 1806 and deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the decorative body 1806, to which the decorative body 1806 is attached.

The first member 1825 also has an erroneous application prevention portion 1825c that protrudes in an arc shape at a radius that matches the notch 1806a of the decorative body 1806 at the periphery of the mounting recess 1825b (the lower end of the periphery in the figure). This gives the mounting recess 1825b a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1806. In this first member 1825, the arc-shaped end edge of the erroneous application prevention portion 1825c is set as a contact surface that serves as a reference for attaching the decorative body 1806. This ensures that there are at least two clearance directions for attaching the decorative body 1806: a direction along the arc of the erroneous application prevention portion 1825c and a direction away from the erroneous application prevention portion 1825c (up and down in the figure), making the application process easier.

In addition, in the first member 1825, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat portion 1825a to the mounting recess 1825b be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1825b will be easily chipped when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching the decorative body 1806 to the mounting recess 1825b, first, the cutout portion 1806a of the decorative body 1806 is brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1825b (the portion 1825c to prevent misapplication), and then the adhesive surface on the back side is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1825b from that portion to attach it.

If the decorative body 1806 is attached to a peripheral surface other than the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1825c) of the mounting recess 1825b, the decorative body 1806 will protrude from the mounting recess 1825b at the area of the misapplication prevention portion 1825c, making it possible for the worker to notice that the decorative body 1806 has been erroneously attached.

According to this embodiment, the attachment recess 1825b of the first member 1825 to which the decorative body 1806 is attached is provided with an erroneous attachment prevention section 1825c. If an attempt is made to attach the decorative body 1806 in an orientation other than the correct one, the decorative body 1806 will protrude from the area of the erroneous attachment prevention section 1825c, making it possible to notice the incorrect orientation of the decorative body 1806. This allows the decorative body 1806 to be attached to the first member 1825 in the correct orientation, and also prevents the decorative body 1806 from being shipped with the decorative body 1806 attached in the incorrect orientation.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1825 may be the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacca unit 2400, center role 2500, second attacca unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), or it may be a member (decorative holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or back unit 3000.

In addition, examples of decorative bodies 1806 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metatic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figures 207 (c) and (d) comprises a pair of decorative bodies 1807L and 1807R (shaded areas) that are arranged symmetrically and made of sheet-like stickers with predetermined decorations, characters, etc. printed on them, and a pair of first members 1826L and 1826R to one side of which the decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are attached. Note that the configuration of the other side of the decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above. Also, in this embodiment, the description of the separation hole and identification part indicating the contact surface in the decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R is omitted.

The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are stickers with a predetermined pattern, text, etc. printed on the surface. The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are symmetrical to each other. The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are formed in a roughly semicircular shape that is long vertically, with the edges that are close to each other extending vertically in a straight line, and the upper and lower ends of the edges being connected by arc-shaped edges that bulge out in the direction away from each other.

The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R in Figure 207(c) have different radii of the R-chamfers at both ends in the longitudinal direction, i.e., the upper and lower ends of the semicircle. On the other hand, the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R in Figure 207(d) have R-chamfers at the upper end side (one end side in the longitudinal direction) of the semicircle, and a linear notch at the lower end side (the other end side in the longitudinal direction). Both the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R have shapes that make it difficult to determine whether they are for left or right use when turned upside down, so by making the shapes of the upper and lower ends different, it is possible to determine whether they are for left or right use.

The adhesive surface of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R may be provided at a constant width along the outer periphery as in Figure 206 (a) etc., or may be provided over the entire surface.

The first left member 1826L and the first right member 1826R are formed symmetrically to each other. The first left member 1826L and the first right member 1826R have a flat plate portion 1826a, an attachment recess 1826b that is slightly larger than the decorative body 1806 and recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1826a to a depth (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) deeper than the thickness of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R to which the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are attached, and an erroneous attachment prevention portion 1826c at the lower end of the attachment recess 1826b.

The misapplication prevention portion 1826c of the first left member 1826L and the first right member 1826R in Fig. 207(c) is provided in a rounded chamfer shape with a radius larger than the radius of the rounded chamfer on the lower end side of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R. On the other hand, the misapplication prevention portion 1826c of the first left member 1826L and the first right member 1826R in Fig. 207(d) is provided in a horizontally extending linear notch shape. In both of the mounting recesses 1826b of the first left member 1826L and the first right member 1826R, the end edge of the misapplication prevention portion 1826c is set to the contact surface that serves as the reference for attaching the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R.

As a result, in the embodiment of FIG. 207(c), at least two clearance directions for attaching the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are ensured: the arc direction in which the misapplication prevention part 1826c rolls, and the direction away from the misapplication prevention part 1826c (up and down in the figure). On the other hand, in the embodiment of FIG. 207(d), at least two clearance directions for attaching the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are ensured: the direction along the straight line of the misapplication prevention part 1826c (left and right in the figure) and the direction away from the misapplication prevention part 1826c (up and down in the figure). In this way, in both embodiments, at least two clearance directions are ensured, making the attachment work easy.

In addition, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1826a to the mounting recess 1826b in the first left member 1826L and the first right member 1826R be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1826b will be easily chipped when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R to the corresponding mounting recesses 1826b of the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R, the end of the longitudinal direction of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R with the larger radius of the R chamfer or the straight cut-out end facing downward, and abutting it against the contact surface of the corresponding mounting recess 1826b (the edge of the misapplication prevention portion 1826c), and attaching it by gradually bringing the adhesive surface on the back side from that point into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1826b.

If one were to reverse the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R upside down and then paste them the other way around, the shape of the contact surface (misapplication prevention part 1826c) would be different from the shape of the lower end, making it possible to realize that the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are pasted in the wrong direction, and allowing the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R to be pasted in the correct direction.

According to this embodiment, the attachment recesses 1826b of the first left member 1826L and the first right member 1826R to which the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are attached are provided with the misapplication prevention portion 1826c. Therefore, if an attempt is made to attach the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R in an orientation other than the correct orientation, the difference between the shape of the longitudinal end of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R and the shape of the misapplication prevention portion 1826c makes it possible to notice the incorrect orientation of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R, and the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R can be attached to the first left member 1826L and the first right member 1826R in the correct orientation, and it is possible to prevent the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R from being shipped in a state where they are attached in the wrong orientation.

In this embodiment, for example, the first left member 1826L and the first right member 1826R may be members (decorative holding members) provided on the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000.

Examples of decorative body left 1807L and decorative body right 1807R include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metatic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

The embodiment shown in Figures 208(a) to (c) includes a decorative body 1808 made of a sheet-like sticker on which a predetermined pattern, lettering, etc. is printed, and a movable first member 1827 to one side of which the decorative body 1808 is attached. The configuration on the other side of the first member 1827 (including the second member) may include any of the configurations described above. Also, in this embodiment, the description of the identification portion indicating the contact surface of the first member 1827 is omitted.

The decorative body 1808 is a sticker with a predetermined pattern, letters, etc. printed on its surface. This decorative body 1808 has a horizontally long rectangular shape with the two upper corners being rounded and the two lower corners being C-chamfered. The difference in the chamfered shape between the upper and lower sides makes it possible to identify the orientation of the decorative body 1808. The adhesive surface of the decorative body 1808 may be provided at a fixed width along the outer periphery as in Figure 206(a) etc., or it may be provided over the entire surface.

The first member 1827 has a horizontally long rectangular flat plate portion 1827a, an attachment recess 1827b recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1827a to a size slightly larger than the decorative body 1808 and deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the decorative body 1808, to which the decorative body 1808 is attached, a separation hole 1827c penetrating the flat plate portion 1827a at the location of the attachment recess 1827b, and misapplication prevention portions 1827d provided at the two lower corners of the attachment recess 1827b.

The first member 1827 also has a pair of shafts 1827e that protrude in a cylindrical shape in the left-right direction from near the lower ends of both the left and right side surfaces of the flat plate portion 1827a. As shown in FIG. 208(b), the shafts 1827e are located on the other side of the surface of the mounting recess 1827b. The pair of shafts 1827e of the first member 1827 are rotatably supported by a member not shown. In other words, the first member 1827 is movable and can rotate (pivot) around the axis of the pair of shafts 1827e. The shafts 1827e of the first member 1827 may be integrally molded with the flat plate portion 1827a, etc., may be insert molded, or may be assembled separately.

The separation hole 1827c is a round hole and is provided near the upper corner of the mounting recess 1827b. Since the two separation holes 1827c are provided at positions far from the axis of the shaft portion 1827e, the weight of the first member 1827 at a position far from the axis of the shaft portion 1827e can be reduced, so that the rotational moment acting when the first member 1827 is rotated (pivoted) can be reduced, and the load on the rotational drive of the first member 1827 can be reduced and the first member 1827 can be moved easily. In addition, since the two separation holes 1827c are provided near the upper left and right corners, the force applied to the left and right shaft portions 1827e can be made equal, and uneven wear can be reduced by balancing the first member 1827.

In this embodiment, the separation hole 1827c has an inner diameter within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1827c is smaller than this, the diameter of the rod-shaped separation member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1827c will be smaller, making it easier to bend and potentially unable to sufficiently press the ornament 1808. If the separation hole 1827c is larger than this, bending will occur at the separation hole 1827c in the ornament 1808, potentially causing the ornament 1808 to look unattractive.

The misapplication prevention portion 1827d protrudes into the mounting recess 1827b in a shape that corresponds to the C-chamfer of the lower corner of the decorative body 1808. In this embodiment, the diagonal edge of the misapplication prevention portion 1827d and the lower edge of the mounting recess 1827b are set as the contact surface that serves as the reference for attaching the decorative body 1808.

Since the misapplication prevention portion 1827d protrudes into the mounting recess 1827b, the weight of the first member 1827 increases. However, since the misapplication prevention portion 1827d is provided in a position close to the axis of the shaft portion 1827e, the effect of the rotation moment increased by the misapplication prevention portion 1827d can be reduced as much as possible, and the increase in the load on the rotational drive of the first member 1827 can be suppressed. In addition, since the misapplication prevention portion 1827d is provided at each of the two corners on the lower side of the mounting recess 1827b, the first member 1827 can be balanced, uneven wear of the shaft portion 1827e can be reduced, and the first member 1827 can be rotated (pivoted) in a stable state.

In addition, in the first member 1827, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat portion 1827a to the mounting recess 1827b be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1827b will be easily chipped when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching the decorative body 1808 to the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827, first, the C-chamfered corner of the decorative body 1808 is brought into contact with the abutting surface (misapplication prevention portion 1827d) of the mounting recess 1827b, and then the adhesive surface is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1827b from that portion to attach the decorative body 1808. Note that if an attempt is made to attach the decorative body 1808 upside down, the shape of the misapplication prevention portion 1827d differs from the shape of the R-chamfered corner of the decorative body 1808, making it possible to realize that the decorative body 1808 has been attached in the wrong direction, and to allow the decorative body 1808 to be attached in the correct direction. Furthermore, if the decorative body 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b in the wrong orientation, the corner of the decorative body 1808 will protrude from the mounting recess 1827b at the location of the incorrect attachment prevention portion 1827d, making it possible for the worker to notice that the decorative body 1808 has been attached incorrectly.

The first member 1827 is recessed in a portion close to the edge of the mounting recess 1827b and has a separation groove 1827f extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 208(b)). When the decorative body 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b, the decorative body 1808 straddles this separation groove 1827f, forming a space between the decorative body 1808 and the separation groove 1827f. When the decorative body 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b and the portion of the separation groove 1827f on the decorative body 1808 is pressed from the outside, a part of the decorative body 1808 sinks into the separation groove 1827f and the edge side of the decorative body 1808 is raised from the mounting recess 1827b. The raised portion can be pulled to remove the decorative body 1808 from the mounting recess 1827b.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1827c from the other side of the first member 1827, and the tip of the rod is used to press the decorative body 1808 from the other side to one side, so that the edge of the decorative body 1808 can be removed by rolling it up to one side. The worker can then pull the rolled-up portion to easily remove the decorative body 1808 from the mounting recess 1827b (first member 1827), achieving the same effect as the other configurations described above.

In addition, the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827 to which the decorative body 1808 is attached is provided with an anti-misapplication section 1827d. If an attempt is made to attach the decorative body 1808 in an orientation other than the correct one, the difference between the shape of the corners of the decorative body 1808 and the shape of the anti-misapplication section 1827d will alert the user to the incorrect orientation of the decorative body 1808. This allows the decorative body 1808 to be attached to the first member 1827 in the correct orientation, and also prevents the decorative body 1808 from being shipped with the decorative body 1808 attached in the incorrect orientation.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1827c is provided at a position far from the axis of rotation and the misapplication prevention part 1827d is provided at a position close to the axis of rotation, the rotational moment acting when the first member 1827 is rotated can be reduced, so that the load on the rotational drive of the first member 1827 can be reduced, and the first member 1827 can be moved (rotated) easily.

In addition, since the first member 1827 has two separation holes 1827c and two misapplication prevention sections 1827d, the forces acting on the left and right shaft sections 1827e can be balanced, reducing uneven wear of the shaft sections 1827e and allowing the first member 1827 to rotate (pivot) in a stable manner.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1827 may be a door member for a variable winning opening such as a large winning opening or a special winning opening, or may be a movable member for presentation purposes provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

In addition, examples of decorative bodies 1808 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metatic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

When the first member 1827 is used as a door member for opening and closing the large prize opening 2005 or the special prize opening 2006, etc., the game ball B comes into contact with the decorative body 1808, so it is desirable that the decorative body 1808 and the first member 1827 have the following relationship.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 208(c), if the distance from the front surface of the flat portion 1827a of the first member 1827 to the front surface of the decorative body 1808 is d, the distance from the upper edge of the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827 to the upper edge of the decorative body 1808 is c, and the radius of the game ball B is r, then it is desirable to set the distance d within the range of [0<d<r] and the distance c within the range of [0≦c<(2rd^2-d^2)^0.5]. Note that the above brackets indicate formulas.

This makes it possible to prevent the game ball B from coming into contact with the upper edge of the decorative body 1808, thereby preventing the decorative body 1808 from coming off due to the game ball B coming into contact with it, thereby suppressing the occurrence of malfunctions.

It is desirable that distance d be within the range of 0.1 mm to 1 mm. If distance d is smaller than this, depending on the tolerance of decorative body 1808, decorative body 1808 may protrude forward from flat plate portion 1827a, which may allow game ball B to come into contact with the upper edge. If distance d is larger than this, the shadow cast by the upper edge of mounting recess 1827b may easily fall on decorative body 1808, which may reduce the decorative effect of decorative body 1808.

The contact surface of the mounting recess 1827b may also be set to the upper edge. This causes the upper edge of the decorative body 1808 to contact the upper edge of the mounting recess 1827b, so that the game ball B does not contact the upper edge of the decorative body 1808, and the same effect as above can be achieved.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figures 208 (d) and (e) comprises a decorative body 1809 consisting of a sheet-like sticker on which a predetermined pattern, lettering, etc. is printed, and a movable first member 1828 to one side of which the decorative body 1809 is affixed. Note that the configuration on the other side of the first member 1828 (including the second member) may comprise any of the configurations described above. Also, in this embodiment, the description of the identification portion indicating the contact surface of the first member 1828 is omitted.

The decorative body 1809 is a sticker with a predetermined pattern, letters, etc. printed on its surface. The decorative body 1809 has a horizontally long rectangular shape with the two upper corners rounded and the two lower corners provided with rectangular cutouts 1809a. The cutouts 1809a are formed in a shape that corresponds to the misapplication prevention section 1828d of the first member 1828, which will be described later. The difference in shape between the upper and lower corners makes it possible to identify the orientation of the decorative body 1809. The adhesive surface of the decorative body 1809 may be provided at a fixed width along the outer periphery as in FIG. 206(a) etc., or it may be provided over the entire surface.

The first member 1828 has a horizontally long rectangular flat plate portion 1828a, an attachment recess 1828b that is recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1828a to a size slightly larger than the decorative body 1809 and deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the decorative body 1809, to which the decorative body 1809 is attached, a separation hole 1828c that penetrates the flat plate portion 1828a at the location of the attachment recess 1828b, and misapplication prevention portions 1828d that are provided at the two lower corners of the attachment recess 1828b.

The first member 1828 is provided with semi-cylindrical shaft support parts 1828e that bulge outwardly from the axis at the left and right corners of the lower side of the flat plate part 1827a, shaft holes 1828f provided on the end faces of the shaft support parts 1828e on the left and right outer sides, and cylindrical shaft parts 1828g inserted into the shaft holes 1828f. The pair of shaft parts 1828g of the first member 1828 are rotatably supported by a member not shown. In other words, the first member 1828 is movable and can rotate (pivot) around the axis of the pair of shaft parts 1828g. The shaft parts 1828g of the first member 1828 may be inserted during molding of the flat plate part 1827a, etc., or may be assembled separately.

The shaft support portion 1828e is provided up to the mounting recess 1828b, and a part of the shaft support portion 1828e constitutes the misapplication prevention portion 1828d. This shaft support portion 1828e (misapplication prevention portion 1828d) forms the left and right corners of the lower side of the mounting recess 1828b into a rectangular shape.

The separation hole 1828c is a round hole and is provided near the upper corner of the mounting recess 1828b. Since the two separation holes 1828c are provided at positions far from the axis of the shaft portion 1828g, the weight of the first member 1828 at a position far from the axis of the shaft portion 1828g can be reduced, so that the rotational moment acting when the first member 1828 is rotated (pivoted) can be reduced, and the load on the rotational drive of the first member 1828 can be reduced and the first member 1828 can be moved easily. In addition, since the two separation holes 1828c are provided near the upper left and right corners, the force applied to the left and right shaft portions 1828g can be made equal, and uneven wear can be reduced by balancing the first member 1828.

In this embodiment, the separation hole 1828c has an inner diameter within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1828c is smaller than this, the diameter of the rod-shaped separation member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1828c will be smaller, making it easier to bend and potentially unable to sufficiently press the decorative body 1809. If the separation hole 1828c is larger than this, bending will occur in the area of the separation hole 1828c in the decorative body 1809, potentially causing the decorative body 1809 to look unattractive.

The misapplication prevention part 1828d is formed by the shaft support part 1828e and protrudes in a square shape from the lower corner of the mounting recess 1828b, and has a shape that corresponds to the notch 1809a in the lower corner of the decorative body 1809. In this embodiment, the upper edge of the misapplication prevention part 1828d is set as a contact surface that serves as a reference for attaching the decorative body 1809.

Since the misapplication prevention portion 1828d protrudes into the mounting recess 1828b, the weight of the first member 1828 increases. However, since the misapplication prevention portion 1828d is provided in a position close to the axis of the shaft portion 1828g, the effect of the rotation moment increased by the misapplication prevention portion 1828d can be reduced as much as possible, and the increase in the load on the rotational drive of the first member 1828 can be suppressed. In addition, since the misapplication prevention portion 1828d is provided at each of the two corners on the lower side of the mounting recess 1828b, the first member 1828 can be balanced, uneven wear of the shaft portion 1828g can be reduced, and the first member 1828 can be rotated (pivoted) in a stable state.

In addition, in the first member 1828, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat portion 1828a to the mounting recess 1828b be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1828b will be easily chipped when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching the decorative body 1809 to the mounting recess 1828b of the first member 1828, first, the notch 1809a of the decorative body 1809 is brought into contact with the abutting surface (misapplication prevention portion 1828d) of the mounting recess 1828b, and then the adhesive surface is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1828b from that portion to attach the decorative body 1809. Note that if an attempt is made to attach the decorative body 1809 upside down, the shape of the misapplication prevention portion 1828d differs from the shape of the R-chamfered corners of the decorative body 1809, making it possible to realize that the decorative body 1809 has been attached in the wrong direction, and to allow the decorative body 1809 to be attached in the correct direction. Furthermore, if the decorative body 1809 is attached to the mounting recess 1828b in the wrong orientation, the corner of the decorative body 1809 will protrude from the mounting recess 1828b at the location of the incorrect attachment prevention portion 1828d, making it possible for the worker to notice that the decorative body 1809 has been attached incorrectly.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1828c from the other side of the first member 1828, and the tip of the rod is used to press the decorative body 1809 from the other side to one side, so that the edge of the decorative body 1809 can be removed by rolling it up to one side. The worker can then pull the rolled-up portion to easily remove the decorative body 1809 from the mounting recess 1828b (first member 1828), achieving the same effect as the other configurations described above.

In addition, the mounting recess 1828b of the first member 1828 to which the decorative body 1809 is attached is provided with an anti-misapplication section 1828d. If an attempt is made to attach the decorative body 1809 in an orientation other than the correct one, the difference between the shape of the corners of the decorative body 1809 and the shape of the anti-misapplication section 1828d will alert the user to the incorrect orientation of the decorative body 1809. This allows the decorative body 1809 to be attached to the first member 1828 in the correct orientation, and also prevents the decorative body 1809 from being shipped with the decorative body 1809 attached in the incorrect orientation.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1828c is provided at a position far from the axis of rotation and the misapplication prevention part 1828d is provided at a position close to the axis of rotation, the rotational moment acting when the first member 1828 is rotated can be reduced, so that the load on the rotational drive of the first member 1828 can be reduced, and the first member 1828 can be moved (rotated) easily.

In addition, since the first member 1828 has two separation holes 1828c and two misapplication prevention sections 1828d, the forces acting on the left and right shaft sections 1828g can be balanced, reducing uneven wear of the shaft sections 1828g and allowing the first member 1828 to rotate (pivot) in a stable state.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1828 may be a door member for a variable winning opening such as a large winning opening or a special winning opening, or may be a movable member for presentation purposes provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Examples of decorative bodies 1809 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metaltic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

[19. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiment]
In this embodiment, decorative body 1804, decorative body 1805, decorative body 1806, decorative body 1807L and decorative body 1807R, decorative body 1808, decorative body 1809, and gate seal 2811 correspond to the decorative bodies of the present invention, adhesive surface 1804b in this embodiment corresponds to the adhesive surface of the present invention, first member 1823, first member 1824, first member 1825, first member left 1826L and first member right 1826R, first member 1827, first member 1828, and gate body 2810 in this embodiment correspond to the base members of the present invention, and flat plate portion 1823a, flat plate portion 1824a, flat plate portion 1825a, flat plate portion 1826a, flat plate portion 1827a, flat plate portion 1828a, and front plate portion 2810a in this embodiment correspond to the flat plate portions of the present invention.

In addition, mounting recess 1823b, mounting recess 1824b, mounting recess 1825b, mounting recess 1826b, mounting recess 1827b, mounting recess 1828b, and attachment recess 2810b in this embodiment correspond to the mounting recesses of the present invention, separation hole 1823c, separation hole 1827c, separation hole 1828c, and separation hole 2810d in this embodiment correspond to the separation holes of the present invention, and misapplication prevention portion 1823e, misapplication prevention portion 1824c, misapplication prevention portion 1825c, misapplication prevention portion 1826c, misapplication prevention portion 1827d, misapplication prevention portion 1828d, and misapplication prevention portion 2810c in this embodiment correspond to the misapplication prevention portion of the present invention.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the contact surface of the first member 1823, the contact surface of the first member 1824, the contact surface of the first member 1825, the contact surfaces of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R, the contact surface of the first member 1827, the contact surface of the first member 1828, and the contact surface of the gate body 2810 correspond to the positioning portion of the present invention.

[20. Characteristic Effects of the Present Embodiment]
Next, the characteristic effects of this embodiment will be described. From here to paragraph [1835], the decorative body is the decorative body 1804, the base member is the first member 1823, the flat plate portion is the flat plate portion 1823a, the mounting recess is the mounting recess 1823b, the separation hole is the separation hole 1823c, the misapplication prevention portion is the misapplication prevention portion 1823e, and the positioning portion is the contact surface of the first member 1823 (misapplication prevention portion 1823e), and so on will be described as representatives. Other configurations (members) corresponding to the present invention have the same effects, so their description will be omitted here.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, part of the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached is configured as the abutment surface of the first member 1823 (misapplication prevention portion 1823e). Therefore, when attaching the decorative body 1804 to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat portion 1823a of the first member 1823, the decorative body 1804 can be positioned relative to the first member 1823 by abutting two adjacent sides of the decorative body 1804 against the portion of the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b that is configured as the abutment surface of the first member 1823 (misapplication prevention portion 1823e) and aligning the position before attaching the decorative body 1804. This makes it easier to position the decorative body 1804 and enables the decorative body 1804 to be attached accurately in the correct position. Therefore, the contact surface of the first member 1823 (misapplication prevention portion 1823e) can reduce the likelihood of the decorative body 1804 being applied in a tilted or misaligned state relative to the first member 1823, which can prevent the decorative body 1804 and the first member 1823 from looking bad. This ensures that the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 is fully realized, improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1, and prevents a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, the contact surface of the first member 1823 (misapplication prevention portion 1823e) allows the ornament 1804 to be accurately affixed in the correct position, making it easier to affix the ornament 1804 in the correct position, reducing failures in affixing the ornament 1804 and suppressing increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the decorative body 1804 has an asymmetrical shape, it is difficult to mistake the orientation of the decorative body 1804, and the decorative body 1804 can be attached in the correct orientation to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, ensuring that the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 is achieved.

In addition, since there is an anti-misapplication portion 1823e protruding from the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b in the first member 1823, if the decorative body 1804 is applied in the incorrect orientation, the decorative body 1804 will be rolled up at the area of the anti-misapplication portion 1823e, making it possible to recognize that the decorative body 1804 has been applied in the wrong orientation, and allowing the decorative body 1804 to be reapplied in the correct orientation, ensuring that the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 is achieved.

In addition, a separation hole 1823c is provided through the flat portion 1823a in the mounting recess 1823b in the first member 1823, where the decorative body 1804 is attached. When a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and the tip of the rod is pressed against the back side of the decorative body 1804, a part of the decorative body 1804 is lifted from the flat portion 1823a of the first member 1823 to the front side against the adhesive force of the adhesive surface 1804b. By pulling the part of the decorative body 1804, it can be removed from the flat portion 1823a, and the decorative body 1804 can be easily peeled off.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the decorative body 1804 with a predetermined decoration is attached to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, so that the decorative body 1804 can improve the appearance of the first member 1823 and the decorative body 1804 can be supported by the first member 1823. Also, since the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached is recessed from the surface of the flat plate portion 1823a, when the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting recess 1823b, the surrounding portion of the mounting recess 1823b in the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 surrounds the decorative body 1804, so that the decorative body 1804 can be highlighted by being edged, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 can be easily exhibited, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the adhesive surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804 attached to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a is provided only in a specific area consisting of a band-shaped portion on the periphery of the decorative body 1804 and a band-shaped portion diagonally crossing the band-shaped portion, and is not provided on the entire back surface, so that the adhesive strength is weaker than that of the conventional method. Therefore, when a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and the tip of the rod is pressed against the back surface of the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1804 can be removed from the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 against the adhesive force of the adhesive surface 1804b even with a relatively weak force, and the decorative body 1804 can be removed without breaking in the middle even if the strength of the decorative body 1804 itself is weak, improving the workability of the removal work of the decorative body 1804.

In addition, for the above reasons, if the ornamental body 1804 cannot be properly attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, the ornamental body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and pressing the ornamental body 1804 from the back side with the tip of the rod-shaped member, so that the ornamental body 1804 can be easily reattached. In addition, with the first member 1823 removed from the pachinko machine 1, the ornamental body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and pressing the ornamental body 1804 from the back side with the tip of the rod-shaped member, so that the ornamental body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, so that the replacement work of the ornamental body 1804 when changing models can be easily performed. Furthermore, as described above, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a using the separation hole 1823c, which makes it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, thereby reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is provided at a position that does not contact the adhesive surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804, the entire adhesive surface 1804b can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823. Therefore, by providing the adhesive surface 1804b only on a part (specific portion) of the decorative body 1804, the adhesion strength is reduced compared to conventional methods, but because the entire adhesive surface 1804b is attached to the flat plate portion 1823a, it is possible to avoid the adhesive surface 1804b being overlapped by the separation hole 1823c, which would result in an unnecessary reduction in adhesion strength, and the decorative body 1804 can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a in a good condition while maintaining sufficient adhesion strength.

In addition, the adhesive surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804 is provided in a band-shaped portion of the periphery and a band-shaped portion (diagonal portion) that crosses diagonally, so that the peripheral portion of the decorative body 1804 can be attached to the flat portion 1823a by the band-shaped portion of the adhesive surface 1804b, so that the peripheral portion of the decorative body 1804 does not rise up from the flat portion 1823a, and the decorative body 1804 is difficult to peel off from the peripheral portion. In addition, the band-shaped portion that crosses diagonally of the adhesive surface 1804b allows the portion close to the center of the decorative body 1804 to be attached to the flat portion 1823a, so that even if the shrinkage difference between the first member 1823 and the decorative body 1804 becomes large due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity, the decorative body 1804 can be prevented from swelling or wrinkling, and the appearance of the decorative body 1804 can be prevented from deteriorating. Therefore, the decorative effect of the decoration 1804 can be reliably achieved, and a larger decoration 1804 can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a in good condition, providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of players.

Furthermore, since the adhesive surface 1804b is provided on the periphery of the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1804 and the first member 1823 are made translucent, and if a light source such as an LED that irradiates light toward the decorative body 1804 is provided on the back side of the first member 1823, the band-shaped adhesive surface 1804b will be located in a position that does not interfere with the light from the light source, and the deterioration of the appearance of the luminous decoration of the decorative body 1804 due to the diffusion and attenuation of light by the adhesive surface 1804b can be reduced. Therefore, the decorative body 1804 can be luminous in good condition, and the light source can be seen in good condition through the decorative body 1804 and the first member 1823, and a pachinko machine 1 with high performance and display effects can be provided.

In addition, because a separation hole 1823c is provided in the mounting recess 1823b of the flat portion 1823a of the first member 1823, the separation hole 1823c can be made less visible or hidden from the front side by attaching the decorative body 1804 to the mounting recess 1823b. This prevents the separation hole 1823c from making the game look unsightly, and also makes it difficult for players to notice the presence of the separation hole 1823c, making it difficult for players to plot fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1823c.

In addition, because the separation hole 1823c is provided in a portion close to the periphery of the decorative body 1804, when a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and the back surface of the decorative body 1804 is pressed, the portion of the decorative body 1804 pressed by the rod-shaped member is close to the periphery of the decorative body 1804, so the edge side tends to float away from the portion where the rod-shaped member is in contact, making it easier to remove the affixed decorative body 1804.

Furthermore, because the separation hole 1823c is provided in a portion close to the periphery of the decorative body 1804, when the decorative body 1804 is pressed from the back side of the first member 1823 with a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1823c, as described above, the peripheral side of the portion of the decorative body 1804 where the rod-shaped member is in contact will lift up from the flat plate portion 1823a, and by grasping and pulling the lifted portion of the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed by rolling it up from the flat plate portion 1823a.

The separation hole 1823c is sized to allow a circle with a diameter of 2 mm to 6 mm to touch it, and in addition to providing the same effect as above, an upper limit is set on the size of the separation hole 1823c, which prevents the size of the adhesive surface on the decorative body 1804 from becoming smaller than necessary due to the presence of the separation hole 1823c, and maintains the desired adhesion strength to the flat plate portion 1823a.

In addition, as described above, the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached is recessed from the flat plate portion 1823a. By using the boundary between the flat plate portion 1823a and the mounting recess 1823b as a guide when attaching the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1804 can be easily attached in the correct position, reducing failures in attaching the decorative body 1804 and suppressing increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting recess 1823b recessed from the flat plate portion, even if an attempt is made to insert a tool such as a flathead screwdriver between the decorative body 1804 and the bottom surface of the mounting recess 1823b to remove the decorative body 1804 from the front side, the insertion of the tool will be prevented by the wall portion around the recessed mounting recess 1823b. However, since the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is provided in the portion covered by the decorative body 1804, the separation hole 1823c is provided in the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached. Therefore, as described above, by inserting a rod-shaped member into the separation hole 1823c from the back side and pressing the decorative body 1804 toward the front side, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the recessed mounting recess 1823b, and the same effect as above can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the conventional technology (pachinko machine), the hole for removing the sticker penetrates all the way to the rear side of the pachinko machine (game board), which makes it possible to use linear tools such as piano wire to reach the passage of the game ball B or signal lines through the hole, which makes it easier to commit fraud. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a second member (see second member 1841, second member 1842, etc. in FIG. 205) that can close the separation hole 1823c on the back side of the first member 1823. As a result, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the second member closes the back side of the separation hole 1823c from the outside, so there is no hole that penetrates to the other side of the game board as in conventional pachinko machines, which makes it possible to avoid inserting linear illegal tools such as piano wire into the game board 5 through the hole, thereby preventing fraud.

In addition, when a second member (see second member 1841, second member 1842, etc. in FIG. 205) that closes separation hole 1823c is provided on the back side of first member 1823 as described above, even if an illegal tool is inserted from the front side through decoration 1804 and into separation hole 1823c, the tip of the illegal tool will abut against the second member, blocking insertion (intrusion) of the second member to the outside (into game board 5). This prevents the illegal tool from intruding into game board 5 from the front side through separation hole 1823c, preventing illegal acts from being performed, and at the same time, since the illegal tool penetrates decoration 1804 and leaves a mark on decoration 1804, it is possible to deter illegal acts, and a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts can be provided.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the game ball B released from the game board 5 becomes stuck in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the base unit 710 provided in the base unit 700 below the game board 5 in the main frame 4, the security cover 714 closing the removal opening 711b of the front base 711 can be opened, and a rod-shaped tool such as a flathead screwdriver can be inserted from the upper notch 713q of the removal opening 711b among the multiple notches 713q to poke the stuck game ball B, thereby breaking up the game ball B and easily removing the jam. After that, by closing the removal opening 711b with the security cover 714, the security cover 714 can prevent a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 from the removal opening 711b and the notch 713q. If an illegal tool is inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 from the notch 713q or the exit of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, even if the tip of the illegal tool is moved while contacting the inner surface of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 in order to extend the tip from the entrance of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 (the ball receiving port 711a of the front base 711) to the game board 5, if the tip of the illegal tool abuts against any of the multiple blocking ribs 713o extending downward from the ceiling of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the blocking rib 713o can block the movement of the illegal tool. In this way, the security cover 714 and the multiple blocking ribs 713o can prevent illegal acts on the game board 5 via the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, and a pachinko machine 1 with high deterrent effect against illegal acts can be provided.

In addition, because the base unit 710 is made transparent, when a game ball B becomes clogged in the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, the location of the clogged ball can be easily identified simply by looking from the outside, making it easier to clear the clog and reducing the maintenance burden on the game hall.

In addition, since the discharge passage for discharging game balls B in the base unit 710 is composed of independent first ball path 701 and second ball path 702, when many game balls B are released from the game board 5 in a short period of time, these game balls B can be distributed and discharged to each of the first ball path 701 and second ball path 702. This reduces the concentration of many game balls B in one first ball path 701 or second ball path 702, prevents ball clogging caused by the concentration of game balls B, and allows many game balls B released from the game board 5 to be quickly discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall (out receiving section, bucket, etc.).

In addition, since the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can detect game balls B circulating through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the number of game balls B discharged from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be counted. By comparing this with the number of game balls B counted on the upstream game board 5, it is possible to determine whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity on the game board 5 or the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, and a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity can be provided.

In addition, since the discharge passage is formed by the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 which are independent in the front-to-back direction, the game ball B (safe ball) that is accepted into the winning port which awards a privilege and the game ball B (out ball) that is not accepted into the winning port on the game board 5 can be released to positions different in the front-to-back direction, so that the game ball B that is accepted into the winning port and the game ball B that is not accepted into the winning port can be discharged by circulating through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 which are different from each other. Furthermore, since the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are equipped with a function of detecting each of the game balls B circulating on the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, respectively, it is possible to count the number of game balls B (safe balls) that have been received into the winning openings and the number of game balls B (out balls) that have not been received into the winning openings outside the game board 5. By comparing the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted on the game board 5 with the number of game balls B, it is possible to determine whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity at the winning openings of the game board 5. This makes it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity and can reduce the burden on the game hall.

Furthermore, the number of game balls B released from the game board 5 can be counted by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 provided on the base unit 710 (ball path member 713), so there is no need to provide a sensor or electronic circuit, etc. for counting the number of game balls B released (discharged) to the outside of the game board 5, and the cost associated with the game board 5 can be reduced.

In addition, the security cover 714, which opens and closes the release opening 711b, is attached to the front base 711 so that it can rotate on a hinge. Therefore, even when the security cover 714 opens the release opening 711b, the security cover 714 remains attached to the front base 711 by the hinge axis of the hinge rotation. Therefore, even when the security cover 714 is opened to release the game ball B stuck in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the security cover 714 remains attached to the front base 711, making it difficult to lose the security cover 714.

In addition, the security cover 714 is attached to the underside of the base unit 710, and the security cover 714 is attached to the front base 711 so as to be hinged and rotatable, and the hinge axis of the security cover 714 is arranged to extend to the left and right (horizontally) at the front end of the security cover 714. Therefore, when clearing a jam of game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the main frame 4 is opened forward relative to the outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall, the security cover 714 is opened, and a specified tool is inserted into the clearance opening 711b to clear the jammed balls. After that, the body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 after closing the security cover 714. If the security cover 714 is open at this time, the tip of the security cover 714 will come into contact with the outer frame 2 (object at risk of contact) and the body frame 4 will not be able to be closed, so the security cover 714 can be made aware that it has been left closed, and the security cover 714 can be closed to ensure that the release opening 711b is closed. Also, even if the security cover 714 is open for some reason while the body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, when the body frame 4 is opened, the security cover 714 will come into contact with the outer frame 2 and rotate in the closing direction, so the body frame 4 will not be unable to open, and the body frame 4 can be opened well while preventing damage to the security cover 714, etc.

Furthermore, since the ball path member 713 forming the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 is provided with a plurality of notches 713q, any debris that has entered the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 or debris attached to the game ball B can be discharged downward through the notches 713q to the bottom of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. By reducing the amount of debris in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the occurrence of clogging of the game ball B caused by debris can be reduced, and the maintenance burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

In addition, some of the multiple cutouts 713q also serve as tool insertion ports for inserting a tool to unclog balls, eliminating the need to provide a separate tool insertion port, simplifying the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 and preventing increases in costs while providing the same effects as those described above.

In addition, the base unit 710 is designed to prevent debris that falls through the cutout 713q from reaching the first ball sensor 703 or the second ball sensor 704, thereby preventing malfunctions in the first ball sensor 703 or the second ball sensor 704 caused by debris adhering thereto, and enabling reliable detection of the game ball B circulating through the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the flat plate portion of the first member (front surface of the front component 1000, flat plate portion 1821, front member 2531, gate body 2810, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) in the first member (front component 1000, front member 2531, gate body 2810, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) and the second member (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, second member 1841, second member 1842, etc.) that forms the passage portion (game area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, gate 2003, etc.) through which the game ball B flows on the game board 5 is formed. Decorative bodies (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate seal 2811, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) with predetermined decorations are attached to the attachment portions (spec sticker attachment portion 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, mounting recess 1821b, mounting recess 1822b, etc.) of the first member 2531, flat plate portion 1822a, the front surface of the front member 2531, front plate portion 2810a, etc.), so that the appearance of the first member can be improved by the decoration of the decorative bodies. In addition, the attachment portion to which the decorative body is attached is recessed from one side of the flat plate portion. When the decorative body is attached to the attachment portion, the portion of the flat plate portion of the first member surrounding the attachment portion surrounds the decorative body, and the decorative body is highlighted by being framed by this portion, making it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the decorative body and improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the attachment parts (spec sticker attachment part 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, mounting recess 1821b, mounting recess 1822b, etc.) where the decorative bodies (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) are attached are recessed from the flat plate part (front surface of front component 1000, flat plate part 1821a, flat plate part 1822a, front surface of front member 2531, front plate part 2810a, etc.), so that the decorative bodies can be attached using the boundary part between the flat plate part and the attachment part as a guide, making it easier to attach the decorative bodies in the correct position, reducing failures in attaching the decorative bodies and suppressing increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1.

In this pachinko machine 1, the first member (front component 1000, front member 2531, gate body 2810, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) has a flat plate portion (front surface of front component 1000, flat plate portion 1821a, flat plate portion 1822a, front surface of front member 2531, front plate portion 2810a, etc.) recessed from the flat plate portion (spec sticker attachment portion 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, mounting recess 1821b, mounting recess 2822b, etc.). Since the ornaments (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage ornament seal 2532, gate seal 2811, ornaments 1801, 1802, 1803, etc.) are attached to the recess 1822b, etc., even if a tool such as a flathead screwdriver is inserted between the ornament and the attachment part to remove the ornament from one side, the insertion of the tool is prevented by the wall part around the recessed attachment part. On the other hand, the separation holes (separation holes 1023, 1821d, 1822c, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) of the first member are provided in the part where one side is closed by the ornament, so that the separation holes are provided in the attachment part where the ornament is attached, and by inserting a rod-shaped member into the separation hole from the other side and pressing the ornament to one side, the attachment to the attachment part can be easily released, and the ornament can be easily removed from the recessed attachment part. Therefore, if the decoration cannot be attached correctly to the flat plate portion of the first member during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, the decoration can be easily released from the flat plate portion by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole from the other side of the first member and pressing the decoration from the other side with its tip, so that the decoration can be easily removed from the flat plate portion of the first member and the decoration can be reattached. In addition, when the first member and the second member are separated, the decoration can be easily released from the flat plate portion of the first member by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole from the other side of the first member and pressing the decoration from the other side with its tip, so that the decoration can be easily removed from the flat plate portion, and the replacement work of the decoration when changing the model can be facilitated. Furthermore, as described above, when the first member and the second member are separated, the decoration can be easily removed from the flat plate portion using the separation hole, so that the components of the pachinko machine 1 can be easily separated into materials, and the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, separation holes (separation holes 1023, 1821d, 1822c, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) are provided in the flat plate portion (front surface of the front component 1000, flat plate portion 1821a, flat plate portion 1822a, front surface of the front component 2531, front plate portion 2810a, etc.) of the first member (front component 1000, front component 2531, gate body 2810, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.), so that the decorative body (special By attaching decorative stickers (such as sticker 1020, bottom right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.), the separation holes can be made less visible or hidden from one side, preventing the separation holes from spoiling the appearance, while also making it more difficult for players to notice the presence of the separation holes and making it more difficult for players to plot fraud through the separation holes.

When assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the extension portion (insertion pin 1022, boss portion 1821c, rib 1822d, etc.) is inserted into the second member (game panel 1100, second member 1840, etc.) so as to surround the separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c, etc.) from the other side of the flat portion (front surface of previous component 1000, flat portion 1821a, flat portion 1822a, etc.) of the first member (previous component 1000, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) to which the decorative body (spec sticker 1020, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) is attached. 1, second member 1842, etc.) and the second member is attached to the other side of the first member, and the other side of the separation hole forms a closed space that is blocked off from the outside by the extension and one surface of the second member, which makes it possible to prevent illegal tools from being inserted into the separation hole from the outside of the extension or the other side of the second member, and since there is no hole that passes through to the other side as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the hole, and thus prevents illegal acts from being committed.

In addition, since the second member (game panel 1100, second member 1841, second member 1842, etc.) makes the other side of the separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c, etc.) a closed space, even if an illegal tool is inserted from one side through the decorative body (spec seal 1020, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) into the separation hole, the tip of the illegal tool will be inserted into a closed space that is isolated from the outside, and the extension (insertion part) of the first member (previous component member 1000, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) The through pin 1022, boss portion 1821c, rib 1822d, etc.) and the second member can block insertion (intrusion) into the passageway (play area 5a, etc.) or into the pachinko machine 1, preventing the intrusion of illegal tools into the pachinko machine 1 from one side through the separation hole, preventing illegal acts from being committed through the separation hole or the passageway, and because the illegal tool pierces the decorative body and leaves a mark on the decorative body, it is possible to deter illegal acts, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

In addition, by inserting the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 into the separation hole 1821d from the other side of the first member 1821, the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 can be positioned relative to each other, making it possible to simplify the assembly process and suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, by inserting the positioning protrusion 1841b into the separation hole 1821d to position the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 relative to each other, the other side of the separation hole 1821d can be closed by the positioning protrusion 1841b, so that the separation hole 1821d itself can be the closed space described above, and a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the same effect as described above can be provided.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a decorative body (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, etc.) with a predetermined decoration is attached to the decorated portion (spec sticker attachment portion 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, etc.) which is the front surface of the front member (front component member 1000, front member 2531 of center gimmick 2500, gate body 2810 of gate member 2800, etc.) which is provided on the front side of the passage member (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.) which has a passage portion through which the game ball B flows (game area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, and detection hole of gate sensor 2801, etc.), so that the appearance of the passage member can be improved by the decoration of the decorative body. In addition, the part to be decorated to which the decorative body is attached is recessed further back than the front-to-back depth of the decorative body. Therefore, when the decorative body is attached to the part to be decorated, the surrounding part of the front member around the part to be decorated protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative body, so that the decorative body is highlighted by being framed by the forward-protruding part of the front member, making it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the decorative body and improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the decorated parts (spec sticker attachment part 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, etc.) to which the decorative bodies (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, etc.) are attached are recessed backwards, so that the decorative bodies can be attached using the protruding periphery of the decorated parts in the front member (front component member 1000, front member 2531 of center role 2500, gate body 2810 of gate member 2800, etc.) as a guide, making it easier to attach the decorative bodies in the correct position, reducing failures in attaching the decorative bodies and suppressing increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1.

In this pachinko machine 1, the decorated parts (spec sticker attachment part 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, etc.) of the front parts (front component part 1000, front part 2531 of center role piece 2500, gate body 2810 of gate part 2800, etc.) are recessed rearward, so that when a decorative body (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) is attached to the decorated part, the contact surface between the decorative body and the decorated part is in a recessed position, so even if you try to remove the decorative body attached to the decorated part, it is difficult to hook the decorative body from the front, and removal is time-consuming. In response to this, separation holes (separation holes 1023, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) are provided in the decorated part, so that the decorative body can be easily released from the decorated part by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole from the rear of the front member and pushing the decorative body forward, and the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated part. Therefore, if the decorative body cannot be properly attached to the decorated part of the front member during manufacturing, the decorative body can be easily released from the decorated part by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole from the rear of the front member and pushing the decorative body from behind with its tip, so that the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated part and reattached.

In addition, with the front members (front component member 1000, front member 2531 of center gimmick 2500, gate body 2810 of gate member 2800, etc.) and the passage members (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.) separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) from the rear of the front member and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) from the rear, thereby easily releasing the attachment of the decorative body to the decorated part (spec sticker attachment part 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, etc.). This makes it possible to easily remove the decorative body from the decorated part, facilitating the work of replacing the decorative body when changing models. Furthermore, as described above, when the front member and the passage member are separated, the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated part using the separation hole, making it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, and reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, because separation holes (separation holes 1023, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) are provided in the decorated parts (spec sticker attachment part 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, etc.), the separation holes can be made difficult to see or hidden from the front by attaching decorative bodies (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, etc.) to the decorated parts, which prevents the separation holes from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the presence of the separation holes, making it difficult for players to plan fraudulent acts through the separation holes.

When assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation holes (separation holes 1023, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) are closed from the rear by the passage members (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.) attached to the rear side of the front members (front component member 1000, front member 2531 of center role 2500, gate body 2810 of gate member 2800, etc.) to which the decorative bodies (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, etc.) are attached. Since there are no holes that pass through to the rear side as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the holes, and thus to prevent illegal acts.

In addition, because the separation holes (separation holes 1023, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) are closed from the rear by the passage members (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.), even if an illegal tool is inserted from the front through the decoration (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) and into the separation hole, the passage members can prevent the illegal tool from being inserted further rearward (intrusion). This makes it possible to prevent the illegal tool from intruding into the passage part (game area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, and detection hole (gate 2003) of gate sensor 2801, etc.) from the front through the separation hole, thereby preventing the illegal act from being performed, and at the same time, since the illegal tool penetrates the decoration and leaves a mark on the decoration, the player hesitates to perform the illegal act, and a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against the illegal act can be provided.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the back front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5, LEDs 3176 for illuminating and displaying the light guide plate 3110 and the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 are mounted on the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175, which irradiate light forward to the back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, etc. mounted on the back front lower performance unit 3160. The back front lower middle decorative body 3161, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, etc. are provided, which can be illuminated and decorated with LEDs. By providing LEDs 3176 (light guide plate below left decorative board 3174 and light guide plate below right decorative board 3175) behind the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc., the LEDs 3176 can be made invisible (hidden) to the player by the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc., making it difficult for players to notice the presence of the LEDs 3176, i.e., the light guide plate 3110. In this state, when the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated by the LED 3176 and the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. is illuminated and decorated by the light emitted by the LED mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 etc., the light from the LED 3176 is reflected forward by the light guide plate 3110, while the light from the LEDs on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 etc. is light that is directly irradiated forward, the illuminated back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. can be made to shine brighter than the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. Furthermore, because the illuminated second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 extends upward from a predetermined position (slightly above) close to the illuminated back front lower middle decorative body 3161, etc., the player is strongly misled into thinking that the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated using the light from the illuminated back front lower middle decorative body 3161, etc. as a light source. This allows the player to see an illuminated effect using the light guide plate 3110 that has never been seen in a pachinko machine before, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, since the left decorative board 3174 and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate, and the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, etc. are provided in front of the light guide plate 3110, the light from the LEDs mounted on the left decorative board 3174 and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate illuminate the light guide plate 3110, preventing the transparent light guide plate 3110 from being seen by the player. This allows the performance effect of the luminous display of the second pattern 3112, etc. of the light guide plate 3110 to be fully exerted, and a pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects can be provided.

In addition, since the translucent back front lower middle decorative body 3161 and the like are provided in front of the left decorative board 3174 and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate, when the LEDs mounted on the left decorative board 3174 and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate are illuminated, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 and the like can be illuminated and decorated. Therefore, in addition to the effects of the illuminated display of the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, the player can also see the effects of the illuminated decoration of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 and the like. This diverse presentation makes it less likely for the player to become bored, and prevents a decline in interest.

Furthermore, when the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated and the LEDs mounted on the left decorative board 3174 and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate are illuminated, as described above, the LEDs mounted on the left decorative board 3174 and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate will make the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. shine brightly, thereby attracting the player's attention to the illuminated and decorated back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc., and the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 extending upward from a predetermined position above close to the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 will direct the player's attention from the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc., via the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, to the upward end to which the second pattern 3112 extends. Therefore, at the upper end of the second image 3112 extension, there is a part of the display screen of the performance display device 1600, a rear upper movable decorative body 3210 on the rear upper performance unit 3200 that rises and falls, etc., so that it is possible to create excitement and thrills depending on whether or not further performances (performances using performance images, movable performances, etc.) are executed at the end where the second image 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 extends, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of a number of line groups 3114, each group consisting of five lines 3113 extending upward from a predetermined position, and each line 3113 can be illuminated independently. LEDs 3176 (first LED 3176a to fifth LED 3176e) are provided to correspond to each line 3113. Therefore, by sequentially illuminating the first LED 3176a to fifth LED 3176e of the LED group 3177, the illuminated lines 3113 change, creating a pseudo-animation. Furthermore, because the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. is provided at a lower position close to the lower end position (predetermined position) of the multiple lines 3113, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be made to appear to move using the light from the illuminated back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. as a light source, which makes a strong impact on the player and makes them think that something good is going to happen, increasing expectations for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the result of the special lottery (special lottery result) is drawn by the establishment of the starting condition by the reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, the special pattern is displayed in a variable manner in the function display unit 1400A or the function display unit 1400B by the multiple LEDs 1401 of the function display board 1402 and the left LED 1411a and right LED 1411b of the function display board 1411 lighting up or flashing, and then a special pattern suggesting the special lottery result is displayed by a combination of the lighting up and extinguishing of the multiple LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b. At this time, the light from the multiple LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b is radiated to only one eye of the player through the multiple display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 and the multiple display holes 1414a in front of the reflector 1414, which radiate the light independently forward, and at least a portion of the remaining light is radiated to only the other eye of the player. Therefore, when the player looks at all of the LEDs 1401 and the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b with both eyes at the same time, the player can see all of the light. Because the light from the LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b can be seen, it is possible to visually check the on and off of the multiple LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b in a good condition, and the special patterns created by the multiple LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b can be clearly seen, allowing the display function of the multiple LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b to be performed without any loss.

And when the multiple LEDs 1401, left LEDs 1411a, and right LEDs 1411b (functional display units 1400A and 1400B) are photographed with a digital camera or a mobile phone camera, as described above, the light from all of the LEDs 1401, left LEDs 1411a, and right LEDs 1411b is visible when viewed with both eyes of the player, so a monocular camera can only photograph one of the eyes, making it difficult to accurately photograph the light emission status of all of the LEDs 1401, left LEDs 1411a, and right LEDs 1411b. Therefore, since the light emission status of the multiple LEDs 1401, left LEDs 1411a, and right LEDs 1411b cannot be accurately photographed, it is possible to make it difficult to easily determine whether or not a special pattern that generates a favorable game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) that gives the player an advantage is displayed, and the player can enjoy the performance that suggests the lottery result of the special lottery until the end, suppressing a decline in interest.

In addition, in the functional display unit 1400A, some of the display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 are tilted in the front-to-rear direction toward the position of one of the player's eyes, while the remaining holes are tilted in the front-to-rear direction toward the position of the other eye of the player and are oriented straight in the front-to-rear direction. This provides the same effect as above, and the tilt of the display holes 1405a makes it difficult for players other than those seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to see the light from all of the LEDs 1401 in a good condition. This makes it difficult for other players to grasp the game situation, reduces the chance of other players peering at the player, and allows the player to enjoy the game without worrying about other players.

In addition, in the functional display unit 1400B, the multiple left LEDs 1411a and multiple right LEDs 1411b mounted on the functional display board 1411 are spaced a predetermined distance (40 mm to 80 mm) from each other in the left-right direction, and a front reflector 1414 with multiple display holes 1414a is provided in front of them. This not only provides the same effect as above, but also makes it easier to remove the multiple display holes 1414a when molding them, as each display hole 1414a faces straight in the front-to-rear direction, and helps prevent increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, in the functional display unit 1400C, the light from the multiple LEDs 1421a mounted on the functional display board 1421 is visible to the player through the transparent light guide plate 1423, so the special pattern by the multiple LEDs 1421a can be shown to the player in good condition. At this time, when invisible light is irradiated from the invisible light LED 1424a to the side of the light guide plate 1423, the invisible light incident from the side is emitted from the light guide plate 1423 to the player in front, but since the player cannot see the invisible light emitted from the light guide plate 1423, the special pattern by the multiple LEDs 1421a can be clearly seen through the light guide plate 1423, and the display function by the multiple LEDs 1421a can be exhibited without any impairment. Furthermore, when the invisible light LED 1424a is illuminated and an image is taken from the front with a digital camera or the like, depending on the model of the digital camera, the invisible light emitted forward from the light guide plate 1423 will be captured, and the light guide plate 1423 will appear bright, making it difficult to capture the light from the multiple LEDs 1421a located at the rear. This makes it difficult to determine the light emission status of the multiple LEDs 1421a, and ensures that the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects can be realized.

In addition, in the functional display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 may be configured to blink multiple LEDs at a speed that allows the player to recognize that the special symbol is lit. As a result, even if the multiple LEDs of the functional display unit 1400 are blinked at a predetermined speed by the main control board 1310, they appear to be lit to the player, so the display of the special symbol by the multiple LEDs can be clearly seen, and the display function of the multiple LEDs can be fully demonstrated. And, when the LEDs blinked at a predetermined speed by the main control board 1310 are photographed with a digital camera or the like, depending on the shutter speed, the LEDs may appear to be turned off even though they are turned on. Therefore, even if multiple LEDs that appear to be in the same situation (state) are photographed, the LEDs may appear to be turned on or off depending on the timing of the shutter release, making it difficult to distinguish the light emission status of the multiple LEDs, and the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects can be reliably embodied. The predetermined speed at which the LED is blinked by the main control board 1310 is preferably within the range of 30 Hz to 100 Hz. If the blinking speed is slower than this, the LED will not look as if it is lit, but will instead look as if the special pattern is fluctuating and blinking. If the blinking speed is faster than this, the LED will appear lit when photographed.

Also, a high-brightness LED that can irradiate light of higher brightness than the LED of the function display unit 1400, etc., may be provided close to the function display unit 1400, etc. In this way, when the high-brightness LED provided close to the function display unit 1400, etc. is made to emit light, the high-brightness light from the LED feels dazzling, but since the dynamic range in which the player (human) feels brightness is wide, the light from the LED of the function display unit 1400, etc. can be seen even though it is dazzling, so the special pattern displayed on the function display unit 1400, etc. can be recognized, and the display function of the function display unit 1400, etc. can be performed without inferiority. And, when the function display unit 1400, etc. is photographed with a digital camera, etc. while the high-brightness LED is emitting light, the dynamic range for brightness is narrower than that of humans, so halation occurs due to the light from the high-brightness LED, and the vicinity of the LED is blown out, making it possible to prevent part of the function display unit 1400, etc. from being photographed. Therefore, it is possible to make the lighting status of multiple LEDs in the functional display unit 1400 etc. unclear, and it is possible to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the game board 5A, the respective decorative parts (back front left logo decorative part 3121, back front left upper logo decorative part 3122, and back front left sub decorative part 3123) in the multiple decorative parts (back front left first decorative part 3124, back front left second decorative part 3125, back front left third decorative part 3126, and back front left decorative part base 3127) of the back front left decorative unit 3120 of the back front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 are illuminated by a light emitting means (LEDs mounted on the back front left decorative board 3128, etc.). In the normal undecorated state, the translucent, opaque, white panel board 1110A located in front of the back-front-left decorative unit 3120 makes the back-front-left upper logo decoration 3122 and other parts of the back-front-left decorative unit 3120 invisible and difficult to recognize, making it difficult for players to notice the presence of the back-front-left upper logo decoration 3122 and other parts, while the white color makes the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 look bright, making the pachinko machine 1 stand out.

Then, when the multiple LEDs of the back front left decorative unit 3120 are used to appropriately illuminate and decorate each of the back front upper left logo decorations 3122 etc. as the game progresses, the light from the illuminated and decorated back front upper left logo decorations 3122 etc. is irradiated forward through the translucent panel board 1110A, and the illuminated decorations of the back front upper left logo decorations 3122 etc. are reflected on the white panel board 1110A, allowing the player to see the illuminated decorations of the back front upper left logo decorations 3122 etc. through the panel board 1110A, allowing the player to enjoy the illuminated decorations of the back front upper left logo decorations 3122 etc. and preventing a decline in interest. Furthermore, by illuminating the back front left upper logo decoration 3122 etc. of the back front left decorative unit 3120, the player can be made aware of the presence of the back front left upper logo decoration 3122 etc., whose presence he or she would not have foreseen, which can greatly surprise the player and make the player strongly feel that their chance has arrived. In addition, the player can be shown a highly effective illuminating effect, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, since the color of the translucent opaque panel board 1110A is white, the decorative parts (first front left logo decorative part 3124c, first back left logo decorative part 3124d, first upper left logo decorative part 3124e, first left sub-decorative part 3124f, second back left logo decorative part 3125d, second upper left logo decorative part 3125e, first upper left logo decorative part 3125f, second upper left logo decorative part 3125d, second upper left logo decorative part 3125f, first upper left logo decorative part 3125g, second upper left logo decorative part 3125h, first upper left logo decorative part 3125i, first upper left logo decorative part 3125j ...i, first upper left logo decorative part 3125i, first upper left logo decorative part 3125i, first upper left logo decorative part 3125i, first upper left logo decorative part 3125i, first upper left logo decorative part 3125i, first upper left logo decorative part 3125i, first upper left logo decorative part 3125i, first upper left logo decorative part 3125i The luminous colors of the luminous decorations (decorative part 3125e, second left sub-decorative part 3125f, third back left logo decoration part 3126d, third upper left logo decoration part 3126e, third left sub-decorative part 3126f, base upper left logo decoration part 3127d) can be shown to the player in their original colors through the panel board 1110A, allowing the player to see luminous effects in a variety of colors, and the diverse luminous effects can prevent the player from becoming bored, preventing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, multiple decorative bodies (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3126) are provided with decorative parts of mutually related shapes ("first front left logo decorative body 3124c, first back left logo decorative body 3124d, second back left logo decorative body 3125d, third back left logo decorative body 3126d", "first upper left logo decorative body 3124e, second upper left logo decorative body 3125e, third upper left logo decorative body 3126e, base upper left logo decorative body 3127d", "first left sub-decorative body 3124f, second left sub-decorative body 3125f, third left sub-decorative body 3126f"). 3125, rear front left third decorative body 3126, and rear front left decorative body base 3127) are stacked in the front-to-back direction, and each decorative part can be illuminated and decorated independently using the light-emitting means (LEDs on the rear front left decorative board 3128, rear front upper left decorative board 3129, and rear front lower left decorative board 3130). Since the front-to-back positions of each decorative part are different, when each decorative part is illuminated and decorated, the player can see a light-emitting effect with a sense of depth, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, each of the multiple decorative bodies (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127) has decorative parts associated with each other ("first front left logo decorative part 3124c, first back left logo decorative part 3124d, second back left logo decorative part 3125d, third back left logo decorative part 3126d", "first upper left logo decorative part 3124e, second upper left logo decorative part 3125e, third upper left logo decorative part 3126e, base upper left logo decorative part 3127d", "first left sub-decorative part 3124f, second Because there are three LEDs (left sub-decorative part 3125f, third left sub-decorative part 3126f) the decorative parts are illuminated in the appropriate order using the light-emitting means (LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and the back front lower left decorative board 3130), a dynamic light-emitting effect can be shown to the player, which not only strongly attracts the player's attention but also makes the player think that something good is going to happen, increasing the player's anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the decorative parts ("first front left logo decorative part 3124c, first back left logo decorative part 3124d, second back left logo decorative part 3125d, third back left logo decorative part 3126d," "first upper left logo decorative part 3124e, second upper left logo decorative part 3125e, third upper left logo decorative part 3126e, base upper left logo decorative part 3127") provided on each of the multiple decorative parts (first front left decorative part 3124c, first back left logo decorative part 3124d, second back left logo decorative part 3125d, third back left logo decorative part 3126d, first upper left logo decorative part 3124e, second upper left logo decorative part 3125e, third upper left logo decorative part 3126e, base upper left logo decorative part 3127) d," "first left sub-decorative part 3124f," "second left sub-decorative part 3125f," and "third left sub-decorative part 3126f" can be illuminated and decorated independently by the light-emitting means (the LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and the back front lower left decorative board 3130). By appropriately combining the illuminated decorative parts, the player can be shown a variety of illuminated effects, preventing the player from becoming bored and reducing a decline in interest. In addition, since each decorative part can be illuminated and decorated independently, the combination of illuminated decorative parts according to the progress of the game can suggest to the player the likelihood of a favorable game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) that will give the player an advantage.

In addition, in each decorative body (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127) of the back front left decorative unit 3120, light-shielding sections (dividing decorative section 3124a, dividing decorative section 3125c, dividing decorative section 3126c) are provided between the decorative parts (back front left logo decorative section 3121, back front left upper logo decorative section 3122, and back front left sub decorative section 3123) that are arranged at different positions from each other, so that the light-shielding section can block the light for illuminating and decorating one decorative section from being irradiated onto the other decorative section, thereby preventing the other decorative section from illuminating and decorating, and only one (desired) decorative section can be illuminated and decorated. Therefore, since multiple decorative parts on one decorative body can be illuminated and decorated independently, appropriate decorative parts can be illuminated and decorated according to the progress of the game, allowing players to see a variety of illuminated effects, preventing players from getting bored and reducing a decline in interest.

In addition, in each decorative body (first front left decorative body 3124, second front left decorative body 3125, third front left decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127) of the back front left decorative unit 3120, multiple decorative parts (back front left logo decorative part 3121, upper front left logo decorative part 3122, and back front left sub decorative part 3123) are provided at different positions from each other, and light-shielding parts (partition decorative part 3124a, partition decorative part 3125c, partition decorative part 3126c) are provided between them so that each can be illuminated and decorated independently. Therefore, by making each decorative part in the decorative body have a completely different style of decoration, it is possible to show the player different types of illuminated decoration depending on the progress of the game, which can strongly attract the player's interest and entertain the player with the light-emitting performance, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, in each of the decorative bodies (first front left decorative body 3124, second front left decorative body 3125, third front left decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127) of the back front left decorative unit 3120, a hole-shaped light-shielding section (partition decorative section 3124a, partition decorative section 3125c, partition decorative section 3126c) is provided between multiple decorative sections (back front left logo decorative section 3121, upper front left logo decorative section 3122, and back front left sub decorative section 3123). Since light for illuminating and decorating one decorative section is emitted to the outside from a part of the light-shielding section, a part of the light-shielding section can be illuminated and decorated. Therefore, by forming the light-shielding section into a predetermined shape, the player can see the illuminating decoration of the light-shielding section in addition to the illuminating decoration of the decorative section, and a more diverse light-emitting performance can be performed.

In addition, since the rear front left first decorative body 3124 of the rear front left decorative unit 3120 has a through decorative portion 3124b that penetrates from front to back in a predetermined shape, when the decorative portions (first front left logo decorative portion 3124c, first rear left logo decorative portion 3124d, first upper left logo decorative portion 3124e, first left sub decorative portion 3124f) are illuminated as the game progresses, the peripheral surface of the through decorative portion 3124b is illuminated and decorated, so that in addition to the illuminated decoration of the decorative portions, the illuminated decoration of the through decorative portion 3124b can also be seen by the player, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, even if the cell 1140 provided behind the transparent panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 on the gaming board 5B expands or contracts more than the panel plate 1110 due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, the cell 1140 is provided in a state in which it can expand or contract relative to the panel plate 1110, so the cell 1140 can expand and contract freely, and wrinkles or cracks will not occur in the cell 1140 even if the environment such as temperature and humidity changes, and the decorative effect provided by the cell 1140 can be maintained. In this case, the cells 1140 are provided behind the part of the panel board 1110 in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction in which the opening 1112 to which the center gadget 2500 is attached is biased, that is, behind the wide part of the panel board 1110. This makes it possible for the player to easily see the patterns of the cells 1140 visible through the transparent panel board 1110, and allows the decorative effect of the cells 1140 to be fully exerted. In addition, the patterns of the cells 1140 visible through the transparent panel board 1110 can improve the appearance of the play area 5a, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the cells 1140 are provided on the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 in an expandable state, and are not attached to the game panel (panel board) as in the past, so that the effort required for decorating the transparent panel board 1110 can be simplified, and the increase in costs of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. In detail, in the panel board 1110 that is cut, the cells 1140 can be provided after the cutting process, so the cells 1140 are not scratched during the cutting process of the panel board 1110. In addition, the cut surface is not roughened due to differences in materials between the panel boards 1110 and the cells 1140, and the finishing process after the cutting process can be omitted. On the other hand, in the game panel (panel board) formed to have an opening by cutting or injection molding, the cells 1140 are not attached, so the effort required for attachment can be eliminated. Therefore, the cells 1140 can be provided behind the transparent panel board 1110 more easily than in the conventional technology, and the increase in costs of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the cells 1140 are provided behind a portion of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the amount of cells 1140 used can be reduced compared to when the cells 1140 are provided on the entire surface of the panel plate 1110, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, because the cells 1140 are detachable from the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, cells 1140 with different designs can be attached or replaced on the panel board 1110, making it easy to accommodate changes in the specifications or model of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5B), and reducing the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the cells 1140 can be illuminated and decorated by the illumination of various LEDs provided in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, so that the images of the cells 1140 visible through the panel board 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 are illuminated and decorated, improving the appearance of the game area 5a, strongly drawing the player's attention to the game area 5a, and brightening the game area 5a, making it easier to see the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the cells 1140 provided behind the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 can be illuminated and decorated by various LEDs provided in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, so that the illuminated decoration of the cells 1140 can illuminate the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a from behind, making them appear as silhouettes. By making the game balls B easier to see, the movement of the game balls B can be enjoyed, preventing a decline in interest. In addition, by making the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a appear as silhouettes, it can be made easier to see, making it easier to make subtle adjustments to the strength of the impact of the game balls B, and allowing the player to enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1, which involves devising ways to impact the game balls B.

In addition, because the cell 1140 is provided behind a portion of the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, when the player looks into the game area 5a, the image of the cell 1140 tends to come into focus. Therefore, simply by looking at the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), the player naturally focuses on the game ball B circulating within the game area 5a, making it easier to see the game ball B circulating within the game area 5a, and allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, a cell 1140 with a predetermined pattern is provided behind a part of the transparent panel board 1110, so that the pattern of the cell 1140 can hide the decoration of the back front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided behind it from the player side. Therefore, when the decoration provided behind the cell 1140 is not illuminated, the pattern of the cell 1140 can prevent the player from noticing the presence of the decoration. Then, when the decoration is illuminated as the game progresses, the cell 1140 is illuminated by the light from the decoration, so that the player can be made aware of the presence of the decoration whose presence was not foreseen, which can greatly surprise the player and strongly make the player think that a chance has arrived, and can show the player a more effective illumination performance, which entertains the player and suppresses a decline in interest.

As described above, the rear left movable decoration 3301 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, which is a movable decoration provided at the rear by the cell 1140, can be hidden from view by the player. Therefore, when the rear left movable decoration 3301 is moved from a state where it is invisible due to the cell 1140 to a state where it is visible through the opening 1112 that penetrates the front and rear of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 as the game progresses, a movable performance in which the rear left movable decoration 3301 appears as the game progresses can be shown. Therefore, the appearance of the rear left movable decoration 3301 etc. can suggest to the player that a chance has come, so that the player can be strongly made to think that a favorable game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) in which the player has an advantage will occur, which can increase the player's expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, which has the game area 5a in front of the game board 5A where game balls B circulate, is made of an opaque milky white color with translucency, so that the game area 5a can be made to look bright and the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a can be made easier to see. In addition, when light from the LEDs and performance display device 1600 provided in this pachinko machine 1, light from the lighting in the game hall in which this pachinko machine 1 is installed, light from game machines such as other pachinko machines and slot machines, etc. is irradiated onto the game panel 1100, the light is diffused by the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, so that the panel plate 1110A can be made to look as if it is dimly lit and self-illuminating. Furthermore, when the multiple LEDs 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130, which can irradiate light onto the periphery of the panel board 1110A, are illuminated, the light is diffused by the opaque, milky white panel board 1110A, which has translucency, so that the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 can be softly and softly illuminated like fluorescent lamps, providing indirect lighting. This brightens the game area 5a while reducing the glare caused by the LEDs 1130a, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is gentle on the player's eyes. Therefore, compared to previous pachinko machines that used plywood or transparent boards as game panels (panel boards), the player can see a pachinko machine 1 with a game area 5a that glows like a fluorescent light, unlike anything they have ever seen before, which strongly draws the player's attention to the game panel 1100 (game area 5a) and makes the player feel like something good is going to happen, increasing their anticipation for the game. In addition, the light from the rear panel board 1110A makes the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a look like silhouettes, making the game balls B easier to see, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game balls B and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, if a decorative sheet (decorative film) (not shown) is provided on the front of the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, the milky white panel board 1110A can enhance the color of the pattern on the decorative film, and the decorative pattern can improve the appearance of the game area 5a. In addition, by illuminating the LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130, the decorative pattern on the decorative film can be illuminated and decorated through the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, which can further improve the appearance of the game area 5a and provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, when a decorative film is provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, the parts decorated with light emitted by the LEDs 1130a etc. tend to become unclear due to the opaque panel board 1110A having translucency. However, by designing the pattern (or by designing the arrangement of the LEDs 1130a etc.) so that the parts where the light-emitting decoration becomes unclear are hidden by part of the pattern on the decorative film, the light-emitting decoration can be made to look clear and the decorative effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, when a decorative film is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, by using a material with excellent abrasion resistance as the decorative film, the front surface of the panel plate 1110A can be protected from the circulation of the game balls B by the decorative film. As a result, it is not necessary to use a material with high abrasion resistance for the panel plate 1110A, and a low-grade, inexpensive material can be used, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, if a decorative film is provided on the rear surface of the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, the light irradiated from the rear to the front of the decorative film casts a shadow of the pattern on the decorative film on the panel board 1110A, allowing the player to see the pattern, and the light-emitting effect of projecting the pattern and letters of the light-scratch film from the rear onto the panel board 1110A can be shown to the player, so that the execution of the effect can make the player think that something good will happen, increasing the player's expectations for the game and preventing a decline in interest. Alternatively, as the light-emitting effect, the decorative film can project patterns and letters encouraging the player to "hit right" or operate the effect operation unit 301 from the rear onto the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, allowing the player to enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball B, the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in a player-participation effect, and preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when decorative films are provided on both the front and rear of the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, when light is irradiated onto the side of the panel board 1110A by the LEDs 1130a, etc. of the panel decoration board 1130, the panel board 1110A will emit light, as described above, and the decorative film on the front side will be illuminated and decorated, allowing the player to enjoy the pattern on the decorative film on the front side. On the other hand, when light is irradiated from the rear of the gaming panel 1100 to the front by the LEDs, etc., the shadow of the pattern on the decorative film on the rear side will be projected onto the panel board 1110A, and this shadow will overlap with the pattern on the decorative film on the front side, so that the pattern on the decorative film on the front side will appear to change. This allows the player to see a variety of light-emitting effects, making it less likely for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, when the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 of the back front left decorative unit 3120 and the back front upper right logo decoration 3142 of the back front right decorative unit 3140, which are provided at the rear of the translucent, opaque, milky panel board 1110A, are illuminated and decorated as the game progresses, the light passes to a certain extent forward (towards the player) through the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, so that the panel board 1110A can be partially illuminated and decorated in the same manner as the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration 3142 provided at the rear, and the player can be made aware of the presence of the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration 3142 provided at the rear. Therefore, the illuminated decorations of the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration 3142 can be seen through the panel plate 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, making the player feel that something good is going to happen, increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the rear front upper left logo decoration 3122 and the rear front upper right logo decoration 3142, which are provided at the rear of the panel plate 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, are formed from a colorless and transparent material, and since the panel plate 1110A is a milky white color, the color of the rear front upper left logo decoration 3122 and the rear front upper right logo decoration 3142 blends in with the color of the panel plate 1110A and becomes invisible from the front, making it possible to prevent the player from noticing the presence of the rear front upper left logo decoration 3122 and the rear front upper right logo decoration 3142. Furthermore, when the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration 3142 are illuminated, the illuminated decorations of the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration 3142 can be seen through the panel plate 1110A as described above, so the player can be greatly surprised by noticing the presence of the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration 3142, whose presence he could not have foreseen, and can give the player a strong feeling that his chance has arrived. In addition, the player can be shown an illuminated presentation with a more dramatic effect, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300 are normally located behind the opaque milky panel board 1110A, making them invisible from the front. As the game progresses, they move to the rear of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110A, making them visible through the opening 1112, so that the player can be shown a movable performance in which the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 appear. Therefore, the appearance of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 can suggest to the player that a chance is coming, making the player strongly think that a favorable game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) in which the player has an advantage will occur, increasing the player's expectations for the game and suppressing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, by making the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 luminous, when the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 are not visible, the luminous decorations of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 (or the rear front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the rear front upper right logo decoration part 3142) can be lit or blinked, making the player aware of the presence of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 through the translucent panel board 1110A, and making the player nervous and excited depending on whether the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 move to a state where they can be seen (whether the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 appear or not), making it possible to execute a movable performance that can entertain the player even more.

In addition, since the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, in front of which the game area 5a is provided, is made opaque and translucent, when a player looks inside the game area 5a, the player is likely to focus on the front of the panel board 1110A, and therefore, simply by looking at the panel board 1110A, the player will naturally focus on the game ball B circulating within the game area 5a. At this time, as described above, the panel board 1110A becomes self-illuminated due to light from the outside or light from the emitting LED 1130a, etc., so that the game ball B circulating within the play area 5a can be made to look like a silhouette due to the light from the rear panel board 1110A, making it easier to see the game ball B circulating within the play area 5a, making it possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B and suppressing a decline in interest, and also making it easier to make subtle adjustments to the hitting strength of the game ball B, making it possible to enjoy playing the pachinko machine 1 main body by devising ways to hit the game ball B.

Furthermore, because the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 is opaque and milky white with translucency (synthetic resin), a lower grade synthetic resin can be used compared to when the panel board is transparent, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, because the panel board 1110A is an opaque milky white color with translucency, the color of the decorative objects provided on this pachinko machine 1 stands out in comparison, enhancing the decorative effect of the decorative objects, providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of players.In addition, when the LEDs 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 and the decorative objects provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 are illuminated, the emitted light can be transmitted forward in its original color, allowing players to enjoy a colorful illumination presentation.

In addition, since the panel board 1110A is opaque and milky white with translucency, it is possible to make decorative objects (for example, the rear front left decorative unit 3120) and the like provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 invisible from the front (player side). When the decorative object provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 is illuminated, the light from the decorative object passes forward through the translucent game panel 1100 (panel board 1110A), so that the game panel 1100 can be partially illuminated and the player can be made aware of the presence of the decorative object provided at the rear. In addition, when the decorative object provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 is moved to a position behind the opening 1112 penetrating the panel board 1110A, the decorative object can be made visible from the front through the opening 1112, and the player can be shown a moving performance in which the decorative object hides and appears. In this way, a wide variety of lighting effects and moving effects can be presented to players, preventing them from becoming bored and losing interest.

Furthermore, the translucent, opaque, milky panel board 1110A can diffuse the light from the LEDs 1130a, etc., of the panel decoration substrate 1130, allowing the game panel 1100 to be softly illuminated and decorated, brightening the game area 5a like indirect lighting, while reducing the glare from the LEDs 1130a, providing a pachinko machine 1 that is gentle on the player's eyes.

In addition, the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 can be illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130, so for example, the LEDs 1130a are provided on the left and right sides of the panel board 1110A so that each can be illuminated independently, and then the right side is illuminated according to the game situation (progress). This will brighten the right part of the game area 5a through the panel board 1110A, so the player's attention can be directed to the right part of the game area 5a, and the player can be encouraged to hit the game ball B into the right part of the game area 5a (to "hit right"). On the other hand, when the left side is illuminated, the left part of the game area 5a will be brightened through the panel board 1110A, so the player's attention can be directed to the left part of the game area 5a, and the player can be encouraged to hit the game ball B into the left part of the game area 5a (to "hit left"). In this way, by illuminating the LEDs 1130a at appropriate positions, the illuminated decoration of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110A) allows the player to intuitively understand that it is advising the player to "hit left" or "hit right," allowing the player to enjoy the operation of shooting the game ball B, and also providing entertainment to the player with a new type of illumination that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines 1.

In addition, since the gaming panel 1100 is composed of a plate-shaped panel plate 1110A (panel plate 1110) and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is thicker than the panel plate 1110A and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110A, if the thickness of the panel holder 1120 is made the same as that of the gaming panel of a conventional pachinko machine, the thickness of the panel plate 1110A (panel plate 1110), in which the gaming area 5a is provided in front, can be made thinner than that of a conventional gaming panel, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced by reducing the amount of material used for the gaming panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel plate 1110A).

In addition, since the gaming panel 1100 is composed of the panel plate 1110 or panel plate 1110A and the panel holder 1120, the panel plate 1110A and the panel holder 1120 can be detached, making the panel holder 1120 a common general-purpose part. This allows the panel holder 1120 to be mass-produced to reduce the cost of the panel holder 1120, and by manufacturing the panel plate 1110 or panel plate 1110A corresponding to each model, the costs associated with new models and model changes can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be provided on the game board 5 via the holding member 1060 by storing the magnetic sensor 1050 in the storage section 1061 having the elastic claw 1062 in the holding member 1060 and engaging the elastic claw 1062 with the magnetic sensor 1050. Also, with the magnetic sensor 1050 stored in the holding container 1072 having the elastic claw 1072a, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be provided on the game board 5 via the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 by engaging the elastic claw 1072a with the engaging section 1071a of the holding member 1071. In this case, since the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071, and the holding container 1072 are made of non-magnetic materials, when the magnet 1055 is brought close to the play area 5a, the holding member 1060 and the like can be prevented from attracting the magnetic lines of force from the magnet 1055, and a decrease in the magnetic lines of force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the magnetism acting on the play area 5a, and it is possible to detect fraudulent acts using the magnet 1055 at an early stage, and it is possible to discourage fraudulent acts by reporting the detection of suspicious magnetism by the magnetic sensor 1050, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

As described above, the holding member 1060, holding member 1071, and holding container 1072, which are made of non-magnetic material, can avoid the attraction of magnetic lines from the magnet 1055 and prevent a decrease in the magnetic lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050, making it possible to effectively detect the magnetism acting on the play area 5a with a smaller number of magnetic sensors 1050 than in conventional pachinko machines, and the number of magnetic sensors 1050 can be reduced compared to conventional pachinko machines, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1062 of the storage section 1061 and the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and detached from the locking section 1071a of the holding member 1060 and the holding member 1071. Therefore, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached using the elastic claws 1062 and the elastic claws 1072a without using metal screws made of a magnetic material as in conventional pachinko machines. In addition, the effort required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, by providing the holding member 1071 with a plurality of locking portions 1071a in advance and locking the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 housing the magnetic sensor 1050 to the locking portions 1071a at appropriate positions, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be installed at any position or its position can be easily changed. Therefore, since the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily changed or an additional sensor can be installed, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can easily accommodate design changes and model changes while suppressing increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is biased into the storage section 1061 by the protrusion 1063 on the holding member 1060, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be prevented from vibrating finely due to the bias of the protrusion 1063, which reduces the possibility of the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 becoming detached or of poor contact caused by the vibration, thereby ensuring reliable operation of the magnetic sensor 1050.

The magnetic sensor 1050 is held visibly by the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071, and the holding container 1072, and the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is transparent, so the sensor body 1051 mounted on the sensor board 1052 can be seen by the player through the transparent sensor case 1053. At this time, since the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor body 1051 of a different color (for example, black) can be made to stand out. Therefore, the player can be made to strongly recognize that the magnetic sensor 1050 is not a dummy but a real one, and the visibility of the magnetic sensor 1050 can make those who would like to commit fraud using the magnet 1055 hesitate to commit fraud, and the deterrent effect against fraud can be increased, reducing the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Even if the sensor body 1051 is visible through the transparent sensor case 1053, an average player does not pay much attention to the presence of the magnetic sensor 1050 and does not find it disturbing. In contrast, a person who intends to commit fraud will focus their attention on the inside of the play area 5a, and the contrast between the white sensor board 1052 and the black sensor body 1051 will make the magnetic sensor 1050 easy to see and highly visible. Therefore, by noticing the presence of the magnetic sensor 1050, it is possible to make the player hesitate to commit fraud using a magnet, and a pachinko machine 1 with high deterrent effect can be provided.

Furthermore, in the magnetic sensor 1050, the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted is white, making the sensor board 1052 less noticeable and preventing the sensor board 1052 from being mistaken for a decorative board on which an LED is mounted. Therefore, even if the sensor board 1052 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is visible, it will not bother a normal player, and the appearance of the play area 5a is not impaired, which can be avoided.

In addition, because the sensor body 1051 of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be seen from the outside, it is possible to check from the outside whether the sensor body 1051 is damaged or not, which simplifies the maintenance work required for the pachinko machine 1 and reduces the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached to the game board 5 via the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071, the holding container 1072, etc., which are made of a non-magnetic material, when the holding member 1060 or the holding member 1071 is attached to the game board 5 using a magnetic material such as a screw, it is possible to provide the part of the holding member 1060 or the holding member 1071 that is attached to the game board 5 at a position away from the magnetic sensor 1050, or at a position outside the magnetic detection range in the play area 5a. This makes it possible to reduce the influence of magnetic materials such as screws as much as possible, so that the magnetic sensor 1050 can reliably detect the magnetic field acting on the play area 5a, and a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts using the magnet 1055 can be provided.

[21. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figs. 210 to 215. Fig. 210 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, Fig. 211 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on process of Fig. 210, Fig. 212 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side timer interrupt process, Fig. 213 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting change process, Fig. 214 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting value confirmation display process, and Fig. 215 is a flow chart showing an example of the error display process. First, various random numbers used in game control will be described, followed by the movement of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, the main control side timer interrupt process, the setting change process, the setting value confirmation display process, and the error display process.

[21-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control include special random numbers used to determine whether or not a jackpot game state or a small jackpot game state will be generated, initial value determination random numbers for hit determination used to determine the initial value of this special random number, reach determination random numbers used to determine whether or not a reach (missed reach) will be generated when a jackpot game state is not generated, variable display pattern random numbers used to determine the variable display pattern of the special patterns that are variably displayed on the first special pattern display device and the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400, pattern random numbers used to determine the jackpot pattern or small jackpot pattern (determine the type of hit) that is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device and the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 when a jackpot game state is generated, and initial value determination random numbers for jackpot pattern used to determine the initial value of this pattern random number. In addition to these random numbers, there are also prepared a random number for determining whether or not to open or close the second starting port door 2411, which can guide the game ball B to the second starting port 2004, a random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal pattern winning, which is used to determine the initial value of the random number for determining a normal pattern winning, and a random number for a normal pattern variable display pattern, which is used to determine the variable display pattern of the normal pattern that is variably displayed on the normal pattern display device of the function display unit 1400.

Of the various random numbers used in this type of game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other random numbers are updated by software.

[21-2. Operation of the initial value update type counter]
For example, the special random number is updated directly by hardware using a main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another at high speed based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. When all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, the main control built-in hard random number circuit again extracts one value within the predetermined numerical range, and extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another at high speed based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time when the main control MPU 1310a obtains a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as the special random number.

In contrast, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit is updated within a predetermined fixed range of values from the minimum to the maximum, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control timer interrupt process described below is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit to the maximum, and then counts up from the minimum to the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit. When the counter finishes counting up the range of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit from the minimum to the maximum, the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit is updated. This method of updating a counter is called an "initial value update type counter." The random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed range of values of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch (RWM switch 633d) of the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as a numerical value during the main control side power-on process described below does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off process (when the power is turned off), etc., the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is set to the same fixed value derived from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number by executing the initial value derivation process, which is performed by the main control MPU 1310a to retrieve the ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM. In other words, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is always overwritten and updated to the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning symbol is derived using the ID code, and analysis is prevented by taking two-stage security measures: the first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even using an external device when the ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a, and the second security measure is that an initial value derivation process is executed when clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, thereby deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol wins is determined will be explained. For example, even if a person who is trying to illegally acquire game balls paid out as prize balls obtains and disassembles the game board 5 in some way, illegally obtains the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and is able to grasp the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for determining whether a normal symbol wins is determined matches the normal symbol win determination value, the ID code is given a unique code for identifying the individual, so it will be completely different from the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a' equipped in other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for determining whether a normal symbol wins is determined matches the normal symbol win determination value is also completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the acquired game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', i.e., other pachinko machines 1', so even if a momentary power outage is generated at the predetermined intervals obtained by disassembly and analysis, and a game ball is passed through gate 2003 at each of these predetermined intervals, it is not possible to open and close second starting gate door 2411 and generate a state in which game ball B can be guided to second starting gate 2004.

[21-3. Processing when power is turned on on the main control side]
First, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that a stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1. This stack pointer, for example, indicates an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) in use, or indicates an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when a subroutine is terminated and the routine is returned to, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded.

Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, the main control side power-on process is performed as shown in Figures 210 and 211. When this main control side power-on process starts, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access permission (step S10). This RAM access permission setting allows updates to be made to the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power outage clear process (step S12). In this power outage clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input from the power outage monitoring circuit. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches a predetermined voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, and in this embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S12, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S14). The RAM clear switch has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error release switch), and here it functions as a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. In this judgment, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, the main control MPU 1310a judges that the RAM clear switch is not operated and judges that the RAM clear switch is to be operated, whereas when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a judges that the RAM clear switch is operated and judges that the RAM clear switch is to be operated. Note that, since the period from the start of the main control side power-on process, which is this routine, to the judgment of step S14 is extremely short, in reality, the person who presses the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch will turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch.

In the judgment of step S14, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S16A). On the other hand, in the judgment of step S14, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S16B). In other words, the main control MPU 1310a makes the RAM clear process, which initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., the main control built-in RAM), executable for a predetermined time from the time of power-on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is a flag that indicates whether or not to erase various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, including game information related to the game such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the main prize ball number information output, etc.), and is set to a value of 1 when various information is erased, and to a value of 0 when various information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S16A or S16B, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the main frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned ON (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a performs the determination based on a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and a setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key cylinder is turned ON by rotating the setting key switch 1311a clockwise by 60 degrees from the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). In addition, since the period from when the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, begins until the judgment of step S18 is extremely short, in reality, the person who turns on the setting key switch 1311a will turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 1311a.

In the judgment of step S18, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b and judges that the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON based on the setting key ON signal, it sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 1 (step S20A). On the other hand, in the judgment of step S18, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the main frame 4 is not open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b and/or judges that the setting key switch 1311a is not set to the setting key ON based on the setting key ON signal, it sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 0 (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to permit the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in a specified area (a setting value dedicated area in a specific area, described later) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a to be changed or a confirmation display is made. It is set to a value of 1 when the setting value is changed or a confirmation display is made, and to a value of 0 when the setting value is not changed or a confirmation display is made. The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU 1310a performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 waits until it starts (boots). In this embodiment, the standby time until booting (boot timer) is set to 2.5 seconds (s). When the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process, the peripheral control board 1510 is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). Note that, when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process, the dispensing control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510, so the dispensing control board 633 is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a).

Following step S22, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. The judgment in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. In the judgment in step S24, if the main control MPU 1310a judges that a power outage warning signal has been input, it returns to the judgment in step S24 again, and repeats the judgment in step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. A detailed explanation of the fact that the judgment in step S24 is made following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that no power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to the value 1 (step S25). By determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to the value 1, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S25 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not equal to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not equal to 1, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to 0 (step S26). By determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to 0, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not met, but that various information should be erased in the same manner as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not equal to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not equal to 0, it calculates a checksum (step S29). This checksum is calculated by treating the various pieces of information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values.

Following step S29, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off) described later (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG is a flag indicating whether game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG have been stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off processing described later, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off processing has been completed normally, and to a value of 0 when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally. A detailed explanation of the calculation of the checksum in step S29 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is first powered on for inspection after being manufactured during the inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310 will be provided later.

In the judgment of step S30, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the judgment of step S32, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the backup flag BK-FLG is not value 1 (value 0), that is, when the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed, it performs error display processing (step S33) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing has ended is maintained, and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game at all, so the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. In this error display processing, the details of which will be described later, if it is judged that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if it is judged that the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed at the time of power off, an error message is displayed indicating that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM (or that it cannot be trusted). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

After the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from its initial position (i.e. the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to turn it ON, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned ON while operating the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633, and this routine, the main control side power-on processing, is started again. The main control MPU 1310a determines in the above-mentioned step S14 that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch has been operated, and sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 in the above-mentioned step S16A. Also, in the above-mentioned step S18, it determines that the main body frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and determines that the setting key switch 1311a has been set to setting key ON based on the setting key ON signal, and sets the setting key ON flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 in the above-mentioned step S20A. To set CS-FLG to a value of 1, in the judgment of step S25 described above, it is judged that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a value of 1, and it is judged that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met, and following the setting change processing of step S37 described below, in the processing of step S38 described below, the RAM error is cleared by clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, allowing the game to proceed (hereinafter referred to as the "first RAM error clearing method").

As an alternative method to this first RAM error release method, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and with the setting key cylinder in the initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633, thereby starting the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, again. In the judgment of the above-mentioned step S14, the main control MPU 1310a judges that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch has been operated, and in the above-mentioned step S16A, sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1, whereas in the above-mentioned step S18, it judges that the main frame 4 has not been opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b and/or judges that the setting key switch 1311a has not been set to setting key ON based on the setting key ON signal, and in the above-mentioned step S20B, it sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of To set it to 0, in the judgment of step S26 described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 0, meaning that the predetermined condition for allowing a change to the setting value is not met, but it is judged that various information should be erased in the same way as if the predetermined condition for allowing a change to the setting value were met, and in the processing of step S38 described below, all areas of the main control internal RAM are cleared except for a specific area, thereby canceling the RAM error and allowing the game to proceed (hereinafter referred to as the "second RAM error cancellation method").

In this embodiment, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, that the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, it displays an error in step S33 to inform the user that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are unreliable), and this can be done using two methods, the first RAM error clearing method and the second RAM error clearing method. As a result, when there is no need to change the setting value at all, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RAM clear switch.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a judges in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is a value of 1, that is, that the main control side power failure processing has been normally completed, it sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery (step S34). This setting is done by reading the power recovery information from the ROM (i.e., the main control built-in ROM) built into the main control MPU 1310a, and setting this power recovery information in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to this various information are stored in a specified storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a will proceed with the game based on the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state in which power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state in which power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and the state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with high frequency waves from unauthorized means (for example, a high frequency output device hidden in the hem of an individual's arm) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored.

Following step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). This causes various information, checksum values (sum values), etc. to change as various processes are performed thereafter. Therefore, unless the main control side power failure process described below is normally completed and the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 1, all areas of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared except for specific areas, as described below.

Following the determination in step S36, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to the value 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to the value 1 (step S27). By determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to the value 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to the value 1, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S27 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1, and thus determines that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met, it performs a setting value confirmation display process (step S28). This setting value confirmation display process, the details of which will be described later, displays the setting value stored in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S25, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a value of 1, that is, when it judges that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met, it performs a setting change process (step S37). This setting change process, the details of which will be described later, is performed based on a signal from the RAM clear switch on the dispensing control board 633. As described above, the RAM clear switch has three combined functions (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch), and here it functions as a setting change button for selecting and changing the setting value. Each time the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch is operated, a signal (setting value selection switching signal) is input to inform the user of this, the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned from ON to OFF, the changed setting value is determined based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a and stored in a specified area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

In the process of step S37 or the judgment of step S26, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is value 0, that is, when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied but when it judges that various information is to be erased in the same manner as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, it clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a performs this by writing the value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area). In this embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not value 0 (value 1), that is, when it judges that various information is to be erased, and when the setting change process is terminated, it always clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area). Here, the "specific area" is composed of a setting value dedicated area in which a setting value is stored, and an out ball count dedicated area in which the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 is stored. The setting value dedicated area stores the setting value that is changed in the setting change process described below, and the out ball count dedicated area stores the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 that is counted in the ball counting process described below.

The main control MPU 1310a may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as the initial value and set it. When the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633 has been operated indicates RAM clear and various information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, the main control MPU 1310a retrieves a unique ID code previously stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal pattern hit determination random number based on this retrieved ID code, and sets this fixed value to the normal pattern hit determination initial value determination random number to be used for determining the initial value of the normal pattern hit determination random number described above.

Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. This initializes the game backup information, and for example, the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball count information is set to the initial value of 0. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a will proceed with the game based on the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36, S28 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a sets the initial value and starts the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a timer setting value is set in the watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT control register") built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control built-in WDT is started to start timing until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is started, timing by the main control built-in WDT is started, and if the timer clear setting value is not set in the watchdog timer clear register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT clear register") built into the main control MPU 1310a before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the main control built-in WDT is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. In contrast, when the main control built-in WDT is started and timing begins, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the timing by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and timing begins again. In this way, by repeatedly clearing the timing by the main control built-in WDT before it reaches the time set by the timer setting value and then starting timing again, it is possible to monitor whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally.

Following step S41, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting is for setting the interrupt period when the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, the transmission serial port prescaler corresponding to the various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, the serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the dispensing control board 633 and the serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the peripheral control board 1510) is set to the communication speed and whether or not parity is enabled, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and enable transmission.

Following step S44, the main control MPU 1310a initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, the gaming machine testing facility initializes the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information when the power is turned on (setting it to output OFF data).

Following step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs the activation setting of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, the special random number used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is updated by hardware by latching and acquiring the random number in the hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the activation of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is set in the hardware random number setting register. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is activated by these settings, it extracts other values in a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, and when all values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts one value in the predetermined numerical range, and extracts other values in a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a obtains a random number (random number value) from the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit, and obtains the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit when this latch signal is input from a hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets this obtained random number value as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU 1310a reserves the command to be sent when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to inform the user that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this various information may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information is completed, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are transmitted. These commands are sent during the main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later. A detailed explanation of how the commands to be sent when the power is turned on are scheduled in step S50 will be provided later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU 1310a sets interrupt permission (step S52). This setting causes the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S42, i.e., every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, as described above, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that no power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a non-win/lose random number update process (step S56). In this non-win/lose random number update process, the random numbers for reach determination, the random numbers for variable display patterns, the random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot pattern, and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small jackpot pattern, etc., are updated. In this way, in the non-win/lose random number update process, random numbers that are not related to the win/lose determination (jackpot determination) are updated by software. Note that the random numbers for normal pattern win determination, the random numbers for determining the initial value for normal pattern win determination, and the random numbers for normal pattern variable display patterns, etc., are also updated by this non-win/lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, where the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input, the process performs a non-win/lose random number update process in step S56, and repeats steps S54 to S56. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as the "main process on the main control side."

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets the interrupt prohibition (step S58). This setting disables the main control timer interrupt process described below, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects the above-mentioned game information and other information from being overwritten.

Following step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process is performed as when the power outage clear signal was started to be output in the power outage clear process in step S12.

Following step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops the drive signals output to, for example, the various displays of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2412, the attacca solenoid 2414, the role winning port solenoid 2612, the V distribution solenoid 3007, the special monitor, etc. (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information in the working area of the main control internal RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control's built-in RAM, thereby preventing updates to the contents of the main control's built-in RAM.

After step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and it becomes impossible to start timekeeping again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs this main control side power-on processing again. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is affected by electrical noise, a forced reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot make the judgment in step S54 and cannot perform the main control side power-off processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forced to reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without performing the main control side power-off processing, and will again perform the main control side power-on processing. In other words, because the main control side power-off processing is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power-off processing based on the state immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored. Therefore, the checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power-off processing was executed the previous time the power was cut off and the checksum value (sum value) calculated in step S29 when the built-in reset circuit is forced to reset and restarted cannot possibly match, resulting in a checksum (sum value) error in the main control built-in RAM, and all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are completely erased (cleared) in the processing of step S38.

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power outage or momentary power outage, and when power is subsequently restored, this main control side power-on processing is performed.

In step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32 it is checked whether the main control's power-off processing has been completed normally. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM, it is checked whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

In addition, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in the judgment of step S25, that is, when the setting change of the setting value is permitted, the setting change processing of step S37 is performed, and in the processing of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for the specific area, and in the judgment of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is judged that various information is to be erased, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for the specific area. In this way, when the pressing operation part is operated when the power is restored (more precisely, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch), when a setting change that can change and determine the setting value is performed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing), the main control MPU 1310a always clears the specified area of the main control built-in RAM. This is because when the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch is pressed, for example, if the pachinko machine 1 is in a state advantageous to the player when the gaming hall closes for business (for example, a state in which a probability-varying (probability-changing) hit has occurred), the above-mentioned gaming backup information needs to be erased (cleared) before the next business day begins, so a staff member or other attendant at the gaming hall needs to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch. In addition, when the setting value is changed, when the setting change process is performed (even if the current setting value is ultimately maintained), it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information, including various information such as game information obtained using the setting value before the setting change process was performed, from the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the setting key is an important key that can be used to change the setting value as well as to check the current setting value, so only limited people, including the manager of the game parlor, are allowed to possess it, and it is limited to two or three people. In this embodiment, even if the setting value is not changed, that is, even if there is no setting key that only limited specific people possess, a staff member such as a staff member of the game parlor can erase (clear) the game backup information from the main control built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch when it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information.

Here, we will explain the point that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, we will explain the problems that arise when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 after the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is carried out.

As described above, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption. In other words, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary interruption or power outage, the charge stored in the hardware, the electrolytic capacitor MC2, is applied as +5V, so that the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed within the period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off. This ensures that the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off while the player is playing, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is being performed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, when power is restored, in the wait time standby process of step S22, the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) and starts counting the waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment, it is set to 2.5 seconds). If an instantaneous interruption or power outage occurs just before the waiting time is reached, the charge stored in the hardware, the electrolytic capacitor MC2, is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. However, within a period of about 7 ms, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. This causes the main control side timer interrupt process described later to be performed, and even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power off process in the main control side power on process may not be completed. For this reason, the value calculated as the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power on process is started again when power is restored.

When this happens, when power is restored, the main control side power-on process is started and the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without an instantaneous or power outage. After that, when the checksum calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S29 is compared in step S30 with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous or power outage occurred, the checksum values will not match, and in step S38 all areas of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when power is restored, the RAM clear switch is operated by a staff member or other attendant of the game parlor, and the above-mentioned game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM will be forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no intention from the staff member or other attendant of the game parlor to clear the RAM.

In this embodiment, therefore, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided in step S24 to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. This prevents the game from progressing. Although a value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a as described above, so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all even if RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24. When a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, when it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 has been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, preventing the progress of the game, and preventing various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the main prize ball number information output, etc.) from being updated, and preventing fluctuations in the calculation result of the checksum. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the calculation result of the checksum in step S29 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 are consistent, so that the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs is not initialized. This prevents game information from being initialized immediately before a momentary or power outage occurs when power is restored.

In addition, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided as step S24 for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. When a power outage warning signal has not been input (i.e., when it is determined by the judgment of step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has not been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing a game, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 supplies power to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, to output game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output judgment information) based on the progress of the game. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control side power cut processing consisting of the processing of steps S58 to S68, which is a backup processing for storing various information including information indicating the value of a power counter for a power supply, and an infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result of step S29 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup processing (i.e., the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64), when restarted, and therefore does not initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary interruption or power outage occurs. In other words, the game information is restored to the state immediately before the momentary interruption or power outage occurs, and the main control board 1310 can be started.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT, thereby making it possible to start the main control side power outage processing again without updating the contents of the main control's built-in RAM at all. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power outage processing within the "power supply assurance period during momentary power outage or power outage" of approximately 7 ms defined by the hardware, as before. In other words, in this embodiment, when a momentary or power outage occurs during the main control side power-on process when power is restored, and the power from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, and the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power cut process cannot be completed within the "momentary or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware electrolytic capacitor MC2, a determination is made in step S24 immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22 as to whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, preventing the game from proceeding.

This software makes it impossible for the game to progress, thereby preventing progression to steps subsequent to step S24 (specifically, the control flow in which interrupt initial settings are made in step S42, and then interrupt permission is set in step S52 to start the main control side timer interrupt processing described below), thereby preventing the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the main prize ball number information output)) from being updated. In this way, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power is cut off from the island equipment of the gaming hall, the main control's built-in RAM is divided into two parts: a part that is handled by software so that the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball information)) are not changed at all, and a part that is handled by hardware so that the main control's power outage processing is completed reliably and the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball information)) are not changed at all. By configuring it in two parts, it is possible to reliably prevent the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball information)) from being changed.

Next, the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, in order to inform the fact that the power has been turned on (restored), a power-on state command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. This main control return destination command at power-on is mainly composed of information indicating the driving state of the start port solenoid 2412 and information indicating the driving state of the attacca solenoid 2414. Here, we will first explain the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2414; in other words, the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not reserve the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen showing a jackpot game state (e.g., a screen showing a jackpot game presentation) in the display area of the presentation display device 1600, and the main control board 1310 is driving the attacca solenoid 2414 and the large prize opening 2005 is open by the opening/closing member, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 will start driving the attacca solenoid 2414 and the large prize opening 2005 will transition from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member to a state in which it is open.

However, when a momentary or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, and therefore when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can restore based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot game state as a game state and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can display a screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, but cannot display at all which round of the jackpot game state it is. In other words, even if, for example, a gaming ball enters the large winning opening 2005 and is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2402, and the main control board 1310 transmits a large winning opening 1 count display command to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the peripheral control board 1510 of the number of gaming balls that have entered the large winning opening 2005, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the number of gaming balls that have entered the large winning opening 2005 on the screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving status, but cannot display at all which round of the jackpot game state (i.e., which round).

In this situation, for example, when the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state is ended, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacca solenoid 2414 and transmits a large prize opening 1 closed display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the large prize opening 2005 to transition from an open state to a closed state by the opening/closing member (i.e., the start of closing the large prize opening 2005 between rounds of the first attacca unit 2400), and when the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, it transmits a large prize opening 5th open display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the attacca solenoid 2414 to start driving the large prize opening 2005 to transition from a closed state by the opening/closing member to an open state (i.e., the start of opening the large prize opening 2005 for the fifth round). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen corresponding to the probability and time-saving state described above to a screen indicating the start of five rounds of the jackpot game state in the display area of the performance display device 1600.

In addition, for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen informing the player that the game state is favorable to the player because the second starting port 2004 is ready to receive a game ball (for example, a screen informing the player that the second starting port door 2411 is open) in the display area of the performance display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting port solenoid 2412 to open the second starting port door 2411 so that the game ball B can be guided to the second starting port 2004. If an instantaneous or power outage occurs and power is then restored, the main control board 1310 is restored to the game state immediately before the instantaneous or power outage occurred based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and the main control board 1310 starts driving the starting port solenoid 2412 to close the second starting port door 2411 and transitions to a state in which the second starting port 2004 is closed.

However, when a momentary power outage or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 and recover when power is restored. Therefore, when a momentary power outage or power failure occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary interruption or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004, generating a gaming state advantageous to the player, and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return to normal by displaying a screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration, but the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display at all in the display area of the performance display device 1600 a screen informing the player that the gaming state has become advantageous to the player, in which a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004. For this reason, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine may be surprised by the occurrence of a momentary or power outage and forget that when power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred was one in which game balls could be received into the second starting hole 2004. In such a case, even though the game state at the time of power restoration is restored to one in which game balls can be received into the second starting hole 2004, the screen instructing the player to play (i.e., a screen instructing the player to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 at the time of power restoration, causing the player to become confused about what game to play.

As described above, in the two examples mentioned above, there was a problem in that the game state immediately before the momentary or blackout could not be quickly restored after power was restored. In other words, there was a problem in that a player seated in front of the pachinko machine would mistakenly think that the pachinko machine's system had frozen when power was restored after a momentary or blackout.

In this embodiment, in order for the main control board 1310 to transmit a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and power is restored), in step S50, the power-on status command, which is classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control side timer interrupt process described below.

As a result, based on the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 can communicate to the peripheral control board 1510 that, for example, in the above example, when a momentary or power outage occurs during the fourth round of a jackpot game and power is then restored, the attacca solenoid 2414 will be started to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the jackpot opening 2005 will transition from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member to a state in which it is open. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the jackpot game state (i.e., a screen showing which round it is) in the display area of the performance display device 1600, but it can display a screen informing the player that the jackpot game state is in the fourth round, that the attacca solenoid 2414 has started to be driven, and that the jackpot winning opening 2005 has been opened by the opening and closing member (for example, a message saying "It's a jackpot. The jackpot winning opening is open. Please play so that the game ball enters the jackpot winning opening."). A message to the player may be displayed on the display area of the performance display device 1600 to instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to place a game ball in the large prize opening 2005 after power is restored. Also, in the above example, when a momentary or power outage occurs in a game state in which game balls can be received in the second start opening 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, when power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 starts driving the start opening solenoid 2412 as the return destination. The peripheral control board 1510 can display a screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 informing the player that the second starting port door 2411 has been opened and that the game ball B can be guided to the second starting port 2004 (for example, a screen conveying the message to the player, "The second starting port door 2411 is open. Please play so that the game ball enters the second starting port."), and instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which the game ball will enter the second starting port 2004 after power is restored.

As a result, when power is restored after a momentary or blackout, the main control board 1310 can give detailed instructions on where to return the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, after power is restored, the game can be quickly restored to the state it was in immediately before the momentary or blackout. In other words, when a momentary or blackout occurs and then power is restored, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine will see that the system of the pachinko machine has frozen, which can prevent the player from mistaking this for a malfunction.

Next, the calculation of the checksum in step S29 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since it was manufactured for inspection in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, will be described. When the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since it was manufactured for inspection in the main control board inspection process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the backup process of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power off process consisting of an infinite loop, as described above. Therefore, even if a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S29, the checksum values will not match in the comparison judgment in step S30, and all areas of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared in step S38 except for a specific area.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the RAM built in the main control, so that only three commands, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the RAM built in the main control. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, the power-on state command is transmitted first, followed by the power-on main control return destination command, followed by the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is transmitted as the first command from the main control board 1310 to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process.

The power-on state command is composed of information that instructs the player to clear the RAM when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), information that instructs which state (probability and time-saving state) to return to when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), among the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state, and information that indicates the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, we will explain the problem that occurs when the power-on state command does not include information that indicates the model code of the pachinko machine.

The model code of the pachinko machine is used to determine which copyright of the work it is for and what kind of game specifications it has when creating the so-called max type, mid type, or sweet type of pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310) (for example, in addition to game specifications in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, there is also a game specification in which the number of times the special pattern can fluctuate is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) and a probability fluctuation occurs (so-called ST machine)).

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for multiple types of copyrights may be mixed. In such a case, the workers on the manufacturing line may not know which of the multiple types of copyrights (e.g., copyrights of works A, B, C, D, E, and F) the main control board 1310 is being sent to manufacture for which copyright of the work, or may mistakenly believe that the main control board 1310 is being sent to manufacture for another copyright (e.g., copyright of the work F) even though the main control board 1310 is being sent to manufacture for one copyright (e.g., copyright of the work D) of the multiple types of copyrights.

For this reason, when main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are manufactured on the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, if the main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed, the workers on the production line will not be able to confirm which work copyright the main control board 1310 manufactured on the production line is for, and even for the same work copyright, they will not be able to confirm which model type it is (max type, middle type, sweet type, or any other type) or what the game specifications are (such as a game specification in which if a probability fluctuation occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, or an ST machine).

As a result, if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed when manufacturing the main control boards 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that produces the pachinko machine 1, the main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control boards 1310 to the game board 5 while still mixed. For this reason, workers on the game board assembly line may attach a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the work copyright. This results in a problem of reduced production efficiency of the game board 5.

In this embodiment, in order for the main control board 1310 to transmit a power-on status command including information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power interruption occurs and power is restored), in step S50, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control side timer interrupt process described below.

As a result, a worker on the production line of the manufacturer that produces the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 during the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the production line, and based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received by the inspection device from the main control board 1310, the inspection device 201 determines the model code of the pachinko machine, i.e., the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, including the series code for identifying which of the above-mentioned model types (max type, middle type, or sweet type) it is, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state will continue until the next big win game state occurs, By visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code that specifies the game specification where a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times that the special symbol changes, as well as the game specification where a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times that the special symbol changes (ST machine), it is possible to determine which copyright of the work the main control board 1310 corresponds to, and even for the same copyright of the work, it is possible to determine which model type (max type, middle type, or sweet type) and what the game specification is (a game specification where when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next big win game state occurs, or an ST machine).

As a result, even if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed when manufacturing the main control boards 1310 on the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the workers in the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type, work copyright, and game specifications of the main control boards 1310, and can separate the main control boards 1310 for each work copyright and send them to the subsequent game board assembly line. Then, the workers on the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control boards 1310 that correspond to the game boards 5 for the work copyrights to the game boards 5, and can prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game boards 5 caused by the work of attaching the main control boards 1310 that do not correspond to the game boards 5 for the work copyrights to the game boards 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game boards 5.

[21-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at an interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in Fig. 210 and Fig. 211.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 212 (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks, a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, the register bank is switched from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second register bank. Note that in this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to a stack is not required.

Following step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric role control process described later, the time during which the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol variable display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric role control process described later, as well as the time for which the payout control board 633 receives the various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) and the ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payout owner ACK signal has been input. Specifically, when the change time of the change display pattern or normal pattern change display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the change time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, thereby accurately measuring the change time of the change display pattern or normal pattern change display pattern.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input judgment time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input judgment time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input judgment time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0. Note that these various times and the ACK signal input judgment time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a reads, for example, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general prize opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second start opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the large prize opening sensor 2402, the detection signal from the out sensor 664, the detection signals from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch, the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, the signal from the setting switching button, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 which informs the payout control board 633 that the prize ball command sent in the prize ball control process described below has been successfully received, and stores this as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, when the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 2401 are read, the corresponding start hole winning command classified as "other" is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first start hole sensor 3002, the corresponding start hole winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and when there is a detection signal from the second start hole sensor 2401, the corresponding start hole winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process is started, the input states of all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those that have been subjected to vacant terminal processing) are first read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result of the second read is compared with the result of the first read. It is determined whether or not any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again as the third time, and the result of the third read is compared with the result of the second read. It is determined again whether or not any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again as the fourth time, and the result of the fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. It is determined again whether or not any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, it is treated as if no game ball has entered the game, or the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input process, the input states of all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those for which vacant terminal processing has been applied) are read twice in total, by comparing the first to third readings and the second to fourth readings, thereby making it possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., and therefore the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2403, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2804, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3005, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3006, the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2407, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3006, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3007, the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2409, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3008, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3009, the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3009, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2403, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2802, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2803, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2804, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2805, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2806, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2807, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2808, the detection signal from This can improve the reliability of the detection signal from 01, the detection signal from the large prize opening sensor 2402, the detection signal from the out sensor 664, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch, the detection signal from the door frame open switch, the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, the signal from the setting switch button, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 which informs the payout control board 633 that the prize ball command sent in the prize ball control process described below has been successfully received by the payout control board 633.

Following step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal malfunction monitoring processing, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have been subjected to vacant terminal processing is determined based on the information acquired in the switch input processing in step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to ground (GND) as a vacant terminal processing, so that its logical state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal malfunction monitoring processing, whether the logical state of the input terminals that have been subjected to vacant terminal processing among the input terminals of the various input ports is LOW or not is determined based on the information acquired in the switch input processing in step S104. When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logical state of the input terminal to which the idle terminal processing has been applied is not LOW, it stores a malfunction command classified as a notification display that notifies the user that a malfunction has occurred in the peripheral circuitry of the main control MPU 1310a as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs a winning/losing random number update process (step S106). In this winning/losing random number update process, the above-mentioned pattern random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random numbers for determining the initial value for the winning pattern and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small winning pattern, which are updated in the non-winning/losing random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 211, are also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the winning pattern and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small winning pattern are updated in the main control side main process and this main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further increase randomness. In contrast, the pattern random numbers are random numbers related to winning/losing judgment (winning judgment), so the respective counters count up only each time this winning/losing random number update process is performed. In addition, the random numbers for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning combination and the random numbers for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning combination are also updated by this winning/losing random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won is an initial value update type counter that is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. It counts up from the initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won. When the counter finishes counting up the range of the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won, from the minimum value to the maximum value, the initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won is updated by the win/lose random number update process. The initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won.

In this embodiment, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the big win symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win symbols are updated by the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 211, and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. However, if the processing time of this routine becomes uneven each time the interrupt timer occurs and the main control side main process is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer occurs, causing the number of times the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 is executed to become random, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the big win symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win symbols may be updated only in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs ball counting processing (step S107). In this ball counting processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, game balls that are discharged from the game board 5 in response to a detection signal from the out sensor 664 and flow through the out ball passage 663 (game balls that are shot into the game area 5a and received in the winning holes such as the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the big winning hole 2005, the special winning hole 2006, etc. and discharged from the game board 5, and game balls that are shot into the game area 5a and When the out sensor 664 detects a game ball that has been received into the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, or the second sub-out port 2022 and discharged from the game board 5 without being received into any winning port after being drawn into the game board 5, a calculation is performed to add (increment) the value of the total recovered ball counter. When the first ball sensor 703 detects a game ball that has been collected and is flowing through the first ball path 701, a calculation is performed to add (increment) a value of 1 to the value of the out ball counter, which counts the number of game balls (so-called out balls) that have been collected by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022. A detection signal is input from the second ball sensor 704, and the game ball is shot into the game area 5a, and is then shot into the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, When the second ball sensor 704 detects a game ball that has been accepted into a winning port such as the second starting port 2004, the large prize winning port 2005, the special prize winning port 2006, etc. and is circulating through the second ball path 702, an operation is performed to add (increment) the value of a safe ball counter, which counts the number of game balls, so-called safe balls, that have been accepted into winning ports such as the general prize winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the large prize winning port 2005, the special prize winning port 2006, etc. In other words, in the ball counting process, the out sensor 664 detects both game balls received in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the special winning opening 2006, etc., and game balls received in the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022, the first ball sensor 703 detects game balls collected by the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022, and the second ball sensor 704 detects game balls received in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the special winning opening 2006, etc.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a stores the value of the total recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM as the total number of game balls received in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the special winning opening 2006, etc., and the game balls received in the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022, and stores the value of the out ball counter in an area dedicated to counting total recovered balls in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The total number of out balls collected by the first opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022 is stored in an area dedicated to counting out balls in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control, and the value of the safe ball counter is stored in an area dedicated to counting safe balls in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control as the total number of safe balls received by the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the special winning opening 2006. In addition, the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the value of the total collected ball counter, that is, the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the total number of game balls inserted, is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in a base calculation area in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control, and the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the special monitor is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information.

In addition, when the value of the total collected ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, each time the total number of game balls collected at the winning ports such as the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the large winning port 2005, the special winning port 2006, the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 reaches 10 balls, the main control MPU 1310a creates a ball collection command to notify this fact and stores it in the output information storage area as transmission information. Note that when the value of the collected ball counter, the value of the out ball counter, and the value of the safe ball counter, which are the calculation results, reach their maximum values (in this embodiment, the value 65535) and the value of the collected ball counter, the out ball counter, and the safe ball counter is further incremented by 1, the values of the collected ball counter, the out ball counter, and the safe ball counter overflow and become 0, and the calculation is performed to add from this value 0.

Following step S107, the main control MPU 1310a performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls based on this input information is created, and a self-check command for checking the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is created. The created prize ball command and self-check command are then sent to the payout control board 633 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls, and since the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify this fact, and stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 633. If a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has successfully received this prize ball command is not input within a specified time, a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and sent to the payout control board 633.

In addition, in the prize ball control process of step S108, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, if the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, a main prize ball number information output command classified as "other" is created to inform the player of this fact, and is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of this counter for determining the main prize ball number information output is calculated by reading input information from the input information memory area described above, and counting the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on this input information, that is, based on the game balls that have entered the various prize openings (hereinafter referred to as ``various prize openings provided on the game board 5'') such as the general prize opening 2001, the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the large prize opening 2005, and the special prize opening 2006 provided on the game board 5, and the value is updated and stored in the prize ball planned information memory area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process of step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the RAM built in the main control is read, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information read from the input information storage area described above based on the input information read from the input information storage area. When the value indicating the added number of balls exceeds the value of 10 (i.e., when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform the user of this fact and is stored in the output information storage area as transmission information, and the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated as the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the RAM built in the main control described above.

Following step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs a frame command reception process (step S110). The dispensing control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified as status indications (for example, the frame status 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame status 2 command). In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information informing the payer control board 633 of this fact is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a reshapes the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified as status indications (the frame status 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame status 2 command)) and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the winning ball is confirmed. If it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation cheat") is occurring, the value of the radio wave irradiation cheat counter is incremented by a value of 1. The value of this radio wave cheat counter is incremented each time it is determined that a radio wave irradiation cheat is occurring in the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. When the value of the radio wave irradiation cheat counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to a value of 250 based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt period during which the fraud detection process performs the main control timer interrupt process), a radio wave irradiation cheat notification command classified as a notification display that informs the user that a radio wave irradiation cheat is occurring is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is occurring, and the value of the magnet goto counter is incremented by a value of 1. The value of this magnet goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that a radio wave irradiation goto is occurring in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. When the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to a value of 250 based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt period in which the fraud detection process performs the main control side timer interrupt process), a magnet goto notification command classified as a notification display that informs the user that a radio wave irradiation goto is occurring is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In this embodiment, this mechanism reliably detects and reports magnet gouges, helping game parlor staff and other attendants to discover magnet gouges at an early stage.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when a detection signal is input from the large prize opening sensor 2402 when the game is not in a jackpot game state (when a game ball enters the large prize opening 2005), an abnormal prize winning display command classified as an abnormal condition and a notification display is created and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information, or the value of the safe ball counter stored in the safe ball counting dedicated area is counted as the normal prize winning display command. If the total number of game balls detected by the sensor 3001, the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2401, the large prize opening sensor 2402, and the special prize opening sensor 2601 differs from the total number of game balls actually received in the general prize opening 2001, the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the large prize opening 2005, the special prize opening 2006, etc., an abnormal prize display command classified as an alarm display as an abnormal condition is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In the fraud detection process of step S112, when a radio wave and/or magnet strike is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 1 to indicate that fraud has been detected, whereas when neither radio wave nor magnet strike is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 0 to indicate that no fraud has been detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the initial value is set to 0 (zero). Also, when an abnormal win at the large prize slot is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG may be set to a value of 1 to indicate that fraud has been detected.

Following step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a launch permission signal setting process (step S113). In this launch permission signal setting process, the logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch the game ball B to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is set. Specifically, based on the value of the above-mentioned fraud detection flag FD-FLG, when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that no fraud has been detected, the main control MPU 1310a sets the logic of the launch permission signal to the launch permission logic and stores it in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information, while when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not a value of 0 (a value of 1), that is, when it is determined that fraud has been detected, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) inverted from the launch permission logic, and stores it in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, when a detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input and the door frame opening switch detects that the door frame 3 is open relative to the main frame 4, or when a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b is input and the main frame opening switch 4b detects that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1310a sets the logic of the launch permission signal to a launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the launch permission logic, and stores it in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. The logic of the launch permission signal is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that it is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the launch permission logic as an initial value (default) from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power is restored) until the launch permission signal setting process of step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started.

Following step S113, the main control MPU 1310a performs special symbol and special electric role control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric role control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a, and this obtained random number value is set as the special random number. It then determines whether the special random number (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM (determines whether a jackpot game state will occur (called a "special lottery")), or it retrieves the value of the counter that updates the pattern random number and determines whether it matches any of the win type determination values pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM according to the jackpot type or small win type (determines the win type).

If these judgment results (lottery results) are due to the first start hole sensor 3002, various commands related to the special pattern 1 synchronization performance are created, whereas if the judgment result (lottery results) are due to the second start hole sensor 2401, various commands related to the special pattern 2 synchronization performance are created and stored in the transmission information memory area as transmission information. In addition, the special pattern variable display pattern is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above, and the output of a lighting signal to the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light up the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 in accordance with the determined special pattern variable display pattern, and the output is stored in the output information memory area described above as output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot game state is reached, various commands classified as jackpot-related (jackpot opening command, large prize opening 1 open Nth time display command, large prize opening 1 closing display command, large prize opening 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, for example, the output of a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2414 to open and close the opening/closing member is set, and stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the number of times (rounds) that the large prize opening 2005 changes from a closed state to an open state is set to two. When there are 15 rounds, the output of a lighting signal to the 2 round indicator lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the 2 round indicator lamp, and this is stored in the output information storage area as output information; when there are 15 rounds, the output of a lighting signal to the 15 round indicator lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the 15 round indicator lamp, and this is stored in the output information storage area as output information; and the output of a lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up a specified color to indicate whether or not a time reduction has occurred, and this is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs normal symbol and normal electric device control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric device control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and normal winning slot winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning slot winning processing, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on the result of this determination, when a detection signal has been input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether the normal symbol has been hit described above is extracted and stored as normal winning slot winning information in the normal winning slot winning information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

This regular prize slot winning information storage area has sections 0 to 3 (four sections), and regular prize slot winning information is stored in the order of section 0, section 1, section 2, and section 3. For example, if regular prize slot winning information is stored in sections 0 to 2 of the regular prize slot winning information storage, when a detection signal from gate sensor 2801 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the regular prize slot winning information is stored in section 3 of the regular prize slot winning information storage.

The regular prize winning information stored in the 0th section of the regular prize winning information storage is set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. When this regular prize winning information is set, the regular prize winning information in the first section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the regular prize winning information storage, the regular prize winning information in the second section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the first section of the regular prize winning information storage, and the regular prize winning information in the third section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the second section of the regular prize winning information storage, and the third section of the regular prize winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when normal prize winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal prize winning information storage, the normal prize winning information in the first section of the normal prize winning information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the normal prize winning information storage, and the normal prize winning information in the second section of the normal prize winning information storage is shifted to the first section of the normal prize winning information storage, and the second section of the normal prize winning information storage and the third section of the normal prize winning information storage become free areas. Here, when normal prize winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal prize winning information storage, the output of the lighting signal of the normal reserve display of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal prize winning information so that the total number of stored normal prize winning information is set as a reserved ball and the normal reserve display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

Following the normal winning port winning process, the normal winning port winning information set in the working area of the RAM built in the main control is read out, and the value of the random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol wins is determined from the read normal winning port winning information to determine whether or not it matches the normal symbol winning determination value previously stored in the ROM built in the main control (referred to as the "normal lottery"). This determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery) determines whether or not to open or close the second starting port door 2411. If the opening and closing operation is performed as a result of this determination, the second starting port door 2411 is opened, creating a game state in which game balls can be received by the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. The normal symbol variable display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and the output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variable display pattern, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

In addition, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won matches the normal symbol winning judgment value previously stored in the ROM built into the main control, various commands related to the normal electric role performance are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 is set to open and close the second start port door 2411, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won does not match the normal symbol winning judgment value previously stored in the ROM built into the main control, a normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In addition, the output of a light-up signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In this example, the probability of winning the regular lottery (the probability of winning the regular lottery) is 1 in 2.

Following step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the above-mentioned output information storage area from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 633 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, outputs a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2414 that performs the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member of the large winning port 2005 when in a jackpot game state, outputs a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 that performs the opening and closing operation of the second start port door 2411 for opening and closing the second start port 2004, and also outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a small jackpot information output signal, a 1-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a 1 ...1-round jackpot information output signal, a 1-round jackpot information output signal, a 1 It outputs various information (game information) related to the game, such as a winning information output signal, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, a time-saving information output signal, and a start-hole winning information output signal, to the payout control board 633, outputs a launch permission signal set to launch permission logic or launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to the payout control board 633, outputs a display signal to a special monitor that displays the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the total number of game balls inserted, and outputs a lighting signal to display the setting value stored in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified as related to special prize 1 synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to special prize 2 synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to big wins (for example, a large prize 1 count display command corresponding to a large prize 1 count command based on a detection signal from the large prize 1 sensor 2402 when a game ball that has entered the large prize 1 sensor 2402 is detected when a game ball that has entered the large prize 1 sensor 2402 is detected), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal prize 1 synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to normal electric role effects, various commands classified as notification displays, various commands classified as status displays, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others (for example, a notification to that effect whenever the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various prize 1 ports provided in the game board 5 reaches 10, which is generated by the main control board 1310, A main prize ball number information output command that instructs the transmission of a main prize ball number information output signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 as main prize ball number information, and various commands classified into specific histories (for example, a ball collection command that notifies the user that the number of game balls collected at the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the special winning opening 2006, the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022 reaches 10 balls, a setting change command that notifies the user that a setting value has been changed, an error display command that notifies the user that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and a setting key ON operation command that notifies the user to check the setting value stored in a setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, which will be described later). The main circuit serial data is configured with 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main serial data is composed of a status indicating the type of command with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating the variation of the performance with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values and adding them up; this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the main serial transmission port built into the main control MPU 1310a can at least transfer the command set in its transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and complete transmission from the transmission shift register as main serial data. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption occurs after power is turned on, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when power is turned on in step S50 of the main control power-on processing shown in FIG. 211, in order to inform the user that power has been restored, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.As main serial data, these are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, followed by the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command at power-on, followed by the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on. In addition, in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 of the main control side power-on processing, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this various information may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are transmitted.

In addition, when the number of game balls collected at the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the special winning opening 2006, etc., the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022 reaches 10 balls, a ball collection command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the fact. The CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 then reads the ball collection command from the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the special winning opening 2006, etc. The number of game balls collected at the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the special winning opening 2006, etc., the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022 is counted, and the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is updated (information correlating the counted value (i.e., the total number of game balls collected at the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the special winning opening 2006, etc., the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022) with the date and time of the update). In addition, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off when the business hours of the game hall are closed without receiving the ball collection command, the ball collection information that corresponds to the last counted value (i.e., the total number of game balls collected at the winning holes such as the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the large winning hole 2005, the special winning hole 2006, the out hole 1008, the first sub-out hole 2021, and the second sub-out hole 2022) and the updated date and time is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on when the game hall starts business, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 creates ball collection information again from the day business started, based on the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the ball collection information is stored and held as ball collection history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The counted value stored and held as ball recovery information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be the value counted from a value of 0 (zero) on that day, or it may be both the value counted from a value of 0 (zero) on that day and the sum of the values counted up to that point.

Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control's built-in WDT (step S122) and ends this routine. The main control's built-in WDT is cleared in step S122 by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the timekeeping by the main control's built-in WDT. Then, the main control's built-in WDT restarts counting time, which avoids the main control MPU 1310a being forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT.

As described above, the main control board 1310 can execute and complete the above-mentioned backup process for storing game information as the game progresses before power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is in progress, and when power is restored, based on the game information for which the backup process has been executed, the main control board 1310 can output a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 which instructs the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414, which are the electrical drive sources due to the port output process of step S118 in this routine, when power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, as the return destination for the game progress by the main control board 1310. In other words, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 211, the main control board 1310 creates a power-on state command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on, based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 of the same processing shown in FIG. 210, in order to inform the user that power has been turned on (power has been restored), and stores these command in the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. This is stored in the transmission information storage area, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the main serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on state command, followed by transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command, followed by transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return the game when power is restored in the display area of the display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command from the main control board 1310 when power is turned on. This allows the game to be quickly restored to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage when power is restored while the player is playing, and the destination to which the game will be returned by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600 to notify the player, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 does not appear to be in a frozen state, which is a so-called frozen state, and the player is prevented from mistaking it for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage after power is restored, the game can be prevented from being misunderstood for a malfunction by the player.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, in step S38 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 210, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared except for a specific area. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on is made in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 of the same processing shown in FIG. 211, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, so that only the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. M's transmission information memory area, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the main peripheral serial data is transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, followed by transmission to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command, and then transmission to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process is configured to display detailed model information on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310, that is, based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which comprises the above-mentioned series code for identifying which of the model types (max type, middle type, or sweet type) it is, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, in addition to the game specifications in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specifications in which a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times that a special pattern can fluctuate (ST machine)).

[21-5. Setting change processing]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is carried out in step S37 of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the current setting value, as shown in FIG. 213 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the setting value stored in a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this setting value, it may be read or extracted, but when extracting the setting value, the extracted setting value is set in a specified area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by treating the various information stored in the main control's built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating their sum, and is the same process as the checksum calculation performed in step S29 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 210.

Following step S202, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (when power is off) in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 211 (step S204). In step S204, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is equal to the value 1 (step S206). The determinations in steps S204 and S206 are the same as the determinations in steps S30 and S32, respectively, in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 210. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG is a flag that indicates whether game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG has been stored in the main control's built-in RAM during the main control's power-off processing described below, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control's power-off processing has been completed successfully, and to a value of 0 when the main control's power-off processing has not been completed successfully.

In the judgment of step S204, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the judgment of step S206, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not value 1 (value 0), that is, when the main control side power off processing is judged not to have ended normally, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). Here, the "normal range" is a value that the set value can be changed to, and in this embodiment, it is preset to values of set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6. When the flowchart proceeds to the judgment of step S208, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or that the main control side power off processing has not ended normally at the time of power off, so that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the judgment of step S208, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is one of the values of setting value 1 to setting value 6, which are within the normal range, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, it uses that setting value as is.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S208, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting value is not within the normal range, it sets the setting value acquired in step S200 to the initial value, setting value 1 (step S210). In step S208, it is determined whether the setting value acquired in step S200 and stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is one of the normal ranges of setting value 1 to setting value 6. However, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S204 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, without making the determination in step S208, or if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S206 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, that the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, it may proceed to the processing in step S210 and set the setting value acquired in step S200 to the initial value of setting value 1.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S206 that the backup flag BK-FLG is equal to the value 1, i.e., that the processing during power failure on the main control side has been completed normally, or when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S208 that the value is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a turn-on signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g, thereby displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214).

Following step S214, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting switching button has been operated (step S216). This determination is made by reading the detection signal from the setting switching button and determining whether a detection signal has been input from the setting switching button. When a detection signal has been input from the setting switching button, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button has been operated, whereas when a detection signal has not been input from the setting switching button, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button has not been operated.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S216 that the setting switch button has been operated, it performs a calculation to add (increment) the setting value by 1, updating it (step S218). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM is retrieved and set in a predetermined area, the setting value set in this predetermined area is added (incremented) by 1.

Following step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g, thereby displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S220).

Following step S220, or in the judgment of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the setting switch button has not been operated, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the decision key has been operated (step S222). In this judgment, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the decision key has been operated (step S222). In the judgment, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting key has been inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder has been rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key switch 1311a on (i.e., the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key switch 1311a on to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it on a second time, and this is done based on the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the decision key ON signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the decision key has been operated, but when the decision key ON signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the decision key has not been operated.

In the judgment of step S222, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the decision key has not been operated, it returns to the judgment of step S216 again and determines whether the setting switch button has been operated. In the judgment of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switch button has been operated, it performs the processing of step S218 and step S220 again, performs the judgment of step S222, and when it determines that the decision key has not been operated, it returns to the judgment of step S216 again, and when the setting switch button is operated until the decision key is operated, the setting value is updated by adding 1 value each time it is operated and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and when the setting switch button is not operated, the setting value updated when the setting switch button was operated immediately before is displayed on the setting display 1310g. In addition, even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and is then restored before it is determined in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the setting value updated immediately before the power outage or momentary interruption is not stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, so it is discarded and the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S222 that the Enter key has been operated, it stores the updated setting value in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, if the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is retrieved and set in a specific area when the setting value is acquired in step S200, the setting value set in this specific area is updated, and this updated setting value is returned to the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and is then restored after the processing of step S224 is completed, the updated setting value when the Enter key was operated before the power outage or momentary interruption occurred is stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S224, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether or not the setting key has been turned OFF (step S226). In this judgment, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether or not the setting key has been turned OFF by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned ON to the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and performs this judgment based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, the main control MPU 1310a judges that the setting key has been turned OFF, whereas when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, the main control MPU 1310a judges that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the process returns to step S226 and repeats the determination in step S226 until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key has been turned OFF, it stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g, and hides the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to a value of 0 (step S232). As described above, this setting change permission flag CS-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to permit a change to the current setting value (the value among setting values 1 to 6 set at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time) stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when a change to the setting value is permitted, and to a value of 0 when a change to the setting value is not permitted. In the processing of step S232, by setting the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to a value of 0, future changes to the setting value are not permitted.

Following step S232, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The "normal range" is the same as that judged in step S208, and as described above, in this embodiment, it is preset to values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. In the judgment of step S233, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM in step S224 is any value within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6, in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is not an abnormal value, and uses the setting value as is when it is judged to be within the normal range.

When the main control MPU 1310a judges in step S233 that the range is normal, it performs serial communication initial setting (step S234), then creates a setting change command and sets the transmission information (step S236), then performs peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing to transmit the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main-circuit serial data (step S238), and ends this routine. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same processing as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 211, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 212. Here, in the serial communication initialization in step S234, the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 transmits the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data before the command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 211. This is to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed by the setting change command. The setting change command is a command that informs the changed setting value and completion of setting value storage. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information that associates the setting value with the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S233 that the value is not within the normal range, it performs an error display process (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. This infinite loop causes the state in which the error display process has ended to be maintained, making it impossible to play the game, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if it is determined that the main control side power off process has not ended normally when the power was cut off, it displays an error message to that effect, saying that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM (or that they cannot be trusted). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

In the above example, the setting change process is shown to set one of multiple setting values, setting value 1 to setting value 6, but it is not limited to setting one of multiple setting values. It is also possible to have only one setting value and execute a process to set this one setting value in the setting change process, or to have multiple setting values but execute a process to set only one predetermined setting value in the setting change process (it is possible to set only one predetermined setting value and not to set other setting values). In this case, the setting value is not changed in the setting change process, and is set to the same setting value before and after the setting change process.

[21-6. Setting value confirmation display process]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be described. This setting value confirmation display process is carried out in step S28 of the main control side power-on process shown in Figs. 210 and 211.

When the setting value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0 or not, as shown in FIG. 214 (step S350). This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the setting value stored in a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, and to a value of 0 when the setting value is not being displayed for confirmation. In addition, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays, for example, "Power being restored" on a black background on the performance display device 1600 as the startup mode. When the setting value confirmation display process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sends a setting value confirmation display start command to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data to inform the peripheral control board 1510 of the start of the setting value confirmation display, and when the setting value confirmation display process is ended, a setting value confirmation display end command is sent as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, so that "Power supply restoring" is followed by "Checking settings" or "Checking settings" can be displayed instead of "Power supply restoring".

In the judgment of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a value of 0, that is, when the setting value is not being displayed, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the main frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S352). In this judgment, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and, based on this input information, detects a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and a setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON, and the setting key switch 13 11a and the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key ON signal determines that the setting key switch 1311a has been set to the setting key ON, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met, whereas the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b determines that the main frame 4 is not open relative to the outer frame 2, and/or the setting key ON signal determines that the setting key switch 1311a has not been set to the setting key ON, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not met.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S352 that the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are not met, it ends this routine. On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met, it sets the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG to a value of 1 to display the setting value for confirmation (step S354), and then acquires the current setting value (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the setting value stored in a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The "normal range" is the same as that in step S208 and step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. 213, and as described above, in this embodiment, it is preset to values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. In the judgment of step S357, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting value acquired in step S356 (i.e., the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM) is within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6, in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is not abnormal, and uses the setting value as is when it is judged to be within the normal range.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S357 that the setting value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range, it outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU 1310a creates an ON operation command for the setting key, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, sets the ON operation command for the setting key (step S360), and ends this routine. This ON operation command for the setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 212. The ON operation command for the setting key is a command that notifies the start of this routine, which is the setting value confirmation display process (i.e., that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM is to be confirmed).

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting key ON operation command, it updates the setting key ON operation history information (information that associates the fact that the setting value was confirmed with the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the CPU is in a state where a predetermined specific history information display permission condition is established, which allows the display of specific history information such as the ball collection history information, the setting value history information, the error display history information, and the ON operation history information of the setting key. When this predetermined specific history information display permission condition is established, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display area of the performance display device 1600 to switch from the image that has been displayed to a specific history information display image that selectively displays the specific history information by rotating the touch operation unit 302 and pressing the pressing operation unit 303 by a person who checks the specific history information.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not equal to 0 (is equal to 1), that is, when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting key has been turned OFF (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the decision key ON to the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF, and this is done by an OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when an OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, whereas when an OFF signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

In the judgment of step S362, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, it ends this routine as it is, whereas if it determines that the setting key has been turned OFF, it sets the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG to a value of 0 so as not to display the setting value (step S364), then stops the output of the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g, and makes the acquired setting value invisible to the setting display 1310g (step S366), then creates an OFF operation command for the setting key and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, sets the OFF operation command for the setting key (step S368), and ends this routine. This OFF operation command for the setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 212. The setting key OFF operation command is a command that indicates that this routine, the setting value confirmation display process, has ended (i.e., that the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM have been confirmed).

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the above-mentioned predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not met. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 was controlling the display of the above-mentioned specific history information display image in the display area of the performance display device 1600, it controls the display to switch back to the image that was displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 immediately before switching to the specific history information display image.

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S357 that the value is not within the normal range, it sets the interrupt not to be permitted (step S370). This setting stops the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 212, which is repeated every 4 ms.

Following step S370, the main control MPU 1310a performs an error display process (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop in which the main control's built-in WDT is cleared (step S374). This infinite loop causes the main control's built-in WDT to be continuously cleared, but since the main control's built-in WDT cannot be stopped once it has been started, by continuing to clear the main control's built-in WDT, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control's built-in WDT clears the timekeeping, and the main control's built-in WDT starts counting again, so the main control MPU 1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT. In addition, this infinite loop causes the state in which the error display process has ended to be maintained, resulting in a state in which the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if it is determined that the main control side power off processing did not end normally when the power was cut off, it will display an error message to inform the user that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM (or that the contents are unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

In addition, as described above, if the device is configured to have only one setting value and execute a process to set this one setting value during the setting change process, or if the device has multiple setting values but executes a process to set only one predetermined setting value during the setting change process (only one predetermined setting value can be set and no other setting values can be set), then only the one setting value that has been set may be displayed when the setting value confirmation display process is executed.

[21-7. Error display processing]
Next, the error display process will be described. This error display process is performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in Fig. 210, in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in Fig. 210 (in step S240 in the setting change process shown in Fig. 213), and in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in Fig. 214.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a stops the launch permission signal as shown in FIG. 215 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal conveys permission to launch the game ball B to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, it can convey that the launch is permitted, whereas when the logic is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the launch permission logic, it can convey that the launch is stopped (not permitted).

When the error display process, which is this routine, is started as one of the processes performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 210 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 210 (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 213), the main control MPU 1310a cannot perform the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 211, so it cannot perform the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 212, and cannot perform the launch permission signal setting process in step S113 in the same process. The launch permission signal is output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with reset function, so when power is restored, the main control output circuit with reset function is reset, and the logic is the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the launch permission logic.

Therefore, when the error display processing, which is this routine, is started as one of the processes performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 210 or as one of the processes performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 210 (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 213), the main control MPU 1310a sets the logic of the launch permission signal to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in step S400 to reliably prevent the game ball B from being launched even after the power is restored and the error display processing, which is this routine, is started, and outputs it from the output terminal of the specified output port to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with reset function.

When this routine, the error display process, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 214, the main control MPU 1310a judges in step S357 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 214 that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. The main control MPU 1310a has already performed the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 211, but the interrupt non-permission setting has already been performed in step S370 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 214 before the error display process, which is this routine, is started. Therefore, when the error display process, which is this routine, is ended, as described above, an infinite loop is entered, and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 212 cannot be performed, and the launch permission signal setting process in step S113 in the same process cannot be performed.

When the error display process, which is this routine, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 214, the main control MPU 1310a, in step S400, sets the logic of the launch permission signal to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in order to reliably prevent game ball B from being launched when there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, and outputs it from the output terminal of the specified output port to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with reset function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication is output to the setting display 1310g, thereby displaying an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various displays of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial serial communication settings (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets the transmission information (step S408), and then performs peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing to transmit the transmission information (error display command) set in step S406 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data (step S410), and ends this routine.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 213 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 211, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 213 and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 212. When the error display processing routine, which is the process performed in step S33 in the main control power-on processing shown in FIG. 210, the process performed in step S37 in the main control power-on processing shown in FIG. 210 (the process performed in step S240 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 213), and the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 214, respectively, starts and ends, as described above, it enters an infinite loop, and due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing has ended is maintained, making it impossible to progress in the game at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, serial communication initialization is performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410.

The error display command is a command that notifies the user that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are unreliable). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, it updates the error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the date and time of receipt) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command, it controls the display of a message image in white text on a blue background in the display area of the performance display device 1600, saying "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant.", and controls the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant" to be forcibly set to maximum volume and played from various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of main frame 4, etc.) regardless of the volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The process of notifying a RAM error using the error display command is the process with the highest priority, and when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command after receiving a command to notify another error, it gives top priority to notifying a RAM error.

[22. Various control processes of the dispensing control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 will be described with reference to Figs. 216 to 219. Fig. 216 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on process, Fig. 217 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on process of Fig. 216, Fig. 218 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on process following Fig. 217, and Fig. 219 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

[22-1. Processing when power is turned on for the dispensing control unit]
First, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the payout control unit power-on process is performed under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, as shown in Fig. 216 to Fig. 218. When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of the payout control MPU interrupt. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is performed with priority.

Following step S500, the dispensing control MPU performs input/output settings (I/O input/output settings) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, the various input ports and various output ports of the dispensing control MPU are set, etc.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer process 1 (step S506) and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, and in this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). The determination in step S508 is based on the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the dispensing control MPU determines whether the RAM clear switch on the dispensing control board 633 has been operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch. When the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal) is HI, it is determined that the operation signal does not command the RAM clear to be performed, and it is determined that the RAM clear switch has not been operated. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal) is LOW, it is determined that the operation signal commands the RAM clear to be performed, and it is determined that the RAM clear switch has been operated.

When the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU is in a state in which it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the payout control MPU (i.e., the payout control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time from when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S512, when the payout control MPU judges that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to erase payout information related to the payout of, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, the number of prize balls stocked PBS, the actual ball count PB, the number of drive commands DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area) stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased, and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs a setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting allows access to the payout control built-in RAM, and allows, for example, writing (storing) or reading payout information.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer, for example, indicates an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) in use, or an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when terminating a subroutine and returning to this routine, and the stack pointer advances each time a stack is added. In step S520, the stack pointer is set to an initial address, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are added to the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading the stacks in order from the last stacked to the first stacked.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is equal to 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 1 when the payout information is to be cleared and to 0 when the payout information is not to be cleared.

When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout control MPU determines not to erase the payout information, it calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is calculated by treating the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off processing (when power is off) described below (step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a value of 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag that indicates whether payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value was stored and retained in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off processing described below, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally, and to a value of 0 when the payout control unit power-off processing has not been completed normally.

In the judgment of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a value of 1, that is, when it is judged that the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally, the payout control MPU sets the working area of the payout control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 0, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built into the payout control MPU (i.e., the payout control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the working area of the payout control built-in RAM. This sets information to be used for various processes based on the payout information related to the payout, such as the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas (for example, the number of prize balls stocked PBS, the actual ball count PB, the number of drive commands DRV, and the mismatch counter INCC, which are stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, which is stored in the CR communication information storage area, and the mismatch counter reset judgment time, which is stored in the time management information storage area). Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state in which power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value of 0 (is a value of 1), that is, when the payout control MPU judges that the payout information should be erased, or in the judgment of step S526, when the payout control MPU judges that the checksum values do not match, or in the judgment of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value of 1 (is a value of 0), that is, when the payout control unit power off processing has not been completed normally, the payout control MPU clears the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S532). This clears the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S534). This setting is done by reading the initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the dispensing control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt period when the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process described below is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the dispensing control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S538). This setting causes the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S536, i.e., every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the dispensing control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by sequentially setting the values A, B, and C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, as described above, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

When the dispensing control MPU determines in step S540 that no power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is equal to 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, as described below, and is set to 1 when 2 ms have elapsed and to 0 when 2 ms have not elapsed.

In the judgment of step S542, if the dispensing control MPU determines that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is equal to the value 0, that is, that 2 ms has not elapsed, the dispensing control MPU returns to step S540 and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S542, if the dispensing control MPU determines that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, that 2 ms have elapsed, it sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 0 (step S544).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals based on this information are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU. The output information storage area stores various information such as payout master ACK information indicating that various payout-related commands (prize ball commands and self-check commands) from the main control board 1310 have been received normally, drive information for controlling the drive of the payout motor 584, prize ball number information indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information to be displayed on the error LED indicator. Based on this output information, when various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 have been received normally, the payout control MPU outputs a payout master ACK signal to the main control board 1310 from the output terminal of a specified output port, outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584, or outputs the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 584 outputs a prize ball number information output signal to the external terminal board 558 every time the payout motor 584 actually pays out 10 game balls).

Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter is provided to determine whether or not to output prize ball number information. This prize ball number information output determination counter counts the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described below, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) not shown in the figure for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584.

In a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by this payout motor 584, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the value is updated based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described below.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information is read from this prize ball information storage area, and when the value of this read counter for determining the output of prize ball number information exceeds a value of 10 (i.e., when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls), a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated as the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM mentioned above), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the dispensing control MPU performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the dispensing control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM. For example, the operation signal of the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal from the CR unit, the main dispensing ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the main control board 1310 that the various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described below have been normally received by the main control board 1310, and the like are each read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball-stuck determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball-stuck state has occurred due to the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the skip determination time, which is set when the payout blade 589 is not in a fixed position, the full determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls, the ball of the game ball taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 due to the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574, and the ball-stuck state are determined as a determination condition when the ball-stuck state is determined by the ball-stuck state. In addition to managing the time of the ball run-out determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether the number of game balls received and dispensed by the ball receiving section 589b of the dispensing blade 589 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the time of the mismatch counter reset determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether to reset the mismatch counter INCC, which monitors whether inconsistent game balls are being repeatedly dispensed due to a mismatch between the number of game balls received and dispensed by the ball receiving section 589b of the dispensing blade 589 and the number of balls actually detected by the dispensing detection sensor 591, is managed. For example, when the ball jamming determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, so that the ball jamming determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time this timer update process is performed, and the ball jamming determination time is accurately measured by the subtraction result becoming a value of 0. Note that these various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it is determined whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit have been input. Based on the various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the working area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, information used for various processing is set based on payout information related to payout, such as payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in the various information storage area (for example, the number of prize balls stocked PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area).

With this process, for example, even if there is a momentary or power outage, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary or power outage, which are stored as payout backup information. As a result, even if there is a momentary or power outage while the payout device 580 is performing a payout operation of game balls and the payout operation cannot be continued due to the momentary or power outage, the payout operation can be continued when power is restored, so that the game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 without excess or shortage. In other words, when the payout control MPU is exchanging various signals with the CR unit during CR communication processing while paying out game balls to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202, if there is an instantaneous or power outage that cuts off the exchange of various signals with the CR unit and makes it impossible to continue paying out game balls, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the instantaneous or power outage that are stored as payout backup information. This makes it possible to continue exchanging various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before the instantaneous or power outage when power is restored, and to continue paying out game balls.

In this way, even if the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is interrupted or stopped, when power is restored it is restored to the state it was in immediately before the interruption or stoppage, and the various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit are not altered by the effects of the interruption or stoppage. This makes it possible to increase the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit.

In addition, the various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which was set in the process of setting the working area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, and if this read PRDY signal output setting information is set to a logic state of a PRDY signal that indicates, for example, that a payout operation for paying out loaned balls is impossible, the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit. Then, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as one process of the main operation setting process, a determination is made as to whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH. If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, it is determined that the retry operation is operating abnormally, that is, it is determined that the payout operation of the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, and the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1. In the payout ball operation determination setting process, the setting for outputting an error state to the CR unit is, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal, which informs the CR unit that the payout operation to pay out loaned balls is impossible when there is no communication with the CR unit, and this is stored in the CR communication information storage area.

In this way, in the CR communication process, at the next timer interrupt after power is restored, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area, and the PRDY signal is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the payout device 580 for game balls was in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power outage, the state is restored when power is restored, so that at an extremely early stage after power is restored, a PRDY signal informing the CR unit that the payout operation to pay out loaned balls is impossible can be output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, and the CR unit can be informed that the payout operation of the payout device 580 for game balls is in an abnormal state. This makes it possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting a useless loaned ball request signal, BRDY, at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

In the CR communication processing, in the port input processing of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this CR connection signal, when its logic is HI, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is output as HI to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to inform the CR unit that a payout operation to pay out loaned balls is possible, whereas when its logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is output as LOW to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to inform the CR unit that a payout operation to pay out loaned balls is not possible. The logic state of the EXS signal, which indicates that a single dispensing operation has started or ended, is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and the CR connection signal, which indicates whether the dispensing control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected or not, is stored in the status information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and ball exhaustion check process (step S556). In this full tank and ball exhaustion check process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it is determined whether the lower tray 202 described above is full of stored game balls based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, and whether the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 described above is a predetermined number or more based on a detection signal from the ball exhaustion detection sensor 574. For example, the determination of whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls is performed by using a timer interrupt period of 2 ms, and when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the current full tank and ball out check process and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous full tank and ball out check process (2 ms ago), that is, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process of step S552 starts timing the above-mentioned full tank determination time. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes a value of 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time has arrived, it is determined whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in this full tank and ball out check process. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the lower tray 202 is determined to be full of stored game balls, and full tank information that conveys this is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the lower tray 202 is not full of stored game balls, and full tank information indicating this is stored in the status information storage area.

The determination of whether the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number also uses a timer interrupt period of 2 ms. When the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is ON in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process and the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is OFF in the previous full tank and out-of-ball check process (2 ms ago), that is, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process of step S552 starts timing the above-mentioned out-of-ball determination time. Then, when the out-of-ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the out-of-ball determination time has arrived, it is determined whether the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is ON, ball out information informing the user that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is stored in the status information storage area, whereas when the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is OFF, ball out information informing the user that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or greater than the predetermined number is stored in the status information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout (prize ball commands and self-check commands) are received from the main control board 1310. When these various commands are received normally, payer ACK information informing that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the various commands are not received normally, connection abnormality information informing that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in the various command signals) is stored in the status information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the dispensing control MPU performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the dispensing control's built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main operation setting process, it sets the operation of prize balls, loan balls, ball removal, ball jamming, etc., judges the retry operation, and monitors the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls in stock).

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-mentioned status information storage area, and display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as LED display information. For example, the above-mentioned ball out information is read from the status information storage area, and based on this ball out information, when the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, corresponding display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands classified as state displays (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) are created based on this various information and sent to the main control board 1310. For example, when ball out information is read from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a frame state 1 command is created and sent to the main control board 1310 based on this ball out information.

Following step S566, the dispensing control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is set to the values A, B and C in that order, clearing the watchdog timer.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539, where the payout control MPU sets the watchdog timer clear register HWCL to a value A, and in step S540 determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input, in step S542 it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if 2 ms have elapsed, in step S544 it sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 0, in step S546 it sets the watchdog timer clear register HWCL to a value B, and in step S548 Port output processing is performed in step S550, port input processing is performed in step S552, timer update processing is performed in step S554, CR communication processing is performed in step S556, full tank and bulb out check processing is performed in step S558, command reception processing is performed in step S560, command analysis processing is performed in step S562, main operation setting processing is performed in step S564, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S566, command transmission processing is performed in step S568, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The processing in steps S539 to S568 is referred to as the "dispensing control unit main processing".

The processing contents of the payout control unit main processing vary depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. This causes the time required for processing by the payout control MPU to vary. Therefore, in the port output processing of step S548, the payout control MPU outputs a payout master ACK signal to the main control board 1310 as a priority, which indicates that various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received. This ensures that the payout control MPU has enough processing time to perform other variable processing.

On the other hand, when the dispensing control MPU determines in step S540 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets the interrupt prohibition (step S570). This setting prevents the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process described below from being performed, prevents writing to the dispensing control internal RAM, and protects the dispensing information described above from being rewritten.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). This stops the payout of game balls.

Following step S574, the dispensing control MPU clears the watchdog timer (step S576). This clearing is performed by sequentially setting values A, B, and C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by treating the payout information in the working area of the payout control internal RAM, excluding the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the storage area for the payout backup flag HBK-FLG value, as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets the prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). This setting prohibits access to the payout control built-in RAM, making writing and reading impossible, and protects the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S582, the dispensing control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not set to values A, B, and C in that order. This causes the dispensing control MPU to be reset, after which the dispensing control unit power-on processing is performed again. The processing from step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as the "dispensing control unit power-off processing."

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, and when power is subsequently restored, the payout control unit performs power-on processing.

In step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528 it is checked whether the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally. In this way, by doubly checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is checked whether the payout backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

[22-2. Dispense control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This dispensing control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at an interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the dispensing control unit power-on process shown in Figures 216 to 218.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is started, the payout control MPU, as shown in FIG. 219, disables the timer interrupt and switches (saves) the register (step S590). Here, it switches from the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above to an auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is no longer overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main processing from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and is set to a value of 1 when 2 ms have elapsed and to a value of 0 when 2 ms have not elapsed.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (restores) the register (step S594). This restoration switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is no longer overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the dispensing control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596) and ends this routine.

[23. Various control processes of peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) will be described with reference to Figs. 220 to 224. Fig. 220 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on process, Fig. 221 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, Fig. 222 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, Fig. 223 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and Fig. 224 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. In this embodiment, the priority order of the interrupt processes is set to the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510"), as described above, has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces integrated onto a single semiconductor chip.

[23-1. Processing when peripheral control unit is powered on]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 220. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control unit power-on process is performed under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. 220. When this peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the peripheral control IC is initialized, a hot start/cold start determination process is performed, a wait timer is set after reset, and various control information (peripheral data) is transferred. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs a process to initialize the peripheral control IC, but the time required for the process to initialize the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC can be initialized in an extremely short time. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state where interrupt permission is set, and is thus in a state where it can receive various commands, such as commands related to the control of game presentations and commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1, output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current calendar information and current time information are set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once, when the power is turned on. After performing this current time information acquisition process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit regular processing described later, and is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later, which is executed when a V blank signal that indicates that the screen data (information that specifies the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value of 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. In addition, after the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, it outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not equal to 1 (it is equal to 0), the CPU returns to step S1006 and repeatedly determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1. By repeating such determinations, the CPU enters a standby state until the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1, that is, when it determines that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is to be executed, it first sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 1 (step S1008). This steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer start process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start process, a 1 ms interrupt timer is started to execute the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described below, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to a value of 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, which counts the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs performance operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this presentation operation unit monitoring process, in the presentation operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the presentation operation unit 300 monitors the rotation direction of the touch operation unit 302 and the presence or absence of operation of the press operation unit 303 based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which various information (for example, rotation (direction of rotation) history information of the touch operation unit 302 and operation history information of the press operation unit 303 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the presentation operation unit 300, and the like) is set, which acquires the rotation (direction of rotation) of the touch operation unit 302 and the operation of the press operation unit 303 based on detection signals from various detection sensors (hereinafter referred to as "various sensors provided in the presentation operation unit 300") such as the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, the press detection sensor 381, and the lift detection sensor 382 provided in the presentation operation unit 300, and appropriately determines whether or not to reflect the rotation direction of the touch operation unit 302 and the operation state of the press operation unit 303 in the game presentation. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the performance operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the schedule data for light emission mode generation is rewritten according to the adjusted brightness. This allows the volume and brightness adjustments to be reflected in real time, and the performance will proceed with the adjusted volume and brightness.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as part of the performance operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LEDs used as direct light and the luminance of the LEDs used as indirect light are set based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of a luminance designation value, a normal palette value, and a special palette value. When the lamp palette setting process is executed during the performance, and a player (or a staff member of the game hall) operates the performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a luminance designation value ranging from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is the maximum luminance, the above-mentioned gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC can be updated to the set luminance designation value.

Here, we will briefly explain the brightness designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value that make up the lamp palette setting table. The brightness designation value is a value that can set one of 32 brightness designation values ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value, which is the minimum brightness (lights off), to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the maximum brightness, and the normal palette value and special palette value, which will be described later, are each preset in correspondence with the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value. A player (or a staff member or other attendant at the game hall) can set one brightness designation value ranging from the 1st brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the maximum brightness, by operating the operable performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303).

For example, when a player (or a staff member or other attendant at an amusement hall) rotates the contact operation unit 302 clockwise and the current brightness is set to a first brightness designated value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness designated value, which is the minimum brightness (lights off), the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light are increased in accordance with a predetermined mathematical formula (e.g., a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) from the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value, which is the maximum brightness, whereas when the player rotates the contact operation unit 302 counterclockwise and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light are decreased in accordance with a predetermined mathematical formula (e.g., a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) from the 31st brightness designated value, which is the maximum brightness, to the first brightness designated value. When the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) rotates the touch operation unit 302 to select the desired brightness and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is confirmed. In this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance where the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) can set the brightness while the performance is in progress, and at this time, the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) can set the desired brightness by operating the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, when the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) operates the touch operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the performance display device 1600 while the performance is in progress, a bar-shaped indicator indicating the positions from the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value is displayed, so that the degree of the desired brightness of the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) can be visually shown as an image. In addition, in this embodiment, the 14th brightness designated value is set as the initial value (default).

Normal palette values are set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards installed on the game board side and various decorative boards installed on the door frame side that are irradiated as direct light. For normal palette values, one of 17 steps is selected in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value, and the palette value corresponding to one brightness specification is set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) within the range of 32 steps ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value, which are the brightness specification values described above.

The minimum palette value (20%) is 20% of the maximum palette value (100%) that corresponds to one brightness specification in the 32-step range of the brightness specification values from 0th (zero) to 31st brightness specification values described above. Similarly, for the other palette values, the values (%) written in parentheses are the values relative to the maximum palette value (100%) that corresponds to one brightness specification in the 32-step range of the brightness specification values from 0th (zero) to 31st brightness specification values described above.

In this embodiment, the normal palette value is the maximum palette value (100%) that is pre-selected and set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that is irradiated as direct light and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, and the palette value (50%) is pre-selected and set as the above-mentioned gradation information for a specific decorative board (not shown) (an LED that is dazzling to the player) among the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that is irradiated as direct light.

The special palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used in light guide plates that are irradiated as indirect light. Unlike normal palette values, the special palette value has only one level, and among the 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which are the above-mentioned brightness designation values, the palette value corresponding to one brightness designation is set as the above-mentioned gradation information according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve).

As described above, if the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is the same as that of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate will be darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value, rather than using the normal palette value set for the luminance of the LED used as direct light, and the first luminance designation value, which is the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance designation value, which is the minimum luminance (light off), is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th luminance designation value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%) as the lowest luminance at which the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light by indirect light can be visually recognized, and the palette value corresponding to one luminance designation value within the range from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value is set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

In this way, in the lamp palette setting process, when setting the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of a brightness specification value, a normal palette value, and a special palette value, the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is set by the player (or an attendant such as a game hall clerk) according to the normal palette value corresponding to the brightness specification value operated by the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, while the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is set by the player (or an attendant such as a game hall clerk) according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness specification value operated by the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is too dazzling and operates the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to set the brightness to a lower level, even if the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is set to the lowest brightness (i.e., the first brightness designated value which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness designated value which is the minimum brightness (lights off)) and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (i.e., the first brightness designated value which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness designated value which is the minimum brightness (lights off)) in conjunction with this, the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness designated value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), so the lowest brightness at which the light guide plate can be visually recognized as emitting light with indirect light is set.

Furthermore, without having to individually set the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame for the LEDs used as direct light, the programmer designing the light emission patterns can simply set the light emission patterns in accordance with the flow of the presentation, watch the flow of the presentation based on the light emission patterns of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame, and then set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative board that is too dazzling (or that a slightly darker brightness would produce a better presentation effect), and set the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for other decorative boards, thereby extremely easily changing the balance of the overall light emission patterns. In other words, even if a player (or a staff member of the game hall) operates the operable performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a single brightness designated value ranging from the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value which is the maximum brightness, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the single brightness designated value is set for a specific decorative board, while a maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to the single brightness designated value is set for other decorative boards, so that brightness can be adjusted very easily without destroying the relationship between the light emission modes (bright or dark) that have been set.

Furthermore, although it is more difficult to adjust the brightness of indirect light from a light guide plate compared to direct light, it is possible to set the brightness for LEDs used as indirect light using special palette values that are different from the normal palette values (i.e., independent of the normal palette values). As a result, the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light is managed by the special palette values, while the brightness of LEDs used as direct light is managed by the normal palette values, making it easy to adjust the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of LEDs used as direct light.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the display data creation process described below, and outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC to the liquid crystal output board 1530. This allows various screens (images) to be drawn (displayed) on the performance display device 1600. Note that in the display data output process, if drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen's worth (one frame's worth) is canceled. This prevents delays in processing time, but it can result in dropped frames. However, it is a mechanism that allows the audio data output process described below to prioritize the use of music, sound effects, and other sound effects that match the various effects from various speakers, such as the top center speaker, top side speakers, and the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers").

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, in the sound data creation processing described below, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the data to various speakers from the set output channel. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various performances are played from the various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which screen data, from the first screen data, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which light emission data, from the first light emission data, is to be output among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating light emission modes.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which sound command data, starting from the first sound command data, should be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC among the sound command data that indicates sound data for musical effects, sound effects, and other sound effects, and sound data for alerts and announcements, arranged in chronological order to constitute the sound generation schedule data.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which drive data from the first drive data is to be output among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data. The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, as described below. In this motor and solenoid drive process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the chronological order, and the pointer is updated every time its own process is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so even if for some reason the pointer in the motor and solenoid drive process changes from the drive data it was originally supposed to point to to other drive data, it is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process to point to the drive data it was originally supposed to point to.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands sent from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described below, and the received various commands are analyzed, and the random numbers used for various settings of the performance (for example, random numbers used for performances related to reserved read-ahead) are updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and in this received command analysis process, the various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are analyzed. Based on the analyzed various commands, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as part of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LEDs used as direct light and the luminance of the LEDs used as indirect light are set based on the lamp palette setting table consisting of the above-mentioned luminance designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, and based on the analyzed various commands, reads (extracts) schedule data for generating light emission modes from the peripheral control ROM and executes the lamp palette setting process. When a player (or a staff member of the game hall or other attendant) operates the performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a luminance designation value ranging from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value that is the maximum luminance, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated to the set luminance designation value and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also analyzes whether the command received from the main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command to instruct the start of a start port winning presentation, a normal pattern memory command to identify the number of reserved normal patterns (0 to 4), a variable pattern command to instruct the start of a variable presentation such as the variable display of decorative patterns on the presentation display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of special patterns, a pattern memory command output when the start reserved number changes, or a large prize port 1 count display command output each time a game ball is received by the large prize port 2005, and recognizes the current game state.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the received command analysis processing analyzes the various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The various commands include various commands classified as related to special chart 1 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to special chart 2 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to jackpots, various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal chart synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to normal electric role performance, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test related, and various commands classified as other. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to notices, etc. based on the received command, and reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and schedule data for electrical drive source, etc. from the peripheral control ROM based on the lottery result and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 to execute a performance based on the lottery results.

In addition, the peripheral control ROM stores in advance the peripheral control unit 1511, various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the performance display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating the light emission modes of various LEDs, sound generation schedule data for generating performance sounds such as music and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating the drive modes of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that specifies the configuration of the screen in chronological order, and specifies the order of the screens to be drawn on the performance display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission mode data that specifies the light emission modes of various LEDs in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in chronological order, and specifies the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data specifies an output channel number for specifying which of the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC to use, and a track number for specifying which of the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in chronological order, and specifies the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified as notification displays, the schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for light emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, and the schedule data for the electrical drive source, which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications, are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In addition, in the warning process, if multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the highest priority registered in advance, and when that abnormality is resolved, it automatically transitions to the remaining abnormality notification. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that a certain abnormality has occurred because another abnormality has occurred after the occurrence of one abnormality but before the abnormality has been resolved.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an RTC acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. This RTC acquisition information update process updates the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and updates the year, month, and date, which are the calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, based on the updated time information.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When the VDP of the peripheral control IC receives screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, it reads image data from the SDRAM based on the received screen data and generates one screen's worth of drawing data (one frame's worth) in the built-in VRAM to be drawn (displayed) on the performance display device 1600.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and sets the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (i.e., each time the peripheral control unit performs steady-state processing), the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is identified based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the sound data is output to the various speakers from the output channel set in this sound data creation process. This allows sounds such as music and sound effects that match the various performances to be played from the various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is changed by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and then converted into 1024 levels of values from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024 levels are divided into seven values and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, with the volume increasing from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled to the volume set to board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker for low frequencies on the main frame 4. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker for low frequencies on the main frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data. In addition to the sound data for music, sound effects, and other sound effects and the sub-volume value for adjusting their volume, the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC also incorporate sound data for notification sounds to alert parlor staff and the like of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1 and the sub-volume value for adjusting their volume.

Specifically, for the sound effects, the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume control switch as described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value, without depending at all on the volume adjustment based on the rotating operation of the volume control switch. The sub-volume value of the sound effects can be adjusted by operating the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the sound effects operation unit 300, except for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a certain period when the special pattern display (first special pattern display unit, second special pattern display unit) starts or stops the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the variable pattern command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the final display of the decorative pattern).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, except for a predetermined period after power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a certain period when the special pattern display (first special pattern display unit, second special pattern display unit) starts or stops the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the variable pattern command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the final display of the decorative pattern), By operating the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process is converted into seven levels of board volume values from 0 to 6, and by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch depending on the operation of the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the board volume value is increased or decreased to set the board volume, and the sub-volume value of the performance sound can be adjusted.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC combine the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC with a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used, and amplify the volume of this combined effect sound to the master volume value that is actually the volume that flows from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker for low frequencies on the main frame 4, and serialize this amplified effect sound and output it as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized sound is at its maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value so that the volume of the sound coming from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker of the main frame 4 is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound, the sound data of the sound embedded in the track to be used among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC and the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the sound embedded in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized sound is actually amplified to the master volume value that is the volume coming from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker of the main frame 4, and this amplified sound is serialized and recorded. For the alarm sound, the sound data of the alarm sound incorporated in the track being used is mixed with the maximum volume that is not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the alarm sound incorporated in the track being used, and the volume of this mixed alarm sound is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that actually flows from the top center speaker, top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker for low tones on the main frame 4, and this amplified alarm sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, to briefly explain the control of playing an alarm sound to alert parlor staff and the like of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 when the special sound is being played from the top central speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4, first the sub-volume value of the track in which the special sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track in which this special sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the alarm sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value for which the volume of the alarm sound is set to maximum are combined, and the volume of this combined special sound and alarm sound are amplified to the master volume value that will actually be the volume played from the top central speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4, and these amplified special sound and alarm sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, the only sound that actually comes out of the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the low-pitched main frame speaker on the main frame 4, is the notification sound at maximum volume. At this time, the special sound is muted, so no sound comes out of the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the low-pitched main frame speaker on the main frame 4, but the special sound is proceeding according to the schedule data for sound generation described above.

In this embodiment, the alarm sound is played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker on the main frame 4 for a predetermined period (e.g., 90 seconds). When this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the sound that is being played according to the sound generation schedule data that was previously forcibly set to mute is reset to the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch as the sub-volume value (at this time, if the volume of the sound is adjusted by operating the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the sound operation unit 300, it is set to the sub-volume value of the adjusted sound), and the alarm sound is played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker on the main frame 4.

In this way, when the sound effects are being played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4, when an alarm sound is played to notify the parlor staff of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1, the volume of the sound effects is muted and the alarm sound is played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4. However, since this muted sound effects progress according to the sound generation schedule data, when the alarm sound stops being played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the sound effects do not start playing again from the point where the alarm sound started, but start playing again from the point where the alarm sound started playing and progressed according to the sound generation schedule data until the predetermined period of time had elapsed.

Also, the notification sounds and announcement sounds are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC can control the sound source of the peripheral control IC by a program to adjust the volume from mute to maximum volume. The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a staff member of the game hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, and other performance sounds played from the various speakers will be low, but the notification sounds set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is committing a fraudulent act. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sounds is low, it is possible to prevent staff members of the game hall from being unable to notice the malfunction or the player's fraudulent act due to the notification sounds.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up in a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied and backed up in a backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 0 as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1004, sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 to initialize it, and repeats the judgment of step S1006 until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In other words, in step S1006, the CPU waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, and if it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1, it performs the processing of steps S1008 to S1038, and returns to step S1004 again. In this way, if it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1, the processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit regular processing."

In this peripheral control unit regular processing, the routine starts by setting the regular processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 1 in step S1008, indicating that the peripheral control unit regular processing is being executed, and then in step S1010, a 1 ms interrupt timer start process is performed, and then in step S1036, the routine is performed, and finally in step S1038, the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0, indicating that the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed. The peripheral control unit regular processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described later, which is executed when the V blank signal, which indicates that the peripheral control unit's CPU is ready to accept screen data, is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the CPU of the peripheral control IC. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the performance display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeated approximately every 33.3 ms.

[23-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is explained, which is executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC, which indicates that the peripheral control IC is ready to receive screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 (step S1045), as shown in Fig. 221. As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Fig. 220 is being executed, and is set to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed.

In the judgment of step S1045, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, it ends this routine. On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1045, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed, it sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 1 (step S1050) and ends this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing, and is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is not executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is equal to 0, i.e., whether the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, in step S1050, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1. This is because, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, if a V blank signal is input and the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed as determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 220, and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing currently being executed is forcibly canceled midway and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is started from the beginning. In order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. 220 is turned on. In step S1008 of the power-on process (peripheral control unit steady-state process), the steady-state process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 to inform the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady-state process is being executed, and in step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady-state process) in FIG. 220, the steady-state process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 to inform the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady-state process has been completed. In other words, this is a procedure for when the peripheral control unit steady-state process cannot be completed by the time the next V blank signal is input after the V blank signal is input, resulting in a so-called processing lag.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing cannot be completed within the time of about 33.3 ms and the processing is delayed, the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 220 will result in a standby state until the next V blank signal is input. In other words, the time to execute the peripheral control unit regular processing that has been delayed will be about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, which is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. 220, is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit regular processing, but if there is a peripheral control unit regular processing that has been delayed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times, not 64 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit regular processing is delayed, the consistency between the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit's normal processing slows down, the progress of the presentation can be reliably maintained.

[23-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing will be described, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 220. When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times (step S1100), as shown in Fig. 222. As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is a counter that counts the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 220 and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the performance display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeatedly executed every approximately 33.3 ms, so after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times before the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, and the second, ..., and 32nd 1 ms timer interrupts occur in sequence.

In the judgment of step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times, that is, when it judges that the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has started, it ends this routine as it is. In the case where the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is set to have a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing as the priority of the interrupt processing, but the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, in the case where the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the V blank signal is generated and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started again when the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 times, it adds (increments) the value of 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, step S1102. By adding the value of 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 220, and the number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, has been executed, increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the motor, solenoid, and other electric drive sources are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for the motors, solenoids, and other electric drive sources arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the chronological order, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is performed. As a result, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, the electric drive sources provided in the door frame 3 and the electric drive sources provided in various performance units provided on the game board 5) are driven according to the electric drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs movable object information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable object information acquisition processing, history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (e.g., original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created by determining whether or not detection signals have been input from the various sensors provided in the various presentation units provided on the game board 5, and set this in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the movable positions by setting the original positions (standby positions) of the various movable objects provided in the various presentation units provided on the game board 5 and acquiring the movable positions.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a performance operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this performance operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals are input from various sensors provided in the performance operation unit 300, history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the touch operation unit 302 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) is created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The presence or absence of operation of the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be obtained from the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by operating the performance operation unit 301, it is possible to adjust the volume of the performance sound output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker of the main body frame 4, and to adjust the brightness of various LEDs mounted in multiple numbers on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up in a 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied and backed up in a 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAM. Note that in this embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set to different areas, and the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAM and the regular processing backup area provided in the SDRAM are set to different areas.

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, various processing related to the performance in steps S1104 to S1108 is executed as the performance progresses within a period of 1 ms. In contrast, in the peripheral control unit regular processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 220, various processing related to the performance in steps S1014 to S1032 is executed as the performance progresses within a period of approximately 33.3 ms. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as is. Therefore, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal occurs, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled, and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing by the occurrence of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the occurrence of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, the progress state of the performance can be reliably matched.

As mentioned above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the performance display device 1600, and the interval at which the V blank signal is output may also vary slightly depending on the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly, the time lag caused by the slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt.

[23-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts transmitting various commands as serial data from the main control board 1310, this triggers the CPU to take in 1 byte (8 bits) of information from the main serial data into a reception buffer at the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC, and when this taking is completed, this triggers an interrupt to be generated and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is performed. One packet of the main serial data is composed of 3 bytes, with the status assigned to the first byte, the mode assigned to the second byte, and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values and calculating their sum to the third byte.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200), as shown in FIG. 223. This 1-byte reception period timer sets the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

In the judgment of step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, when it is judged that it is within the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC takes in the 1 byte of information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC (step S1202) and adds (increments) the value of the reception counter SRXC by 1, step S1204. This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times information has been taken out from the reception buffer, and takes in a value of 1 when the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, a value of 2 when the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, and a value of 3 when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on, etc.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the receive counter SRXC is equal to the value 3, i.e., whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been retrieved from the receive buffer (step S1206). In this determination, it is determined whether the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1206 that the receive counter SRXC is not equal to the value 3, that is, that the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, has not yet been retrieved from the receive buffer, followed by the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, in that order, it sets a 1-byte receive period timer (step S1208) and ends this routine. By setting the 1-byte receive period timer in step S1208, a period is set in which the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges in step S1206 that the receive counter SRXC is equal to 3, that is, when it judges that the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order, it sets the receive counter SRXC to an initial value of 0 (step S1210) and calculates the sum value (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, which were already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main loop serial data from the main control board 1310, so it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they discharge electrostatically, generating noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is in an environment where it is subject to noise.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data as numerical values, calculates their sum (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main control board 1310. This allows the CPU of the peripheral control IC to determine whether the main serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to main serial data that is different from the normal data.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, it stores the status assigned to the first byte of the received main loop serial data and the mode assigned to the second byte of the main loop serial data in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216), and ends this routine.

On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1200 that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, that the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded, or if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, it ends this routine.

[23-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process will be described, which is executed when a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in Fig. 224, and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1302). In the determination of step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power failure warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine as it is.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges that a power outage warning signal has been input, it judges whether 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this judgment, the timer started in step S1300 judges whether 2 microseconds have passed. In the judgment of step S1304, when 2 microseconds have not passed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302 and judges whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If it judges that a power outage warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine, but if it judges that a power outage warning signal has been input, it judges again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have passed. In other words, in the judgment of step S1304, it judges whether a power outage warning signal has been input continuously for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, was started.

In the judgment of step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges that the power outage warning signal has been input continuously for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, was started, it performs power saving processing (step S1306). In this power saving processing, the backlight of the performance display device 1600 is turned off, excitation to the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 is turned off, various LEDs are turned off, and other processes are sequentially executed to reduce the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, thereby ensuring stable operation for a period of 20 milliseconds during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a command reception standby process (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands currently being sent by the main control board 1310, the CPU waits for at least 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control IC can receive the command being sent. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a command backup process (step S1310). In this command backup process, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied and backed up in a regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input (step S1312). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a WDT clear process (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has not been input, or following step S1314, it returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power outage warning signal has been input. In other words, it continues to determine indefinitely whether the power outage warning signal has been input. By continuing to determine indefinitely in this manner, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has not been input, it is no longer able to output a clear signal to the external WDT, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset. On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a WDT clear process in step S1314, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 220 is started again.

In this way, if the input of the power outage warning signal continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314 so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset just before the power outage state occurs. On the other hand, if the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312 and released, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for a period exceeding 2 microseconds, and the determination of step S1302 is passed, if the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312 and released, the WDT clear process of step S1314 is not executed so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, so that such noise can be dealt with by automatically returning to reset.

[Control process of main control board]
Next, an example of the control process executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. Fig. 225 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric role control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used in the various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 225, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes a first start gate passing process, such as obtaining a first special random number of the first special symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the RAM (step S232), on the condition that the detection signal from the first start gate sensor 3002 is in the ON state (a ball has entered the first start gate 2002) (step S231). Also, on the condition that the detection signal from the second start gate sensor 2401 is in the ON state (a ball has entered the second start gate 2004) (step S233), the main control MPU 1310a executes a second start gate passing process, such as obtaining a second special random number of the second special symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol reserved memory area of the RAM (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a jackpot in progress flag indicating that control is being performed in the jackpot game state is set (step S235), and if the jackpot in progress flag is set, a jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed to control the jackpot game state. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display state when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stops is a state suggesting a "15R jackpot", a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the jackpot winning hole 2005 according to the 15R jackpot game state. Also, when the result is a state suggesting a "5R jackpot", a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the jackpot winning hole 2005 according to the 5R jackpot game state, and when the result is a state suggesting a "2R jackpot", a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the jackpot winning hole 2005 according to the 2R jackpot game state.

In the jackpot control process (step S235A), after controlling the opening of the jackpot opening 2005, the process of setting the time-saving flag and the time-saving count counter is executed. The time-saving flag is a flag indicating the time-saving state, and is set when the 2R jackpot game state is ended because the result of the lottery process when the first special symbol stops changing during the time-saving state indicates a "2R jackpot", when the 5R jackpot game state is ended because the result of the lottery process indicates a "5R jackpot", and when the 15R jackpot game state is ended during the time-saving state and during the non-time-saving state. The time-saving flag is then reset during the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 236 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown when the next jackpot occurs or when the counter value of the time-saving count counter becomes "0".

The time-saving counter indicates the remaining number of times the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) will continue as the number of times the time-saving state will continue. When the time-saving state is controlled after the end of a jackpot game state, the number of times the time-saving state will continue is set when the jackpot game state ends. The time-saving counter counts down each time the variable display of the special symbols is executed until the counter value reaches "0", but if the next jackpot occurs before the counter value reaches "0", it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 236 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown (returning the counter value to "0").

Also, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, a first special pattern process including a lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops is executed (step S238) on condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special pattern reserved memory area is "0" (step S237), and a second special pattern process including a lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special pattern stops is executed (step S239) on condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special pattern reserved memory area is not "0" (step S237). Thus, in this example, it is configured so that the variable display of the second special pattern is executed preferentially when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not "0".

Figure 226 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first start port passing process (step S232).

Now, in the processing of step S231, if it is determined that the first start hole sensor 3002 is in the ON state and a gaming ball has entered the first start hole 2002, then as shown in FIG. 226, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first pattern random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the processing of step S241.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area, from the main control built-in RAM, and judges whether the first reserved memory number is its maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" based on this counter value (step S242). If it is determined in the process of this step S242 that the first reserved memory number is not its maximum value, the following steps S243 to S245 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into a reserved state. That is, first, as the process of the step S243, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number obtained in the step S241 is stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a performance pre-determination process to determine, based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first pattern random number, and the variable random number obtained in step S241, whether the display result of the variable display of the first special pattern is a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether to execute a reach performance as a game performance executed by the performance display device 1600, and the type of mode (type of variable pattern) of the game performance to be executed, before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S245), and then terminates the process.

However, if it is determined in the processing of step S242 that the first reserved memory count is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved.

In addition, when the first reserved memory number changes based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved memory number display in the function display unit 1400 is updated to correspond to the first reserved memory number, and a command indicating the first reserved memory number (first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0-4)) is set in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the performance display device 1600 based on receiving the first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0-4).

Figure 227 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the above-mentioned performance pre-determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the performance pre-determination process, it compares the random numbers acquired in the above-mentioned step S241, specifically the first special random number, first pattern random number, reach random number, and variable random number, with a pre-determination table (not shown) to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached, and if so, the type of jackpot, and if not, whether or not a reach performance will be executed as the game performance executed by the performance display device 1600, and the type of game performance to be executed (step S261).

Then, a pre-determination command is set according to the specified pre-determination information (whether or not a jackpot will be reached, and if so, the type of jackpot; if not, whether a reach effect will be executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, and the type of game effect to be executed, etc.), the type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and the reserved memory number stored corresponding to the obtained special random number (the value of the reserved number counter). For example, in the effect pre-determination process for the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first start port passing process, a first special symbol pre-determination command is set according to the specified pre-determination information, the fact that the first special random number has been obtained, and the first reserved memory number (the value of the first special reserved number counter) (step S262).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a pre-determination command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp pre-determination information such as the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the first start port 2002 where the start winning occurred, whether the display result of the variable display of the special pattern based on the start winning that occurred is a jackpot, the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, whether a reach effect will be executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a jackpot, and the type of game effect to be executed before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reserved memory area that stores pre-determination information regarding the variable display of the first special pattern.

The first reserved memory area has 1 to 4 memory areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control IC stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command in order starting from the first (earliest) memory area. When the pre-determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) memory area, if the peripheral control IC receives a pre-determination command, the notified pre-determination information is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 to 3) memory area, and when the peripheral control IC receives a first variation pattern command notifying the start of the variable display of the first special pattern, the pre-determination information stored in the first memory area of the first reserved memory area is discarded in accordance with the received first variation pattern command, and the pre-determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) memory area is moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) memory area (the pre-determination information stored in the reserved memory area is shifted). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special pattern is stored in a manner that allows the order in which the reservation of the start of the variable display occurred to be specified, and is discarded in order starting from the earliest pre-determination information.

In this way, when the variable display control is put on hold, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (on hold), the jackpot expectancy (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, such as when the on-hold display is newly output or when the on-hold display is shifted in response to the on-hold consumption.

Figure 228 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234).

Now, in the processing of step S233, if it is determined that the second start hole sensor 2401 is in the ON state and a gaming ball has entered the second start hole 2004, as shown in FIG. 228, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second pattern random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the processing of step S251.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and judges whether the second reserved memory number is its maximum value (upper limit value) of "1" based on this counter value (step S252). If it is determined in the process of step S252 that the second reserved memory number is not its maximum value, the following steps S253 to S254 are executed to put the variable display control of the second special symbol into a new reserved state. That is, first, in the process of step S253, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in the process of step S254, each random number obtained in the above step S251 is stored in the second special symbol reserved memory area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM.

However, if it is determined in the processing of step S252 that the second reserved memory count is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved.

In addition, when the second reserved memory number changes based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved memory number display in the function display unit 1400 is updated to correspond to the second reserved memory number, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number (second reserved number designation command 0-1 (special pattern 2 storage command 0-1)) is set in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the performance display device 1600 based on receiving the second reserved number designation command 0-1 (special pattern 2 storage command 0-1).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on game balls entering the first starting hole 2002 is set to "4", while the upper limit of the second reserved memory number based on game balls entering the second starting hole 2004 is set to "1". Note that the second starting hole 2004 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time-saving state, and the time required for the second special symbol to change is shorter than in the normal state. This prevents a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, such as a long period in which the second special symbol is not displayed even if the upper limit of the second reserved memory number is set to "1", or a long period in which the second reserved memory number is at its upper limit, resulting in no opportunity to win a jackpot even if a game ball enters the second starting hole 2004.

Figure 229 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S238). Note that the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process are similar program modules, and only the random numbers and tables used for the judgment are different. Therefore, only the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes will be selectively executed depending on the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. A first special symbol normal process (step S280) in which a first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the read first special random number.
2. A first special symbol stop pattern setting process (step S281) in which a process of determining the display mode when the first special symbol's variable control is stopped is performed based on the result of a lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped.
3. A first variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which a lottery process is performed for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the variation random number and the variation mode of the performance display executed in response to the special symbol on the performance display device 1600.
4. A first special symbol variation process (step S283) in which the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 waits until the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped.
5. A first special symbol stop process (step S284) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol so that the mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400.

The first special symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S280) should be performed during the main control side power-on processing (see FIG. 210).

Figure 230 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal processing of the first special pattern (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 230, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines whether there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the reserved state based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter as the processing of step S301. If it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the reserved state as the processing of step S302, the random number stored in the first memory area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (e.g., first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read from the same RAM. Next, in the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the random numbers (first special random number, first pattern random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops, which are stored in each memory area of the first special pattern reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, are shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserved memory area has four memory areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a start winning are stored in the first (earliest) memory area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) memory area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n=1 to 3) memory area, and when the start condition for variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4) memory area. This allows the order in which the reservation of variable display control of the first special symbol occurred to be stored in a specific order, and the reservation of variable display control is released in order starting from the earliest reservation (the reservation that occurred first).

Then, in step S305, a winning determination process is performed, which is a lottery process for determining whether or not the jackpot will be won, based on the first special random number of the first special symbol that has been read out. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stopping symbol setting process (step S281), this process ends.

Figure 231 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the winning determination table shown in FIG. 232(A) with the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 when the first special pattern normal processing is being performed, and the second special random number read in the second special pattern normal processing when the second special pattern normal processing is being performed) (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in Figure 232 (A) includes, for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number), a low probability hit determination table used when the game state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time-saving state) and time-saving state (low probability time-saving state)), and a high probability hit determination table used when the game state is high probability (high probability time-saving state). In the low probability hit determination table which is referenced for comparison with the first special random number, the first special random numbers are associated with each other so that they match the jackpot determination value indicating that the first special random number has won a jackpot with a jackpot probability of 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, 1/299 when the setting value is 3, 1/289 when the setting value is 4, 1/279 when the setting value is 5, and 1/269 when the setting value is 6, match the jackpot determination value indicating that the first special random number has won a small hit with a small hit probability of 3/319, and match the miss determination value indicating that any other first special random number is a miss. In addition, in this example, in the low probability hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the second special random number within the second special pattern process processing, the second special random number is associated with the above-mentioned second special random number so that it matches the big hit determination value indicating that the second special random number has won a big hit with a big hit probability of 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, 1/299 when the setting value is 3, 1/289 when the setting value is 4, 1/279 when the setting value is 5, and 1/269 when the setting value is 6, matches the small hit determination value indicating that the second special random number has won a small hit with a small hit probability of 144/319, and matches the miss determination value indicating that any other second special random number is a miss. That is, the hit determination table referenced for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of being determined as a small hit than the hit determination table referenced for comparison with the first special random number, and the player is placed in a more favorable state when the variable display of the second special pattern based on the start winning at the second start port 2004 is executed than when the variable display of the first special pattern based on the start winning at the first start port 2002 is executed. Also, the hit determination table for high probability is configured to increase the probability of a big hit for each set value by 10 times compared to the hit determination table for low probability.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that a jackpot has occurred as a result of comparing the hit determination table with the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol, or the second special random number read in the normal processing of the second special symbol) (step S312), it sets a jackpot flag indicating that the corresponding variation has resulted in a jackpot (step S313) and ends the hit determination process.

In addition, if a comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern, or the second special random number read in the normal processing of the second special pattern) determines that a small hit has occurred (step S314), a small hit flag is set indicating that the corresponding variation has resulted in a small hit (step S315), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if neither a big win nor a small win has been won, i.e., if it is determined that the win has been a miss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316).

The reach judgment table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and includes a reach judgment table for the time-saving state, which is used when the game state is in the time-saving state, and a reach judgment table for the non-time-saving state, which is used when the game state is not in the time-saving state. In the reach judgment table for the time-saving state, the reach random numbers are associated with one type of reach random number so that it matches a reach judgment value indicating that a reach has been reached, and 71 types of reach random numbers are associated with reach judgment values indicating that a reach has not been reached.

In addition, in the reach determination table for the non-time-saving state, five types of reach random numbers, including the same reach random numbers as those set in the reach determination table for the time-saving state, are associated with the above-mentioned reach random numbers so that they match the reach determination values indicating that a reach will occur, and 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination values indicating that a reach will not occur. Thus, in this embodiment, in the non-time-saving state, the reach determination values indicating that a reach will occur are higher than in the time-saving state.

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is a miss (step S317) based on the comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316), it sets a reach flag indicating that the variation is a reach and ends the process (step S318).

Figure 233 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 233, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305). The lottery process result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S321) and whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S324).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a determines the type of jackpot by comparing the first pattern random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern with the jackpot pattern determination table shown in FIG. 232 (B), and determines the state when the variable control of the first special pattern corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is stopped (the stopping pattern of the first special pattern) (step S322).

in particular,
1. A 15R sure-variant jackpot in which an opening and closing pattern is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) to close the large prize opening 2005 after the large prize opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, thereby controlling the state to a 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005, and after the jackpot game state ends, the execution period of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is shortened from the normal state until the variable display of the special patterns is executed 77 times, and the state is controlled to a high probability time-saving state in which the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than normal. 2. a 5R time-saving jackpot in which the large prize opening 2005 is controlled to a 5R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005 by repeating an opening/closing pattern five times (five rounds) after the large prize opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, and the execution period of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is shortened from the normal period until the variable display of the special patterns is executed 77 times after the end of the jackpot game state;
3. A 2R jackpot in which the opening and closing pattern is repeated twice (2 rounds) to close the large prize opening 2005 after the large prize opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, and the state is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005; if the state is controlled to a time-saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the state is controlled to a time-saving state that is terminated if a jackpot does not occur within 77 times of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) being executed after the end of the jackpot game state; and if the state is controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the state is controlled to a normal state after the end of the jackpot game state.
The winner will be determined from one of the three types of jackpots.

In addition, if the jackpot flag is set in the second special pattern stopping pattern setting process, the type of jackpot is determined by comparing the second pattern random number read in the second special pattern normal processing with the jackpot pattern determination table shown in Figure 232 (B), and the mode when the variable control of the second special pattern corresponding to the determined type of jackpot (the stopping pattern of the second special pattern) is stopped is determined.
in particular,
1. A 15R sure-win jackpot in which an opening and closing pattern is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) to close the large prize opening 2005 after the large prize opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, thereby controlling the state to a 15R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005, and after the end of the big win game state, the execution period of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is shortened from the normal state until the variable display of the special patterns is executed 77 times, and the state is controlled to a high probability time-saving state in which the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than normal. 2. a 5R time-saving jackpot in which the large prize opening 2005 is controlled to a 5R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005 by repeating an opening/closing pattern five times (five rounds) after the large prize opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, and the execution period of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is shortened from the normal period until the variable display of the special patterns is executed 77 times after the end of the jackpot game state;
3. A 2R jackpot in which the opening and closing pattern is repeated twice (2 rounds) to close the large prize opening 2005 after the large prize opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, and the state is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which a game ball can (easily) enter the large prize opening 2005; if the state is controlled to a time-saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the state is controlled to a time-saving state that is terminated if a jackpot does not occur within 77 times of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) being executed after the end of the jackpot game state; and if the state is controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the state is controlled to a normal state after the end of the jackpot game state.
The winner will be determined from one of the three types of jackpots.

The jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number is assigned 8 judgment values in the case of a 15R sure jackpot, 100 judgment values in the case of a 5R time-limited jackpot, and 92 judgment values in the case of a 2R jackpot. In other words, when a lottery result based on the first special random number results in a jackpot, there is a 4% probability of a 15R jackpot, a 50% probability of a 5R jackpot, and a 46% probability of a 2R jackpot. Similarly, the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number is assigned 92 judgment values in the case of a 15R sure jackpot, a 100 judgment value in the case of a 5R time-limited jackpot, and 8 judgment values in the case of a 2R jackpot. That is, if a lottery result based on the second special random number indicates a jackpot, there is a 46% chance of a 15R jackpot, a 50% chance of a 5R jackpot, and a 4% chance of a 2R jackpot. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is configured so that the jackpot symbol determination table compared to the second symbol random number has a higher probability of determining a 15R jackpot than the jackpot symbol determination table compared to the first symbol random number, and the player is in a more favorable state when the second special symbol variable display based on the start winning entry into the second start opening 2004 is executed than the first special symbol variable display based on the start winning entry into the first start opening 2002.

In addition, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stopping pattern according to the type of jackpot is determined as the manner in which the first special pattern stops. Specifically, if a 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern, if a 5R jackpot is determined, the 5R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern, and if a 15R jackpot is determined, the 15R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern.

In addition, if the big win flag is not set in step S131, but the small win flag is set (step S324), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of small win by comparing the first pattern random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern with the small win pattern determination table shown in Figure 232 (C), and determines the state when the variable control of the first special pattern corresponding to the determined type of big win is stopped (the stopping pattern of the first special pattern) (step S325).

in particular,
1. An opening and closing pattern in which the special prize winning port 200 is opened for a short time (e.g., 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control the state to a small win game state in which a game ball can (easily) enter the special prize winning port 200, and when a game ball received in the special prize winning port 2006 is distributed to the V prize winning port 2007 and detected by the V prize winning port sensor 3003, the large prize winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (e.g., 29 seconds) or after the game ball is received in the large prize winning port 2005. When the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 balls have won, an opening and closing pattern is repeated 14 times to control the state to a 15R large prize opening in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005, and after the large prize opening state ends, the execution period of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is shortened more than usual until the variable display of the special patterns has been executed 77 times, and the state is controlled to a high probability time-saving state in which the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. 2. An opening and closing pattern in which the special feature winning port 200 is opened for a short time (e.g., 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control the game state to a small win state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the special feature winning port 200, and when the game ball received in the special feature winning port 2006 is distributed to the V winning port 2007 and detected by the V winning port sensor 3003, the large winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (e.g., 29 seconds) or after the game ball has entered the large winning port 2005. When the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 balls have won, an opening and closing pattern is repeated 14 times to control the state to a 15R big prize game state in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005, and if the state was controlled to a time-saving state before the start of the 15R big prize game state, the state is controlled to a time-saving state which is ended if a big prize is not obtained before 77 executions of the varying display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) after the end of the big prize game state, and if the state was controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the 15R big prize game state, the state is controlled to a normal state after the end of the big prize game state to determine one of two types of small prizes.

The small win pattern determination table compared to the first pattern random number has 200 judgment values allocated to it in the case of a first small win. In other words, if a lottery result based on the first special random number results in a small win, there is a 100% chance of a first small win, and no chance of a second small win. On the other hand, the small win pattern determination table compared to the second pattern random number has 20 judgment values allocated to it in the case of a first small win, and 180 judgment values allocated to it in the case of a second small win. In other words, if a lottery result based on the second special random number results in a small win, there is a 10% chance of a first small win, and a 90% chance of a second small win.

In addition, when the type of small win is determined, the stop pattern corresponding to the type of small win is determined as the state of the first special pattern when it stops. Specifically, if the first small win is determined, the first small win pattern is determined as the small win pattern, and if the second small win is determined, the second small win pattern is determined as the small win pattern.

If neither the big win flag nor the small win flag is set, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the symbol to be a losing symbol (step S327). After the determination process for the stopped symbol has been performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a judgment result notification command corresponding to each lottery result so that the lottery result (indicating the type of big win, small win, reach miss, or miss (which may also indicate the form of the stopped symbol of the first special symbol)) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as the process of step S328. Then, as the process of step S329, the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282), and this process ends.

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the performance display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and change pattern command (changingly displaying the left, center, and right decorative patterns and displaying them stationary in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → center decorative pattern (note that the left, center, and right decorative patterns may also be displayed synchronously as the same pattern and displayed stationary at the same time)). Specifically, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines the mode (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern displayed on the performance display device 1600 when the fluctuation stops to be a small win pattern ("final battle") if a small win or 2R jackpot is identified from the received judgment result notification command, a 5R time-limited jackpot pattern (a combination in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are the same even number pattern of "0" to "9") if a 5R time-limited jackpot is identified, and a 15R time-limited jackpot pattern (a combination in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are the same odd number pattern of "0" to "9") if a 15R special jackpot is identified. In addition, if a reach miss is identified, a miss pattern with a reach (a combination of the same left and right decorative patterns from "0" to "9" but with a different center decorative pattern; a reach miss pattern) is determined, and if a miss is identified, a miss pattern without a reach (a combination of the left, center, and right decorative patterns in which at least the left and right decorative patterns are different) is determined, and the display of the determined stop pattern is controlled on the performance display device 1600 when the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (when the game performance ends).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the time-saving state can be controlled after the jackpot game state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed up to 77 times, but the time-saving state may be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of jackpots after the transition to the time-saving state is controlled. Specifically, if the time-saving state is controlled after the jackpot game state and then a predetermined number of jackpots (for example, two) occur, the state may be controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the predetermined number of jackpot game states. Also, even if the number of jackpots that occur is less than the predetermined number, the state may be controlled to the non-time-saving state during the jackpot game state, and the time-saving state may be controlled again after the jackpot game state.

Figure 234 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 234, if the big win flag is set (step S341), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a big win corresponding to the type of big win determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S342); if the small win flag is set (step S343), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a small win corresponding to the type of small win determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S344); if the reach flag is set (step S345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) is selected (step S346); if neither the big win flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, if it is a normal miss (miss without executing the reach performance), the variation pattern table at the time of miss (not shown) is selected (step S347).

Then, the selected variation pattern table is compared with the variation random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol to determine the variation pattern to be executed (step S348), and a variation pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the determined variation pattern is to be started, to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (step S349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S350). As a result, the performance control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 for the variation time thus determined.

In this example, multiple types of variation pattern tables are provided for each judgment result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the pattern random number (first pattern random number, second pattern random number). In addition, multiple variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variable display control of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) is stored in a form associated with the variable random number, respectively, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a compares the selected variation pattern table among multiple types of variation pattern tables according to the judgment result based on the special random number and the pattern random number with the variable random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern, and obtains the variation time information associated with the read variable random number from this table to determine the variation pattern of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern). As a result, a lottery process is performed for the variation pattern of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern). The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, in this example, the variable pattern table during a reach is set to determine the type of reach performance to be executed by comparing a judgment value indicating which reach performance to execute with a variable random number. For example, among the reach performances, the super reach performance has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the normal reach performance, and when the super reach performance is executed, the player's expectation of a jackpot game state increases.

When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, the next step S351 is to determine whether the counter value of the time-saving counter, which sets the number of times the time-saving state continues, is "0". If the counter value is not "0", the time-saving counter is counted down (step S352), and then it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous time-saving counter is "0" (step S353). If the counter value is "0", a time-saving end flag is set (step S354) to indicate that the control of the time-saving state (time-saving control) is to be ended.

If the process in step S351 determines that the time-saving counter has a value of "0," or if the process in step S353 determines that the time-saving counter is not "0," the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol change process (step S283), the process ends.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table when a loss occurs, the fluctuation time information of the special pattern, which is set to about 1 second in the time-saving state, is associated with the special pattern random numbers (first special pattern, second special pattern), while the fluctuation time information of the special pattern, which is set to about 12 seconds in the non-time-saving state, is associated with the special pattern random numbers (first special pattern, second special pattern), so that the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern is set. In other words, the fluctuation pattern when a loss occurs selected in the time-saving state has the fluctuation time information of the special pattern set so that the time required for controlling the fluctuation display of the special pattern is extremely short compared to the fluctuation pattern when a loss occurs selected in the non-time-saving state.

Figure 235 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern change process (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol fluctuation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 235, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process for the fluctuation pattern (step S282) is set as the process of step S371. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery-selected fluctuation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol stop process (step S284), this process ends.

Figure 236 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stopping process (step S284).

When the first special pattern process flag indicates that the first special pattern stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 236, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs display control to display the stop pattern determined in the first special pattern stop pattern setting process on the first special pattern display of the functional display unit 1400 as the process of step S381, and sets a stop display command to instruct the performance display device 1600 to derive and display the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the first special pattern as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, when the time-saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time-saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time-saving flag (step S385). This ends the time-saving control (control of the time-saving state) and starts non-time-saving control (control of the normal state) when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) has been performed a predetermined number of times (77 times in this example).

When the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is to start (step S387), and sets the waiting time until the start of the jackpot game (the time to display the jackpot game start, etc.) in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process is also executed to set the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot in a jackpot counter indicating the remaining number of rounds. The jackpot counter is decremented by one for each round executed in the jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot counter becomes "0", the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the specified number of rounds has been executed and controls to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot control process described below, the pre-opening process (step S401) and the during-opening process (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the jackpot count counter reaches "0", and when the round ends in the during-opening process (step S402), the jackpot count counter is decremented by 1 and, based on the jackpot count reaching "0", the process moves to the post-opening process (step S403) to end the jackpot game.

Then, a jackpot execution flag is set to indicate that a jackpot game is being executed (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R sure-win jackpot start command, 5R time-limited jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R sure-win jackpot, 5R time-limited jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. As a result, the performance of the jackpot game corresponding to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the performance display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers, etc. Similarly, the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process also sets a jackpot start command (15R special jackpot start command, 5R time-limited jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) according to the type of jackpot (15R special jackpot, 5R time-limited jackpot, 2R jackpot).

In addition, the jackpot in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, is reset when the jackpot game ends, specifically when the post-opening large prize opening process (step S403) of the jackpot control process (step S235A) has completed the opening/closing control of the large prize opening 2005 according to the type of jackpot (for example, opening/closing control which repeats an opening/closing pattern two, five or fifteen times to close the large prize opening 2005 after it has been opened for a long period of time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that ten game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005) in accordance with the type of jackpot (all rounds that can be executed during the jackpot game). By resetting the jackpot execution flag, the jackpot control process (step S235A) is prevented from being executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric device control process (step S114), while the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

Also, when the big win flag is not set (step S386), if the small win flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a small win start command indicating that a small win game is to be started (step S391), and sets the waiting time until the start of the small win game (the time to display the fact that a small win game is to be started, etc.) in the interval timer (step S392). Then, a small win execution flag indicating that a small win game is being executed is set (step S393). The small win start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of small win. In step S391, a small win start command (first small win start command, second small win start command) according to the type of small win (first small win, second small win) is set. As a result, the presentation of the small win game according to the type of small win indicated by the small win start command is executed by the presentation display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, a small win start command (first small win start command, second small win start command) according to the type of small win (first small win, second small win) is set.

The small win execution flag, which indicates that a small win game is being executed, is reset when the small win game ends, specifically when the opening and closing control of the role winning opening 200 according to the type of small win is completed in the small win in-progress process (step S411) of the small win control process (step S236A) described later (for example, the opening and closing control in which the role winning opening 200 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is repeated twice). By resetting the small win execution flag, the small win control process (step S236A) is prevented from being executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric role control process (step S114), while the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are made executable.

In addition, if the small win flag is not set, i.e., if a miss occurs, the waiting time until the next variable display of the special symbol begins (the time during which the static special symbol is displayed) is set in the interval timer (step S394), and the process proceeds to step S395.

After executing the above steps S386 to S394, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 ends this process when it updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is transitioned to the initial value of the first special symbol normal processing (step S395).

Figure 237 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three processes is selectively executed depending on the jackpot process flag.

1. A pre-opening process (step S401) for waiting until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the game will move to the jackpot game state based on the fact that the state of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) when the variable display stops has become a jackpot symbol, or until the next round starts.
2. A process (step S402) during which the large prize opening 2005 is controlled to be open based on the state of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol stops becoming a large winning symbol, or the large prize opening 2005 is controlled to be open based on the start of the next round, and the large prize opening 2005 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005.
3. After the big win opening process (step S403), the process waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the big win game state has ended when all the rounds have ended.

The jackpot process flag is manipulated in the processing of step S42 to indicate that the pre-opening process (step S401) should be performed. In addition, in the processing during opening of the jackpot opening (step S402), at the start of a round in which the jackpot opening 2005 is controlled to be open, a jackpot round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and at the end of a round in which the jackpot opening 2005 is controlled to be closed, a jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game presentation corresponding to the number of rounds specified by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is executed by the presentation display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc.

[Rainbow-colored production]
Next, we will explain the rainbow effect that is executed when there is a high probability of a jackpot (for example, when a jackpot is reached (jackpot confirmed effect) or when the decorative pattern is in reach (reach notice)). The rainbow effect in this example is an effect in which a predetermined form (pattern, character, letter, etc.) is displayed on the performance display device 1600 using multiple colors, and then the display color in any display area of the performance display device 1600 is transitioned in a short period of time, and in conjunction with the transition of the display color on the performance display device 1600, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are illuminated in multiple light colors (at least two or more light colors), and the light colors are transitioned in a short period of time. Below, we will show how the performance display device 1600 and all of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are linked to create a rainbow performance, and how the display color of a predetermined form displayed on the performance display device 1600 and the emitted color of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are transitioned in a short period of time. However, it is also possible to transition the display color or emitted color in a short period of time using any one of the performance display device 1600, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, and the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, or any combination thereof.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 238(A), in this example, when a rainbow effect is executed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into five areas, the first display area a to the fifth display area e, and a rainbow effect display mode is displayed in which each area has a different color. Then, as the change time passes, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600 and the size and shape of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600 are changed in a short period of time.

In addition, the form of the rainbow effect displayed on the performance display device 1600 may be a form in which there is no information such as characters or letters on the entire area of the performance display device 1600, for example, a form in which the display area of the performance display device 1600 is divided into multiple areas by multiple striped lines as shown in FIG. 238(A) (in the example shown in FIG. 238(A), five display areas are the first display area a to the fifth display area e), or a form in which the display area of the performance display device 1600 is divided into multiple areas by multiple radial lines as shown in FIG. 238(B) (in the example shown in FIG. 238(B), five display areas are the first display area a to the sixth display area f), and the first display area a to the fifth display area are colored in a different color for each area, and the color of some or all of these multiple areas is changed in a short period of time. Alternatively, a plurality of characters (people, plants, animals, objects, landscapes, etc.) or letters may be colored in different colors for each character and/or each letter (for each block (composition) having a single meaning, such as a character, letter, or word) (for example, the letters "CHANCE" may be displayed with the first "C" in "white," the "H" in "yellow," the "A" in "green," the "N" in "blue," the second "C" in purple, and the "E" in red), or a single character or letter may be divided into a plurality of regions and colored in a different color for each region (for example, each petal of a flower may be displayed in a different color, or the skin of a person may be displayed in a striped pattern of multiple colors, or the letters "CHANCE" may be displayed in a first region and a second region and a third region and a fourth ... The character "CHANCE" is displayed in a striped pattern in multiple colors by dividing the character into six areas, area a (area surrounded by lines 1 and 2 in the character "CHANCE") through area f (area surrounded by lines 6 and 7 in the character "CHANCE") and displaying each area in a different color (for example, the first area a (area surrounded by lines 1 and 2 in the character "CHANCE") in "white," the second area b (area surrounded by lines 2 and 3 in the character "CHANCE") in "yellow," the third area c (area surrounded by lines 3 and 4 in the character "CHANCE") in "green," and the fourth area d (area surrounded by lines 4 and 5 in the character "CHANCE") in "blue"). , fifth region e (the region of the letters "CHANCE" surrounded by lines 5 and 6) in purple, and sixth region f (the region of the letters "CHANCE" surrounded by lines 6 and 7) in red), etc.), the color or shape of these forms, or both the color and shape of the forms, may be changed in a short period of time, or the size or shape of each of the multiple regions displayed in a specific color may be changed, or the display position may be changed (moved) to change the display color in any display region of the performance display device 1600 (regions where the background other than the letters "CHANCE" are displayed may not be displayed in the same way as the letters "CHANCE" (such as by changing the display in a short period of time).

As shown in Figures 239 and 240, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are divided into multiple groups, and the light emission can be controlled for each group. When the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are made to emit light in a predetermined light color for each group. The light emission color of each group is changed in a short period of time as the variable time passes.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 239, the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 are the first board illumination group, which is made up of multiple LEDs mounted on the back front left upper decorative board 3129 for illuminating and decorating the back front left upper logo decoration 3122, the second board illumination group, which is made up of multiple LEDs mounted on the back front left decorative board 3128 for illuminating and decorating the back front left logo decoration 3121, the back front left upper logo decoration 3122, and the back front left sub-decoration 3123, the third board illumination group, which is made up of multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower logo decorative board 3173 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower logo decoration 3167, the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower middle decoration 3161, the back front lower left inner decorative board 3169 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower left inner decoration 3163, and the back front lower left outer decoration 3164. The multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower left outer decorative board 3170 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, the back front lower right inner decorative board 3171 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, and the back front lower right outer decorative board 3172 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 are divided into a fourth board illumination group, the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower right decorative board 3152 for illuminating and decorating the back front right logo decoration 3141 are divided into a fifth board illumination group, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front upper right decorative board 3151 for illuminating and decorating the back front upper right logo decoration 3142 are divided into a sixth board illumination group, and when the rainbow effect is performed, the LEDs are controlled to emit light for each group, so that the LEDs in the same group are controlled to emit light of the same color, and the LEDs in different groups are controlled to emit light of different colors.

In addition, among the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 for creating a rainbow-colored effect, it is not limited to dividing multiple LEDs mounted on the same board into the same group and controlling the light emission for each group, but LEDs mounted on the same board may also be divided into different groups and the light emission may be controlled for each group. For example, the multiple LEDs mounted on the back-front-lower logo decoration board 3173 for lighting and decorating the back-front-lower logo decoration 3167 on which the letters "Queen" are applied may be divided into different groups for each letter and the lighting may be controlled for each group, or each letter may be divided into multiple regions by a predetermined virtual line and grouped together and the lighting may be controlled for each group (for example, the letters "Queen" may be divided into three regions, upper, middle, and lower, and the LEDs belonging to the upper region among the multiple LEDs mounted on the back-front-lower logo decoration board 3173 may be collectively controlled to light as an upper group, the LEDs belonging to the middle region among the multiple LEDs mounted on the back-front-lower logo decoration board 3173 may be collectively controlled to light as a middle group, and the LEDs belonging to the lower region among the multiple LEDs mounted on the back-front-lower logo decoration board 3173 may be collectively controlled to light as a lower group, and the letters "Queen" may be controlled to light in a striped pattern).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 240, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 are: a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 of the door frame top unit 450 constitutes frame lighting group A; a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420 constitutes frame lighting group B; a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame left side unit 420 and the dish left decorative board 273 provided behind the dish left decorative lens 272 constitutes frame lighting group C; and a plurality of LEDs 32 mounted on the performance operation unit peripheral decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit 300 constitutes frame lighting group D. 0a, the multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the circular outer button decorative board 355 and the LEDs 364a on the inner button decorative board 364 are divided into frame lighting group D, the multiple LEDs mounted on the lower right door frame decorative board 433 of the right door frame unit 430 and the dish right decorative board 278 provided behind the dish right decorative lens 277 are divided into frame lighting group E, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the upper right door frame decorative board 432 of the right door frame unit 430 are divided into frame lighting group F, and when the rainbow effect is performed, the LEDs are controlled to emit light for each group so that the LEDs in the same group emit light of the same color, and the LEDs in different groups emit light of different colors.

Figure 241 is a timing diagram showing an example of a rainbow effect. As described above, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variable pattern command from the main control board 1310, it starts a variable effect such as a variable display of decorative patterns in the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of the special pattern, and controls the illumination of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 in conjunction with the display of the effect display device 1600 (timing t0).

When the variation pattern command received from the main control board 1310 is a variation pattern that executes a rainbow-colored effect, when the time that has elapsed since the start of the display of the decorative pattern variations reaches a predetermined timing t1, among the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, at least the multiple LEDs 320a mounted on the outer decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit 300, the multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the circular outer button decorative board 355, the LEDs 364a on the button middle decorative board 364, and the rear upper movable decorative body All the lights are turned off except for the LEDs that light up and decorate the first decorative section 3211 on the upper rear where five 7-segment display sections 3210 are lined up on the left and right, and a button operation promotion performance is executed in which the performance display device 1600 displays a message (e.g., "Press the button!") to encourage the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300, and the lighting is controlled for the multiple LEDs 320a mounted on the performance operation section outer decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit 300, the multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the circular outer button decorative board 355, and the LED 364a on the inner button decorative board 364.

Then, at timing t2, when the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, or when the button effective period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed without the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed (timing t2), a rainbow performance display mode is displayed in which the display area of the performance display device 1600 is divided into the first display area a to the fifth display area e and the first display area a to the fifth display area e are each displayed in a different display color, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 are divided into the above-mentioned frame light-emitting group A to frame light-emitting group F, and the LEDs included in each group of frame light-emitting group A to frame light-emitting group F are made to emit light in a different light color for each group, and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 are divided into the above-mentioned first board light-emitting group to sixth board light-emitting group, and the LEDs included in each group are made to emit light in a different light color for each group.

In addition, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the performance display device 1600, the light emission colors of each of the frame light emission groups A to F, and the light emission colors of each of the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group are changed every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) (timing t2 to t100) as the variable time passes.

In this example, when the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed by the player at the timing t2, the button operation promotion performance being executed by the performance display device 1600 (in this example, the performance displaying "Press the button!") is terminated, the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner is reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the performance display device 1600, and "white" is displayed in the first display area a of the performance display device 1600, "yellow" in the second display area b, "green" in the third display area c, "blue" in the fourth display area d, and "purple" in the fifth display area e, and every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), the display area displaying "white" is changed to "yellow", the display area displaying "yellow" is changed to "green", the display area displaying "green" is changed to "blue", the display area displaying "blue" is changed to "purple", the display area displaying "purple" is changed to "red", and the display area displaying "red" is changed to "white".

When the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, the first board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5 is illuminated in "white", the second board light-emitting group in "yellow", the third board light-emitting group in "green", the fourth board light-emitting group in "blue", the fifth board light-emitting group in "purple", and the sixth board light-emitting group in "red", and every predetermined period (e.g. 0.1 seconds), the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "white" light is changed to "yellow", the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "yellow" light is changed to "green", the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "green" light is changed to "blue", the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "blue" light is changed to "purple", the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "purple" light is changed to "red", and the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "red" light is changed to "white".

Similarly, when the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, the frame light-emitting group A provided on the door frame 3 is illuminated in "white", the frame light-emitting group B in "yellow", the frame light-emitting group C in "green", the frame light-emitting group D in "blue", the frame light-emitting group E in "purple", and the frame light-emitting group F in "red", and every predetermined period (e.g. 0.1 seconds), the light-emitting color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "white" light is changed to "yellow", the light-emitting color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "yellow" light is changed to "green", the light-emitting color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "green" light is changed to "blue", the light-emitting color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "blue" light is changed to "purple", the light-emitting color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "purple" light is changed to "red", and the light-emitting color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "red" light is changed to "white".

In this way, by controlling the light emission color of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 to switch between multiple light emission colors in sequence in a short unit light emission time, it becomes possible to visually recognize that a rainbow of colors is being emitted, and a light emission performance with impact can be performed. In addition, by controlling the display of the performance display device 1600, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 in conjunction with each other, multiple colors can be displayed on the performance display device 1600, or the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 can be made to emit multiple colors, and the display colors and light emission colors can be switched in a short time to perform a performance with more impact than usual.

In this example, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the performance display device 1600, the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the frame light emission groups A to F provided on the door frame 3, and the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group provided on the game board 5 are changed regularly in a predetermined order for each display area or group. However, the display colors and light emission colors of any one or more combinations (or all) of the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the performance display device 1600, the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the frame light emission groups A to F provided on the door frame 3, and the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group provided on the game board 5 may be changed irregularly, and the remaining colors may be changed regularly.

In addition, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the performance display device 1600, the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the frame light emission groups A to F, and the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group are not limited to being changed in the same order, and any combination of one or more of the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the performance display device 1600, the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the frame light emission groups A to F, and the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group (or all of them) may be changed in a different order (for example, the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the frame light emission groups A to F may be changed in the order of "white → yellow → green → blue → purple → red → white → yellow → → ...", and the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group may be changed in the order of "red → purple → blue → green → yellow → white → red → purple → → ...").

Furthermore, any combination of one or more of the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the performance display device 1600, the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the frame light emission groups A to F, and the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group (or all of them) may be a combination of multiple colors with at least some colors being different (for example, the LEDs belonging to the frame light emission groups A to F may be controlled to emit light in one of the light emission colors "white", "yellow", "green", "blue", "purple", or "red", and the LEDs belonging to the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group may be controlled to emit light in one of the light emission colors "white", "orange", "yellow-green", "blue", "pink", or "red").

In addition, the display color of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the performance display device 1600, the light emission color of the LEDs belonging to the frame light emission groups A to F provided on the door frame 3, and the light emission color of the LEDs belonging to the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group provided on the game board 5 are not limited to being changed at the same timing (matching the timing of changing the color), but any combination of one or more of the timing of changing the display color of the performance display device 1600, the timing of changing the light emission color of the LEDs belonging to the frame light emission groups A to F provided on the door frame 3, and the timing of changing the light emission color of the LEDs belonging to the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group provided on the game board 5 (or all of them) may be changed at the same timing (for example, after 1 second), and the remaining ones may be changed at different timings (for example, every 1.5 seconds).

In addition, the period (predetermined period) until the display color of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the performance display device 1600, the light emission color of the LEDs belonging to the frame light emission group A to the frame light emission group F provided on the door frame 3, and the light emission color of the LEDs belonging to the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group provided on the game board 5 are changed again after being changed is not limited to being constant, but may be made to differ in part or in whole. For example, the display color and light emission color may be changed every second at odd timings (t1, t3, t5, t7, t9, t11, t99) among timings t2 to t100, and the display color and light emission color may be changed every two seconds at even timings (t2, t4, t6, t8, t10, t98, t100).

In this example, the LED that lights up and decorates the first decorative part 3211 on the back upper movable decorative body 3210, where the five 7-segment display parts are lined up on the left and right, is controlled to emit light prior to the rainbow color performance. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 241, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variable pattern command from the main control board 1310 and controls the first decorative part 3211 on the back upper movable decorative body 3210, where the five 7-segment display parts are lined up on the left and right, to an off state during the period from timing t0 to timing t1 when the performance display device 1600 starts a variable performance such as displaying the variable decorative pattern, until the button promotion performance is executed, and controls the first decorative part 3211 on the back upper movable decorative body 3210, where the five 7-segment display parts are lined up on the left and right, to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the rainbow color performance when the button promotion performance is executed at timing t1. In this example, when the button operation promotion performance starts (timing t1 to timing t2), the five 7-segment display units on the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 are controlled to emit red light, and the word "Hot!" is repeatedly displayed from right to left on the five 7-segment display units on the rear upper first decorative portion 3211.

In addition, when the button operation promotion performance is being executed, the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, or the button effective period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed without the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed, the button operation promotion performance ends, and then the rainbow performance starts (timing t2), the five 7-segment display units of the back upper first decorative portion 3211 are controlled to emit light so that the word "Rainbow Chance!" flows repeatedly from right to left until the rainbow performance ends (timing t2 to timing t100) while maintaining the red luminous color without changing the luminous color of the five 7-segment display units of the back upper first decorative portion 3211. As described above, in this example, the five 7-segment display units of the back upper first decorative portion 3211 are controlled to emit light in red. In addition, in the rainbow effect, the LEDs belonging to frame lighting groups A to F and the LEDs belonging to the first board lighting group to the sixth board lighting group are controlled to emit red light, the same as the five seven-segment display units on the rear upper first decorative portion 3211. Therefore, although the light emission color of the five seven-segment display units on the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is not changed, the player can recognize that light emission control related to the rainbow effect is being performed.

In addition, LEDs (decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted) belonging to frame lighting groups A to F provided on the door frame 3 and LEDs (decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted) belonging to board lighting groups 1 to 6 provided on the game board 5 are provided around the rear upper first decorative part 3211 where the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right, and when the button operation promotion performance ends, it is possible to give the impression that the luminous decoration is spreading around the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper first decorative part 3211, which are lit up in red, thereby enhancing the performance effect and increasing interest in the game.

In this example, even after the rainbow effect ends (timing t100 to t101), the light emission control continues without changing the light emission color of the five seven-segment display units of the back-upper first decorative unit 3211. Specifically, after the rainbow effect ends (timing t100), for example, the light emission control is performed so that the word "Reach!" repeatedly flows from right to left on the five seven-segment display units of the back-upper first decorative unit 3211 in response to the occurrence of a reach for the decorative pattern, or the light emission control is performed so that the word "Gekiatsu!" repeatedly flows from right to left on the five seven-segment display units of the back-upper first decorative unit 3211 during the reach effect when the reach for the decorative pattern occurs. In this example, the five seven-segment display units of the back-upper first decorative unit 3211 are controlled to be turned off based on the fact that the variable display of the decorative pattern has stopped. This allows the player to recognize that the variable effect has ended. In addition, the five 7-segment display units of the back upper first decorative portion 3211 may be controlled to be turned off when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the display of the decorative patterns has stopped, in which case the display of the moving letters in the five 7-segment display units of the back upper first decorative portion 3211 may be stopped when the display of the changing decorative patterns has stopped. In this case as well, the player can recognize that the changing performance has ended by the stop of the display of the moving letters in the five 7-segment display units of the back upper first decorative portion 3211.

In this way, the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 are controlled to emit light prior to the rainbow effect, and the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 continue to be controlled to emit light even after the rainbow effect ends. This means that anticipation for the start of the rainbow effect can be increased by the control of the emission of the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 that is executed in advance, and anticipation for a jackpot can be increased by the control of the emission of the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 even after the rainbow effect ends.

The light emission control of the five 7-segment display sections of the rear upper first decorative section 3211 must be started at least prior to the rainbow color performance and must continue to be executed after the rainbow color performance ends, and may be started at any timing between timing t0 when the varying display of the decorative pattern begins and timing t2 when the rainbow color performance begins (including when light emission control is started at timing t0), or may be ended at any timing between timing t100 when the rainbow color performance ends and timing t101 when the varying display of the decorative pattern stops (including when light emission control is stopped at timing t101). In addition, even if the display of the decorative pattern is stopped, if the display of the decorative pattern is started again before the specified period has elapsed, the five 7-segment display units of the first decorative part 3211 on the back rear may not be controlled to be turned off. In this case, when the display of the decorative pattern is stopped, the moving display of the characters on the five 7-segment display units of the first decorative part 3211 on the back rear may be stopped (timing t101), and when the display of the decorative pattern is started, the characters displayed on the five 7-segment display units of the first decorative part 3211 on the back rear may be updated and the moving display of the characters may be resumed from right to left on the five 7-segment display units of the first decorative part 3211 on the back rear may be updated (timing t0). Even in this case, the presence or absence of the display of the decorative pattern can be determined by the presence or absence of the moving display of the characters on the five 7-segment display units of the first decorative part 3211 on the back rear.

In addition, the manner in which the first decorative part 3211 on the rear upper side during the execution of the rainbow effect is displayed is not limited to the above, and for example, as a display supplementing the decorative pattern variation effect executed by the effect display device 1600, which becomes difficult to see due to the execution of the rainbow effect, the manner in which the pattern variation display is displayed may be displayed, or multiple LEDs may be controlled to blink in a predetermined lighting pattern to derive a manner according to the special lottery result after the execution of the rainbow effect (for example, when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed), or the number of LEDs that are lit may be changed when a predetermined increase or decrease condition is met, such as the player operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 during the execution of the variation effect. This makes it possible to avoid anxiety that the decorative pattern variation display is difficult to see due to the execution of the rainbow effect, and anxiety that the special lottery result is not being derived. In addition, the display of the decorative pattern on the effect display device 1600 may be made non-display during the execution of the rainbow effect, and in this case, the above-mentioned anxiety can also be avoided.

In the above example, the rainbow effect is started when the button operation prompting effect ends (when the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while the button operation prompting effect is being executed, or when the button effective period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed without the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed), but the rainbow effect may be started when a specified execution condition is met without the execution of the button operation prompting effect. For example, the rainbow effect may be started when the time elapsed after the start of the variable effect or the non-variable effect period during which no variable effect is being executed after the variable effect has ended has reached a predetermined period.

In this example, when the rainbow effect ends, decorative symbols are displayed in a reach state at a high rate (including those that do not result in a reach state (so-called false)) (timing t100). Then, when the rainbow effect ends, the rainbow effect display mode of the effect display device 1600 is erased to execute the reach effect, and the light emission control of the rainbow effect of the LEDs belonging to the 1st board light-emitting group to the 6th board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs belonging to the frame light-emitting group A to the frame light-emitting group F provided on the door frame 3 is terminated, and the light emission is controlled in a light-emitting mode according to the reach effect displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In this example, the rainbow effect is performed as a reach notice executed during the period from when the decorative pattern starts to change to when the reach state is displayed. The rainbow effect may be executed at a predetermined rate even when the decorative pattern is not in reach (the decorative pattern may not be in reach and become a jackpot, or the decorative pattern may not be in reach and become a miss), or when the decorative pattern is in reach but does not become a jackpot, or the rainbow effect may be executed only when the jackpot is definitely reached (as a jackpot confirmation effect). The timing of execution is also not limited to the reach notice, and the rainbow effect may be executed as a reach effect executed during the period from when the decorative pattern is in the reach state to when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, or it may be executed as a pre-reading notice or the like before the decorative pattern starts to change, or it may be executed regardless of the decorative pattern change display (for example, as a customer waiting demo effect executed when the decorative pattern change display does not start for a predetermined period).

As mentioned above, the rainbow effect is executed when there is a high probability of a jackpot, and is an important effect that raises the player's expectations. Therefore, in this example, the LED mounting surface of the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted is designed to have features that enhance the color of the LEDs that are controlled to emit light in the rainbow effect. Specifically, the game board 5 is provided with a number of decorative boards each mounting LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow color effect, namely, a back front upper left decorative board 3129 for illuminating and decorating the back front upper left logo decoration 3122, a back front left decorative board 3128 for illuminating and decorating the back front left logo decoration 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration 3122, and the back front left sub-decorative board 3123, a back front lower logo decorative board 3173 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower logo decoration 3167, a back front lower middle decorative board 3168 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower middle decorative board 3161, a back front lower left inner decorative board 3169 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower left inner decorative board 3163, and a back front lower left outer decorative board 3128 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower left outer decorative board 3164. The back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, the back front lower right inner decorative board 3171 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, the back front lower right outer decorative board 3172 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, the back front lower right decorative board 3152 for illuminating and decorating the back front right logo decoration part 3141, and the back front upper right decorative board 3151 for illuminating and decorating the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 have their surfaces coated with a white solder resist (protective material), and letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards are screen printed using an ink of a high brightness and saturation color (e.g., yellow). In other words, the surfaces of the multiple decorative boards mounted on the game board 5 and mounting LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow color effect are coated with white solder resist (protective material), which is the color with the highest reflective efficiency, and letters and symbols to prevent confusion between the mounted LEDs and other electronic components and other decorative boards are screen printed using ink of a high brightness and saturation color (e.g., yellow).

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a number of decorative boards that implement LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow color effect, namely, the door frame top central decorative board 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame left side unit 420, the dish left decorative board 273 provided behind the dish left decorative lens 272, and the door frame right side unit 420. The lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame of the knit 430, the right decorative board 278 provided behind the right decorative lens 277, and the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame of the door frame right side unit 430 are coated with a white solder resist (protective material) on the surface, and letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards are applied by screen printing using ink of a high brightness and saturation color (e.g., yellow). In other words, the multiple decorative boards mounted with LEDs that are provided on the door frame 3 and controlled to emit light in a rainbow color effect are coated with a white solder resist (protective material) on the surface, which is the color with the highest reflection efficiency, and letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards are applied by screen printing using ink of a high brightness and saturation color (e.g., yellow).

The first decorative board (not shown), on which LEDs are mounted to illuminate and decorate the first decorative part 3211 on the rear of the movable decorative body 3210, where the five seven-segment display parts are arranged side by side, is also coated with a white solder resist (protective material) on the surface, and letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards are applied by screen printing using ink of a high brightness and saturation color (e.g., yellow). However, while full-color LEDs are mounted on the multiple decorative boards on which LEDs that are provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3 and controlled to emit light in a rainbow color effect are mounted, the first decorative board on the rear of the upper part is mounted with LEDs that emit a single color (red in this example). Therefore, even if the LEDs installed on the game board 5 and door frame 3 are illuminated to create a rainbow effect, the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 do not change the luminous color, and only execute an effect in which letters, numbers, patterns, etc. are displayed on the five 7-segment display units with the same luminous color (red in this example). In other words, even if a rainbow effect is executed, the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 that display letters, numbers, patterns, etc. do not change the luminous color, so that the information such as letters, numbers, patterns, etc. displayed is displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to see, and the conveyance of incorrect information to the player is suppressed.

In this way, in this example, the LED mounting surface of the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted is coated with a white solder resist (protective material) to increase the reflection efficiency, so that even when multiple full-color LEDs are used to emit a wide variety of colors, all of the light can be reflected uniformly to produce vivid colors. The back front upper left logo decoration 3122, back front left logo decoration 3121, back front upper left logo decoration 3122, back front left sub-decoration 3123, back front lower logo decoration 3167, back front lower middle decoration 3161, and back front lower left inner decoration 3163 provided on the game board 5 are The back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, the back front right logo decorative part 3141, and the back front upper right logo decorative part 3142 can each be brightly illuminated and decorated, and the door frame top unit 450, the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame left side unit 420, the dish left decorative lens 272, the door frame right side unit 430, the dish right decorative lens 277, and the door frame right side unit 430 provided on the door frame 3 can each be brightly and vividly (clearly) illuminated and decorated, enhancing the presentation effect. In addition, the five 7-segment display parts of the back rear upper first decorative part 3211, which only emits light in a single color (red in this example), can also be brightly and vividly illuminated and decorated, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, by applying the letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards by screen printing using inks of high brightness and saturation (e.g., yellow), it is possible to make the reflection efficiency of the white solder resist (protective material) and the screen-printed letters and symbols closer to each other, and to make the reflection efficiency on the board surface nearly uniform. Therefore, even if multiple full-color LEDs are made to emit light in a wide variety of colors, all light can be reflected uniformly, and the occurrence of uneven light emission in the light-emitting decoration is suppressed, improving the presentation effect. In addition, since the contrast between the white solder resist (protective material) and the screen-printed letters and symbols can be reduced, the letters and symbols screen-printed on the surface of the decorative board are less noticeable when viewed through a lens covering the decorative board regardless of whether the LEDs are emitting light, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when a player is in a situation where he or she looks directly at the LED mounting surface of these decorative boards, as a result of visually recognizing information unrelated to the game. In addition, in conventional decorative substrates where letters and symbols are applied by screen printing using ink of low brightness and saturation (dark color) such as black, even if the letters and symbols are not clearly visible when viewed through the lens covering the decorative substrate, the lens itself may look dark and the appearance may be poor. However, by applying letters and symbols by screen printing using ink of high brightness and saturation, the lens appears brighter, and there is an effect of not compromising the appearance. As a color with high brightness and saturation, it is desirable to use yellow, which has the closest reflection efficiency to white, but the above-mentioned effect can be achieved with any color other than low brightness and saturation colors (dark colors, black, brown, etc.), such as yellow-green or light blue.

In the above example, all of the multiple decorative boards mounting LEDs whose light emission is controlled to produce a rainbow effect are coated on the surface with a white solder resist (protective material), but this is not limited to this. Some of the multiple decorative boards mounting LEDs whose light emission is controlled to produce a rainbow effect may be coated on the surface with a solder resist (protective material) other than white (e.g. green or black), or all or some of the multiple decorative boards mounting LEDs whose light emission is controlled to produce a rainbow effect may be coated only on the surface where the LEDs are mounted with a white solder resist (protective material), and the back surface where the LEDs are not mounted may be coated with a solder resist (protective material) other than white (e.g. green or black).

In addition, the letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted LEDs and other electronic components and other decorative boards are not limited to those applied by screen printing using ink of a high brightness or saturation color (e.g., yellow) on the LED mounting surface, but may be applied by screen printing using ink of a low brightness or saturation color (e.g., black) on the LED mounting surface for some of the multiple decorative boards that mount LEDs whose light emission is controlled in a rainbow effect, or for all or some of the multiple decorative boards that mount LEDs whose light emission is controlled in a rainbow effect, the letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted LEDs and other electronic components and other decorative boards may be formed as foil-punched letters (i.e., punched letters formed by creating letters with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed and punching out the copper foil around them), and the surface of the foil-punched letters may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material) that is coated on the mounting surface of the LEDs, or for some of the multiple decorative boards that mount LEDs whose light emission is controlled in a rainbow effect, the letters and symbols ... punching out the copper foil around the letters) and the surface of the foil-punched letters may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material) that is coated on the mounting surface of the LEDs. Alternatively, for all or some of the decorative boards having LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow color effect, the letters and symbols may be formed as white resist cut-out letters using a solder resist (after coating the entire LED mounting surface with white solder resist (first layer), the letters and symbols are masked to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards, and the entire area excluding these is again coated with white solder resist (second layer), so that the masked area, i.e., the letters and symbols, are formed as white resist cut-out letters), or, for all or some of the decorative boards having LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow color effect, the letters and symbols may be formed by screen printing using an ink of a predetermined color (not only colors with high brightness and saturation, but also colors with low brightness and saturation) on the back side where the LEDs are not mounted, or by forming them as foil cut-out letters, or by forming them as white resist cut-out letters using a white resist applied twice, etc., in order to avoid confusion with the electronic components such as LEDs mounted on the decorative board and other decorative boards. Even in these cases, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the reflection efficiency on the surface on which the LEDs are mounted, and furthermore, it is possible to achieve uniform light emission by making the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface approximately uniform, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

The LEDs mounted on the decorative board are electronic components whose packages are white or close to white (e.g., ivory, beige, cream), and only packaged LEDs are mounted on the LED mounting surface of these decorative boards, with no other electronic components being mounted. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the LED packaging also prevents a decrease in reflection efficiency, allowing uniform light emission on the LED mounting surface. In addition, in addition to a connector for connecting electrical wiring to the decorative board, one or more electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and circuits (e.g., constant current drive circuits) that control the light emission of multiple LEDs may be mounted on the non-LED mounting surface. The connector is an electronic component whose housing has a white color or a color close to white (e.g., ivory, beige, cream), the constant current drive circuit is an electronic component that is a surface mount type (SMD type) LED driver IC housed in an IC package that may have a black color as an integrated circuit, the resistor is a surface mount type (SMD type) electronic component having a black, blue, or white color, etc., and the capacitor is a surface mount type (SMD type) electronic component having a black, brown, gray, or white color, etc. In addition, in the above-mentioned decorative board, it is sufficient that at least electronic components having low brightness or saturation such as black, brown, or gray are mounted on the LED non-mounted surface without being mounted on the LED mounting surface, and electronic components having high brightness or saturation such as white or a color close to white (e.g., ivory, beige, cream) may be mounted on the LED mounting surface. This makes the electronic components mounted on the surface of the decorative board less noticeable when viewed through the lens that covers the decorative board, and it also makes it possible to suppress the decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface and make the reflection efficiency approximately uniform, thereby achieving highly efficient and uniform light emission and enhancing the presentation effect.

In this example, the light intensity adjustment button 228 is also operated when a rainbow effect is executed as a variable effect, and the light intensity of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 can be changed (adjusted) at the timing when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated. Specifically, when the button marked with the letter "+" of the two light intensity adjustment buttons 228 is pressed, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 immediately become brighter (increase in light intensity), and when the button marked with the letter "-" is pressed, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 immediately become dimmer (decrease in light intensity).

As shown in FIG. 241, when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of a variable effect that creates a rainbow effect, the light intensity of the multiple LEDs in the first board lighting group to the sixth board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting group A to the frame lighting group F that create the light decoration for the rainbow effect is immediately changed regardless of whether the LEDs are turned off or not, and the light emission of the multiple LEDs in the first board lighting group to the sixth board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting group A to the frame lighting group F is controlled with the changed light intensity. In this example, while the button operation promotion performance is being performed, the multiple LEDs of the first board light-emitting group to the sixth board light-emitting group, the multiple LEDs of the frame light-emitting groups A to C, and the multiple LEDs of the frame light-emitting groups E to F are controlled to be in an off state, but the multiple LEDs of the frame light-emitting group D (the multiple LEDs 320a mounted on the performance operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit 300, the multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the annular button outer decorative board 355, and the LED 364a of the button middle decorative board 364) are in a lit state, and when the player operates the light amount adjustment button 228, the multiple LEDs of the performance operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit 300 are in a lit state. Since the multiple LEDs 320a mounted on the control panel 20, the multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the annular button outer decorative board 355, and the LEDs 364a on the button inner decorative board 364 are immediately controlled to emit light at the changed light intensity, it is possible to adjust the light intensity of all the multiple LEDs in the first board light-emitting group to the sixth board light-emitting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame light-emitting group A to frame light-emitting group F while observing the changes in the light intensity of the multiple LEDs 320a mounted on the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit 300, the multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the annular button outer decorative board 355, and the LEDs 364a on the button inner decorative board 364.

On the other hand, for the LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative board provided on the game board 5, which is provided on the rear upper first decorative part 3211 where the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right, among the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, the light intensity is not changed (adjusted) even if the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the variable performance that produces the rainbow color effect (the light intensity is fixed). In this way, during the execution of the variable performance that executes the rainbow performance, the light amount (brightness) of the LEDs mounted on the back upper first decorative board provided on the back upper first decorative part 3211 where the five 7-segment display units of the back upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right cannot be changed (adjusted), and the light amount (brightness) is constant regardless of whether the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated or not. Therefore, it can be used as a standard for changing the light amount of the multiple LEDs of the 1st board light-emitting group to the 6th board light-emitting group and the multiple LEDs of the frame light-emitting group A to the frame light-emitting group F, and the difference between the brightness of these LEDs and the brightness of the LEDs mounted on the back upper first decorative board provided on the back upper first decorative part 3211 becomes clear, making it easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference. In addition, the LEDs mounted on the first decorative board on the upper back of the rear of the first decorative part 3211 on which the five 7-segment display parts of the movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side may be designed so that the light intensity cannot be changed (adjusted) at any time even if the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, regardless of whether or not a variable performance that produces a rainbow color performance is being performed.

In this example, the rear upper first decorative board on the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is provided with LEDs that are not adjustable in light amount (brightness) and do not perform rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration. Around the rear upper first decorative part 3211 on which the five 7-segment display units are arranged side by side, LEDs (decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted) belonging to frame light-emitting groups A to F provided on the door frame 3 and LEDs (decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted) belonging to the first board light-emitting group to the sixth board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5 are provided with LEDs whose light amount (brightness) can be adjusted. In this way, the LEDs that serve as the basis for adjusting the light amount (brightness) and the LEDs that change the light amount (brightness) are located close to each other, making it easy to compare the light amount (brightness) and adjust the light amount (brightness) to the player's preference.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 of this example executes the rainbow effect when there is a high probability of hitting the jackpot, but depending on the state of the gaming machine, there are situations in which the rainbow effect cannot be executed properly. In such cases, not only is it impossible to expect the effect of increasing interest due to the rainbow effect, but it may actually decrease interest in playing the game.

For example, if an abnormality occurs that makes it difficult to display the rainbow effect display mode in the effect display device 1600 (such as an abnormality where the LEDs (which may be some or all) of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 do not emit light, or an abnormality where the display is disturbed due to noise, etc.), or if an abnormality occurs that makes it difficult to control the light emission of the rainbow effect of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 (such as an abnormality where the LEDs (which may be some or all) of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 do not emit light, or an abnormality where the light emission mode is disturbed due to noise, etc.), it is not possible to realize a complete rainbow effect as designed using the display by the effect display device 1600 and the light emission by the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5, and an incomplete rainbow effect is executed in which some of the display by the effect display device 1600 and the light emission by the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 are missing.

By executing such an incomplete rainbow effect, not only is it impossible to hope for the exciting effect that a true rainbow effect would have, but it may also lead to the player perceiving that a different effect is being executed than the rainbow effect, which may lead to misunderstanding. In this example, every effort is made to prevent such misunderstanding from being caused to the player. An explanation will be given with reference to Figure 242.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if an abnormal state occurs at timing t6 during the execution of the rainbow effect, in which an abnormality occurs in which it is difficult to display the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600, an abnormality occurs in which it is difficult to control the light emission of the rainbow effect of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, or an abnormality occurs in which it is difficult to control the light emission of the rainbow effect of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, the light emission decoration of the rainbow effect using the multiple LEDs of the 1st board light-emitting group to the 6th board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs of the frame light-emitting group A to the frame light-emitting group F provided on the door frame 3 is terminated, the multiple LEDs of the 1st board light-emitting group to the 6th board light-emitting group are controlled to be turned off, and the multiple LEDs of the frame light-emitting group A to the frame light-emitting group F are controlled to be turned on in an abnormality notification light-emitting mode (in this example, a mode in which they flash red at maximum brightness (light amount)) to notify the occurrence of the abnormality.

As shown in FIG. 242, in the case where an abnormal state occurs at any timing between timing t0 and timing t2 before the start of the rainbow performance in the variable performance that executes the rainbow performance, in which an abnormality occurs in which it is difficult to display the rainbow performance display mode in the performance display device 1600, an abnormality in which it is difficult to control the light emission of the rainbow performance of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, or an abnormality in which it is difficult to control the light emission of the rainbow performance of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, even at timing t2 when the rainbow performance should normally start, the light emission decoration of the rainbow performance by the multiple LEDs of the first board light-emitting group to the sixth board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs of the frame light-emitting group A to the frame light-emitting group F provided on the door frame 3 is not started, and the multiple LEDs of the first board light-emitting group to the sixth board light-emitting group are controlled to be turned off, and the multiple LEDs of the frame light-emitting group A to the frame light-emitting group F are controlled to be light-emitting in an abnormality notification light-emitting mode (in this example, a mode in which they flash red at maximum brightness (light amount)) to notify the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, if the above-mentioned abnormality occurs at timing t6 during the execution of a variable performance that executes a rainbow-colored performance, the display of the rainbow-colored performance display mode on the performance display device 1600 is turned off and a display is displayed to notify the user that the abnormality has occurred. Similarly, if the above-mentioned abnormality occurs at any timing between timing t0 and timing t2 before the start of a rainbow-colored performance in a variable performance that executes a rainbow-colored performance, a display is displayed to notify the user that the abnormality has occurred without starting to display the rainbow-colored performance display mode on the performance display device 1600. Note that it is also possible to not execute some of the rainbow-colored performance display modes, and even in this case, the occurrence of the abnormality can be recognized by the display notifying the user that an abnormality has occurred.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if the rainbow effect cannot be achieved completely as designed using the display by the effect display device 1600 and the illumination by the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the rainbow effect is controlled so as not to be interrupted or started, making it possible to prevent the rainbow effect from being executed in an incomplete manner and preventing players from being misled.

In addition, even if an abnormal state occurs during the execution of the variable performance that executes the rainbow performance, the LEDs mounted on the first decorative board on the rear upper part 3211 on the rear upper first decorative part 3211 where the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right, the light emission control corresponding to the variable performance that executes the rainbow performance may be continued without being controlled to the off state or the abnormality notification light emission mode. In this case, even if the light emission decoration of the rainbow performance by the multiple LEDs of the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs of the frame light emission group A to the frame light emission group F provided on the door frame 3 does not end or start due to the occurrence of an abnormal state, or even if the multiple LEDs of the frame light emission group A to the frame light emission group F are controlled to emit light in the abnormality notification light emission mode, the player can be made to recognize that the variable performance is continuing, and the player is not given the mistaken impression that the variable performance has ended.

In addition, the first decorative portion 3211 on the rear upper part may be turned off or not depending on the type of abnormal condition (degree of urgency). For example, an error that has little effect on the game or the execution of the rainbow color effect (minor error: when the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 is detected (when the opening of the door frame 3 makes it difficult to visually recognize the light emitted by the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3) or when a vibration sensor (not shown) detects vibration of the game board 5 for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 30 seconds) (when an action such as hitting the pachinko machine 1 is performed) may be turned off. When the pachinko machine 1 vibrates, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the display of the performance display device 1600 become blurred and difficult to see, when a detection signal is input from the full tank detection sensor 154 (when it is detected that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls), when a detection signal is input from the ball out detection sensor 574 (when it is detected that there are no game balls in the guide passage 570a), etc., there are cases where cheating is taking place. For errors with a low probability of occurring, the LED mounted on the first decorative board on the rear upper back part 3211 is controlled to emit light without being turned off, while for errors with a significant impact on the execution of the game or rainbow color effects (serious errors: errors with a high probability of occurring when a cheating act is being performed, such as when a radio wave irradiation cheat is detected (when electromagnetic waves, etc. cause noise in the light emitted by the LEDs of various decorative boards on the door frame 3 or game board 5, or when noise is present in the display of the performance display device 1600), when a magnet cheat is detected, when the second start hole 2004 is not open and a detection signal is input from the second start hole sensor 2401, when the game is not in a big win game state or a small win game state and a detection signal is input from the big prize opening sensor 2402), the first decorative part on the rear upper back part 3211 is controlled to be turned off, so that the variable performance can be interrupted or ended even if it is being performed. This allows the control state of the first decorative part on the rear upper back part 3211 to be different depending on the degree of the error, making it possible to determine the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, whether or not to erase the rainbow performance display mode on the performance display device 1600 may be varied depending on the type of abnormal condition (degree of urgency). For example, for errors that have a small impact on the above-mentioned game or the execution of the rainbow performance, the display of the rainbow performance display mode on the performance display device 1600 is not erased, and a warning display (e.g., "Door open") is displayed so that it partially overlaps with the rainbow performance display mode, while for errors that have a significant impact on the above-mentioned game or the execution of the rainbow performance, the display of the rainbow performance display mode on the performance display device 1600 is erased and only a warning display (e.g., "Illegal winning has occurred!") is displayed, so that the display of the rainbow performance (rainbow performance display mode) is interrupted or ended even if the rainbow performance is being executed. This allows the display mode of the performance display device 1600 to be varied depending on the degree of the error, making it possible to determine the occurrence of an abnormality. In addition, when controlling to turn off the first upper back decorative portion 3211 and to erase the display of the rainbow color performance display mode on the performance display device 1600 in response to an error that has a significant impact on the execution of the above-mentioned game or rainbow color performance, the performance display of the rainbow color performance display mode, etc. on the performance display device 1600 may be terminated at a timing that is a predetermined period later than the timing of turning off the first upper back decorative portion 3211. In this case, the display content on the performance display device 1600 is prevented from being suddenly switched, and the display content can be switched while leaving an impression of the performance display of the rainbow color performance display mode, etc.

In addition, when an abnormal state occurs, depending on the type of the abnormal state (degree of urgency), any one or any combination of two or more (including all) of the following may be executed: a display on the performance display device 1600 notifying that an abnormal state has occurred, a notification by controlling the light emission of the LED provided on the door frame 3 in an error mode, and a notification by audio output that an abnormal state has occurred. For example, when a minor error that has little effect on the game occurs, any one or any combination of two of the following may be executed: a display on the performance display device 1600 notifying that an abnormal state has occurred, a notification by controlling the light emission of the LED provided on the door frame 3 in an error mode, and a notification by audio output that an abnormal state has occurred. When a serious error that has a serious effect on the game occurs, all of the following may be executed: a display on the performance display device 1600 notifying that an abnormal state has occurred, a notification by controlling the light emission of the LED provided on the door frame 3 in an error mode, and a notification by audio output that an abnormal state has occurred.

In this example, if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow effect (timing t6) or before the start of the rainbow effect (any timing between timing t0 and timing t2) in the variable effect that executes the rainbow effect, and the abnormality is resolved during the execution of the rainbow effect (before the rainbow effect ends) and the state returns to normal from the abnormal state, the abnormality notification light-up mode by the multiple LEDs of frame light-up group A to frame light-up group F ends, but the light-up decoration of the rainbow effect by the multiple LEDs of the first board light-up group to the sixth board light-up group provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs of frame light-up group A to frame light-up group F provided on the door frame 3 is not executed (the light-up decoration of the rainbow effect is not resumed (does not return to the light-up decoration of the rainbow effect)).

In other words, if the rainbow effect illumination decoration is terminated or not started due to an abnormality that causes the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 to have their light emission disturbed due to noise or the like, it is possible that noise will occur again even if it is determined that the abnormality has been resolved. In such a case, if the rainbow effect illumination decoration is controlled to resume in response to the resolution of the abnormality, there is a risk that the rainbow effect illumination decoration will be repeatedly executed and terminated, which may confuse the player. For this reason, in this example, if the rainbow effect illumination decoration is terminated or not started due to the occurrence of an abnormality, the rainbow effect illumination decoration will not be executed or resumed even if the abnormality is resolved during the execution period of the rainbow effect.

For example, as shown in FIG. 242, in a variable presentation that executes a rainbow presentation, if an abnormality occurs at timing t6 during the execution of the rainbow presentation due to noise or the like that makes it difficult to control the illumination of the rainbow presentation by any of the multiple LEDs of the first board illumination group to the sixth board illumination group provided on the game board 5 (timing t6), the illumination decoration of the rainbow presentation by the multiple LEDs of the first board illumination group to the sixth board illumination group provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs of the frame illumination group A to the frame illumination group F provided on the door frame 3 is terminated, the multiple LEDs of the first board illumination group to the sixth board illumination group are controlled to be turned off, and the multiple LEDs of the frame illumination group A to the frame illumination group F are controlled to be illuminated in an abnormality notification illumination mode that flashes red at maximum brightness (light amount).

At this time, the performance display device 1600 erases the rainbow performance display mode and displays a warning (such as "abnormality has occurred"), but the control data for the rainbow performance display mode is updated according to the scheduler. Also, the LED mounted on the first decorative board on the back upper part 3211 on the back upper part first decorative part 3211 where the five 7-segment display units of the back upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right does not perform the light-emitting decoration of the rainbow performance, but continues the light-emitting control corresponding to the variable performance that executes the rainbow performance, so that the player can be made aware that the variable performance is continuing even if the display of the rainbow performance display mode on the performance display device 1600 disappears. Also, a warning sound is output in the abnormal state described above, so that the player or game store staff can recognize that an abnormal state has occurred by listening to the warning sound.

In addition, when the noise or the like is eliminated at timing t10 after the abnormal state occurs and the state where the light emission control of the rainbow effect of the multiple LEDs of the first board light-emitting group to the sixth board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5 can be restored (timing t10), the effect display device 1600 ends the warning display and resumes displaying the rainbow effect display mode. As described above, even during the occurrence of an abnormal state, the control data for the rainbow effect display mode is updated according to the scheduler, and the rainbow effect display mode in the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a mode corresponding to the elapsed time after the start of the variable effect. The rainbow effect display mode corresponding to the timing t10 when the noise or the like is eliminated and the game board 5 returns to the abnormal state is displayed, instead of the rainbow effect display mode displayed at timing t6 when an abnormality occurred that made it difficult to control the light emission of the rainbow effect by any of the multiple LEDs of the first board light-emitting group to the sixth board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5.

In this example, even if the abnormality is resolved at timing t10, the abnormality notification light-emitting mode in which the multiple LEDs in frame light-emitting group A to frame light-emitting group F flash red at maximum brightness (light amount) continues for a certain period (e.g., 30 seconds) (timing t10 to timing t11). In other words, if an abnormality occurs again before the certain period has elapsed after the abnormality is resolved (timing t10), the abnormality notification light-emitting mode is not terminated at the timing when the certain period has elapsed, and the abnormality notification light-emitting mode continues even after the certain period has elapsed. This makes it easier for game store staff and the like to notice when abnormalities occur and are resolved frequently by continuously controlling the light-emitting mode to the abnormality notification light-emitting mode without repeatedly terminating and resuming the light-emitting control in the abnormality notification light-emitting mode each time.

In addition, if an abnormality occurs at timing t6, the multiple LEDs in the first board light-emitting group to the sixth board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5 are turned off (timing t6), and even if the abnormality is resolved at timing t10, the multiple LEDs in the first board light-emitting group to the sixth board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5 will continue to be turned off and will not return to the rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration (timing t10 to timing t100).

Similarly, if an abnormality occurs at timing t6, the multiple LEDs of frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F provided on the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light in an abnormality notification light mode (timing t6), and then if the abnormality is resolved at timing t10 and a certain period of time has passed without another abnormality occurring, the multiple LEDs of frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F provided on the door frame 3 are controlled to an off state and do not return to the rainbow-colored lighting decoration (timing t10 to timing t100).

Then, when the rainbow effect ends at timing t100 and the reach effect begins, the light emission control is executed for the multiple LEDs of the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs of the frame light emission group A to frame light emission group F provided on the door frame 3, causing them to emit light in a manner corresponding to the reach effect. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, even if an abnormality is resolved during the execution of the rainbow effect, the rainbow effect light emission decoration is not restored, so it is possible to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred during the execution of the rainbow effect. Note that if an abnormality occurs before the start of the rainbow effect and the abnormality is resolved before the start of the rainbow effect, the light emission decoration of the rainbow effect may be started at timing t2 when the rainbow effect is to be started.

In addition, the abnormality is not limited to starting light emission control of the multiple LEDs of the 1st board light-emitting group to the 6th board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs of the frame light-emitting group A to the frame light-emitting group F provided on the door frame 3 at the timing t100 when the rainbow effect ends (the timing when the effect executed next after the rainbow effect (in this example, the reach effect) starts) rather than at the timing t10 when the abnormality is resolved (not limited to starting light emission control at timing t100), but may also be when the variable effect executing the rainbow effect ends, when the variable effect executing the rainbow effect ends and the next variable effect starts, when the demo effect starts after the variable effect executing the rainbow effect ends without starting the next variable effect, etc. Even in this case, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred during the execution of the rainbow effect or during the execution of the variable effect.

In addition, if the abnormality is resolved after the variable performance that executes the rainbow effect has ended, at the timing when the abnormality is resolved, the light emission control of at least the multiple LEDs of the first board light-emitting group to the sixth board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5, among the multiple LEDs of the first board light-emitting group to the sixth board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs of the frame light-emitting group A to the frame light-emitting group F provided on the door frame 3, may be started. In this case, if the abnormality is resolved during the execution of a variable performance different from the variable performance in which the abnormality occurred, and if the rainbow effect is being executed at the timing when the abnormality is resolved, the light emission mode of the rainbow effect at that timing may be controlled.

In addition, when the abnormality is resolved, some of the LEDs may be returned to the rainbow effect illumination decoration. For example, when the abnormality is resolved, among the multiple LEDs of the first board illumination group to the sixth board illumination group provided on the game board 5, the multiple LEDs of the fourth board illumination group may be returned to the rainbow effect illumination decoration, and when a certain period of time has passed since the abnormality was resolved, among the multiple LEDs of the frame illumination group A to the frame illumination group F provided on the door frame 3, the frame illumination group A may be returned to the rainbow effect illumination decoration. In this case, the schedule data of the illumination control pattern of the LEDs that are not controlled to emit light during the occurrence of the abnormal state is advanced, and the illumination is resumed from the illumination mode at the time when the abnormality is resolved, not from the illumination mode at the time when the abnormality occurred. In this way, when the abnormality is resolved, some of the LEDs are returned to the rainbow effect illumination decoration and the other LEDs are turned off, so that it is possible to determine that an abnormality occurred during the execution of the rainbow effect because only some of the LEDs are performing the rainbow effect illumination decoration.

In addition, in this example, even during an abnormal state, the light intensity adjustment button 228 can be operated to change the light intensity (brightness) settings of the multiple LEDs in the first board lighting group through the sixth board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting group A through frame lighting group F.

However, in a normal state where no abnormality is occurring, the light intensity (brightness) of the multiple LEDs in the first board lighting group to the sixth board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting group A to the frame lighting group F is immediately changed when the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is accepted, and the light emission of the multiple LEDs in the first board lighting group to the sixth board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting group A to the frame lighting group F is controlled with the changed light intensity (brightness), whereas in a state where an abnormality is occurring, the light intensity (brightness) setting of the multiple LEDs in the first board lighting group to the sixth board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting group A to the frame lighting group F is changed with the timing when the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is accepted. Although the set value is changed, the multiple LEDs of the first board lighting group to the sixth board lighting group and the multiple LEDs of the frame lighting group A to the frame lighting group F do not emit light at the changed light intensity (brightness) at the timing when the operation is accepted, and after the abnormality is resolved, specifically, the multiple LEDs of the first board lighting group to the sixth board lighting group are controlled to emit light at the changed light intensity (brightness) after timing t10 when the door frame 3 is closed and the abnormality is resolved, and the multiple LEDs of the frame lighting group A to the frame lighting group F are controlled to emit light at the changed light intensity (brightness) after timing t11 when the door frame 3 is closed and the abnormality is resolved and a certain period of time has passed.

In this way, even if the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated when an abnormality occurs, the light amount (brightness) of the multiple LEDs in the 1st board light-emitting group to the 6th board light-emitting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame light-emitting group A to the frame light-emitting group F is not changed, which prevents the abnormality notification light-emitting mode from becoming difficult to notice. Furthermore, even when an abnormality occurs, the light amount (brightness) setting is changed by accepting the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228, and is reflected in the actual light-emitting state of the LEDs after the abnormality is resolved, so the player is not deprived of the opportunity to adjust the light amount (brightness) even when an abnormality occurs.

In this example, a first decorative board on the rear upper part is provided on which a plurality of LEDs that cannot adjust the amount of light (hereinafter referred to as a non-dimming LED group) that illuminate and decorate the above-mentioned 7-segment display unit are mounted, separate from a plurality of decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs that can adjust the amount of light (hereinafter referred to as a dimming LED group) belonging to the first board light-emitting group to the sixth board light-emitting group that are provided on the game board 5 are mounted. However, this is not limited to this, and LEDs for illuminating and decorating the 7-segment display unit may be mounted on part of any of the decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs belonging to the first board light-emitting group to the sixth board light-emitting group are mounted. In other words, a plurality of LEDs that can adjust the amount of light (dimming LED group) and a plurality of LEDs that cannot adjust the amount of light (non-dimming LED group) may be mounted on a single decorative board.

For example, a dimmable LED group consisting of multiple LEDs that can adjust the amount of light and a non-dimmable LED group consisting of multiple LEDs that cannot adjust the amount of light may be arranged with a predetermined distance between them. In this case, the distance between adjacent LEDs in the dimmable LED group and the distance between adjacent LEDs in the non-dimmable LED group may be arranged to be closer than the distance between the dimmable LED group and the non-dimmable LED group. This configuration makes it easy to distinguish between the dimmable LED group and the non-dimmable LED group, and makes it easy to compare the brightness of LEDs that can adjust the amount of light and LEDs that cannot adjust the amount of light.

In addition, resin packages of the same or very similar color (white in this example) may be used for the LEDs with adjustable light intensity (hereafter referred to as dimmable LEDs) and the LEDs with non-adjustable light intensity (hereafter referred to as non-dimmable LEDs), or in addition, the same type of package may be used. This allows the dimmable LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs to emit light under similar conditions, so that by comparing the brightness of the dimmable LEDs with that of the non-dimmable LEDs, the difference between the brightness of the dimmable LEDs after brightness adjustment and the brightness of the non-dimmable LEDs becomes clear, making it easy for the player to adjust the brightness to their liking.

In addition, a plurality of through holes may be formed between the dimming LED group and the non-dimming LED group. In the area of the surface of the decorative board where the through holes are formed, the light emitted from the LEDs is not reflected and leaks to the back side (non-LED mounting surface) of the decorative board. Therefore, by forming through holes between the dimming LED group and the non-dimming LED group, the interference between the light from the dimming LEDs and the light from the non-dimming LEDs is suppressed, and the light from each LED can be individually viewed. The brightness can be adjusted based on the light from the dimming LED group only, and the light from the non-dimming LED group only can be used as an index for brightness adjustment, which increases the accuracy of the comparison and makes it easier to adjust the brightness to the player's preference. Also, by forming a through hole with an outer diameter smaller than that of the dimmable LED and non-dimmable LED (the ratio (area) of one through hole to the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the decorative board ≦ the ratio (area) of one dimmable LED or one non-dimmable LED), it is possible to prevent the light of the dimmable LED and non-dimmable LED from leaking more than necessary from the through hole to the back surface (LED non-mounted surface) of the decorative board. In this case, by making the number of through holes formed between the dimmable LED and non-dimmable LED greater than the number of dimmable LEDs or non-dimmable LEDs mounted on the side of the through hole, it is possible to suppress the reflection and interference of the light emitted from each of the dimmable LED and non-dimmable LED, while preventing the brightness of the dimmable LED and non-dimmable LED from being reduced more than necessary.

In addition, a three-dimensional object (such as an electronic component or structure having a predetermined thickness) may be provided on the LED mounting surface (front surface) of the decorative board to separate the dimming LED group from the non-dimming LED group in part or in whole, thereby suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimming LEDs and non-dimming LEDs. For example, electronic components mounted on a circuit board such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, ICs, and LED drivers may be mounted between the dimming LEDs and non-dimming LEDs on the LED mounting surface (front surface) of the decorative board. In this way, by providing electronic components having a predetermined thickness and mounted so as to protrude from the LED mounting surface (front surface) of the decorative board between the dimming LEDs and non-dimming LEDs, it is possible to separate the dimming LEDs and non-dimming LEDs in part or in whole, thereby suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimming LEDs and non-dimming LEDs.

The electronic components provided between the dimmable LED and the non-dimmable LED may have a dark color (black, gray, green, blue, brown, etc.) with low reflection efficiency (or may have some parts that are different from the dark color (e.g., a metallic color such as silver or transparent parts, etc.)). This can further enhance the effect of suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimmable LED and the non-dimmable LED.

In the above example, the upper rear first decorative part 3211, in which the five 7-segment display parts of the upper rear movable decorative body 3210 on which the upper rear first decorative board on which the non-dimming LEDs are mounted are arranged, is formed to a size that extends to the left and right ends of the performance display device 1600, making it easy for players to notice the letters, numbers, pictures, etc. displayed by the 7-segment display part of the upper rear first decorative part 3211, but it is also possible to execute a performance that is difficult for players to notice by forming the upper rear first decorative part 3211 with, for example, a single 7-segment display part, or by providing a decorative board that is smaller than the other decorative boards on which the LEDs are mounted. In this case, players who notice the presence of the 7-segment display part can be given further enjoyment by the performance executed by the 7-segment display part in addition to the performance by the performance display device 1600, etc. In addition, if the surface of a single decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted is configured to be divided into an area where multiple LEDs that illuminate and decorate the decorative body covering the decorative board are mounted, and an area where multiple LEDs that illuminate and decorate a 7-segment display unit provided in part of the decorative body are mounted, the area where multiple LEDs that illuminate and decorate the 7-segment display unit provided in part of the decorative body are mounted may be narrower than the area where multiple LEDs that illuminate and decorate the decorative body covering the decorative board are mounted.

In this way, the non-dimmable LEDs that serve as the basis for adjusting the brightness and the dimmable LEDs that change the brightness are mounted on a single decorative board and arranged close to each other, making it possible to arrange the dimmable LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs closer together than if they were mounted on different boards, making it easier to compare the brightness of the dimmable LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs.

In the above example, the LEDs that perform the rainbow effect illumination decoration, specifically the LEDs included in the first board illumination group to the sixth board illumination group and the LEDs included in the frame illumination group A to frame illumination group F, are allowed to have their brightness adjusted, while the LEDs that do not perform the rainbow effect illumination decoration, specifically the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear upper first decorative part 3211 where the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right, are shown to have their brightness adjustable. However, in addition to the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear upper first decorative part 3211 on the door frame 3 or the game board 5, one or more non-rainbow light-emitting LEDs that do not perform the rainbow effect illumination decoration may be provided. When the rainbow effect is executed, these non-rainbow light-emitting LEDs are controlled to be turned off or controlled to perform illumination decoration different from the rainbow effect illumination decoration, and although they do not perform the rainbow effect illumination decoration, they are allowed to have their brightness adjusted, unlike the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear upper first decorative part 3211. In this way, the results of brightness adjustments made during the execution of the rainbow effect can also be reflected in non-rainbow LEDs that do not perform rainbow effect lighting decorations, so these non-rainbow LEDs can also be made to emit light at the player's preferred brightness (light intensity) in the lighting decoration that is performed after the rainbow effect.

In addition, when the above-mentioned dimmable LEDs are performing rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration, the light color changes (flickers) in a short time, making it difficult to determine the exact light amount (brightness) based on the light from these dimmable LEDs. Therefore, even if the player intends to adjust the light amount (brightness) to his/her preference, the light amount (brightness) may actually be set to a different light amount (brightness) from the player's preference. As described above, when a non-rainbow-colored LED that does not perform rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration even during rainbow-colored performance is provided to perform a light-emitting decoration different from the rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration, when adjusting the light amount (brightness) of the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the light amount (brightness) can be accurately determined based on the light from the non-rainbow-colored LED, and the light amount (brightness) can be easily adjusted to the player's preference.

The lighting decoration for the non-rainbow LEDs during rainbow effects can be anything that switches lighting color at a longer unit lighting time than the LEDs that perform rainbow effects, specifically the LEDs included in the first board lighting group to the sixth board lighting group and the LEDs included in frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F, or that performs lighting decoration with the same lighting color without switching lighting colors.

In addition, the light emission of the non-rainbow light-emitting LED (which may be a full-color LED controlled to emit a different light color from the light color of the five 7-segment display units of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210, or a monochromatic LED that emits light in a different light color from the light color of the five 7-segment display units of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210) may be controlled to emit light in a different light color from the light color of the five 7-segment display units of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210, on which the first decorative board on the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 on which the above-mentioned light amount (brightness) adjustment is impossible and non-dimming LEDs that do not perform rainbow light-emitting decoration are mounted, and in this case, it is easy to distinguish between the non-rainbow light-emitting LED and the non-dimming LED, and it is easy to compare the light amount (brightness) when adjusting the light amount (brightness), so that the light amount (brightness) can be easily adjusted to the player's preference.

In the above example, the surface of the first decorative board on the back of which the monochromatic LEDs (non-dimming LEDs) that illuminate and decorate the first decorative part 3211 on the back of which the five 7-segment display parts of the movable decorative body 3210 on the back of which are arranged side by side, and which does not perform rainbow-colored illumination, i.e., illumination that changes the color of the light in a short time, are mounted is also coated with a white solder resist (protective material) with the highest reflection efficiency, and letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards are applied by screen printing using ink of a high brightness and saturation color (for example, a color with a reflection efficiency similar to white, such as yellow) to increase the reflection efficiency of the surface on which the LEDs of the first decorative board on the back of which are mounted. In addition to this, or instead of this, it is also possible to suppress the interference of light on the surface of the first decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted, to make the light emitted by each LED clearer, and to make the letters, numbers, patterns, etc. displayed on the segment display part more clearly displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 243(A), the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 contains a rear-upper first decorative board on which LEDs are mounted to illuminate and decorate the rear-upper first decorative part 3211, in which the five 7-segment display parts of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side, and a rear-upper second decorative board on which LEDs are mounted to illuminate and decorate the rear-upper second decorative part 3212, which is provided on the rear side of the rear-upper first decorative part 3211 and in which a row of specified characters (here, "JACKPOT") are arranged. The rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 is formed to a specified thickness (approximately 10 mm in this example) from an opaque (white in this example) resin or the like that does not have translucency except for the five 7-segment display parts of the rear-upper first decorative part 3211 and the specified characters of the rear-upper second decorative part 3212.

Also, as shown in FIG. 243(B), the 7-segment display section of the first upper rear decorative part 3211 has cylindrical through-holes corresponding to each segment, and the surface on which the multiple LEDs of the first upper rear decorative board are mounted is partitioned so that one or more LEDs are arranged within the through-holes. Also, the second upper rear decorative part 3212 has cylindrical through-holes corresponding to each of the specified characters (here, "JACKPOT"), and the surface on which the multiple LEDs of the second upper rear decorative board are mounted is partitioned so that one or more LEDs are arranged within the through-holes.

The movable decorative body 3210 is formed so as to be divided into two decorative bodies, a front and a back, and the inside of one decorative body is closely attached to the surface of the first decorative board on which the multiple LEDs are mounted, and the inside of the other decorative body is closely attached to the surface of the second decorative board on which the multiple LEDs are mounted, and the two decorative bodies divided into the front and back are assembled (fixed) to form the movable decorative body 3210.

This prevents light emitted from the LEDs arranged in the through-holes corresponding to each segment of the seven-segment display unit of the rear upper first decorative part 3211 from leaking into the through-holes corresponding to other segments, thereby suppressing interference of light emitted from each of the multiple segments of the seven-segment display unit, making it easier to individually identify the information (letters, numbers, pictures, etc.) indicated by each of the multiple segments of the seven-segment display unit of the rear upper first decorative part 3211. In addition, since the light from the LEDs arranged in the through-holes can be emitted from each segment of the seven-segment display unit of the rear upper first decorative part 3211 without leaking outside the through-hole, a decrease in the amount of light (brightness) within the through-hole can be suppressed.

Similarly, the light irradiated from the LEDs arranged in the through-holes corresponding to each of the predetermined characters (here, "JACKPOT") of the back upper second decorative portion 3212 is prevented from leaking into the through-holes corresponding to other characters, and interference of the light irradiated from each of the predetermined characters is suppressed, making it easier to individually identify each of the predetermined characters of the back upper second decorative portion 3212. Also, the light from the LEDs arranged in the through-holes can be emitted from each of the predetermined characters (here, "JACKPOT") of the back upper second decorative portion 3212 without leaking outside the through-hole, thereby suppressing a decrease in the amount of light (brightness) within the through-hole.

In addition to the structure of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 described above, or separately from the structure of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 described above (without adopting the structure of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210), the surfaces on which the multiple LEDs are mounted, the rear-upper first decorative board on which LEDs are mounted that illuminate and decorate the rear-upper first decorative part 3211 in which the five 7-segment display units of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged left and right, and the rear-upper second decorative board on which LEDs are mounted that illuminate and decorate the rear-upper second decorative part 3212 in which a predetermined character (here, "JACKPOT") is arranged in a row, may be coated with a solder resist (protective material) of a dark color (black, purple, navy blue, dark green, etc.) with low reflection efficiency instead of a white solder resist (protective material). In this case, the reflection efficiency decreases on the LED mounting surface of the first decorative board on the upper back rear where the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the first decorative part 3211 are mounted, and on the LED mounting surface of the second decorative board on the upper back rear where the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the second decorative part 3212 are mounted, but the light from each of the through holes can be made to emit light independently without interfering with each other, so letters, numbers, patterns, etc. displayed by the five 7-segment display parts of the first decorative part 3211 and specified letters on the second decorative part 3212 can be clearly displayed, and this information can be accurately conveyed to the player.

In addition, even if the LED mounting surface of the first decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the first decorative part 3211 are mounted, and the LED mounting surface of the second decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the second decorative part 3212 are mounted, are coated with a dark colored solder resist (protective material), the non-LED mounting surface of the first decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the first decorative part 3211 are not mounted, and the non-LED mounting surface of the second decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the second decorative part 3212 are mounted may be coated with a solder resist (protective material) of a color other than dark (for example, white or green). In addition, the LED mounting surface of the first decorative board on the rear upper back where the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the first decorative part 3211 are mounted, and the LED mounting surface of the second decorative board on the rear upper back where the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the second decorative part 3212 are mounted may be coated with white solder resist (protective material) only on the inner area of the through-hole, or a white coating film may be formed by silk printing or the like, and the outer area of the through-hole may be coated with dark solder resist (protective material) or a dark coating film may be formed by silk printing or the like. In this case, the reflection efficiency of the board surface is reduced to suppress the interference of light from each through-hole, while a high proportion of the light irradiated from the LEDs arranged within the through-holes is reflected, allowing each segment of the five 7-segment display parts of the movable decorative body 3210 on the rear upper back and each of the specified characters (here, "JACKPOT") on the second decorative part 3212 to be brightly illuminated and decorated.

In addition, the surface (part where the through-hole is formed) of the upper rear movable decorative body 3210 corresponding to each segment of the five 7-segment display parts of the upper rear movable decorative body 3210 and the predetermined characters (here, "JACKPOT") of the upper rear second decorative part 3212 may be provided with a cover body formed of a translucent film (opaque frosted glass in this example) or a translucent resin (red in this example, etc.) having translucency. This prevents the light from the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the upper rear first decorative part 3211 and the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the upper rear second decorative part 3212 from being looked at directly, so that the player does not feel dazzled. In addition, by making the above film or cover body surface-emitting, the light source can be made less noticeable when the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the upper rear first decorative part 3211 and the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the upper rear second decorative part 3212 emit light.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface of the first decorative board on the upper rear back, on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the first decorative part 3211 are mounted, and on the LED mounting surface of the second decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the second decorative part 3212 are mounted, letters and symbols are applied by screen printing using ink of a bright and saturated color (e.g., yellow) to avoid confusion with electronic components such as LEDs mounted on other decorative boards. In addition, for one or both of the LED mounting surface of the first decorative board on the upper rear back, on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the first decorative part 3211 are mounted, and the LED mounting surface of the second decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the second decorative part 3212 are mounted, ink of a low brightness and saturation color (e.g., green, etc.) may be applied by screen printing to the LED mounting surface, or letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards may be formed as foil-cut letters (i.e., cut-out letters formed by creating letters with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and cutting out the copper foil around them), and the surface of this foil-cut letter may be coated with a dark-colored solder resist (protective material) that is coated on the mounting surface of the LEDs, or ink of a predetermined color (not limited to colors with high brightness and saturation, but including colors with low brightness and saturation) may be applied to the non-LED mounted surface (rear surface) by screen printing. In this case, too, it is possible to suppress optical interference between the LED mounting surface of the first decorative board on the rear upper side, on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the first decorative part 3211 are mounted, and the LED mounting surface of the second decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the second decorative part 3212 are mounted.

In addition, the first decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the first decorative part 3211 are mounted, and the second decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the second decorative part 3212 are mounted, may be firmly attached to the movable decorative body 3210 (difficult to remove, irreversible attachment state that cannot be removed without destroying at least a part of the movable decorative body 3210, the first decorative board, or the second decorative board by welding, etc.), so that the LED mounting surfaces of the first decorative board and the second decorative board can be protected by the movable decorative body 3210, and therefore malfunctions of the LEDs mounted on the first decorative board or the second decorative board due to tampering, etc. can be suppressed.

When mounting LEDs for illuminating and decorating a 7-segment display on a part of one of a plurality of decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs belonging to the first board light-emitting group to the sixth board light-emitting group are mounted, that is, when mounting a plurality of LEDs with adjustable light intensity (dimmable LED group) and a plurality of LEDs with non-adjustable light intensity (non-dimmable LED group) on a single decorative board, a decorative body in which the above-mentioned through-hole is formed on the LED mounting surface of the non-dimmable LED group may be provided. In this case, the effect of suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimmable LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs is further enhanced.

As described above, the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 display information such as letters, numbers, and pictures, and can play an important role in the game presentation, such as displaying important information. In addition, they may be directly controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this case, the occurrence of malfunctions (such as content different from the content that is originally to be displayed being displayed) can be suppressed compared to when the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and it is possible to prevent disadvantage to players, etc.

In addition, while the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 performs peripheral control routine processing approximately every 33.3 ms, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs main control side timer interrupt processing every 4 ms. Therefore, the display contents of the back upper first decorative portion 3211 and the back upper second decorative portion 3212 can be updated at a shorter interval than when the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the back upper first decorative portion 3211 and the back upper second decorative portion 3212 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. Even if a malfunction occurs and content different from the content that should be displayed on the back upper first decorative portion 3211 and the back upper second decorative portion 3212 is displayed, the display contents can be updated immediately (after 4 ms) and changed to the original display content, and no disadvantage is caused to players, etc. In other words, for the rear upper first decorative part 3211 and the rear upper second decorative part 3212, which display important information (high importance), a control signal is output at a shorter period to update the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means (LED) than for the illuminating decorative parts that do not display important information (low importance).Therefore, even if a problem occurs with the display content of the rear upper first decorative part 3211 or the rear upper second decorative part 3212, which display important information, the display content can be immediately changed to normal, thereby preventing content different from the intended content from being displayed, causing inconvenience to the player. In addition, if the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to control the rear upper first decorative part 3211 and the rear upper second decorative part 3212 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, a communication error may occur between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, causing a problem with the information displayed by the rear upper first decorative part 3211 and the rear upper second decorative part 3212. However, in this example, the main control board 1310 directly controls the rear upper first decorative part 3211 and the rear upper second decorative part 3212, making it less likely that a problem will occur in the information displayed by the rear upper first decorative part 3211 and the rear upper second decorative part 3212 compared to when the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the rear upper first decorative part 3211 and the rear upper second decorative part 3212, and preventing disadvantage to the player.

[Rainbow color effect variation 1]
Next, a modified example of the rainbow effect described above will be explained. In this example, the player can determine the probability of winning by pressing the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 during the execution of the rainbow effect. Note that in the modified example 1, only the parts that are different from the above embodiment will be explained, and a duplicate explanation will not be given.

Specifically, when a rainbow effect is being executed as shown in FIG. 244, if a variable display with a high probability of a jackpot is being executed, such as a decorative pattern becoming a reach after the rainbow effect, even if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed at timing t6 during the execution of the rainbow effect, the rainbow effect will continue to be executed until timing t100 without terminating the rainbow effect.

On the other hand, when a rainbow effect is being executed as shown in FIG. 245, unless a variable display with a high probability of a jackpot is being executed, such as when the decorative pattern does not reach a reach after the rainbow effect, if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed at timing t6 during the execution of the rainbow effect, the rainbow effect being executed is terminated at timing t6 when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed, a predetermined performance mode (such as a variable display of decorative patterns) is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (which may be to turn off some or all of them).

This makes it possible to determine the possibility of a jackpot when the rainbow effect is being performed, and encourages the player to actively press the press operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 during the period from timing t2 to timing t100 when the rainbow effect is being performed. Also, if the player presses the press operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 during the period from timing t2 to timing t100 when the rainbow effect is being performed and determines that there is a high probability of a jackpot, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, after the rainbow effect being executed is terminated based on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed during execution of the rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 may be configured to execute an effect display unrelated to the rainbow effect. This allows the player to notice that the rainbow effect has ended and to reliably recognize that the expectation of a big win is low. In addition, when an effect display unrelated to the rainbow effect is executed on the effect display device 1600, the effect display unrelated to the rainbow effect may also be terminated in response to the operation of the effect operation unit 300, or the effect display unrelated to the rainbow effect may be terminated if the effect operation unit 300 is not operated for a predetermined period during the execution of the effect display unrelated to the rainbow effect. In addition, after the effect display unrelated to the rainbow effect being executed on the effect display device 1600 is terminated, if a predetermined start condition is met (for example, if the effect operation unit 300 is not operated for a predetermined period, or if the non-variable effect period in which the variable effect is not being executed reaches a predetermined period, etc.), the rainbow effect may be started again. This imprints the light emission and display modes of the rainbow effect in the player's mind, and allows the player to operate the effect operation unit 300 with the expectation that if a rainbow effect is executed in a variable effect that is executed thereafter, a variable effect with a high probability of winning is being executed.

In addition, in FIG. 245, when the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed while the rainbow performance is being performed, the rainbow performance illumination decoration of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 ends, and then the performance display of the rainbow performance display mode, etc. on the performance display device 1600 ends at a timing that is delayed by a predetermined period from the timing when the illumination decoration of the rainbow performance ends. This prevents the display content on the performance display device 1600 from being suddenly switched, and makes it possible to switch the display content while leaving behind the afterglow of the performance display of the rainbow performance display mode, etc.

In addition, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during the execution of the rainbow performance, a predetermined sound may be output. In this case, after outputting the predetermined sound based on the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed, the performance display such as the rainbow performance display mode in the performance display device 1600 may be terminated at a timing delayed by a predetermined period (the same period as the predetermined period from the timing of the end of the rainbow performance light decoration if the predetermined sound is output at the same timing as the timing of the end of the rainbow performance light decoration, and a period different from the predetermined period from the timing of the end of the rainbow performance light decoration if the predetermined sound is output at a different timing from the timing of the end of the rainbow performance light decoration) from the timing at which the predetermined sound was output. In this case, too, the display content in the performance display device 1600 is prevented from being suddenly switched, and the display content can be switched while leaving the impression of the performance display such as the rainbow performance display mode.

In addition, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during the execution of the rainbow performance, the rainbow performance illumination decoration of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 may be terminated, and then the rainbow performance illumination decoration of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 may be started again. In this case, after the rainbow performance illumination decoration of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is terminated, the rainbow performance illumination decoration of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 may be started again (with the performance display of the rainbow performance display mode, etc. in the performance display device 1600 continuing) before the performance display of the rainbow performance display mode, etc. in the performance display device 1600 is terminated. This can increase the interest of players who may be disappointed because they think their chances of winning a jackpot are low after the rainbow-colored light-up decorations have ended, and get them to pay attention to the rainbow-colored effects again.

In addition to the above example, the sound output mode during the execution of the rainbow effect may be changed to enable the probability of a jackpot to be determined. For example, if the rainbow effect described above is being executed and a variable display with a high probability of a jackpot, such as a decorative pattern becoming a reach after the rainbow effect, is being executed, sound output in a mode corresponding to the rainbow effect is executed, whereas if a variable display with a high probability of a jackpot, such as a decorative pattern not becoming a reach after the rainbow effect, is not being executed, sound output in a mode corresponding to the rainbow effect is not executed, and sound output in another mode may be executed, or sound output may not be executed at all. In this case as well, the probability of a jackpot can be determined by the execution of the rainbow effect and the mode of sound output, and if it is determined that the probability of a jackpot is high, interest in the game can be increased.

[Rainbow color effect variation 2]
In the rainbow color performance described above, the movable body does not move, but the movable body that is illuminated in the rainbow color performance may always or at a predetermined rate perform an operation linked to the rainbow color performance in addition to the illumination decoration in the rainbow color performance. This is shown below as Modification 2. Note that in Modification 2, only the parts that are different from the above embodiment will be explained, and a duplicate explanation will not be given.

As shown in FIG. 246, when the rainbow effect is started at timing t2, either when the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, or when the button effective period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed without the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower center decorative board 3168 belonging to the 4th board light-emitting group are caused to emit a predetermined light color (blue in this example), and then the light color is controlled to change every predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds) (in this example, "blue" → "purple" → "red" → "white" → "yellow" → "green" → "blue" → "purple" → ...).

In addition, when the rainbow color performance is started at timing t2 in response to the player pressing the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 or the button effective period (e.g. 5 seconds) having elapsed without the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the back front lower middle performance unit 3160 on which the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 is provided rises from the normal waiting position as shown in FIG. 164 and stops at the raised position in front of the performance display device 1600 (in this example, a part of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 rises so as to overlap the front of the performance display device 1600. Note that the entire back front lower middle decorative body 3161 may rise so as to overlap the front of the performance display device 1600 by rising near the center of the performance display device 1600, etc.), and rotates around the axis in the forward/backward direction.

As a result, while the rainbow color performance is being performed, LED lighting decoration and operation by the movable body (back front lower middle decorative board 3168) are performed in front of the performance display device 1600, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 that light and decorate the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 change the light color every predetermined period (e.g. 0.1 seconds), making it possible to perform a highly eye-catching performance. Also, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 appears in front of the performance display device 1600 and rotates with a portion overlapping with the performance display device 1600, making the player think that something good is going to happen, increasing anticipation for the game.

When the rainbow effect is to end (timing t99), the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 stops rotating around the axis in the front-to-rear direction and descends from the front of the effect display device 1600, stopping at the normal waiting position. In this example, a decorative pattern reach occurs on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the movement of the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 to the normal waiting position. In this way, by rotating the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 that appears in front of the effect display device 1600 while illuminating and decorating it, a part of the effect display device 1600 is covered and attention is drawn to the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161, so that when a decorative pattern reach occurs on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the movement of the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 to the normal waiting position, the player is surprised and expectations for a big win are increased.

As described above, if an abnormal condition occurs during the execution of the variable performance that executes the rainbow performance, the rainbow performance illumination decoration using the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 that illuminates and decorates the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is terminated. This prevents the rainbow performance from being performed in an incomplete form.

On the other hand, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 does not stop its operation even if an abnormal state occurs during the execution of the rainbow color performance, but operates in the same way as when no abnormal state occurs. Also, in the variable performance that executes the rainbow color performance, even if an abnormal state occurs before the start of the rainbow color performance, it operates at the timing to start the original rainbow color performance, as in the case where no abnormal state occurs. In other words, if the light emission control of the rainbow color performance cannot be realized completely as designed, the light emission decoration by the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 is stopped or not executed, but operations that do not affect the light emission decoration of the rainbow color performance are executed as scheduled (as designed) without being stopped. This allows the player to recognize that the variable performance is continuing, and prevents the player from misunderstanding that the variable performance has ended because the rainbow color performance has been stopped.

Specifically, if an abnormality occurs at timing t6 while the rainbow effect is being performed as shown in FIG. 247, the rainbow effect illumination decoration using the multiple LEDs of the first board illumination group to the sixth board illumination group provided on the game board 5, including the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 that illuminates and decorates the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, is terminated and controlled to an off state. And even if the door frame 3 is closed during the rainbow effect and the abnormality is resolved, the rainbow effect illumination decoration will not be restored (the rainbow effect illumination decoration will not be resumed).

On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs at timing t6 when the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is operating in conjunction with the rainbow color effect (timing t6), the operation linked to the rainbow color effect of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is not stopped, and the predetermined operation linked to the rainbow color effect is continued (timing t6 to timing t100). In this way, if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow color effect, the luminous decoration of the rainbow color effect is terminated while the operation of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is continued, so that the continued operation of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 allows the player to recognize that the variable effect is continuing, and it is possible to prevent anxiety.

In addition, even if an abnormality occurs in the variable performance that executes the rainbow performance, and the abnormality is resolved before the end of the rainbow performance and the abnormal state returns to normal, the rainbow performance illumination decoration by the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 that illuminates and decorates the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 will not resume. In other words, if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow performance in the variable performance that executes the rainbow performance, and the abnormality is resolved before the rainbow performance ends and the abnormal state returns to normal, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 will perform an operation linked to the rainbow performance in an unlit state where it is not illuminated. As a result, when the rainbow performance display mode is displayed on the performance display device 1600, it is possible to determine that an abnormal state has occurred in the variable performance that executes the rainbow performance depending on whether the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is illuminated or not, and the occurrence of fraudulent acts, etc. can be suppressed.

In addition, depending on the type of abnormality (degree of urgency), it may be possible to differentiate whether to continue or start the operation linked to the rainbow effect of the back front lower middle decoration 3161. For example, for errors that have a small impact on the game as described above, the operation linked to the rainbow effect of the back front lower middle decoration 3161 may be continued or the operation linked to the rainbow effect may be executed as scheduled (at the timing set in the scheduler), while for errors that have a significant impact on the game, the operation linked to the rainbow effect of the back front lower middle decoration 3161 may be stopped (after stopping the operation linked to the rainbow effect, it may be returned to the normal standby position and stopped) or the operation linked to the rainbow effect scheduled in advance (set in the scheduler) may be controlled not to be performed, so that the variable effect may be interrupted or ended even during the execution of the variable effect. This makes it possible to vary the operating state of the back front lower middle decoration 3161 depending on the degree of the error, making it possible to determine the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, whether or not the rainbow performance display mode on the performance display device 1600 is erased may be varied depending on the type of abnormal condition (degree of urgency). For example, for errors that have a small impact on the game as described above, the rainbow performance display mode on the performance display device 1600 is not erased, and a warning display (e.g., "Door open") is displayed so that it partially overlaps with the rainbow performance display mode, while for errors that have a significant impact on the game, the rainbow performance display mode on the performance display device 1600 is erased and only a warning display (e.g., "Illegal win occurred!") is displayed, so that the display of the rainbow performance (rainbow performance display mode) is interrupted or ended even if the rainbow performance is being performed. This allows the display mode on the performance display device 1600 to be varied depending on the severity of the error, making it possible to determine whether an abnormality has occurred.

Also, as shown in the rainbow effect variation 1, when a variable display with a high probability of winning, such as a decorative pattern becoming a reach after the rainbow effect, is being executed, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is always or at a predetermined rate made to operate in conjunction with the rainbow effect, and when a variable display with a high probability of winning, such as a decorative pattern not becoming a reach after the rainbow effect, is not executed, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 may not operate in conjunction with the rainbow effect. This makes it possible to increase the expectation of a big win if the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 operates in conjunction with the rainbow effect, and even if the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 does not operate in conjunction with the rainbow effect, it is possible that a variable display with a high probability of winning is being executed, so that the expectation of a big win is not lost.

In addition, while the above embodiments (all embodiments including variants 1 and 2) are related to rainbow effects, this technical concept can also be applied to effects other than rainbow effects. For example, variant 2 is applicable not only to cases where the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 operates in conjunction with rainbow effects, but also to cases where it operates in conjunction with other effects.

The present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention, as described below.

For example, in the above embodiment, the separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1822c, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, separation hole 1823c, separation hole 1827c, separation hole 1828c, etc.) that allow the separation of decorative objects such as stickers are shown as penetrating holes, but this is not limited to this and slit-shaped or notched holes are also acceptable.

For example, in the above embodiment, a pachinko machine was used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines such as mahjong ball machines and arrange ball machines, and can also be applied to slot machines that use gaming medals to spin multiple drums (cylinders or reels). Here, a slot machine will be described with reference to Figure 209. Figure 209 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

As shown in FIG. 209, the slot machine 6000 is configured with a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body (box) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body (box) 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). The front door (front frame) 6002 can be opened from the main body (box) 6004 by inserting a key into the keyhole 6005 of a metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turning it clockwise, with the hinge as the center of rotation.

The metal locking device is attached to a cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcement unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and is used to lock and open the main body (box) 6004 and the front door (front frame) 6002 in cooperation with a locking unit (not shown). The metal locking device includes a metal cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) extending forward and backward, a metal keyhole 6005 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body, and a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) attached to the rear side of the cylinder body, which is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates together with the rotation of a regular metal key. The cylinder body of the metal locking device penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcement unit from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member is formed in a cylindrical shape (more specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear, and has a pair of notches cut from the rear end toward the front at positions opposite each other across the central axis. The rotation transmission member is formed so that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed relative to the main body (box) 6004, a metal transmission cylinder of a metal locking unit (not shown) is inserted from the rear, and a pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder are inserted into a pair of notches, so that the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted in the keyhole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder to rotate it. When the rotation transmission member of the metal locking device and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact with each other while the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed relative to the main body (box) 6004, the metal locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

The door frame reinforcement unit not only reinforces the front door (front frame) 6002 to provide it with rigidity, but also functions as a door frame metal earth and is electrically connected to an earth board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 via a door frame metal earth wire (not shown). In other words, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side. This earth board (not shown) is capable of temporarily collecting electromagnetic noise generated in various places and grounding (earthing) it to the island equipment of the amusement hall, and is electrically connected to the earth of the island equipment of the amusement hall via an island equipment earth wire (not shown).

An opening switch (not shown) capable of detecting the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 relative to the main body part (box) 6004 is disposed on the main body part (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. This opening switch does not detect the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 relative to the main body part (box) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal due to the opening/closing operation of the metal locking device, but detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 relative to the main body part (box) 6004 separately from the opening/closing operation of the metal locking device. In addition, the opening switch is not disposed near the metal locking device, but is disposed on the main body part (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002 at a position below the metal locking device so as not to be affected by electromagnetic noise that has entered the metal locking device. In this way, even if electromagnetic noise does enter a metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the opening switch is not affected by this electromagnetic noise.

The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front of the slot machine 6000 and is provided with various decorative parts. Some of these decorative parts are not decorated at all, while others are decorated on the entire front and back. This decorative plating is a precious metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has electrical conductivity, so electromagnetic noise may enter. Among the various decorative parts, those that are decorated on the entire front and back are electrically connected to a metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit that constitutes the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown) (some of the various decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and some are electrically connected by attaching a conductive member directly to the metal door frame reinforcement unit). This makes it possible to prevent electromagnetic noise that has entered the various decorative parts from entering the board ground of the various decorative boards provided in the various decorative parts by transmitting it to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. Furthermore, electromagnetic noise that penetrates into those decorative parts that have decorative plating on the entire front and back is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), then to the earth board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 via the door frame metal earth wire, and then from the earth board to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment earth wire, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. In other words, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side as described above.

An electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a static removal section at a specified location on the front of the front door (front frame) 6002, or, when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body (box) 6004, an electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a static removal section on the open side opposite the side where the hinges are located (closed side). The electrostatic removal pad can remove noise (electromagnetic noise) generated by electrostatic discharge.

The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front of the slot machine 6000 and includes various decorative parts. Some of these decorative parts are not plated at all, while others are plated on the entire front and back. The decorative parts that are plated on the entire front and back are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown). The earth board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 is electrically connected to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment earth wire. However, the metal door frame earth wire may not be electrically connected to the earth board, but may be electrically connected to the terminal of the power board of the power unit (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004, to electrically connect the metal door frame reinforcement unit and the power board. The power board is supplied with 24V AC from the island equipment of the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board to which L (live) is input is connected to the non-grounded side, and the N terminal of the power supply board to which N (neutral) is input is connected to the grounded side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that protects against transient excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. This surge protection element (surge absorber) usually has a high resistance value and hardly passes any current, but when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, its resistance value instantly decreases and current passes, and when the excessive voltage disappears, it has the performance of returning to its original normal resistance value (high resistance value). As a result, the electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcement unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply board to the N terminal of the power supply board by the surge protection element (surge absorber) to the ground side (earth) and is removed from the slot machine 6000.

The upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is provided with a game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is formed with a protruding portion that protrudes forward from the game panel 6006. On this protruding portion, a medal insertion slot 6008, bet buttons 6010, 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a center stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, etc. are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. In addition, a savings settlement button 6022 and a decorative panel 6024 are arranged on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative panel 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, center stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, and accumulated settlement button 6022 are electrically connected to a main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. The main control board 1310 is housed in a main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300, and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004.

In addition to the main control board 1310, the main control board box 1320 also contains a setting change board 1311 on which a setting key switch 1311a capable of changing the setting value is mounted. In other words, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body part (box) 6004, so that the setting key switch 1311a is arranged inside the main body part (box) 6004. The setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body part (box) 6004, or may be attached and fixed to the housing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the main body part (box) 6004. In addition to the setting key switch 1311a, the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 may also be equipped with a setting change button for selecting and switching the setting value, a setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot), and the setting change permission lamp 1310z described above.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed in approximately the center of the game panel 6006, and through this display window, three variable rotors (not shown) and a performance device (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 can be seen. The three variable rotors (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004. In contrast, the performance device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door side mounting member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

Each of these variable rotors has a translucent pattern band with multiple types of patterns (e.g., bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) printed on it as pattern information, affixed to the cylindrical framework. Such cylindrical variable rotors are called reels or drums in gaming machines such as slot machines, and each variable rotor is connected to the output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown). These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and as the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, multiple types of patterns appear to change continuously from top to bottom through the display window mentioned above.

The performance device comprises multiple movable performance bodies (not shown), the performance display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which multiple LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. Based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1500 controls the progress of the performance by performing various controls such as operation control of the multiple movable performance bodies, drawing control of the performance display device 1600, and light emission control of the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards. The peripheral control unit 1500 comprises the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

When a predetermined number of medals are inserted as game media into the medal slot 6008, the main control board 1310 starts the varying display of the pattern information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, and stops the varying display of the pattern information based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the center stop button 6018, or the right stop button 6020 or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-awarding state (jackpot game state) on the condition that the pattern information takes on a predetermined specific display form, and pays out a large amount of medals as game media into the receiving tray 6026.

In the fusion gaming machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes a ball slot 6008', and the main control board 1310 starts the varying display of the pattern information based on the operation of the start lever 6014 when a predetermined number of game balls are inserted into the ball slot 6008' as game media, and stops the varying display of the pattern information based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the center stop button 6018, or the right stop button 6020 or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-granting state (jackpot game state) on the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as game media into the tray 6026.

(Solution 1)
The gaming machine has a game board with a game area where game balls can flow down, and draws a lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and awards a profit based on the result of the lottery. The gaming machine includes a specific mounting area where a plurality of light-emitting bodies are mounted and a white coating is formed on the mounting surface of the light-emitting bodies, a performance display means capable of displaying an image, and a performance control means for controlling the performance. The performance control means controls the performance display means to display a specific performance image, and can perform multi-color light emission control to cause the plurality of light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area to simultaneously emit light in different light emission colors, and when a predetermined adjustment means is operated during light emission by the multi-color light emission control, the brightness of the plurality of light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area can be changed while continuing the light emission by the multi-color light emission control. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 1, since a white coating is formed on the mounting surface where the plurality of light-emitting bodies are mounted, the reflection efficiency of the mounting surface for the light of the light-emitting bodies can be improved, and the occurrence of uneven illuminance can be suppressed. This makes it possible to avoid a decrease in the performance effect of causing the plurality of light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area to simultaneously emit light in different light emission colors. In addition, since the player can change the brightness of the light emitted in the multi-color light emission control during the multi-color light emission control executed in a state where the reflection efficiency is improved by the white coating, the player can execute the light emission in the multi-color light emission control at the brightness of his/her preference, and the annoyance and difficulty in seeing the light emitted in the multi-color light emission control can be improved. This eliminates factors that reduce interest in the light emission in the multi-color light emission control, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(Solution 2)
In the gaming machine described in Solution 1, a special mounting area is provided in addition to the specific mounting area, in which a white coating film is formed on the mounting surface on which multiple light-emitting bodies are mounted, and the performance control means controls the performance display means to display a specific performance image, and when performing multi-color light-emitting control to cause the multiple light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area to simultaneously emit light with different light colors, it is possible to perform control separate from the multi-color light-emitting control on the multiple light-emitting bodies mounted in the special mounting area, and when a specified adjustment means is operated during light emission by the multi-color light-emitting control, it is possible to change the brightness of the multiple light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area while continuing the light emission by the multi-color light-emitting control, and further, while the brightness of the multiple light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area is adjusted in response to an operation on the adjustment unit, the multiple light-emitting bodies mounted in the special mounting area are not subject to brightness adjustment, and control separate from the multi-color light-emitting control is continued at a predetermined constant brightness. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 2, it becomes possible to use the light emitted by the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the special mounting area as an indicator for adjusting the brightness, thereby improving the accuracy of the comparison between the light emitted by the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area and the light emitted by the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the special mounting area, making it easier to adjust the brightness to the player's liking.

(Solution 3)
The gaming machine described in Solution 1 has a plurality of special mounting areas in which a control other than the multi-color light emission control is performed, and in a first special mounting area among the plurality of special mounting areas, while the brightness of the plurality of light-emitting bodies emitting light under the multi-color light emission control is adjusted in response to an operation on the adjustment unit, the plurality of light-emitting bodies mounted in the first special mounting area are not subject to brightness adjustment, and a first control other than the multi-color light emission control is continued at a predetermined constant brightness, and in a second special mounting area among the plurality of special light-emitting area sections, while the brightness of the plurality of light-emitting bodies emitting light under the multi-color light emission control is adjusted in response to an operation on the adjustment unit, the brightness of the plurality of light-emitting bodies mounted in the second special mounting area is also adjusted in sync, and a second control other than the multi-color light emission control is continued. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 3, it becomes possible to use the light emitted by multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the special mounting area as an indicator for adjusting the brightness, thereby improving the accuracy of the comparison between the light emitted by multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area and the light emitted by multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the special mounting area, making it easier to adjust the brightness to the player's liking.

(Solution 4)
A gaming machine having a gaming board with a gaming area where a gaming ball can flow down is formed, a lottery is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a profit is awarded based on the result of the lottery, the gaming machine is provided with a specific mounting area in which a plurality of light-emitting bodies are mounted and a white coating is formed on the mounting surface, a performance display means capable of displaying an image, a performance control means for controlling the performance, and a state detection means for detecting the state of the gaming machine, the performance control means controls the performance display means to display a specific performance image, and is capable of performing multi-color light emission control to cause the plurality of light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area to simultaneously emit light in different light emission colors, and when the state detection means detects a specific state during light emission by the multi-color light emission control, a part or all of the plurality of light-emitting bodies emitting light by the multi-color light emission control are turned off. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 4, since a white coating is formed on the mounting surface on which the plurality of light-emitting bodies are mounted, the reflection efficiency of the mounting surface with respect to the light of the light-emitting bodies can be improved, and the occurrence of uneven illuminance can be suppressed. This makes it possible to avoid a decrease in the performance effect of causing the plurality of light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area to simultaneously emit light in different light emission colors. In addition, when the state detection means detects a specific state during light emission under multi-color light emission control, some or all of the light emitters emitting light under multi-color light emission control are turned off, so that, for example, when the state of the gaming machine is such that light emission performance under multi-color light emission control cannot be properly performed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game from being caused by an incomplete light emission performance being performed (see, for example, paragraphs 2869 to 2891, Figures 238 to 242, etc.).

(Solution 5)
In the gaming machine described in Solution 4, a special light-emitting area section is provided as the light-emitting area section, separate from the specific light-emitting area section, in which a white coating film is provided on a mounting surface on which the light-emitting body is mounted, and the performance control means controls the light-emitting body mounted in the specific light-emitting area section to emit light in a predetermined rainbow mode in association with the specific performance image displayed on the performance display device, while being capable of controlling the light-emitting body mounted in the special light-emitting area section to emit light in a mode other than the rainbow mode, and further, when the state detection means detects a specific state within a specific light-emitting period in which the light-emitting body mounted in the specific light-emitting area section emits light in the rainbow mode, control is performed to end the light emission in the rainbow mode regardless of whether the specific light-emitting period remains, while controlling the light-emitting body mounted in the special light-emitting area section to continue emitting light in the other mode until the specific light-emitting period has elapsed, without ending the light emission in the other mode, even if the state detection means detects a specific state within the specific light-emitting period. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 5, even if some or all of the multiple light-emitting elements are turned off as a result of the gaming machine entering a specific state, it is possible to determine that the specific light-emitting period remains because the light-emitting elements mounted in the special light-emitting area continue to emit light, and the player is not given the mistaken impression that the specific light-emitting period has ended.

(Solution 6)
The gaming machine according to Solution 4 or Solution 5 has a plurality of special light-emitting areas in which light-emitting bodies emit light in a manner other than the rainbow manner, and a first special light-emitting area among the plurality of special light-emitting areas is capable of emitting light in the special manner within a specific light-emitting period, and even if the state detection means detects that the specific state is present within the specific light-emitting period, the light-emitting body is controlled to continue emitting light in the special manner until the specific light-emitting period has elapsed without terminating the light-emitting in the special manner; and a second special light-emitting area among the plurality of special light-emitting areas is capable of emitting light in a special manner different from the special manner within the specific light-emitting period, and when the state detection means detects that the specific state is present within the specific light-emitting period, the light-emitting body mounted in the second special light-emitting area is controlled to terminate the light-emitting in the special manner as the light-emitting body emits light in the rainbow manner. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 6, even if some or all of the multiple light-emitting elements are turned off as a result of the gaming machine entering a specific state, it is possible to determine that the specific light-emitting period remains because the light-emitting elements mounted in the special light-emitting area continue to emit light, and the player is not given the mistaken impression that the specific light-emitting period has ended.

(Solution 7)
A gaming machine having a gaming board with a gaming area where a gaming ball can flow down is formed, a lottery is held based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a profit is awarded based on the result of the lottery, the gaming machine is provided with a specific mounting area where a plurality of light-emitting bodies are mounted and a white coating is formed on the mounting surface, a performance display means capable of displaying an image, a performance control means for controlling the performance, and a state detection means for detecting the state of the gaming machine, the performance control means controls the performance display means to display a specific performance image, and is capable of generating a specific period in which a multi-color light emission control is performed in which the plurality of light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area simultaneously emit light in different light colors, and when the state detection means detects a specific state during the specific period, the multi-color light emission control is terminated regardless of whether the specific period remains, and light emission by the multi-color light emission control is not resumed even if the specific state is changed from the specific state to a normal state within the specific period. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 7, since a white coating is formed on the mounting surface where the plurality of light-emitting bodies are mounted, the reflection efficiency of the mounting surface for the light of the light-emitting bodies is improved, and the occurrence of uneven illuminance, etc. can be suppressed. This makes it possible to avoid a decrease in the presentation effect of simultaneously emitting light with different colors from the multiple light emitters mounted in the specific mounting area. Also, when the state detection means detects a specific state during light emission by the multi-color light emission control, the multi-color light emission control is terminated, and even if the specific state is changed to a normal state within the specific period, light emission by the multi-color light emission control is not resumed. Therefore, for example, when the state of the gaming machine is such that the light emission presentation by the multi-color light emission control cannot be properly performed, it is possible to prevent an incomplete light emission presentation from being performed and to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game, and even if the normal state is reached, it is possible to determine that a specific state has occurred within the specific period until the specific period has elapsed (see, for example, paragraphs 2869 to 2891, Figures 238 to 242, etc.).

(Solution 8)
In the gaming machine described in Solution 7, a special light-emitting area section having a mounting surface on which an illuminant is mounted and a white coating film is provided is provided separately from the specific light-emitting area section, and the performance control means controls the illuminant mounted in the specific light-emitting area section to emit light in a predetermined rainbow mode in association with the specific performance image displayed on the performance display device, while being capable of controlling the illuminant mounted in the special light-emitting area section to emit light in a mode other than the rainbow mode, and further, when the state detection means detects that a specific state is present within a specific period during which the illuminant mounted in the specific light-emitting area section emits light in the rainbow mode, control is performed to terminate the light emission in the rainbow mode regardless of whether the specific period remains or not, and control is performed so as not to return to light emission in the rainbow mode even if the specific state is switched from the specific state to a normal state within the specific period, while the illuminant mounted in the special light-emitting area section continues to emit light in a different mode without terminating it even if the state detection means detects that a specific state is present within the specific period, and controls to continue light emission in a different mode even after the specific state is switched from the specific state to the normal state within the specific period. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 8, even if some or all of the multiple light-emitting elements are turned off as a result of the gaming machine entering a specific state, it is possible to determine that the specific period remains because the light-emitting elements mounted in the special light-emitting area continue to emit light in a manner other than the rainbow manner, and the player is not given the mistaken impression that the specific period has ended.

(Solution 9)
In the gaming machine described in Solution 8, the effect control means can control the light emitter mounted in the specific light emitting area to emit light in a predetermined rainbow pattern in association with a specific effect image displayed on the effect display device when the state changes from a specific state to a normal state after a specific period of time has elapsed. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 9, since it is possible to control the light emitter to emit light in a predetermined rainbow pattern in association with a specific effect image displayed on the effect display device when the state changes from a specific state to a normal state after a specific period of time has elapsed, a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed by controlling the light emission in a rainbow pattern.

(Solution 10)
A gaming machine having a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed through which gaming balls can flow down, which draws a lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and which executes a winning game based on the result of the lottery, the gaming machine comprising: a specific mounting area in which a plurality of light-emitting bodies are mounted and a white coating is formed on the mounting surface; and a performance control means for controlling the performance, the performance control means being capable of performing a first light-emitting control for simultaneously causing the plurality of light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area to emit light of the same color, and a second light-emitting control for simultaneously causing the plurality of light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area to emit light of different colors, as controls for notifying a player of the possibility of playing a winning game, the second light-emitting control notifying a player that the possibility of playing a winning game is higher than the first light-emitting control, and further being capable of performing a third light-emitting control, separate from the second light-emitting control, for simultaneously causing the plurality of light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area to emit light of different light colors, the third light-emitting control being a control performed when there is no possibility of playing a winning game. According to the gaming machine described in the solution 10, a white coating is formed on the mounting surface on which the multiple light emitters are mounted, so that the reflection efficiency of the mounting surface with respect to the light of the light emitters is improved, and the occurrence of uneven illuminance can be suppressed. This makes it possible to avoid a decrease in the performance effect of simultaneously emitting light of different light emitters mounted in a specific mounting area in different light emission colors. In addition, although a higher probability of a winning game is notified when a second light emission control is executed in which multiple light emitters mounted in a specific mounting area are simultaneously emitting light of different colors than a first light emission control in which multiple light emitters mounted in a specific mounting area are simultaneously emitting light of the same color, when a third light emission control is executed in which multiple light emitters mounted in a specific mounting area are simultaneously emitting light of different light emission colors like the second light emission control, there is no possibility of a winning game. Therefore, when the second light emission control is executed, the expectation of a winning game can be increased, while the anxiety that the third light emission control may be executed can be given, drawing attention, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game. (For example, see paragraphs 2921 to 2929, Figures 244 to 245, etc.)

(Solution 11)
The gaming machine described in Solution 10 is characterized in that, when the light-emitting body implemented in the specific light-emitting area emits light in a predetermined rainbow pattern by the third control, the light emission in the rainbow pattern can be ended in response to the operation of a predetermined presentation operation unit by the player, but when the light-emitting body implemented in the specific light-emitting area emits light in a predetermined rainbow pattern by the second control, the light emission in the rainbow pattern cannot be ended even if the player operates the predetermined presentation operation unit. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 11, when the light-emitting body implemented in the specific light-emitting area emits light in a predetermined rainbow pattern, the player can be induced to operate the presentation operation unit, and the interest in the game can be increased when operating the presentation operation unit.

(Solution 12)
The gaming machine described in Solution 11 is characterized in that, after the light emission in the rainbow mode is ended in response to the operation of a predetermined effect operation unit by the player during execution of the third control, light emission in the rainbow mode is disabled until a specific period of time has elapsed, and light emission in the rainbow mode is enabled after the specific period of time has elapsed. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 11, if the light emission in the rainbow mode is ended in response to the operation of a predetermined effect operation unit by the player during execution of the third control, light emission in the rainbow mode is disabled until the specific period of time has elapsed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from missing the end of the light emission in the rainbow mode.

(Solution 13)
A gaming machine having a gaming board with a gaming area where a gaming ball can flow down, a lottery is held based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a profit is awarded based on the result of the lottery, the gaming machine is characterized in that it has a first specific mounting area where a plurality of light-emitting bodies are mounted and a white coating is formed on the mounting surface, a second specific mounting area where a plurality of light-emitting bodies are mounted and a dark coating is formed on the mounting surface, and a performance display means capable of displaying an image, and when a specific performance image is displayed on the performance display means, it is possible to perform multi-color emission by simultaneously causing the plurality of light-emitting bodies mounted in the first specific mounting area to emit light in different light colors, and the plurality of light-emitting bodies mounted in the second specific mounting area are capable of monochromatic emission different from the multi-color emission even when multi-color emission is performed by the plurality of light-emitting bodies mounted in the first specific mounting area. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 13, since a white coating is formed on the mounting surface where the plurality of light-emitting bodies are mounted, the reflection efficiency of the mounting surface for the light of the light-emitting bodies is improved, and the occurrence of uneven illuminance, etc. can be suppressed. This makes it possible to avoid a decrease in the presentation effect of simultaneously emitting light of different colors from the multiple light emitters mounted in the first specific mounting area, on whose mounting surface a white coating is formed. Also, even if multiple color emission is performed by the multiple light emitters mounted in the first specific mounting area, a dark coating is formed on the mounting surface of the second specific mounting area, which allows for single-color emission different from the multiple color emission, so that interference caused by the light emitted by each of the multiple light emitters mounted on the mounting surface of the second specific mounting area can be suppressed, and the light emitted by each of the multiple light emitters can be made clear. (See, for example, paragraphs 2913 to 2916, Figure 243, etc.)

(Solution 14)
The gaming machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed through which gaming balls can flow, a lottery is held based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a profit is awarded based on the result of the lottery, and is equipped with a performance control means for controlling the performance, a movable body that can operate in a predetermined operating mode, a plurality of specific decorative boards on which a plurality of light-emitting elements are mounted and on whose mounting surfaces a white coating is formed, and a state detection means for detecting the state of the gaming machine, wherein the specific decorative boards are also provided on the movable body, and the performance control means operates the movable body in a predetermined operating mode and is capable of performing multi-color light emission control in which the multiple light-emitting elements mounted on the multiple specific decorative boards simultaneously emit light in different colors, and when the state detection means detects a specific state while the multi-color light emission control is being performed, some or all of the multiple light-emitting elements mounted on the multiple specific decorative boards are turned off, while the movable body continues to operate in the predetermined operating mode. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 14, a white coating is formed on the mounting surface of the specific decorative boards on which the multiple light emitters are mounted, thereby improving the reflection efficiency of the light emitters on the mounting surface of the specific decorative board, and suppressing the occurrence of uneven illuminance. This makes it possible to avoid a decrease in the performance effect of simultaneously emitting light of different colors from the multiple light emitters mounted on the specific mounting board on which the white coating is formed. In addition, when the state detection means detects a specific state during the execution of the multi-color light emission control, some or all of the multiple light emitters mounted on the specific decorative boards are turned off, while the operation of the movable body in a predetermined operating mode is continued. Therefore, even if some or all of the multiple light emitters are turned off because the state of the gaming machine has become a specific state, it is possible to determine that the multi-color light emission control is continuing as it should be because the operation of the movable body in a predetermined operating mode is continued, and the player is not misled or anxious. (For example, see paragraphs 2930 to 2942, Figures 246 to 247, etc.).

[Split game board]
The pachinko machine 1 is a frame body consisting of a door frame 3 and a main frame 4, and the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 is removed and replaced with a new game board 5 attached to the main frame 4, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be changed to a pachinko machine 1 with different specifications. As described above, the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 is equipped with a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that divides the rear end of the game area 5a, and various units and various members are attached to the front and rear of the plate-shaped game panel 1100. By dividing the plate-shaped game panel 1100 and attaching various units and various members, it is easy to consider the combination of designs and the appearance at the development stage, and it is also possible to respond to changes in the number and arrangement of various winning holes provided on the game board 5, the shape of the decorative members, the shape of the game area 5a, etc.

A completely new game board 5A (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "split game board 5A". This "A" stands for A specification) in which a plate-shaped game panel 1100 is split and various units and various members are attached to each is described with reference to Figs. 248 to 250. Fig. 248 is a schematic front view of the split game board (a) and a schematic rear view of the split game board (b). Fig. 249 is a rear perspective view of the split game board seen from the lower left rear before the right game board and the left game board that make up the split game board are combined (a) and (b) are rear perspective views of the split game board seen from the lower left rear. Fig. 250 is a schematic front view of the split game board in Fig. 248(a) after the decoration has been changed. Note that Figs. 248 to 250 omit various units and various members corresponding to the various units and various members attached to the game board 5 already described in Fig. 129 etc.

The split game board 5A is composed of the above-mentioned front component 1000, which defines the outer periphery of the play area 5a and has an outline of a roughly rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the above-mentioned plate-shaped game panel 1100, which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the play area 5a, and is divided into two in the left-right direction, the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR. The left game board 5AL has a length of about three-quarters of the left-right distance dimension of the split game board 5A, while the right game board 5AR has a length of about one-quarter of the left-right distance dimension of the split game board. The right side of the left game board 5AL and the left side of the right game board 5AR, where the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are combined, have a spigot structure, with the right side of the left game board 5AL being formed in a convex shape and the right game board 5AR being formed in a concave shape. After the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR are joined together, a bolt (not shown) is passed through and tightened from one side of the connecting member (not shown) provided on each of the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR to the other side, so that the surface of the game area 5a where the game balls roll, which is the connecting portion between the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR, automatically becomes flush (i.e., no steps are created) and the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR are fixed together.

The split game board 5A is attached to the main frame 4 by fastening the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR together and then fastening bolts (not shown) from one side to the other of the connecting members (not shown) provided on the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR, respectively. However, the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR may be configured to be fixed to the main frame 4 individually. Even in this case, the surface of the game area 5a where the game balls roll, which is the connecting portion between the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR, is automatically flush (i.e., no step is created) and the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR are fixed to the main frame 4.

The left side game board 5AL has a function display unit 1400 that can display the game status with LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, which is arranged on the front (surface) of the upper left area of the previous component 1000. In contrast, the left side game board 5AL has a sub-function display unit 2250 (the "sub-function display unit" is referred to as the "fourth pattern") that can display the game status with LEDs based on a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, which is arranged on the lower left side of the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000 and protrudes toward the game area 5a. Note that the sub-function display unit 2250 was arranged on the lower left side of the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000 and protruded toward the game area 5a, but instead, it may be arranged on any of the units or members that make up the above-mentioned front unit 2000. In addition, the game status displayed on the sub-function display unit 2250 includes at least a first special pattern display and/or a second special pattern display displayed on the function display unit 1400, and the game information displayed on the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner, or may be displayed in the same light-emitting manner as the game information displayed on the function display unit 1400.

The left side game board 5AL has a plate-shaped front component 1000 (hereinafter, may be referred to as the "left side front component 1000L") and a plate-shaped game panel 1100 (hereinafter, may be referred to as the "left side game panel 1100L") arranged on the back side of the left side front component 1000L. The right side game board 5AR has a plate-shaped front component 1000 (hereinafter, may be referred to as the "left side front component 1000R") and a plate-shaped game panel 1100 (hereinafter, may be referred to as the "right side game panel 1100R") arranged on the back side of the right side front component 1000R. The above-mentioned back unit 3000 is arranged on the back side of the split game board 5A, that is, on the back sides of the left side game panel 1100L and the right side game panel 1100R. When the split game board 5A is viewed from the front, the right side (the side facing the right game panel 1100R) of the rear box 3010 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left rear box 3010L") of the rear unit 3000 located behind the left game panel 1100L on the left game board 5AL is open (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right opening of the left rear box 3010L"). The left side (the side facing the left game panel 1100L) of the rear box 3010 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right rear box 3010R") of the rear unit 3000 located behind the right game panel 1100R on the right game board 5AR is open (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left opening of the right rear box 3010R").

Behind the left rear box 3010L, there are arranged the above-mentioned performance display device 1600, which is detachably attached, the peripheral control unit 1500 in which the above-mentioned peripheral control board 1510 and the like are housed, the main control unit 1300 in which the above-mentioned main control board 1310 is housed, and the left drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "left drive board unit 1700L") in which various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to the various performance units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.) are housed. In addition, the main control board 1310 is equipped with the above-mentioned setting key switch 1311a, which can change the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and check the setting value.

Behind the right rear box 3010R is the right drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "right drive board unit 1700R") which houses various boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to the various performance units housed in the right rear box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.).

In this way, the split game board 5A has boards on which microprocessors such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are mounted located behind the left game board 5AL, while behind the right game board 5AR are decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, and drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., in the various performance units housed in the right rear box 3010R. In other words, the split game board 5A is composed of the left game board 5AL, which is a board on which a microprocessor is mounted, and the right game board 5AR, which is a board on which a microprocessor is not mounted. In addition, only the control objects of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, movable bodies on the game board side, etc.) are provided in front of the right game board 5AR to execute the game presentation, whereas in front of the left game board 5AL, not only the control objects of the peripheral control board 1510 (sub-function display unit 2250, etc.) but also the control objects of the main control board 1310 (function display unit 1400) are provided to display information directly related to the progress of the game (information on winning or losing, information on the type of jackpot, etc.). In this way, the right game board 5AR is configured to have only a board without a microprocessor mounted on the rear, and only the control objects of the peripheral control board 1510 are provided in the front, making it easy to change the right game board 5AR in response to changes in design, specifications, etc.

In addition to the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the left game board 5AL is provided with a panel relay board 1710, a general winning port sensor 3001, a first start port sensor 3002, a second start port sensor 2401, a gate sensor 2801, a large winning port sensor 2402, a special winning port sensor 2601, a V winning port sensor 3003, a losing port sensor 3004, a starting port solenoid 2412, an attacca solenoid 2414, a special winning port solenoid 2612, a V distribution solenoid 3007, a magnetic sensor 1050, a base monitor 1310h, etc. In other words, in this example, even if the right game board 5AR is not connected to the left game board 5AL or the combination of the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR is incompatible, it is possible to play with the left game board 5AL alone.

[Drawer connector]
As described above, the left drive board unit 1700L arranged behind the left rear box 3010L houses various relay boards. Among these various relay boards, the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW on which two left game board drawer connectors LDRW are mounted in the vertical direction is arranged on the upper rear side of the left rear box 3010L near the right opening of the left rear box 3010L. The two left game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW are of the convex type. The left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via various relay boards or directly. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is further electrically connected to various relay boards, and is electrically connected, via various relay boards or directly, to decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., which are attached to various performance units in the left-side drive board unit 1700L, and is electrically connected to the sub-function display unit 2250.

In addition, the right drive board unit 1700R arranged behind the right rear box 3010R houses various relay boards as described above. Among these various relay boards, the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW, on which the right game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are mounted, is arranged at a position corresponding to the two left game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW arranged on the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW, on the rear upper side of the right rear box 3010R and near the left opening of the right rear box 3010R. The two right game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are of a concave type. The decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., which are attached to the various performance units in the right drive board unit 1700R, are electrically connected to the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW via various relay boards or directly.

The lower side of the left side rear box 3010L of the left side game board 5AL, in the center of the lower edge of the divided game board 5A which combines the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR, is provided with a lower side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW on which two lower side game board drawer connectors UDRW are mounted in the left-right direction. The two lower side game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are of the convex type. The lower side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via various relay boards or directly. Two main body frame side drawer connectors (not shown) are provided on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) at positions corresponding to the two lower side game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW provided on the left side rear box 3010L of the left side game board 5AL on the front side of the main body frame 4. The two main frame side drawer connectors are of the concave type. The various boards provided in the door frame 3 (decorative boards and various relay boards provided in the dish unit 200, the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, and the door frame top unit 450. The various relay boards include those that relay detection signals from various sensors in the performance operation unit 300 of the dish unit 200) are electrically connected to the main frame side drawer connectors.

Here, we will explain the drawer connectors such as the drawer connector LDRW (convex type) for the left side game board, the drawer connector RDRW (concave type) for the right side game board, the drawer connector UDRW (concave type) for the lower game board, and the main frame side drawer connector (concave type). The drawer connector LDRW (convex type) for the left side game board and the drawer connector RDRW (concave type) for the right side game board are connectors that can automatically electrically connect the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR simply by combining the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR. The drawer connector UDRW (convex type) for the lower game board and the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) are connectors that can automatically electrically connect the main frame 4 and the divided game board 5A simply by attaching the divided game board 5A to the main frame 4.

[Drawer connector for left side game board, drawer connector for right side game board]
When the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR are combined, the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left side game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left side game board of the left side game board 5AL, which is a convex type, are guided and fitted into the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right side game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right side game board of the right side game board 5AR, which is a concave type, so that each terminal of the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left side game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left side game board 5AL and each terminal of the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right side game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right side game board of the right side game board 5AR are electrically connected to each other.

When the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR are combined, the terminals of the left side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left side game board 5AL are electrically connected to the terminals of the right side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right side game board 5AR, forming a control signal line that transmits various control signals between the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left side rear box 3010L on the left side game board 5AL and the various boards located behind the right side rear box 3010R on the right side game board 5AR. A ground (GND) line is formed that electrically connects the grounds (GND, circuit ground) of the various control boards and other boards arranged behind the left rear box 3010L of the left side game board 5AL to the grounds (GND, circuit ground) of the various boards arranged behind the right rear box 3010R of the right side game board 5AR, and various power supply lines are formed that supply various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V) to the various boards arranged behind the right rear box 3010R of the right side game board 5AR via the various control boards and/or other boards arranged behind the left rear box 3010L of the left side game board 5AL.

The insulating exterior parts of the left side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW and the insulating exterior parts of the right side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW each have a mounting through hole. The left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left side game board 5AL on which the left side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW are mounted has a through hole at a position corresponding to the insulating mounting through hole of the left side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW. The right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right side game board 5AR on which the right side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are mounted has a through hole at a position corresponding to the insulating mounting through hole of the right side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW.

When mounting the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left side game board on the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left side game board 5AL, firstly, each terminal of the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left side game board 5AL is inserted into the terminal through-holes formed in the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left side game board 5AL from the mounting surface of the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left side game board 5AL towards the soldering surface of the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left side game board, and each terminal of the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left side game board protruding from the soldering surface is soldered to the land portion of the terminal through-hole. Then, rivets are inserted into the mounting through-holes formed in the insulating exterior parts of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW, and the ends of the rivets are crimped to plastically deform the rivets. As a result, the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW are fixed to the land parts of the terminal through-holes by soldering each terminal of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW, and further, the insulating exterior parts of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW are fixed to the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side game board 5AL by rivet crimping.

By fixing in this manner, when the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are joined, the load generated when the left game board drawer connector LDRW (convex type) is guided into the right game board drawer connector RDRW (concave type) and fitted together prevents the land portions of the terminal through holes to which the terminals of the left game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW are soldered from peeling off from the base material of the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left game board 5AL.

When mounting the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right side game board on the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right side game board of the right side game board 5AR, first connect each terminal of the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right side game board of the right side game board 5AR to the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left side game board of the left side game board 5AL, in the same way as when mounting the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left side game board on the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left side game board of the left side game board 5AL. The right-side game board 5AR is inserted from the mounting surface of the right-side game board 5AR Drawer Connector Relay Board 5ARDRW toward the soldering surface of the right-side game board 5ARDRW into the terminal through-holes formed in the game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW, and the terminals of the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW protruding from the soldering surface are soldered to the land portions of the terminal through-holes. Then, rivets are inserted into the mounting through-holes formed in the insulating exterior parts of the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW, and the ends of the rivets are crimped to plastically deform the rivets. As a result, the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right side game board are fixed to the land portion of the through hole for the terminal by soldering each terminal of the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right side game board, and further, the insulating exterior portion of the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right side game board is fixed to the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right side game board 5AR by rivet rivet.

By fixing in this manner, when the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are joined, the load generated when the left game board drawer connector LDRW (convex type) is guided into the right game board drawer connector RDRW (concave type) and fitted together prevents the land portions of the terminal through holes to which the terminals of the right game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are soldered from peeling off from the base material of the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right game board 5AR.

[Drawer connector for lower game board, drawer connector for main frame]
When the split game board 5A is attached to the main frame 4, the drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW for the lower game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW for the lower game board of the left game board 5AL, which is a convex type, are guided and fitted into two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, which is a concave type, so that each terminal of the drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW for the lower game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW for the left game board 5AL is electrically connected to each terminal of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

When the split game board 5A is attached to the main frame 4, the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. This electrically connects the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left rear box 3010L of the left game board 5AL and the various boards provided in the door frame 3 (decorative boards and various relay boards provided in the dish unit 200, door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, and door frame top unit 450. The various relay boards receive signals from various sensors of the performance operation unit 300 of the dish unit 200. It includes a relay for control signals that transmit detection signals and various information. ) A control signal line is formed to transmit various control signals between the left side game board 5AL and the left side rear box 3010L, and a ground (GND) line is formed to electrically connect the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the power supply board 630 provided in the main frame 4 to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the various control boards and other boards arranged behind the left side rear box 3010L of the left side game board 5AL, and various power supply lines are formed to supply various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V) created by the power supply board 630 provided in the main frame 4 to the various control boards and other boards arranged behind the left side rear box 3010L of the left side game board 5AL.

In addition, by mounting the split game board 5A on the main frame 4 and electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL, and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, a control signal line is formed that transmits various control signals between the main control board 1310 located behind the left rear box 3010L on the left game board 5AL and the payout control board 633 provided on the main frame 4.

The insulating exterior parts of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW and the insulating exterior parts of the main frame side drawer connector each have a mounting through hole. The lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL on which the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are mounted has a through hole at a position corresponding to the insulating mounting through hole of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW. The main frame side relay board (not shown) on which the main frame side drawer connector is mounted has a through hole at a position corresponding to the insulating mounting through hole of the main frame side drawer connector.

Here, for example, when mounting the drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW for the lower game board on the drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW for the lower game board of the left side game board 5AL, firstly, each terminal of the drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW for the lower game board is inserted into the terminal through-holes formed in the drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW for the lower game board of the left side game board 5AL from the mounting surface of the drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW for the lower game board of the left side game board 5AL towards the soldering surface of the drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW for the lower game board of the left side game board 5AL, and each terminal of the drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW for the lower game board protruding from the soldering surface is soldered to the land portion of the terminal through-hole. Then, rivets are inserted into the mounting through-holes formed in the insulating exterior parts of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, and the ends of the rivets are crimped to plastically deform the rivets. As a result, the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are fixed to the land parts of the terminal through-holes by soldering each terminal of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, and further, the insulating exterior parts of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are fixed to the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL by rivet crimping.

By fixing in this way, when the split game board 5A is attached to the main frame 4, the load generated when the drawer connector UDRW for the lower game board (convex type) is guided into and fitted with the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) prevents the land portion of the terminal through hole to which each terminal of the drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW for the lower game board is soldered from peeling off from the base material of the drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW for the lower game board on the left game board 5AL.

In this embodiment, the main control board 1310, which has the main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor, transmits various commands to the control board equipped with the microprocessor, including a self-identification code (hereinafter, may be referred to as "ID") that can identify itself. In other words, the various commands from the main control board 1310 are configured to include an ID. In other words, in this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands including an ID to the control board equipped with the microprocessor, so that the microprocessor of the control board on the receiving side can determine the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the main control board 1310 and the control board on the receiving side.

The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, and various commands are sent in a single direction from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 extracts the ID from the various commands received and determines whether the combination of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is compatible (matched). This determination is made in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 220.

When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the received command analysis process of step S1022 that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is incompatible (inconsistent), it passes the received command to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 220 as a command classified as a notification display. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) the schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for light emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, and the schedule data for electrical drive source, etc., from the peripheral control ROM as a mode indicating incompatibility (inconsistency) and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting a process to stop the progress of the performance.

As described above, the main control board 1310 can only transmit in one direction from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so the peripheral control board 1510 cannot obtain a judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and the game continues.

In contrast, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL when the divided game board 5A is attached to the main frame 4 are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, and various commands are transmitted in both directions between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 via this drawer connector. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 extracts the ID from the various commands received and determines whether the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (matched). This determination is made in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 218.

When the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 determines in the command analysis process of step S560 that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent), it sets information indicating the state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and sets information to stop the payout operation in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and passes it to the LED display data creation process of step S564 in the payout control unit main processing of the payout control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 218, and the command sending process of step S566 in the payout control unit main processing of the payout control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 218. In the LED display data creation process of step S564, the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 creates display data (for example, display data displaying the letter "H") to be displayed on the error LED display of the dispensing control board 633 as a form of incompatibility (inconsistency), and sets it in the output information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM as LED display information, and in the command transmission process of step S566, creates an incompatibility command (inconsistency command) to inform of incompatibility (inconsistency) and transmits it to the main control board 1310. In addition, in the port output process of step S548 in the dispensing control unit main process of the dispensing control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 218, the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 stops the dispensing operation of the dispensing motor 584 based on the output information stored in the output information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM, and outputs display data (for example, the letter "H") to be displayed on the error LED display.

As described above, the main control board 1310 can obtain a judgment result on the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 by the dispensing control board 633, and transmits this judgment result as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 performs the judgment result on the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit normal processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 220, and when this judgment result is incompatibility (inconsistency), a process to notify the fact is set in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit normal processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 220. At this time, the performance may continue to proceed as it is, or a process to stop the performance may be set.

The main control board 1310 also receives the judgment result by the payout control board 633 regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and when the received judgment result is incompatibility (inconsistency), the game may continue to progress as is or may stop progressing.

The game board 5A shown in Fig. 248 and Fig. 249 is composed of a left side game board 5AL and a right side game board 5AR, which constitute the A specification. Here, when changing the A specification of the split game board 5A to the A2 specification (here, although the shape of the decorative members on the right side game board and the shape of the play area 5a are different from those of the A specification, the various data and programs required for the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are the same as the contents of the various ROMs, and the right side game board is simply redecorated), as shown in Fig. 250, the game board 5A2 is composed of a left side game board 5AL and a right side game board 5A2R. The A2 specification is a redecoration of the right side game board in the A specification, and the left side game board 5AL in the A specification can be used in common, and the right side game board 5AR of the A specification can be replaced with the right side game board 5A2R of the A2 specification (i.e., only the right side game board is replaced).

In addition, various components that can be used in common in various specifications, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various performance units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.) may be arranged on the left game board 5AL. Specifically, various data and programs required for the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged on the left game board 5AL because they can be obtained by changing the contents of various ROMs. In addition, of the various winning holes, those whose arrangement and number are fixed regardless of the specifications are arranged on the left game board 5AL. In addition, among the various winning holes, those whose shapes and numbers are fixed regardless of the specifications are arranged on the left game board 5AL. In addition, among the shapes of the decorative components and the shapes of the play area 5a that can be used in common regardless of the specifications are arranged on the left game board 5AL. In addition, various other boards that can be used in common regardless of the specifications (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to the various performance units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.) are placed on the left game board 5AL.

In contrast, the parts that depend on the specifications may be arranged on the right-side game board 5AR. Specifically, of the various winning openings, those that depend on the specifications are arranged on the right-side game board 5AR. In addition, those of the shape of the decorative members and the shape of the play area 5a that depend on the specifications are arranged on the right-side game board 5AR.

[Self-identification code of the right side game board in a divided game board]
As described above, the split game board adopts a configuration in which the left game board and the right game board are combined, and a microprocessor is mounted on the left game board, whereas no microprocessor is mounted on the right game board.

However, with such a split game board, while the left and right game boards can be simply combined, there are cases where a worker assembling the split game board may make a human error and mistakenly assemble an incorrect combination of the left and right game boards (a combination that is incompatible (inconsistent)). If a player plays on such an incompatible (inconsistent) combination of split game boards that are attached to the main frame 4 of a pachinko machine 1 in an island facility of an amusement hall, for example, the uniformity of the design of the entire pachinko machine may be lost, which may reduce the player's interest in playing, and it is undesirable that a pachinko machine different from the one whose specifications were submitted to the application agency and approved may be installed in the amusement hall. Furthermore, if a human error causes the decorative members corresponding to the old game board to remain instead of being replaced with those corresponding to the new game board, the uniformity of the entire game machine may be lost, which may reduce the player's interest in playing.

[ID output circuit]
Therefore, in this embodiment, the right side game board 5AR (right side game board 5A2R) is provided with an ID output circuit that can output a self-identification code (ID) that can identify itself to the left side game board 5AL. Here, the ID output circuit will be described with reference to Fig. 251. Fig. 251 is a circuit diagram showing an example of an ID output circuit.

The right-side game board 5AR is provided with an ID output circuit IDC that can identify itself. This ID output circuit IDC may be mounted on a dedicated board located at the rear of the right-side game board 5AR, or it may be mounted on one of the various relay boards, or it may be mounted together with an LED mounted on a decorative board, or it may be mounted together with electronic components mounted on another board.

The ID output circuit IDC is mainly composed of a parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa. The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa is an electronic component that is mainly composed of multiple flip-flop circuits (8 flip-flop circuits), is made into a chip, and can be connected in a daisy chain. It has 8 ID setting terminals, A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, D terminal, E terminal, F terminal, G terminal, and H terminal, at which the ID can be set (i.e., there are 8 parallel input terminals at which the ID can be set in 8-bit width), a CK terminal to which an ID acquisition clock signal is input, a non-inverting QH terminal that takes in information set in the 8 ID setting terminals A terminal to H terminal, and serially outputs it as serial data without inverting it, an inverting QH terminal (shown by a solid line above the letter "Q" in the figure) that takes in information set in the 8 ID setting terminals A terminal to H terminal, and inverts it and serially outputs it as serial data, and a CK terminal that prohibits the input of a clock signal. It is mainly composed of an INH terminal, an S/inverted L terminal (shown in the diagram as a solid line above the letter "L") that switches between a shift operation based on the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal and a parallel operation in which each flip-flop circuit takes in the information set in the eight ID setting terminals A to H, an SI terminal to which serial data is input, a power supply terminal Vcc to which control power is supplied, and a GND terminal that is electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground).

The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa has a power supply terminal Vcc electrically connected to +5V, and a GND terminal, a CK INT terminal, and an SI terminal electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). The non-inverting QH terminal is left unconnected, and the inverting QH terminal outputs serial data converted from the ID, which is parallel data set in the eight ID setting terminals, as an ID code signal.

The S/inverted L terminal receives an SH/LD switching signal from outside the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa. When the logic of the SH/LD switching signal is parallel operation logic (logic electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground): LOW), each flip-flop circuit of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa captures and stores (holds) the information set in the eight ID setting terminals of the A terminal to the H terminal at this time. On the other hand, when the logic of the SH/LD switching signal is shift operation logic (logic electrically connected to +5V: HI) that is the inversion of the parallel operation logic, and the CK INT terminal is electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), the flip-flop circuit of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa sequentially shifts the captured information at the rising edge of the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal.

The SH/LD switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal may be output from the peripheral control board 1510, or may be output from a delay circuit provided together with the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa. This delay circuit is implemented as a circuit that coexists with the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa and constitutes the ID output circuit IDC on the board, and is a circuit that sets the logic of the SH/LD switching signal to parallel operation logic for a predetermined time after the power is turned on for the pachinko machine, and can switch from parallel operation logic to shift operation logic when this predetermined time has elapsed.

In this embodiment, the "predetermined time" is set to, for example, 30 milliseconds. When the pachinko machine is powered on and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 220, the initial setting processing of step S1000 and then the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 are completed within this predetermined time. This is because the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 needs to acquire an ID code signal by outputting an ID acquisition clock signal in the ID determination processing described below, and determine the compatibility (matching) between the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to output the SH/LD switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 can adjust the time at which it starts to retrieve the information set in the eight ID setting terminals, A terminal to H terminal, making it possible to check the parallel operation of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa (test for defects). However, it is necessary to provide a path for transmitting the SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa.

In contrast, when the SH/LD switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal is configured to be output from a delay circuit, the period during which each flip-flop circuit of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa starts to retrieve the information set in the eight ID setting terminals A to H is limited to a predetermined period (e.g., 30 milliseconds) from when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on, and the peripheral control board 1510 cannot check the parallel operation of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa (fault inspection), but there is no need to provide a path for transmitting the SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa. When transmitting various control signals via a drawer connector, the number of terminals on the drawer connector is limited, so it is necessary to reduce the number of control signals as much as possible. When configured to output the SH/LD switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal from the delay circuit, there is no need to provide a path for transmitting the SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa, which contributes to reducing the number of control signals transmitted through the drawer connector.

In this embodiment, the eight ID setting terminals on the right side game board 5AR are electrically connected to +5V at the A, B, C, and D terminals, and electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground) at the E, F, G, and H terminals. In other words, the ID of the right side game board 5AR, when expressed in 8-bit width with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, becomes 11110000B (the English letter "B" represents binary numbers), and when expressed in hexadecimal numbers, becomes F0H (the English letter "H" represents hexadecimal numbers). In contrast, the eight ID setting terminals on the right side game board 5A2R shown in FIG. 250 are electrically connected to +5V at the A, B, C, D, and H terminals, and electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground) at the E, F, and G terminals. In other words, the ID of the right side game board 5A2R, when expressed in 8-bit width with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, becomes 11110001B (the alphabet "B" represents a binary number), and when expressed in hexadecimal, becomes F1H (the alphabet "H" represents a hexadecimal number). In this way, the ID of the right side game board 5AR and the ID of the right side game board 5A2R are preset to be different. In this embodiment, as described above, the A specification and A2 specification of the split game board 5A differ in the shape of the decorative members on the right game board and the shape of the game area 5a, but the various data and programs required for the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are the same as the contents of the various ROMs, and the right game board can be redecorated, so the combination of the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR is compatible (matched), and the combination of the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5A2R is also compatible (matched).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the S/inverted L terminal is electrically connected to +5V, the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa operates as an 8-bit shift register because each flip-flop circuit shifts sequentially at the rising edge of the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal (that is, information input to the A terminal → information input to the B terminal → information input to the C terminal → information input to the D terminal → information input to the E terminal → information input to the F terminal → information input to the G terminal → information input to the H terminal → shifts one bit at a time from the non-inverted QH terminal and inverted QH terminal to output the ID code signal as serial data).

By combining the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR, as described above, the terminals of the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left side game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left side game board of the left side game board 5AL are electrically connected to the terminals of the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right side game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right side game board of the right side game board 5AR, thereby forming a control signal line that transmits various control signals between the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left side rear box 3010L on the left side game board 5AL and the various boards located behind the right side rear box 3010R on the right side game board 5AR. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and an ID acquisition clock signal is input from the peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL via each terminal of the right side game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right side game board 5AR and each terminal of the left side game board drawer connector LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left side game board 5AL, the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right side game board 5AR can transmit an ID code signal that can identify itself based on this input ID acquisition clock signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL. The peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL can acquire the ID code signal by outputting the ID acquisition clock signal at a predetermined timing and determine the compatibility (matching) between the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR. This prevents the overall design of the pachinko machine from losing its sense of unity, which can lead to a decline in the player's interest in the game. This determination will be explained later.

The ID output circuit IDC provided on the right side game board 5AR is capable of transmitting an ID code signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL via a drawer connector consisting of the terminals of the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right side game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right side game board of the right side game board 5AR and the terminals of the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left side game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left side game board of the left side game board 5AL. The right-side game board 5AR and the connector relay board 5ALDRW may be electrically connected via an electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, so that the ID code signal from the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side game board 5AR can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL, or the board mounting the ID output circuit IDC and the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL may be directly electrically connected via an electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, so that the ID code signal from the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side game board 5AR can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL.

The ID acquisition clock signal, SH/LD switching signal, and ID code signal from the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right side game board 5AR may be transmitted through one of the two drawer connectors, or may be distributed and transmitted to the two drawer connectors.

[Detection signals from photosensors that detect the positions of various movable bodies on the right-side game board]
Next, detection signals from photosensors that detect the positions (original positions and operating positions) of various movable bodies when the right game board 5AR is provided with various movable bodies will be described with reference to Fig. 252. Fig. 252 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a photosensor information serial output circuit.

As shown in FIG. 252, detection signals from photosensors that detect the positions (original position and operating position) of various movable bodies provided on the right-side game board 5AR are collected in a photosensor information serial output circuit PSO. The photosensor information serial output circuit PSO is mainly composed of a parallel-serial conversion circuit PSOa. The parallel-serial conversion circuit PSOa in this photosensor information serial output circuit PSO is the same circuit as the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC described above, and explanations of each terminal, parts with the same circuit configuration, and operations will be omitted here.

The detection signals from the photosensors that detect the positions (original positions and operating positions) of the various movable bodies on the right-side game board 5AR are input as signals corresponding to eight input terminals, namely, terminal A, terminal B, terminal C, terminal D, terminal E, terminal F, terminal G, and terminal H (i.e., there are eight parallel input terminals that can set an ID with an 8-bit width). Note that if the number of photosensors that detect the positions (original positions and operating positions) of the various movable bodies on the right-side game board 5AR is less than eight, the input terminals that correspond to the remaining number are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground).

The inverted QH terminal (shown in the diagram with a solid line above the letter "Q") takes in the information set in the eight input terminals A to H, inverts it, and outputs it serially as serial data, and is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC described above. In other words, the parallel-serial conversion circuit PSOa and the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC are daisy-chain connected.

The S/inverted L terminal (shown in the diagram with a solid line above the letter "L") switches between a shift operation based on the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal and a parallel operation in which each flip-flop circuit takes in information set in the eight input terminals A to H, and receives the SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510. The SH/LD switching signal is input to the S/inverted L terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO, as well as to the S/inverted L terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC.

In a state in which the S/inverted L terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO in the right-side game board 5AR and the S/inverted L terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC are electrically connected to +5V, the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO and the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC shift sequentially at the rising edge of the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal of each flip-flop circuit of the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO and the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC ( In other words, information input to terminal A → information input to terminal B → information input to terminal C → information input to terminal D → information input to terminal E → information input to terminal F → information input to terminal G → information input to terminal H → information input to terminal is shifted one bit at a time from the non-inverted QH terminal and inverted QH terminal to output the ID code signal as serial data), so it operates as a 16-bit shift register consisting of an 8-bit shift register made up of the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO and an 8-bit shift register made up of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC.

By combining the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR, as described above, the terminals of the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left side game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left side game board of the left side game board 5AL are electrically connected to the terminals of the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right side game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right side game board of the right side game board 5AR, thereby forming a control signal line that transmits various control signals between the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left side rear box 3010L on the left side game board 5AL and the various boards on the right side game board 5AR. As a result, when viewed from the peripheral control board 1510 arranged behind the left rear box 3010L on the left game board 5AL, the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC on the right game board 5AR becomes the first 8-bit shift register, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO on the right game board 5AR becomes the second 8-bit shift register. In other words, the contents held by each flip-flop of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC on the right game board 5AR, which becomes the first 8-bit shift register, are input to the peripheral control board 1510 in order, one bit at a time, as serial data.

The ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side game board 5AR and the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO provided on the right-side game board 5AR are capable of transmitting, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and an ID acquisition clock signal is input from the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL via the drawer connectors consisting of the terminals of the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side game board 5AR and the terminals of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side game board 5AL, an ID code signal that can identify itself based on the input ID acquisition clock signal and a detection signal that detects the positions of the various movable bodies provided on the right-side game board 5AR as a single serial signal, a photo and ID code signal, to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL. The peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL can obtain a photo and ID code signal by outputting an ID acquisition clock signal at a predetermined timing to determine the compatibility (matching) between the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR and grasp the positions of various movable bodies. For example, in the movable body information acquisition process of step S1106 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 222, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sets and outputs the logic of the SH/LD switching signal to operate in parallel and then in serial operation, and then outputs an ID acquisition clock signal to obtain a photo and ID code signal to determine the compatibility (matching) between the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR and grasp the positions of various movable bodies.

The ID output circuit IDC provided on the right side game board 5AR is capable of transmitting photo and ID code signals to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL via a drawer connector consisting of the terminals of the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right side game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right side game board of the right side game board 5AR, and the terminals of the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left side game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left side game board of the left side game board 5AL. The left side game board 5AL's drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW may be electrically connected to the right side game board 5AR via an electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, so that the photo and ID code signals can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL, or the board mounting the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right side game board 5AR and the peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL may be directly electrically connected to each other via an electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, so that the photo and ID code signals can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL.

In addition, by electrically connecting the inverted QH terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO in the right-side game board 5AR and the SI terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC, as described above, it operates as a 16-bit shift register, and the photo and ID code signal is configured as a serial signal containing information of the detection signal from the photosensor that detects the positions (original position and operating position) of the various movable bodies provided on the right-side game board 5AR and information of the ID of the right-side game board 5AR, and each terminal of the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side game board 5AR and the left-side game board drawer connector RDRW mounted on the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side game board 5AL are connected to The signals were previously transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL via a drawer connector formed by the terminals of LDRW, LDRW, but instead, the inverted QH terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO on the right side game board 5AR and the SI terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC may be treated as separate serial systems, and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL via a drawer connector formed by the terminals of the right side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right side game board 5AR and the terminals of the left side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left side game board 5AL.

[Self-identification code when the right game board is further divided]
Here, the ID output circuit in the case where the right side game board 5AR is further divided into an upper side and a lower side, that is, an upper right side game board 5ART and a lower right side game board 5ARU, will be described with reference to Fig. 253. Fig. 253 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a plurality of ID output circuits.

The right side game board 5AR can be assembled by combining the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU. After combining the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU, the right side game board 5AR is assembled by passing a bolt (not shown) through the connecting members (not shown) provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU from one side to the other and tightening them. This automatically makes the surface of the game area 5a where the game balls roll, which is the connecting part between the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU, flush (i.e., no steps are created) and fixes the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU.

In addition, the right side game board 5AR is fixed by fastening the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU from one side to the other of the connecting members (not shown) provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU after combining the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU with a bolt (not shown). Furthermore, the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR are combined, and the left side game board 5AL is fixed by fastening the bolt (not shown) from one side to the other of the connecting members (not shown) provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU. The left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR are fixed by passing a bolt (not shown) through the connecting member (not shown) provided on each of the game boards 5AL and the right side game board 5AR from one side to the other and tightening it, and the divided game board 5A is attached to the main frame 4, but the left side game board 5AL, the upper right game board 5ART, and the lower right game board 5ARU may be configured to be fixed individually to the main frame 4. Even in this case, the surface of the game area 5a where the game ball rolls, which is the connecting part between the left side game board 5AL, the upper right game board 5ART, and the lower right game board 5ARU, automatically becomes flush (i.e., no step is created), and the left side game board 5AL, the upper right game board 5ART, and the lower right game board 5ARU are fixed to the main frame 4.

The upper right game board 5ART is provided with a right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW on which the above-mentioned right side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are mounted. The two right side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are of concave type. The upper right game board 5ART is also provided with a right side game board drawer connector relay board on which two upper right side game board drawer connectors (not shown) are mounted. The two upper right side game board drawer connectors are of convex type. The decorative board on which various LEDs are mounted, the drive board for driving the drive motor and drive solenoid, etc., which are attached to the various performance units on the upper right game board 5ART, are electrically connected to the right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW via various relay boards or directly.

The lower right game board 5ARU is provided with a drawer connector relay board for the lower right game board, on which two drawer connectors for the lower right game board (not shown) are mounted at positions corresponding to the two drawer connectors for the upper right game board that are arranged on the drawer connector relay board for the upper right game board (not shown). The two drawer connectors for the lower right game board are of the concave type. The decorative board on which various LEDs are mounted, the drive board for driving the drive motor and drive solenoid, etc., which are attached to the various performance units in the lower right game board 5ARU, are electrically connected to the drawer connector relay board for the lower right game board (not shown) via various relay boards or directly.

The two drawer connectors (convex type) for the upper right game board (not shown) and the two drawer connectors (concave type) for the lower right game board (not shown) are connectors that can automatically electrically connect the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU simply by combining the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU.

When the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU are combined, the two upper right game board drawer connectors mounted on the upper right game board drawer connector relay board of the upper right game board 5ART, which is a convex type, are guided by and fit into the two lower right game board drawer connectors mounted on the lower right game board drawer connector relay board of the lower right game board 5ARU, which is a concave type, so that each terminal of the two upper right game board drawer connectors mounted on the upper right game board drawer connector relay board of the upper right game board 5ART and each terminal of the two lower right game board drawer connectors mounted on the lower right game board drawer connector relay board of the lower right game board 5ARU are electrically connected. This electrical connection forms a control signal line that transmits various control signals between the various boards in the upper right game board 5ART and the various boards in the lower right game board 5ARU, a ground (GND) line that electrically connects the grounds (GND, circuit ground) of the various boards in the upper right game board 5ART and the grounds (GND, circuit ground) of the various boards in the lower right game board 5ARU, and various power supply lines that supply various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V) to the various boards in the lower right game board 5ARU via the various boards in the upper right game board 5ART are formed.

The insulating exterior parts of the two upper right game board drawer connectors and the insulating exterior parts of the two lower right game board drawer connectors are formed with mounting through holes, similar to the above-mentioned right side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW, and the two upper right game board drawer connectors are fixed to the upper right game board drawer connector relay board of the upper right game board 5ART and the two lower right game board drawer connectors are fixed to the lower right game board drawer connector relay board of the lower right game board 5ARU by inserting rivets into the mounting through holes and crimping the ends of the rivets to cause plastic deformation of the rivets.

By fixing in this manner, when the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU are joined, the load generated when the upper right game board drawer connector (convex type) is guided into the lower right game board drawer connector (concave type) and fitted together prevents the land portions of the terminal through holes to which the terminals of the upper right game board drawer connector are soldered from peeling off from the base material of the upper right game board drawer connector relay board of the upper right game board 5ART, and prevents the land portions of the terminal through holes to which the terminals of the lower right game board drawer connector are soldered from peeling off from the base material of the lower right game board drawer connector relay board of the lower right game board 5ARU.

The upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. The ID output circuit IDCT of the upper right game board 5ART may be arranged on a dedicated board mounted only on itself at the rear of the upper right game board 5ART, or may be mounted on one of the various relay boards of the upper right game board 5ART, or may be mounted together with an LED mounted on a decorative board of the upper right game board 5ART, or may be mounted together with electronic components mounted on other boards of the upper right game board 5ART. The ID output circuit IDCU of the lower right game board 5ARU may be mounted on a dedicated board located behind the lower right game board 5ARU, or may be mounted on one of the various relay boards of the lower right game board 5ARU, or may be mounted together with an LED mounted on a decorative board of the lower right game board 5ARU, or may be mounted together with electronic components mounted on other boards of the lower right game board 5ARU.

The ID output circuits IDCT, IDCU have the same circuit configuration as the ID output circuit IDC described above, and although detailed description will be omitted, they are mainly composed of parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCTa, IDCUa, respectively. The ID output circuit IDCT of the upper right game board 5ART is the ID output circuit IDC described above, and the ID of the upper right game board 5ART, when expressed as an 8-bit width with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, is 11110000B (the letter "B" represents binary numbers), and when expressed in hexadecimal numbers, is F0H (the letter "H" represents hexadecimal numbers). In contrast, the ID of the lower right game board 5ARU, when expressed as an 8-bit width with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, is 11111000B (the letter "B" represents a binary number), and when expressed in hexadecimal, it is F8H (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART is identical to the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC described above, except that the SI terminal is not electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), and so a detailed description of it will be omitted. When the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU are combined, as described above, the CK terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU is automatically electrically connected by the drawer connectors consisting of the two upper right game board drawer connectors (convex type) not shown in the figure on the upper right game board 5ART and the two lower right game board drawer connectors (concave type) not shown in the figure on the lower right game board 5ARU, and is electrically connected to the CK terminal and S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART through these drawer connectors, and the ID acquisition clock signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is input.

The S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU receives an SH/LD switching signal from the delay circuit in the lower right game board 5ARU. In other words, the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART receives an SH/LD switching signal from the delay circuit in the upper right game board 5ART, while the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU receives an SH/LD switching signal from the delay circuit in the lower right game board 5ARU, and the S/inverted L terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCTa, IDCUa each receive an SH/LD switching signal from a different delay circuit. As described above, the delay circuit on the upper right game board 5ART and the delay circuit on the lower right game board 5ARU are circuits that set the logic of the SH/LD switching signal to parallel operation logic for a predetermined time after the power to the pachinko machine is turned on, and when this predetermined time has elapsed, they are capable of switching from parallel operation logic to shift operation logic.

Alternatively, the SH/LD switching signal from the delay circuit in the upper right game board 5ART may be input to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU via a drawer connector consisting of two drawer connectors (convex type) for the upper right game board (not shown) in the upper right game board 5ART and two drawer connectors (concave type) for the lower right game board (not shown) in the lower right game board 5ARU. In addition, the SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL is transmitted to the upper right game board 5ART via a drawer circuit formed by each terminal of the left game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left game board 5AL and each terminal of the right game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right game board 5AR. The signal is input to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa, and may be further input to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU via a drawer connector consisting of two drawer connectors (convex type) for the upper right game board (not shown) in the upper right game board 5ART and two drawer connectors (concave type) for the lower right game board (not shown) in the lower right game board 5ARU.

The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU has its SI terminal electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), and its inverted QH terminal is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART via a drawer connector consisting of two drawer connectors (convex type) for the upper right game board (not shown) in the upper right game board 5ART and two drawer connectors (concave type) for the lower right game board (not shown) in the lower right game board 5ARU. In other words, the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART are daisy-chained.

When the S/inverted L terminal is electrically connected to +5V, the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU shift sequentially at the rising edge of the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal of each flip-flop circuit of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU (that is, information input to the A terminal → information input to the B terminal → information input to the C terminal). (Information input to the D terminal → Information input to the E terminal → Information input to the F terminal → Information input to the G terminal → Information input to the H terminal → The ID code signal is output as serial data by shifting one bit at a time from the non-inverted QH terminal and inverted QH terminal), so it operates as a 16-bit shift register consisting of an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU.

By combining the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR (i.e. combining the left side game board 5AL, the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU), as described above, the terminals of the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left side game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left side game board of the left side game board 5AL are electrically connected to the terminals of the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right side game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right side game board of the upper right game board 5ART, thereby forming a control signal line that transmits various control signals between the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left side rear box 3010L on the left side game board 5AL, the various boards in the upper right game board 5ART and the various boards in the lower right game board 5ARU. As a result, when viewed from the peripheral control board 1510 arranged behind the left rear box 3010L on the left game board 5AL, the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa on the upper right game board 5ART becomes the first 8-bit shift register, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa on the lower right game board 5ARU becomes the second 8-bit shift register. In other words, the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa on the upper right game board 5ART, which becomes the first 8-bit shift register, are input to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of bit by bit as serial data.

The ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right game board 5ARU can transmit an ID code signal that can identify itself based on the input ID acquisition clock signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and an ID acquisition clock signal is input from the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL via each terminal of the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right game board of the upper right game board 5ART and each terminal of the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left game board of the left game board 5AL. The peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL can obtain an ID code signal by outputting an ID acquisition clock signal at a predetermined timing and determine the compatibility (matching) between the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR.

The ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right game board 5ART is capable of transmitting an ID code signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL via a drawer connector consisting of the terminals of the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right game board of the right game board 5AR, and the terminals of the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left game board of the left game board 5AL. Alternatively, the ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right game board 5ART can transmit an ID code signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL via a drawer connector consisting of the terminals of the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right game board of the right game board 5AR, and the terminals of the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left game board of the left game board 5AL. 5ALDRW may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, and an ID code signal may be transmitted from the ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right game board 5ART to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL, or the board mounting the ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL may be directly electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, and an ID code signal may be transmitted from the ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right game board 5ART to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL.

In addition, the ID output circuit IDCU provided in the lower right game board 5ARU transmits the ID code signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL via a first drawer connector consisting of the terminals of the two lower right game board drawer connectors mounted on the lower right game board drawer connector relay board of the lower right game board 5ARU and the terminals of the two upper right game board drawer connectors mounted on the upper right game board drawer connector relay board of the upper right game board 5ART, and via a second drawer connector consisting of the terminals of the right game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right game board 5AR and the terminals of the left game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left game board 5AL. Alternatively, the ID code signal can be transmitted from the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right game board 5ARU to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends between the drawer connector relay board for the lower right game board and the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left game board 5AL, or the board mounting the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right game board 5ARU and the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL can be directly electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends to transmit the ID code signal from the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right game board 5ARU to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL.

The first drawer connector and the second drawer connector each include two drawer connectors, and the ID acquisition clock signal and SH/LD switching signal to the ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right game board 5ARU, and the ID code signal from the ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right game board 5ARU may be transmitted through one of the two drawer connectors in the first drawer connector, or may be distributed and transmitted to the two drawer connectors, or may be transmitted through one of the two drawer connectors in the second drawer connector, or may be distributed and transmitted to the two drawer connectors.

When the upper right game board and the lower right game board are combined, the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU are supposed to be combined, but when the upper right game board 5ART is combined with another lower right game board that does not match (match) it, since the left side game board 5AL and the upper right game board 5ART are matched (matched), the various LEDs on the upper right game board 5ART will change their light emission pattern as the performance progresses, but the various LEDs on the other lower right game board that does not match (match) with the upper right game board 5ART will be turned off (all turned off). Alternatively, in the case of a combination of the upper right game board and the lower right game board, when the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU are supposed to be combined, but instead another lower right game board that does not match (match) with the upper right game board 5ART is combined, even if the left side game board 5AL and the upper right game board 5ART are matched (matched), the various LEDs provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the various LEDs provided on the other lower right game board that does not match (match) with the upper right game board 5ART may be turned off (all off).

[ID Determination Process]
The presentation operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 in this embodiment may be replaceable according to the specifications of the split game board. In this case, the presentation operation unit 300 may be treated as a component of the game board 5. In other words, the game board side component, which is composed of the outer frame 2, the door frame 3, and the main frame 4, is provided with the game board 5 on which a microprocessor is mounted and the presentation operation unit 300 on which a microprocessor is not mounted, in an easily removable state (for example, in a state in which it can be removed without using a tool such as a screwdriver). Various LEDs are provided on the game board 5 and the presentation operation unit 300, and are driven by various LED drivers.

In contrast, the door frame units such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the plate unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "door frame units") provided in the door frame 3 are provided in a state in which they are difficult to attach and detach (for example, they are screwed in by screws or the like and are difficult to attach and detach without using a tool such as a screwdriver) and are not replaced (or may be made non-replaceable) according to the specifications of the split game board, and are used in common with any split game board specifications, regardless of the specifications of the split game board. Various LEDs are provided on the split game board and the door frame units and are driven by various LED drivers. Here, a combination of the performance operation unit provided in the door frame 3 and the split game board that is suitable (matched) as a pachinko machine A and a combination that is suitable (matched) as a pachinko machine B will be described with reference to Figures 254 and 255. Fig. 254 is a list showing a table of compatibility (matching)/incompatibility (mismatching) of combinations, and Fig. 255 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing capable of ID determination. The peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 255 performs almost the same processing as the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Fig. 220, and in Fig. 255, steps performing the same processing are indicated by the same names and step numbers. Note that detailed explanations of the same names and step numbers will be omitted. In addition, the following description shows door frame units such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and top unit 450 of the door frame 3 as not being replaced (or not replaceable) in accordance with the specifications of the split game board, but instead of or in addition to the performance operation unit 300, a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and top unit 450 of the door frame 3 may be treated as a component of the game board 5. In other words, the game board side component may be composed of the game board 5 equipped with a microprocessor and the performance operation unit 300 and/or a specific door frame unit not equipped with a microprocessor.

Here, the above-mentioned ID output circuit is provided, which can identify itself as the presentation operation unit 300 that can be replaced according to the specifications of the split game board. The ID used for pachinko machine A is set to 00110000B (the alphabet "B" represents a binary number) in binary notation and 30H (the alphabet "H" represents a hexadecimal number) in hexadecimal notation (hereinafter, the presentation operation unit used for pachinko machine A will be referred to as "presentation operation unit 300A"). The ID used for pachinko machine B is set to 00110001B (the alphabet "B" represents a binary number) in binary notation and 31H (the alphabet "H" represents a hexadecimal number) in hexadecimal notation (hereinafter, the presentation operation unit used for pachinko machine B will be referred to as "presentation operation unit 300B").

The combination of split game boards in pachinko machine A is set as specification A (for example, a type with a setting key or a type that is not a so-called sweet type), and the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR described above are compatible (matched), and the combination of split game boards in pachinko machine B is set as specification B, which is different from specification A (for example, a type that does not have a setting key or a so-called sweet type), and the new left side game board 5BL and the right side game board 5AR described above are compatible (matched).

In this case, as a combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board provided in the door frame 3 in pachinko machine A, the left game board 5AL is compatible (matched) with the right game board 5AR and the presentation operation unit 300A as shown in Figure 254(a). Also, as a combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board provided in the door frame 3 in pachinko machine B, the left game board 5BL is compatible (matched) with the right game board 5AR and the presentation operation unit 300B as shown in Figure 254(b). As mentioned above, the door frame units such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3 are not intended to be replaced to match the specifications of the split game board, and are used in common with any split game board specifications, regardless of the specifications of the split game board. Therefore, as shown in Figures 254 (a) and (b), in the A specification, they are not subject to matching (matching) of the combination of the left side game board 5AL and the door frame unit, and in the B specification, they are not subject to matching (matching) of the combination of the left side game board 5BL and the door frame unit.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL acquires the ID from the ID code signal transmitted from each ID output circuit at a predetermined timing after power-on, and judges whether the combination of the performance operation unit and the divided game board provided in the door frame 3 is compatible (matched). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the initial setting processing of step S1000, followed by the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002, as shown in FIG. 255. Next, the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the ID determination processing of step S1003. In this ID determination processing, in order to acquire the ID of the right side game board and the ID of the performance operation unit, an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the right side game board) is output to the right side game board, and an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the performance operation unit) is output to the performance operation unit. The peripheral control IC 1510a acquires the ID code signal from the right-side game board (ID code signal exclusive to the right-side game board) and the ID code signal from the performance operation unit (ID code signal exclusive to the performance operation unit) through separate serial systems, and judges (compares) the combination of the split game boards (i.e., the combination of the right-side game board (board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left-side game board (peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) by referring to a combination table (Fig. 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, and judges (compares) the combination of the performance operation unit and the split game board by referring to a combination table (Fig. 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM.

In addition, in this ID determination process, the above-mentioned combination of split game boards (i.e., the combination of the right game board (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left game board (the peripheral control board 1510 or the main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) may be determined (compared) multiple times (for example, five times), and the combination of the performance operation unit and the split game board may be determined (compared). In this case, if a match (matching) is obtained three consecutive times as the determination result, it is deemed to be matched (matched) and the process proceeds to the next step, whereas if a match (matching) is not obtained three consecutive times as the determination result, it is deemed to be incompatible (mismatched) and the process proceeds to the next step.

When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 judges in the ID judgment process of step S1003 that the combination of the divided game boards is incompatible (inconsistent), that is, when the judgment result of the combination of the right game board (board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left game board (peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor) is incompatible (inconsistent), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 passes a command classified as a notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) the schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for light emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, and the schedule data for the electrical drive source, etc., from the peripheral control ROM as the mode indicating incompatibility (inconsistency) and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processing related to the performance.

In addition, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 judges in the ID judgment process of step S1003 that the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is incompatible (inconsistent), it passes a command classified as a notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data, etc., from the peripheral control ROM as a mode indicating incompatibility (inconsistency) and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processes related to presentation.

Because the peripheral control board 1510 needs to receive various commands from the main control board 1310, when the pachinko machine is powered on, the system is set to complete startup before the system of the main control board 1310 starts. For this reason, if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is incompatible (inconsistent), the mode in which the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is incompatible (inconsistent) will take precedence until a command is received to inform the user that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent). After that, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command to the effect that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent), the mode in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent) will take precedence over the mode in which the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is incompatible (inconsistent). The combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is such that the main control board 1310 is placed on the split game board, while the payout control board 633 is placed on the main frame 4, and the split game board is attached to the main frame 4; in other words, it is a combination of a split game board and a main frame.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process only once when the power is turned on (including when power is restored after a power outage or when power is restored after a momentary power outage (instantaneous power outage)) before the peripheral control unit normal processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started. However, in order to perform the ID determination process at any time, the ID determination process may be performed as one process of the peripheral control unit normal processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (for example, following the 1 ms interrupt timer start process of step S1010, the ID determination process is performed as the process of step S1012, and then the performance operation unit monitoring process of step S1014). In this way, the peripheral control IC 1510a can check the combination of the performance operation unit and the divided game board multiple times at any time.

In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 outputs an SH/LD switching signal (which may be configured as an SH/LD switching signal dedicated to the right-side game board and an SH/LD switching signal dedicated to the performance operation unit, or one SH/LD switching signal may be branched into two signals and input to the right-side game board and the performance operation unit, respectively) to the right-side game board and the performance operation unit. In this case, in the ID determination process, first, the logic of the SH/LD switching signal is set to parallel operation logic for a predetermined time (a time sufficient for the parallel-serial conversion circuit of the ID output circuit in the right-side game board and the parallel-serial conversion circuit of the ID output circuit in the performance operation unit to import and store (hold) the information set in the eight ID setting terminals by parallel operation, for example, 2 milliseconds), and when this predetermined time After this time, it switches from parallel operation logic to shift operation logic, and then outputs an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the right-side game board) to the right-side game board and an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the performance operation unit) to the performance operation unit. It acquires an ID code signal (an ID code signal dedicated to the right-side game board) from the right-side game board and an ID code signal (an ID code signal dedicated to the performance operation unit) from separate serial systems, and determines the combination of the split game boards (i.e., the combination of the right-side game board (a board without a microprocessor) and the left-side game board (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) and also determines the combination of the performance operation unit and the split game board.

Next, returning to FIG. 254, the state, behavior, and countermeasures of the pachinko machine due to compatibility (matching)/incompatibility (mismatch) caused by the combination of the presentation operation unit and the split game board, and the combination of the split game board and the main frame will be described. As described above, the door frame units such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 are not replaced according to the specifications of the split game board, and are used in common with any split game board specifications, regardless of the specifications of the split game board, so they have no effect on the compatibility (matching)/incompatibility (mismatch) caused by the combination of the presentation operation unit and the split game board, and the combination of the split game board and the main frame.

Here, we will explain the details of Pachinko Machine A, and as the details of Pachinko Machine B are the same as those of Pachinko Machine A, we will omit them with some exceptions (Figure 254 (c) also shows the code for Pachinko Machine B in parentheses following the code for Pachinko Machine A).

The combination of the split game boards in the pachinko machine A and the combination of the split game boards and the performance operation unit in the pachinko machine A are performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 255, and the combination of the split game board 5A and the main frame is performed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 218. In other words, the combination of the split game boards in the pachinko machine A and the combination of the split game boards and the performance operation unit in the pachinko machine A are performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 arranged on the split game board, while the combination of the split game board 5A and the main frame is performed by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 provided on the main frame 4 to which the split game board is attached. The judgment result made by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 is transmitted as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 holds information on whether the combination of the split game boards in pachinko machine A and the combination of the split game boards and the performance operation unit in pachinko machine A are compatible (matched), and information on whether the combination of the split game board 5A and the main body frame is compatible (matched).

The combination of the split game board and the presentation operation unit in pachinko machine A is set as A specification (for example, a type with a setting key or one that is not the so-called sweet type), and the split game board combination that is suitable (matching) is a split game board 5A consisting of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR, and the combination of the split game board and the presentation operation unit in pachinko machine A is a combination that is suitable (matching) is a split game board 5A consisting of a split game board 5A and a presentation operation unit 300A. In addition, the combination of split game boards in pachinko machine B, and the combination of the split game board and the presentation operation unit in pachinko machine B are set as B specifications (for example, those without a setting key or those that are the so-called sweet type), and the split game board combination that matches (matches) is split game board 5B consisting of left game board 5BL and right game board 5AR, and the combination of the split game board and the presentation operation unit in pachinko machine B is one that matches (matches) consisting of split game board 5B and presentation operation unit 300B.

As shown in Figure 254 (c), there are 10 possible states of the pachinko machine, from state 1 to state 10, depending on whether the combination of the performance operation unit 300A and the divided game board 5A, and the combination of the divided game board 5A and the main frame, are compatible (matched) or incompatible (mismatched).

State 1: Normal Combination of split game boards: The combination is made up of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR and is in a compatible (matched) state.
Combination of a split game board and a presentation operation unit: A state in which the game board is composed of a split game board 5A and a presentation operation unit 300A and is compatible (aligned).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Behavior of the pachinko machine during an error: Normal operation (no error response).
Solution: None as the unit is operating normally.

Status 2: ID error 1 (mismatch of right side game board)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the game board is not composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR and is incompatible (inconsistent).
Combination of a split game board and a presentation operation unit: A state in which the game board is composed of a split game board 5A and a presentation operation unit 300A and is compatible (aligned).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Behavior of pachinko machine during an error: Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Solution: After cutting off the power, replace with a compatible ID product (matching ID product).

Status 3: ID error 2 (mismatch of the performance operation unit)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the game boards are made up of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR and are compatible (aligned).
Combination of a split game board and a presentation operation unit: A state in which the game board is not composed of a split game board 5A and a presentation operation unit 300A and is incompatible (inconsistent).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Behavior of pachinko machines during errors: Error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Solution: Replace with a compatible ID part (matching ID part) (replacement is possible with the power on).

Status 4: ID error 3 (mismatch between main control board and dispensing control board)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are configured and matched (integrated).
Combination of a split game board and a presentation operation unit: A state in which the game board is composed of a split game board 5A and a presentation operation unit 300A and is compatible (aligned).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent).
Behavior of pachinko machine during an error: Error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Solution: After cutting off the power, replace with a compatible ID product (matching ID product).

Status 5: ID error 4 (mismatch (mismatch) of the right game board + mismatch (mismatch) of the performance operation unit)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the game board is not composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR and is incompatible (inconsistent).
Combination of a split game board and a presentation operation unit: A state in which the game board is not composed of a split game board 5A and a presentation operation unit 300A and is incompatible (inconsistent).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Behavior of pachinko machines during errors: Error handling 4.
Solution: After cutting off the power, replace with a compatible ID product (matching ID product).

Status 6: ID error 1, 3 (mismatch (mismatch) of the right game board + mismatch (mismatch) between the main control board and the payout control board)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the game board is not composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR and is incompatible (inconsistent).
Combination of a split game board and a presentation operation unit: A state in which the game board is composed of a split game board 5A and a presentation operation unit 300A and is compatible (aligned).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent).
Behavior of pachinko machines during errors: How to deal with errors 5.
Solution: After cutting off the power, replace with a compatible ID product (matching ID product).

Status 7: ID error 2, 3 (mismatch (mismatch) between the performance operation unit + mismatch (mismatch) between the main control board and the payout control board)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the game boards are made up of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR and are compatible (aligned).
Combination of a split game board and a presentation operation unit: A state in which the game board is not composed of a split game board 5A and a presentation operation unit 300A and is incompatible (inconsistent).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent).
Behavior of pachinko machines during errors: Error handling 6.
Solution: After cutting off the power, replace with a compatible ID product (matching ID product).

Status 8: Unconnected error 1 (Cannot confirm connection to the right game board)
Combination of split game boards: There is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR (the input of the ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR cannot be confirmed), and a malfunction such as a short circuit or break has occurred in the transmission path that transmits various signals, making it impossible to confirm the connection.
Combination of a split game board and a presentation operation unit: A state in which the game board is composed of a split game board 5A and a presentation operation unit 300A and is compatible (aligned).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Behavior of pachinko machines during errors: How to deal with errors 7.
Solution: Check the connection after cutting off the power.

Status 9: Unconnected error 2 (Cannot confirm connection to the production operation unit)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the game boards are made up of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR and are compatible (aligned).
Combination of a split game board and a presentation operation unit: There is no ID code signal input from the presentation operation unit 300A (the input of the ID code signal from the presentation operation unit 300A cannot be confirmed), and a malfunction such as a short circuit or break has occurred in the transmission path that transmits various signals, making it impossible to confirm the connection.
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Behavior of pachinko machines during errors: Error handling 8.
Solution: Check the connection after cutting off the power.

Status 10: Unconnected error 3 (Cannot confirm connection with the right game board + Cannot confirm connection with the performance operation unit)
Combination of split game boards: There is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR (the input of the ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR cannot be confirmed), and a malfunction such as a short circuit or break has occurred in the transmission path that transmits various signals, making it impossible to confirm the connection.
Combination of a split game board and a presentation operation unit: There is no ID code signal input from the presentation operation unit 300A (the input of the ID code signal from the presentation operation unit 300A cannot be confirmed), and a malfunction such as a short circuit or break has occurred in the transmission path that transmits various signals, making it impossible to confirm the connection.
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Behavior of pachinko machines during errors: How to deal with errors 9.
Solution: Check the connection after cutting off the power.

Next, error response 1 to error response 9 as the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in Figure 254 (c) will be explained with reference to Figures 256 to 258 as specific example 1, and with reference to Figures 259 to 261 as specific example 2, for cases where there is no magnetic detection (so-called magnetic goto) when the power is turned on (including recovery from a power outage and recovery from a momentary power outage; the same applies below), when the performance progresses after the power is turned on (for example, when the performance progresses based on the fact that a game ball has entered one of the various winning slots) or when the machine is waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or a still image is displayed), and cases where there is magnetic detection (magnetic goto) when the performance progresses after the power is turned on (for example, when the performance progresses based on the fact that a game ball has entered one of the various winning slots) or when the machine is waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or a still image is displayed). Fig. 256 is a table showing various error responses (specific example 1) when the power is turned on, Fig. 257 is a table showing various error responses (specific example 1) when the performance is progressing after the power is turned on or when waiting for customers, and Fig. 258 is a table showing various error responses (specific example 1) when the performance is progressing after the power is turned on or when waiting for customers. Also, Fig. 259 is a table showing various error responses (specific example 2) when the power is turned on, Fig. 260 is a table showing various error responses (specific example 2) when the performance is progressing after the power is turned on or when waiting for customers, and Fig. 261 is a table showing various error responses (specific example 2) when the performance is progressing after the power is turned on or when waiting for customers. The various ID errors (including individual ID errors such as ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in FIG. 254(c), as well as combinations of these ID errors) hinder gameplay to a greater extent than the various unconnected errors (unconnected error 1, unconnected error 2, and unconnected error 3 shown in FIG. 254(c)). Furthermore, while magnetic detection is resolved after a certain period of time has passed, ID errors and unconnected errors are not resolved even after a certain period of time has passed.

256 to 261, the "error response number" corresponds to error response 1 to error response 9 as the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in FIG. 254 (c), "audio" indicates the audio type coming from the various speakers equipped in the pachinko machine, "various LEDs of the door frame unit (various LEDs related to performance (various decorative LEDs))" indicates the light emission type of the various LEDs (various LEDs related to performance (various decorative LEDs)) provided on the door frame units such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200 and the door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, and "various LEDs of the game board (various LEDs related to performance (various decorative LEDs))" indicates the light emission type of the various LEDs (various LEDs related to performance (various decorative LEDs)) provided on the game board (divided game board). It indicates the light emission mode, "performance display device" indicates the display mode of the performance display device 1600 provided on the game board (split game board), "sub performance display device" is provided on the game board (split game board) or door frame unit separately from the performance display device 1600 provided on the game board (split game board) and indicates the display mode of the sub performance display device, "function display unit" indicates the display mode of the function display unit 1400 provided on the game board (split game board), "sub function display unit" indicates the display mode of the sub function display unit 2250 provided on the game board (split game board), "game board side movable body (movable body related to performance)" indicates the operation of various movable bodies (movable body related to performance) provided on the game board (split game board), and "door frame side" indicates the operation of various movable bodies provided on the door frame unit.

Of the above items, "audio", "various LEDs on the door frame unit (various LEDs related to performance (various decorative LEDs))", "various LEDs on the game board (various LEDs related to performance (various decorative LEDs))", "performance display device", "sub-performance display device", "sub-function display unit", "game board side movable body (movable body related to performance)", and "game frame side movable body" are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board (split game board), while the "function display unit" is controlled by the main control board 1310 provided on the game board (split game board). Note that if a sub-performance display device is not provided in the pachinko machine, the content displayed on the sub-performance display device is displayed on the performance display device 1600 provided on the game board (split game board).

As described above, the door frame unit is provided with the presentation operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200. Some presentation operation units 300 are not provided with the ID output circuit described above, that is, some presentation operation units 300 are not provided with any ID for self-identification and are used in common with all specifications. In such a case, when the presentation operation unit 300 is provided with a movable body such as the presentation operation unit 301, the movable body provided in the presentation operation unit 300 is treated as included in the "game frame side movable body", and various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative boards (e.g., the presentation operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320, the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, etc.) provided in the presentation operation unit 300 are treated as included in the "various LEDs of the door frame unit".

In Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) and Error Response 7, "movable body on the game board" refers to the various movable bodies on the left game board, and in Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 response) and Error Response 8, it refers to the various movable bodies on the left game board and/or the various movable bodies on the right game board.

When error response 1 to error response 9 occurs as shown in Fig. 254(c), which is the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 and open the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 in order to deal with these various errors. At this time, although the pachinko machine 1 is in a state in which the door is open, it is configured not to notify the user that the door is open in order to prioritize the notification of error responses 1 to 9.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum values in step S30 of the main control power-on processing shown in FIG. 210 do not match after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, it displays an error in step S33 of the same processing as a RAM error in the main control's built-in RAM, and then restarts the machine. Even after restarting, the contents of the main control's built-in RAM are not updated at all, and the process again proceeds to the error display processing in step S33 due to the determination in step S30, and the restart is repeated, resulting in a state where play is stopped.

When such a RAM error occurs, even if error response 1 to error response 9 occurs as the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in FIG. 254(c), only a notification (error display) is given to inform the user that a RAM error has occurred, whereas the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in FIG. 254(c) is such that no notification is given to inform the user that error response 1 to error response 9 has occurred.

To prevent repeated restarts, it is necessary to insert the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turn it ON, then operate the power switch 630a on the power supply board 630 while pressing the pressing part of the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633 to power on the pachinko machine 1. This operation causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to perform the setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on process, clear all areas of the RAM in step S38, and then proceed with the game by the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 212. Because the setting key is an important key, only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game parlor, are allowed to possess it, and it is limited to two or three people.

When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays, for example, "Power being restored" on a black background on the performance display device 1600 as the startup mode. At this time, "Power being restored" may be followed by "Setting" or "Setting" may be displayed instead of "Power being restored". In this case, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process, it needs to send a setting change start command to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting change is about to begin.

After the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has completed the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, that is, when it receives a setting change command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 uses this as a trigger to notify the user that error response 1 to error response 9 has occurred as the behavior of the pachinko machine in an error as shown in Figure 254 (c). In other words, even if Error Response 1 to Error Response 9 occurs as the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in FIG. 254(c), if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, causing the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to perform the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process (until a predetermined period of time has elapsed until this setting change process is completed, in other words, until a setting change command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 can change the error notification start time that notifies the user of the occurrence of an ID error or unconnected error in Error Response 1 to Error Response 9 by operating the setting key held by a limited number of people at the game hall.

[Specific example 1: When power is turned on]
First, error responses 1 to 9, which are behaviors of a pachinko machine in the event of an error as shown in Figure 254 (c) when the power is turned on, will be explained with reference to Figure 256.
[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
Audio: After the start-up music ends, an announcement sound "Please call an attendant" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound seven times. This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Turn off (all off).
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: Displays notification text such as "Power being restored" and "Please wait" on a black background, and when the startup music ends, displays the image from the performance.
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, a notification text "Game board ID error" is displayed on a specified background image.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Movable body on game board: No movement such as returning to original position (not in operation).
Movable body on game frame: No movement such as returning to original position (not in operation).

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling).
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, a notification text "Performance operation button ID error" is displayed on a specified background image.
Function display unit: Same as Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling)]
Audio: After the start-up music ends, an announcement sound "Please call an attendant" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound twice. This audio pattern is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling).
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music begins, a specified background image is displayed with the warning message "Main Payout ID Error" indicating that there is an inconsistency in the combination of the main control board provided on the game board (split game board) and the payout control board provided on the main frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is attached.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Movable body on the game board: Has operations such as returning to the original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: Has operations such as returning to the original position (operation).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling).
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music begins, the notification text "Game board ID error" and "Performance operation button ID error" are displayed on a specified background image (this is a combination of the contents of error response 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) and error response 2 (corresponding to ID error 2) (Error response 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) + Error response 2 (corresponding to ID error 2))).
Function display unit: Same as Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the startup music begins, the notification text "Main Payout ID Error" and "Game Board ID Error" are displayed on a specified background image (this is a combination of the contents of Error Response 3 (corresponding to ID error 3) and Error Response 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) (Error Response 3 (corresponding to ID error 3) + Error Response 1 (corresponding to ID error 1))).
Function display unit: Same as Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the startup music begins, the notification text "Main payment ID error" and "Performance operation button ID error" are displayed on a specified background image (this is a combination of the contents of error response 3 (compatible with ID error 3) and error response 2 (compatible with ID error 2) (Error response 3 (compatible with ID error 3) + Error response 2 (compatible with ID error 2))).
Function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Sound: After the start-up music ends, an announcement sound "Game board not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. This sound pattern is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flash red.
Performance display device: Displays the notification text "Power being restored" and "Please wait a moment" on a black background, as well as the notification text "The game board cable has been detected as not being inserted" and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable", and when the startup music ends, displays the image during the performance.
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, a notification text "Game board not connected" is displayed on a specified background image.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Movable body on game board: No movement such as returning to original position (not in operation).
Movable body on game frame: No movement such as returning to original position (not in operation).

[Error handling 8]
Sound: After the start-up music ends, an announcement sound is played saying "The production operation unit is not connected" and a specified error notification sound is played four times. This type of sound is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flash red.
Performance display device: Displays the following information on a black background: "Power being restored" and "Please wait a moment", "The performance operation unit cable has been detected as not being inserted", "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable", and when the startup music ends, displays the image from the performance.
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music begins, a notification message saying "Performance operation unit not connected" is displayed on a specified background image.
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).

[Error handling 9]
Sound: After the start-up music ends, the first announcement sound "The game board is not connected" is played, followed by four predetermined error notification sounds, followed by the second announcement sound "The performance operation unit is not connected" and four predetermined error notification sounds. Such sound patterns are played repeatedly (combining the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: Flash red (same as error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Performance display device: Displays the following notification text on a black background: "Power being restored" and "Please wait a moment", and also displays the following notification text: "It has been detected that the game board cable is not inserted", "It has been detected that the performance operation unit cable is not inserted", "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable", and when the startup music ends, displays the image during the performance (combines the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music begins, it displays notification text such as "Game board not connected" and "Performance operation unit not connected" on a specified background image (this is a combination of the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).

[Example 1: When there is no magnetic detection (so-called magnet goto) during the performance or while waiting for customers after the power is turned on]
Next, referring to FIG. 257, we will explain error responses 1 to 9 as the behavior of a pachinko machine during an error shown in FIG. 254(c) when there is no magnetic detection (so-called magnetic goto) while the performance is progressing after the power is turned on (for example, when the performance progresses based on the entry of game balls into various winning ports) or while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when a still image is displayed).

[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
Voice: An announcement saying "Please call a staff member" is played, and a predetermined error notification sound is played seven times. This type of voice is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Turn off (all off).
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: Displays the message "Please wait a moment" on the image during the performance (such as an image displayed as the performance progresses; the same applies below) or on the image while waiting for customers (such as an image displayed as the demonstration progresses; the same applies below).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the notification text "Game board ID error" on the image during performance or on the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Movable body on game board side: No operation such as returning to original position (not yet operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers in addition to the progress of the performance, it may be stopped at the time when this error occurs or may be returned to the original position.
Movable body on the game frame: No operation such as returning to the original position (not yet operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers in addition to the progress of the performance, it may be stopped at the time when this error occurs or may be returned to the original position.

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the warning text "Performance operation button ID error" on the image during performance or on the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: Same as Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling)]
Voice: An announcement sound "Please call a staff member" is played and a predetermined error notification sound is played twice. This type of voice pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling).
Sub-performance display device: In the image during performance or the image while waiting for customers, a warning message "Main Payout ID Error" is displayed because there is an inconsistency in the combination of the main control board on the game board (split game board) and the payout control board on the main frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is attached.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to the original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to the original position (operation).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the notification text "Game board ID error" and "Performance operation button ID error" on the image during performance or on the image while waiting for customers (this is a combination of the contents of error response 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) and error response 2 (corresponding to ID error 2) (Error response 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) + Error response 2 (corresponding to ID error 2))).
Function display unit: Same as Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the notification text "Main payout ID error" and "Game board ID error" on the image during performance or the image while waiting for customers (this is a combination of the contents of error response 3 (corresponding to ID error 3) and error response 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) (Error response 3 (corresponding to ID error 3) + Error response 1 (corresponding to ID error 1))).
Function display unit: Same as Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the notification text "Main payment ID error" and "Performance operation button ID error" on the image during performance or the image while customers are waiting (this is a combination of the contents of error response 3 (compatible with ID error 3) and error response 2 (compatible with ID error 2) (Error response 3 (compatible with ID error 3) + Error response 2 (compatible with ID error 2))).
Function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Sound: Play the announcement sound "Game board not connected" and play a predetermined error notification sound four times. This sound pattern is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flash red.
Performance display device: Displays notification text such as "The game board cable has been detected as not being inserted" and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Sub-performance display device: Displays the notification text "Game board not connected" on the image during performance or on the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Movable body on game board side: No operation such as returning to original position (not yet operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers in addition to the progress of the performance, it may be stopped at the time when this error occurs or may be returned to the original position.
Movable body on the game frame: No operation such as returning to the original position (not yet operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers in addition to the progress of the performance, it may be stopped at the time when this error occurs or may be returned to the original position.

[Error handling 8]
Audio: Play the announcement "The production operation unit is not connected" and play a specified error notification sound four times. This audio pattern is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flash red.
Performance display device: Displays warning messages such as "The performance operation unit cable has been detected as not being inserted" and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Sub-performance display device: Displays the notification text "Performance operation unit not connected" on the image during performance or on the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).

[Error handling 9]
Sound: The first announcement sound "The game board is not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times, followed by a second announcement sound "The performance operation unit is not connected" and then a predetermined error notification sound four times. This type of sound is played repeatedly (combining the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Performance display device: Displays notification text such as "It has been detected that the game board cable has not been inserted", "It has been detected that the performance operation unit cable has not been inserted", and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers (this is a combination of the contents of error response 7 and the contents of error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Sub-performance display device: Displays notification text such as "Game board not connected" or "Performance operation unit not connected" on the image during performance or the image while waiting for customers (combining the contents of error response 7 and the contents of error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).

[Example 1: When magnetic detection (magnetic goto) occurs during a performance or while waiting for customers after the power is turned on]

Next, with reference to FIG. 258, we will explain error responses 1 to 9 as the behavior of the pachinko machine in an error shown in FIG. 254(c) when magnetic detection (magnetic gobbling) is involved during the performance progress after the power is turned on (for example, when the performance progresses based on the game ball entering the various winning holes) or when waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when a still image is displayed). When magnetic detection (magnetic gobbling) is no longer present, the behavior of the pachinko machine in an error (error responses 1 to 9) will be as shown in FIG. 257 when magnetic detection (magnetic gobbling) is not involved during the performance progress after the power is turned on (for example, when the performance progresses based on the game ball entering the various winning holes) or when waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when a still image is displayed).

[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
Voice: An announcement saying "Please call a staff member" is played, and a predetermined error notification sound is played three times. This type of voice is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Turn off (all off).
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: displays images during a performance (such as images displayed as the performance progresses, the same applies below) or images while customers are waiting (such as images displayed as the demonstration progresses, the same applies below).
Sub-performance display device: Displays notification text such as "Magnet detected" and "Game board ID error" on the image during performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Movable body on game board side: No operation such as returning to original position (not yet operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers in addition to the progress of the performance, it may be stopped at the time when this error occurs or may be returned to the original position.
Movable body on the game frame: No operation such as returning to the original position (not yet operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers in addition to the progress of the performance, it may be stopped at the time when this error occurs or may be returned to the original position.

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Displays warning text such as "Magnet detected" and "Performance operation button ID error" on the image during performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: Same as Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling)]
Voice: An announcement sound "Please call a staff member" is played and a predetermined error notification sound is played twice. This type of voice pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling).
Sub-performance display device: In the image during performance or the image while waiting for customers, the device displays the warning messages "Main payout ID error" and "Magnet detected" due to an inconsistency in the combination of the main control board on the game board (split game board) and the payout control board on the main frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is attached.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to the original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to the original position (operation).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the notification text "Magnet detected", "Game board ID error", and "Performance operation button ID error" on the image during performance or the image while waiting for customers (this is a combination of the contents of Error Response 1 (compatible with ID error 1) and Error Response 2 (compatible with ID error 2) (Error Response 1 (compatible with ID error 1) + Error Response 2 (compatible with ID error 2))).
Function display unit: Same as Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the notification text "Main payout ID error,""Game board ID error," and "Magnet detected" on the image during performance or the image while waiting for customers (this is a combination of the contents of Error Response 3 (compatible with ID error 3) and Error Response 1 (compatible with ID error 1) (Error Response 3 (compatible with ID error 3) + Error Response 1 (compatible with ID error 1))).
Function display unit: Same as Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the warning text "Main payment ID error,""Performance operation button ID error," and "Magnet detected" on the image during performance or the image while customers are waiting (this is a combination of the contents of Error Response 3 (ID error 3 response) and Error Response 2 (ID error 2 response) (Error Response 3 (ID error 3 response) + Error Response 2 (ID error 2 response))).
Function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Sound: Play the announcement sound "Game board not connected" and play a predetermined error notification sound four times. This sound pattern is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flash red.
Performance display device: Displays notification text such as "The game board cable has been detected as not being inserted" and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Sub-performance display device: Displays notification text such as "Magnet detected" and "Game board not connected" on the image during performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Movable body on game board side: No operation such as returning to original position (not yet operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers in addition to the progress of the performance, it may be stopped at the time when this error occurs or may be returned to the original position.
Movable body on the game frame: No operation such as returning to the original position (not yet operating). In addition to the progress of the performance, if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, it may be stopped at the time when this error occurs or may be returned to the original position.

[Error handling 8]
Audio: Play the announcement "The production operation unit is not connected" and play a specified error notification sound four times. This audio pattern is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flash red.
Performance display device: Displays warning messages such as "The performance operation unit cable has been detected as not being inserted" and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Sub-performance display device: Displays warning text such as "Magnet detected" and "Performance operation unit not connected" on the image during performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: Play the announcement "Game board is not connected" and play the specified error notification sound four times, then play the announcement "Production operation unit is not connected" and play the specified error notification sound four times. This audio pattern is repeated (combining the contents of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Performance display device: Displays notification text such as "It has been detected that the game board cable has not been inserted", "It has been detected that the performance operation unit cable has not been inserted", and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers (this is a combination of the contents of error response 7 and the contents of error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Sub-performance display device: Displays warning text such as "Magnet detected,""Game board not connected," and "Performance operation unit not connected" on the image during performance or the image while waiting for customers (combining the contents of error response 7 and the contents of error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).

[Specific example 2: When power is turned on]
Next, error responses 1 to 9, which are behaviors of a pachinko machine in the event of an error as shown in Figure 254 (c) when the power is turned on, will be explained with reference to Figure 259.
[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
Audio: When the power is turned on, there is no start-up music and the sound is muted. After that, the specified error notification sound is played once and the message "A connection error has occurred on the game board. Please turn off the power and check the game board." This type of audio is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: After displaying "Power being restored" on a black background, it displays "Game board error", "Error number:", "Game board connection error", "Turn off the power and check the game board". The screen displays the notification text "Please connect the Pachinko machine to a new location" and an image of the game board connection error part of the Pachinko machine lit up.
Sub-performance display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Movable body on the game board: Has actions such as returning to the original position and progressing the performance (actions).
Movable body on game frame: No movement such as returning to original position (not in operation).

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: When the power is turned on, there is no start-up music and the sound is muted, then a specific error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying "A connection error has occurred in the production operation unit. Please turn off the power and check the production operation unit." This type of audio is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: After displaying "Power being restored" on a black background, it displays the following notification text: "Performance operation unit error occurred", "Error number:", "Performance operation unit connection error", "Please turn off the power and check the performance operation unit", and displays an image of the performance operation unit connection error part of the pachinko machine lit up.
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, a notification text "Performance operation button ID error" is displayed on a specified background image.
Function display unit: Same as Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling)]
Audio: When the power is turned on, there is no start-up music and the sound is muted. After that, a specific error notification sound is played once, and then an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" is played. This type of audio is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: After displaying "Power being restored" on a black background, it displays warning messages such as "Main payout error occurred", "Error number:", "Main payout connection error", and "Please check the main control and payout control after turning off the power" as there is an inconsistency in the combination of the main control board on the game board (split game board) and the payout control board on the main frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is attached, and also displays an image indicating that the game board and frame cannot be combined.
Sub-performance display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Movable body on the game board: Has operations such as returning to the original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: Has operations such as returning to the original position (operation).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Function display unit: Same as Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Function display unit: Same as Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Sound: When the power is turned on, there is no start-up music and the sound is muted. After that, a specific error notification sound is played once, and then an announcement sound saying "The game board is not connected" is played. This type of sound is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash white.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: After displaying "Power being restored" on a black background, the display switches to the image during the performance (such as the image displayed as the performance progresses, same below), and displays the notification text "Error number:" and "Game board unconnected error."
Sub-performance display device: displays images during performance.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Movable body on the game board: Has operations such as returning to the original position (operation).
Movable body on game frame: No movement such as returning to original position (not in operation).

[Error handling 8]
Sound: When the power is turned on, there is no start-up music and the sound is muted. After that, a specific error notification sound is played once, and then an announcement sound saying "The production operation unit is not connected" is played. This type of sound is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash white.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: After displaying "Power being restored" on a black background, the display switches to the image during the performance and displays the warning text "Error number:" and "Performance operation unit not connected error."
Sub-performance display device: displays images during performance.
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).

[Error handling 9]
Sound: When the power is turned on, there is no start-up music and the sound is muted, then a specified error alert sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying "The game board is not connected," followed by a specified error alert sound once, followed by an announcement sound saying "The presentation operation unit is not connected" (this combines the contents of Error Response 7 and the contents of Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash white (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off) (same as error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Performance display device: Displays "Power being restored" on a black background, then switches to the image during performance, displays the notification text "Error number:" and "Game board unconnected error", and displays the notification text "Error number:" and "Performance operation unit unconnected error" (combines the contents of Error Response 7 and the contents of Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Sub-performance display device: displays images during performance (a combination of the contents of error response 7 and the contents of error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).

In addition, if the performance operation unit 300 is not provided with any ID for identifying itself and can be used in common with any specifications, in Specific Example 2: Error Responses 1 to 6 when power is turned on, the various LEDs of the door frame unit flash red, and therefore the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit also flash red, but only a portion of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or a specific LED among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) may be turned off (all turned off), or all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit may be turned off (all turned off). In addition, in Specific Example 2: Error Response 7 to Error Response 9 when the power is turned on, the various LEDs of the door frame unit flash in white, so the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit also flash in white, but only a portion of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (various LEDs mounted on one decorative board among the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) may be turned off (all off), or all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit may be turned off (all off). In other words, when only a portion of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (various LEDs mounted on one decorative board among the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) are turned off (all off), there is no restriction that the other various LEDs are turned off (all off) except for a portion of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (various LEDs mounted on one decorative board among the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards).

[Example 2: When there is no magnetic detection (so-called magnet goto) during the performance or while waiting for customers after the power is turned on]
Next, referring to FIG. 260, error responses 1 to 9 will be explained as the behavior of a pachinko machine during an error shown in FIG. 254(c) when there is no magnetic detection (so-called magnetic goto) while the performance is progressing after the power is turned on (for example, when the performance progresses based on the entry of game balls into various winning ports) or while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when a still image is displayed).

[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying "A connection error has occurred on the game board. Please turn off the power and check the game board." This type of audio is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: Displays the following notification text on a black background: "Game board error occurred", "Error number:", "Game board connection error", "Please turn off the power and check the game board", and displays an image of the game board connection error part of the pachinko machine lit up.
Sub-performance display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to the original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: No operation such as returning to the original position (not yet operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers in addition to the progress of the performance, it may be stopped at the time when this error occurs or may be returned to the original position.

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying, "A connection error has occurred in the production operation unit. Please turn off the power and check the production operation unit." This type of audio is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: Displays the following warning text on a black background: "Performance operation unit error occurred", "Error number:", "Performance operation unit connection error", "Please turn off the power and check the performance operation unit", and displays an image of the performance operation unit connection error part of the pachinko machine lit up.
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Function display unit: Same as Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying "Please call a staff member." This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: On a black background, it displays warning messages such as "Main payout error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Main payout connection error," and "Please turn off the power and then check the main control and payout control" to indicate that there is an inconsistency in the combination of the main control board on the game board (split game board) and the payout control board on the main frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is attached, and also displays an image indicating that the game board and frame cannot be combined.
Sub-performance display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to the original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to the original position (operation).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Function display unit: Same as Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Function display unit: Same as Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Sound: Along with the sound effects, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, and an announcement sound saying "The game board is not connected" is played. Such sound patterns are repeatedly played together with the sound effects.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash white.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: displays images during a performance (such as images displayed as the performance progresses, the same applies below) or images while customers are waiting (such as images displayed as the demonstration progresses, the same applies below).
Sub-performance display device: displays images during performance or images while customers are waiting.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to the original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to the original position (operation).

[Error handling 8]
Audio: Along with the sound effects, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, and an announcement sound saying "The sound effects operation unit is not connected" is played. Along with the sound effects, this type of audio is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash white.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: displays images during performance or images while customers are waiting.
Sub-performance display device: displays images during performance or images while customers are waiting.
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: Along with the sound effects, a specific error notification sound is played once, an announcement sound saying "The game board is not connected" is played, followed by a specific error notification sound once, and an announcement sound saying "The operation unit is not connected." This type of audio is played repeatedly along with the sound effects (combining the contents of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Performance display device: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Sub-performance display device: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).

In addition, if the performance operation unit 300 is not provided with any ID for identifying itself and can be used in common with any specifications, in Specific Example 2: Error Responses 1 to 6 when there is no power-on (magnetic gouge), the various LEDs of the door frame unit flash red, and therefore the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit also flash red, but only a portion of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or a specific LED among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) may be turned off (all turned off), or all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit may be turned off (all turned off). In addition, in specific example 2: Error responses 7 to 9 when no magnetic interference occurs after power is turned on, the various LEDs of the door frame unit flash white, and therefore the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit also flash white; however, only a portion of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or a specific LED among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) may be turned off (all turned off), or all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit may be turned off (all turned off). In other words, when only a portion of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or a specific LED among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) are turned off (all turned off), there is no restriction on turning off (all turned off) the other various LEDs except for a portion of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or a specific LED among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards).

[Example 2: When magnetic detection (magnetic goto) occurs during the performance or while waiting for customers after the power is turned on]

Next, with reference to FIG. 261, we will explain error responses 1 to 9 as the behavior of the pachinko machine in an error shown in FIG. 254(c) when magnetic detection (magnetic gobbling) is involved during the performance progress after the power is turned on (for example, when the performance progresses based on the game ball entering the various winning holes) or when waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when a still image is displayed). When magnetic detection (magnetic gobbling) is no longer involved, the behavior of the pachinko machine in an error (error responses 1 to 9) will be as shown in FIG. 260 when magnetic detection (magnetic gobbling) is not involved during the performance progress after the power is turned on (for example, when the performance progresses based on the game ball entering the various winning holes) or when waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when a still image is displayed).

[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying "A connection error has occurred on the game board. Please turn off the power and check the game board." This type of audio is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: Displays the following notification text on a black background: "Game board error occurred", "Error number:", "Game board connection error", "Please turn off the power and check the game board", and displays an image of the game board connection error part of the pachinko machine lit up.
Sub-performance display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to the original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: No operation such as returning to the original position (not yet operating). In addition to the progress of the performance, if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, it may be stopped at the time when this error occurs or may be returned to the original position.

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying, "A connection error has occurred in the production operation unit. Please turn off the power and check the production operation unit." This type of audio is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the following warning text on a black background: "Performance operation unit error occurred", "Error number:", "Performance operation unit connection error", "Please turn off the power and check the performance operation unit", and displays an image of the performance operation unit connection error part of the pachinko machine lit up.
Function display unit: Same as Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying "Please call a staff member." This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: On a black background, it displays warning messages such as "Main payout error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Main payout connection error," and "Please turn off the power and then check the main control and payout control" to indicate that there is an inconsistency in the combination of the main control board on the game board (split game board) and the payout control board on the main frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is attached, and also displays an image indicating that the game board and frame cannot be combined.
Sub-performance display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to the original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to the original position (operation).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Function display unit: Same as Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Function display unit: Same as Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Audio: A specific error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying "Magnetic sensor error." This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: Displays images during the performance (images displayed as the performance progresses, etc.; same below) or images while waiting for customers (images displayed as the demonstration progresses, etc.; same below), and displays the warning text "Error number:" and "Magnetic sensor error."
Sub-performance display device: displays images during performance or images while customers are waiting.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to the original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to the original position (operation).

[Error handling 8]
Audio: Same as error handling 7 (ID error handling 7).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: Same as error handling 7 (ID error handling 7).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game board side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).

In addition, if the performance operation unit 300 is not provided with any ID for identifying itself and can be used in common with any specifications, in Specific Example 2: Error Responses 1 to 9 when there is no power-on (magnetic goto), the various LEDs of the door frame unit flash red, and therefore the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit also flash red, but only a portion of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or a specific LED among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) may be turned off (all turned off), or all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit may be turned off (all turned off). In other words, when only a portion of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or a specific LED among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) are turned off (all turned off), there is no restriction on turning off (all turned off) the other various LEDs except for a portion of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or a specific LED among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards).

254(c) corresponding to state 8: unconnected error 1, state 9: unconnected error 2, and state 10: unconnected error 3, respectively, in error responses 7, 8, and 9 in FIGS. 256 to 261, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, as another example, automatically controls the various LED drivers that drive the various LEDs and the various electrical drive source drivers that drive the various electrical drive sources (for example, solenoid drive circuits and motor drive circuits, etc.) that are provided on the right game board 5AR and the performance operation unit 300A (300B) for which connection cannot be confirmed. Operation data (data to turn off the various LEDs, data to stop the electrical drive sources) may be sent, or non-operation data (data to turn off the various LEDs, data to stop the electrical drive sources) may be sent only once when a no-connection error occurs, or reset data (data to reset the various LED drivers, data to reset the various electrical drive source drivers (e.g., solenoid drive circuits, motor drive circuits, etc.)) may be included in the transmitted data to reset the various LED drivers and the various electrical drive source drivers.

[Combination of game board and door frame]
As described above, the door frame 3 is adapted to have door frame units (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450 attached to it. The door frame units are shaped according to a unified concept. The relationship between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 must be submitted to the application agency and approved. However, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, there are cases where the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is different from that submitted to the application agency and approved due to human error, and this is undesirable as it results in a pachinko machine that is different from the one whose specifications were submitted to the application agency and approved in the first place being installed in the game hall.

Therefore, in this embodiment, one of the decorative boards provided in the door frame unit (hereinafter referred to as the "frame side decorative board") is provided with a self-identification code (ID) that can identify it, and an ID comparison circuit is provided that can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit and output the judgment result. Here, the ID comparison circuit is described with reference to Figure 262. Figure 262 is a circuit diagram showing an example of an ID comparison circuit. Note that since there are compatible (matching) and incompatible (mismatching) combinations of the game board 5 and the door frame unit, a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units may be treated as a component of the game board 5. That is, the game board side component provided on the main frame 4 is composed of the game board 5 on which a microprocessor is mounted and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units on which a microprocessor is not mounted, and the game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4, and the specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units is mounted on the door frame 3 that is supported by the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. In other words, the game frame side component, which is composed of the outer frame 2, the door frame 3, and the main frame 4, is provided with the game board 5 on which a microprocessor is mounted and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units on which a microprocessor is not mounted. Various LEDs are provided on the game board 5 and the specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units, and are driven by various LED drivers.

[Various lines formed between the game board and the door frame]
First, various lines formed between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 will be briefly described. In the lower center of the rear box 3010 of the game board 5 shown in FIG. 132, etc., a lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW on which two lower game board drawer connectors UDRW are mounted in the left and right direction is arranged, not shown. The two lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are of a convex type. The lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via various relay boards or directly. Two main body frame side drawer connectors, not shown, are provided on a main body frame side relay board, not shown, at positions on the front of the main body frame 4 that correspond to the two lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW provided on the rear box 3010 of the game board 5. The two main body frame side drawer connectors are of a concave type. The various boards provided in the door frame 3 (decorative boards and various relay boards provided in the dish unit 200, door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, and door frame top unit 450. The various relay boards include those that relay detection signals from various sensors in the performance operation unit 300 of the dish unit 200) are electrically connected to the main frame side drawer connector.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, which is a convex type, are guided and fitted into two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, which is a concave type, so that each terminal of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 is electrically connected to each terminal of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. Through this drawer connector, the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the rear box 3010 of the game board 5 and various boards provided in the door frame 3 (decorative boards and various relay boards provided on the dish unit 200, door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, and door frame top unit 450. The various relay boards include the decorative boards and various relay boards provided on the performance operation unit 300 of the dish unit 200. These include relays for relaying detection signals from various sensors and control signals that transmit various information.), and a ground (GND) line is formed that electrically connects the grounds (GND, circuit ground) of the various control boards and other boards arranged behind the rear box 3010 of the game board 5 to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the power supply board 630 provided in the main body frame 4, and various power supply lines are formed that supply various power sources (DC power sources of +5V, +12V, +24V, etc.) created by the power supply board 630 provided in the main body frame 4 to the various control boards and other boards arranged behind the rear box 3010 of the game board 5. In addition, various power supply lines that supply various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V, etc.) created by the power supply board 630 provided in the main frame 4 and ground (GND) lines that electrically connect to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the power supply board 630 are formed via electrical wiring to the various boards provided in the door frame 3 (decorative boards and various relay boards provided in the dish unit 200, the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, and the door frame top unit 450. The various relay boards include those that relay detection signals from various sensors in the performance operation unit 300 of the dish unit 200 and control signals that transmit various information).

In addition, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, forming a control signal line that transmits various control signals between the main control board 1310 located behind the rear box 3010 of the game board 5 and the payout control board 633 provided on the main frame 4 via this drawer connector.

The insulating exterior parts of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW and the insulating exterior parts of the main frame side drawer connector each have a mounting through hole. The lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 on which the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are mounted has a through hole at a position corresponding to the insulating mounting through hole of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW. The main frame side relay board (not shown) on which the main frame side drawer connector is mounted has a through hole at a position corresponding to the insulating mounting through hole of the main frame side drawer connector.

[ID comparison circuit]
The ID comparison circuit WIDC provided on the frame side decorative board WKB as one of the decorative boards provided in a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units, is mainly composed of an LED driver WIDCa and an 8-bit digital comparator circuit WIDCb (hereinafter referred to as the ``comparator circuit WIDCb'') as shown in FIG. 262.

The LED driver WIDCa has 24 output channels that are electrically connected to the LED elements, and is a sink-type constant current drive circuit that can supply a constant current to each channel. The maximum current of this output current is set by an output current setting circuit WIDCc that is provided outside the LED driver WIDCa. The LED driver WIDCa is assigned a self-identification code (ID) that allows it to identify itself, and the ID is set to one of the settings from 1 to 64 by an address setting circuit WIDCd that is provided outside the LED driver WIDCa.

The output current setting circuit WIDCc is electrically connected to the maximum output current setting terminals Rx1, Rx2, and Rx3 of the LED driver WIDCa, and by electrically connecting a predetermined resistor to each of them, it is possible to set the maximum output current of each output channel. In other words, in this embodiment, the maximum output current is set by a hardware configuration, and the maximum output current cannot be changed by software (program).

The address setting circuit WIDCd is electrically connected to the ID setting terminals ID1, ID2, and ID3 of the LED driver WIDCa, and a setting value between setting value 1 and setting value 64 is set depending on the voltage applied to each of them. In other words, in this embodiment, the ID of the LED driver WIDCa is set by a hardware configuration, and the ID of the LED driver WIDCa cannot be changed by software (program).

In this embodiment, the ID of the LED driver WIDCa is set to a set value of 64. This is because, in addition to the door frame unit, LED drivers are also mounted on various decorative boards and various boards provided on the game board 5, and the number of LED drivers changes depending on the model, so in program development it is necessary to prevent confusion between the LED driver WIDCa of the ID comparison circuit WIDC and other LED drivers. Therefore, for the frame side decorative board WKB on which the ID comparison circuit WIDC is provided, the ID of the LED driver WIDCa is always fixed to a set value of 64.

The RST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the LED driver WIDCa, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal, are electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame side decorative board WKB, and the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal, is electrically connected to +5V. Of the 24 output terminals of the LED driver WIDCa, the OUT0 terminal to OUT23 terminal, the 8 output terminals, the OUT0 terminal to OUT7 terminal, output to the comparator circuit WIDCb, and the remaining 16 output terminals, the OUT8 terminal to OUT23 terminal, are either not connected or are electrically connected to LED elements. In the case of a single-color LED, one LED element is packaged and the cathode terminal is electrically connected to one output terminal, and in the case of a full-color LED, three LED elements (red LED element, green LED element, blue LED element) are packaged and the cathode terminals are electrically connected to the corresponding three output terminals. The anode terminal of the LED element is electrically connected to +12V. In addition, heat generation from the LED element may be suppressed by inserting a resistor between the cathode terminal of the LED element and the output terminal of the LED driver WIDCa (i.e., electrically connecting the cathode terminal of the LED element to one end of the resistor, and electrically connecting the other end of the resistor to the output terminal of the LED driver WIDCa).

The SDA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the LED driver WIDCa, receives a light emission information signal, which is serial data from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5, by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. The peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to a plurality of serial communication lines for transmitting and receiving various serial data to and from various boards and door units in the game board 5.

The SCLK terminal, which is the clock signal input terminal of the LED driver WIDCa, receives the light emission information clock signal, which is a clock signal for transmitting the light emission information signal from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5, by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. Through this drawer connector,

The light emission information signal input to the SDA terminal of the LED driver WIDCa based on the light emission information clock signal input to the SCLK terminal of the LED driver WIDCa is composed of an ID code that indicates which LED driver the light emission information signal is for, and light emission data that indicates the light emission mode of the LED. When the ID code included in the light emission information signal matches the ID set by the address setting circuit WIDCd, the LED driver captures the light emission data included in the light emission information signal and controls the light emission mode of the various LEDs electrically connected to the 24 output terminals OUT0 terminal to OUT23 terminal based on the captured light emission data, while when the ID code included in the light emission information signal does not match the ID set by the address setting circuit WIDCd, the light emission data included in the light emission information signal is not captured and is discarded, and the control is performed to maintain the light emission mode of the various LEDs electrically connected to the 24 output terminals OUT0 terminal to OUT23 terminal based on the previously captured light emission data.

As described above, the light emission information signal for the LED driver WIDCa is composed of an ID code and light emission data, and the light emission data includes the ID of the frame side decorative board WKB. In other words, the light emission data is composed of information that is compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb using signals output from the eight output terminals OUT0 to OUT7, and information that is output from the 16 output terminals OUT8 to OUT23.

The signals output from the eight output terminals OUT0 to OUT7 of the LED driver WIDCa are input to the eight input terminals P0 to P7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb. The eight setting terminals Q0 to Q7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb correspond one-to-one with the eight input terminals P0 to P7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb and are the original source that is referenced.

In this embodiment, the eight reference setting terminals Q0 to Q7 are expressed as 8-bit width with Q0 terminal as the most significant bit and Q7 terminal as the least significant bit, resulting in 11110000B (the letter "B" represents a binary number), which is expressed in hexadecimal notation as F0H (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The inverted G terminal, which is the enable terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb (shown in the diagram as a solid line above the letter "G"), and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb, are electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame side decorative board WKB. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb, is electrically connected to +5V.

When the logic of the signals input to the eight input terminals P0 to P7 to be compared matches the logic set to the eight setting terminals Q0 to Q7 to be referenced, the comparator circuit WIDCb sets the logic of the ID valid signal from the output terminal inverted P=Q terminal (shown in the figure with a solid line above the English symbol "P=Q") to valid logic (logic LOW) and outputs it. On the other hand, when the logic of the signals input to the eight input terminals P0 to P7 to be compared does not match the logic set to the eight setting terminals Q0 to Q7 to be referenced, the comparator circuit WIDCb sets the logic of the ID valid signal from the output terminal inverted P=Q terminal to invalid logic (logic HI), which is the inverse of the valid logic (logic LOW).

In this way, when the logic of the ID valid signal is set to valid logic, a determination result can be conveyed that the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units is compatible (matched), whereas when the logic of the ID valid signal is set to invalid logic, a determination result can be conveyed that the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units is not compatible (matched).

The ID valid signal output from the inverted P=Q terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb is transmitted from the frame side decorative board WKB via electrical wiring (harness) to the relay board TKB provided on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3. In addition, the light emission information signal and light emission information clock signal input from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame side decorative board WKB are transmitted to other frame side decorative boards via electrical wiring (harness).

[Relay board provided in dish unit]
Next, the relay board TKB provided in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 to which the ID valid signal output from the inverted P=Q terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb in the frame side decorative board WKB is input via electrical wiring (harness) will be described with reference to Fig. 263. Fig. 263 is a circuit diagram showing an example of the circuit of the relay board provided in the dish unit.

The relay board TKB provided on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is equipped with a door frame side information output circuit TOC to which detection signals from various sensors provided on the performance operation unit 300 attached to the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 and detection signals from various sensors provided on other units of the door frame 3 (for example, if a movable body is provided on the door frame 3, detection signals from a photosensor that detects the original position or moving position of the movable body, and detection signals from a distance measuring sensor that detects the player's actions at the door frame 3 (holding a hand, waving, etc.)) are input).

The door frame side information output circuit TOC is mainly composed of two parallel-serial conversion circuits TOCa and TOCb. The parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCa and TOCb are electronic components made into chips mainly consisting of multiple flip-flop circuits (8 flip-flop circuits), and are the same electronic components as the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC shown in FIG. 251 etc.

The door frame side information output circuits TOCa and TOCb have eight input terminals, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H (i.e., eight terminals with 8-bit parallel inputs), a CK terminal to which an information acquisition clock signal is input, a non-inverting QH terminal which takes in information input to the eight input terminals A through H and serially outputs it as serial data without inverting it, an inverting QH terminal (shown in the diagram with a solid line above the letter "Q") which takes in information set in the eight input terminals A through H and serially outputs it as serial data by inverting it, and a CK terminal which prohibits the input of a clock signal. It is mainly composed of an INH terminal, an S/inverted L terminal (shown in the diagram as a solid line above the letter "L") that switches between a shift operation based on the information acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal and a parallel operation in which each flip-flop circuit takes in information set in the eight input terminals A to H, an SI terminal to which serial data is input, a power supply terminal Vcc to which control power is supplied, and a GND terminal that is electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground).

The eight input terminals A to H of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa, and the four input terminals A to D of the eight input terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCb, receive detection signals from various sensors installed in the performance operation unit 300 attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, and detection signals from various sensors installed in other units of the door frame 3, and the three E to G terminals of the eight input terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCb are left over terminals and are electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground) (the three E to G terminals of the eight input terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCb may be electrically connected to +5V). The remaining input terminal H of the eight input terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCb receives an ID valid signal from the frame side decorative board WKB.

The parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCa and IDCb have a power supply terminal Vcc electrically connected to +5V, a GND terminal and a CK INT terminal electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), and a non-inverting QH terminal not connected.

The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa has an SI terminal electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), and outputs serial data converted from parallel data input to eight input terminals from the inverted QH terminal.

The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCb has an SI terminal electrically connected to the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa, and outputs serial data converted from the parallel data input to the eight input terminals from the inverted QH terminal.

The S/inverted L terminal receives an information acquisition switching signal from outside the parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCa and IDCb. When the logic of the information acquisition switching signal is parallel operation logic (logic electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground): LOW), each flip-flop circuit of the parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCa and IDCb captures and stores (holds) the information input to the eight input terminals of the A terminal to the H terminal at this time. On the other hand, when the logic of the information acquisition switching signal is shift operation logic (logic electrically connected to +5V: HI) that is the inversion of the parallel operation logic, and the CK INT terminal is electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), the captured information is shifted sequentially at the rising edge of the information acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal.

The two parallel-serial conversion circuits TOCa and TOCb are electrically connected to the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit TOCa and the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit TOCb, so that the flip-flop circuits of the two parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCa and IDCb shift sequentially at the rising edge of the information acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal (that is, information input to the A terminal → information input to the B terminal → information input to the C terminal → information input to the D terminal → information input to the E terminal → information input to the F terminal → information input to the G terminal → information input to the H terminal → shift one bit at a time from the non-inverted QH terminal and the inverted QH terminal to output serial data), and the parallel-serial conversion circuits TOCa and TOCb operate as a 16-bit shift register consisting of an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit TOCa and an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit TOCb, and the door frame side information signal is output as serial data from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit TOCb to the peripheral control board 1510.

The information acquisition clock signal and information acquisition switching signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 are electrically connected between each terminal of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, and each terminal of the two main body frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4, and are transmitted to the relay board TKB provided on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 via this drawer connector. In addition, the door frame side information signal from the door frame side information output circuit TOC of the relay board TKB provided in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is electrically connected to the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, and is transmitted to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 via this drawer connector.

In the peripheral control board 1510's performance operation unit information acquisition process in step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 222, the peripheral control IC 1510a sets and outputs the logic of the information acquisition switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal to operate in parallel and then in serial, and then outputs an information acquisition clock signal to acquire the door frame side information signal, and is able to grasp the player's operation and the movement of the movable body (performance body) on the performance operation unit 300 attached to the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, grasp the movable body (performance body) and player's movement on other units of the door frame 3, and obtain a judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units.

The timing for obtaining the judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units may be performed only the first time after power is turned on in the above-mentioned performance operation unit information acquisition process, or may be performed constantly or intermittently in the above-mentioned performance operation unit information acquisition process after power is turned on. By constantly or intermittently obtaining the judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units in the above-mentioned performance operation unit information acquisition process after power is turned on, it is possible to check whether or not the transmission path from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame side decorative board WKB is affected by noise depending on the different judgment results.

In addition, the timing for obtaining a judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units may be the ID judgment process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 255, performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 only the first time after power is turned on.

In addition, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines based on the result of the judgment on the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units that the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is not compatible (consistent), it will perform error response 1 (ID error 1 response) shown in Figures 256 to 258 or Figures 259 to 261.

In this way, the ID of the frame side decorative board WKB is included in the light emission data that indicates the light emission mode of the LED for the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 with a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units). Therefore, it is not necessary to provide dedicated terminals for transmitting the ID of the frame side decorative board WKB to each terminal of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, and each terminal of the two main body frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4.

In addition, each terminal of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, and each terminal of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, are provided with extra unused terminals so as to be able to accommodate the specifications of the game board 5. However, even if a terminal is unused in one specification of the game board 5, all terminals may be used in another specification of the game board 5. In such a case, if the number of terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 is increased, it is necessary to increase the number of terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, which requires replacing the main frame 4 (actually, the outer frame 2, door frame 3, and the entire frame of the main frame 4), which increases costs, and the convenience of electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4 by mounting the game board 5 to the main frame 4 without relying on the specifications of the game board 5 is lost.

In this embodiment, the ID of the frame side decorative board WKB is included in the light emission data that indicates the light emission mode of the LED for compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units), so there is no need to increase the number of terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, and the number of terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

The information acquisition clock signal and the light emission information clock signal may be transmitted using a common transmission line (door frame side clock signal transmission line) among the transmission lines electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. In this case, the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a control signal to a hardware clock signal switching circuit on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW side or the peripheral control board 1510 to transmit either the information acquisition clock signal or the light emission information clock signal to the common transmission line (door frame side clock signal transmission line). This helps to reduce the increase in the number of terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

As shown in FIG. 254, the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the split game board and the combination of the split game board and the performance operation buttons is judged by a microprocessor called the peripheral control IC 1510a based on an 8-bit ID sent to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, whereas the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) shown in FIG. 262 is judged by a circuit that does not have a microprocessor, called the ID comparison circuit WIDC, which is composed of an LED driver WIDCa and a comparator circuit WIDCb on the frame side decorative board WKB.

[Configuration that does not communicate compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board and the door frame unit to the peripheral control board]
As described above, the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 with a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is judged by a circuit that does not implement a microprocessor, called the ID comparison circuit WIDC, which is composed of an LED driver WIDCa and a comparator circuit WIDCb in the frame side decorative board WKB, and the judgment result is output as an ID valid signal to the relay board TKB provided in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, where it is serialized together with other information as a door frame side information signal. The door frame side information signal is transmitted to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 by mounting the game board 5 on the main frame 4 and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, but instead of this, the ID valid signal may be output to another frame side decorative board without being output to the relay board TKB provided on the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3. In other words, it may be configured not to convey the compatibility (integrity) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) of the door frame units to the peripheral control board 1510. Figure 264 is a circuit showing an example of a modified example of Figure 262. Fig. 264 is basically the same as the circuit in Fig. 262, but differs in that multiple LED drivers with external address setting circuits and output current setting circuits are implemented, and that the output destination of the ID valid signal is different. Here, the differences will be described. Note that the same reference numerals are used in Fig. 264 to designate the same parts as in Fig. 262.

In addition to the LED driver WIDCa, the frame side decorative board WKB has LED drivers WIDCaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers). As described above, the light emission information signal and light emission information clock signal from the peripheral control board 1510 are input to the frame side decorative board WKB via the drawer connectors, which are electrically connected to the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. The light emission information signal and light emission information clock signal from the peripheral control board 1510 input to the frame side decorative board WKB are input to the SDA terminal and SCLK terminal of each LED driver of the LED driver WIDCa and the LED drivers WIDCaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers), and are further transmitted to other subsequent frame side decorative boards. The LED driver WIDCa and the LED drivers WIDCaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers) are each set with a unique self-identification code (ID) that is not duplicated.

The RST terminal of the LED driver WIDCa is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame side decorative board WKB, as described above. In contrast, the RST terminals of the LED drivers WIDCaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers) receive the ID enable signal from the inverted P=Q terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb, which is then transmitted to the other subsequent frame side decorative boards. When the logic of the ID enable signal is set to valid logic (logic LOW), as described above, it conveys the determination result that the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is compatible (matched), while when the logic of the ID enable signal is set to invalid logic (logic HI), as described above, it conveys the determination result that the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is not compatible (matched).

In other words, if the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is not compatible (matched) and the logic of the ID enable signal is set to invalid logic (logic HI), the voltage applied to the RST terminals of LED driver WIDCaa to LED driver WIDCan (multiple LED drivers) is pulled up to the logic HI side, LED driver WIDCaa to LED driver WIDCan (multiple LED drivers) are reset, and the LED drivers provided on the subsequent frame side decorative board are also reset. On the other hand, when the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is compatible (matched) and the logic of the ID enable signal is set to valid logic (logic LOW), the voltage applied to the RST terminals of LED driver WIDCaa through LED driver WIDCan (multiple LED drivers) is pulled down to the logic LOW side, the reset state of LED driver WIDCaa through LED driver WIDCan (multiple LED drivers) is released, and the reset state of the LED drivers provided on the subsequent frame side decorative board is also released.

As a result, if the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is not compatible (matched), the LED drivers WIDCaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers) are reset and the LED drivers provided on the subsequent frame side decorative board are also reset, so that the LED elements controlled by each LED driver can be turned off. Although the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 cannot obtain a judgment result regarding the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units, it is possible to prevent the progress of the illumination performance by the door frame unit on the door frame unit side even if the performance progresses. Furthermore, if the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is not compatible (matched), the door frame unit will turn off, thereby notifying not only game hall staff and other attendants, but also the worker who is installing the game board 5 into the main frame 4, whether the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is compatible (matched).

[Replacement of LED driver with serial-parallel conversion circuit]
Next, the case where the LED driver WIDCa constituting the ID comparison circuit WIDC provided in the frame side decorative board WKB shown in Fig. 262 is replaced with a serial-parallel conversion circuit will be described with reference to Fig. 265. Fig. 265 is a circuit diagram showing an example of the case where the LED driver constituting the ID comparison circuit provided in the frame side decorative board shown in Fig. 262 is replaced with a serial-parallel conversion circuit. In Fig. 265, various terminals of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' are indicated by the same reference numerals as those of the LED driver WIDCa in Fig. 262, for various terminals having the same functions. Here, the serial-parallel conversion circuit will be mainly described, and some explanations of the parts with the same reference numerals as the LED driver WIDCa will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 262, the 24 output terminals OUT0 to OUT23 in the LED driver WIDCa are constant current outputs whose maximum current is set by the output current setting circuit WIDCc, whereas the eight output terminals OUT0 to OUT7 in the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa′ are not constant current outputs whose maximum current is set by the output current setting circuit WIDCc, but are determined by the absolute maximum rated output current of the logic IC.

The serial-to-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' is an electronic component that is mainly composed of multiple flip-flop circuits (8 flip-flop circuits) and is made into a chip that can be connected in a daisy chain. It is a circuit that can convert (restore) serial data input from the outside into parallel data and output it from eight output terminals, the OU0 terminal to the OUT7 terminal.

The SDA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', receives the light emission information signal, which is serial data from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5, via the drawer connectors, which are electrically connected to the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

The SCLK terminal, which is the clock signal input terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', receives the light-emitting information clock signal, which is a clock signal for transmitting the light-emitting information signal from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5, by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. Through this drawer connector, the SCLK terminal is input.

The LAT terminal, which is the latch signal input terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', receives a latch signal from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5, which is electrically connected to each terminal of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and each terminal of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, and thus the latch signal is input via this drawer connector. When the logic of the latch signal is parallel operation logic (logic electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground): LOW), each flip-flop circuit of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' sequentially shifts the information (serial data) taken in from the SDA terminal at the rising edge of the light-emitting information clock signal input to the SCLK terminal, and outputs the serial data from the SO terminal, which is the serial data output terminal, to multiple subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuits daisy-chained with this serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' (for example, other serial-parallel conversion circuits provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', or multiple subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuits daisy-chained with other frame-side decorative boards). On the other hand, when the logic of the latch signal is shift operation logic that inverts the parallel operation logic (logic electrically connected to +5V: HI), the information taken in at this time (information compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb) is converted into parallel data and output from the eight output terminals OUT0 to OUT7.

The inverted G terminal (shown in the diagram as a solid line above the letter "G"), which is the enable terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame side decorative board WKB. The inverted CLR terminal (shown in the diagram as a solid line above the letter "CLR"), which is the reset terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', is electrically connected to +5V.

The light emission information signal input to the SDA terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' based on the light emission information clock signal input to the SCLK terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' is composed of light emission data. Regarding the light emission data for the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', the information compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb is output from the peripheral control board 1510 as light emission data. The light emission data for the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' is output from the peripheral control board 1510 following the light emission data for the subsequent multiple serial-parallel conversion circuits daisy-chained with the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa'. In addition to emitting various LEDs, when the subsequent multiple serial-parallel conversion circuits daisy-chained with the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' drive an electric drive source (solenoid, stepping motor), the drive data for the electric drive source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 as light emission data. In other words, the light emission information signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 includes not only the light emission data for the various LEDs, but also information to be compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb, and may also include drive data for the electrical drive source.

The latch signal, the clock signal for light emission information, and the light emission information signal from the SO terminal, which is the daisy chain connection terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', are transmitted from this frame side decorative board WKB to another frame side decorative board. If there is a subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuit daisy chain connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' in this frame side decorative board WKB, the latch signal and the clock signal for light emission information are input together with the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', and the light emission information signal from the SO terminal, which is the daisy chain connection terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', is input to the SDA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuit. The light emission information signal from the SO terminal of this subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuit is output to the other frame side decorative board.

In this way, by replacing the LED driver WIDCa that constitutes the ID comparison circuit WIDC provided on the frame side decorative board WKB with a serial-parallel conversion circuit, it becomes necessary to include an ID code in the light emission information signal that indicates which LED driver it is for.

[Configuration in which each unit of the door frame unit has a self-identification code]
In Fig. 262 and Fig. 263, as described above, the door frame 3 is equipped with door frame units (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the plate unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, and one of the decorative boards (hereinafter, referred to as "frame side decorative board") provided on a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units has a self-identification code (ID) that can identify itself, and is equipped with an ID comparison circuit WIDC that can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units and output the determination result. In other words, one ID comparison circuit WIDC is provided for a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units. Here, a configuration in which each door frame unit that is the subject of judgment as to compatibility (matching) with the game board 5 has its own identification code (ID) will be described with reference to Figures 266 and 267. Figure 266 is a schematic diagram showing the allocation of each unit, and Figure 267 is a circuit diagram showing an example of an ID output circuit in each unit. In the following, all of the door frame units (in this example, all of the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450) are used as subjects for determining compatibility (matching) with the game board 5, and a self-identification code (ID) is assigned to each of the door frame units. However, some of the door frame units (for example, the door frame left side unit 420 and tray unit 200) may not be used as subjects for determining compatibility with the game board 5. In this case, some of the door frame units (for example, the door frame left side unit 420 and tray unit 200) that are not used as subjects for determining compatibility with the game board 5 may not be assigned self-identification codes (IDs), and only the door frame units (for example, the door frame right side unit 430 and door frame top unit 450) that are used as subjects for determining compatibility with the game board 5 may be assigned self-identification codes (IDs).

The door frame unit is composed of a door frame left side unit 420, a door frame right side unit 430, a tray unit 200, and a door frame top unit 450, and each unit can be attached and detached to the door frame 3, allowing the installation of a different design or corresponding gaming specifications. As mentioned above, the relationship between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 must be submitted to the application agency and approved. However, human error when replacing the door frame unit may result in the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 differing from that which was submitted to the application agency and approved, which is undesirable as it would result in a pachinko machine being installed in the gaming hall that differs from the specification content that was submitted to the application agency and approved in the first place.

Therefore, it is possible to consider a configuration in which one of the decorative boards provided in each unit of the door frame unit has a self-identification code (ID) that allows it to identify itself, and an ID comparison circuit is provided that can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit and output the determination result.

Here, as shown in FIG. 266, the door frame units are allocated as four units, Unit A to Unit D, with the tray unit 200 as Unit A, the door frame right side unit 430 as Unit B, the door frame top unit 450 as Unit C, and the door frame left side unit 420 as Unit D.

One of the decorative boards included in Unit A (hereinafter referred to as "frame side decorative board A") is equipped with a parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of an ID output circuit that can identify itself.

One of the decorative boards provided in Unit B (hereinafter referred to as "frame side decorative board B") is equipped with a parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of an ID output circuit that can identify itself.

One of the decorative boards provided in Unit C (hereinafter referred to as "frame side decorative board C") is equipped with a parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of an ID output circuit that can identify itself.

One of the decorative boards provided in Unit D (hereinafter referred to as "frame side decorative board D") is equipped with a parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa of an ID output circuit that can identify itself.

The parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuit provided on frame side decorative board A to frame side decorative board D, respectively, are the same circuit as the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC shown in FIG. 251, and explanations of each terminal, parts with the same circuit configuration, and operations will be omitted here.

The ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board A are electrically connected to +5V for the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, D terminal, E terminal, F terminal, and G terminal, and electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground) for the H terminal. In other words, the ID of the frame side decorative board A (i.e., the ID of Unit A, which is the plate unit 200), when expressed in 8-bit width with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, becomes 11111110B (the letter "B" represents binary numbers), and when expressed in hexadecimal numbers, becomes FEH (the letter "H" represents hexadecimal numbers).

The ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board B are electrically connected to +5V for the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, D terminal, E terminal, and F terminal, and electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground) for the G terminal and H terminal. In other words, the ID of the frame side decorative board B (i.e., the ID of Unit B, which is the door frame right side unit 430) is 11111100B (the letter "B" represents binary numbers) when expressed in 8 bits with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, and is FCH (the letter "H" represents hexadecimal numbers) when expressed in hexadecimal numbers.

The ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board C are electrically connected to +5V at the A, B, C, D, and E terminals, and electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground) at the F, G, and H terminals. In other words, the ID of the frame side decorative board C (i.e., the ID of Unit C, the door frame top unit 450), when expressed in 8-bit width with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, is 11111000B (the letter "B" represents a binary number), and when expressed in hexadecimal, is F8H (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board D are electrically connected to +5V at the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and D terminal, and electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground) at the E terminal, F terminal, G terminal, and H terminal. In other words, the ID of the frame side decorative board D (i.e., the ID of Unit D, which is the door frame left side unit 420) is 11110000B (the letter "B" represents a binary number) when expressed in 8 bits with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, and is F0H (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number) when expressed in hexadecimal.

The S/inverted L terminals (indicated by a solid line above the letter "L" in the diagram) of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative boards A to D are shifted based on the compatibility determination clock signal input to the CK terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative boards A to D, and each flip-flop circuit of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative boards A to D is set to the eight input terminals A terminal to H terminal. The game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4, and the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, and the compatibility determination switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is input through this drawer connector.

The SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board D provided in Unit D, which is the left side unit 420 of the door frame, is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame side decorative board D, and the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board D provided in Unit D, which is the left side unit 420 of the door frame, is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board C provided in Unit C, which is the top unit 450 of the door frame (they may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector). As a result, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board D provided in Unit D, which is the left side unit 420 of the door frame, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board C provided in Unit C, which is the top unit 450 of the door frame, are daisy-chained.

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board C provided in Unit C, the door frame top unit 450, is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board B provided in Unit B, the door frame right side unit 430 (they may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector). As a result, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board C provided in Unit C, the door frame top unit 450, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board B provided in Unit B, the door frame right side unit 430, are daisy-chained.

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board B provided in Unit B, which is the door frame right side unit 430, is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board A provided in Unit A, which is the dish unit 200 (they may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector). As a result, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board B provided in Unit B, which is the door frame right side unit 430, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board A provided in Unit A, which is the dish unit 200, are daisy-chained.

In this way, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board D of Unit D, the door frame left side unit 420, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board C of Unit C, the door frame top unit 450, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board B of Unit B, the frame right side unit 430, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board A of Unit A, the dish unit 200 are daisy-chain connected.

Since each flip-flop circuit of the four parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa sequentially shifts at the rising edge of the compatibility determination clock signal input to the CK terminal (that is, information input to the A terminal → information input to the B terminal → information input to the C terminal → information input to the D terminal → information input to the E terminal → information input to the F terminal → information input to the G terminal → information input to the H terminal → serial data is output by shifting one bit at a time from the non-inverted QH terminal and inverted QH terminal), the 8-bit shift register of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa, the 8-bit shift register of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa, and the parallel It operates as a 32-bit shift register consisting of an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa and an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa, and an ID code signal is output as serial data from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa to the peripheral control board 1510 via the drawer connectors, which are electrically connected to the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

Since the tray unit 200 is equipped with the performance operation unit 300 as described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process of step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 222, sets and outputs the logic of the compatibility determination switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal to operate in parallel and then in serial operation, and then outputs a compatibility determination clock signal to obtain an ID code signal and obtain a judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit.

The timing for obtaining the judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit may be performed only the first time after the power is turned on in the above-mentioned performance operation unit information acquisition process, or it may be performed constantly or intermittently in the above-mentioned performance operation unit information acquisition process after the power is turned on. By constantly or intermittently obtaining the judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit in the above-mentioned performance operation unit information acquisition process after the power is turned on, it is possible to check whether or not the transmission path from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame side decorative board WKB is affected by noise, depending on the different judgment results.

In addition, the timing for obtaining a judgment result regarding the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit may be the ID judgment process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 255, performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 only the first time after power is turned on.

When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit is not compatible (matched) based on the result of the determination of the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit, the peripheral control IC 1510a may perform error response 1 (ID error 1 response) shown in Figures 256 to 258 or Figures 259 to 261 on the entire door frame unit, or may perform error response 1 (ID error 1 response) shown in Figures 256 to 258 or Figures 259 to 261 on the incompatible (matched) units of the door frame unit (for example, Unit A to Unit D, and then Unit C (door frame top unit 450)).

[Configuration in which each unit of the door frame unit has a manufacturer identification code in addition to a self-identification code]
The door frame 3 can be configured to be commonly used by a plurality of manufacturers. In this case, if the self-identification code (ID) given to each unit of the door frame unit by one manufacturer (manufacturer) happens to match the self-identification code (ID) given to each unit of the door frame unit by another manufacturer (manufacturer), when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 may be determined by the control board to be that which was submitted to the application organization and approved, even though the relationship (combination) is different from that which was submitted to the application organization and approved. This is undesirable because a pachinko machine different from the one whose specifications were submitted to the application organization and approved will be installed in the game hall.

Therefore, it is possible to consider a configuration in which each unit of the door frame unit has a manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value) in addition to a self-identification code (ID), and an ID comparison circuit is provided that can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit and output the determination result. Here, a configuration in which each unit of the door frame unit has a manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value) and a self-identification code (ID) will be described with reference to FIG. 268. FIG. 268 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a circuit in which the ID output circuit in each unit of FIG. 267 further includes a manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value). FIG. 268 is basically the same circuit as the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuit provided on each of the frame side decorative boards A to D in FIG. 267, and here, explanations of each terminal, parts with the same circuit configuration, and operations will be omitted.

Parallel-serial conversion circuits UAap to UDap are provided downstream of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuits provided on frame-side decorative boards A to D, respectively. The parallel-serial conversion circuits UAap to UDap are set with a manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value).

Specifically, the ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAap to UDap subsequent to the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuits provided on frame-side decorative boards A to D are electrically connected to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and E terminal +5V, and the D terminal, F terminal, G terminal, and H terminal are electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). In other words, the manufacturer identification code of frame-side decorative boards A to D (i.e., the manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value) of Units A to D) is 11101000B (the letter "B" represents a binary number) when expressed in 8 bits with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, and is E8H (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number) when expressed in hexadecimal.

The parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative boards A to D and the S/inverted L terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAap to UDap at the rear stage (shown by a solid line above the letter "L" in the figure) shift based on the compatibility determination clock signal input to the CK terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative boards A to D and the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAap to UDap at the rear stage, and Each flip-flop circuit Aap to UDap switches between parallel operation, which takes in information set in the eight input terminals A to H, and the compatibility determination switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is input through this drawer connector by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

The SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDap at the rear stage of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board D provided in Unit D, which is the door frame left side unit 420, is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame side decorative board D, and the inverted QH terminal of this rear stage parallel-serial conversion circuit UDap is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa at the front stage. The inverted QH terminal of this front stage parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCap at the rear stage of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board C provided in Unit C, which is the door frame top unit 450 (they may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector). This allows a daisy-chain connection from the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDap at the rear of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board D provided on Unit D, the door frame left side unit 420, to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa at the front of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board D provided on Unit D, the door frame left side unit 420, and to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCap at the rear of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board C provided on Unit C, the door frame top unit 450.

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCap at the rear of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board C provided in Unit C, which is the door frame top unit 450, is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa at the front. The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa at the front is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBap at the rear of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board B provided in Unit B, which is the door frame right side unit 430 (they may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector). This results in a daisy chain connection from the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCap at the rear of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board C provided in Unit C, the door frame top unit 450, to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa at the front of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board C provided in Unit C, the door frame top unit 450, to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBap at the rear of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board B provided in Unit B, the door frame right side unit 430.

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBap at the rear stage of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board B provided on Unit B, which is the door frame right side unit 430, is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa at the front stage. The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa at the front stage is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAap at the rear stage of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board A provided on Unit A, which is the dish unit 200 (they may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector). This results in a daisy chain connection from the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBap at the rear of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board B of Unit B, the door frame right side unit 430, to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa at the front of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board B of Unit B, the door frame right side unit 430, and to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAap at the rear of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board A of Unit A, the dish unit 200.

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAap subsequent to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative substrate A provided in Unit A, which is the dish unit 200, is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa preceding it. As a result, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAap subsequent to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative substrate A provided in Unit A, which is the dish unit 200, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa preceding the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative substrate A provided in Unit A, which is the dish unit 200, are daisy-chained.

In this way, from the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDap at the rear of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board D provided in Unit D, which is the left side unit 420 of the door frame, to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa at the front of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board D provided in Unit D, which is the left side unit 420 of the door frame, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCap at the rear of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board C provided in Unit C, which is the door frame top unit 450, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa at the front of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board C provided in Unit C, which is the door frame top unit 450, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa at the front of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board C provided in Unit C, which is the door frame right side unit 430. The parallel-serial conversion circuit UBap is connected in the rear stage of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board B provided in Unit B, which is the door frame right side unit 430; the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa is connected in the front stage of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board B provided in Unit B, which is the door frame right side unit 430; the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAap is connected in the rear stage of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board A provided in Unit A, which is the dish unit 200; and the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa is connected in the front stage of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board A provided in Unit A, which is the dish unit 200, all connected in a daisy chain.

Since each flip-flop circuit of the total of eight parallel-serial conversion circuits UAap, UAa, UBap, UBa, UCap, UCa, UDap, and UDa sequentially shifts at the rising edge of the compatibility determination clock signal input to the CK terminal (that is, information input to the A terminal → information input to the B terminal → information input to the C terminal → information input to the D terminal → information input to the E terminal → information input to the F terminal → information input to the G terminal → information input to the H terminal → serial data is output by shifting one bit at a time from the non-inverted QH terminal and inverted QH terminal), the 8-bit shift register of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAap, the 8-bit shift register of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa, the 8-bit shift register of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBap, and the 8-bit shift register of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa The parallel-serial conversion circuit UCap operates as a 64-bit shift register consisting of an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa, an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDap, and an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa. The ID code signal is output as serial data from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa to the peripheral control board 1510 via the drawer connectors UDRW and UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4 are electrically connected.

[ID error judgment switch]
Of the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR constituting the split game board 5A shown in FIG. 248, the peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL acquires an ID from the ID code signal transmitted from each ID output circuit at a predetermined timing after power is turned on, and judges whether or not the combination of the performance operation unit provided in the door frame 3 and the split game board is compatible (matched). This judgment result can be triggered by pressing the pressing operation part of the ID error judgment switch. FIG. 269 is a schematic front view (a) of the split game board on which the ID error judgment switch is provided, and a schematic rear view (b) of the split game board on which the ID error judgment switch is provided. In FIG. 269(a) and (b), the same reference numerals are attached to the same configurations as FIG. 248(a) and (b), and detailed explanations are omitted.

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 in FIG. 248(b) is provided with a setting switch 1311a, whereas the main control board 1310 in FIG. 269(b) is not provided with a setting switch, and the main control board 1310 in FIG. 248(b) is not provided with an ID error determination switch, whereas the main control board 1310 in FIG. 269(b) is provided with an ID error determination switch 1310v.

The ID error determination switch 1310v provided on the main control board 1310 has its pressing operation part exposed (not shown) from the cover body of the main control board box 1320 described above, and when an attendant such as a game hall staff member presses the pressing operation part of the ID error determination switch 1310v, a detection signal from the ID error determination switch 1310v is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the system of the main control board 1310 and repeatedly performs the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 211 and the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 212.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 judges that the pressing operation part of the ID error judgment switch 1310v has been pressed based on the detection signal from the ID error judgment switch 1310v in the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 212 (specifically, the logic of the detection signal from the ID error judgment switch 1310v has an operation logic and a non-operation logic, and the main control MPU 1310a judges that the pressing operation part of the ID error judgment switch 1310v has been pressed when the operation logic is input, and judges that the pressing operation part of the ID error judgment switch 1310v has not been pressed when the non-operation logic with the inverted operation logic is input), it transmits an ID error judgment result notification start command that starts notification of the ID error judgment result to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 212.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts up the system of the peripheral control board 1510 and repeatedly performs the peripheral control routine processing in the peripheral control power-on processing shown in FIG. 255, the peripheral control V blank signal interrupt processing shown in FIG. 221, and the peripheral control 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 222 (if there is a command from the main control board 1310, it also performs the peripheral control command reception interrupt processing shown in FIG. 223).

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Fig. 255. In this ID determination process, in order to obtain the ID of the right-side game board and the ID of the performance operation unit, an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the right-side game board) is output to the right-side game board, and an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the performance operation unit) is output to the performance operation unit. The peripheral control IC 1510a acquires the ID code signal from the right-side game board (ID code signal exclusive to the right-side game board) and the ID code signal from the performance operation unit (ID code signal exclusive to the performance operation unit) through separate serial systems, and judges (compares) the combination of the split game boards (i.e., the combination of the right-side game board (board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left-side game board (peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) by referring to a combination table (Fig. 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, and judges (compares) the combination of the performance operation unit and the split game board by referring to a combination table (Fig. 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in Figure 223, and analyzes it in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255.In response to this, in order to start notifying the ID error determination result, when the determination result made on the combination of divided game boards in the ID determination processing of step S1003 is incompatible (inconsistent), that is, when the determination result made on the combination of the right side game board (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left side game board (peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor) is incompatible (inconsistent), a command classified as a notification display is passed to the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit normal processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. As a result, in the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) the schedule data for generating the screen, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode, the schedule data for generating the sound, and the schedule data for the electric drive source, etc., from the peripheral control ROM as the mode of incompatibility (inconsistency) and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processes related to the performance, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 notifies that a corresponding error has occurred among error responses 1 to 9 as the behavior of the pachinko machine in the error shown in Fig. 254(c). Note that when the judgment result performed on the combination of the divided game boards is compatible (matched), the behavior of the pachinko machine in the error shown in Fig. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), and since the countermeasure is "none", there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the device is operating normally (no error handling is performed), no notification will be given and no special notification sound will be played from the speaker.

In this way, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the determination result on the combination of the divided game boards in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 255, unless it receives the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in FIG. 223 and analyzes it in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 255, it cannot use this as a trigger to pass the command classified as a notification display to the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit normal processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, and cannot start notifying the ID error determination result. In other words, even if error response 1 through error response 9 have occurred until the ID error determination result notification start command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310, the error notification start time for notifying the user of the occurrence can be changed by a member of staff, such as a game parlor attendant, pressing the pressing operation portion of the ID error determination switch 1310v.

In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in Figure 223, and analyzes it in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255.In response to this, in order to start notifying the ID error determination result, when the determination result made in the ID determination processing of step S1003 regarding the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is incompatible (inconsistent), a command classified as a notification display is passed to the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit normal processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. As a result, in the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) the schedule data for generating the screen, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode, the schedule data for generating the sound, and the schedule data for the electric drive source, etc., from the peripheral control ROM as the mode of incompatibility (inconsistency) and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processes related to the performance, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 notifies that a corresponding error has occurred among error responses 1 to 9 as the behavior of the pachinko machine in the error shown in Fig. 254(c). Note that when the judgment result performed on the combination of the performance operation unit and the divided game board is compatible (matched), the behavior of the pachinko machine in the error shown in Fig. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), and since the countermeasure is "none", there is no special notification mode in normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the device is operating normally (no error handling is performed), no notification will be given and no special notification sound will be played from the speaker.

Thus, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the determination result for the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 255, unless it receives the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 223 and analyzes it in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 255, it cannot use this as a trigger to pass the command classified as a notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit normal processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, and cannot start notifying the ID error determination result.

It should be noted that the main control board 1310 is provided with an ID error judgment switch 1310v, but the ID error judgment switch 1310v can be substituted by a setting key switch 1311a that can switch and check the setting values of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, a setting key switch 1311a as shown in FIG. 248 (b) is provided, and the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 is not transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, but after inserting a setting key into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turning it ON, the power switch 630a provided on the power supply board 630 is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633, thereby starting the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, and based on the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 1311a being turned OFF, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S238 in the setting change processing is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main-circuit serial data. When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting change command from the main control board 1310, it uses this as a trigger to notify the user that error response 1 to error response 9 has occurred as the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254 (c). Because the setting key is an important key, only a limited number of people, including the arcade manager, are allowed to possess it, and it is limited to two or three people.

Specifically, after inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 in FIG. 248(b) and turning it ON, the power switch 630a on the power supply board 630 is operated while pressing the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633 to power on the pachinko machine 1. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 213 as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510. This setting change command is a command that conveys the changed setting value and the completion of setting value storage. When the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it regards this as the reception of an ID error judgment result notification start command, and proceeds with the process of starting notification of the ID error judgment result.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the setting change process in step S37 during the main control side power-on process, then clears the entire RAM area in step S38, and then performs the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process in FIG. 212.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays, for example, "Power being restored" on a black background on the performance display device 1600 as the startup mode. At this time, "Power being restored" may be followed by "Setting" or "Setting" may be displayed instead of "Power being restored". In this case, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process, it needs to send a setting change start command to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data to inform the user that the setting change is about to begin.

After the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has completed the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, that is, when it receives a setting change command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 recognizes this as a command to start notifying the ID error determination result, and using this as a trigger, if error response 1 to error response 9 has occurred as the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254 (c), it issues a notification to that effect. In other words, even if error response 1 to error response 9 occurs as the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in FIG. 254(c), if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, causing the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to perform the setting change process in step S37 of the main control side power-on process (until a predetermined period of time has elapsed until this setting change process is completed, in other words, until a setting change command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is not able to notify the occurrence of error response 1 to error response 9. In other words, until a setting change command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310, the error notification start time that notifies the occurrence of error response 1 to error response 9 can be changed by operating the setting key held by a limited number of people in the game hall.

In contrast, if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, and then the power switch 630a on the power supply board 630 is operated without pressing the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on without performing the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process, and without clearing the entire RAM area of step S38, and then the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 212 are performed. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays, for example, "Power being restored" on a black background on the performance display device 1600 as the start-up mode, and if error response 1 to error response 9 occurs as the behavior of the pachinko machine in an error shown in FIG. 254(c), a notification is issued to inform the user of this. In other words, even if a setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 does not perform the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is able to notify the user that error response 1 to error response 9 has occurred as the behavior of the pachinko machine in an error as shown in FIG. 254(c).

In other words, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 does not perform the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to notify the user of error response 1 to error response 9 occurring as shown in the behavior of the pachinko machine in an error in Figure 254 (c) until a predetermined period has elapsed (until a setting change command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310), or it will be able to notify the user of the error regardless of the predetermined period.

In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310, which is the operation unit, is operated, a notification can be issued according to the result of determining whether the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR are consistent. This makes it possible to immediately determine that the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR are inconsistent, and prevents an incomplete presentation from being executed when the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR are inconsistent. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

[Summary A]
A0:
A gaming machine including a gaming frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a gaming board side component detachably provided on the gaming frame side component, the gaming board side component being composed of a first gaming board side component and a second gaming board side component. The first gaming board side component is composed of a plurality of boards including a performance control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes the performance of the game. The second gaming board side component is equipped with a specific board that does not have a microprocessor. The specific board is equipped with an inherent value that can be identified as the second gaming board side component, and inherent value transmission means that transmits the inherent value to the performance control board. The performance control board is capable of comparing the inherent value transmitted from the inherent value transmission means with the inherent value that it possesses. The first gaming board side component and the second gaming board side component are fixed individually to the gaming frame side component.

Specifically, for example, a pachinko machine 1 comprises an outer frame 2, which is a game frame side component, a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2, a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a divided game board 5A as shown in Fig. 248, which is a game board side component. The divided game board 5A is composed of a left game board 5AL, which is a first game board side component, and a right game board 5AR, which is a second game board side component. The left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, is composed of multiple boards including the peripheral control board 1510, which is a presentation control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor that can execute game presentations (main control unit 1300 which houses the main control board 1310, and a left side drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as ``left side drive board unit 1700L'') which houses various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various presentation units housed in the left side rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.). The right side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, is equipped with a specific board that does not have a microprocessor (one of the right side drive board units 1700R (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "right side drive board unit 1700R") that accommodates various boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various performance units housed in the right side rear box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.). One of the various boards that is a specific board is equipped with a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can be identified as the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board, and an ID output circuit IDC in FIG. 251, which is a unique value transmission means that transmits the unique value of the self-identification code (ID) to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board.

The peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board, is capable of comparing the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value transmitted from the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means, with its own unique value (combination table (Figure 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM) in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in Figure 255.

The left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are each individually and removably attached to the main frame 4, which is the game frame component.

In this way, the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means provided on the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, transmits a signal of a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a presentation control board provided on the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, so that the peripheral control board 1510, which is a presentation control board, can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component. This makes it possible to immediately determine when the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, become inconsistent, and prevents incomplete effects from being played when the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are in a mismatched state. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

A1:
The game machine includes a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board side component provided detachably on the game frame side component. The game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component. The first game board side component is provided with a plurality of boards including a sub-control board equipped with a microprocessor capable of executing game performance. The second game board side component is provided with a board not equipped with a microprocessor, a unique value indicating that it is the second game board side component, and a unique value transmission means for transmitting the unique value. Furthermore, the first game board side component and the second game board side component are electrically connected and fixed to the game frame side component. The unique value transmission means is capable of transmitting to the sub-control board using serial communication. The unique value transmission means is electrically connected to the sub-control board of the first game board side component. The sub-control board can compare the unique value from the unique value transmission means with the unique value it holds.

Specifically, for example, it has a main frame 4 which is a component on the game frame side, and a split game board 5A in FIG. 248 which is a component on the game board side. The split game board 5A is composed of a left game board 5AL which is a first game board component, and a right game board 5AR which is a second game board component. The left game board 5AL which is the first game board component has multiple boards including a peripheral control board 1510 which is a sub-control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a which is a microprocessor capable of executing game effects (main control unit 1300 which houses the main control board 1310, left drive board unit 1700L which houses various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted which are attached to various effect units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive boards which drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.) (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "left drive board unit 1700L"). The right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is equipped with a board that does not have a microprocessor (a right side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "right side drive board unit 1700R") that houses various boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various performance units housed in the right side rear box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.), a self-identification code (ID) that is a unique value that identifies the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, and an ID output circuit IDC in Figure 251 that is a unique value transmission means that transmits the unique value of the self-identification code (ID).

Furthermore, the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, are electrically connected and fixed to the main frame 4, which is the game frame side component.

The ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means, can transmit to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board, using serial communication. The ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means, is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board of the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component. The peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board, is able to compare the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value from the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means, with its own unique value (combination table (Figure 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM), in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in Figure 255.

In this way, the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmitting means provided on the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, transmits a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value indicating that it is the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, using serial communication to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board provided on the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component.Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board, can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component. This makes it possible to immediately determine when the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, become inconsistent, and prevents incomplete effects from being played when the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are in a mismatched state. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

A2:
Furthermore, the serial communication signal includes a unique value and a signal related to the game presentation generated in the second game board side component, and further comprises a first serial communication means for transmitting and receiving signals between the main control board and the payout control board, and a second serial communication means for transmitting and receiving signals between the first game board side component and the second game board side component, and if the comparison judgment in the first serial communication means is false, balls will not be paid out, and if the comparison judgment in the second serial communication means is false, the decorative presentation of the second game board side component will not be performed.

Specifically, for example, the photo and ID code signal in FIG. 252, which is a serial communication signal, includes a self-identification code (ID) which is a unique value, and a signal related to the game presentation generated on the right side game board 5AR which is the second game board side component (a detection signal from a photo sensor which detects the positions of various movable bodies and is input to the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO in FIG. 252), and further includes a first serial communication means for transmitting and receiving signals between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and a second serial communication means for transmitting and receiving signals between the left side game board 5AL which is the first game board side component and the right side game board 5AR which is the second game board side component.

When the comparison judgment in the first serial communication means is false, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the control board equipped with a microprocessor including a self-identification code (ID) that can identify itself, so that when the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 judges that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent) in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control board main process of the payout control power-on process shown in FIG. 218, it sets information indicating that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and sets information to stop the payout operation in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, the payout of game balls is not performed. In other words, if the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 becomes incompatible (inconsistent) due to an operator's mistake, even if the player is able to play and progress in the game, the payout operation is stopped and no game balls are paid out to the player, so the player can be informed that some kind of malfunction has occurred with the pachinko machine, and the player can inform an attendant such as a staff member at the game hall of the state of the pachinko machine where game balls are not being paid out. This can contribute to early detection of a state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 becomes incompatible (inconsistent).

If the comparison judgment by the second serial communication means is false, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 acquires an ID code signal (an ID code signal exclusively for the right side game board) from the right side game board in the ID judgment processing of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 255, and judges (compares) the combination of the split game boards (i.e., the combination of the right side game board (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left side game board (peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) by referring to the combination table (Figure 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, and if it is judged to be incompatible (inconsistent), it passes a command classified as an alert display to the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing as error response 1 (ID error 1 response) of Figures 256 to 261, which becomes State 2: ID error 1 of Figure 254 (c). In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) the schedule data for generating the screen, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode, the schedule data for generating the sound, and the schedule data for the electric drive source as the modes indicating incompatibility (inconsistency) from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processes related to the presentation. As a result, the various LEDs (various LEDs of the game board) of the divided game board 5A are turned off, and the decorative presentation of the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, is not performed. In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards that make up the split game board 5A becomes incompatible (mismatched) due to an operator error, when the pachinko machine is turned on, the various LEDs on the split game board 5A (various LEDs on the game board) turn off and the decorative effects on the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are no longer performed, which contributes to early detection of the incompatible (mismatched) combination of the left and right game boards.

A3:
Furthermore, if a RAM error and an ID error occur simultaneously, only the RAM error is notified, and the ID error is not notified. Also, no LED error is notified in the decoration unit. Specifically, if a RAM error in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and state 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254(c) (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261) occur simultaneously, only a notification is made to inform the user that a RAM error has occurred, whereas no notification is made to inform the user that state 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254(c) (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261) has occurred. This is because, if a RAM error occurs in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the progress of the game by the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly stopped, and in order to notify this, even if state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254 (c) (error response 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) in Figures 256 to 261) has occurred, the RAM error in the main control built-in RAM, which is the most important error, is notified as a top priority regardless of the occurrence of other errors.

If the ID is judged to be normal within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, no notification is made, but if the ID is judged to be abnormal within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, the notification mode may be changed when the state is changed. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode is changed when the state becomes normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not notify (target method in the same figure: none) when it is judged to be state 1: normal in FIG. 254 (c), that is, normal ID, whereas it maintains the notification of this error response 1 (ID error 1 response) when it is judged to be state 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254 (c) (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, abnormal ID, and the countermeasure in the same figure (c): after the replacement with a compatible ID product after power off, notification is no longer made when it is judged to be state 1: normal in FIG. 254 (c), that is, normal ID. In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right game boards is not determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the left and right game boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), there is no notification that the combination is incompatible (inconsistent) and an abnormal ID is not generated. In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right game boards to a specified period of time after power-on, it is possible to contribute to reducing the processing load on the progress of the presentation by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510.

Notifications are terminated except for some notifications. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254 (c) (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again. If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the state is 1: normal, as shown in FIG. 254(c), that is, a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

If it returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not change even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), the power supply to the peripheral control board must be cut off, and the game board must be reattached and the power to the pachinko machine must be turned on again. When the pachinko machine is turned on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 when the pachinko machine is turned on, so if the ID confirmation by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 and the notification process that continues until the power to the pachinko machine is turned off are performed, there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification process thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 222, and when the presentation operation unit is attached to or detached from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, when a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or when a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID and then returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID that was determined to have a normal ID once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation continues to progress and no notification is made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, if the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

A4:
The first game board side component and the second game board side component are electrically connected by connecting the connectors to each other. Specifically, the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, are electrically connected to each other via a drawer connector formed by the respective terminals of the right game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right game board 5AR, and the respective terminals of the left game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left game board 5AL. This drawer connector allows automatic electrical connection between the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, by simply combining the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component.

[Summary B]
B0:
A gaming machine including a gaming frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a gaming board side component provided detachably on the gaming frame side component, the gaming board side component being composed of a first gaming board side component and a second gaming board side component and being fixed to the gaming frame side component. The first gaming board side component is composed of a plurality of boards including a presentation control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes the presentation of a game. The second gaming board side component is equipped with a specific board not equipped with a microprocessor. The specific board is equipped with a unique value that can be identified as the second gaming board side component, and unique value transmission means for signal transmission of the unique value to the presentation control board. The performance control board is capable of reporting a first error which occurs when a unique value cannot be received from the second game board side component within a predetermined time, and a second error which occurs when the unique value transmitted from the second game board side component is not a predetermined value.

Specifically, for example, a pachinko machine 1 is provided with a main frame 4 which is a gaming frame side component, and a divided gaming board 5A which is a gaming board side component as shown in Fig. 248. The divided gaming board 5A is made up of a left gaming board 5AL which is a first gaming board side component, and a right gaming board 5AR which is a second gaming board side component, and is fixed to the main frame 4 which is a gaming frame side component. The left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, is composed of multiple boards including the peripheral control board 1510, which is a presentation control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor that can execute game presentations (main control unit 1300 which houses the main control board 1310, and a left side drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as ``left side drive board unit 1700L'') which houses various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various presentation units housed in the left side rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.). The right side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, is equipped with a specific board that does not have a microprocessor (one of the right side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "right side drive board unit 1700R") that houses various boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various performance units housed in the right side rear box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.). One of the various boards that is a specific board is equipped with a self-identification code (ID) that is a unique value that can be identified as the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, and an ID output circuit IDC in FIG. 251, which is a unique value transmission means that transmits the unique self-identification code (ID) to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board.

The peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board, is configured to notify the following: the first error occurs when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the unique ID code (ID) from the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, within a predetermined time (the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255), resulting in error response 7 in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261, which becomes state 8 in FIG. 254(c): unconnected error 1; and the second error occurs when the unique ID code (ID) is received from the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, and is not a predetermined value, resulting in error response 1 in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261, which becomes state 2 in FIG. 254(c): ID error 1 (ID error 1 response).

In other words, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 passes a command classified as a notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, as error response 7 in Figs. 256 to 261, which is state 8 in Fig. 254(c): unconnected error 1, which is the first error, as the warning process of step S1024. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data, etc., from the peripheral control ROM as a mode indicating unconnection and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processing related to the performance.

The command classified as a notification display for error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figs. 256 to 261, which is state 2: ID error 1 in Fig. 254 (c), which is the second error, is passed to the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. In the warning process in step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) the schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data, etc., from the peripheral control ROM as modes indicating incompatibility (inconsistency) and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processes related to the performance.

In this way, the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, transmits a signal of a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a presentation control board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510, which is a presentation control board, transmits a signal of a unique value that can identify the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a presentation control board, within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is the peripheral control unit in FIG. 255). When the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on process fails to receive the ID, the first error, state 8 in FIG. 254(c): error response 7 in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261, which is state 8: no connection error 1, can be generated. When the ID is received within a predetermined time and is not a predetermined value, the second error, state 2 in FIG. 254(c): error response 1 in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261, which is state 2: ID error 1, can be generated. This makes it possible to immediately determine that the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are inconsistent, and prevents incomplete performance from being performed when the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are inconsistent. This prevents the player's interest in the game from declining.

B1:
The game machine includes a game frame side component and a game board side component. The game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component. The first game board side component is composed of a plurality of boards including a sub-control board equipped with a microprocessor capable of executing game effects. The second game board side component is composed of a board not equipped with a microprocessor, a unique value for indicating that it is the second game board side component, and a unique value transmission means for transmitting the unique value. Furthermore, the first game board side component and the second game board side component are electrically connected and fixed to the game frame side component. The first game board side component is composed of a first error that occurs when the unique value from the second game board side component is not received within a predetermined time, and a second error that occurs when the unique value from the second game board side component is received and is not the predetermined value.

Specifically, for example, it has a main frame 4 which is a component on the game frame side, and a split game board 5A in FIG. 248 which is a component on the game board side. The split game board 5A is composed of a left game board 5AL which is a first game board component, and a right game board 5AR which is a second game board component. The left game board 5AL which is the first game board component has multiple boards including a peripheral control board 1510 which is a sub-control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a which is a microprocessor capable of executing game effects (main control unit 1300 which houses the main control board 1310, left drive board unit 1700L which houses various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted which are attached to various effect units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive boards which drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.) (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "left drive board unit 1700L"). The right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is equipped with a board that does not have a microprocessor (a right side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "right side drive board unit 1700R") that houses various boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various performance units housed in the right side rear box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.), a self-identification code (ID) that is a unique value that identifies the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, and an ID output circuit IDC in Figure 251 that is a unique value transmission means that transmits the unique value of the self-identification code (ID).

Furthermore, the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are electrically connected and fixed to the main body frame 4, which is the game frame component. The task of attaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4 and the task of attaching the door frame unit to the door frame 3, which is supported by the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, are separate tasks. For this reason, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it is possible that the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame unit will not match (align) due to human error.

The left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, has the following: error response 7 in Figs. 256 to 261, which is state 8 in Fig. 254(c): unconnected error 1, which is the first error that occurs when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value, from the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in Fig. 255); and error response 1 in Figs. 256 to 261, which is state 2 in Fig. 254(c): ID error 1, which is the second error that occurs when the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value, from the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is received and is not a predetermined value (ID error 1 response).

The left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, i.e. the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, passes a command classified as a notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, as error response 7 in Figs. 256 to 261, which is the first error, State 8 in Fig. 254(c): Unconnected error 1. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data, etc., from the peripheral control ROM as a mode indicating unconnection, and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processing related to the presentation.

The command classified as a notification display for error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figs. 256 to 261, which is state 2: ID error 1 in Fig. 254 (c), which is the second error, is passed to the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. In the warning process in step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) the schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data, etc., from the peripheral control ROM as modes indicating incompatibility (inconsistency) and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processes related to the performance.

In this way, the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means provided on the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, transmits a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that identifies the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, to the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component. Therefore, the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, transmits the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that identifies the right-side game board 5AR, to the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is the step in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 255). If the ID code (ID) that is a unique value cannot be received in the ID determination process of step S1003, the first error, state 8 in FIG. 254(c): error response 7 in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261, which is state 8: no connection error 1 in FIG. 254(c), can be generated. If the ID code (ID) that is a unique value received within a predetermined time is not a predetermined value, the second error, state 2 in FIG. 254(c): error response 1 in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261 (ID error 1 response), can be generated. This makes it possible to immediately determine that the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are inconsistent, and it is possible to prevent incomplete performance from being executed in a state where the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are inconsistent. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

B2:
Furthermore, the various ID errors which are second errors (ID errors) (including not only the individual ID errors such as ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in FIG. 254(c) but also combinations of these ID errors) hinder gameplay to a greater extent than the various unconnection errors which are first errors (unconnection errors) (unconnection error 1, unconnection error 2, and unconnection error 3 shown in FIG. 254(c)).

Furthermore, the third error (magnetic detection) is resolved after a certain time, but the first error (disconnection error) and the second error (ID error) are not resolved even after a certain time has passed. In these various error notifications, the third error (magnetic detection) detects the so-called magnetic act and notifies the action, so it is resolved after a certain time has passed after the action is detected, whereas the first error (disconnection error) and the second error (ID error) are work errors made by the worker. In the case of the first error (disconnection error), the fitting of the structural members and the connection of the drawer connector must be properly checked after the power is cut off, and in the case of the second error (ID error), it is necessary to replace it with a compatible ID product after the power is cut off, so they are not resolved even after a certain time has passed.

Furthermore, when the second error (ID error) occurs, the decoration of the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is not performed. This is because the second error (ID error) is a mistake made by the worker, and the combination of the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is incompatible (inconsistent). In this state, if the decoration of the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is performed, there is a risk of electrical failure of the right side game board 5AR.

Furthermore, even if the third error (magnetic detection) occurs when the second error (ID error) occurs, the second error (ID error) occurrence warning sound remains. In other words, even if the third error (magnetic detection) occurs when the second error (ID error) occurs, as shown in Figures 258 and 261, the error notification sound and announcement sound are repeated in the audio in Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response). This is because the third error (magnetic detection) detects the so-called magnetic cheating behavior and notifies the behavior, and the behavior is detected and resolved after a certain period of time has passed, whereas the second error (ID error) is a work mistake made by the worker, and if it is the second error (ID error), it must be replaced with a compatible ID product after the power is cut off, so the second error (ID error) occurrence warning sound remains even after a certain period of time has passed.

B3:
Furthermore, if a RAM error and an ID error occur simultaneously, only the RAM error is notified, and the ID error is not notified. Also, no LED error is notified in the decoration unit. Specifically, if a RAM error in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and state 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254(c) (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261) occur simultaneously, only a notification is made to inform the user that a RAM error has occurred, whereas no notification is made to inform the user that state 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254(c) (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261) has occurred. This is because, if a RAM error occurs in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the progress of the game by the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly stopped, and in order to notify this, even if state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254 (c) (error response 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) in Figures 256 to 261) has occurred, the RAM error in the main control built-in RAM, which is the most important error, is notified as a top priority regardless of the occurrence of other errors.

If the ID is judged to be normal within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, no notification is made, but if the ID is judged to be abnormal within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, the notification mode may be changed when the state is changed. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode is changed when the state becomes normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not notify (target method in the same figure: none) when it is judged to be state 1: normal in FIG. 254 (c), that is, normal ID, whereas it maintains the notification of this error response 1 (ID error 1 response) when it is judged to be state 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254 (c) (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, abnormal ID, and the countermeasure in the same figure (c): after the replacement with a compatible ID product after power off, notification is no longer made when it is judged to be state 1: normal in FIG. 254 (c), that is, normal ID. In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right game boards is not determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the left and right game boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), there is no notification that the combination is incompatible (inconsistent) and an abnormal ID is not generated. In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right game boards to a specified period of time after power-on, it is possible to contribute to reducing the processing load on the progress of the presentation by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510.

Notifications are terminated except for some notifications. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254 (c) (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again. If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the state is 1: normal, as shown in FIG. 254(c), that is, a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

If it returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not change even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), the power supply to the peripheral control board must be cut off, and the game board must be reattached and the power to the pachinko machine must be turned on again. When the pachinko machine is turned on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 when the pachinko machine is turned on, so if the ID confirmation by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 and the notification process that continues until the power to the pachinko machine is turned off are performed, there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification process thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 222, and when the presentation operation unit is attached to or detached from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, when a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or when a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID and then returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID that was determined to have a normal ID once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation continues to progress and no notification is made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, if the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

B4:
At the time of the third error (magnetic detection), the sub-function display unit 2250, which is the fourth symbol, changes with a predetermined LED being lit. Specifically, at the time of the third error (magnetic detection), in a state where various ID errors (including ID errors that are ID errors 1, 2, and 3 shown in FIG. 254(c) as well as ID errors that are combinations of these) occur, as shown in FIG. 258 and FIG. 261, the sub-function display unit 2250, which is the fourth symbol, changes with a predetermined LED being lit. In other words, at the time of the third error (magnetic detection), even in a state where various ID errors (including ID errors that are ID errors 1, 2, and 3 shown in FIG. 254(c) as well as ID errors that are combinations of these) occur, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 continues to perform the performance by lighting up a predetermined LED of the sub-function display unit 2250.

In the case of a second error (ID error), no fluctuating decorative sound is played even if the ID is changed. Specifically, when various ID errors occur as the second error (ID error) (including the individual ID errors ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in FIG. 254(c) as well as combinations of these ID errors), as shown in FIG. 257 and FIG. 260, even if the game progresses and the pattern on the function display unit 1400 changes, error notification sounds and announcement sounds are played repeatedly, and no fluctuating decorative sound is played for the performance. This is because the second error (ID error) is a mistake made by the operator, and since the second error (ID error) must be replaced with a compatible ID product after the power is cut off, the fluctuating decorative sound is not played and the warning sound for the second error (ID error) continues.

The third error (magnetic detection), which is a magnetic sensor error, is resolved after a certain period of time has passed, but the error of the right-side game board 5AR not being mounted as a decorative unit (i.e., a non-connection error) and the ID error of the right-side game board 5AR as a decorative unit are not resolved even after a certain period of time has passed. These error notifications are not resolved even after a certain period of time has passed because the magnetic sensor error detects the so-called magnetic cheating behavior and notifies the behavior, and therefore is resolved after a certain period of time has passed after the behavior is detected, whereas the non-connection error and ID error are work errors made by the worker. In the case of the non-connection error, the fitting of the structural components and the connection of the drawer connector must be carefully checked after the power is cut off, and the ID error must be replaced with a compatible ID product after the power is cut off, so they are not resolved even after a certain period of time has passed.

[Summary C]
C0:
A gaming machine including a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board side component provided detachably on the game frame side component, the game board side component being composed of a first game board side component and a plurality of second game board side components and being fixed to the game frame side component. The first game board side component is composed of a plurality of boards including a performance control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes the performance of the game. The second game board side component is equipped with a specific board not equipped with a microprocessor. The specific board is equipped with an inherent value that can identify the second game board side component, and inherent value transmission means that transmits the inherent value to the performance control board. The plurality of second game board side components each have a different inherent value, and when it is determined that the inherent value of at least one of the second game board side components is not a predetermined value, the power-on operation of the plurality of second game board side components is different from the normal operation.

Specifically, for example, a pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main frame 4 which is a gaming frame side component, and a divided gaming board 5A of Fig. 248 which is a gaming board side component. The divided gaming board 5A is composed of a left gaming board 5AL which is a first gaming board side component, and a right gaming board 5AR which is a plurality of second gaming board side components (upper right gaming board 5ART of Fig. 253 and lower right gaming board 5ARU of Fig. 253), and is fixed to the main frame 4 which is a gaming frame side component. The left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, is composed of multiple boards including the peripheral control board 1510, which is a presentation control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor that can execute game presentations (main control unit 1300 which houses the main control board 1310, and a left side drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as ``left side drive board unit 1700L'') which houses various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various presentation units housed in the left side rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.). The right side game board 5AR, which is a second game board side component, is equipped with a specific board that does not have a microprocessor (a specific board among the right side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "right side drive board unit 1700R") that accommodates various boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various performance units housed in the right side rear box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.). The specific board among the various boards that are specific boards is equipped with a self-identification code (ID) that is a unique value that can be identified as the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, and an ID output circuit IDCT of the upper right game board 5ART that constitutes the right side game board 5AR in FIG. 253 and an ID output circuit IDCU of the lower right game board 5ARU that constitutes the right side game board 5AR, which are unique value transmission means that transmit the unique value of the self-identification code (ID) to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board.

The door frame 3, which is supported by the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, is fitted with door frame units such as a left side unit 420, a right side unit 430, a tray unit 200, and a top unit 450 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units").

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 253, the right side game board 5AR, which is one of the multiple second game board side components, is composed of an upper right game board 5ART and a lower right game board 5ARU, and there are multiple right side game boards 5AR, each of which has a different unique value. In the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the self-identification code, which is the unique value of at least one of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU (ID of the upper right game board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of the lower right game board 5ARU: 11111000B), is not a predetermined value. If the power is cut off, the state will become state 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254(c) or error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 or FIG. 259 will occur, and the power-on operation of the right-side game board 5AR, which is one of the multiple second game board components, will be different from normal operation (lighting, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.), and the various LEDs of the split game board 5AR (various LEDs on the game board) will turn off, so the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, will turn off.

In this way, the ID output circuit IDCT and ID output circuit IDCU, which are unique value transmission means provided on the upper right game board 5ART and lower right game board 5ARU that constitute the right side game board 5AR, which are multiple second game board side components, respectively, transmit a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, as a signal to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a presentation control board provided on the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component. If it is determined that the self-identification code, which is the unique value of at least one of the multiple second game board side components (ID of the upper right game board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of the lower right game board 5ARU: 11111000B), is not a predetermined value, the state will become state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254 (c) or error response 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) in Figure 256 or Figure 259, and the power-on operation of the right side game board 5AR, which is one of the multiple second game board side components, will be in a state (off) different from the normal operation (lit, flashing, gradational lighting, etc.). This makes it possible to immediately determine when the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the multiple second game board component, are inconsistent (including when the combination of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU is inconsistent), and prevents incomplete performance from being executed when the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the multiple second game board component, are inconsistent (including when the combination of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU is inconsistent). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

C1:
The game machine includes a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board side component provided detachably on the game frame side component. The game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component. The first game board side component is provided with a plurality of boards including a sub-control board equipped with a microprocessor capable of executing game performances. The second game board side component is provided with a board not equipped with a microprocessor, a unique value indicating that it is the second game board side component, and a unique value transmission means for transmitting the unique value. Furthermore, the first game board side component and the second game board side component are electrically connected and fixed to the game frame. There are multiple second game board side components, each having a different inherent value, and if it is determined that the inherent value of at least one second game board side component is not a predetermined value, the power-on operation of the second game board side component will be different from normal operation.

Specifically, for example, it has a main frame 4 which is a component on the game frame side, and a split game board 5A in FIG. 248 which is a component on the game board side. The split game board 5A is composed of a left game board 5AL which is a first game board component, and a right game board 5AR which is a second game board component. The left game board 5AL which is the first game board component has multiple boards including a peripheral control board 1510 which is a sub-control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a which is a microprocessor capable of executing game effects (main control unit 1300 which houses the main control board 1310, left drive board unit 1700L which houses various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted which are attached to various effect units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive boards which drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.) (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "left drive board unit 1700L"). The right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, is equipped with a board that does not have a microprocessor (a right side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "right side drive board unit 1700R") that houses various boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various performance units housed in the right side rear box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.), a self-identification code (ID) that is a unique value that identifies the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, and an ID output circuit IDCT of the upper right game board 5ART that constitutes the right side game board 5AR in FIG. 253, which is a unique value transmission means that transmits the unique identification code (ID), and an ID output circuit IDCU of the lower right game board 5ARU that constitutes the right side game board 5AR.

Furthermore, the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are electrically connected and fixed to the main frame 4, which is the game frame. Door frame units such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") are attached to the door frame 3, which is supported by the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The work of attaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4 and the work of attaching the door frame unit to the door frame 3, which is supported by the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, are separate works. For this reason, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, it is possible that the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame unit will not match (match) due to human error.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 253, the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, is made up of multiple upper right game boards 5ART and lower right game boards 5ARU, each of which has a different unique value. If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255 that the self-identification code, which is the unique value of at least one of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU (ID of the upper right game board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of the lower right game board 5ARU: 11111000B), is not a predetermined value, If this is determined, the state will change to State 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254 (c), or Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figure 256 or Figure 259, and the power-on operation of the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, will be different from normal operation (lighting, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.), and the various LEDs of the split game board 5AR (various LEDs on the game board) will turn off, so the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, will turn off.

In this way, the ID output circuit IDCT and ID output circuit IDCU, which are unique value transmitting means provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU constituting the right side game board 5AR, which are multiple second game board side components, respectively, transmit a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value identifying the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, to the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component. If it is determined that the self-identification code, which is the unique value of at least one of the multiple second game board side components (ID of the upper right game board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of the lower right game board 5ARU: 11111000B), is not a predetermined value, the state will become state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254 (c) or error response 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) in Figure 256 or Figure 259, and the power-on operation of the right side game board 5AR, which is one of the multiple second game board side components, will be in a state (off) different from the normal operation (lit, flashing, gradational lighting, etc.). This makes it possible to immediately determine when the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the multiple second game board component, are inconsistent (including when the combination of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU is inconsistent), and prevents incomplete performance from being executed when the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the multiple second game board component, are inconsistent (including when the combination of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU is inconsistent). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

C2:
Furthermore, if it is determined that the characteristic value of at least one second game board side component is not predetermined (a predetermined value), the power-on operation of other second game board side components whose characteristic values are determined to be normal will also be different from normal operation. Specifically, for example, when the self-identification code (ID) of the upper right game board 5ART does not match the value for the upper right game board 5ART (judgment value for the upper right game board), even if the self-identification code (ID) of the lower right game board 5ARU matches the value for the lower right game board 5ARU (judgment value for the lower right game board), various LEDs of the upper right game board 5ART that differ from normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.) are turned off as a power-on operation for the upper right game board 5ART, and various LEDs of the lower right game board 5ARU that differ from normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.) are turned off as a power-on operation for the lower right game board 5ARU. Also, for example, if the self-identification code (ID) of the lower right game board 5ARU does not match the value for the lower right game board 5ARU (judgment value for the lower right game board), even if the self-identification code (ID) of the upper right game board 5ART matches the value for the upper right game board 5ART (judgment value for the upper right game board), the various LEDs of the lower right game board 5ARU that differ from normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.) are turned off as the power-on operation of the lower right game board 5ARU, and the various LEDs of the upper right game board 5ART that differ from normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.) are turned off as the power-on operation of the upper right game board 5ART.

In other words, if the self-identification code (ID) of one of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU does not match a predetermined one (predetermined value: judgment for the upper right game board or judgment for the lower right game board), this is an operator error that results in an incompatible (inconsistent) combination with the left side game board 5AL, and since it must be replaced with a compatible ID product after the power is cut off, this is a different mode from normal operation.

In addition, if it is determined that the self-identification code, which is a unique value of at least one of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU (ID: 11110000B of the upper right game board 5ART, ID: 11111000B of the lower right game board 5ARU), is not a predetermined value, the state will become state 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254 (c), and error response 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) in FIG. 256 or FIG. 259 will occur, and the power-on operation of the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, will be in a mode different from the normal operation (lighting, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.), and the various LEDs of the split game board 5AR (various LEDs of the game board) will be turned off. If it does not match the value for the upper game board 5ART (judgment value for the upper right game board), the power-on operation of the upper right game board 5ART may be to turn off various LEDs of the upper right game board 5ART that are different from normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.), while the power-on operation of the lower right game board 5ART may be to set it to normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.).If the self-identification code (ID) of the lower right game board 5ARU does not match the value for the lower right game board 5ARU (judgment value for the lower right game board), the power-on operation of the lower right game board 5ARU may be to turn off various LEDs of the lower right game board 5ARU that are different from normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.), while the power-on operation of the upper right game board 5ARU may be to set it to normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.). This way, you can communicate which parts are incompatible (inconsistent) and which parts are compatible (consistent).

The left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, has the following: error response 7 in Figs. 256 to 261, which is state 8 in Fig. 254(c): unconnected error 1, which is the first error that occurs when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value, from the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in Fig. 255); and error response 1 in Figs. 256 to 261, which is state 2 in Fig. 254(c): ID error 1, which is the second error that occurs when the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value, from the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is received and is not a predetermined value (ID error 1 response).

The left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, i.e. the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, passes a command classified as a notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, as error response 7 in Figs. 256 to 261, which is the first error, State 8 in Fig. 254(c): Unconnected error 1. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data, etc., from the peripheral control ROM as a mode indicating unconnection, and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processing related to the presentation.

The command classified as a notification display for error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figs. 256 to 261, which is state 2: ID error 1 in Fig. 254 (c), which is the second error, is passed to the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. In the warning process in step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) the schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data, etc., from the peripheral control ROM as modes indicating incompatibility (inconsistency) and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processes related to the performance.

In this way, the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, can generate error response 7 in Figures 256 to 261, which is state 8 in Figure 254 (c): unconnected error 1, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the unique identification code (ID) within a predetermined time (the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in Figure 255), and can generate error response 1 in Figures 256 to 261, which is state 2 in Figure 254 (c): ID error 1, if the unique identification code (ID) received within the predetermined time is not a predetermined value.

Furthermore, the various ID errors, which are the second type of error (ID error) (including individual ID errors such as ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in FIG. 254(c) as well as combinations of these ID errors), are more disruptive to play than the various unconnection errors, which are the first type of error (unconnection error) (unconnection error 1, unconnection error 2, and unconnection error 3 shown in FIG. 254(c)).

Furthermore, the third error (magnetic detection) is resolved after a certain time, but the first error (disconnection error) and the second error (ID error) are not resolved even after a certain time has passed. In these various error notifications, the third error (magnetic detection) detects the so-called magnetic act and notifies the action, so it is resolved after a certain time has passed after the action is detected, whereas the first error (disconnection error) and the second error (ID error) are work errors made by the worker. In the case of the first error (disconnection error), the fitting of the structural members and the connection of the drawer connector must be properly checked after the power is cut off, and in the case of the second error (ID error), it is necessary to replace it with a compatible ID product after the power is cut off, so they are not resolved even after a certain time has passed.

Furthermore, when the second error (ID error) occurs, the decoration of the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is not performed. This is because the second error (ID error) is a mistake made by the worker, and the combination of the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is incompatible (inconsistent). In this state, if the decoration of the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is performed, there is a risk of electrical failure of the right side game board 5AR.

Furthermore, even if the third error (magnetic detection) occurs when the second error (ID error) occurs, the second error (ID error) occurrence warning sound remains. In other words, even if the third error (magnetic detection) occurs when the second error (ID error) occurs, as shown in Figures 258 and 261, the error notification sound and announcement sound are repeated in the audio in Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response). This is because the third error (magnetic detection) detects the so-called magnetic cheating behavior and notifies the behavior, and the behavior is detected and resolved after a certain period of time has passed, whereas the second error (ID error) is a work mistake made by the worker, and if it is the second error (ID error), it must be replaced with a compatible ID product after the power is cut off, so the second error (ID error) occurrence warning sound remains even after a certain period of time has passed.

C3:
Furthermore, if a RAM error and an ID error occur simultaneously, only the RAM error is notified, and the ID error is not notified. Also, no LED error is notified in the decoration unit. Specifically, if a RAM error in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and state 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254(c) (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261) occur simultaneously, only a notification is made to inform the user that a RAM error has occurred, whereas no notification is made to inform the user that state 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254(c) (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261) has occurred. This is because, if a RAM error occurs in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the progress of the game by the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly stopped, and in order to notify this, even if state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254 (c) (error response 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) in Figures 256 to 261) has occurred, the RAM error in the main control built-in RAM, which is the most important error, is notified as a top priority regardless of the occurrence of other errors.

If the ID is judged to be normal within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, no notification is made, but if the ID is judged to be abnormal within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, the notification mode may be changed when the state is changed. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode is changed when the state becomes normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not notify (target method in the same figure: none) when it is judged to be state 1: normal in FIG. 254 (c), that is, normal ID, whereas it maintains the notification of this error response 1 (ID error 1 response) when it is judged to be state 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254 (c) (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, abnormal ID, and the countermeasure in the same figure (c): after the replacement with a compatible ID product after power off, notification is no longer made when it is judged to be state 1: normal in FIG. 254 (c), that is, normal ID. In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right game boards is not determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the left and right game boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), there is no notification that the combination is incompatible (inconsistent) and an abnormal ID is not generated. In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right game boards to a specified period of time after power-on, it is possible to contribute to reducing the processing load on the progress of the presentation by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510.

Notifications are terminated except for some notifications. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254 (c) (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again. If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the state is 1: normal, as shown in FIG. 254(c), that is, a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

If it returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not change even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), the power supply to the peripheral control board must be cut off, and the game board must be reattached and the power to the pachinko machine must be turned on again. When the pachinko machine is turned on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 when the pachinko machine is turned on, so if the ID confirmation by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 and the notification process that continues until the power to the pachinko machine is turned off are performed, there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification process thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 222, and when the presentation operation unit is attached to or detached from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, when a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or when a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID and then returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID that was determined to have a normal ID once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation continues to progress and no notification is made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, if the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

[Summary D]
D0:
A gaming machine including a gaming frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a gaming board side component detachably provided on the gaming frame side component, the gaming board side component being composed of a first gaming board side component and a second gaming board side component. The first gaming board side component is provided with a presentation control board capable of performing serial communication for performing a presentation of a game and transmitting and receiving signals with the outside. The second gaming board side component has a light emitter, a decoration drive means capable of driving the light emitter and receiving decoration data from the serial communication, a second ID code uniquely assigned to the decoration drive means, and a first ID code uniquely assigned to the decoration drive means. At least one of the serial communication lines connected to the presentation control board is configured so that the first ID code and the second ID code are included in the serial communication data.

Specifically, for example, the game machine includes a main frame 4 as a game frame side component and a game board 5 as a game board side component. Door frame units such as a left side unit 420, a right side unit 430, a tray unit 200, and a top unit 450 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "door frame units") are attached to the door frame 3 supported by the main frame 4 so as to be able to open and close. Since there are compatibility (matching) and incompatibility (mismatching) between the game board 5 and the door frame units, the door frame units may be treated as components of the game board 5. In other words, the game board side components provided on the main frame 4 are composed of the game board 5, which is a first game board side component on which a microprocessor is mounted, and a specific door frame unit (a combination of one or more (or all) of the door frame units), which is a second game board side component on which a microprocessor is not mounted, and the game board 5 is mounted to the main frame 4, and the door frame unit is mounted to the door frame 3 supported by the main frame 4 so as to be able to open and close. Here, in the case where the door frame unit is treated as a component of the game board 5, the game board 5 is composed of the game board 5 which is the first game board side component and a specific door unit which is the second game board side component. The game board 5 which is the first game board side component is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510 which is a presentation control board capable of performing serial communication for performing game presentation and sending and receiving signals with the outside. The specific door unit which is the second game board side component has various LEDs which are light emitters, an LED driver WIDCa mounted on the frame side decorative board WKB of FIG. 262 which is a decorative drive means capable of driving the various LEDs which are light emitters and receiving decorative data from serial communication, a first ID code uniquely assigned, and a second ID code uniquely assigned to the LED driver WIDCa mounted on the frame side decorative board WKB of FIG. 262 which is a decorative drive means.

The LED driver WIDCa mounted on the frame side decorative board WKB, which is the decorative drive means, has a setting value of 64 set by the address setting circuit WIDCd mounted on the frame side decorative board WKB of FIG. 262, which is a uniquely assigned first ID code. A specific door unit, which is the second game board side component, has 8-bit information: 11110000B, in which the eight setting terminals Q0 terminal to Q7 terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb mounted on the frame side decorative board WKB of FIG. 262, which is a uniquely assigned second ID code, are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground). There are multiple serial communication lines connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 and various boards in the game board 5, the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame unit, etc.). At least one of the serial communication lines connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board, contains in its serial communication data a setting value 64 (an ID code indicating the LED driver WIDCa contained in the light emission information signal for the LED driver WIDCa) which is set by the address setting circuit WIDCd implemented on the frame side decorative board WKB, which is the first ID code, and 8-bit information indicating that the eight setting terminals Q0 terminal to Q7 terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb implemented on the frame side decorative board WKB, which is the second ID code, are each electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) (information compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb with signals output from the eight output terminals OUT0 terminal to OUT7 terminal of the LED driver WIDCa contained in the light emission information signal for the LED driver WIDCa). In other words, the serial communication line (i.e., the serial communication data) that transmits the light emission data that indicates the LED light emission mode, which is the decorative data for a specific door frame unit that is the second game board side component, contains the ID of the LED driver WIDCa as the first ID code (ID code that indicates the LED driver WIDCa: set value 64) and the ID of the frame side decorative board WKB as the second ID code (8-bit information: 11110000B, indicating that the eight setting terminals Q0 to Q7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb are each electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground)).

In this way, in at least one of the serial communication lines connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board, the serial communication data includes the setting value 64, which is the first ID code uniquely assigned to the LED driver WIDCa, and the second ID code 11110000B, which is uniquely assigned to the door unit, which is the second game board side component. Therefore, in addition to the serial communication line that transmits the light emission data that indicates the light emission mode of various LEDs, which is the decoration data, the LED driver WIDCa There is no need to provide a serial communication line for exclusively transmitting the set value 64, which is the first ID code uniquely assigned to the first game board, and the second ID code 11110000B, which is the second ID code uniquely assigned to the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board side component, as a serial communication line connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board, and the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5, which is the first game board side component, and the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board side component, can be performed in the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board side component. This makes it possible to immediately determine that the game board 5, which is the first game board side component, and the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board side component, are inconsistent, and it is possible to prevent an incomplete performance from being executed in a state where the game board 5, which is the first game board side component, and the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board side component, are inconsistent. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in playing.

D1:
The game machine includes a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board side component detachably provided on the game frame side component. The game board side component includes a light emitter and a decoration driver for driving the light emitter. The game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component. The first game board side component includes a sub-control board capable of executing serial communication for executing game performance and transmitting/receiving signals to/from the outside. The second game board side component includes a decoration driver for receiving decoration data from the serial communication. The decoration driver has a first ID code uniquely assigned. The second game board side component has a second ID code uniquely assigned. There are a plurality of serial communication lines connected to the sub-control board. The first ID code and the second ID code are included in the serial communication line that transmits the decoration data to the second game board side component.

Specifically, for example, the device comprises a main frame 4 which is a component on the game frame side, and a game board 5 which is a component on the game board side. Door frame units such as a left side unit 420, a right side unit 430, a tray unit 200, and a door frame top unit 450 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") are attached to the door frame 3 which is supported by the main frame 4 so as to be able to be opened and closed. Since there are compatibility (matching)/incompatibility (mismatching) between the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (a combination of one or more (or all) of the door frame units) a specific door frame unit may be treated as a component of the game board 5. That is, the game board side component provided on the main frame 4 is composed of the game board 5 which is the first game board side component on which a microprocessor is mounted, and the specific door frame unit which is the second game board side component on which a microprocessor is not mounted, and the game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4, and the specific door frame unit is mounted on the door frame 3 which is supported by the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. Here, in the case where the specific door frame unit is treated as a component of the game board 5, the game board 5 is composed of the game board 5 which is the first game board side component and the door unit which is the second game board side component. The game board 5 and the specific door frame unit are equipped with various LEDs which are light-emitting bodies, and an LED driver which is a decorative driver which drives the various LEDs which are light-emitting bodies. The game board 5 which is the first game board side component is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510 which is a sub-control board which can execute serial communication for executing the performance of the game and transmitting and receiving signals to and from the outside. The door unit, which is the second game board side component, is equipped with an LED driver WIDCa mounted on the frame side decorative board WKB of FIG. 262, which is a decorative driver that receives light emission data that indicates the light emission mode of the LED, which is decorative data, from serial communication. The LED driver WIDCa mounted on the frame side decorative board WKB, which is a decorative driver, has a setting value of 64 that is set by the address setting circuit WIDCd mounted on the frame side decorative board WKB of FIG. 262, which is a uniquely assigned first ID code. The door unit, which is the second game board side component, has 8-bit information: 11110000B, in which the eight setting terminals Q0 terminal to Q7 terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb mounted on the frame side decorative board WKB of FIG. 262, which is a uniquely assigned second ID code, are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground). There are multiple serial communication lines connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board (for example, between the peripheral control board 1510 and various boards within the game board 5, or between the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame unit, etc.). The serial communication line that transmits light emission data indicating the light emission mode of the LED, which is decorative data for a specific door frame unit that is the second game board side component, contains a setting value 64 (an ID code indicating the LED driver WIDCa contained in the light emission information signal for the LED driver WIDCa) that is set by the address setting circuit WIDCd implemented on the frame side decorative board WKB, which is the first ID code, and 8-bit information in which the eight setting terminals Q0 terminal to Q7 terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb implemented on the frame side decorative board WKB, which is the second ID code, are each electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) (information that is compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb with signals output from the eight output terminals OUT0 terminal to OUT7 terminal of the LED driver WIDCa contained in the light emission information signal for the LED driver WIDCa). In other words, the serial communication line that transmits the light emission data that indicates the LED light emission mode, which is the decorative data for a specific door frame unit that is the second game board side component, contains the ID of the LED driver WIDCa as the first ID code (ID code that indicates the LED driver WIDCa: set value 64) and the ID of the frame side decorative board WKB as the second ID code (8-bit information indicating that the eight setting terminals Q0 to Q7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb are each electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground): 11110000B).

In this way, for the LED driver WIDCa, which is a decorative driver that drives the various LEDs that are light-emitting bodies in the door unit that is the second game board component, the setting value 64, which is the first ID code uniquely assigned to the LED driver WIDCa, which is a decorative driver, and the second ID code 11110000B, which is the second ID code uniquely assigned to the door unit that is the second game board component, are included in the serial communication line that transmits the light emission data that indicates the light emission modes of the various LEDs, which is decorative data for the door unit that is the second game board component. In addition to the serial communication line for transmitting the setting value 64, which is the first ID code uniquely assigned to the LED driver WIDCa, which is the decoration driver, and the second ID code 11110000B, which is the second ID code uniquely assigned to the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board side component, there is no need to provide a serial communication line connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the sub-control board, as a serial communication line, and the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5, which is the first game board side component, and the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board side component, can be performed in the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board side component. This makes it possible to immediately determine that the game board 5, which is the first game board side component, and the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board side component, are inconsistent, and it is possible to prevent incomplete performance from being performed in a state where the game board 5, which is the first game board side component, and the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board side component, are inconsistent. This can prevent players from losing interest in the game.

D2:
Furthermore, in serial communication between the first game board side component and the second game board side component, a second ID code is provided (included) in the data area that decorates the illuminant, and a decoration driver is used as a second ID code expansion means that expands (restores) the second ID code from the serial signal to a parallel signal. Specifically, in serial communication between the game board 5, which is the first game board side component, and a specific door frame unit, which is the second game board side component, the light emission data, which is a data area that decorates various LEDs, which are light-emitting bodies, and which indicates the light emission mode of the LEDs, contains (includes) the ID of the frame side decorative board WKB as a second ID code (8-bit information: 11110000B, in which the eight setting terminals Q0 terminal to Q7 terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb are each electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground)), and an LED driver WIDCa implemented on the frame side decorative board WKB, which is a decorative driver, is used as a second ID code expansion means for expanding (restoring) the second ID code 11110000B from the serial signal to a parallel signal. This means that there is no need to provide a dedicated second ID code expansion means on the frame side decorative board WKB for expanding (restoring) the second ID code 11110000B into a parallel signal, and the LED driver WIDCa, which drives various LEDs, can be used directly as the second ID code expansion means and output to the comparator circuit WIDCb.

Furthermore, although the first game board side component and the second game board side component are electrically connected, they are each independently fixed to the game frame side component. Specifically, although the game board 5, which is the first game board side component, and the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board side component, are electrically connected, they are each independently fixed to the main frame 4, which is the game frame side component. In other words, the task of attaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4 and the task of attaching the specific door frame unit to the door frame 3 that is supported by the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, are separate tasks. For this reason, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, it may happen that the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the specific door frame unit does not match (match) due to human error.

D3:
Furthermore, the serial signals from the sub-control board and the serial signals to the sub-control board are communicated using the same area as various data related to the presentation of the game. Specifically, the light emission information signal, which is a serial signal from the peripheral control board 1510, which is the sub-control board, to the frame side decorative board WKB in the specific door frame unit of Fig. 262, and the door frame side information signal, which is a serial signal from the relay board TKB provided in the dish unit 200 in the specific door frame unit of Fig. 263 to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the sub-control board, are exchanged (communicated) using the same area as various data related to the presentation of the game, by electrically connecting each terminal of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 by mounting the game board 5 on the main frame 4, and each terminal of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. This allows the existing serial line to be used as is for the drawer connector, so that there is no need to increase the number of drawer connectors, and an ID for determining the authenticity of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit can be sent from the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board, and the determination result for the specific door frame unit can be received.

In a system capable of determining the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit as shown in Figures 262 and 263, if the ID is determined to be normal within a specified period of time after power-on, no notification is issued, but if the ID is determined to be abnormal within a specified period of time after power-on, the notification mode may be changed if the state is changed. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode is changed when the state becomes normal. Specifically, in the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process of step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 222 (only the first time after power-on) or the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255, if it is determined that the ID is normal, i.e., state 1 of FIG. 254(c): normal, no alert is issued (target method in the same figure: none), whereas if it is determined that the ID is abnormal, i.e., state 2 of FIG. 254(c): ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), the alert for this error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained, and if it is determined that the ID is abnormal, i.e., state 1 of FIG. 254(c): normal, i.e., normal ID, as the countermeasure in the same figure (c): after power-off and replacement with a compatible ID product, no alert is issued. In other words, if the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the game board 5 and the specific door frame unit is not determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the game board 5 and the specific door frame unit becomes incompatible (inconsistent), there is no notification that the combination is incompatible (inconsistent) and an abnormal ID is not generated. In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit to a specified period of time after power-on, it is possible to contribute to reducing the processing load on the progress of the presentation by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510.

Notifications are terminated except for some notifications. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 judges in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254 (c) (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again. If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the state is 1: normal, as shown in FIG. 254(c), that is, a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

If it returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not change even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), the power supply to the peripheral control board must be cut off, and the game board must be reattached and the power to the pachinko machine must be turned on again. When the pachinko machine is turned on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 when the pachinko machine is turned on, so if the ID confirmation by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 and the notification process that continues until the power to the pachinko machine is turned off are performed, there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification process thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 222, and when the presentation operation unit is attached to or detached from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, when a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or when a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID and then returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID that was determined to have a normal ID once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation continues to progress and no notification is made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, if the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

D4:
The result of the true/false judgment is transmitted by another serial communication means. Specifically, the peripheral control board 1510 outputs the light emission data instructing the light emission mode of the LED to the frame side decorative board WKB as a light emission information signal to the LED driver WIDCa of the frame side decorative board WKB in the door unit, while the ID valid signal from the comparator circuit WIDCb of the frame side decorative board WKB is input to the door frame side information output circuit TOC of the relay board TKB provided in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 4, and is output from the door frame side information output circuit TOC to the peripheral control board 1510 in a serial communication line (a serial communication line for door frame side information signals that is a different system from the serial communication line for light emission information signals) that transmits the serialized door frame side information signals together with the detection signals from various sensors such as the performance operation unit 300. In other words, the ID valid signal from the comparator circuit WIDCb of the frame side decorative board WKB, which is the result of the authenticity determination, is transmitted via the serial communication line for the door frame side information signal, which is a separate serial communication means different from the serial communication line for the light emission information signal.

The first ID code uses the last number that can be set. Specifically, a set value of 64 is set as the ID of the LED driver WIDCa of the frame side decorative board WKB in the door unit. This is because LED drivers are mounted not only on specific door frame units, but also on various decorative boards and boards provided on the game board 5, and the number of LED drivers changes depending on the model, so in program development it is necessary to prevent confusion between the LED driver WIDCa of the ID comparison circuit WIDC and other LED drivers. Therefore, for the frame side decorative board WKB on which the ID comparison circuit WIDC is provided, the ID of the LED driver WIDCa is always fixed to a set value of 64.

The LED is driven by a decorative driver used for the second ID code expansion means. Specifically, in serial communication between the game board 5, which is the first game board side component, and a specific door frame unit, which is the second game board side component, the ID of the frame side decorative board WKB (8-bit information: 11110000B, in which the eight setting terminals Q0 terminal to Q7 terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground)) is provided (included) as the second ID code in the light emission data, which is the data area that decorates the various LEDs that are light emitters, and the LED driver WIDCa implemented on the frame side decorative board WKB, which is the decorative driver, is used as the second ID code expansion means that expands (restores) the second ID code 11110000B from the serial signal to a parallel signal. This eliminates the need to provide a dedicated second ID code expansion means on the frame side decorative board WKB for expanding (restoring) the second ID code 11110000B into a parallel signal, and the LED driver WIDCa that drives the various LEDs can be used as the second ID code expansion means to output to the comparator circuit WIDCb. Furthermore, the LED driver WIDCa can control the emission of various LEDs that are electrically connected to the other output terminals (16 output terminals) that are not electrically connected to the eight input terminals of the comparator circuit WIDCb based on the emission data.

The drawer connector is divided into a main connector and a sub-connector. Specifically, the information acquisition clock signal and the information acquisition switching signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 are electrically connected to the terminals (main connector or sub connector) of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and the terminals (sub connector or main connector) of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, and are transmitted to the relay board TKB provided on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 via this drawer connector. In addition, the door frame side information signal from the door frame side information output circuit TOC of the relay board TKB provided in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is electrically connected to each terminal (main side connector or sub-side connector) of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and each terminal (sub-side connector or main side connector) of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, and is transmitted to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 via this drawer connector.

When the result is false (incompatible) → true (compatible), the game becomes playable (noise countermeasure). Specifically, for example, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process of step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 222, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sets and outputs the logic of the information acquisition switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal in parallel operation and serial operation, and then outputs an information acquisition clock signal to acquire the door frame side information signal, grasp the player's operation and the operation of the movable body (performance body) on the performance operation unit 300 attached to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, grasp the movable body (performance body) and the player's operation provided on other units of the door frame 3, and obtain a judgment result on the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit. In this way, if the judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit changes from false (incompatible) to true (compatible), that is, if the change result is reversed, it is assumed that although the combination of the game board 5 and the specific door frame unit is compatible (compatible), part of the door frame side information signal (the part indicating the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the specific door frame unit) has been distorted due to the influence of noise, and the performance proceeds as if the combination of the game board 5 and the specific door frame unit is compatible (consistent).

While the false incompatibility (mismatch) is present, data to turn off the LEDs is sent to the decorative unit. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sends light emission data to the various LED drivers to turn off (all lights off) the various LEDs (various LEDs related to the performance (various decorative LEDs)) on the game board (divided game board) and/or the various LEDs (various LEDs related to the performance (various decorative LEDs)) on a specific door frame unit.

When the false incompatibility (mismatch) is removed, data for turning on the LEDs is sent to the decorative unit. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sends light emission data to the various LED drivers so that the various LEDs (various LEDs related to the performance (various decorative LEDs)) on the game board (divided game board) and/or the various LEDs (various LEDs related to the performance (various decorative LEDs)) on a specific door frame unit will emit light in accordance with the progress of the performance.

[Summary E]
E1:
The game device comprises a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame attached to the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board side component provided on the game frame side component, the game board side component being composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and further comprising an alignment determination means for determining alignment between the first game board side component and the second game board side component, and an operation unit provided on the first game board side component, and when the operation unit is operated, an alert can be issued according to the determination result of the alignment determination means.

Specifically, for example, it is provided with a main frame 4 which is a game frame side component, and a divided game board 5A in FIG. 248 which is a game board side component provided on the main frame 4 which is a game frame side component. The divided game board 5A which is a game board side component is composed of a left side game board 5AL in FIG. 248 which is a first game board side component, and a right side game board 5AR in FIG. 248 which is a second game board side component. It further includes an ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255 which is a consistency determination means for determining the consistency between the left side game board 5AL which is the first game board side component and the right side game board 5AR which is the second game board side component, and an ID error determination switch 1310v of the main control board 1310 which is an operation unit provided on the left side game board 5AL which is the first game board side component in FIG. 269. When the ID error determination switch 1310v on the main control board 1310, which is the operation unit, is operated, a notification can be issued according to the determination result of the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255, which is the consistency determination means.

After the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1, when a staff member such as a game parlor attendant presses the pressing operation part of the ID error judgment switch 1310v provided on the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects a detection signal from the ID error judgment switch 1310v in the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 212. (Specifically, the logic of the detection signal from the ID error judgment switch 1310v has an operation logic and a non-operation logic, and when the operation logic is input, the main control MPU 1310a detects an ID error.) When it is determined that the pressing operation part of the ID error determination switch 1310v has been pressed, and when a non-operation logic in which the operation logic is inverted is input, it is determined that the pressing operation part of the ID error determination switch 1310v has not been pressed. ) When it is determined that the pressing operation part of the ID error determination switch 1310v has been pressed, an ID error determination result notification start command that starts notification of the ID error determination result is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 212.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Fig. 255. In this ID determination process, in order to obtain the ID of the right-side game board and the ID of the performance operation unit, an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the right-side game board) is output to the right-side game board, and an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the performance operation unit) is output to the performance operation unit. The peripheral control IC 1510a acquires the ID code signal from the right-side game board (ID code signal exclusive to the right-side game board) and the ID code signal from the performance operation unit (ID code signal exclusive to the performance operation unit) through separate serial systems, and judges (compares) the combination of the split game boards (i.e., the combination of the right-side game board (board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left-side game board (peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) by referring to a combination table (Fig. 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, and judges (compares) the combination of the performance operation unit and the split game board by referring to a combination table (Fig. 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in FIG. 223, and analyzes it in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 255. In response to this, when the determination result determined in the ID determination processing of step S1003 is incompatible (inconsistent), in order to start notifying the ID error determination result, the peripheral control IC 1510a passes a command classified as a notification display to the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit normal processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. As a result, in the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) the schedule data for generating the screen, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode, the schedule data for generating the sound, and the schedule data for the electrical drive source, etc., from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC as modes indicating incompatibility (inconsistency), thereby setting various processes related to the presentation, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 notifies that a corresponding error has occurred, out of Error Responses 1 to 9, as the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in FIG. 254(c).

In this way, when the pressing operation part of the ID error determination switch 1310v provided on the main control board 1310, which is the operation part, is pressed, a notification can be issued according to the determination result of the consistency between the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component. This makes it possible to immediately determine that the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, are inconsistent, and it is possible to prevent an incomplete performance from being executed when the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, are inconsistent. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

E2:
In the case of an ID error or a non-connection error, the error notification start time can be changed by pressing the pressing operation part of the ID error judgment switch 1310v. Specifically, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the judgment result performed on the combination of the divided game board in the ID judgment processing of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Fig. 255, if the peripheral control IC 1510a does not receive the ID error judgment result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in Fig. 223 and analyze it in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Fig. 255, the command classified as the notification display cannot be passed to the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, and notification of the ID error judgment result cannot be started. In other words, even if error response 1 to error response 9 has occurred until the ID error determination result notification start command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310, the error notification start time for notifying that fact can be changed by a staff member such as an arcade attendant pressing the pressing operation portion of the ID error determination switch 1310v.

You can know the ID error or the unconnected error at any timing after the power is turned on. Specifically, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the determination result of the combination of the divided game boards, etc. in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 255, if the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 is received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 223 by the pressing operation of the pressing operation part of the ID error determination switch 1310v by the clerk of the game all, and is not analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 255, the command classified as the notification display cannot be passed to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process, and the notification of the ID error determination result cannot be started. In other words, a staff member or other attendant at the gaming hall can learn of an ID error or a disconnection error at any time after powering on the pachinko machine 1 (at any time after the system of the pachinko machine 1 has finished starting up).

When error response 1 to error response 9 do not occur as the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in FIG. 254(c), that is, when the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has "none" as a countermeasure, so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, when the operation is normal (no error response), no notification is given and no special notification sound is played from the speaker.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the pressing operation portion of the ID error determination switch 1310v provided on the main control board 1310 is pressed, this may trigger an alarm sound (e.g., a beep) to be emitted from the speaker under the control of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and a setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, this may trigger an alarm sound (e.g., "beep") to be emitted from the speaker under control of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. Note that if the setting is changed by pressing the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633, an alarm sound (e.g., "pico", which may be the same as the alarm sound that is emitted when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a and turned ON) may be emitted from the speaker under control of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 each time the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is pressed.

E3:
A predetermined self-identification code (ID) is assigned to the right-side game board 5AR in a hardware manner (by a hardware circuit). Specifically, the eight ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of Fig. 251 provided on the right-side game board 5AR are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) to assign an ID setting value (11110000B).

If the ID assigned to the right side game board 5AR by hardware (by a hardware circuit) is compared with the judgment ID code and a valid signal is output if they are the same. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of FIG. 251 provided on the right side game board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left side game board 5AL of FIG. 249, and the peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right side game board 5AR from this input ID code signal and judges (compares) it by referring to the combination table (FIG. 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM, which is the judgment ID code. The combination of the divided game boards is performed in the ID judgment process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255. If the combination of the split game boards is compatible (matched), providing that the other IDs shown in FIG. 254(c) are compatible, the state becomes 1: normal, and the performance is progressed by the door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3, and the split game board 5A. The peripheral control board 1510 outputs, for example, a control signal that lights up a specific LED in the sub-function display unit 2250 of the split game board 5A as an enable signal to progress the performance.

If the ID assigned to the right side game board 5AR by hardware (by a hardware circuit) is compared with the judgment ID code and they are not the same, a valid signal is not output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of FIG. 251 provided on the right side game board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left side game board 5AL of FIG. 249, and the peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right side game board 5AR from this input ID code signal and judges (compares) it by referring to the combination table (FIG. 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM, which is the judgment ID code. The combination of the divided game boards is performed in the ID judgment process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255. If the combination of the split game boards is not compatible (matched), for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 reaches state 2: ID error 1 as shown in FIG. 254(c), in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 257, the control signal that turns on a specific LED in the sub-function display unit 2250 of the split game board 5A is not output as an effective signal to proceed with the presentation, and the sub-function display unit 2250 is turned off (all lights off).

There are cases where no notification is given even if the operation unit is operated at any timing after power-on (in the case of a regular ID). Specifically, when error response 1 to error response 9 have not occurred as the behavior of the pachinko machine in an error shown in FIG. 254(c), that is, when the behavior of the pachinko machine in an error shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turning it ON (until a predetermined period of time has passed until this setting change processing is completed), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is not able to notify that the operation is normal (no error response). Also, when the behavior of the pachinko machine in an error shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), the countermeasure is "none", so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the operation is normal (no error handling occurs), no notification will be given.

In addition, when the regular ID, ID error, and unconnected error are to be known at any timing after power-on, that is, the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), and ID errors and unconnected errors such as error response 1 to error response 9 are determined in a predetermined period after power-on as the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, but they may be known at any timing after power-on. Specifically, the regular ID, ID error, and unconnected error may be determined by performing an ID determination process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 222. The regular ID, ID error, and unconnected error related to the performance operation unit may be determined in the performance operation unit information acquisition process of step S in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 222. In any case, when the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response) because the countermeasure is "none". In other words, if the operation is normal (no error handling is performed), no notification will be given.

If it is determined to be a genuine ID, no notification will be issued even if the operation unit is operated thereafter. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in Figure 255 that the state is 1: normal in Figure 254 (c), that is, the ID is normal, no notification will be issued (target method in the same figure: none). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right game boards is not judged at all thereafter. Even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 at this timing and turned ON, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 211 and the main control side timer interrupt processing in FIG. 212, and is therefore unable to perform the setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is unable to notify that it is operating normally (no error response).

If it is determined that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification will continue at least until it becomes normal. Specifically, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254 (c) (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification of this Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) is maintained until the corrective action in FIG. 254 (c): the product is replaced with a compatible ID product after the power is cut off. This notification makes it difficult to play while the left side game board and the right side game board are in a mismatched (inconsistent) combination.

If the ID is judged to be normal within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, no notification is made, but if the ID is judged to be abnormal within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, the notification mode may be changed when the state is changed. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode is changed when the state becomes normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not notify (target method in the same figure: none) when it is judged to be state 1: normal in FIG. 254 (c), that is, normal ID, whereas it maintains the notification of this error response 1 (ID error 1 response) when it is judged to be state 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254 (c) (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, abnormal ID, and the countermeasure in the same figure (c): after the replacement with a compatible ID product after power off, notification is no longer made when it is judged to be state 1: normal in FIG. 254 (c), that is, normal ID. In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right game boards is not determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the left and right game boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), there is no notification that the combination is incompatible (inconsistent) and an abnormal ID is not generated. In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right game boards to a specified period of time after power-on, it is possible to contribute to reducing the processing load on the progress of the presentation by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510.

Notifications are terminated except for some notifications. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254 (c) (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again. If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the state is 1: normal, as shown in FIG. 254(c), that is, a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

If it returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not change even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), the power supply to the peripheral control board must be cut off, and the game board must be reattached and the power to the pachinko machine must be turned on again. When the pachinko machine is turned on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 when the pachinko machine is turned on, so if the ID confirmation by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 and the notification process that continues until the power to the pachinko machine is turned off are performed, there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification process thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 222, and when the presentation operation unit is attached to or detached from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, when a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or when a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID and then returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID that was determined to have a normal ID once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation continues to progress and no notification is made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, if the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

E4:
In case of mismatch, the liquid crystal notifies the abnormality. Specifically, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 judges that the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is mismatched (mismatched) in the ID judgment process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, for example, in the error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on of FIG. 256, the performance display device 1600 displays notification characters such as "Power is being restored" and "Please wait for a while" on a black background, and when the start-up music ends, an image during performance (for example, when the performance progresses based on the game balls entering various winning holes, etc.) is displayed. Then, in the error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on of FIG. 257, the performance display device 1600 displays notification characters such as "Please wait for a while" on an image during performance (for example, when the performance progresses based on the game balls entering various winning holes, etc.) or when waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when a stopped image is displayed, etc.).

In the case of mismatch, the presentation control means does not perform control. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the presentation control means, determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255 that the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 257, the various LEDs of the specific door frame unit that is the control target of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 and the various LEDs of the game board are turned off (all turned off), and the game board side movable body and the game frame side movable body that are the control target of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 do not perform any operation such as returning to the original position (not operating).

In the event of a mismatch, an abnormality is reported by audio. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255 that the combination of the left and right game boards is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on in FIG. 256, after the start-up music ends, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" is played and a specified error notification sound is played seven times. This type of audio is played repeatedly. Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in FIG. 257, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" is played and a specified error notification sound is played seven times. This type of audio is played repeatedly.

In the case of mismatch, the lamp of the door frame (which may be a lamp provided on a detachable decorative member or a lamp provided on a non-detachable decorative member) is lit in an abnormal state. Specifically, first, the door frame 3 supported by the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable is equipped with door frame units (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450. If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is incompatible (mismatched) in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, for example, in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) of FIG. 259, the various LEDs of the door frame unit flash red as an abnormal state. In addition, the various LEDs of the door frame unit may be provided on various units (various decorative members) that are detachable from the door frame 3, or may be provided on various decorative members that are attached and fixed to the door frame 3.

If there are multiple second game board side components, if even one of them does not have a regular ID, none of the multiple second game board side components will be driven. Specifically, if the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, is further divided into an upper and lower part and is composed of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU shown in Figure 253, the upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU are daisy-chained, and operate as a 16-bit shift register consisting of an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU. The peripheral control board 1510 receives the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART, which serves as the previous 8-bit shift register, followed by the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU, which serves as the next 8-bit shift register, one bit at a time, as serial data. The peripheral control board 1510 can obtain the ID code signal and determine the compatibility (matching) between the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR. When the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU are combined in a combination of the upper right game board and the lower right game board, but the upper right game board 5ART is not matched (matched) with another lower right game board, even if the left side game board 5AL and the upper right game board 5ART are matched (matched), the various LEDs provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the various LEDs provided on the other lower right game board that is not matched (matched) with the upper right game board 5ART are turned off (all turned off).

[Summary F]
F1:
The game machine is provided with a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable, a game board side component provided on the game frame side component and having a first game board side component and a second game board side component, a consistency determination means for determining consistency between the first game board side component and the second game board side component, a lottery means for executing a lottery process based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and a plurality of display units for displaying the lottery results of the lottery means. When a mismatch is determined by the consistency determination means, the display of the lottery results on some of the plurality of display units is restricted.

Specifically, for example, a main frame 4 which is a game frame side component, a divided game board 5A in FIG. 248 which is a game board side component provided on the main frame 4 which is a game frame side component and has a left side game board 5AL in FIG. 248 which is a first game board side component and a right side game board 5AR in FIG. 248 which is a second game board side component, and a peripheral control unit in FIG. 255 which is an alignment determination means for determining the alignment between the left side game board 5AL which is the first game board side component and the right side game board 5AR which is the second game board side component, step S1 in the power-on processing 212, which is a lottery means that executes lottery processing based on the establishment of lottery conditions, and a function display unit 1400 of FIG. 248 controlled by the main control board 1310 and a sub-function display unit 2250 of FIG. 248 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which are a plurality of display units that display the lottery results of the special symbol and special electric role control processing, which are lottery means. When an inconsistency is determined by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255, which is a consistency determination means, the display of the lottery result on the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which is a part of the plurality of display units, the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 and the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, is restricted. For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power is turned on in Figure 257, the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 lights up a specified LED, while the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is turned off (all lights off). In addition, if it is determined that the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are inconsistent, the display of the lottery results on one or both of the sub-function display unit 2250 and the performance display device 1600 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 may be restricted. In this case, the display of the lottery results may be restricted by turning off the sub-function display unit 2250, stopping the flashing light emission and emitting light in a specified light emission mode (for example, all lights on), turning off the performance display device 1600, or displaying notification text or the like (such as "Please call an attendant") on the performance display device 1600 to cover the changing display of the decorative pattern.

In this way, if there is a mismatch between the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, the display of the lottery results on the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which is one of the multiple display units that display the lottery results of the special pattern and special electric feature control processing of step S114 in the main control side timer interrupt processing of Figure 212, which is the lottery means, is restricted. This makes it possible to immediately determine when the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, become inconsistent, and prevents incomplete effects from being played when the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are in a mismatched state. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

F2:
The device further includes a connection determination means for determining the connection state of the second game board side component, and does not restrict the display of the lottery results on the multiple display sections even when the connection determination means determines that the second game board side component is in an unconnected state.

Specifically, it further includes an ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 255, which is a connection determination means for determining the connection state of the right-side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board side (in other words, the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 255 serves as a consistency determination means for determining the consistency between the left-side game board 5AL, which is a component of the first game board side, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board side, and serves as a consistency determination means for determining the consistency between the left-side game board 5AL, which is a component of the first game board side, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board side). It also has a function as a connection determination means for determining the connection state with the right side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board. Even if the right side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, is determined to be in an unconnected state by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process, which is the connection determination means, the display of the lottery results on the multiple display units, the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 and the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, is not restricted. For example, in error response 7 after power-on in FIG. 257 (state 8 in FIG. 254(c): unconnected error, connection with the right side game board 5AR cannot be confirmed), a specified LED is lit on the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310, and a specified LED is lit on the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

The first game board side component comprises a game control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation based on a signal from the game control means, the game control means controls a first display unit among the multiple display units to display the lottery result, and the presentation control means controls a second display unit among the multiple display units to display the lottery result, and when an inconsistency is determined by the consistency determination means, the display of the lottery result on the second display unit controlled by the presentation control means is restricted, but the display of the lottery result on the first display unit controlled by the game control means is not restricted.

Specifically, the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, is equipped with a main control board 1310, which is a game control means that controls the progress of the game, and a peripheral control board 1510, which is a presentation control means that controls presentations based on signals (various commands) from the main control board 1310, which is a game control means. The main control board 1310, which is a game control means, is equipped with a function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 and a sub-function display unit 2 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which are multiple display units. The peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control means, controls the function display unit 1400, which is the first display unit of the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which is a display unit of the main control board 1310, to display the special symbol and the lottery result of the special electric role control process in step S114 in the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 212. The sub-function display unit 2250, which is the second display unit of the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which is a display unit among the main control display unit 2250, receives a command transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmitting process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing of Figure 212 to receive the lottery results for the special pattern and special electric role control processing of step S114 in the main control side timer interrupt processing of Figure 212, and displays the lottery results based on the received command.If an inconsistency is determined by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 255, which is the consistency determination means, the display of the lottery results on the sub-function display unit 2250, which is the second display unit controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control means, is restricted, while the display of the lottery results on the function display unit 1400, which is the first display unit controlled by the main control board 1310, which is the game control means, is not restricted. For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power is turned on in FIG. 257, the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 turns off (all lights off), while the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 turns on a specified LED.

F3:
A predetermined self-identification code (ID) is assigned to the right-side game board 5AR in a hardware manner (by a hardware circuit). Specifically, the eight ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of Fig. 251 provided on the right-side game board 5AR are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) to assign an ID setting value (11110000B).

If the ID assigned to the right side game board 5AR by hardware (by a hardware circuit) is compared with the judgment ID code and a valid signal is output if they are the same. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of FIG. 251 provided on the right side game board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left side game board 5AL of FIG. 249, and the peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right side game board 5AR from this input ID code signal and judges (compares) it by referring to the combination table (FIG. 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM, which is the judgment ID code. The combination of the divided game boards is performed in the ID judgment process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255. If the combination of the split game boards is compatible (matched), providing that the other IDs shown in FIG. 254(c) are compatible, the state becomes 1: normal, and the performance is progressed by the door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3, and the split game board 5A. The peripheral control board 1510 outputs, for example, a control signal that lights up a specific LED in the sub-function display unit 2250 of the split game board 5A as an enable signal to progress the performance.

If the ID assigned to the right side game board 5AR by hardware (by a hardware circuit) is compared with the judgment ID code and they are not the same, a valid signal is not output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of FIG. 251 provided on the right side game board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left side game board 5AL of FIG. 249, and the peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right side game board 5AR from this input ID code signal and judges (compares) it by referring to the combination table (FIG. 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM, which is the judgment ID code. The combination of the divided game boards is performed in the ID judgment process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255. If the combination of the split game boards is not compatible (matched), for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 reaches state 2: ID error 1 as shown in FIG. 254(c), in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 257, the control signal that turns on a specific LED in the sub-function display unit 2250 of the split game board 5A is not output as an effective signal to proceed with the presentation, and the sub-function display unit 2250 is turned off (all lights off).

There are cases where no notification is given even if the operation unit is operated at any timing after power-on (in the case of a regular ID). Specifically, when error response 1 to error response 9 have not occurred as the behavior of the pachinko machine in an error shown in FIG. 254(c), that is, when the behavior of the pachinko machine in an error shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turning it ON (until a predetermined period of time has passed until this setting change processing is completed), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is not able to notify that the operation is normal (no error response). Also, when the behavior of the pachinko machine in an error shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), the countermeasure is "none", so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the operation is normal (no error handling occurs), no notification will be given.

In addition, when the regular ID, ID error, and unconnected error are to be known at any timing after power-on, that is, the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), and ID errors and unconnected errors such as error response 1 to error response 9 are determined in a predetermined period after power-on as the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, but they may be known at any timing after power-on. Specifically, the regular ID, ID error, and unconnected error may be determined by performing an ID determination process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 222. The regular ID, ID error, and unconnected error related to the performance operation unit may be determined in the performance operation unit information acquisition process of step S in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 222. In either case, when the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response) because the countermeasure is "none". In other words, if the operation is normal (no error handling is performed), no notification will be given.

If it is determined to be a genuine ID, no notification will be issued even if the operation unit is operated thereafter. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in Figure 255 that the state is 1: normal in Figure 254 (c), that is, the ID is normal, no notification will be issued (target method in the same figure: none). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right game boards is not judged at all thereafter. Even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 at this timing and turned ON, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 211 and the main control side timer interrupt processing in FIG. 212, and is therefore unable to perform the setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is unable to notify that it is operating normally (no error response).

If it is determined that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification will continue at least until it becomes normal. Specifically, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254 (c) (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification of this Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) is maintained until the corrective action in FIG. 254 (c): the product is replaced with a compatible ID product after the power is cut off. This notification makes it difficult to play while the left side game board and the right side game board are in a mismatched (inconsistent) combination.

If the ID is judged to be normal within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, no notification is made, but if the ID is judged to be abnormal within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, the notification mode may be changed when the state is changed. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode is changed when the state becomes normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not notify (target method in the same figure: none) when it is judged to be state 1: normal in FIG. 254 (c), that is, normal ID, whereas it maintains the notification of this error response 1 (ID error 1 response) when it is judged to be state 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254 (c) (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, abnormal ID, and the countermeasure in the same figure (c): after the replacement with a compatible ID product after power off, notification is no longer made when it is judged to be state 1: normal in FIG. 254 (c), that is, normal ID. In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right game boards is not determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the left and right game boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), there is no notification that the combination is incompatible (inconsistent) and an abnormal ID is not generated. In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right game boards to a specified period of time after power-on, it is possible to contribute to reducing the processing load on the progress of the presentation by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510.

Notifications are terminated except for some notifications. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254 (c) (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again. If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the state is 1: normal, as shown in FIG. 254(c), that is, a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

If it returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not change even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), the power supply to the peripheral control board must be cut off, and the game board must be reattached and the power to the pachinko machine must be turned on again. When the pachinko machine is turned on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 when the pachinko machine is turned on, so if the ID confirmation by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 and the notification process that continues until the power to the pachinko machine is turned off are performed, there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification process thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 222, and when the presentation operation unit is attached to or detached from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, when a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or when a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID and then returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID that was determined to have a normal ID once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation continues to progress and no notification is made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, if the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

F4:
In case of mismatch, the liquid crystal notifies the abnormality. Specifically, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 judges that the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is mismatched (mismatched) in the ID judgment process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, for example, in the error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on of FIG. 256, the performance display device 1600 displays notification characters such as "Power is being restored" and "Please wait for a while" on a black background, and when the start-up music ends, an image during performance (for example, when the performance progresses based on the game balls entering various winning holes, etc.) is displayed. Then, in the error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on of FIG. 257, the performance display device 1600 displays notification characters such as "Please wait for a while" on an image during performance (for example, when the performance progresses based on the game balls entering various winning holes, etc.) or when waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when a stopped image is displayed, etc.).

In the case of mismatch, the presentation control means does not perform control. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the presentation control means, determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255 that the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 257, the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the various LEDs of the game board that are the control target of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are turned off (all turned off), and the game board side movable body and the game frame side movable body that are the control target of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are not operated (not operated), such as returning to their original positions.

In the event of a mismatch, an abnormality is reported by audio. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255 that the combination of the left and right game boards is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on in FIG. 256, after the start-up music ends, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" is played and a specified error notification sound is played seven times. This type of audio is played repeatedly. Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in FIG. 257, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" is played and a specified error notification sound is played seven times. This type of audio is played repeatedly.

In the case of mismatch, the lamp of the door frame (which may be a lamp provided on a detachable decorative member or a lamp provided on a non-detachable decorative member) is lit in an abnormal state. Specifically, first, the door frame 3 supported by the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable is equipped with door frame units (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450. If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is incompatible (mismatched) in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, for example, in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) of FIG. 259, the various LEDs of the door frame unit flash red as an abnormal state. In addition, the various LEDs of the door frame unit may be provided on various units (various decorative members) that are detachable from the door frame 3, or may be provided on various decorative members that are attached and fixed to the door frame 3.

If there are multiple second game board side components, if even one of them does not have a regular ID, none of the multiple second game board side components will be driven. Specifically, if the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, is further divided into an upper and lower part and is composed of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU shown in Figure 253, the upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU are daisy-chained, and operate as a 16-bit shift register consisting of an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU. The peripheral control board 1510 receives the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART, which serves as the previous 8-bit shift register, followed by the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU, which serves as the next 8-bit shift register, one bit at a time, as serial data. The peripheral control board 1510 can obtain the ID code signal and determine the compatibility (matching) between the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR. When the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU are combined in a combination of the upper right game board and the lower right game board, but the upper right game board 5ART is not matched (matched) with another lower right game board, even if the left side game board 5AL and the upper right game board 5ART are matched (matched), the various LEDs provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the various LEDs provided on the other lower right game board that is not matched (matched) with the upper right game board 5ART are turned off (all turned off).

[Summary G]
G1:
The device comprises a game frame side component having a movable decorative body that moves in a predetermined operating manner, a game board side component provided on the game frame side component and having a first game board side component and a second game board side component, an alignment determination means for determining alignment between the first game board side component and the second game board side component, and a plurality of light-emitting elements provided on the second game board side component, and if an inconsistency is determined by the alignment determination means, the illumination of the plurality of light-emitting elements provided on the second game board side component is restricted.Although the movable decorative body provided on the game frame side component is not subject to determination by the alignment determination means, its drive is restricted if it is determined that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are inconsistent.

Specifically, for example, a game board is attached to the main frame 4, and the door frame 3, which is supported by the main frame 4 so as to be able to open and close, is fitted with door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450. The tray unit 200 is equipped with a performance operation unit 300. The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with the performance operation section 301 shown in FIG. 52, and is a movable decorative body that operates in a predetermined operating mode. The game frame side component, which is composed of the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, is provided with the game board and the performance operation unit 300 equipped with the performance operation section 301, which is a movable decorative body that operates in a predetermined operating mode, as the game board side component.

It also includes a split game board 5A (FIG. 248) that is a game board side component provided on the main frame 4 that is a game frame side component and has a left side game board 5AL (FIG. 248) that is a first game board side component and a right side game board 5AR (FIG. 248) that is a second game board side component, an ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 255) that is a consistency determination means that determines the consistency between the left side game board 5AL that is the first game board side component and the right side game board 5AR that is the second game board side component, and various LEDs that are multiple light-emitting bodies provided on the right side game board 5AR that is the second game board side component.

This production operation unit 300 is not provided with any ID for self-identification, and can be used in common with any specifications, and is provided with a movable body such as the production operation section 301 shown in FIG. 52. Movable bodies such as the production operation section 301 provided in the production operation unit 300 are treated as being included in the "game frame side movable body" shown in FIGS. 256 to 261.

When the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process, which is the consistency determination means, determines that there is a mismatch, the light emission of various LEDs, which are multiple light-emitting bodies provided on the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, is restricted. Although the performance operation unit 300, which is a movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3, which is the game frame side component, is not subject to the determination by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process, which is the consistency determination means, its operation is restricted when it is determined that there is a mismatch between the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component. For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on in Figure 256, the game frame side movable body does not perform any operation such as returning to the original position (not operated). In addition, when it is determined that the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are inconsistent, the manner of restricting the drive of the movable decorative body (in this example, the performance operation unit 300) provided on the door frame 3, which is the game frame component, may be controlled in a manner different from that when it is determined that the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are consistent. For example, it may be possible to drive some or all of the movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3, which is the game frame component, in a specific drive mode (such as rotating at a constant speed), or to control so that some or all of the movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3, which is the game frame component, are not driven.

In this way, when the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, are inconsistent, the operation of the performance operation unit 300, which is a movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3, which is a game frame side component that is not subject to discrimination by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which is the consistency discrimination means, is restricted. This makes it possible to immediately determine that the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, are inconsistent, and it is possible to prevent incomplete performance from being executed when the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, are inconsistent. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

G2:
If the matching determination means determines that the left side game board 5AL is a first game board side component and the right side game board 5AR is a second game board side component in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines the matching between the left side game board 5AL, which is a first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is a second game board side component, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, and determines that the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is matching (matching), then does not determine the matching (matching) between the left side game board and the right side game board at all, and even if the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board becomes incompatible (mismatching), the driving of the performance operation unit 300, which is a movable decoration, is not restricted and operates. In other words, the performance operation unit 301 is driven and operates in a predetermined operating mode (along with the progress of the performance).

If the consistency determination means determines that there is a mismatch within a specified period of time after power-on, the restrictions on the movable decorative object are lifted based on the fact that there is a match. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines the consistency of state 2 in FIG. 254(c): ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, and determines that the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is inconsistent. If it is determined that they are compatible (inconsistent), the notification of this error response 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) is maintained, and the solution in Figure 254 (c): After the power is cut off and replaced with a compatible ID product, the status in Figure 254 (c): Normal is reached, that is, the consistency between the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is judged, and if it is determined that the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is compatible (matched), the notification is cancelled.

G3:
A predetermined self-identification code (ID) is assigned to the right-side game board 5AR in a hardware manner (by a hardware circuit). Specifically, the eight ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of Fig. 251 provided on the right-side game board 5AR are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) to assign an ID setting value (11110000B).

If the ID assigned to the right side game board 5AR by hardware (by a hardware circuit) is compared with the judgment ID code and a valid signal is output if they are the same. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of FIG. 251 provided on the right side game board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left side game board 5AL of FIG. 249, and the peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right side game board 5AR from this input ID code signal and judges (compares) it by referring to the combination table (FIG. 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM, which is the judgment ID code. The combination of the divided game boards is performed in the ID judgment process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255. If the combination of the split game boards is compatible (matched), providing that the other IDs shown in FIG. 254(c) are compatible, the state becomes 1: normal, and the performance proceeds using the door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3, and the split game board 5A. The peripheral control board 1510 outputs, for example, a control signal to the performance operation unit 300 to drive and operate the performance operation unit 301 in a predetermined operating mode as an effective signal to proceed with the performance.

If the ID assigned to the right side game board 5AR by hardware (by a hardware circuit) is compared with the judgment ID code and they are not the same, a valid signal is not output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of FIG. 251 provided on the right side game board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left side game board 5AL of FIG. 249, and the peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right side game board 5AR from this input ID code signal and judges (compares) it by referring to the combination table (FIG. 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM, which is the judgment ID code. The combination of the divided game boards is performed in the ID judgment process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255. If the combination of the divided game boards is not compatible (matched), for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 reaches state 2: ID error 1 as shown in FIG. 254(c), in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power is turned on in FIG. 256, the control signal that drives and operates the movable body on the game frame in a specified operating mode is not output as an effective signal to proceed with the presentation, and the movable body on the game frame does not perform any operation such as returning to its original position (is not operating).

There are cases where no notification is given even if the operation unit is operated at any timing after power-on (in the case of a regular ID). Specifically, when error response 1 to error response 9 have not occurred as the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in FIG. 254(c), that is, when the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turning it ON (until a predetermined period of time has passed until this setting change processing is completed), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is not able to notify that the operation is normal (no error response). Also, when the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), the countermeasure is "none", so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the operation is normal (no error handling occurs), no notification will be given.

In addition, when the regular ID, ID error, and unconnected error are to be known at any timing after power-on, that is, the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), and ID errors and unconnected errors such as error response 1 to error response 9 are determined in a predetermined period after power-on as the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, but they may be known at any timing after power-on. Specifically, the regular ID, ID error, and unconnected error may be determined by performing an ID determination process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 222. The regular ID, ID error, and unconnected error related to the performance operation unit may be determined in the performance operation unit information acquisition process of step S in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 222. In either case, when the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response) because the countermeasure is "none". In other words, if the operation is normal (no error handling is performed), no notification will be given.

If it is determined to be a genuine ID, no notification will be issued even if the operation unit is operated thereafter. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in Figure 255 that the state is 1: normal in Figure 254 (c), that is, the ID is normal, no notification will be issued (target method in the same figure: none). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right game boards is not judged at all thereafter. Even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 at this timing and turned ON, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 211 and the main control side timer interrupt processing in FIG. 212, and is therefore unable to perform the setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is unable to notify that it is operating normally (no error response).

If it is determined that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification will continue at least until it becomes normal. Specifically, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254 (c) (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification of this Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) is maintained until the corrective action in FIG. 254 (c): the product is replaced with a compatible ID product after the power is cut off. This notification makes it difficult to play while the left side game board and the right side game board are in a mismatched (inconsistent) combination.

If the ID is judged to be normal within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, no notification is made, but if the ID is judged to be abnormal within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, the notification mode may be changed when the state is changed. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode is changed when the state becomes normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not notify (target method in the same figure: none) when it is judged to be state 1: normal in FIG. 254 (c), that is, normal ID, whereas it maintains the notification of this error response 1 (ID error 1 response) when it is judged to be state 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254 (c) (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, abnormal ID, and the countermeasure in the same figure (c): after the replacement with a compatible ID product after power off, notification is no longer made when it is judged to be state 1: normal in FIG. 254 (c), that is, normal ID. In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right game boards is not determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the left and right game boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), there is no notification that the combination is incompatible (inconsistent) and an abnormal ID is not generated. In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right game boards to a specified period of time after power-on, it is possible to contribute to reducing the processing load on the progress of the presentation by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510.

Notifications are terminated except for some notifications. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254 (c) (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again. If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the state is 1: normal, as shown in FIG. 254(c), that is, a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

If it returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not change even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), the power supply to the peripheral control board must be cut off, and the game board must be reattached and the power to the pachinko machine must be turned on again. When the pachinko machine is turned on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 when the pachinko machine is turned on, so if the ID confirmation by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 and the notification process that continues until the power to the pachinko machine is turned off are performed, there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification process thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 222, and when the presentation operation unit is attached to or detached from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, when a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or when a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID and then returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID that was determined to have a normal ID once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation continues to progress and no notification is made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, if the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

G4:
In case of mismatch, the liquid crystal notifies the abnormality. Specifically, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 judges that the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is mismatched (mismatched) in the ID judgment process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, for example, in the error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on of FIG. 256, the performance display device 1600 displays notification characters such as "Power is being restored" and "Please wait for a while" on a black background, and when the start-up music ends, an image during performance (for example, when the performance progresses based on the game balls entering various winning holes, etc.) is displayed. Then, in the error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on of FIG. 257, the performance display device 1600 displays notification characters such as "Please wait for a while" on an image during performance (for example, when the performance progresses based on the game balls entering various winning holes, etc.) or when waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when a stopped image is displayed, etc.).

In the case of mismatch, the presentation control means does not perform control. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the presentation control means, determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255 that the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 257, the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the various LEDs of the game board that are the control target of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are turned off (all turned off), and the game board side movable body and the game frame side movable body that are the control target of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are not operated (not operated), such as returning to their original positions.

In the event of a mismatch, an abnormality is reported by audio. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255 that the combination of the left and right game boards is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on in FIG. 256, after the start-up music ends, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" is played and a specified error notification sound is played seven times. This type of audio is played repeatedly. Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in FIG. 257, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" is played and a specified error notification sound is played seven times. This type of audio is played repeatedly.

In the case of mismatch, the lamp of the door frame (which may be a lamp provided on a detachable decorative member or a lamp provided on a non-detachable decorative member) is lit in an abnormal state. Specifically, first, the door frame 3 supported by the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable is equipped with door frame units (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450. If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is incompatible (mismatched) in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, for example, in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) of FIG. 259, the various LEDs of the door frame unit flash red as an abnormal state. In addition, the various LEDs of the door frame unit may be provided on various units (various decorative members) that are detachable from the door frame 3, or may be provided on various decorative members that are attached and fixed to the door frame 3.

If there are multiple second game board side components, if even one of them does not have a regular ID, none of the multiple second game board side components will be driven. Specifically, if the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, is further divided into an upper and lower part and is composed of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU shown in Figure 253, the upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU are daisy-chained, and operate as a 16-bit shift register consisting of an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU. The peripheral control board 1510 receives the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART, which serves as the previous 8-bit shift register, followed by the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU, which serves as the next 8-bit shift register, one bit at a time, as serial data. The peripheral control board 1510 can obtain the ID code signal and determine the compatibility (matching) between the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR. When the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU are combined in a combination of the upper right game board and the lower right game board, but the upper right game board 5ART is not matched (matched) with another lower right game board, even if the left side game board 5AL and the upper right game board 5ART are matched (matched), the various LEDs provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the various LEDs provided on the other lower right game board that is not matched (matched) with the upper right game board 5ART are turned off (all turned off).

[Brief H]
H1:
The game board comprises a game board side component having a plurality of frame light emitting means, a game board side component provided on the game board side component and having a first game board side component and a second game board side component, an alignment determination means for determining alignment between the first game board side component and the second game board side component, and a plurality of board light emitting means provided on the second game board side component, and when an inconsistency is determined by the alignment determination means, light emission of the plurality of board light emitting means provided on the second game board side component is restricted, and although the plurality of frame light emitting means provided on the game board side component are not subject to determination by the alignment determination means, when it is determined that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are inconsistent, at least some of the light emission is restricted.

Specifically, for example, a game board is attached to the main frame 4, and the door frame 3, which is supported by the main frame 4 so as to be able to open and close, is fitted with door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the plate unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450. The plate unit 200 is provided with a performance operation unit 300. The performance operation unit 300 is provided with various decorative boards (e.g., the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the button outer decorative board 355, the button middle decorative board 364, etc.) on which the various LEDs shown in FIG. 53 (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) are mounted. The game frame side component, which is composed of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, is provided with a game board side component, which is a performance operation unit 300 having a game board and various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) that are multiple frame light emitting means.

It also includes a split game board 5A (FIG. 248) that is a game board side component provided on the main frame 4 that is a game frame side component and has a left side game board 5AL (FIG. 248) that is a first game board side component and a right side game board 5AR (FIG. 248) that is a second game board side component, an ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255 that is a consistency determination means that determines the consistency between the left side game board 5AL that is the first game board side component and the right side game board 5AR that is the second game board side component, and various LEDs that are multiple board light-emitting means provided on the right side game board 5AR that is the second game board side component (for example, various LEDs mounted on a decorative board in various performance units housed in the right side rear box 3010R located behind the right side game board 5AR).

This performance operation unit 300 does not have any ID for identifying itself, and can be used in common with any specifications. It is provided with various decorative boards (e.g., the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320, the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, etc.) on which the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) shown in FIG. 53 are mounted. The various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards (e.g., the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320, the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, etc.) provided in the performance operation unit 300 are treated as being included in the "various LEDs of the door frame unit" shown in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261.

When an inconsistency is determined by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which is the consistency determination means, the light emission of various LEDs mounted on decorative boards in various presentation units housed in the right rear box 3010R located behind the right side game board 5AR, which are multiple board light-emitting means provided on the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, is restricted. Although the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative boards in the presentation operation unit 300, which are multiple frame light-emitting means provided on the door frame 3, which is the game frame side component, are not subject to determination by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which is the consistency determination means, when it is determined that there is an inconsistency between the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, the light emission of at least some of them (e.g., LED 364a) is restricted. For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) when power is turned on in Figure 259, the various LEDs of the door frame unit flash red, but only some of the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300 (e.g., LED 364a) are turned off (all turned off). In addition, when it is determined that the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, are inconsistent, the manner in which the light emission of the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative boards in the presentation operation unit 300, which is multiple frame light-emitting means provided in the door frame 3, which is the game frame side component, is regulated may be controlled in a manner different from that when it is determined that the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, are consistent. For example, some or all of the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which is a plurality of frame light-emitting means provided on the door frame 3, which is a component of the play frame, may be turned off, or some or all of the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which is a plurality of frame light-emitting means provided on the door frame 3, which is a component of the play frame, may be made to emit light in a specific light-emitting mode (such as flashing red).

In this way, when the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, are inconsistent, the emission of some (e.g., LED 364a) of the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards in the presentation operation unit 300, which is the frame light-emitting means that is not subject to the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process, which is the consistency determination means, is restricted. This makes it possible to immediately determine that the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, are inconsistent, and it is possible to prevent incomplete presentations from being executed when the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, are inconsistent. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

H2:
If the matching determination means determines that the left side game board 5AL is a first game board side component and the right side game board 5AR is a second game board side component in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines the matching between the left side game board 5AL, which is a first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is a second game board side component, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, and determines that the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is matching (matching), then does not determine the matching (matching) between the left side game board and the right side game board at all, and even if the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board becomes incompatible (mismatching), the light emission of various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, LEDs 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which is the frame light-emitting means, is not restricted. In other words, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which is the frame light-emitting means, will emit light in a predetermined light-emitting manner (in line with the progress of the performance).

If the consistency determination means determines that there is a mismatch within a predetermined period of time after power-on, the restrictions on the board light-emitting means and frame light-emitting means are lifted based on the fact that there is a match. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines the consistency of state 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254 (c) (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 259 to FIG. 261), that is, the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, and determines that the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is incompatible (mismatched), and issues a notification of this error response 1 (ID error 1 response) (mounted on a decorative board in various performance units housed in the right side rear box 3010R located behind the right side game board 5AR, which is the board light-emitting means). The various LEDs are turned off (all off) as the various LEDs on the game board, and only some of the various LEDs (e.g., LED 364a) mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which is the frame light-emitting means (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) are turned off (all off). ) is maintained, and the solution in the same figure (c): After the power is cut off and replaced with a compatible ID product, the state 1 in Figure 254 (c): Normal is reached, that is, the consistency between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is judged, and the combination of the left game board and the right game board is determined to be compatible (matched), and the alarm is canceled.

Once a matching state is reached, the illumination of the board light emitting means and frame light emitting means is not restricted even if a mismatch state occurs again before the power is cut off. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines the matching between the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, and if it determines that the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is compatible (matched), it does not thereafter determine the compatibility (matching) of the left side game board and the right side game board at all. Even if the combination with the side game board becomes incompatible (mismatched), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards in the various performance units housed in the right rear box 3010R located behind the right game board 5AR, which is the board light-emitting means, are not restricted from emitting light as the various LEDs of the game board, and the light emission of the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which is the frame light-emitting means, is not restricted. In other words, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards in the various performance units housed in the right rear box 3010R located behind the right game board 5AR, which is the board light-emitting means, emit light in a predetermined light-emitting mode (as the performance progresses) as the various LEDs of the game board, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which is the frame light-emitting means, emit light in a predetermined light-emitting mode (as the performance progresses).

H3:
A predetermined self-identification code (ID) is assigned to the right-side game board 5AR in a hardware manner (by a hardware circuit). Specifically, the eight ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of Fig. 251 provided on the right-side game board 5AR are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) to assign an ID setting value (11110000B).

If the ID assigned to the right side game board 5AR by hardware (by a hardware circuit) is compared with the judgment ID code and a valid signal is output if they are the same. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of FIG. 251 provided on the right side game board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left side game board 5AL of FIG. 249, and the peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right side game board 5AR from this input ID code signal and judges (compares) it by referring to the combination table (FIG. 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM, which is the judgment ID code. The combination of the divided game boards is performed in the ID judgment process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255. If the combination of the split game boards is compatible (matched), the state becomes 1: normal, provided that the other IDs shown in FIG. 254(c) are compatible, and the performance is carried out by the door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3, and the split game board 5A. The peripheral control board 1510 outputs, for example, to the performance operation unit 300, a control signal that causes various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode, as an effective signal to proceed with the performance.

If the ID assigned to the right side game board 5AR by hardware (by a hardware circuit) is compared with the judgment ID code and they are not the same, a valid signal is not output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of FIG. 251 provided on the right side game board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left side game board 5AL of FIG. 249, and the peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right side game board 5AR from this input ID code signal and judges (compares) it by referring to the combination table (FIG. 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM, which is the judgment ID code. The combination of the divided game boards is performed in the ID judgment process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255. If the combination of the divided game boards is not compatible (matched), for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 reaches state 2: ID error 1 as shown in FIG. 259(c), in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power is turned on in FIG. 259, the control signal for the illumination of some of the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300 is not output to the performance operation unit 300 as an effective signal for progressing the performance, and the illumination of some of these LEDs (e.g., LED 364a) is turned off (all lights off).

There are cases where no notification is given even if the operation unit is operated at any timing after power-on (in the case of a regular ID). Specifically, when error response 1 to error response 9 have not occurred as the behavior of the pachinko machine in an error shown in FIG. 254(c), that is, when the behavior of the pachinko machine in an error shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turning it ON (until a predetermined period of time has passed until this setting change processing is completed), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is not able to notify that the operation is normal (no error response). Also, when the behavior of the pachinko machine in an error shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), the countermeasure is "none", so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the operation is normal (no error handling occurs), no notification will be given.

In addition, when the regular ID, ID error, and unconnected error are to be known at any timing after power-on, that is, the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), and ID errors and unconnected errors such as error response 1 to error response 9 are determined in a predetermined period after power-on as the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, but they may be known at any timing after power-on. Specifically, the regular ID, ID error, and unconnected error may be determined by performing an ID determination process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 222. The regular ID, ID error, and unconnected error related to the performance operation unit may be determined in the performance operation unit information acquisition process of step S in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 222. In either case, when the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response) because the countermeasure is "none". In other words, if the operation is normal (no error handling is performed), no notification will be given.

If it is determined to be a genuine ID, no notification will be issued even if the operation unit is operated thereafter. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in Figure 255 that the state is 1: normal in Figure 254 (c), that is, the ID is normal, no notification will be issued (target method in the same figure: none). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right game boards is not judged at all thereafter. Even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 at this timing and turned ON, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 211 and the main control side timer interrupt processing in FIG. 212, and is therefore unable to perform the setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is unable to notify that it is operating normally (no error response).

If it is determined that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification will continue at least until it becomes normal. Specifically, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254 (c) (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification of this Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) is maintained until the corrective action in FIG. 254 (c): the product is replaced with a compatible ID product after the power is cut off. This notification makes it difficult to play while the left side game board and the right side game board are in a mismatched (inconsistent) combination.

If the ID is judged to be normal within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, no notification is made, but if the ID is judged to be abnormal within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, the notification mode may be changed if the state is changed. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode is changed when the state becomes normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not notify (target method in the same figure: none) when it is judged to be state 1: normal in FIG. 254 (c), that is, normal ID, whereas it maintains the notification of this error response 1 (ID error 1 response) when it is judged to be state 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254 (c) (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 259 to FIG. 261), that is, abnormal ID, and the countermeasure in the same figure (c): after the replacement with a compatible ID product after power off, notification is no longer made when it is judged to be state 1: normal in FIG. 254 (c), that is, normal ID. In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right game boards is not determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the left and right game boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), there is no notification that the combination is incompatible (inconsistent) and an abnormal ID is not generated. In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right game boards to a specified period of time after power-on, it is possible to contribute to reducing the processing load on the progress of the presentation by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510.

Notifications are terminated except for some notifications. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 in FIG. 254 (c) (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again. If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the state is 1: normal, as shown in FIG. 254(c), that is, a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

If it returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not change even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), the power supply to the peripheral control board must be cut off, and the game board must be reattached and the power to the pachinko machine must be turned on again. When the pachinko machine is turned on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 when the pachinko machine is turned on, so if the ID confirmation by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 and the notification process that continues until the power to the pachinko machine is turned off are performed, there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification process thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 222, and when the presentation operation unit is attached to or detached from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, when a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or when a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID and then returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID that was determined to have a normal ID once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation continues to progress and no notification is made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, if the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

H4:
In case of mismatch, the liquid crystal notifies the abnormality. Specifically, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 judges that the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is mismatched (mismatched) in the ID judgment process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, for example, in the error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at the time of power-on of FIG. 259, after displaying "Power recovery in progress", the performance display device 1600 displays notification characters such as "Game board error occurred", "Error number:", "Game board connection error", and "Please check the game board after turning off the power" on a black background, and displays an image in which the game board connection error part of the pachinko machine is lit. And, in the error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on of FIG. 260, the performance display device 1600 displays notification characters such as "Game board error occurred", "Error number:", "Game board connection error", and "Please check the game board after turning off the power" on a black background, and displays an image in which the game board connection error part of the pachinko machine is lit.

In the case of mismatch, the presentation control means does not perform control. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the presentation control means, determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255 that the combination of the left and right game boards is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in FIG. 260, the various LEDs of the door frame unit that is the control target of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 flash red, the various LEDs of the game board are turned off (all turned off), and the game frame side movable body that is the control target of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform any operation such as returning to the original position (is not operated).

In the case of a mismatch, an abnormality is notified by sound. Specifically, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (mismatched) in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255, for example, in error response 1 at power-on (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 259, there is no startup music at power-on and the sound is muted, and then a predetermined error notification sound is played once and an announcement sound is played saying, "A game board connection error has occurred. Please turn off the power and check the game board." This sound mode is played repeatedly. Then, in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 260, a predetermined error notification sound is played once and an announcement sound is played saying, "A game board connection error has occurred. Please turn off the power and check the game board." This sound mode is played repeatedly.

In the case of mismatch, the lamp of the door frame (which may be a lamp provided on a detachable decorative member or a lamp provided on a non-detachable decorative member) is lit in an abnormal state. Specifically, first, the door frame 3 supported by the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable is equipped with door frame units (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450. If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is incompatible (mismatched) in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, for example, in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) of FIG. 259, the various LEDs of the door frame unit flash red as an abnormal state. In addition, the various LEDs of the door frame unit may be provided on various units (various decorative members) that are detachable from the door frame 3, or may be provided on various decorative members that are attached and fixed to the door frame 3.

If there are multiple second game board side components, if even one of them does not have a regular ID, none of the multiple second game board side components will be driven. Specifically, if the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, is further divided into an upper and lower part and is composed of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU shown in Figure 253, the upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU are daisy-chained, and operate as a 16-bit shift register consisting of an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU. The peripheral control board 1510 receives the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART, which serves as the previous 8-bit shift register, followed by the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU, which serves as the next 8-bit shift register, one bit at a time, as serial data. The peripheral control board 1510 can obtain the ID code signal and determine the compatibility (matching) between the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR. When the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU are combined in a combination of the upper right game board and the lower right game board, but the upper right game board 5ART is not matched (matched) with another lower right game board, even if the left side game board 5AL and the upper right game board 5ART are matched (matched), the various LEDs provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the various LEDs provided on the other lower right game board that is not matched (matched) with the upper right game board 5ART are turned off (all turned off).

[Layout of the board on which the ID output circuit IDC is mounted]
In the above embodiment, the ID output circuit IDC, which mainly includes a parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa having eight flip-flop circuits that generate a self-identification code (ID), may be mounted on a dedicated board on which only the ID output circuit IDC is mounted, located behind the right game board 5AR, may be mounted on one of various relay boards, may be mounted together with LEDs mounted on a decorative board, or may be mounted together with electronic components mounted on other boards. However, the ID output circuit IDC may be mounted on a decorative board housed in the right rear box 3010R of the rear unit 3000, or may be mounted on a decorative board provided in the door frame unit. Below, an embodiment will be described in which the ID output circuit IDC is mounted on a decorative board on which various LEDs and the like are mounted, the decorative board is housed in the right rear box 3010R of the rear unit 3000, and the ID output circuit IDC is located behind the right game panel 1100R. In addition, when the ID output circuit IDC is implemented on a decorative board provided in the door frame unit, it may be implemented on any of the multiple decorative boards mentioned above (the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame of the left side unit 420, and the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame of the right side unit 430).

270 is a schematic exploded perspective view of the right side game board 5AR disassembled into the right side game panel 1100R and the right side rear box 3010R of the rear unit 3000, viewed from the front (the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with the right side game board 5AR fixed to the main body frame 4). As shown in FIG. 270, in an embodiment in which the decorative board 4100 on which the ID output circuit IDC is mounted is housed in the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000, and the ID output circuit IDC is attached to the rear of the right side game panel 1100R, the decorative board 4100 is attached to the right side rear box 3010R so that the ID output circuit IDC including the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa that generates a self-identification code (ID) mounted on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) and various LEDs 4120 face the front of the pachinko machine 1. The decorative board 4100 may be attached to the rear of the right-side gaming panel 1100R within the right-side rear box 3010R, for example, via a fixing member such as a screw or pin, or may be attached to the rear of the right-side gaming panel 1100R within the right-side rear box 3010R via an engagement portion formed on the decorative board 4100 and the right-side rear box 3010R.

As described above, the right game panel 1100R and the right front component 1000R of the right game board 5AR are formed transparently, so that the surface (front surface, surface mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 when the right game board 5AR is fixed to the main frame. In addition, a cover at least partially formed to be opaque or translucent (such as a cover formed to be opaque or translucent by attaching a sticker, a cover formed to be opaque or translucent by a resin material such as opaque resin or translucent resin, or a cover formed to be opaque or translucent by coloring, painting, printing, etc.) may be provided between the right game panel 1100R and the decorative board 4100. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing electronic components such as the ID output circuit IDC and LEDs mounted on the surface (front surface, surface mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100, which can prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing and the player's interest in playing the game from decreasing. Also, when mounting the ID output circuit IDC on a decorative board provided in a door frame unit, a cover with at least a portion thereof made opaque or translucent (it may be made opaque or translucent by attaching a sticker, made opaque or translucent with an opaque or translucent resin material, or made opaque or translucent by coloring, painting, printing, etc.) may be provided in front of the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100. In this case, too, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing electronic components such as the ID output circuit IDC and LEDs mounted on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100, which can prevent the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 from being destroyed and interest in playing the game from decreasing.

A light-colored resist is formed by a light-colored coating on at least the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 (or on both the surface (front, front mounting surface) and the back (rear) of the decorative substrate 4100) in the entire area except for the pads, through-holes, lands, etc. to which electronic components such as the ID output circuit IDC, each LED 4120, and connectors are soldered. In this embodiment, the light-colored resist is a white resist, and the white resist is formed by a white coating formed by applying a white resist liquid (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist"). The light-colored resist may be a yellow or pink resist. In addition, a light-colored resist may also be formed on at least a portion of the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 where the copper foil of the land, etc. is exposed. In this case, the copper foil of the land, etc. is less noticeable, so that the copper foil of the land, etc. is less noticeable, and the world view of the pachinko machine 1 is not ruined and the interest in playing is not reduced due to the copper foil of the land, etc. being visible. The reflectance of the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 can be made uniform, and the occurrence of uneven light emission can be suppressed to improve the presentation effect. In addition, a light-colored resist may also be formed on a portion of the surface (rear surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 where the copper foil of the land, etc. is exposed. In this case, the reflectance of the back surface (rear surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 can be made uniform, and uniform reflection can be achieved when the decorative substrate 4100 functions as a reflector for another decorative substrate on which LEDs are mounted.

Furthermore, on the surface (front, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, near the mounted ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120 and other surface side electronic components, a surface side indicia indicating the attributes of the surface side electronic components (which may further include the shape of the surface side electronic components, the size of the surface side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic components, and the model of the surface side electronic components) is silk-screened on a solid white resist with yellow paint, a light color that is not easily noticeable against white. Note that if the light color resist is yellow or pink, the surface side indicia may be silk-screened with white, yellow, or pink paint that is a different color from the resist.

Here, the reason why white is used as the color of the resist liquid and yellow is used as the paint for silk printing will be explained. First, the reflectance of a color increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. For example, the reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of yellow. The reflectance of yellow is low compared to the reflectance of white, but it still has a high reflectance. Therefore, in a combination of white and red, the red stands out against the white background, and when the front side marking portion (back side marking portion) is red, the red front side marking portion (red back side marking portion against the white resist) stands out against the white resist, whereas in a combination of white and yellow (the configuration of this embodiment), the yellow does not stand out against the white background, and when the front side marking portion (back side marking portion) is yellow, the yellow front side marking portion (yellow back side marking portion against the white resist) is not easily noticeable.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 is illuminated brilliantly by illumination using light-emitting elements such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of LEDs 4120 mounted on the front (surface) of the decorative board 4100 are, for example, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, and the light emission state changes in various ways depending on whether they are turned on (emitted light) or off. For this reason, as described above, a white resist is formed on the front (surface) of the decorative board 4100 by applying a white resist liquid to a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") on the entire area except for the pads, through-holes, lands, etc. to which the plurality of LEDs are soldered, and further, a surface-side indicative portion that allows the multi-color-emitting full-color LED to be identified is printed on this solid white resist by silk screen printing with yellow paint, so that the yellow surface-side indicative portion is made inconspicuous against the white resist when the multi-color-emitting full-color LED is turned off, and information unrelated to the game is not provided to the player. In addition to preventing the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 from being ruined and interest in the game from decreasing due to being visible, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned on (emitting light), the combination of a highly reflective solid white resist and a surface-side marking part silk-screened with yellow paint that has a reflectance very close to that of white can maintain a high reflectance on the surface (front surface, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, and by combining the resist and the surface-side marking part with similar reflectances, it is possible to uniform the reflectance on the front (surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, thereby suppressing the occurrence of uneven light emission and improving the presentation effect.

On the back surface (rear surface) of the decorative board 4100, although not shown, near the back surface electronic components such as connectors, a back surface marking indicating the attributes of the back surface electronic components, such as the part numbers of the back surface electronic components and the areas indicating the positions of the back surface electronic components (which may further include the shape of the back surface electronic components, the size of the back surface electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the back surface electronic components, and the model of the back surface electronic components) is silk-screened on a solid white resist with yellow paint, a light color that is not easily noticeable against white. Note that if the light color resist is yellow or pink, the back surface marking may be printed with white, yellow, or pink paint that is a different color from the resist.

In addition, the front side indicia formed on the front (surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 is not limited to being applied to the LED mounting surface by screen printing using an ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (e.g., yellow), but may be formed as foil cut-out characters (i.e., cut-out characters formed by creating characters with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and cutting out the copper foil around the characters) and coating the surface of the foil cut-out characters with white solder resist (protective material) that is applied to the LED mounting surface to form the indicia, or may be formed as white resist cut-out characters using a two-coat white resist (after coating the entire LED mounting surface with white solder resist (first layer), masking out the characters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative substrates, and coating the entire area other than these with white solder resist again (second layer), forming the masked area, i.e., the characters and symbols, as white resist cut-out characters). A marking section showing the attributes of electronic components such as LEDs mounted on the front surface and areas showing the positions of these electronic components (which may further include the shape, size, mounting orientation (mounting direction), and model of the electronic components) may be formed on the back surface on which no LEDs are mounted by screen printing using ink of a predetermined color (not limited to colors with high brightness or saturation, but also including colors with low brightness or saturation), foil cut-out characters, white resist cut-out characters using two coats of white resist, or the like. In these cases, In such cases, the front side markings become less noticeable, and the front side markings cannot be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, which prevents the player from seeing information unrelated to the game, disrupting the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 and reducing interest in the game. This also prevents a decrease in reflectance on the front (surface) of the decorative board 4100 on which the LEDs are mounted, and also prevents the reflectance on the front (surface) of the decorative board 4100 on which the LEDs are mounted from decreasing, thereby preventing uneven light emission and improving the presentation effect.

A partition cover 4130 is attached to the surface (front, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100. The partition cover 4130 partitions the surface (front, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 into multiple regions, and has multiple openings formed therein to separate the ID output circuit IDC from electronic components such as various LEDs 4120, as shown in FIG. 270. In other words, only the ID output circuit IDC is mounted in the specific region of the decorative substrate 4100 partitioned by the partition cover 4130, and other electronic components are mounted in regions of the decorative substrate 4100 other than the specific region partitioned by the partition cover 4130. In the example shown in FIG. 270, the partition cover 4130 partitions the surface (front surface, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 into three regions, with the ID output circuit IDC mounted in a specific region of the three (the central region in FIG. 270) and multiple LEDs 4120 mounted in each of the other two regions; however, the number of partitioned regions is not limited to the above, as long as the partition cover 4130 partitions at least the surface (front surface, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 into a region where only the ID output circuit IDC is mounted and a region where other electronic components are mounted.

Here, if there is unauthorized access to the decorative board 4100 which implements the ID output circuit IDC, there is a risk that the presentation by the decorative board 4100 cannot be executed normally, and there is a risk that interest in playing the game will be reduced if the presentation by the decorative board 4100 cannot be executed normally. The partition cover 4130 of this embodiment covers the surface (front, surface mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100, and separates the ID output circuit IDC including the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa that generates a self-identification code (ID) from other electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120).This makes it easier to find the electronic component to be checked (in this case, the ID output circuit ICD) when unauthorized access is made to the decorative board 4100 while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, preventing the decorative board 4100 from performing a normal performance, or when checking whether or not fraud has occurred while the pachinko machine 1 is powered off.This makes it possible to immediately identify the ID output circuit IDC mounted on the decorative board 4100, return the self-identification code (ID) generated by the ID output circuit IDC to a normal state so that the decorative board 4100 can perform a normal performance, or determine whether or not fraud has occurred in the ID output circuit IDC, thereby contributing to improved security. In this way, it is possible to easily find the electronic component (in this case the ID output circuit ICD) that should be checked when checking whether or not fraud has occurred, so that it is possible to determine whether or not fraudulent access has been made to the decorative board 4100 before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, which may cause the performance by the decorative board 4100 to be unable to be performed normally, and to return the self-identification code (ID) generated by the ID output circuit IDC to a normal state, or to immediately return the self-identification code (ID) generated by the ID output circuit IDC to a normal state if fraudulent access has been made to the decorative board 4100 while the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, causing the performance by the decorative board 4100 to be unable to be performed normally. In addition, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a implemented on the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to constantly determine whether the self-identification code (ID) generated by the ID output circuit IDC is normal (for example, to execute an ID determination process each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed), when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and unauthorized access is made to the decorative board 4100, and the decorative board 4100 is unable to perform a normal performance, the self-identification code (ID) generated by the ID output circuit IDC can be returned to a normal state, so that the decorative board 4100 can immediately be restored to a state in which it can perform a performance normally, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in playing due to the decorative board 4100 being unable to perform a performance normally.

In addition, the partition cover 4130 in this example has an opening that exposes the ID output circuit IDC mounted on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100. Therefore, when the right game panel 1100R and the right front component 1000R and the right rear box 3010R are released from the mounting state in front of the decorative board 4100, the ID output circuit IDC can be operated to set a self-identification code (ID) without removing the partition cover 4130 from the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100, and the ID output circuit IDC is arranged on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100, separated from other electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120), so that the ID output circuit IDC can be easily identified when the decorative board 4100 is viewed from the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) side. In addition, it is sufficient that an opening is formed in the partition cover 4130 to expose at least a part of the ID output circuit IDC (such as a switch that sets the self-identification code (ID)) mounted on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100, and other electronic components (such as the LED 4120 in this example) may be covered by the partition cover 4130, or an opening that exposes only at least a part (such as the light-emitting element of the LED 4120) of the other electronic components (such as the LED 4120 in this example) may be formed in the partition cover 4130. In addition, when the LED 4120 is arranged as the other electronic component, by forming an opening in the partition cover 4130 that exposes a part of the LED 4120 (such as the light-emitting element of the LED 4120), the light irradiated from the LED 4120 can be irradiated forward of the pachinko machine 1 without being reduced by the partition cover 4130, making it possible to perform a performance with increased light intensity.

In addition, the compartment cover 4130 in this example is formed from an opaque material (e.g., opaque or translucent, such as PP), and although the surface (front surface, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 cannot be seen through the compartment cover 4130, electronic components such as the ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120 can be seen through the openings formed in the compartment cover.

In addition, the partition cover 4130 may be formed of a transparent material (e.g., a colorless transparent or colored transparent material such as PS or PET) so that the surface (front surface, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 can be seen through the partition cover 4130. In this case, an opening may be formed in the partition cover 4130 to expose at least a part of the ID output circuit IDC (such as a switch for setting a self-identification code (ID)) mounted on the surface (front surface, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 and cover the rest of the part, and other electronic components (such as the LED 4120 in this example) may be covered by the partition cover 4130, or an opening may be formed in the partition cover 4130 to expose at least a part of the other electronic components (such as the LED 4120 in this example) (such as the light-emitting element of the LED 4120). As a result, the compartment cover 4130 protects electronic components such as the ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120, preventing unauthorized access and enhancing security, and since the compartment cover 4130 is made of a transparent material, the light emitted from the LEDs 4120 can be irradiated to the front of the pachinko machine 1 without being reduced by the compartment cover 4130 as much as possible, making it possible to perform a performance with an increased amount of light. In addition, when the compartment cover 4130 is made of a transparent material, a partition wall extending from the back surface of the compartment cover 4130 toward the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 may be formed around the entire or part of the ID output circuit IDC to partition the area on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 where the ID output circuit IDC is mounted from other areas, or printing or attaching a sticker to surround the entire or part of the area on the surface of the compartment cover 4130 where the ID output circuit IDC is mounted may be performed. The above effects can also be achieved when the compartment cover 4130 is colored and transparent, but by forming it colorless and transparent, the translucency of the light emitted by the various LEDs 4120 and the visibility of the ID output circuit IDC can be improved compared to when it is colored and transparent, and the compartment cover 4130 can suppress the emphasis of light of a specific color (the same color as the compartment cover 4130) and all emitted colors can be emitted under the same conditions, achieving uniform light emission without unevenness.

The decorative board 4100 on which the various LEDs 4120 are mounted is positioned so that its surface (front, front mounting surface) faces the front of the pachinko machine 1 (the front side of the pachinko machine 1) (so that its surface (front, front mounting surface) faces the player) when the right-side game board 5AR is fixed to the main frame 4, and the ID output circuit IDC and the various LEDs 4120 mounted on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 are also positioned so that they face the front of the pachinko machine 1 (the direction facing the player).

As described above, if there is unauthorized access to the decorative board 4100 corresponding to the new right game board 5AR, the performance by the decorative board 4100 may not be performed normally, and the inability to perform the performance by the decorative board 4100 may reduce interest in the game. The decorative board 4100 of this embodiment is arranged so that its surface (front surface, front mounting surface) faces the front of the pachinko machine 1 (facing the player), and the ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120 mounted on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 are also arranged to face the front of the pachinko machine 1 (facing the player). Therefore, a person who performs unauthorized access to the decorative board 4100 (ID output circuit IDC, various LEDs, etc.) will access it from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and the unauthorized access will be easily noticed by the island equipment of the game hall and the employees of the game hall during the unauthorized access, making it easier to detect the unauthorized access. This makes it possible to suppress unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside, and prevents unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside causing the decorative board 4100 to be unable to perform its effects properly, and prevents a decline in interest in the game caused by the decorative board 4100 being unable to perform its effects properly.

In this example, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to make it difficult to access the decorative substrate 4100 from the back side. Specifically, a plate-shaped member is arranged behind the decorative substrate 4100 on the right side game board 5AR on which the decorative substrate 4100 is provided. The plate-shaped member of the right side game board 5AR is attached along a part or all of the outer surface of the back member (back member) of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 in which the decorative substrate 4100 is housed. The plate-shaped member of the right side game board 5AR increases the strength of the rear box 3010 against external impacts and reduces the workability of the rear box 3010, such as forming an opening in the back member (back member) of the rear box 3010, and for example, can form an opening in the back member (back member) of the rear box 3010 and suppress unauthorized access to the decorative substrate 4100 housed in the rear box 3010 through the opening. This prevents unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside, which can cause the decorative board 4100 to be unable to perform its effects properly, and prevents a decline in interest in the game caused by the decorative board 4100 not being able to perform its effects properly. In addition, the plate-shaped member of the right game board 5AR is preferably made of metal, for example, from an alloy such as aluminum or iron, in order to increase the strength of the rear box 3010 against external impacts and to reduce the workability of the rear box 3010, such as by forming an opening in the rear member (back member) of the rear box 3010.

In addition, the metal plate-shaped member of the right game board 5AR may be arranged behind the decorative board 4100 so as to overlap at least a portion of the decorative board 4100. It may be attached along part or all of the inner surface of the back member (back member) of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 in which the decorative board 4100 is housed, or part or all of the back member (back member) of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 may be made of metal. As with the case where it is attached along part or all of the outer surface of the back member (back member) of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000, it increases the strength of the rear box 3010 against external impacts and reduces the workability of the rear box 3010, such as by forming an opening in the back member (back member) of the rear box 3010, and prevents unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside, which causes the decorative board 4100 to be unable to perform the performance normally, and prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the decorative board 4100 not being able to perform the performance normally.

As described above, a white resist is formed on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100. The LED 4120 mounted on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 has a white package (not limited to white, but including colors similar to white, such as off-white and beige). Furthermore, on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, in the vicinity of the mounted ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120 and other electronic components on the surface side, a surface-side notation portion indicating the attributes of the electronic components on the surface side, such as the part number of the electronic components on the surface side, an area indicating the position where the electronic components on the surface side are to be placed (which may further include the shape of the electronic components on the surface side, the size of the electronic components on the surface side, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic components on the surface side, and the type of the electronic components on the surface side) is printed by silk printing on the solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a light color that is difficult to stand out against white. In contrast, the ID output circuit IDC has a dark exterior (black in this embodiment, but not limited to black, and may be a color that has a high contrast with white, such as navy blue or purple) (it is sufficient if the majority of the exterior is dark, and it may also have a light exterior in part, or light-colored letters (such as a model number) written on part of the exterior). Also, of the multiple electronic components mounted on the decorative board 4100, electronic components with dark exteriors, excluding the ID output circuit IDC, such as resistors and capacitors, are mounted on the rear mounting surface of the decorative board 4100.

Therefore, on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 on which a white resist is formed, the ID output circuit IDC, which has a dark exterior with high contrast (light and dark), can be easily identified, for example, by visual inspection. That is, the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 is configured to adopt a combination with low contrast except for the ID output circuit IDC, so that the ID output circuit IDC stands out when the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 is visually observed, and the ID output circuit IDC can be drawn to attention when the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 is visually observed. This makes it easy to identify the ID output circuit IDC, so that if there is unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside and the decorative board 4100 cannot perform its performance properly due to the unauthorized access, an employee of the game hall can easily visually identify the dark ID output circuit IDC from the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 and immediately determine whether or not there has been unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC. Therefore, if there is unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC, the ID output circuit IDC can be corrected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the decorative board 4100 not being able to perform its normal performance.

Of the multiple electronic components mounted on the decorative board 4100, electronic components (e.g., resistors, capacitors, etc.) with dark exteriors excluding the ID output circuit IDC are configured to be mounted on the back surface (rear surface, back mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100, but it is sufficient that the configuration is such that electronic components with dark exteriors different from the ID output circuit IDC are not placed in the area where the ID output circuit IDC is placed among the various areas on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 partitioned by the partition cover 4130, and electronic components with dark exteriors different from the ID output circuit IDC may be placed in the area where the ID output circuit IDC is not placed. In addition, the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 partitioned by the partition cover 4130 may be partitioned into an area where only the ID output circuit IDC is arranged and an area where the ID output circuit IDC is not arranged, but an electronic component having an exterior color with a low contrast with the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 may be arranged separately from the ID output circuit IDC in the area where the ID output circuit IDC is mounted on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 partitioned by the partition cover 4130. In this case, the ID output circuit IDC can be made to stand out. In addition, the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 partitioned by the partition cover 4130 may be partitioned into an area where only the ID output circuit IDC is arranged and an area where multiple types of electronic components other than the ID output circuit IDC are arranged. In this case, the area where the ID output circuit IDC is arranged is differentiated from other areas by only arranging the ID output circuit IDC, and it becomes easy to identify the area where the ID output circuit IDC is arranged and the ID output circuit IDC.

In addition, in this embodiment, the partition cover 4130 is formed in white, similar to the resist formed on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100. Therefore, in addition to the resist formed on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, the front side marking portion, and the LED 4120 mounted on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, the contrast between the partition cover 4130 and the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 is low, and only the ID output circuit IDC has a high contrast with the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, so that the ID output circuit IDC stands out when the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 is visually observed, making it easier to identify the ID output circuit IDC. In addition, the entire compartment cover 4130 is not limited to a color that has low contrast with the surface (front surface, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 (white, yellow, off-white, beige, etc.), as long as the surface of the decorative substrate 4100 (the surface facing the front of the pachinko machine 1) has a color that has low contrast with the surface (front surface, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, the surface of the compartment cover 4130 may be colored, painted, printed, etc. with a color that has low contrast with white (white, yellow, off-white, beige, etc.), or a sticker having a color that has low contrast with white (white, yellow, off-white, beige, etc.) may be attached. In addition, even when the compartment cover 4130 is formed colorless and transparent, the color of the surface (front surface, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 can be visible, so that the area of the surface (front surface, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 including the compartment cover 4130, excluding the ID output circuit IDC, can be a combination with low contrast.

Here, on the surface (front, mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, where the area other than the ID output circuit IDC is a combination of light colors with low contrast, the ID output circuit IDC, which has a black exterior and high contrast on the surface (front, mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, is visible to the player, which may disrupt the world view of the pachinko machine 1 and reduce interest in playing. In this embodiment, by mounting the ID output circuit IDC on the same surface as the various LEDs 4120 on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, it becomes difficult to look directly at the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 due to the light emitted by the various LEDs 4120, so that the ID output circuit IDC can be made less noticeable, and it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being disrupted and interest in playing from being reduced by the player being visually recognized by information unrelated to the game.

[Another aspect of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa that generates a self-identification code (ID)]
In the above embodiment, a parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa is exemplified as an inherent value generating unit that generates an inherent value that can identify the right-side game board 5AR, and a self-identification code (ID) that is preset in the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa is transmitted as a signal from the ID output circuit IDC to the peripheral control board 1510. However, the inherent value generating unit of the present invention is not limited to the form of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa, and may be, for example, a form composed of a switch mechanism using at least one dip switch mounted on the decorative board 4100 attached to the right-side game board 5AR, or a form composed of a photosensor mechanism in which the self-identification code (ID) is mechanically set when the right-side game board 5AR is assembled.

Figure 271 is a schematic oblique view of a portion of the right rear box 3010R of the rear unit 3000 of the right game board 5AR, seen from the front. As shown in Figure 271, the switch mechanism has at least one dip switch mounted on the decorative board 4100 of the right game board 5AR. In this embodiment, the switch mechanism has two dip switches 4110A, 4110B. The dip switch 4110A is a rotary switch that can set a binary value by rotating the operating part, and in this embodiment, the dip switch 4110A can be set to a value from 0 to 15. In addition, the dip switch 4110B is an on-off switch that can be switched on and off by operating the operating part. The switch mechanism of this embodiment has a dip switch 4110A that can be set to a value between 0 and 15, and a dip switch 4110B that can be turned on and off, and 32 different self-identification codes (IDs) can be generated by operating the operation parts of each dip switch 4110A, 4110B. The self-identification codes (IDs) are preset by operating the operation parts of each dip switch 4110A, 4110B.

The self-identification code (ID) generated by the switch mechanism is transmitted between the peripheral control board 1510 via the ID output circuit IDC. Therefore, in the embodiment using the switch mechanism, as in the embodiment in which the self-identification code (ID) preset in advance is transmitted to the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa of the present embodiment, human error such as the right-side game board 5AR corresponding to the old left-side game board 5AL being left without being replaced with the right-side game board 5AR corresponding to the new left-side game board 5AL is suppressed, and the loss of unity throughout the gaming machine in the event of a human error can be suppressed, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. In addition, in the embodiment using the switch mechanism, the self-identification code (ID) can be easily set by operating the operation parts of each dip switch 4110A, 4110B.

Figure 272 is a schematic exploded perspective view of a part of the right-side game board 5AR disassembled into the right-side game panel 1100R and the right-side rear box 3010R, viewed from the front. As shown in Figure 272, the photosensor mechanism has at least one photosensor 4110C mounted on the decorative substrate 4100 of the right-side game board 5AR, and a shielding portion 4110C4 attached to the right-side game panel 1100R of the right-side game board 5AR and capable of shielding the light guided by the photosensor 4110C. The photosensor mechanism of this embodiment has three photosensors 4110C and two shielding portions 4110C4. The photosensor 4110C, for example, has a light-emitting unit 4110C2 that emits light and a light-receiving unit 4110C3 that receives the light emitted from the light-emitting unit 4110C2, and is switched on and off depending on whether the light-receiving unit 4110C3 receives the light emitted from the light-emitting unit 4110C2. In the photosensor mechanism of this embodiment, three photosensors 4110C are mounted side by side on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 of the right game board 5AR, and each photosensor 4110C is turned on while the light-receiving unit 4110C3 of each photosensor 4110C is receiving light. In the photosensor mechanism of this embodiment, eight different self-identification codes (IDs) can be generated by switching the three photosensors 4110C on and off.

The shielding portion 4110C4 can be attached to the back surface of the right-side gaming panel 1100R at a position facing each photosensor 4110C, and has a shielding member that extends from the back surface of the right-side gaming panel 1100R between the light-emitting portion 4110C2 and the light-receiving portion 4110C3 of the photosensor 4110C facing the light-emitting portion 4110C2 and prevents the light-receiving portion 4110C3 from receiving light irradiated from the light-emitting portion 4110C2. The shielding portion 4110C4 of this embodiment is attached to a position facing the photosensors 4110C on both sides except the center, out of the three photosensors 4110C mounted side by side on the decorative board 4100 of the right-side gaming board 5AR. If the shielding portion 4110C4 is not provided, a self-identification code (ID) is generated in which all three photosensors 4110C are on. However, since all three photosensors 4110C are on even when the right-side gaming panel 1100R is not attached to the right-side gaming board 5AR, it is preferable not to use a self-identification code (ID) in which all three photosensors 4110C are on.

The self-identification code (ID) generated by the photosensor mechanism is transmitted between the peripheral control board 1510 via the ID output circuit IDC. Therefore, in the aspect using the photosensor mechanism, as in the aspect of transmitting a self-identification code (ID) preset to the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa of the present embodiment, human errors such as the right-side game board 5AR corresponding to the old left-side game board 5AL being left without being replaced with the right-side game board 5AR corresponding to the new left-side game board 5AL are suppressed, and the loss of unity throughout the gaming machine in the event of a human error can be suppressed, and a decrease in interest in gaming can be suppressed. In addition, in the aspect using the photosensor mechanism, since it is difficult to change the mounting position of the shielding portion 4110C4 attached to the right-side game panel 1100R, it is difficult to easily change the setting of the self-identification code (ID), and it is possible to suppress unauthorized changes to the self-identification code (ID).

[Summary A1]
A gaming machine including a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board side component provided on the game frame side component and having a first game board side component and a second game board side component, the game board side component being composed of the first game board side component and the second game board side component. The first game board side component is provided with a performance control board having a microprocessor that executes a game performance. The second game board side component is provided with a unique value generating means capable of generating a unique value that can be identified as the second game board side component, a unique value transmission unit that transmits the unique value generated by the unique value generating means to the performance control board, and a specific board on which a plurality of electronic components are provided. The unique value generating means is provided on the first board surface side of the specific board, and the performance control board is capable of executing an unconnected notification process that notifies the user that the specific board is in an unconnected state when there is no unique value input from the unique value transmission unit. The second game board side component has a partition section that partitions the first board surface of the specific board into a specific area including an area where the unique value generating means is provided, and a non-specific area that does not include an area where the unique value generating means is provided.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main frame 4, which is a game frame side component, and a divided game board 5A fixed to the main frame 4 of FIG. 248, which is a game board side component. The divided game board 5A is composed of a left game board 5AL, which is a first game board side component, and a right game board 5AR, which is a second game board side component. The left game board 5AL is composed of multiple boards (for example, a main control board 1310 housed in a main control unit 1300) including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances by mounting a peripheral control IC 1510a as a microprocessor in which a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces are integrated on a single semiconductor chip. The right-side game board 5AR is equipped with a parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa, which is a unique value generating means that generates a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify the right-side game board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmitting unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa between the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which electronic components such as various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on the first board surface of which are mounted a plurality of electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120) including an IDC output circuit IDC, which is mainly composed of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa.

The peripheral control board 1510 can execute an unconnected notification process (e.g., the above-mentioned error response 7 at power-on) that notifies of an unconnected state (e.g., the above-mentioned state 8 at power-on) when there is no input of a self-identification code (ID) from the ID output circuit IDC (e.g., the above-mentioned unconnected error 1 at power-on). The right-side game board 5AR has a partition cover 4130, which is a partition that separates the ID output circuit IDC from other electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120) among the multiple electronic components mounted on the first board surface of the decorative board 4100.

In this way, when there is no input of the self-identification code (ID) from the ID output circuit IDC (for example, in the case of the unconnected error 1 at power-on described above), it is possible to execute an unconnected notification process (for example, the error response 7 at power-on described above) that notifies of an unconnected state (for example, the state 8 at power-on described above). This makes it possible to prevent an incomplete performance from being executed in a state where the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, are not connected, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in playing. The partition cover 4130 covers the first board surface of the decorative board 4100 and separates the ID output circuit IDC that generates the self-identification code (ID) from other electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120), so that it is possible to suppress unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside, thereby suppressing the execution of unauthorized performances, and suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in playing. In addition, because an opening is formed in the partition cover 4130, when the right-side game panel 1100R and the right-side front component 1000R are disassembled from the right-side rear box 3010R, even when the partition cover 4130 is attached to the front of the right-side game panel 1100R, the ID output circuit IDC and electronic components such as the various LEDs 4120 are visible through the opening, and in addition, because the ID output circuit IDC is separated from other electronic components (such as the various LEDs 4120), the ID output circuit IDC can be easily identified.

[Summary A2]
A gaming machine including a gaming frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a gaming board side component provided on the gaming frame side component and having a first gaming board side component and a second gaming board side component, the gaming board side component being composed of the first gaming board side component and the second gaming board side component. The first gaming board side component is provided with a performance control board having a microprocessor that executes a game performance. The second gaming board side component is provided with an inherent value generating means capable of generating an inherent value that can be identified as the second gaming board side component, an inherent value transmission section that transmits the inherent value generated by the inherent value generating means to the performance control board, and a specific board on which a plurality of electronic components are provided. The inherent value generating means is provided on the first board surface side of the specific board, and the performance control board is capable of executing an unconnected notification process that notifies the user that the performance control board is in an unconnected state when an inherent value is not input from the inherent value transmission section. The specific board is arranged so that the first board surface faces the front of the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main frame 4, which is a game frame side component, and a divided game board 5A fixed to the main frame 4 of FIG. 248, which is a game board side component. The divided game board 5A is composed of a left game board 5AL, which is a first game board side component, and a right game board 5AR, which is a second game board side component. The left game board 5AL is composed of multiple boards (for example, a main control board 1310 housed in a main control unit 1300) including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances by mounting a peripheral control IC 1510a as a microprocessor in which a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces are integrated on a single semiconductor chip. The right side game board 5AR is equipped with a parallel serial circuit IDCa, which is a unique value generating means that generates a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify the right side game board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC (FIG. 251) which is a unique value transmission unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel serial circuit IDCa between the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on which multiple electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120) including the ID output circuit IDC are mounted on the first board surface.

The peripheral control board 1510 can execute an unconnected notification process (for example, the above-mentioned error response 7 at power-on) that notifies of an unconnected state (for example, the above-mentioned state 8 at power-on) when there is no input of a self-identification code (ID) from the ID output circuit IDC (for example, the above-mentioned case of unconnected error 1 at power-on). The decorative board 4100 on which the various LEDs 4120 are mounted is positioned so that the first board surface faces the front of the pachinko machine 1.

In this way, when there is no input of the self-identification code (ID) from the ID output circuit IDC (for example, in the case of the unconnected error 1 at power-on described above), it is possible to execute an unconnected notification process (for example, the error response 7 at power-on described above) to notify of an unconnected state (for example, the state 8 at power-on described above). This makes it possible to prevent an incomplete presentation from being executed when the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are not connected, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game. In addition, the decorative board 4100 on which the various LEDs 4120 are mounted is positioned so that the first board surface faces the front of the pachinko machine 1, making it easier for fraudulent access to be detected by the island equipment and employees of the gaming hall when unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside is attempted, and unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside can be suppressed, preventing unauthorized performances from being performed through unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside, and preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[Summary A3]
A gaming machine including a gaming frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a gaming board side component provided on the gaming frame side component and having a first gaming board side component and a second gaming board side component, the gaming board side component being composed of the first gaming board side component and the second gaming board side component. The first gaming board side component is provided with a performance control board having a microprocessor that executes a game performance. The second gaming board side component is provided with an inherent value generating means capable of generating an inherent value that can be identified as the second gaming board side component, an inherent value transmission section that transmits the inherent value generated by the inherent value generating means to the performance control board, and a specific board on which a plurality of electronic components are provided. The inherent value generating means is provided on the first board surface side of the specific board, and the performance control board is capable of executing an unconnected notification process that notifies the user that the performance control board is in an unconnected state when an inherent value is not input from the inherent value transmission section. A white resist, which is a light color, is formed on a first substrate surface of the specific substrate, and the eigenvalue generating means provided on the first substrate surface side on which the white resist is formed has a dark exterior.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main frame 4, which is a game frame side component, and a divided game board 5A fixed to the main frame 4 of FIG. 248, which is a game board side component. The divided game board 5A is composed of a left game board 5AL, which is a first game board side component, and a right game board 5AR, which is a second game board side component. The left game board 5AL is composed of multiple boards (for example, a main control board 1310 housed in a main control unit 1300) including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances by mounting a peripheral control IC 1510a as a microprocessor in which a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces are integrated on a single semiconductor chip. The right side game board 5AR is equipped with a parallel serial circuit IDCa, which is a unique value generating means that generates a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify the right side game board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC (FIG. 251) which is a unique value transmission unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel serial circuit IDCa between the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on which multiple electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120) including the ID output circuit IDC are mounted on the first board surface.

The peripheral control board 1510 can execute an unconnected notification process (for example, the above-mentioned error response 7 at power-on) that notifies of an unconnected state (for example, the above-mentioned state 8 at power-on) when there is no input of a self-identification code (ID) from the ID output circuit IDC (for example, the above-mentioned case of unconnected error 1 at power-on). A white resist is formed as a light color on the first board surface of the decorative board 4100 on which the various LEDs 4210 are mounted, and the ID output circuit IDC has a black exterior as a dark color.

In this way, when there is no input of the self-identification code (ID) from the ID output circuit IDC (for example, in the case of the unconnected error 1 at power-on described above), it is possible to execute an unconnected notification process (for example, the error response 7 at power-on described above) that notifies the player that the game is unconnected (for example, the state 8 at power-on described above). This makes it possible to prevent an incomplete performance from being executed when the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, are not connected, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in the game. In addition, since a white resist is formed on the first board surface of the decorative board 4100 and the exterior of the ID output circuit IDC is black, even if there is unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside and an unauthorized performance is executed as a result of the unauthorized access, the black ID output circuit IDC can be easily identified by visual inspection by, for example, an employee of the game hall against the white decorative board 4100, and the execution of an unauthorized performance can be prevented by correcting the ID output circuit IDC, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Summary B1]
A gaming machine including a gaming frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a gaming board side component provided on the gaming frame side component and having a first gaming board side component and a second gaming board side component, the gaming board side component being composed of the first gaming board side component and the second gaming board side component. The first gaming board side component is equipped with a presentation control board having a microprocessor that executes a game presentation. The second gaming board side component is equipped with an inherent value generating means capable of generating an inherent value that can be identified as the second gaming board side component, an inherent value transmitting section that transmits the inherent value generated by the inherent value generating means to the presentation control board, and a specific board on which a plurality of electronic components are provided. The unique value generating means is provided on the first board surface side of the specific board, and the performance control board is capable of executing an abnormal connection notification process for notifying that an abnormal connection state exists when the unique value input from the unique value transmission unit is not a preset value. The second game board side component has a partition unit that partitions the first board surface of the specific board into a specific region including the region where the unique value generating means is provided and a non-specific region that does not include the region where the unique value generating means is provided.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main frame 4, which is a game frame side component, and a divided game board 5A fixed to the main frame 4 of FIG. 248, which is a game board side component. The divided game board 5A is composed of a left game board 5AL, which is a first game board side component, and a right game board 5AR, which is a second game board side component. The left game board 5AL is composed of multiple boards (for example, a main control board 1310 housed in a main control unit 1300) including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances by mounting a peripheral control IC 1510a as a microprocessor in which a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces are integrated on a single semiconductor chip. The right side game board 5AR is equipped with a parallel serial circuit IDCa, which is a unique value generating means that generates a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify the right side game board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC (FIG. 251) which is a unique value transmission unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel serial circuit IDCa between the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on which multiple electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120) including the ID output circuit IDC are mounted on the first board surface.

The peripheral control board 1510 can execute an abnormal connection notification process (for example, the above-mentioned error response 1 at power-on) that notifies of an abnormal connection state (for example, the above-mentioned state 2 at power-on) when the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (for example, the above-mentioned ID error 1 at power-on). The right-side game board 5AR has a partition cover 4130, which is a partition that separates the ID output circuit IDC from other electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120) among the multiple electronic components mounted on the first board surface of the decorative board 4100.

In this way, when the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (for example, in the case of the above-mentioned ID error 1 at power-on), an abnormal connection notification process (for example, the above-mentioned error response 1 at power-on) can be executed to notify that an abnormal connection state (for example, the above-mentioned state 2 at power-on) exists. This makes it possible to prevent an incomplete performance from being executed in a state where the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, are abnormally connected, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in playing. The partition cover 4130 covers the first board surface of the decorative board 4100 and separates the ID output circuit IDC, which includes the parallel serial circuit IDCa that generates the self-identification code (ID), from other electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120), so that it is possible to suppress unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside, thereby suppressing the execution of unauthorized performances, and suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in playing. In addition, because an opening is formed in the partition cover 4130, when the right-side game panel 1100R and the right-side front component 1000R are disassembled from the right-side rear box 3010R, even when the partition cover 4130 is attached to the front of the right-side game panel 1100R, the ID output circuit IDC and electronic components such as the various LEDs 4120 are visible through the opening, and in addition, because the ID output circuit IDC is separated from other electronic components (such as the various LEDs 4120), the ID output circuit IDC can be easily identified.

[Summary B2]
A gaming machine including a gaming frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a gaming board side component provided on the gaming frame side component and having a first gaming board side component and a second gaming board side component, the gaming board side component being composed of the first gaming board side component and the second gaming board side component. The first gaming board side component is equipped with a presentation control board having a microprocessor that executes a game presentation. The second gaming board side component is equipped with an inherent value generating means capable of generating an inherent value that can be identified as the second gaming board side component, an inherent value transmitting section that transmits the inherent value generated by the inherent value generating means to the presentation control board, and a specific board on which a plurality of electronic components are provided. The unique value generating means is provided on the first board surface side of the specific board, and the performance control board is capable of executing an abnormal connection notification process for notifying that an abnormal connection state exists when the unique value input from the unique value transmission unit is not a preset value. The specific board is disposed so that the first board surface faces the front of the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main frame 4, which is a game frame side component, and a divided game board 5A fixed to the main frame 4 of FIG. 248, which is a game board side component. The divided game board 5A is composed of a left game board 5AL, which is a first game board side component, and a right game board 5AR, which is a second game board side component. The left game board 5AL is composed of multiple boards (for example, a main control board 1310 housed in a main control unit 1300) including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances by mounting a peripheral control IC 1510a as a microprocessor in which a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces are integrated on a single semiconductor chip. The right side game board 5AR is equipped with a parallel serial circuit IDCa, which is a unique value generating means that generates a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify the right side game board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC (FIG. 251) which is a unique value transmission unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel serial circuit IDCa between the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on which multiple electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120) including the ID output circuit IDC are mounted on the first board surface.

The peripheral control board 1510 can execute an abnormal connection notification process (for example, the above-mentioned error response 1 at power-on) that notifies of an abnormal connection state (for example, the above-mentioned state 2 at power-on) when the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (for example, the above-mentioned ID error 1 at power-on). The decorative board 4100 on which the various LEDs 4120 are mounted is positioned so that the first board surface faces the front of the pachinko machine 1.

In this way, if the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (for example, in the case of ID error 1 at power-on as described above), it is possible to execute an abnormal connection notification process (for example, error response 1 at power-on as described above) to notify of an abnormal connection state (for example, state 2 at power-on as described above).This makes it possible to prevent an incomplete presentation from being executed when the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are in an abnormal connection state, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. In addition, the decorative board 4100 on which the various LEDs 4120 are mounted is positioned so that the first board surface faces the front of the pachinko machine 1, making it easier for fraudulent access to be detected by the island equipment and employees of the gaming hall when unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside is attempted, and unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside can be suppressed, preventing unauthorized performances from being performed through unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside, and preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[Summary B3]
A gaming machine including a gaming frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a gaming board side component provided on the gaming frame side component and having a first gaming board side component and a second gaming board side component, the gaming board side component being composed of the first gaming board side component and the second gaming board side component. The first gaming board side component is equipped with a presentation control board having a microprocessor that executes a game presentation. The second gaming board side component is equipped with an inherent value generating means capable of generating an inherent value that can be identified as the second gaming board side component, an inherent value transmitting section that transmits the inherent value generated by the inherent value generating means to the presentation control board, and a specific board on which a plurality of electronic components are provided. The unique value generating means is provided on the first board surface side of the specific board, and the performance control board is capable of executing an abnormal connection notification process that notifies an abnormal connection state when the unique value input from the unique value transmission unit is not a preset value. A light-colored white resist is formed on the first board surface of the specific board, and the unique value generating means provided on the first board surface side on which the white resist is formed has a dark-colored exterior.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main frame 4, which is a game frame side component, and a divided game board 5A fixed to the main frame 4 of FIG. 248, which is a game board side component. The divided game board 5A is composed of a left game board 5AL, which is a first game board side component, and a right game board 5AR, which is a second game board side component. The left game board 5AL is composed of multiple boards (for example, a main control board 1310 housed in a main control unit 1300) including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances by mounting a peripheral control IC 1510a as a microprocessor in which a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces are integrated on a single semiconductor chip. The right side game board 5AR is equipped with a parallel serial circuit IDCa, which is a unique value generating means that generates a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify the right side game board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC (FIG. 251) which is a unique value transmission unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel serial circuit IDCa between the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on which multiple electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120) including the ID output circuit IDC are mounted on the first board surface.

The peripheral control board 1510 can execute an abnormal connection notification process (for example, the above-mentioned error response 1 at power-on) that notifies of an abnormal connection state (for example, the above-mentioned state 2 at power-on) when the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (for example, the above-mentioned ID error 1 at power-on). A white resist is formed as a light color on the first board surface of the decorative board 4100 on which the various LEDs 4120 are mounted, and the ID output circuit IDC has a black exterior as a dark color.

In this way, if the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (for example, in the case of ID error 1 at power-on as described above), it is possible to execute an abnormal connection notification process (for example, error response 1 at power-on as described above) to notify of an abnormal connection state (for example, state 2 at power-on as described above).This makes it possible to prevent an incomplete presentation from being executed when the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are in an abnormal connection state, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. In addition, since a white resist is formed on the first substrate surface of the decorative substrate 4100 and the exterior of the ID output circuit IDC is black, even if there is unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside and unauthorized performance is performed as a result of the unauthorized access, the black ID output circuit IDC can be easily identified visually from the white decorative substrate 4100, for example, by an employee of the game hall, and unauthorized performance can be prevented from being performed by modifying the ID output circuit IDC, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Settings change and split game board ID error]
Next, an example of behavior will be described when changing the setting value when the combination of the split game board 5A (i.e., the combination of the right game board 5AR (having only a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left game board 5AL (having a peripheral control board 1510 or a main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor, and a board not equipped with a microprocessor)) is in an incompatible (inconsistent) state (incompatible state or inconsistent state. In this example, the right game board 5AR having an ID different from the correct ID and the left game board 5AL having the correct ID are connected.) or in an unconnected state where there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR (the input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR cannot be confirmed) and a malfunction such as a short circuit or break occurs in the transmission path for transmitting various signals, making it impossible to confirm the connection (unconnected state. In this example, a state in which the right game board 5AR is not connected to the left game board 5AL having the correct ID, regardless of whether the right game board 5AR has a correct ID or not.). For comparison, an example of behavior when changing the setting value when the combination of the split game board 5A (i.e., the combination of the right game board 5AR (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left game board 5AL (peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) is in a compatible (matched) state (matched state) will also be described. Figure 273 is an example of behavior when changing the setting value when the split game board 5A consisting of the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR is in a compatible (matched) state as the combination of the split game board 5A, Figure 274 is an example of behavior when changing the setting value when the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), and Figure 277 is an example of behavior when changing the setting value when the right game board 5AR is not connected.

[Changes in settings when compatible]
As shown in FIG. 273, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 outputs the "power
On the other hand, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right side game board 5AR, and the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 are turned off. Furthermore, as described above, if the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 starts (in this example, after inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turning it ON, the power switch 630a on the power supply board 630 is operated while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633 to power on the pachinko machine 1), then after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a setting change process (step S37) is executed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, making it possible to select and determine the setting value. In addition, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right side game board 5AR, and some or all of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may also be lit in a predetermined manner, making it easier to determine that power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has started.

When the setting change process is started, a setting change start command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the peripheral control IC 1510 that a setting change of the setting value is about to begin. When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change start command, it causes the performance display device 1600 to display a setting change notification state (in this example, "setting change in progress") (this may be displayed until the setting change process is completed, or may be displayed for a certain period of time and then terminated), and causes the various speakers to repeatedly output a setting change notification sound (an announcement voice saying "setting change in progress" and a warning sound such as a "ding dong" sound) at a predetermined volume (this may be the maximum volume that can be set, or may be a default volume adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) (this may be output repeatedly until the setting change process is completed, or may be output repeatedly for a certain number of times (e.g., five times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) and then stop output).

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 lights up various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) and various LEDs (some or all) mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR in a setting change notification light-emitting mode (in this example, the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the right-side game board 5AR are lit in the same color and the light-emitting color is switched in a short time) according to the setting change (the setting change notification light-emitting mode may be lit until the setting change processing is completed, or the setting change notification light-emitting mode may be terminated and the light-emitting mode may be turned off or lit in a different light-emitting mode after emitting light in the setting change notification light-emitting mode for a certain period of time). This notifies the user that the setting value change processing is being performed, and makes it possible to immediately find if the setting value has been changed illegally.

The volume of the setting change notification sound output from the various speakers during the setting change process cannot be adjusted by the volume adjustment button 227. As described above, the player can adjust the volume output from the various speakers by operating the volume adjustment button 227, but the volume of the setting change notification sound output during the setting change process cannot be adjusted even if the player operates the volume adjustment button 227. Therefore, the setting change notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume during the setting change process, and the sound output from the various speakers can reliably inform the player that a setting change is being made. This makes it possible to immediately detect any unauthorized setting changes and prevents unauthorized changes to setting values.

The light intensity of the setting change notification light-emitting mode performed during the setting change process cannot be adjusted by the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, the player can adjust the light intensity (brightness) of some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. However, the setting change notification light-emitting mode performed during the setting change process cannot be adjusted by the player even if he operates the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, during the setting change process, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A are controlled to emit light at a predetermined light intensity (brightness) to perform the setting change notification light-emitting mode, and the setting change notification light-emitting mode can reliably inform the player that a setting change has been made. This makes it possible to immediately detect any unauthorized setting changes, and prevents unauthorized changes to the setting value.

The LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A are divided into LEDs (dimmable LEDs) that are subject to light adjustment when the light adjustment button 228 is operated under normal circumstances (playable state), and LEDs (non-dimmable LEDs) that are not subject to light adjustment even when the light adjustment button 228 is operated not only under normal circumstances (playable state). For example, the LEDs that display information regarding winning or losing, such as the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left game board 5AL, are non-dimmable LEDs, and most of the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are dimmable LEDs, except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250. In addition, some of the various LEDs provided on the right-side game board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be non-dimmable LEDs. In this case, the brightness can be adjusted based on the non-dimmable LEDs, making it easier to adjust to the desired brightness.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during normal times (when playable), a scale corresponding to the current volume is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and a confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 (for example, "The volume has been changed") is output from various speakers at a volume set according to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227, and when the light adjustment button 222 is operated during normal times (when playable), a scale corresponding to the current light amount (brightness) is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and a confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the light adjustment button 222 (for example, "The brightness has been changed") is output from various speakers at a volume set according to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227. In addition, the scales displayed on the performance display device 1600 are provided corresponding to each of the volume adjustment button 227 and the light adjustment button 222, and the scales can be changed by operating the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 222 while the scales corresponding to the current volume or light amount (brightness) are displayed.

On the other hand, when the setting change process is being performed, even if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 is operated, the performance display device 1600 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), and no confirmation sound is output in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228. Since the performance display device 1600 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), the scale does not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) from interfering with the visibility of the display of the notification mode during the setting change on the performance display device 1600, and it is possible to prevent the confirmation sound in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 from making it difficult to hear the setting change notification sound, and it is possible to immediately detect if an unauthorized setting change is being made.

In the above description, the performance display device 1600 displays a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) (the volume or light intensity adjusted based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 222) in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 222. However, the scale is not limited to the above as long as it indicates the degree (level) of the volume or light intensity adjusted in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 222. For example, the degree (level) of the volume or light intensity adjusted in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 222 may be indicated by a change in color or a change in the character (strengthening of equipment, change in height, change in body shape, etc.).

During the execution of the setting change process, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, and the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 are turned off. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, although the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR constitute a divided game board 5A, during the setting change, the various LEDs provided on the left side game board 5AL are all turned off regardless of whether they are controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, and only the various LEDs provided on the right side game board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are turned on. In this way, while the setting change process is being executed, the light emission patterns of the various LEDs provided on the split game board 5A, among those provided on the left game board 5AL, are made different from those of the various LEDs provided on the right game board 5AR, so that a person viewing the pachinko machine 1 feels uneasy and is able to immediately notice that the setting change process is being executed. In addition, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board mounted on the left game board 5AL, the various LEDs mounted on the functional display unit 1400, and the sub-functional display unit 2250 may be lit in a different notification light-emitting mode (e.g., red flashing) when the setting is changed than the various LEDs on the door frame unit and the right game board 5AR, or one or both of the LEDs on the functional display unit 1400 and the sub-functional display unit 2250 that display information about winning or losing may be lit in a notification light-emitting mode when the setting is changed. In this case, the light-emitting mode of the LEDs on the right game board 5AR and the light-emitting mode of the LEDs on the left game board 5AL can be made different, so that it is possible to immediately notice that the setting change process is being executed.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 stores the setting value determined based on the setting value determination operation (in this example, an OFF operation that returns the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 to its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a)) in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and transmits a setting change command to the peripheral control board 1510 notifying the completion of the setting change process.

In addition, when the setting value is determined, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs a power-on operation check for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds). Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the LEDs (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, door frame top unit 450, etc.)) to light up in a predetermined light emission mode (light emission mode when power-on operation check is performed), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the drive motor and drive solenoid, etc. to operate the movable body in a predetermined operation mode (operation mode when power-on operation check is performed) to check whether the LEDs can be turned on normally and whether the drive motor and drive solenoid can be driven to operate the movable body normally.

In this example, movable bodies that operate by driving drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. using the peripheral control IC 1510a of the performance control board 1510 include, for example, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3. In the above-mentioned power-on operation check, the peripheral control IC 1510a drives the drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. to move the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 from the raised position to the lowered position while the rear upper first decorative part 3211 is still facing forward, and then rotates it around the left-right axis, and then moves the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 from the lowered position to the raised position while the rear upper first decorative part 3211 is facing forward, and a confirmation operation is performed in which the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300 are moved from a retracted position that does not cover the front of the performance display device 1600 to the performance display device. It is configured to perform a confirmation operation of moving the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the back front lower performance unit 3160 from the normal standby position to an elevated position in front of the performance display device 1600, then moving it to a retreated position, a confirmation operation of rotating it around a front-to-back axis and then moving it to the standby position, a confirmation operation of driving the vibration motor 356 to vibrate the performance operation unit 301 and then stopping it, and a confirmation operation of driving the operation button lift drive motor 367 to lift and lower the performance operation unit 301 relative to the performance operation unit cover unit 310.

In addition, in this example, in the power-on operation check, all LEDs except the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information on winning or losing among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are lit in a predetermined light emission mode (light emission mode during power-on operation check). In addition, in the power-on operation check, the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 may also be lit to check for the presence or absence of an abnormality, and the LEDs of the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 other than the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 are not limited to being all lit, and some of the LEDs may not be lit, and the drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are not limited to being all driven, and some may not be driven. In addition, when executing the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), some or all of the LEDs (such as the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left side game board 5AL and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right side game board 5AR, and the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding winning or losing among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be lit in a predetermined light-emitting mode (light-emitting mode when operation is confirmed when the power is turned on) but may be lit in a light-emitting mode (for example, a RAM clear notification light-emitting mode) that notifies the user that all areas of the main control built-in RAM are to be cleared except for a specific area. In addition, in this example, when checking operation at power-on, all of the drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are configured to be driven, but some of the drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 completes the setting change process, it sends a setting change command to the peripheral control board 1510 and initiates a process (step S38) of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. In addition, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, that is, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 changes the LEDs (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information on winning or losing among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 to a predetermined light emission mode (light emission mode at the time of power-on operation confirmation, in this example, white-purple). The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is turned on (illuminated), and a power-on operation check is performed in which a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc. controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are driven to operate the movable body in a predetermined operating mode (operation mode during power-on operation check), and a RAM clear notification sound (an announcement voice saying "Memory has been cleared" and a warning sound such as "ding-dong") is repeatedly output from various speakers at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or may be a default volume adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) (the sound may be repeatedly output until the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area and the power-on operation check are completed, or the sound may be repeatedly output a certain number of times (e.g., five times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) and then the output may be stopped). On the other hand, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the mode during the performance on the performance display device 1600, i.e., decorative patterns and background images during normal times (when playable), and does not notify that all areas of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area. In addition, if the main frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, "Door open" may be displayed as a door open abnormality notification display mode to notify this until the main frame 4 is closed. In addition, the door open abnormality notification display mode may be any mode that corresponds to the error content, and may be one or any combination of letters, numbers (e.g., error codes), marks, etc.

In addition, the performance display device 1600 may also be configured to notify that all areas of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area. In this case, only a display notifying that all areas of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area may be executed without displaying decorative patterns or background images during normal times (when playable), or both a display of the appearance during performance (decorative patterns or background images during normal times (when playable), etc.) and a display notifying that all areas of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area may be executed. In the case where both a display of the appearance during performance (decorative patterns or background images during normal times (when playable), etc.) and a display notifying that all areas of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area are executed, a display notifying that all areas of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area may be executed in an upper layer that overlaps the display of the appearance during performance (decorative patterns or background images during normal times (when playable), etc.). In addition, one or both of the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding whether or not a result has been received and that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, and the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 that are controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, may be made to emit light in a lighting state that notifies the clearing of all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, or in a lighting state that is used to check operation when the power is turned on.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process is completed, that is, when a power-on operation check is performed that involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the LEDs other than the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding winning or losing among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, the door frame unit (door frame 3 The volume of the sound output from the various speakers cannot be adjusted by the volume adjustment button 227. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the volume of the sound output from the various speakers can be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment button 227. However, the volume of the sound output from the RAM clear notification sound output in the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, which is executed after the setting change process is completed, cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment button 227. Therefore, when the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area is started, a RAM clear notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume, and the sound output from various speakers can reliably inform the user that the main control built-in RAM has been cleared, making it possible to immediately detect any unauthorized clearing of the main control built-in RAM. Furthermore, even if the user does not notice that the setting value has been unauthorizedly changed, the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area that is executed later can make the user aware that the main control built-in RAM has been unauthorizedly cleared, and thus that unauthorized settings may have been changed, thereby preventing unauthorized changes to the setting value.

Similarly, when a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process is completed, that is, when a power-on operation check is performed that involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the LEDs other than the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information on winning or losing among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, the door frame unit (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the door frame 3) are cleared until the power-on operation check is completed after the setting change process is completed. The light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs of the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A cannot be adjusted by the light intensity adjustment button 228 until the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs of the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A is adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A can be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, but the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A cannot be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228 until the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A is adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, when the power-on operation check is started, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A can be controlled to emit light with a predetermined light amount (brightness), and since it can be reliably notified that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has started, it becomes possible to immediately detect any fraudulent acts, such as restarting the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 after it has been cut off in order to change a setting value. Furthermore, even if the user does not notice that the setting value has been changed fraudulently, the subsequent power-on operation can make the user aware that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has been started fraudulently, and thus that the energization may have been changed, thereby preventing the setting value from being changed fraudulently.

In addition, when the power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process is completed, that is, when the power-on operation check is performed with the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the scale corresponding to the current volume or light amount (brightness) is not displayed on the performance display device 1600 even if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated until the power-on operation check is completed after the setting change process is completed. Also, since the scale corresponding to the current volume or light amount (brightness) is not displayed on the performance display device 1600, the scale does not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of part or all of the display of the performance mode (decorative pattern or background image in normal (playable state), etc.) on the performance display device 1600 from being obstructed by the scale corresponding to the current volume or light amount (brightness), and it becomes easy to determine whether the performance display device 1600 is normal as a power-on operation check.

On the other hand, when a power-on operation check is executed after the setting change process is completed, that is, when a power-on operation check is executed that involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), a special confirmation sound (such as a beep) different from the normal confirmation sound in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is output at a predetermined volume (a volume different from the volume set in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227) until the power-on operation check is completed after the setting change process is completed. However, although the normal confirmation sound is output at a volume changed by the volume adjustment button 227 (the volume of the confirmation sound changes by operating the volume adjustment button 227), the special confirmation sound output during the power-on operation check is output at a predetermined volume (the volume does not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 is operated). This makes it easy to determine whether the volume control button 227 and light control button 228 are normal when checking operation when the power is turned on, and the special confirmation sound is output, making it easy to understand that a process is being carried out to clear all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area (step S38).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 completes the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), and an interrupt permission setting (step S52) is performed, thereby making the ball launcher 540 ready to play and enabling it to launch game balls, and begins controlling the illumination of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400, which displays information regarding winning or losing, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250. In addition, it is sufficient that the LED of the function display unit 1400 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 are in a state where light emission can be controlled, and is not limited to a state where one or both of the LED of the function display unit 1400 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 are immediately lit in a predetermined manner based on the state where play is possible, and one or both of the LED of the function display unit 1400 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 may be lit in a light-emitting mode when the special pattern is displayed or in a light-emitting mode when a variable display is performed based on the start condition of the variable display being satisfied (a game ball has entered the start hole (the first start hole 2002 or one of the first start hole 2002 and the second start hole 2004)), or may be lit in a light-emitting mode when the special pattern is displayed or in a light-emitting mode when a variable display is performed after the light-emitting mode that notifies an abnormal state or the like has ended, or may be in a state where light emission can be controlled to the light-emitting mode when the special pattern is displayed or in a light-emitting mode when a special pattern is displayed or in a light-emitting mode when a special pattern is displayed.

In addition, the various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL are cleared by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 except for a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM when the main frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter (step S38), and the light emission state at the time of the power-on operation check and the operation state at the time of the power-on operation check are checked after the power-on operation check is completed. Based on the completion of the operation (which may be based on the completion of the light-emitting mode during power-on operation check if the operation mode during power-on operation check is configured to end earlier than the light-emitting mode during power-on operation check, or which may be based on the completion of the operation mode during power-on operation check if the operation mode during power-on operation check is configured to end later than the light-emitting mode during power-on operation check), the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR are controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality warning light-emitting mode, while the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL are controlled to be turned off. Then, when a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds, in this example which is longer than the period from when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts checking the power-on operation to when it ends) has elapsed after the main frame 4 is closed, the light emission control of the serious abnormality warning light emission mode of the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR and the light-off control of the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL are terminated, and the light emission can be controlled in a light emission mode corresponding to the game status (light emission mode during presentation), similar to the playable state. In addition, it is sufficient that the various LEDs of the door frame units (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL are brought into a state in which they can be controlled to emit light when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the main frame 4 is closed, and the various LEDs of the door frame units (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL are immediately turned on based on the elapse of a predetermined period of time since the main frame 4 is closed. The display may be limited to lighting up some or all of the various LEDs mounted on the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 mounted on the door frame 3), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board on the right game board 5AR, and some or all of the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board on the left game board 5AL. The display may be turned on in a lighting state during a variable performance based on the start condition of the variable display being met (a game ball entering the start hole (the first start hole 2002 or one of the first start hole 2002 and the second start hole 2004)). Alternatively, the display may be turned on in a lighting state during a variable performance after the lighting state that notifies an abnormal state or the like has ended, or the lighting state may be controlled to be the lighting state during the performance.

As described above, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a to perform the first ON operation, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met. In other words, the setting change process is executed with the main frame 4 open relative to the outer frame 2, and when the setting change process is terminated, the main frame 4 that was open relative to the outer frame 2 is closed.

In addition, in this example, when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 during normal play (playable state), a door-opening notification sound (announcement sound saying "The door is open" and a warning sound such as "ding dong") is repeatedly output from various speakers at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or a default volume adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds. Note that in this example, this is set to be shorter than the time required to check operation when the power is turned on), or the output is stopped when the main frame 4 that was opened relative to the outer frame 2 is closed (note that if the main frame 4 is continuously opened relative to the outer frame 2, the output may be stopped after a certain number of repeated outputs (e.g., five times), or the output may be stopped when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2). 2 is closed, or the output may be stopped when a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds, which may be shorter than the period from when the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the process of checking the power-on operation by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are started until both the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the process of checking the power-on operation by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are completed) has elapsed since the main frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, was closed. The various LEDs of the game board 5R, such as the play unit 450, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR are repeatedly controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (in this example, a mode in which the light is switched between being lit in red at maximum brightness and being turned off in a short period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (high-speed blinking mode)) to end the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode when a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds, in this example, which is longer than the period from the start of the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the start of the power-on operation check by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 to the end of both the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check) has elapsed since the main body frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, was closed. (The serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode may be terminated when the main body frame 4 that has been open relative to the outer frame 2 is closed, or the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode may be terminated when the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode is repeatedly executed a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) after the main body frame 4 that has been open relative to the outer frame 2 is closed, or the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode may be terminated when the main body frame 4 that has been open relative to the outer frame 2 is closed and the light emission is repeatedly controlled to a semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (a mode in which the light is switched between being turned on in red at maximum brightness and being turned off for a long period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) (slow blinking mode)), and the semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode may be terminated when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the light-emitting control of the semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode or when the light-emitting control is repeatedly executed a certain number of times (e.g., 10 times). ), and when the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (if the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode is changed to the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode, the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode) ends (when the main body frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, is closed), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left side game board 5AL are controlled to emit light in a light-emitting mode according to the game situation.

On the other hand, although the setting change process is executed with the main frame 4 open relative to the outer frame 2 during the setting change process, the output of door open notification sounds from the various speakers and the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 are not executed. In other words, if the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the output of door open notification sounds from the various speakers and the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 are not executed, and the setting change notification sounds are output from the various speakers and the light emission control of the setting change notification light-emitting mode is executed. In addition, in this example, even during the process (step S38) of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, which is executed after the setting change process is completed, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is executing a power-on operation check, the output of door opening alarm sounds from various speakers caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the emission control of the serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode when the light-emitting mode is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode) are prevented. Therefore, when the setting change process is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and after the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has finished checking the operation at power-on, it becomes possible to execute the output of door open alert sounds from various speakers caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the emission control of the serious abnormality alert light emission mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode).

In addition, when the setting change process is terminated after the main frame 4 that was open relative to the outer frame 2 is closed, that is, when the main frame 4 is closed while the setting change process is being executed and the main frame 4 continues to be closed thereafter, even after the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has completed the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has completed the power-on operation check, the output of door open alert sounds from the various speakers and the serious abnormality alert light emission mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode) caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 are not executed. However, when changing the setting value, the arcade manager or other person in charge of the game performs the operation to change the setting value while opening the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2 from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and therefore, after the setting change process is completed, an operation is performed to close the main frame 4 that was open against the outer frame 2.

In addition, when the time that has elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 reaches a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds; in this example, this is set to be shorter than the time required to check operation when the power is turned on), or when the main frame 4 that has been opened relative to the outer frame 2 is closed, the output of the door opening notification sound from the various speakers is stopped, and the state becomes one in which sound output during the performance (output of a performance sound that is performed when the start condition for the variable display is met (the game ball enters the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)) can be executed). Therefore, normally, when the setting change process is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area when the power is turned on. After the operation check is completed, if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has not reached a predetermined period, both the output of the door open notification sound from the various speakers due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light mode (including the semi-serious abnormality notification light mode when the light emission control is to be changed to the semi-serious abnormality notification light mode after the serious abnormality notification light mode) are executed, and if the main frame 4 that was open relative to the outer frame 2 is closed or if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has not reached a predetermined period, only the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light mode due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 is executed.

In this example, when the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR of the divided game board 5A are illuminated in a serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (including a semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode when the light-emitting control is performed to change to a semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL are turned off. This makes it easy for a visual observer to notice that an abnormality has occurred (in this case, the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2). In addition, the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode of the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR (when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode, the semi-serious abnormality alert light emitting mode may be included, or the semi-serious abnormality alert light emitting mode may not be included. In other words, when the light emission is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode, the LEDs of the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are also made to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode, and the light emission in the predetermined light emitting mode may be continued even when the light emission is controlled in the semi-serious abnormality alert light emitting mode, and when the light emission is controlled in the semi-serious abnormality alert light emitting mode, the LEDs of the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are also made to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode. The LEDs that are mounted on the decorative board on the left side of the game board 5AL may be controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode and controlled to emit light in a light emission mode (light emission mode during presentation) according to the game status, similar to the playable state. In synchronization with the light emission in the predetermined light emission mode, the LEDs that are controlled to emit light by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 among the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board on the left side of the game board 5AL may be made to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode in which the LEDs are lit in red (not flashing) with a predetermined brightness (which may be maximum brightness, or a brightness lower than maximum brightness, or which may be such that the light amount cannot be adjusted by the light amount adjustment button 228)) different from the serious abnormality notification light emission mode (including the semi-serious abnormality notification light emission mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality notification light emission mode after the serious abnormality notification light emission mode). In this case, the person who sees the light emission mode can easily notice that an abnormality has occurred.

The volume of the door-opening notification sound output from the various speakers due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 cannot be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227. As described above, the player can adjust the volume output from the various speakers by operating the volume adjustment button 227, but the volume of the door-opening notification sound output from the various speakers due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 cannot be adjusted by the player operating the volume adjustment button 227. Therefore, it is possible to output a door open notification sound at a predetermined volume due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, and even if the pachinko machine 1 is not being seen, the sound output from the various speakers can make the user aware that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2. Therefore, when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the user can be made aware immediately, and the occurrence of fraudulent acts such as illegally inserting game balls into the ball entry ports (starting ports (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), large prize entry port 2005, general prize entry port 2001, etc.) or replacing the board with an illegal one can be prevented.

In addition, the light intensity of the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (including the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode) that is controlled to emit light due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 cannot be adjusted by the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, the player can adjust the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A by operating the volume adjustment button, but the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (including the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode) that is caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 cannot be adjusted even if the player operates the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A are controlled to emit light at a predetermined light amount (brightness) so that a serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode can be performed, and even if the main frame 4 that was open relative to the outer frame 2 is closed, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A are controlled to emit light at a predetermined light amount (brightness) so that a serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode can be performed (a semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode when the light-emitting mode is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode) can be performed, and the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (a semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode is controlled to emit light). Since the light emitted by the external frame 2 (including a semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode in this case) can reliably notify that an abnormality has occurred with the outer frame 2 (in this case, the main frame 4 is open or the main frame 4 was open), if the main frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, it can immediately notify the player and prevent the occurrence of fraudulent acts such as illegally inserting game balls into the ball entry ports (starting ports (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), large prize entry port 2005, general prize entry port 2001, etc.) or replacing the board with an illegal one, and even if the player does not notice that the main frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, it can make the player aware that the main frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 and recognize the possibility that fraudulent acts have occurred.

When the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the performance display device 1600 displays a scale corresponding to the current volume and light amount (brightness) based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light amount adjustment button 228, but a confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light amount adjustment button 228 is not output. Therefore, when the volume adjustment button 227 or the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the light is controlled at the light amount (brightness) corresponding to the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 after the end of the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (if the light-emitting mode is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode), which is executed due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the sound is output at a volume corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 after the output of the door opening notification sound executed due to the main frame 4 being opened is stopped. This allows the volume and light intensity (brightness) in the variable presentation to be adjusted in advance without depriving the player of the opportunity to adjust the volume and light intensity (brightness) even when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2. It also prevents the door opening notification sound from becoming difficult to hear due to the confirmation sound made in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228. This allows a player to immediately notice when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, preventing the player from illegally entering through the ball entry port ((start port (first start port 2002, second start port 2004), large prize entry port 2005, general prize entry port 2006, etc.)). 2001, etc.) or replacing the board with an illegal one. This can prevent the occurrence of illegal acts. Note that when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the scale corresponding to the current volume or light amount (brightness) may not be displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light amount adjustment button 228. In this case, it is possible to prevent the display of the performance display device 1600 from being covered by the scale corresponding to the current volume or light amount (brightness), thereby preventing visibility from being hindered.

On the other hand, during the period when the setting change process is being executed, the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and the period when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is executing the power-on operation check, the output of the door open warning sound caused by the main body frame 4 being opened and the light emission control in the serious abnormality warning light mode (including the semi-serious abnormality warning light mode when the light emission control is to change to the semi-serious abnormality warning light mode after the serious abnormality warning light mode) are not executed. This makes it possible to immediately notice if the setting change process is being executed illegally or if the setting value is changed illegally and the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area is executed, improving security.

In addition, in this example, light emission control of the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode is started based on the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and the period from closing the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, to ending the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (or the semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) is longer than the period during which the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 perform a power-on operation check. Therefore, when the setting change process is completed, the main frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 is closed, and then the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area and the period during which the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the power-on operation check are completed. Then, the various LEDs of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the plate unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right side game board 5AR are cleared. The ED is controlled to emit light by switching from the RAM clear notification mode to the serious abnormality notification light mode (semi-serious abnormality notification light mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality notification light mode after the serious abnormality notification light mode), and then, when the period from when the main body frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, is closed reaches a predetermined specified period, the serious abnormality notification light mode (semi-serious abnormality notification light mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality notification light mode after the serious abnormality notification light mode) is ended and light emission control in the playable state (light emission mode during presentation) is started. In this way, by continuing the light emission control in the serious abnormality notification light mode (semi-serious abnormality notification light mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality notification light mode after the serious abnormality notification light mode) even after the setting change process has been executed and the game is ready to play, it is possible to prevent the serious abnormality notification light mode (semi-serious abnormality notification light mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality notification light mode after the serious abnormality notification light mode) from being overlooked if the main frame 4 is illegally opened relative to the outer frame 2, thereby improving security. In this case, the LEDs of the functional display unit 1400 and the LEDs of the sub-functional display unit 2250, which are not controlled to emit light in the serious abnormality notification light mode (semi-serious abnormality notification light mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality notification light mode after the serious abnormality notification light mode) even when the game is ready to play, are in a state where they can be controlled to emit light. However, they are not limited to lighting one or both of the LEDs of the functional display unit 1400 and the LEDs of the sub-functional display unit 2250, or a part or all of them, when the game is ready to play, and may be kept in an off state or a predetermined lighting state until the start condition of the variable display is met (a game ball enters the start hole (the first start hole 2002 or one of the first start hole 2002 and the second start hole 2004)), and may be controlled to emit light in a predetermined lighting state based on the start condition of the variable display being met.

[Changing the setting value when non-compliance occurs]
Next, an example of behavior when changing the setting value when the combination of the split game board 5A (i.e., the combination of the right game board 5AR (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left game board 5AL (peripheral control board 1510 and main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) is in an incompatible (mismatched) state (mismatched state) will be described with reference to FIG. 274. Note that only the parts that differ from when it is compatible will be described below, and no duplicate explanations will be given.

As shown in FIG. 274, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not output a control signal to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR, and the electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR are set to a non-driven state (for example, the various LEDs are turned off) regardless of whether or not a setting change is being made.

In addition, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the fact that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible is not notified until the setting change process is completed (until the setting change command is received from the main control MPU 1310a). In other words, during the setting change process, the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the plate unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided in the door frame 3) are controlled in the same manner as when the setting change process was executed at the time of compatibility (which may be completely the same, or almost all of them may be the same with only some differences).

Then, when the setting change process is completed, the main control MPU 1310a sends a setting change command to the peripheral control board 1510 and starts a process (step S38) of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, that is, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts a process (step S38) of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, it controls various speakers and various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, door frame top unit 450, etc. provided on the door frame 3) to the main when appropriate. The control is performed in the same manner as when the process of clearing the internal control RAM (step S38) was executed (this may be completely the same, or it may be almost entirely the same with only some differences), while the performance display device 1600 does not display decorative patterns or background images used in normal times (when playable), but displays an abnormal background image (e.g., black) and the performance display device 1600 displays "Right side game board incompatibility error occurred" as an incompatibility error notification display mode, to notify the user that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible.

The incompatibility error notification display mode in the performance display device 1600 continues until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and even if the variable display of the special pattern is started based on the fact that the start condition for the variable display is satisfied (the game ball enters the start port (the first start port 2002 or either the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004)), the performance display device 1600 does not perform a variable display such as a variable display of a decorative pattern. Furthermore, the incompatibility error notification display mode in the performance display device 1600 may be one that corresponds to the content of the error, and may be one or any combination of letters, numbers (e.g., error codes), marks, etc.

In addition, in the power-on operation check that is performed in parallel with the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), not only is the power-on operation check not performed for the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., that are provided on the right side game board 5AR that has been determined to be incompatible and that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, but also for the movable body that performs the power-on operation check (the rear upper part of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the divided game board 5A) When power is turned on, no operation check is performed on the drive motors and drive solenoids that are provided on door frame units that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) (such as the movable decorative body 3210, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear lower front performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3).

Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), even if the power-on operation check is started, the LEDs on the right game board 5AR determined to be incompatible are not controlled to light up in the light emission mode during the power-on operation check, or the movable body is not controlled to operate in the operation mode during the power-on operation check (no control signal is output to the right game board 5AR), or cannot be controlled to operate (a control signal is output but not input to the right game board 5AR). In addition, the drive motor and drive solenoid on the plate unit 200 (in this example, the performance operation unit 300) that is provided on the door frame 3 and is not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) are not driven to operate the performance operation unit 301 provided on the performance operation unit 300.

In other words, if the right-side game board 5AR is in an incompatible state, there is a risk that some or all of the movable bodies provided on the door frame unit that is not the subject of ID determination will also be determined to be incompatible, and when a control signal is input from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, there is a risk that the movable bodies will operate in a manner different from the intended operating mode. Therefore, some or all of the movable bodies provided on the right-side game board 5AR determined to be incompatible or on the door frame unit that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) and operated by the drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not be driven, thereby preventing the movable bodies from operating in a manner different from the intended operating mode, which would damage the movable bodies or door frame unit, or prevent the drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. that operate the movable bodies from breaking down. As described above, the game board side components may be configured to include the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit among the door frame units. In this case, the specific door frame unit is subject to ID determination, and if it is determined to be incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), some or all of the movable bodies operated by the drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. provided in the door frame unit not subject to ID determination (non-specific door frame unit) and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven. In addition to this, or separately, a specific door frame unit may be configured to be multiple (for example, the right door frame In some cases, if a part (for example, one of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top unit 450) is determined to be incompatible, all of the movable bodies operated by the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., provided on the specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be prevented from being driven, or all of the movable bodies operated by the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., provided on all door frame units including the specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be prevented from being driven.

On the other hand, the movable bodies (such as the rear upper movable decoration 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear left movable decoration 3301 and the rear right movable decoration 3302, the rear front lower middle decoration 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, etc.) provided on the left side game board 5AL equipped with the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a that executes the ID determination process (step S1003) are mounted, operate in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the split game board 5A is determined to be compatible) when operation check begins at power-on. In addition, the LEDs mounted on the boards of the movable bodies provided on the left side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160) are not controlled to emit light in the light emission mode when the power is turned on to check operation. That is, when the right side game board 5AR is determined to be in an incompatible state in the ID determination process (step S1003), the movable body provided on the left side game board 5AL (the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, etc.) is operated in the operating mode at the time of power-on operation confirmation, but the LED provided on the movable body provided on the left side game board 5AL is not controlled to emit light in the light emission mode at the time of power-on operation confirmation, and is operated in the operating mode at the time of power-on operation confirmation in the turned-off state. This makes it easy to identify the game board (in this case, the left side game board 5AL) on which the peripheral control board 1510 of the divided game board 5A is provided.

In addition, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible, no control is performed to drive the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the board provided in the presentation operation unit 300 of the door frame unit (in this example, the tray unit 200) that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) to operate the presentation operation unit 301, but the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the presentation operation unit 300 are controlled in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the split game board 5A is determined to be compatible) during the power-on operation check. That is, when the power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light in the light emission mode at the time of power-on operation check, as in the case where the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be compatible. Note that the performance operation unit 300 may be a specific door frame unit that is the subject of ID determination, and even in this case, if the combination of a specific door frame unit other than the performance operation unit 300 or the divided game board 5A is determined to be incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the drive motor and drive solenoid mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are not driven to operate the performance operation unit 301, while the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 may be controlled to emit light in the light emission mode at the time of power-on operation check.

In addition, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, the LEDs mounted on some of the multiple LEDs mounted on the multiple boards provided in the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), or some of the multiple LEDs mounted on one board, may not be controlled to emit light in the light emission mode at the time of power-on operation check (for example, power-on operation check may not be performed for some or all of the LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided in the door frame unit and the drive motor, drive solenoid, LEDs, etc. provided on the movable body provided in the door frame unit).

In addition, if the combination of the split game board 5A is determined to be incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the right game board 5AR determined to be incompatible and some or all of the movable bodies operated by the drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. provided in the door frame unit not subject to ID determination and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or until the combination of the split game board 5A is determined to be compatible, not limited to the power-on operation check. In this case, it is possible to prevent the movable body from operating in a different operating mode from the original operating mode, which may damage the movable body or door frame unit, or the drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. that operates the movable body from breaking down.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and the power-on operation check by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is completed (the light-emitting mode during the power-on operation check by the LED ends and is turned off or turned on in a specified light-emitting mode, and the operation mode of the movable body during the power-on operation check ends and is in a standby state (a state in which it is stopped (housed) in a predetermined standby position), thereby completing the power-on operation check. Note that if the operation mode during the power-on operation check is more stable than the light-emitting mode during the power-on operation check, If configured to end earlier, the power-on operation check ends with the end of the light-emitting mode during the power-on operation check, and if configured to end later in time for the operation mode during the power-on operation check than the light-emitting mode during the power-on operation check, the power-on operation check ends with the end of the operation mode during the power-on operation check (the movable body operates in the operation mode during the power-on operation check and then stops (is stored) in the standby position). When the game is ready to play, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sounds a game board incompatibility alert sound ("An error has occurred in the right-side game board incompatibility. Please turn off the power and check. " and a warning sound such as "ding-dong" (ring-dong)) are repeatedly output from various speakers at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or may be a default volume adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (the output may be stopped after being repeatedly output a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds)), and various LEDs (which may be only some or all of the LEDs) of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the plate unit 200, the door frame top unit 450, etc. provided on the door frame 3) are turned on. The LEDs on the left side of the left game board 5AL are repeatedly controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (in this example, a mode in which the LEDs are switched between maximum brightness red lighting and extinguishment in a short period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (high-speed flashing mode)), and various LEDs mounted on a decorative board provided on the left side game board 5AL are controlled to an extinguished state, while the LEDs on the function display unit 1400 provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the LEDs on the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are brought into a state in which they can be controlled to emit light in the same way as when they are compatible (they may be lit in a specified mode). Also, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to continue displaying the non-compatible error notification display mode.

In this way, in this example, when the combination of the split game board 5A is determined to be incompatible (mismatched) by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 in the ID determination process (step S1003), when the setting value is changed, when the game becomes playable after the setting change process is completed, the game board immediately notifies the player that the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible without notifying the player that the main frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2. In other words, when the setting change process is completed and the game becomes playable, the game board incompatible notification sound is output without outputting the door open notification sound, regardless of whether the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has reached a predetermined period. In addition, when the setting change process is completed and the game becomes playable, the game board is controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality notification mode, but this is not due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, but is due to the combination of the split game board 5A being incompatible. Therefore, when the setting change process is completed and the machine is ready to play, the light emission is always controlled to the serious abnormality notification light emission mode regardless of whether a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the main body frame 4 was closed.

In addition, when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), even if the condition for starting the variable display is met (when the game ball enters the start hole (the first start hole 2002 or either the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004), the display is not displayed by the performance display device 1600, various speakers, various LEDs of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the plate unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., which are provided in the door frame 3), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left game board 5AL. The LEDs mounted on the controlled decorative board are not used to perform the variable effects, but instead notify the user that an abnormality has occurred. On the other hand, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 are controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode when the conditions for starting the variable display are met (a game ball enters the start port (first start port 2002 or either the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004)) after the power-on operation check is completed and the game becomes playable, making it possible to display information about the winning or losing result.

In addition, the volume of the game board incompatibility notification sound output from the various speakers cannot be adjusted by the volume adjustment button 227. As described above, the player can adjust the volume output from the various speakers by operating the volume adjustment button 227, but the volume of the game board incompatibility notification sound output when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent) cannot be adjusted by the player even if the player operates the volume adjustment button 227. Therefore, when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent), the game board incompatibility notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume, and the sound output from the various speakers can reliably inform the player that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent), preventing the player from being disadvantaged or the game from progressing in a manner unintended by the designer.

In addition, when the game board incompatibility notification sound is output, the light amount (brightness) cannot be adjusted by the light amount adjustment button 228. As described above, the player can adjust the light amount of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A by operating the light amount adjustment button 228, but the light amount (brightness) of the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode, which is controlled to emit light when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), cannot be adjusted even if the player operates the light amount adjustment button 228. Therefore, when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), the light amount can be controlled to emit light in the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode with a predetermined light amount (brightness), and the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode can reliably inform the player that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), which prevents the player from being disadvantaged or the game from proceeding in a manner unintended by the designer.

In addition, when the game board incompatibility notification sound is being output, the performance display device 1600 does not display scales corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated. Also, because the performance display device 1600 does not display scales corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), the scales do not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the scales corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) from interfering with the visibility of part or all of the incompatibility error notification display mode displayed on the performance display device 1600, and it is possible to reliably communicate that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent).

In addition, when the game board incompatibility notification sound is being output, the confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is also not output. This prevents the game board incompatibility notification sound from becoming difficult to hear due to the confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228, and can reliably communicate that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent).

In addition, even if the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be incompatible (inconsistent) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 that display information regarding whether the game has been won or lost are not turned off, but are controlled to emit light in the same way as in the normal playable state. In other words, by informing the player that play should not begin if the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent), it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged or the game proceeding in a manner that the designer did not intend, while, if play begins when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent), the light emission of the LEDs that display information regarding winning or losing is controlled to allow the game to proceed without causing any disadvantage to the player.

In addition, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be incompatible (mismatched) by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 in the ID determination process (step S1003), the LED of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will be displayed. It is sufficient that at least one of the LEDs that display the information to be played is controlled to emit light in the same way as in the normal playable state; for example, the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be turned off or lit in a light emission mode unrelated to the establishment of the start condition without being subjected to light emission control even when the start condition is established (a game ball enters the start hole (the first start hole 2002 or one of the first start hole 2002 and the second start hole 2004)).

In addition, in this example, even if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the timing of the light emission control in the serious abnormality notification light emission mode corresponding to the incompatible (mismatched) state of the combination of the divided game boards 5A and the timing of the output of the game board incompatible notification sound differ depending on whether or not the setting value is changed and whether or not a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (a specified area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area)).

Specifically, if neither the setting change of the set value nor the process of clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)) is performed, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent), the performance display device 1600 will display "power on" for a predetermined period of time based on the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1, and then when the power-on operation check begins, the various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) will start to emit serious abnormality notification light, and the various speakers will start to output game board incompatibility notification sounds.

On the other hand, when executing either a change in the setting of the set value or a process of clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)), if the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (step S38) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs a process of clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (step S39). During the power-on operation check by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 200 provided in the door frame 3) is performed. Instead of starting the light emission control in a serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode by the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame unit 450, etc., or the output of the game board non-conformity alert sound by the various speakers, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 finishes checking the operation at power-on. Then, the light emission control in a serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode by the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame unit and the output of the game board non-conformity alert sound by the various speakers are started in response to the fact that the right side game board 5AR is in a non-conformity state.

In this way, even if the combination of the split game board 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the timing of the light emission control in the serious abnormality notification light emission mode corresponding to the right side game board 5AR being in an incompatible state and the timing of the output of the game board incompatible notification sound can be made different depending on whether or not the setting value is changed and whether or not a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (a specified area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)), thereby prioritizing the notification of information of high importance and preventing malfunctions and fraudulent behavior from occurring. In other words, since there is a risk of damage to the gaming establishment if the setting values are changed illegally or the main control built-in RAM is cleared illegally, the system is designed to prevent the damage from spreading by notifying the user that the setting values have been changed illegally or that the main control built-in RAM has been cleared in priority over notifying the user that the combination of the split gaming board 5A is in an incompatible (inconsistent) state.

In addition, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be incompatible (inconsistent) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the timing of displaying the background image in the event of an abnormality (e.g., black) on the performance display device 1600 and the incompatibility error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600 is the same regardless of whether or not the setting value is changed and whether or not a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (a specified area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area)). That is, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts checking the operation at power-on, and the background image (e.g., black) in the event of an abnormality and the display mode of the incompatibility error notification are displayed on the performance display device 1600. This allows the performance display device 1600 to notify and deal with other notifications while giving priority to notifications of high importance. In addition, the display timing of the background image (e.g., black) in the event of an abnormality on the performance display device 1600 and the display mode of the incompatibility error notification on the performance display device 1600 may be made different depending on whether or not the setting value is changed, and whether or not the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)). In this case, the information of high importance can be notified in order and dealt with in sequence, so that each piece of information can be reliably conveyed and dealt with.

In addition, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the split game board 5A is set to a compatible (matched) state, and after the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not execute the ID determination process (step S1003).Therefore, even if the combination of the split game board 5AR becomes incompatible (incompatible) after execution of the ID determination process (step S1003), no notification (game board incompatible notification sound, incompatible error notification display mode, serious abnormality notification light emission mode, etc.) corresponding to the right side game board 5AR being in a non-compatible state is executed. Therefore, at least the LEDs (such as the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3) and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250) that are provided in the areas other than the right side game board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the drive motor and drive solenoid controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a, the performance display device 1600, various speakers, etc. are controlled in the same manner as when the right side game board 5AR is adapted. Also, a control signal is output from the peripheral control board 1510 assuming that a right side game board 5AR having a regular ID is provided, and the LEDs, drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. provided on the divided game board 5AR are driven based on the control signal. However, if the layout configuration of the incompatible split game board 5AR and the compatible right side game board 5AR differs, the LEDs, drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., provided on the incompatible split game board 5AR may operate in a manner different from the design (a manner different from the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., provided on the right side game board 5AR having a valid ID, decorative board, decorative body, etc., and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be incompatible (inconsistent) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, even if there is detection by an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball cut detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, or other sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the setting change process, the detection is invalid (it may be that a process for checking whether or not there is a detection is not executed, or a process for checking whether or not there is a detection is executed but a process (such as an alert) based on the detection is not executed).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 275, even if an unauthorized magnetic field is generated during the setting change process and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of the unauthorized magnetic field. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game board 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during execution of the setting change process, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored (it may be that the input of the detection signal is not confirmed, or that even if the input of the detection signal is confirmed, processing based on the input is not executed), and control is executed as if the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 was not input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 after the setting change process is completed.

In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game board 5A is in a state of incompatibility (mismatch) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 judges that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatibility in the ID judgment process (step S1003), and when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball cut detection sensor 574, door frame opening switch, etc.) during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed, that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the power-on operation check that involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the detection of the abnormality detection means is also invalidated (it may be that the process of checking whether or not there is a detection is not executed, or that the process of checking whether or not there is a detection is executed but the process (notification, etc.) based on the detection is not executed).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 276, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be incompatible (inconsistent) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of an illegal magnetism. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game board 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control continues as if the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is in a state of incompatibility (mismatch) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 judges that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatibility in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, door frame opening switch, etc., which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the playable state after the power-on operation check is completed, the detection of the abnormality detection means is invalidated (it may be that the process of checking whether or not there is a detection is not executed, or that the process of checking whether or not there is a detection is executed but the process (alert, etc.) based on the detection is not executed).

Specifically, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be incompatible (inconsistent) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during a playable state after the power-on operation check is completed, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of an illegal magnetism. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is in a mismatched (inconsistent) state and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during a playable state after the power-on operation check is completed, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control continues as if the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

In this way, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, no abnormality notification is issued even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, sensors and switches such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, and door frame opening switch, which input a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310).

In other words, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, the game may proceed in a manner not intended by the designer, which may cause disadvantages to the game establishment and the player, and in the first place, the game may differ from the original specifications, which may cause the player to lose trust, so it is necessary to ensure that the game is stopped. Therefore, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, the game is prevented from being played by issuing a warning in priority to a warning resulting from detection of an abnormality by the abnormality detection means (for example, sensors and switches such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, and door frame opening switch, which input a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), thereby preventing the occurrence of disadvantages to the game establishment and the player.

In addition, some of the LEDs may be controlled to emit light in different ways depending on the type of abnormality detection means. For example, when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, one or both of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 may be turned off (putting them into a state in which light emission control is not possible).

In addition, the system is not limited to determining whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, but may be configured so that the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 periodically (e.g., constantly determining each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed) determines whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started. In this case, it is possible to notify the user that the combination of the split game boards 5A has become incompatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, thereby preventing the occurrence of disadvantages.

Even if an ID determination process is periodically executed to determine whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, the ID determination process may not be executed while the setting change process is being executed, and even if the ID determination process is executed while the setting change process is being executed and it is determined that the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible, no notification may be issued in response to the right game board 5AR being in an incompatible state while the setting change process is being executed.

Furthermore, when an ID determination process is executed periodically to determine whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, a notification (game board incompatible notification sound, incompatible error notification display mode, serious abnormality notification light emission mode, etc.) corresponding to the right side game board 5AR being in an incompatible state may be started based on the determination that the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible, and then the notification corresponding to the right side game board 5AR being in an incompatible state may be terminated based on the determination that the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, or a notification corresponding to the right side game board 5AR being in an incompatible state may be started based on the determination that the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible after the ID determination process has determined that the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible.

In addition, if the device is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, when the ID determination process is executed during the power-on operation check after the setting change process or before the setting change process is started and it is determined that the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible, a display is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to inform the user that the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible during the power-on operation check, just as in the case where the compatibility of the combination of the split game board 5A is determined only when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, while each The various LEDs of the seed speakers and door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may be configured to output a game board incompatibility notification sound and light up a serious abnormality notification light mode to notify that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, but may be configured to output a game board incompatibility notification sound and light up a serious abnormality notification light mode to notify that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible when the game becomes playable after the operation check at power-on.

In addition, even if the configuration is such that the combination of the divided game board 5A is periodically judged to be compatible, even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a bulb out detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, or other sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the execution of the setting change process, the detection is invalid (it may be possible to not execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection, or to execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection), and an abnormality alert based on the detection by the abnormality detection means may not be executed even after the setting change process.

In addition, when the combination of the split game boards 5A is periodically determined to be compatible, if the combination of the split game boards 5A is determined to be incompatible during the power-on operation check after the setting change process, and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.), the notification that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible may be given priority over the notification that the abnormality detection means has detected the combination, and if the combination of the split game boards 5A is determined to be compatible, the notification that the abnormality detection means has detected the combination may be given.

[Changing the settings when not connected]
Next, an example of behavior when changing the setting value in an unconnected state (unconnected state) where there is no input of an ID code signal from the right side game board 5AR (the input of an ID code signal from the right side game board 5AR cannot be confirmed) and a malfunction such as a short circuit or disconnection occurs in the transmission path that transmits various signals and the connection cannot be confirmed will be described with reference to Fig. 277. Note that only the parts that differ from the compatible and non-compatible states will be described below, and duplicate explanations will not be provided.

As shown in FIG. 277, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR in the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, that is, if the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, the control signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is not input to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board of the right-side game board 5AR, so that the electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR are in a non-driven state (for example, the various LEDs are turned off) regardless of whether the setting is being changed or not. Note that, if it is determined in the ID determination process (step S1003) that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not output a control signal to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR.

In addition, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, it is not notified that the right-side game board 5AR is not connected until the setting change process is completed. In other words, during the execution of the setting change process, the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided in the door frame 3) are controlled in the same manner as when the setting change process was executed at the time of adaptation (which may be completely the same, or almost all may be the same with only some differences).

Then, when the setting change process is completed and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the various speakers and the various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200 and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) in the same manner as when the process of clearing the main control built-in RAM (step S38) was executed upon adaptation (which may be completely the same, or almost entirely the same with only some areas different). In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 not only displays the appearance during the performance (normal time) (decorative patterns and background images during normal times (when playable), etc.) on the performance display device 1600 as in the case of compatibility, but also displays "Right side game board unconnected error occurred" as an unconnection error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600 to notify that the connection of the split game board 5A cannot be confirmed.

The unconnected error notification display mode in the performance display device 1600 continues until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, but when the variable display of the special pattern is started based on the fact that the start condition for the variable display is satisfied (the game ball enters the start port (the first start port 2002 or either the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004)), the variable display such as the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed with the unconnected error notification display mode displayed in the performance display device 1600. The unconnected error notification display mode in the performance display device 1600 may be any mode that corresponds to the error content, and may be a combination of letters and numbers (for example, an error code) or a mark, etc.

In addition, in the power-on operation check that is performed in parallel with the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), not only is the power-on operation check not performed for the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., that are provided on the right game board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 that are determined to be in an unconnected state, but also for the movable body that performs the power-on operation check (the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the split game board 5A). For the drive motors and drive solenoids that are provided in door frame units that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear lower front performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3), no operation check is performed when power is turned on. As described above, the game board side components may be configured to include the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit among the door frame units. In this case, the specific door frame unit is the subject of ID determination. If it is determined in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the specific door frame unit is in an unconnected state, some or all of the movable bodies operated by the drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. provided in the door frame unit not subject to ID determination (non-specific door frame unit) and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven. In addition to this, or separately from this, a specific door frame unit may be configured to be multiple (for example, the right door frame When it is determined that a part (for example, one of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top unit 450) is not connected, all of the movable bodies operated by the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., provided in the specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven, or all of the movable bodies operated by the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., provided in all door frame units including the specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven.

Specifically, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right side game board 5AR is not connected, even when the power-on operation check is started, the control to light the LED provided on the right side game board 5AR that is determined to be not connected in the light emission mode at the time of the power-on operation check is not performed (no control signal is output to the right side game board 5AR) or the control to operate the movable body in the operation mode at the time of the power-on operation check is not performed (a control signal is output to the right side game board 5AR), or cannot be performed (a control signal is output but not input to the right side game board 5AR). In addition, the control to drive the drive motor or drive solenoid provided on the plate unit 200 (in this example, the performance operation unit 300) that is provided on the door frame 3 and is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) to operate the performance operation unit 301 provided on the performance operation unit 300 is not performed.

In other words, when the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, there is a risk that some or all of the movable bodies provided in the door frame unit that is not the subject of ID determination may also have poor connection, and the control signal output from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be changed to a signal different from the original due to noise, etc., and input, causing the movable bodies to operate in an abnormal manner. Therefore, in the ID determination process (step S1003), some or all of the movable bodies provided in the door frame unit that is not the subject of ID determination and operated by the drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are not driven, thereby preventing the movable bodies from operating in an operating mode different from the original one, which could damage the movable bodies or door frame unit, or prevent the drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. that operates the movable bodies from breaking down.

On the other hand, the movable bodies (such as the rear upper movable decoration 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear left movable decoration 3301 and the rear right movable decoration 3302, the rear front lower middle decoration 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, etc.) provided on the left side game board 5AL equipped with the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a that executes the ID determination process (step S1003) are mounted, operate in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the split game board 5A is determined to be compatible) when operation check begins at power-on. In addition, the LEDs mounted on the boards provided on the movable bodies provided on the left side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160) are controlled to emit light in the light emission mode when operation is confirmed when the power is turned on. That is, when the right side game board 5AR is determined to be in an unconnected state in the ID determination process (step S1003), as in the normal case (when the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be compatible), the movable bodies provided on the left side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160) are operated in the operating mode at the time of power-on operation confirmation, and the LED provided on the movable body provided on the left side game board 5AL is controlled to emit light in the light emission mode at the time of power-on operation confirmation. This makes it easy to identify the game board (in this case, the left side game board 5AL) on which the peripheral control board 1510 of the divided game board 5A is provided.

In addition, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right side game board 5AR is not connected, no control is performed to drive the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame unit (in this example, the tray unit 200) that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) to operate the performance operation unit 301, but the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are controlled in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the split game board 5A is determined to be compatible) during the power-on operation check. In other words, when a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light in the light emission mode during the power-on operation check, just as if the combination of the split game board 5A was determined to be compatible.

In addition, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, the LEDs mounted on some of the boards among the multiple LEDs mounted on the multiple boards provided in the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), or some of the multiple LEDs mounted on one board, may not be controlled to emit light in the light emission mode at the time of power-on operation check (for example, power-on operation check may not be performed for some or all of the LEDs provided on the decorative board provided in the door frame unit and the drive motor, drive solenoid, LEDs, etc. provided on the movable body provided in the door frame unit).

In addition, if it is determined in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the split game board 5A is not connected, the right game board 5AR, which is determined to be not connected not only during the power-on operation check but also until the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and some or all of the movable bodies operated by the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in the door frame units that are not subject to ID determination and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, may not be driven. In this case, it is possible to prevent the movable bodies from operating in a manner different from their original operating mode, which could damage the movable bodies or door frame units, or prevent the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable bodies from breaking down.

In addition, if the main body frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and the main body frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 completes the power-on operation check (the LED's light emission mode during power-on operation check ends and the LED is turned off or turned on in a predetermined light emission mode, and the movable body's operation mode during power-on operation check ends and the movable body is in a standby state (stopped (housed) in a predetermined standby position). When the operation mode during power-on operation check is configured to end earlier than the light emission mode during power-on operation check, the power-on operation check ends with the end of the light emission mode during power-on operation check, whereas when the operation mode during power-on operation check is configured to end later than the light emission mode during power-on operation check, the power-on operation check ends with the end of the operation mode during power-on operation check (the movable body operates in the operation mode during power-on operation check and then stops (is accommodated) in the standby position). The side control IC 1510a repeatedly outputs a game board unconnection notification sound (an announcement voice saying "The right side game board is not connected" and a warning sound such as "ding dong") from various speakers at a volume adjusted by the volume adjustment button 227 until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (the output may be stopped after being repeatedly output a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds)), and also double-lights various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the plate unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3). The light is repeatedly controlled to the major abnormality notification light mode (semi-major abnormality notification light mode when the light is controlled to the semi-major abnormality notification light mode after the major abnormality notification light mode), and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left side game board 5AL are controlled to an off state, while the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are made in a state where they can be controlled to emit light in the same way as when they were matched (they may be lit in a specified mode). Also, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to continue displaying the unconnected error notification display mode.

In addition, the serious abnormality warning light-emitting mode (or the semi-serious abnormality warning light-emitting mode if the light-emitting control is changed to the semi-serious abnormality warning light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality warning light-emitting mode) of the various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) which are controlled to emit light due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 continues until a predetermined period (e.g. 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, was closed. In this example, the period from when the main frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 is closed to when the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light emission mode is terminated is set to a period longer than the period required to perform the power-on operation check, so when the main frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed, regardless of whether the main frame 4 continues to be closed or not, when the game becomes playable, the light emission control is performed to the serious abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened to the outer frame 2, without the light emission control to the minor abnormality notification light emission mode (a mode in which the white light of maximum brightness is switched on and off in a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (high-speed blinking mode)) caused by the right side game board 5AR not being connected. Also, when a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 was closed, the light emission control is changed to the minor abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the right side game board 5AR not being connected, and the light emission control is continued to the minor abnormality notification light emission mode until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

In addition, the period from when the main body frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed to when the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode is terminated may be set to a period shorter than the period required to perform the power-on operation check. In this case, if the main body frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and the main body frame 4 remains closed thereafter, when the game becomes playable, the light emission can be controlled to a minor abnormality notification light-emitting mode caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being connected, rather than to a serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode caused by the main body frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2. Even in this case, when the main frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and then opened again to become playable, if the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened from the outer frame 2 does not reach a predetermined period, the light emission is controlled to a minor abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the right side game board 5AR not being connected, but a major abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened from the outer frame 2, and when a predetermined period (e.g. 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4 that was open from the outer frame 2 was closed, the light emission is changed to a minor abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the right side game board 5AR not being connected, and is controlled to emit light.

In addition, in this example, even if the light emission control of the minor abnormality notification light-emitting mode and the output of the game board unconnected notification sound caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being connected are being executed, when the main frame 4 that was closed to the outer frame 2 is opened, the notification caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being connected (light emission control of the minor abnormality notification light-emitting mode and output of the game board unconnected notification sound) is terminated and a notification caused by the main frame 4 being opened to the outer frame 2 (light emission control of the major abnormality notification light-emitting mode and output of the door open notification sound) is executed, and when a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened from the outer frame 2, the output of the door open notification sound is stopped and the output of the game board unconnected notification sound is started again, and when a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 was closed, the light emission control of the major abnormality notification light-emitting mode is terminated and the light emission control of the minor abnormality notification light-emitting mode is started again. In this way, the notification that the main frame 4 is open takes priority over the notification that the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, which helps prevent fraudulent activity.

In addition, in this example, the output period of the door open notification sound is shorter than the period required to confirm operation when the power is turned on, so if the main body frame 4 is opened at the start of the setting change process and closed at the end of the setting change process, and the main body frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the door open notification sound is not output, and instead a game board unconnected notification sound is output. In addition, the output period of the door open alarm sound may be made longer than the time required to confirm operation when powered on. In the case where the main body frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and the main body frame 4 remains closed thereafter, or in the case where the output period of the door open alarm sound is made shorter than the time required to confirm operation when powered on but the main body frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and then opened again, if the time elapsed since the main body frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 when the game is ready to play has not reached a predetermined period, the door open alarm sound may be output, and a game board unconnected alarm sound may be output based on the time elapsed since the main body frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 having reached a predetermined period. Alternatively, in the case where the main body frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 when the game is ready to play, regardless of whether the time elapsed since the main body frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has reached a predetermined period, the door open alarm sound may be output, and a game board unconnected alarm sound may be output. Also, if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 when the game becomes playable, or if the time that has elapsed since the main frame 4 that was open relative to the outer frame 2 was closed has not yet reached a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds), even if the time that has elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has reached a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds), the game board unconnected notification sound may not be output until the main frame 4 is closed or until the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 is terminated.

In this way, in this example, the setting value is changed in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the various speakers will issue an abnormality alert in response to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state, while the various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) will issue an abnormality alert in response to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2. In other words, abnormality alerts are issued for the various speakers, the various LEDs of the door frame unit, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR, but the causes of the abnormality are different (for the various speakers, an abnormality alert is issued due to a disconnection, and for the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR, an abnormality alert is issued due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2).

The game board unconnection notification sound output from the various speakers when the right side game board 5AR is not connected can be adjusted in volume using the volume adjustment button 227, unlike the setting change notification sound, RAM clear notification sound, door open notification sound, and game board incompatibility notification sound. In other words, when the right side game board 5AR is not connected, there is little risk of causing a disadvantage to the player or the game establishment, and no emergency is required, so the volume can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227. The game board unconnection notification sound output from the various speakers when the right side game board 5AR is not connected may also be made unable to be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227, in which case the game board unconnection notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume, which can reliably inform the player that the right side game board 5AR is not connected, thereby preventing the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, during the period when the light emission is controlled to the minor abnormality notification light emission mode due to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state, it is not possible to adjust the light amount (brightness) using the light amount adjustment button 228. As described above, the player can adjust the light amount (brightness) of some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A by operating the light amount adjustment button 228, but the minor abnormality notification light emission mode that is performed due to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state cannot be adjusted even if the player operates the light amount adjustment button 228. Therefore, when the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A are controlled to emit light at a predetermined light quantity (brightness), enabling a minor abnormality notification light-emitting mode to be performed. The minor abnormality notification light-emitting mode can inform the player that some abnormality has occurred, allowing the player to visually check the divided game board 5A and realize that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, preventing the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, when the game board unconnected notification sound is output, the performance display device 1600 displays a scale corresponding to the current volume or light amount (brightness) in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light amount adjustment button 228. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light amount adjustment button 228 is valid, and the displayed scale allows the player to know the level of the volume or light amount (brightness). In addition, as described above, the light amount (brightness) cannot be adjusted by the light amount adjustment button 228 in the minor abnormality notification light-emitting mode, but even if the light is controlled to the notification light-emitting mode for security purposes, it is possible to prevent the opportunity to adjust the light amount (brightness) from being taken away. In addition, even if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated when the game board unconnected notification sound is output, the performance display device 1600 may not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light amount (brightness).

In addition, when the game board unconnected notification sound is output, a confirmation sound is also output in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228. Therefore, the confirmation sound in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 can make the player recognize that the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 is valid, and the volume of the confirmation sound can be understood after the operation of the volume adjustment button 227. Note that it is also possible not to output the confirmation sound in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 even if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 is operated when the game board unconnected notification sound is output.

As described above, the light intensity of the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (including the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode) that is controlled to emit light due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 cannot be adjusted by the light intensity adjustment button 228. Also, in this example, during the period from when the main frame 4 that was opened relative to the outer frame 2 is closed to when the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode) is ended, the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 start to check the operation at power-on, and then the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the process of checking the operation at power-on, and Since this is longer than the period until both of these are completed, when the setting change process is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and after the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 finishes checking the operation at power-on, light emission control is executed for the serious abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 (if the light emission control is changed to the semi-serious abnormality notification light emission mode after the serious abnormality notification light emission mode, the semi-serious abnormality notification light emission mode).

That is, when the right side game board 5AR is not connected and the setting change process is executed, after closing the main body frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 finishes checking the operation at power-on. Then, the various speakers output a game board unconnected notification sound, and a serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode) is displayed due to the main body frame 4 being opened to the outer frame 2. When the light emission is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality notification light mode after the serious abnormality notification light mode, the light emission control of the semi-serious abnormality notification light mode is executed, and the volume of the game board unconnected notification sound output from the various speakers can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227, but for the serious abnormality notification light mode (including the semi-serious abnormality notification light mode when the light emission is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality notification light mode after the serious abnormality notification light mode) that is controlled to emit light due to the main body frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, it is not possible to adjust the light intensity using the light intensity adjustment button 228.

Therefore, when the right side game board 5AR is not connected and the setting change process is being executed, after closing the main frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2, when the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (step S38) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 have finished checking the operation at power-on, the light can be controlled to a serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode with a predetermined brightness (a semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode when the light-emitting mode is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode), and the setting change notification light-emitting mode can be controlled to a semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode when the light-emitting mode is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode during the execution of the setting change process, and the setting change notification light-emitting mode can be controlled to a semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode when the setting change notification light-emitting mode is overlooked or a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. Even if the RAM clear notification mode is missed during the process of clearing all but a specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) and the power-on operation check, the serious abnormality notification light emission mode (semi-serious abnormality notification light emission mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality notification light emission mode after the serious abnormality notification light emission mode) can be seen afterwards, making it possible to notice that a setting change process or a process of clearing all but a specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) may have been performed, while the fact that the right side game board 5AR is not connected, which is unlikely to cause a disadvantage to the player or the game facility, can be adjusted in volume using the volume adjustment button 227 to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, when the light emission is controlled to the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (including the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode) due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, a scale corresponding to the volume or light amount (brightness) may be displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light amount adjustment button 228, and the scale may be changed by operating the volume adjustment button 227 or the light amount adjustment button 222 while the scale is displayed, or when the light emission is controlled to the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode with the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, the volume adjustment button 227 or the light amount adjustment button 222 may be changed. Even if the joint button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, the performance display device 1600 does not display a scale corresponding to the volume or light intensity (brightness), and when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission is controlled to the serious abnormality notification light emission mode (when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality notification light emission mode after the serious abnormality notification light emission mode, the semi-serious abnormality notification light emission mode), the performance display device 1600 may display a scale corresponding to the volume or light intensity (brightness) based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228, and the scale may be changed by operating the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 222 while the scale is displayed. In this case, after the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light emission mode or the output of the door opening notification sound is completed, the performance sound output or the light emission performance may be executed with the volume or light intensity (brightness) corresponding to the scale after it has been changed based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 222.

In addition, when the light emission is controlled to a serious abnormality alert light mode (including a semi-serious abnormality alert light mode when the light emission is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, a confirmation sound based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 may be output at a volume set in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227. When the light emission is controlled to a serious abnormality alert light mode with the main frame 4 open relative to the outer frame 2, no confirmation sound is output even if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated. However, when the light emission is controlled to a serious abnormality alert light mode (including a semi-serious abnormality alert light mode when the light emission is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) with the main frame 4 closed relative to the outer frame 2, a confirmation sound may be output based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228. In addition, when the light emission is controlled to a serious abnormality alert light mode (including a semi-serious abnormality alert light mode when the light emission is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, the display device 1600 may display a scale corresponding to the volume or light intensity (brightness) and output a confirmation sound based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228, or may only perform one of these functions.

In this case, a scale corresponding to the light amount (brightness) is displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228, and even if the scale is changed by further operating the light amount adjustment button 228, the light amount (brightness) of the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (including the quasi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode when the light-emitting control is performed to the quasi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode) does not change. On the other hand, the minor abnormality light-emitting mode corresponding to the right side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state, which is executed after the light-emitting control of the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (including the quasi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode when the light-emitting control is performed to the quasi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode) has ended, is controlled to emit light with the light amount (brightness) changed in response to the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228. In this example, when the setting change process is executed while the right side game board 5AR is not connected, if the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 after the transition to a playable state and the light emission is controlled to a serious abnormality alert light mode (semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if the light emission is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode), then during the light emission control of the serious abnormality alert light mode (semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if the light emission is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode), the light amount (brightness) of the light emission mode controlled to be emitted after the end of the serious abnormality alert light mode (semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if the light emission is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) can be adjusted. This allows the player to avoid losing interest in playing the game, as it is possible to prevent the player from being deprived of an opportunity to adjust the light intensity (brightness) in a situation where play can begin even if the light is controlled to the serious abnormality notification light mode (if the light is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality notification light mode after the serious abnormality notification light mode, the semi-serious abnormality notification light mode).

In addition, in an unconnected state where there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, even if the conditions for starting the variable display are met (a game ball enters the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)), the occurrence of an abnormality is not signaled without performing the variable effects using the various speakers, the various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, if the period from closing the main frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 to ending the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (if the light-emitting mode is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode, the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode) is shorter than the period from starting the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 to ending both the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check, if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and the main If the frame 4 is kept closed, the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are not controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality notification light mode caused by the main frame 4 being open relative to the outer frame 2, but are controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality notification light mode corresponding to the fact that the right side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state as soon as the game becomes playable, so that the LED light emission mode can immediately notify the player that the right side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state as soon as the game becomes playable.

Even in an unconnected state where there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR, after the power-on operation check is performed, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which display information on winning or losing, are not turned off, but are controlled to emit light in the same way as in a normal playable state. In other words, in an unconnected state where there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR, the fact that the right game board 5AR is unconnected is notified, which prevents the player from being disadvantaged or the game from proceeding with behavior unintended by the designer, while even if the game is started in an unconnected state where there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR, the LEDs displaying information on winning or losing are controlled to emit light so that the game can proceed as usual, and no disadvantage is caused to the player.

In addition, in this example, the right-side game board 5AR is not provided with ball entry ports (starting ports (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), big prize port 2005, general prize port 2001, etc.) or gates 2003, and these are provided only on the left-side game board 5AL, so there is little risk of the player being disadvantaged even if the game is played in an unconnected state where there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR. In other words, if the split game board 5A does not have a right-side game board 5AR and only has a left-side game board 5AL, nothing is provided in the area corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR, so although there is a risk of the player being disadvantaged by playing the game, it is possible to easily recognize by sight that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, a player who senses an abnormality will avoid playing. On the other hand, if the split game board 5A has both the right game board 5AR and the left game board 5AL but the right game board 5AR is disconnected due to a connection failure or the like, it is difficult to visually recognize that an abnormality has occurred, so the player will play, but since the right game board 5AR does not have an entrance or gate that would benefit the player, there is little risk of the player being disadvantaged. In this way, a state in which the right game board 5AR is disconnected is less likely to cause a disadvantage to the player than a state in which it is deemed incompatible, so although a notification of the unconnection is issued, the player can continue playing in the same way as when it is compatible.

In addition, the right-side game board 5AR is not provided with any detection means such as an entrance or gate 2003, nor a magnetic sensor 1050 for detecting fraudulent activity; all of these are provided on the left-side game board 5AL. In other words, electronic components which affect the profits of players and game establishments (general prize opening sensor 3001, first start opening sensor 3002, second start opening sensor 2401, gate sensor 2801, large prize opening sensor 2402, special prize opening sensor 2601, V prize opening sensor 3003, losing opening sensor 3004, magnetic sensor 1050, start opening solenoid 2412, attacca solenoid 2414, special prize opening solenoid 2612, V distribution solenoid 3007, etc.), ball entrance openings (general prize opening 2001, first start opening 2002, gate 2003, second start opening 2004, large prize opening 2005, etc.), gate 2003, etc. are all provided on the left game board 5AL. Therefore, even if fraudulent activity occurs in an unconnected state where there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, the detection means installed on the left-side game board 5AL can detect the fraudulent activity, and the gaming establishment will not suffer any disadvantage.

In addition, in an unconnected state where there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, only at least one of the LEDs that display information on winning or losing on the LED of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be controlled to emit light in the same manner as in a normal playable state. For example, the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be turned off or lit in an emission mode unrelated to the establishment of the start condition without being controlled to emit light, even if the start condition is established (a game ball enters the start hole (the first start hole 2002 or one of the first start hole 2002 and the second start hole 2004)).

In this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the timing of the light emission control in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state and the timing of the output of the game board unconnected notification sound differ depending on whether or not the setting value is changed and whether or not the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area (a specified area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area)).

Specifically, when the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no input of an ID code signal, and neither the setting value change nor the process of clearing a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area) is performed, "power on" is displayed on the performance display device 1600 for a specific period of time based on the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1, and then a power-on operation check is started. During the power-on operation check, light emission control is started in a minor abnormality alert light emission mode using various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), and the output of a game board unconnected alert sound is started from various speakers. In other words, when the power-on operation check begins, the device starts controlling the light emission in a minor abnormality notification light mode due to the fact that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, making it an unconnected state, and starts outputting game board unconnected notification sounds from various speakers.

On the other hand, when the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no input of an ID code signal, and either a change in the setting of the set value or a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area)) is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (step S38), and while the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is performing a power-on operation check, light emission control is performed in a minor abnormality notification light emission mode due to the fact that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no input of an ID code signal, and a game board unconnected notification sound is output by various speakers. without starting the process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and at the timing after the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has finished checking the operation at power-on (in this example, at the timing of starting the playable state, a game board unconnected notification sound is output due to the fact that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR and the game board is in an unconnected state, and light emission control of the minor abnormality notification light emission mode is started after the playable state starts), light emission control in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode due to the fact that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR and output of the game board unconnected notification sound from various speakers are started.

In this way, even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and there is no connection, the timing of the light emission control in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode and the timing of the output of the game board unconnected notification sound can be made different depending on whether or not to change the setting value and whether or not to clear the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)). This makes it possible to prioritize the notification of information of high importance and prevent malfunctions and fraudulent acts from occurring. In other words, since there is a risk of damage to the gaming facility if the setting value is changed illegally or the main control built-in RAM is cleared, the damage can be prevented from spreading by prioritizing the notification of the illegal change of the setting value or the clearing of the main control built-in RAM over the notification of the unconnected state and there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR.

In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and there is no ID code signal input from the right side game board 5AR, the timing at which the performance display device 1600 displays "Right side game board unconnected error" as an unconnected error notification display mode is the same regardless of whether the setting value is changed or not, and whether or not the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)). In other words, the performance display device 1600 displays "Right side game board unconnected error" as an unconnected error notification display mode at the timing when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the process of clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) or the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts checking the operation at power-on. This allows the performance display device 1600 to notify and deal with other notifications while giving priority to notifications of high importance. In addition, the timing of displaying "Right side game board unconnected error occurred" as an unconnected error notification display mode in the performance display device 1600 may be varied depending on whether or not the setting value is changed, or whether or not a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)). In this case, information of increasing importance can be notified in order and dealt with in sequence, so that each piece of information can be reliably conveyed and dealt with.

As described above, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the split game board 5A is set to a compatible (matched) state, and after the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not execute the ID determination process (step S1003).Therefore, even if the split game board 5AR enters an unconnected state in which there is no input of an ID code signal after the ID determination process (step S1003) is executed, the above-mentioned notifications (game board unconnected notification sound, unconnected error notification display mode, minor abnormality notification light emission mode, etc.) are not executed. Therefore, at least the LEDs (such as the various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3) and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250) provided in the areas other than the right game board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are controlled in the same manner as when the right game board 5AR is fitted.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state. Even if an abnormality is detected during the setting change process by an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball cut detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, or other sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), the detection is invalid (it may be that a process for checking whether or not there is a detection is not executed, or a process for checking whether or not there is a detection is executed but a process (such as an alarm) based on the detection is not executed).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 278, even if an illegal magnetism occurs during the execution of the setting change process and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the detection signal is discarded without executing an abnormality notification based on the detection of the illegal magnetism. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no input of an ID code signal from the right side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 judges that the right side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state in the ID judgment process (step S1003), and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the execution of the setting change process, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control is executed as if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 was not input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 after the setting change process is completed.

Thus, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from it, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, if an abnormality is detected by an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball out detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, or other sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during execution of the setting change process, then after the setting change process is completed, a notification due to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from it is given priority over an abnormality notification due to detection by the abnormality detection means. That is, even if fraudulent behavior is committed in a non-playable state before the game can be started, such as during the execution of a setting change process, there is a low risk of a disadvantage occurring when the game becomes playable and play is performed, but if the game is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, there is a risk of a disadvantage occurring when the game is performed when the game becomes playable. Therefore, if both detection by the abnormality detection means and an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR occur during the execution of a setting change process, a notification due to the unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR after the setting change process is completed is given priority, thereby preventing the occurrence of disadvantages.

On the other hand, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball cut detection sensor 574, door frame opening switch, etc.) during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed, that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the power-on operation check that involves the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the detection by the abnormality detection means is valid, but some abnormality notifications are not issued during the power-on operation check, and are issued after the power-on operation check is completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 279, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the execution of the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed, the various LEDs of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) are not controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality notification light emission mode due to the detection of an illegal magnetism, and the various speakers are not repeatedly outputting magnetic detection notification sounds (for example, "Magnetic detection error occurred.").

When the power-on operation check is completed, the various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode due to the detection of illegal magnetism, and a magnetic detection notification sound is output from various speakers. The abnormality notification due to the detection of illegal magnetism is terminated based on the passage of a predetermined period of time since the detection of illegal magnetism. When the abnormality notification due to the detection of illegal magnetism is terminated, if no other abnormality is detected, the various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality notification light-emitting mode due to the right side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state, and a game board unconnected notification sound is repeatedly output from various speakers.

In this way, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed, the various LEDs and various speakers of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the dish unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) continue to be controlled as if the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 has not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and an abnormality alert is issued due to the detection of an illegal magnetism based on the completion of the power-on operation check.

In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, door frame opening switch, etc.) during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed, the abnormality notification due to detection by the abnormality detection means is executed in priority over the notification due to the unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR after the power-on operation check is completed.

In other words, even if fraudulent behavior is performed during the power-on operation check immediately before the game can begin, there is a low risk of disadvantages occurring, but since the game becomes playable immediately after the power-on operation check is completed, there is a possibility that similar fraudulent behavior may occur even in the playable state. On the other hand, when the game is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, there is a low possibility of disadvantages occurring compared to fraudulent behavior. Therefore, if both detection by the abnormality detection means and an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR occur during the execution of the power-on operation check, the occurrence of disadvantages is suppressed by giving priority to a notification due to detection by the abnormality detection means after the completion of the power-on operation check (or in some cases, while the power-on operation check is being executed).

In addition, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 of the abnormality detection means (e.g., the magnetic sensor 1050, the vibration sensor, the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, the door frame opening switch, etc.) during the execution of the power-on operation check. When an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means, the various LEDs and speakers of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) will issue an abnormality alert when the operation check at power-on is completed, but the performance display device 1600 will issue an abnormality alert (for example, displaying "magnetic error occurred" as a magnetic detection error alert mode) when it is detected by the abnormality detection means. That is, when the detection signal of the abnormality detection means is input to the main control board 1310 (or when the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a command to start an abnormality notification (for example, a magnet goto notification command classified as a notification display that informs that radio wave irradiation goto is being performed) to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command (magnet goto notification command) to start the abnormality notification, it starts control related to the abnormality notification. Also, even if an abnormality notification caused by detection by the abnormality detection means is displayed on the performance display device 1600, an abnormality notification (unconnected error notification display mode) caused by the right side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state is displayed on the performance display device 1600. That is, when both detection by the abnormality detection means and the right side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state occur simultaneously, an abnormality notification notifying each abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Note that, as abnormality detection means, sensors and switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb cut detection sensor 574, and door frame opening switch, are shown. However, for some sensors and switches, even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check or after the setting change process is completed (including the power-on operation check and the playable state), no abnormality notification may be sent to the performance display device 1600. Alternatively, for all sensors and switches, even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check or after the setting change process is completed (including the power-on operation check and the playable state), no abnormality notification may be sent to the performance display device 1600.

When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, sensors and switches such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball cut detection sensor 574, door frame opening switch, etc., which input a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the playable state after the power-on operation check is completed, that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the playable state, the detection by the abnormality detection means is effective, but unlike when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the power-on operation check, an abnormality is notified at the timing when the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means.

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during a playable state after the power-on operation check is completed, an abnormality due to detection by the abnormality detection means is notified by the various LEDs and various speakers of the performance display device 1600 and the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the plate unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3).

In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and when a detection signal is input from an abnormality detection means (e.g., a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball cut detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, or other sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during a playable state after the power-on operation check is completed, the abnormality notification due to detection by the abnormality detection means is executed with priority over a notification due to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input.

Therefore, in a playable state where there is a high risk of disadvantage occurring if fraudulent activity is performed, if both detection by the abnormality detection means and an unconnected state in which no ID code signal is input from the right-side gaming board 5AR occur, the occurrence of disadvantage can be suppressed by giving priority to the notification resulting from detection by the abnormality detection means.

In addition, instead of determining whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may periodically (for example, each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed) execute an ID determination process to determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started. In this case, it is possible to notify the user of the fact that the right side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no input of an ID code signal after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, thereby preventing the occurrence of disadvantages.

Even if an ID determination process is periodically executed to determine whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, the ID determination process may not be executed while the setting change process is being executed. Also, even if the ID determination process is executed while the setting change process is being executed and it is determined that there is no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR and that the right game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, no notification may be issued in response to the right game board 5AR being in an unconnected state while the setting change process is being executed.

Furthermore, when periodically executing an ID determination process to determine whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, a notification (game board unconnected notification sound, unconnected error notification display mode, minor abnormality notification light emission mode, etc.) corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state may be started based on a determination that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and then a notification corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state may be terminated based on a determination that the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, or a notification corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state may be started based on a determination that the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible in the ID determination process, and then a notification corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR may be started.

In addition, when the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, if the ID determination process is executed during the power-on operation check after the setting change process or before the setting change process is started and it is determined that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that the game board is in an unconnected state, the display device 1600 will display a message indicating that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that the game board is in an unconnected state during the power-on operation check, just as in the case where the compatibility of the combination of the split game board 5A is determined only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started. The various LEDs of the type speakers and door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may be configured to output a game board unconnected notification sound and light up a minor abnormality notification light to notify that there is no ID code signal input from the right side game board 5AR and that there is an unconnected state, but may be configured to output a game board unconnected notification sound and light up a minor abnormality notification light to notify that there is no ID code signal input from the right side game board 5AR and that there is an unconnected state, when the game becomes playable after the operation check at power-on.

In addition, even if the configuration is such that the combination of the divided game board 5A is periodically judged to be compatible, even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a bulb out detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, or other sensor or switch whose detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the execution of the setting change process, the detection is invalid (it may be possible to not execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection, or to execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection), and an abnormality alert based on the detection by the abnormality detection means may not be executed even after the setting change process.

In addition, when the device is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, if the right game board 5AR is disconnected during the power-on operation check after the setting change process and an abnormality is detected by an abnormality detection means (e.g., a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball out detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, or other sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), the device 1600 will detect both that the right game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no input of an ID code signal during the power-on operation check and that the abnormality has been detected by the abnormality detection means. While displaying the notification, the various speakers and the various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may not notify that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that there has been detection by the abnormality detection means, and when the game is ready to play after the power-on operation check, the various speakers and door frame unit may be given priority over notifying that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that there has been detection by the abnormality detection means.

[Setting value confirmation display and split game board ID error]
Next, a behavior example will be described when the combination of the split game board 5A (i.e., the combination of the right game board 5AR (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left game board 5AL (a peripheral control board 1510 or a main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) is in an incompatible (mismatched) state (mismatched state, mismatched state) or when there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR (the input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR cannot be confirmed) and a malfunction such as a short circuit or disconnection occurs in the transmission path for transmitting various signals, making it impossible to confirm the connection (unconnected state). For comparison, a behavior example will also be described when the combination of the split game board 5A (i.e., the combination of the right game board 5AR (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left game board 5AL (a peripheral control board 1510 or a main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) is in a compatible (matched) state (matched state) and the setting value is displayed. Fig. 280 shows an example of behavior when the setting value confirmation display is performed when the split game board 5A consisting of the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR is in a compatible (matched) state as a combination of the split game board 5A, Fig. 281 shows an example of behavior when the setting value confirmation display is performed when the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), and Fig. 284 shows an example of behavior when the setting value confirmation display is performed when the right game board 5AR is not connected. Below, only the parts that differ from the case where the setting change process is executed will be explained, and overlapping explanations will not be given.

[Display of setting value confirmation when compatible]
As shown in FIG. 280, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 outputs the "power
On the other hand, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right side game board 5AR, and the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 are turned off. Furthermore, as described above, when the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 starts (in this example, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, and then the power switch 630a provided on the power supply board 630 is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1 without pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633), a setting value confirmation and display process (step S28) is executed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the current setting value (the value that is set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time) stored in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a can be displayed on the setting display 1310g (or the base monitor 1310h that also functions as a setting display).

When the setting value confirmation display process is started, a setting value confirmation display start command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value confirmation display start command is to start. When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting value confirmation display start command, it causes the performance display device 1600 to display a setting confirmation notification state (in this example, "setting confirmation in progress") (it may be displayed until the setting value confirmation display process is ended, or it may be displayed for a certain period of time and then terminated), and it causes the various speakers to repeatedly output a setting value confirmation display notification sound (an announcement voice saying "setting confirmation in progress" and a warning sound such as a "ding dong" sound) at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or may be a default volume adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) (it may be output repeatedly until the setting value confirmation display process is ended, or it may be output repeatedly for a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) and then stop output).

In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the light emission of various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, door frame top unit 450, etc. provided on the door frame 3) and various LEDs (which may be only some or all) mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR to a setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode (in this example, the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the right-side game board 5AR are switched between blue light-emitting color and white light-emitting color in a short time) when the setting value confirmation display is displayed (the setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode may be lit until the setting value confirmation display process is completed, or the setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode may be terminated and the light may be turned off or lit in a different light-emitting mode after emitting light in the setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode for a certain period of time). This notifies the user that the setting value confirmation display is being performed, and makes it possible to immediately find if the setting value is being confirmed illegally.

As described above, in this example, after inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turning it ON, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met when the power switch 630a on the power supply board 630 is operated to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 without pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633. In other words, the setting value confirmation display process is executed with the main body frame 4 open relative to the outer frame 2, and when the setting value confirmation display process is terminated, the main body frame 4 that was open relative to the outer frame 2 is closed.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the output of the door open notification sound from the various speakers caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode are not executed during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process. In other words, if the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the output of the door open notification sound from the various speakers caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode are not executed, and the setting value confirmation display notification sound is output from the various speakers and the light emission control of the setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode is executed. Therefore, when the setting value confirmation display process is executed, after the end of the setting value confirmation display process, the output of the door open notification sound from the various speakers caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (including the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode when the light emission control is performed to the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode) can be executed.

Note that if the setting value confirmation display process is terminated after the main frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 is closed, that is, if the main frame 4 is closed while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed and the main frame 4 continues to be closed after that, the output of the door open notification sound from the various speakers and the serious abnormality notification light emission mode (including the semi-serious abnormality notification light emission mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality notification light emission mode after the serious abnormality notification light emission mode) caused by the main frame 4 being opened to the outer frame 2 are not executed even after the setting value confirmation display process is terminated. However, when the setting value is usually confirmed and displayed, the manager of the game hall or the like performs an operation to confirm and display the setting value with the main frame 4 open to the outer frame 2 from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, so the operation to close the main frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 is performed after the setting value confirmation display process is terminated. In addition, as described above, when the main frame 4 that is open to the outer frame 2 is closed or the main frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, and the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened to the outer frame 2 reaches a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds. In this example, this is set to be shorter than the time required for operation confirmation when power is turned on), the output of the door open notification sound is stopped and the sound is muted. Therefore, normally, when the setting value confirmation display process is executed, if the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened to the outer frame 2 does not reach the predetermined period after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, both the output of the door open notification sound from the various speakers due to the main frame 4 being opened to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light emission mode (including the semi-serious abnormality notification light emission mode when the light emission control is performed to the semi-serious abnormality notification light emission mode after the serious abnormality notification light emission mode) are executed, and if the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened to the outer frame 2 reaches the predetermined period, only the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light emission mode due to the main frame 4 being opened to the outer frame 2 is executed.

In addition, the volume of the setting value confirmation display notification sound output from the various speakers during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process cannot be adjusted by the volume adjustment button 227. As described above, the player can adjust the volume output from the various speakers by operating the volume adjustment button 227, but the volume of the setting value confirmation display notification sound output during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process cannot be adjusted even if the player operates the volume adjustment button 227. Therefore, it is possible to output the setting value confirmation display notification sound at a predetermined volume during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, and since it is possible to reliably inform the player that a setting value confirmation display is being performed by the sound output from the various speakers, it is possible to immediately detect when a setting value confirmation display is being performed, and it is possible to prevent the setting value from being illegally confirmed.

In addition, the light intensity of the setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode performed during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process cannot be adjusted by the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, the player can adjust the light intensity (brightness) of some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, but the setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode performed during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process cannot be adjusted even if the player operates the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A are controlled to emit light at a predetermined light intensity (brightness) to perform the setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode, and the setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode can reliably inform the player that the setting value confirmation display is being performed, so that if a setting value confirmation display is being performed illegally, it can be immediately discovered, and illegal confirmation of the setting value can be suppressed.

In addition, even if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 is operated while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, the performance display device 1600 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light amount (brightness), and no confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 is output. Since the performance display device 1600 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light amount (brightness), the scale does not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the scale corresponding to the current volume or light amount (brightness) from interfering with the visibility of the setting confirmation notification state on the performance display device 1600, and it is possible to prevent the confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 from making the setting value confirmation display notification sound difficult to hear, and it is possible to immediately detect if a setting value confirmation display is being performed illegally.

In addition, while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, and the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 are turned off. That is, in this example of the pachinko machine 1, although the split game board 5A is made up of the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, during setting confirmation, all of the various LEDs on the left game board 5AL are turned off regardless of whether they are controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, and only the various LEDs on the right game board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are turned on.

In this way, while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, the light emission patterns of the various LEDs provided on the split game board 5A are made different between the various LEDs provided on the left game board 5AL and the various LEDs provided on the right game board 5AR, which gives a sense of discomfort to anyone viewing the pachinko machine 1 and makes them immediately aware that the setting value confirmation display process is being executed. In addition, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board mounted on the left side game board 5AL, the various LEDs mounted on the functional display unit 1400, and the sub-functional display unit 2250 may be lit in a different light emission mode from the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the right side game board 5AR (for example, a red light (not blinking) with a predetermined brightness (which may be maximum brightness, or a brightness lower than maximum brightness, or the light amount cannot be adjusted by the light amount adjustment button 228).) Alternatively, one or both of the LEDs of the functional display unit 1400 and the LEDs of the sub-functional display unit 2250 that display information about winning or losing may be lit in a setting confirmation notification light emission mode. In this case, the light emission mode of the LEDs provided on the right side game board 5AR and the light emission mode of the LEDs provided on the left side game board 5AL can be made different, so that it is possible to immediately notice that the setting value confirmation display process is being executed.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 hides the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM displayed on the setting display 1310g (or the base monitor 1310h that also functions as a setting display) based on the operation to end the setting value confirmation display (in this example, an OFF operation to return the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 to the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a)), and transmits a setting value confirmation display end command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify that the setting value confirmation display process is to be ended.

In addition, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting value confirmation display end command from the main control MPU 1310a, it performs a power-on operation check to check whether the drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are driven in a predetermined manner and can be turned on and operate normally. In addition, in the power-on operation check, the LEDs (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, door frame top unit 450, etc.) are lit in a predetermined light-emitting mode (light-emitting mode during power-on operation check), except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information on winning or losing among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. When the setting value check display process is executed, only when the light-emitting control of the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 is not performed, the LEDs are lit in a predetermined light-emitting mode (light-emitting mode during power-on operation check).

As described above, the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 is not executed even after the end of the setting value confirmation display process when the main frame 4 is closed during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process and the main frame 4 is subsequently kept in a closed state. In other words, when the main frame 4 is closed during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process and the main frame 4 is subsequently kept in a closed state, the LEDs (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information on winning or losing among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 as a power-on operation confirmation (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, and the door frame unit are lit in a predetermined light emission mode (light emission mode during power-on operation confirmation). On the other hand, if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the light emission is controlled to a serious abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, and when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds, in this example, which is longer than the period from when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts checking the power-on operation to when it ends) has elapsed since the main frame 4 was closed, the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light emission mode is terminated, and light emission control of a light emission mode corresponding to the game state (light emission mode during presentation) is started, similar to the playable state.

In addition, after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the mode during the performance (decorative patterns, background images during normal times (when playable), etc.) is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and when the power-on operation confirmation is completed, the LED of the function display unit 1400 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250, which display information regarding winning or losing, are lit in a predetermined light-emitting mode, or the light emission is controlled in a predetermined light-emitting mode (light-emitting mode during variable performance (lights up in a predetermined light-emitting mode after flashing for a predetermined period of time)) based on the start condition for the variable display being met (a game ball entering the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)). Also, as described above, in this example, the output period of the door opening notification sound is the same as the power-on operation confirmation. Since this period is shorter than the period required for confirmation, if the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 when the setting value confirmation display process is started, and the main frame 4 is still open relative to the outer frame 2 when the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened has already reached a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds). Therefore, even if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 when the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the door open notification sound is not output from the various speakers, and the sound output during the performance (the output of the performance sound that is performed when the start condition for the variable display is met (the game ball enters the start port (the first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004))) can be executed.

[Display to confirm setting value when non-conformity occurs]
Next, an example of behavior when a setting value confirmation display is performed when the combination of the split game board 5A (i.e., the combination of the right game board 5AR (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left game board 5AL (peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) is in an incompatible (inconsistent) state (inconsistent state) will be described with reference to FIG. 281. Note that only the parts that differ from the case where a setting change process is performed or the case where a setting value confirmation display process is performed when compatible will be described below, and no duplicate explanations will be given.

As shown in FIG. 281, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, in the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, if it is determined that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not output a control signal to electronic components such as various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, and the electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR are in a non-driven state (for example, various LEDs are turned off) regardless of whether the setting value is being displayed for confirmation or not. Also, in this example, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, in the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, if it is determined that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL are also turned off regardless of whether the setting value is being displayed for confirmation or not.

In addition, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the peripheral control IC 1510a does not notify the user that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible until the setting value confirmation display process is completed (until the setting value confirmation display end command is received from the main control MPU 1310a), but instead notifies the user that the setting value confirmation display process is being performed. In other words, during the setting value confirmation display process, the performance display device 1600 displays a setting confirmation notification mode (in this example, "setting confirmation in progress") (which may be displayed until the setting value confirmation display process is completed, or which may be displayed for a certain period of time and then ended), and the setting value confirmation display notification sound (announcement voice saying "setting confirmation in progress" and a warning sound such as "ding dong") is played at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or may be a default volume adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510). The speaker repeatedly outputs the signal (it may be output repeatedly until the setting value confirmation display process is completed, or it may be output repeatedly a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) and then the output is stopped), and the various LEDs of the door frame unit are controlled to emit light in a setting confirmation notification light mode when displaying the setting value confirmation, while the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards provided on the right game board 5AR and the left game board 5AL, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 are turned off.

Then, when the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the main control MPU 1310a transmits a setting value confirmation display end command to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting value confirmation display end command, it outputs a game board incompatibility notification sound (an announcement voice saying "An incompatibility error has occurred on the right side game board. Please turn off the power and check" and a warning sound such as a "ding dong" sound) at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or a default volume adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) repeatedly from various speakers until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. and controls various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200 and the door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) to repeatedly emit light in a serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (in this example, a mode in which the light is switched between being lit in red at maximum brightness and being turned off in a short period of time (such as 0.5 seconds) (high speed blinking mode)). Also, the performance display device 1600 displays a background image (such as black) in the abnormal state and "Right side game board incompatibility error occurred" as an incompatibility error notification display mode without displaying a decorative pattern or a background image in the normal state (when playable), on the performance display device 1600, to notify that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible. Meanwhile, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards on the right game board 5AR and the left game board 5AL, the LEDs on the function display unit 1400, and the LEDs on the sub-function display unit 2250 are controlled to remain off.

In addition, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has completed the power-on operation check and the game is ready to play, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 continues to output the game board incompatibility alarm sound, control the light emission of the serious abnormality alarm light emission mode of the door frame unit, and display the incompatibility error alarm display mode of the performance display device 1600, while causing the LED of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 to be able to be controlled to emit light in the same way as when they were compatible (it may also be lit in a specified manner). In other words, when the condition for starting the variable display is met (a game ball enters the start port (first start port 2002 or either the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004)), the LED of the function display unit 1400 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 are made to flash in a predetermined manner, and then are made to light up in a predetermined light emission manner, making it possible to display information regarding the winning or losing outcome.

The incompatibility error notification display mode in the performance display device 1600 continues until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and even if the variable display of the special pattern is started based on the satisfaction of the start condition of the variable display (the game ball enters the start port (the first start port 2002 or either the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004)), the performance display device 1600 does not perform a variable display such as a variable display of a decorative pattern. Furthermore, the incompatibility error notification display mode in the performance display device 1600 may be in accordance with the content of the error, and may be a combination of letters and numbers (for example, an error code) or a mark, etc.

In this way, in this example, if the combination of the split game board 5A is determined to be incompatible (mismatched) by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 in the ID determination process (step S1003), the combination of the split game board 5A is immediately notified that it is incompatible, without notifying an abnormality in response to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 after the setting value confirmation display process is completed. In other words, after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, a game board incompatibility notification sound is output without outputting a door opening notification sound, regardless of whether the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has reached a predetermined period. In addition, although the light emission is controlled to a serious abnormality notification light emission mode after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, it is executed due to the combination of the split game board 5A being incompatible, not due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2. Therefore, after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the light is always controlled to emit light in the serious abnormality notification light mode regardless of whether a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main body frame 4 was closed.

In addition, when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), even if the condition for starting the variable display is met (when the game ball enters the start hole (the first start hole 2002 or either the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004), the display is not displayed by the performance display device 1600, various speakers, various LEDs of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the plate unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., which are provided in the door frame 3), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left game board 5AL. The LEDs mounted on the controlled decorative board are not used to perform the variable effects, but instead notify the user that an abnormality has occurred. On the other hand, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 are controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode when the conditions for starting the variable display are met (a game ball enters the start port (first start port 2002 or either the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004)) after the power-on operation check is completed and the game becomes playable, making it possible to display information about the winning or losing result.

In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is in a state of incompatibility (inconsistency) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 judges that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatibility in the ID judgment process (step S1003), the fact that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatibility (inconsistency) is notified at the same timing regardless of whether the setting value confirmation display is performed or not. Specifically, when the power-on operation check is performed regardless of whether the setting value confirmation display is performed or not, the light emission control in the serious abnormality notification light emission mode by various LEDs (which may be only a part or all) of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc. provided in the door frame 3), the output of the game board incompatibility notification sound by various speakers, and the timing of displaying the background image (e.g. black) in the abnormal state and the incompatibility error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600 are started. This allows information of high importance (in this case, a notification that the setting value confirmation display is being performed) to be notified in sequence so that it can be dealt with, so that each piece of information can be reliably conveyed and dealt with. Note that the timing of starting some or all of the light emission control in the serious abnormality notification light emission mode by the various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3), the output of the game board incompatibility notification sound by the various speakers, and the timing of displaying the background image (e.g., black) and the incompatibility error notification display mode in the event of an abnormality on the performance display device 1600 may be made different depending on whether or not the setting value confirmation display is performed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, when the power-on operation check is being performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, that is, when only the power-on operation check is being performed without the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the volume cannot be adjusted by the volume adjustment button 227. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the various speakers by operating the volume adjustment button 227, but the volume of the game board incompatibility notification sound output after the setting change process is completed cannot be adjusted even by operating the volume adjustment button 227. Therefore, when the setting value confirmation display process is completed, a game board incompatibility notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume, and the sound output from the various speakers can reliably inform the player that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, preventing any disadvantage to the player or the game facility.

Similarly, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, when the power-on operation check is being performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, that is, when only the power-on operation check is being performed without the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the light amount (brightness) cannot be adjusted by the light amount adjustment button 228. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the light amount (brightness) of the LEDs of the door frame 3 and various decorative boards provided on the divided game board 5A can be adjusted by operating the light amount adjustment button 228, but the serious abnormality notification light emission mode that is controlled to emit light after the setting value confirmation display process is completed cannot be adjusted even by operating the light amount adjustment button 228. Therefore, when the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A can be controlled to emit light at a predetermined light amount (brightness), and the light emission pattern can reliably convey that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, preventing any disadvantage to the player or the game facility.

In addition, when the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, when the power-on operation check is being performed after the setting value check display process is completed, that is, when only the power-on operation check is being performed without the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the scale corresponding to the current volume or light amount (brightness) is not displayed on the performance display device 1600 even if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated. Also, since the scale corresponding to the current volume or light amount (brightness) is not displayed on the performance display device 1600, the scale does not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the scale corresponding to the current volume or light amount (brightness) from interfering with the visibility of part or all of the incompatible error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600, and it is possible to reliably convey that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible.

In addition, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, when the power-on operation check is being performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, that is, when only the power-on operation check is being performed without the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), a confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 is not output. This prevents the confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 from making it difficult to hear the game board incompatibility notification sound, and makes it possible to reliably communicate that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be incompatible (inconsistent) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), even if there is detection by an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball cut detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, or other sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the detection is invalid (it may be that a process for checking whether or not there is a detection is not executed, or a process for checking whether or not there is a detection is executed but a process (such as an alert) based on the detection is not executed).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 282, even if an illegal magnetism occurs during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the detection signal is discarded without executing an abnormality notification based on the detection of the illegal magnetism. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game board 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 judges that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID judgment process (step S1003), and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control is executed as if the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 was not input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 after the setting value confirmation display process is completed.

In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game board 5A is in a state of incompatibility (mismatch) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 judges that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatibility in the ID judgment process (step S1003), and when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball cut detection sensor 574, door frame opening switch, etc.) during the execution of the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the execution of the power-on operation check that does not involve the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the detection of the abnormality detection means is also invalidated (it may be that the process of checking whether or not there is a detection is not executed, or that the process of checking whether or not there is a detection is executed but the process (notification, etc.) based on the detection is not executed).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 283, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game board 5A is set to an incompatible (mismatched) state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the execution of the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the detection signal is discarded without executing an abnormality alert based on the detection of an illegal magnetism. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game board 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control continues as if the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is in a state of incompatibility (mismatch) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 judges that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatibility in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, door frame opening switch, etc., which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the playable state after the power-on operation check is completed, the detection of the abnormality detection means is invalidated (it may be that the process of checking whether or not there is a detection is not executed, or that the process of checking whether or not there is a detection is executed but the process (alert, etc.) based on the detection is not executed).

Specifically, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be incompatible (inconsistent) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during a playable state after the power-on operation check is completed, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of an illegal magnetism. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is in a mismatched (inconsistent) state and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during a playable state after the power-on operation check is completed, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control continues as if the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

In this way, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, no abnormality notification is issued even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, sensors and switches such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, and door frame opening switch, which input a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310).

In other words, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, the game may proceed in a manner not intended by the designer, which may cause disadvantages to the game establishment and the player, and in the first place, the game may differ from the original specifications, which may cause the player to lose trust, so it is necessary to ensure that the game is stopped. Therefore, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, the game is prevented from being played by issuing a warning in priority to a warning resulting from detection of an abnormality by the abnormality detection means (for example, sensors and switches such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, and door frame opening switch, which input a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), thereby preventing the occurrence of disadvantages to the game establishment and the player.

In addition, some of the LEDs may be controlled to emit light in different ways depending on the type of abnormality detection means. For example, when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, one or both of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 may be turned off (putting them into a state in which light emission control is not possible).

In addition, as described above, in this example, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the split game board 5A is set to a compatible (matched) state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), even if the combination of the split game board 5AR subsequently becomes incompatible (incompatible), no notification is given in response to the right-side game board 5AR being in a non-compatible state (game board incompatible notification sound, incompatible error notification display mode, serious abnormality notification light emission mode, etc.); however, it is not limited to determining whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may periodically (for example, constantly determined each time the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed) execute an ID determination process to determine whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started. In this case, after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the player will be notified that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, thereby preventing the occurrence of disadvantages.

Even if an ID determination process is periodically executed to determine whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, the ID determination process may not be executed while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed. Even if the ID determination process is executed while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed and it is determined that the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible, no notification may be given that the right game board 5AR is in an incompatible state while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed.

In addition, if the configuration is such that the combination of the split game boards 5A is periodically judged to be compatible, when the ID judgment process is executed during the power-on operation check after the setting value confirmation display process or before the setting value confirmation display process is started and it is judged that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible, it may be configured to notify the effect display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible during the power-on operation check, in the same way as when the combination of the split game boards 5A is judged to be compatible only when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started.

In addition, even if the configuration is such that the combination of the divided game board 5A is periodically judged to be compatible, even if an abnormality is detected by an abnormality detection means (e.g., a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a bulb cut detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, or other sensor or switch whose detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the detection is invalid (it may be possible to not execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection, or to execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection), and an abnormality alert based on the detection by the abnormality detection means may not be executed even after the setting value confirmation display process.

In addition, when the combination of the split game boards 5A is periodically determined to be compatible, if the combination of the split game boards 5A is determined to be incompatible during the power-on operation check after the setting value confirmation display process, and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.), the notification that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible may be given priority over the notification that the abnormality detection means has detected the combination, and if the combination of the split game boards 5A is determined to be compatible, the notification that the abnormality detection means has detected the combination may be given.

In addition, in the power-on operation check that is performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed (after receiving the setting value confirmation display end command from the main control MPU 1310a), not only is the power-on operation check not performed for the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., that are provided on the right side game board 5AR that has been determined to be incompatible and that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, but also for the movable body that performs the power-on operation check (the back of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 provided on the split game board 5A). When power is turned on, no operation check is performed on the drive motors and drive solenoids that are provided on door frame units that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3).

Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), even if the power-on operation check is started, the LEDs on the right game board 5AR determined to be incompatible are not controlled to light up in the light emission mode during the power-on operation check, or the movable body is not controlled to operate in the operation mode during the power-on operation check (no control signal is output to the right game board 5AR), or cannot be controlled to operate (a control signal is output but not input to the right game board 5AR). In addition, the drive motor and drive solenoid on the plate unit 200 (in this example, the performance operation unit 300) that is provided on the door frame 3 and is not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) are not driven to operate the performance operation unit 301 provided on the performance operation unit 300.

In other words, if the right-side game board 5AR is in an incompatible state, there is a risk that some or all of the movable bodies provided on the door frame unit that is not the subject of ID determination will also be determined to be incompatible, and when a control signal is input from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, there is a risk that the movable bodies will operate in a manner different from the intended operating mode. Therefore, some or all of the movable bodies provided on the right-side game board 5AR determined to be incompatible or on the door frame unit that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) and operated by the drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not be driven, thereby preventing the movable bodies from operating in a manner different from the intended operating mode, which would damage the movable bodies or door frame unit, or prevent the drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. that operate the movable bodies from breaking down. As described above, the game board side components may be configured to include the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit among the door frame units. In this case, the specific door frame unit is subject to ID determination, and if it is determined to be incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), some or all of the movable bodies operated by the drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. provided in the door frame unit not subject to ID determination (non-specific door frame unit) and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven. In addition to this, or separately, a specific door frame unit may be configured to be multiple (for example, the right door frame In some cases, if a part (for example, one of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top unit 450) is determined to be non-compliant, all of the movable bodies operated by the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in the specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be prevented from being driven, or all of the movable bodies operated by the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in all door frame units including the specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be prevented from being driven.

On the other hand, the movable bodies (such as the rear upper movable decoration 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear left movable decoration 3301 and the rear right movable decoration 3302, the rear front lower middle decoration 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, etc.) provided on the left side game board 5AL equipped with the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a that executes the ID determination process (step S1003) are mounted, operate in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the split game board 5A is determined to be compatible) when operation check begins at power-on. In addition, the LEDs mounted on the boards of the movable bodies provided on the left side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160) are not controlled to emit light in the light emission mode when the power is turned on to check operation. That is, when the right side game board 5AR is determined to be in an incompatible state in the ID determination process (step S1003), the movable body provided on the left side game board 5AL (the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, etc.) is operated in the operating mode at the time of power-on operation confirmation, but the LED provided on the movable body provided on the left side game board 5AL is not controlled to emit light in the light emission mode at the time of power-on operation confirmation, and is operated in the operating mode at the time of power-on operation confirmation in the turned-off state. This makes it easy to identify the game board (in this case, the left side game board 5AL) on which the peripheral control board 1510 of the divided game board 5A is provided.

In addition, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), not only is there no control performed to drive the drive motor and drive solenoid mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame unit (in this example, the tray unit 200) that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) to operate the performance operation unit 301, but the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are not controlled to emit light in the light emission mode when the operation is confirmed when the power is turned on. That is, when the power-on operation check is performed after the setting confirmation display process is completed, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode due to the incompatibility of the combination of the divided game board 5A. The performance operation unit 300 may be a specific door frame unit that is the subject of ID determination, and even in this case, if the combination of a specific door frame unit other than the performance operation unit 300 or the divided game board 5A is determined to be incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the driving motor and driving solenoid mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are not driven to operate the performance operation unit 301, and the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 may be controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode without being controlled to emit light in a light-emitting mode at the time of power-on operation check.

In addition, if the combination of the split game board 5A is determined to be incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the right game board 5AR determined to be incompatible and some or all of the movable bodies operated by the drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. provided in the door frame unit not subject to ID determination and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or until the combination of the split game board 5A is determined to be compatible, not limited to the power-on operation check. In this case, it is possible to prevent the movable body from operating in a different operating mode from the original operating mode, which may damage the movable body or door frame unit, or the drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. that operates the movable body from breaking down.

[Display to confirm settings when not connected]
Next, an example of behavior when a setting value confirmation display is performed in an unconnected state (unconnected state) where there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR (the input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR cannot be confirmed) and a malfunction such as a short circuit or disconnection occurs in the transmission path for transmitting various signals, making it impossible to confirm the connection, will be described with reference to Fig. 284. Note that, below, only the parts that differ from the case where a setting change process is performed or the case where a setting value confirmation display process is performed when the setting is compatible or incompatible will be described, and duplicate explanations will not be provided.

As shown in FIG. 284, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, in the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, that is, if the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, the control signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is not input to the electronic components such as various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR, so that the electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR are in a non-driven state (for example, various LEDs are turned off) regardless of whether the setting value is being confirmed or displayed. Note that, if it is determined in the ID determination process (step S1003) that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not output a control signal to the electronic components such as various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR. Also, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL are also turned off regardless of whether or not the setting value is being displayed for confirmation.

In addition, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, it does not notify that the right-side game board 5AR is not connected until the setting value confirmation display process is terminated (until the setting value confirmation display end command is received from the main control MPU 1310a), but instead notifies that the setting value confirmation display process is being executed. In other words, during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the performance display device 1600 displays a setting confirmation notification mode (in this example, "setting confirmation in progress") (which may be displayed until the setting value confirmation display process is terminated, or which may be displayed for a certain period of time and then terminated), and the setting value confirmation display notification sound (announcement voice saying "setting confirmation in progress" and a warning sound such as "ding dong") is played at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or may be a default volume adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) in various ways. The speaker repeatedly outputs the signal (it may be output repeatedly until the setting value confirmation display process is completed, or it may be output repeatedly a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) and then the output is stopped), and the various LEDs of the door frame unit are controlled to emit light in a setting confirmation notification light mode when displaying the setting value confirmation, while the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards provided on the right game board 5AR and the left game board 5AL, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 are turned off.

Then, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting value confirmation display end command from the main control MPU 1310a indicating that the setting value confirmation display process has ended, it repeatedly outputs a game board unconnected notification sound (an announcement voice saying "The right side game board is not connected" and a warning sound such as "ding dong") caused by the right side game board 5AR not being connected at a volume adjusted by the volume adjustment button 227 from various speakers until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (the output may be stopped after being output repeatedly a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds)). Meanwhile, it also controls the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 42 provided on the door frame 3) to output a sound (an announcement voice saying "The right side game board is not connected" and a warning sound such as "ding dong" or the like) at a volume adjusted by the volume adjustment button 227 from various speakers until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the main frame 4 (such as the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200 and the door frame top unit 450) are repeatedly controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality alert light mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 (if the light is controlled to be a semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode, then the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode) and, when a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4 that was open relative to the outer frame 2 was closed, the LEDs are controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality alert light mode (a mode in which the light is switched between maximum brightness white lighting and extinguishment in a short period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) (rapid flashing mode)) which is controlled to emit light due to the right-side game board 5AR not being connected. In addition, the performance display device 1600 displays the performance (normal) mode (decorative patterns and background images for normal (playable) mode, etc.) in the same way as when it is adapted, and also displays "Right side game board unconnected error occurred" as an unconnection error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600 to notify that the connection of the split game board 5A cannot be confirmed. The various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards provided on the right game board 5AR and left game board 5AL, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 are controlled to be continuously turned off.

The unconnected error notification display mode in the performance display device 1600 continues until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, but when the variable display of the special pattern is started based on the fact that the start condition for the variable display is satisfied (the game ball enters the start port (the first start port 2002 or either the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004)), the performance display device 1600 displays the unconnected error notification display mode and performs a variable display such as a variable display of the decorative pattern. The unconnected error notification display mode in the performance display device 1600 may be in accordance with the content of the error, and may be a combination of letters and numbers (for example, an error code) or a mark, etc.

As described above, the period from when the main frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, is closed to when the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light mode is terminated is longer than the period required to perform the power-on operation check. Therefore, if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting value check display process is completed, the light emission control will continue to be in the serious abnormality notification light mode even when the game becomes playable, regardless of whether the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter. When a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, was closed, the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light mode is terminated and the light emission control is switched to the minor abnormality notification light mode.

As described above, the light intensity cannot be adjusted by the light intensity adjustment button 228 for both the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (including the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode) that is controlled to emit light due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the minor abnormality notification light-emitting mode that is caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being connected. Therefore, even if the game becomes playable after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the light intensity cannot be adjusted by the light intensity adjustment button 228.

That is, when the setting value confirmation display process is executed while the right side game board 5AR is not connected, after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, a game board unconnected notification sound is output from the various speakers, and light emission control is executed for the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode when the light emission control is performed to the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode) caused by the main body frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the volume of the game board unconnected notification sound output from the various speakers can be adjusted by the volume adjustment button 227. Although it is possible to adjust the light intensity, it is not possible to adjust the light intensity using the light intensity adjustment button 228 for the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode, which is controlled to emit light due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 (including the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode), and the minor abnormality notification light-emitting mode, which is controlled to emit light due to the right side game board 5AR not being connected after the end of the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode, which is caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2.

Therefore, when the right side game board 5AR is not connected and the setting value confirmation display process is executed, the light can be controlled to emit a serious abnormality notification light with a predetermined brightness after the setting value confirmation display process is completed (semi-serious abnormality notification light when the light is controlled to emit a semi-serious abnormality notification light after the serious abnormality notification light). Even if the setting confirmation notification light is overlooked during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the serious abnormality notification light (semi-serious abnormality notification light when the light is controlled to emit a semi-serious abnormality notification light after the serious abnormality notification light) can be visually confirmed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, and the player can be made aware that the setting value confirmation display process may have been performed. Meanwhile, the fact that the right side game board 5AR is not connected, which is unlikely to cause any disadvantage to the player or the game facility, allows the volume to be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227 to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 during the light emission control of the minor abnormality notification light emission mode, the performance display device 1600 may perform one or both of the following: displaying a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) and outputting a confirmation sound based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228.

In the example shown in FIG. 284, the output period of the door open notification sound (30 seconds in this example) elapses before the setting value confirmation display process is terminated. However, if the setting value confirmation display process is terminated before the output period of the door open notification sound elapses, the door open notification sound is output until the output period of the door open notification sound is reached after the setting value confirmation display process is terminated. Then, when the output period of the door open notification sound elapses, the game board unconnected notification sound is output. In addition, if the main frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 after the setting value confirmation display process is terminated, or if the elapsed time since the main frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 was closed has not reached a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), even if the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened to the outer frame 2 has reached a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), the game board unconnected notification sound may not be output until the main frame 4 is closed or until the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened to the outer frame 2 is terminated.

In this way, in this example, when the setting value confirmation display is performed in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, different alarm sounds are output from the various speakers according to the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2, while the various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) are set to give an abnormality alarm in response to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 in preference to an abnormality alarm in response to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state.

In other words, although abnormality alerts are provided for each of the various speakers, the various LEDs of the door frame unit, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR, there are cases where a common abnormality (an abnormality due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2) is alerted depending on the time that has elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2, and cases where different abnormalities (an abnormality caused by a disconnection for the various speakers, and an abnormality caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 for the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR) are alerted. Therefore, if the setting value confirmation process is terminated relatively early after the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, for example when the setting value confirmation display is made in a short time due to fraudulent activity, the various LEDs of the door frame unit are controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode, and door open notification sounds are output from the various speakers, thereby reliably conveying that the main frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2 and that the setting value may have been confirmed and displayed fraudulently. On the other hand, if the setting value is confirmed and displayed properly by the arcade manager or the like, it is possible to notify that the main frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2 simply by controlling the various LEDs of the door frame unit to emit light in a serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode.

Even in an unconnected state where there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR, after the power-on operation check is performed, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which display information on winning or losing, are not turned off, but are controlled to emit light in the same way as in a normal playable state. In other words, in an unconnected state where there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR, the fact that the right game board 5AR is unconnected is notified, which prevents the player from being disadvantaged or the game from proceeding with behavior unintended by the designer, while even if the game is started in an unconnected state where there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR, the LEDs displaying information on winning or losing are controlled to emit light so that the game can proceed as usual, and no disadvantage is caused to the player.

In this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state. Depending on whether or not a confirmation display of the setting value is performed, the timing of the light emission control in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state and the timing of the output of the game board unconnected notification sound are different.

Specifically, when the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no input of an ID code signal and the setting value confirmation display is not executed, the effect display device 1600 displays "power on" for a predetermined period of time based on the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1, and then starts a power-on operation check, and starts light emission control in a minor abnormality notification light emission mode and output of a game board unconnected notification sound by various speakers due to the fact that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and the unconnected state during the execution of the power-on operation check. In other words, light emission control in a minor abnormality notification light emission mode and output of a game board unconnected notification sound by various speakers due to the fact that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and the unconnected state at the timing when the power-on operation check is started starts.

On the other hand, when the setting value confirmation display is executed in an unconnected state where there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, the light emission control in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode and the output of the game board unconnected notification sound by the various speakers are not started at the timing when the power-on operation check is started, which is caused by the unconnected state where there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, but the light emission control in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode and the output of the game board unconnected notification sound by the various speakers are started at a timing after the power-on operation check starts (in this example, the game board unconnected notification sound is output after the power-on operation check starts and before the playable state is reached, and the light emission control in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode is started after the playable state is reached after the power-on operation check ends).

In this way, even if there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and there is no connection when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the timing of light emission control in the minor abnormality notification light-emitting mode and the timing of output of the game board unconnected notification sound differ depending on whether or not a setting value confirmation display is performed, so it is possible to prioritize notification of information of high importance and prevent malfunctions and fraudulent acts from occurring. In other words, since there is a risk of damage to the gaming facility if a setting value confirmation display is performed fraudulently, it is possible to prevent the spread of damage caused by a fraudulent setting value confirmation display being given priority over a notification of an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR.

When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and there is no ID code signal input from the right side game board 5AR, the timing at which the performance display device 1600 displays "Right side game board unconnected error" as an unconnected error notification display mode is the same regardless of whether or not the setting value confirmation display is performed. In other words, the performance display device 1600 displays "Right side game board unconnected error" as an unconnected error notification display mode at the timing when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts checking the power-on operation. This allows the performance display device 1600 to notify and deal with other notifications while giving priority to notifications of higher importance. In addition, the display timing of "Right side game board unconnected error" as an unconnected error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600 may be made different depending on whether or not the setting value confirmation display is performed. In this case, the information of higher importance can be notified in order and dealt with in sequence, so that each piece of information can be reliably conveyed and dealt with.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that there is no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR and that the game board is in an unconnected state, the volume can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227 after the setting value confirmation display process is completed. However, if the door open notification sound is output after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the volume can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227 after the output of the door open notification sound has stopped. In other words, if the door open notification sound is output after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the volume cannot be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227 during the period when the door open notification sound is being output, but the volume can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227 during the period when the game board unconnection notification sound is being output after the output of the door open notification sound has stopped. This makes it possible to adjust the volume of the performance sound output during the variable performance in advance.

In addition, when the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR and that the game board is in an unconnected state, when the power-on operation check is being performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, that is, when only the power-on operation check is being performed without the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the light amount (brightness) cannot be adjusted by the light amount adjustment button 228. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to adjust the light amount (brightness) of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A by operating the light amount adjustment button 228, but the serious abnormality notification light emission mode, which is controlled by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, cannot be adjusted even by operating the light amount adjustment button 228. Therefore, when the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A can be controlled to emit light with a predetermined light amount (brightness), and the light emission mode can reliably inform the player that there is no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR and that the game board is in an unconnected state, so that the player and the game shop are not disadvantaged. In addition, if the light emission control is not performed to the serious abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, or if the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 during the execution of the power-on operation check is completed, the light amount (brightness) can be adjusted by the light amount adjustment button 228 even during the execution of the power-on operation check. In other words, if the light emission control is performed to the minor abnormality notification light emission mode after the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 is completed, the light amount (brightness) can be adjusted by the light amount adjustment button 228 for the minor abnormality notification light emission mode.

In addition, in the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, if it is determined that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR and that the state is unconnected, when the power-on operation check is being performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, that is, when only the power-on operation check is being performed without the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), operating the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 displays a scale corresponding to the current volume and light amount (brightness) on the performance display device 1600, and outputs a confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228. Therefore, the display of the scale and the output of the confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 allow the user to recognize that the volume or light amount (brightness) has been changed. In addition, after one or both of the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the output of the door open notification sound are completed, it may be possible to display a scale according to the current volume and light intensity (brightness) and/or output a confirmation sound according to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state. Even if an abnormality is detected by an abnormality detection means (e.g., a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a bulb cut detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, or other sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the detection is invalid (it may be that a process for checking whether or not there is a detection is not executed, or a process for checking whether or not there is a detection is executed but a process (such as an alert) based on the detection is not executed).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285, even if an illegal magnetism occurs during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the detection signal is discarded without executing an abnormality notification based on the detection of the illegal magnetism. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no input of an ID code signal from the right side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 judges that the right side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state in the ID judgment process (step S1003), and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control is executed as if the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 was not input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 after the setting value confirmation display process is completed.

Thus, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from it, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, if an abnormality is detected by an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball out detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, or other sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during execution of the setting value confirmation display process, then after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, a notification due to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from it is given priority over an abnormality notification due to detection by the abnormality detection means. That is, even if fraudulent acts are committed in a non-playable state before the game can be started, such as during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, there is a low risk of a disadvantage occurring when the game becomes playable and play is performed, but if the game is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, there is a risk of a disadvantage occurring when the game is performed when the game becomes playable. Therefore, if both detection by the abnormality detection means and an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR occur during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the occurrence of a disadvantage is prevented by giving priority to a notification due to the unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process.

On the other hand, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball cut detection sensor 574, door frame opening switch, etc.) during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the power-on operation check that does not involve the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the detection by the abnormality detection means is validated, and an abnormality is notified at the timing when the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 286, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the right-side game board 5AR is determined to be in an unconnected state in the ID determination process (step S1003) by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the execution of the power-on operation check that is executed after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, an abnormality notification due to detection by the abnormality detection means is performed by the various LEDs and various speakers of the performance display device 1600 and the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the plate unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3).

When the abnormality notification caused by the input of a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 ends, if no other abnormality is detected, the various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality notification light-emitting mode caused by the right side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state, and the game board unconnected notification sound is repeatedly output from the various speakers.

In this way, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the execution of the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value check display process is completed, an abnormality notification caused by the detection signal input from the magnetic sensor 1050 is performed by the various LEDs of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided in the door frame 3), the various speakers, and the performance display device 1600.

In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and when an abnormality is detected by an abnormality detection means (e.g., a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, door frame opening switch, etc.) during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, an abnormality notification due to detection by the abnormality detection means is executed in priority over a notification due to an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR.

In other words, while there is little risk of disadvantage occurring if fraudulent behavior is performed during the power-on operation check immediately before the game becomes ready to start, the game becomes ready to play immediately after the power-on operation check is completed, so there is a possibility that similar fraudulent behavior may occur even in the playable state. On the other hand, when there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and the game is in an unconnected state, there is less chance of disadvantage occurring compared to fraudulent behavior. Therefore, if both detection by the abnormality detection means and an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR occur during the execution of the power-on operation check, the occurrence of disadvantage is suppressed by giving priority to an alert due to the detection by the abnormality detection means immediately.

As abnormality detection means, sensors and switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb cut detection sensor 574, and door frame opening switch, are shown. However, for some sensors and switches, even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during power-on operation check or after the end of the setting value check display process (including during power-on operation check and playable state), no abnormality notification may be sent to the performance display device 1600. For all sensors and switches, even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during power-on operation check or after the end of the setting value check display process (including during power-on operation check and playable state), no abnormality notification may be sent to the performance display device 1600.

When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, sensors and switches such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball cut detection sensor 574, door frame opening switch, etc., which input a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the playable state after the power-on operation check is completed, that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the playable state, the detection by the abnormality detection means is also valid, and an abnormality is notified at the timing when the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means, just as when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the power-on operation check.

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during a playable state after the power-on operation check is completed, an abnormality due to detection by the abnormality detection means is notified by the various LEDs and various speakers of the performance display device 1600 and the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the plate unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3).

In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and when a detection signal is input from an abnormality detection means (e.g., a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball cut detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, or other sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during a playable state after the power-on operation check is completed, the abnormality notification due to detection by the abnormality detection means is executed with priority over a notification due to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input.

Therefore, in a playable state where there is a high risk of disadvantage occurring if fraudulent activity is performed, if both detection by the abnormality detection means and an unconnected state in which there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR occur, the occurrence of disadvantage can be suppressed by giving priority to the notification resulting from detection by the abnormality detection means.

As described above, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the split game board 5A is set to a compatible (matched) state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and then even if the split game board 5AR subsequently enters an unconnected state in which there is no input of an ID code signal, no notification is given in response to the unconnected state in which there is no input of an ID code signal from the split game board 5AR (game board unconnected notification sound, unconnected error notification display mode, minor abnormality notification light emission mode, etc.). However, this is not limited to determining whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may periodically (for example, each time the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed) execute an ID determination process to determine whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started. In this case, after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has started, the system will be able to notify the user of the disconnected state in which there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game panel 5AR, thereby preventing the occurrence of disadvantages.

Even if an ID determination process is periodically executed to determine whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, the ID determination process may not be executed while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed. Also, even if the ID determination process is executed while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed and it is determined that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, no notification may be issued in response to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed.

In addition, when the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, when the ID determination process is executed during the power-on operation check after the setting value confirmation display process or before the setting value confirmation display process is started and it is determined that there is no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR and that the game board is in an unconnected state, the notification of the detection by the abnormality detection means using the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3) may be given priority over the notification of the incompatibility of the combination of the split game board 5A, and when the notification of the detection by the abnormality detection means has ended, a notification of the incompatibility of the combination of the split game board 5A may be given.

In addition, even if the configuration is such that the combination of the divided game board 5A is periodically judged to be compatible, even if an abnormality is detected by an abnormality detection means (e.g., a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a bulb cut detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, or other sensor or switch whose detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the detection is invalid (it may be possible to not execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection, or to execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection), and an abnormality alert based on the detection by the abnormality detection means may not be executed even after the setting value confirmation display process.

In addition, when the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, if the right game board 5AR is not connected during the power-on operation check after the setting value confirmation display process, and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.), the notification of the detection by the abnormality detection means by the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) may be given priority over the notification that the right game board 5AR is not connected, and when the notification of the detection by the abnormality detection means has ended, a notification that the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible may be given.

In addition, in the power-on operation check that is performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed (after receiving the setting value confirmation display end command from the main control MPU 1310a), not only is the power-on operation check not performed for the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., that are provided on the right side game board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 that are determined to be in an unconnected state, but also for the movable body that performs the power-on operation check (the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the split game board 5A). When power is turned on, no operation check is performed on the drive motors and drive solenoids that are provided in door frame units that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) and drive the performance operation unit 301 (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear lower front performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3).

Specifically, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, even if the power-on operation check is started, the control to light the LED provided on the right side game board 5AR determined to be in an unconnected state in the light emission mode at the time of the power-on operation check is not performed (no control signal is output to the right side game board 5AR) or the control to operate the movable body in the operation mode at the time of the power-on operation check is not performed (a control signal is output to the right side game board 5AR), or it is not possible to perform such control (a control signal is output but a control signal is not input to the right side game board 5AR). In addition, the control to drive the drive motor or drive solenoid provided on the plate unit 200 (in this example, the performance operation unit 300) provided on the door frame 3 and not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) to operate the performance operation unit 301 provided on the performance operation unit 300 is not performed.

In other words, when the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, there is a risk that some or all of the movable bodies provided on the door frame unit that is not the subject of ID determination will also have a poor connection state, and the control signal output from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be changed to a signal different from the original due to noise, etc., and input, causing the movable bodies to operate in an abnormal manner. Therefore, some or all of the movable bodies provided on the right-side game board 5AR that is determined to be in an unconnected state or on the door frame unit that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) and operated by the drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are not driven, thereby preventing the movable bodies from operating in an operating mode different from the original one, which could result in damage to the movable bodies or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. that operate the movable bodies. As described above, the game board side components may be configured to include the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit among the door frame units. In this case, the specific door frame unit is the subject of ID determination. If it is determined in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the specific door frame unit is in an unconnected state, some or all of the movable bodies operated by the drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. provided in the door frame unit not subject to ID determination (non-specific door frame unit) and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven. In addition to this, or separately from this, a specific door frame unit may be configured to be multiple (for example, the right door frame When it is determined that a part (for example, one of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top unit 450) is not connected, all of the movable bodies operated by the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., provided in the specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven, or all of the movable bodies operated by the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., provided in all door frame units including the specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven.

On the other hand, the movable bodies (such as the rear upper movable decoration 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear left movable decoration 3301 and the rear right movable decoration 3302, the rear front lower middle decoration 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, etc.) provided on the left side game board 5AL equipped with the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a that executes the ID determination process (step S1003) are mounted, operate in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the split game board 5A is determined to be compatible) when operation check begins at power-on. In addition, the LEDs mounted on the boards of the movable bodies provided on the left side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160) are not controlled to emit light in the light emission mode when the power is turned on to check operation. That is, when the right side game board 5AR is determined to be in an unconnected state in the ID determination process (step S1003), the movable body provided on the left side game board 5AL (the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, etc.) is operated in the operating mode at the time of power-on operation confirmation, but the LED provided on the movable body provided on the left side game board 5AL is not controlled to emit light in the light emission mode at the time of power-on operation confirmation, and is operated in the operating mode at the time of power-on operation confirmation in the turned-off state. This makes it easy to identify the game board (in this case, the left side game board 5AL) on which the peripheral control board 1510 of the divided game board 5A is provided.

In addition, in this example, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, not only is there no control performed to drive the drive motor and drive solenoid mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame unit (in this example, the tray unit 200) that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) to operate the performance operation unit 301, but the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are also not controlled to emit light in the light emission mode set when operation is confirmed when the power is turned on. In other words, when a power-on operation check is performed after the setting confirmation display process is completed, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the right-side game board 5AR is not connected in the ID determination process (step S1003), the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality notification light mode caused by the main body frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, or in a minor abnormality notification light mode caused by the right-side game board 5AR being not connected. In addition, the presentation operation unit 300 may be a specific door frame unit that is the subject of ID determination. Even in this case, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that a specific door frame unit other than the presentation operation unit 300 or the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the board provided in the presentation operation unit 300 is not driven to control the operation of the presentation operation unit 301, and the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the presentation operation unit 300 may not be controlled to emit light in the light emission mode when the power is turned on to check operation, but may be controlled to emit light in the light emission mode for a serious abnormality notification caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, or in the light emission mode for a minor abnormality notification caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being connected.

In addition, if the right side game board 5AR is determined to be in an unconnected state in the ID determination process (step S1003), the right side game board 5AR determined to be in an unconnected state and some or all of the movable bodies operated by the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in the door frame unit not subject to ID determination and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like may not be driven until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or until the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible, not limited to the power-on operation check. In this case, it is possible to prevent the movable bodies from operating in a different operating mode from the original operating mode, which may damage the movable bodies or the door frame unit, or prevent the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable bodies from breaking down.

[Summary A]
A gaming machine including a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable, a game board side component provided detachably on the game frame side component, a lottery means for conducting a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, a setting determination possible state control means for controlling setting information related to the lottery of the lottery means to a setting determination possible state in which it is possible to determine setting information, a presentation control board for controlling the presentation of a game, and a magnetic detection sensor capable of detecting magnetism, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component. The presentation control board has a non-connection notification means capable of issuing a notification when the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not connected, and a magnetic detection abnormality notification means capable of issuing a notification when the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, and even if the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not connected within a predetermined period after the start of power supply to the gaming machine and the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, no notification is given by the non-connection notification means and the magnetic detection abnormality notification means during the setting determination possible state.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is composed of a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in the island equipment (not shown) of the gaming hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner. A split gaming board 5A composed of a left gaming board 5AL and a right gaming board 5AR is detachably provided as a gaming board side component on the gaming frame side component.

The left side game board 5AL is also equipped with multiple magnetic sensors 1050 that detect magnetic fields acting illicitly within the game area 5a. It is also equipped with a lottery means that executes a winning judgment process (step S305) based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, and a main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as a setting determination possible state control means that executes a setting change process to control the setting value related to the lottery to a setting determination possible state (a state from when the setting value change permission condition is met to when the setting value change end condition is met).

In addition, the device has a function of controlling the performance display device 1600, various speakers (such as the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main frame speaker of the main frame 4), various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR to execute game performance, and as an unconnected notification means, when the right game board 5AR is determined to be in an unconnected state in the ID determination process (step S1003), the device has the function of causing the performance display device 1600 to display an unconnected error notification display mode, output a game board unconnected notification sound from the various speakers, and output a game board unconnected notification sound from the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3). The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has the following functions: to control the illumination of various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the dish unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc.) to a minor abnormality notification illumination mode; and to display a magnetic detection error notification mode on the performance display device 1600, output magnetic detection notification sounds from various speakers, and control the illumination of various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the dish unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) to a major abnormality notification illumination mode based on receiving a magnet goto notification command classified as a notification display that indicates that radio wave irradiation goto is being performed from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as a magnetic detection abnormality notification means.

Even if the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR are not connected and the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism during a predetermined period after the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started to when the setting change process is started, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started to when the setting change process is ended, or the period from when the setting change process is started to when the setting change process is ended), no notification is given by the disconnection notification means and magnetic detection abnormality notification means of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 during the period when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is executing the setting change process.

That is, even if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism before the setting change process is started or while the setting value change process is being executed, or even if the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not connected, it is not possible to start playing, so there is little risk of causing a disadvantage to the gaming establishment. In addition, the setting change process is performed based on the operation of the gaming establishment staff, and when the setting change process is started and an operation to determine the setting value is being performed, if an alarm is issued by the unconnected alarm means or the magnetic detection abnormality alarm means, the attention of the staff may be drawn to the alarm and the setting value may be erroneously determined. If the setting value determination operation is mistakenly determined to be an unintended setting value, there is a risk of causing a disadvantage to the gaming establishment or the player. According to the above invention, when the setting value change process is being executed, the staff can concentrate on the setting value determination operation, and it is possible to prevent the setting value from being mistakenly determined to be an unintended setting value, so that no disadvantage is caused to the gaming establishment or the player.

Even if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism before the setting value change process is started or while the setting value change process is being executed, if the magnetic field is no longer detected before the setting value change process is terminated, this means that the magnetic field was detected only when it was not possible to start playing, and there is little risk of causing any disadvantage to the gaming establishment. However, if the left side gaming board 5AL and the right side gaming board 5AR are not connected before the setting value change process is started or while the setting value change process is being executed, there is a high possibility that the disconnected state will continue even after the setting value change process is executed, and if play is started in such a state, the game will proceed in a manner unintended by the designer, which may cause disadvantage to the gaming establishment and players. Therefore, if the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not connected and the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism within a predetermined period after the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started to when the setting change process is started, or the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started to when the setting change process is ended, or the period from when the setting change process is started to when the setting change process is ended), only a notification by the unconnected notification means may be executed after the setting change process is ended, or the notification by the unconnected notification means may be executed in priority over a notification by the magnetic detection abnormality notification means.

[Summary B]
A gaming machine including a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable, a game board side component provided detachably on the game frame side component, a lottery means for conducting a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, a setting determinable state control means for controlling setting information related to the lottery of the lottery means to a setting determinable state in which setting information can be determined, a presentation control board for controlling the presentation of a game, and a magnetic detection sensor capable of detecting magnetism, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and the presentation control board is composed of the first game board side component and the second game board side component. the first game board side component and the second game board side component are connected, an unconnected notification means capable of issuing an alert when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not connected, and a magnetic detection abnormality notification means capable of issuing an alert when the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism; and if the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not connected and the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism within a specific period after the end of the setting determination state, both the unconnected notification means and the magnetic detection abnormality notification means are functionally restricted to issue an alert.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is composed of a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in the island equipment (not shown) of the gaming hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner. A split gaming board 5A composed of a left gaming board 5AL and a right gaming board 5AR is detachably provided as a gaming board side component on the gaming frame side component.

The left side game board 5AL is also equipped with multiple magnetic sensors 1050 that detect magnetic fields acting illicitly within the game area 5a. It is also equipped with a lottery means that executes a winning judgment process (step S305) based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, and a main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as a setting determination possible state control means that executes a setting change process to control the setting value related to the lottery to a setting determination possible state (a state from when the setting value change permission condition is met to when the setting value change end condition is met).

In addition, the device has a function of controlling the performance display device 1600, various speakers (such as the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main frame speaker of the main frame 4), various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR to perform game performance, a function of executing an ID determination process (step S1003) as a connection determination means, and a function of causing the performance display device 1600 to display an unconnected error notification display mode, output a game board unconnected notification sound from the various speakers, and a function of causing the door frame unit to perform an ID determination process (step S1003) as an unconnected notification means when it is determined that the right game board 5AR is in an unconnected state in the ID determination process (step S1003). The peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control IC 1510a having the following functions: a function of controlling the illumination of various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) to a minor abnormality notification illumination mode; and a function of displaying a magnetic detection error notification mode on the performance display device 1600, outputting magnetic detection notification sounds from various speakers, and controlling the illumination of various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) to a major abnormality notification illumination mode based on receiving a magnet goto notification command classified as a notification display that indicates that radio wave irradiation goto is being performed from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as a magnetic detection abnormality notification means.

If the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, and if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a magnet goto alarm command classified as an alarm display indicating that radio wave irradiation goto is being performed from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 based on the input of a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 within a specific period after the setting change process (for example, within the execution period of the power-on operation check), then the performance display device 1600 will display an unconnected error alarm display mode and a magnetic detection error alarm mode, while not outputting an unconnected game board alarm sound or a magnetic detection alarm sound from the various speakers, and not controlling the various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) to a minor abnormality alarm light-emitting mode or a serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode. In other words, the functions of the disconnection notification means and magnetic detection abnormality notification means are partially restricted to provide the notification.

In other words, if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism within a specific period after the setting change process is completed (for example, within the period during which the power-on operation check is performed), or if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not connected, the situation is not one in which play can be started and there is a low risk of any disadvantage to the gaming establishment, but since there is only a short period of time left until play can be started, a warning is issued only by the performance display device 1600, and no warning is issued by the various speakers and the various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3). Furthermore, the power-on operation check is important for checking whether the pachinko machine 1 operates as intended by the designer, and if an alarm is issued by the unconnected alarm means or magnetic detection abnormality alarm means while this power-on operation check is being performed, there is a risk that the attention will be drawn to the alarm and that abnormal behavior that differs from normal will be overlooked. If abnormal behavior is overlooked, there is a risk that it will cause disadvantage to the gaming establishment and the player. According to the above invention, it is possible to concentrate on the power-on operation check, and it is possible to prevent abnormal behavior from being overlooked, and no disadvantage will be caused to the gaming establishment or the player.

In addition, if the notification period of the magnetic detection abnormality notification means remains after a specific period (for example, the period during which the power-on operation check is performed) has elapsed after the end of the setting change process, the restricted function may be released to issue a notification. Also, when the magnetic sensor 1050 detects a magnetism, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act directly related to the prize balls of the game balls is being performed, while when the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are in an unconnected state, it is unlikely that a fraudulent act directly related to the prize balls of the game balls is being performed. Therefore, in this case, the restricted function of the magnetic detection abnormality notification means may be released to issue a notification, while the unconnection notification means may continue to be in a restricted state, and after the notification period of the magnetic detection abnormality notification means has elapsed, the restricted function of the unconnection notification means may be released to issue a notification. In other words, the notification by the magnetic detection abnormality notification means may be executed in priority over the notification by the unconnection notification means.

[Summary C]
A gaming machine including a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable, a game board side component provided detachably on the game frame side component, a lottery means for conducting a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, a setting confirmation state control means for controlling the lottery means to a setting confirmation state in which setting information related to the lottery can be confirmed, a presentation control board for controlling the presentation of a game, and a magnetic detection sensor capable of detecting magnetism, wherein the game board side component is a first game board side component and a second game board side component, The presentation control board has a non-connection notification means capable of issuing a notification when the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not connected, and a magnetic detection abnormality notification means capable of issuing a notification when the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, and even if the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not connected within a predetermined period after the start of power supply and the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, no notification is issued by the non-connection notification means and the magnetic detection abnormality notification means during the setting confirmation state.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is composed of a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in the island equipment (not shown) of the game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner. A split game board 5A composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR is detachably provided as a game board side component on the game frame side component.

The left side game board 5AL is also equipped with multiple magnetic sensors 1050 that detect magnetic fields acting illicitly within the game area 5a. It is also equipped with a lottery means that executes a winning judgment process (step S305) based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, and a main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as a setting confirmation state control means that executes a setting value confirmation display process to control the setting value related to the lottery to a setting confirmation state (a state from when the setting value display permission condition is met to when the setting value display end condition is met) in which the setting value related to the lottery can be confirmed.

In addition, the device has a function of controlling the performance display device 1600, various speakers (such as the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main frame speaker of the main frame 4), various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR to execute game performance, and as an unconnected notification means, when the right game board 5AR is determined to be in an unconnected state in the ID determination process (step S1003), the device has the function of causing the performance display device 1600 to display an unconnected error notification display mode, output a game board unconnected notification sound from the various speakers, and output a game board unconnected notification sound from the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3). The peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control IC 1510a having the following functions: a function of controlling the illumination of various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the dish unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc.) to a minor abnormality notification illumination mode; and a function of displaying a magnetic detection error notification mode on the performance display device 1600, outputting magnetic detection notification sounds from various speakers, and controlling the illumination of various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the dish unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) to a major abnormality notification illumination mode based on receiving a magnet goto notification command classified as a notification display that indicates that radio wave irradiation goto is being performed from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as a magnetic detection abnormality notification means.

Even if the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR are not connected and the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism during a predetermined period after the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 starts until the setting value confirmation display process starts, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 starts until the setting value confirmation display process ends, or the period from when the setting value confirmation display process starts until the setting value confirmation display process ends), no notification is given by the disconnection notification means and magnetic detection abnormality notification means of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 during the period when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is executing the setting value confirmation display process.

That is, even if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism before the setting value confirmation display process is started or while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, or even if the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not connected, it is not possible to start playing, so there is little risk of causing a disadvantage to the gaming establishment. In addition, the setting value confirmation display process is performed based on the operation of the gaming establishment staff, and when the setting value confirmation display process is started and an operation to determine the setting value is being performed, the unconnected notification means or the magnetic detection abnormality notification means may cause the attention of the notification to be drawn to the notification and cause the player to mistakenly confirm the setting value. If the setting value is confirmed incorrectly and a different setting value is recognized, this may cause a disadvantage to the gaming establishment or the player. According to the above invention, when the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, the player can concentrate on checking the setting value, and it is possible to prevent the setting value from being mistakenly recognized as different from the original, so that no disadvantage is caused to the gaming establishment or the player.

Even if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism before the setting value confirmation display process is started or while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, if the magnetic field is no longer detected before the setting value confirmation display process is terminated, this means that the magnetic field was detected only when it was not possible to start playing, and there is little risk of causing any disadvantage to the gaming establishment. However, if the left side gaming board 5AL and the right side gaming board 5AR are not connected before the setting value confirmation display process is started or while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, there is a high possibility that the disconnected state will continue even after the setting value confirmation display process is executed, and if play is started in such a state, the game will proceed in a manner unintended by the designer, which may cause disadvantage to the gaming establishment and the player. Therefore, if the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR are not connected and the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism within a predetermined period after the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 starts until when the setting value confirmation display process starts, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 starts until when the setting value confirmation display process ends, or the period from when the setting value confirmation display process starts until when the setting value confirmation display process ends), only a notification by the unconnected notification means may be executed after the setting value confirmation display process ends, or the notification by the unconnected notification means may be executed in priority over a notification by the magnetic detection abnormality notification means.

[Summary D]
A gaming machine including a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable, a game board side component provided detachably on the game frame side component, a lottery means for conducting a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, a setting confirmation state control means for controlling a setting confirmation state in which setting information related to the lottery of the lottery means can be confirmed, a presentation control board for controlling the presentation of a game, and a magnetic detection sensor capable of detecting magnetism, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and the presentation control board is connected to the first game board side component and the second game board side component. The game device has a connection determination means for determining whether or not the first game board side component and the second game board side component are connected, an unconnected notification means capable of issuing an alert when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not connected, and a magnetic detection abnormality notification means capable of issuing an alert when the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, and if the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not connected and the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism within a specific period after the setting confirmation state has ended, the function of the unconnected notification means is restricted to issue an alert, while the magnetic detection abnormality notification means is not restricted to issue an alert.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is composed of a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in the island equipment (not shown) of the gaming hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner. A split gaming board 5A composed of a left gaming board 5AL and a right gaming board 5AR is detachably provided as a gaming board side component on the gaming frame side component.

The left side game board 5AL is also equipped with multiple magnetic sensors 1050 that detect magnetic fields acting illicitly within the game area 5a. It is also equipped with a lottery means that executes a winning judgment process (step S305) based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, and a main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as a setting confirmation state control means that executes a setting value confirmation display process to control the setting value related to the lottery to a setting confirmation state (a state from when the setting value display permission condition is met to when the setting value display end condition is met) in which the setting value related to the lottery can be confirmed.

In addition, the device has a function of controlling the performance display device 1600, various speakers (such as the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main frame speaker of the main frame 4), various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR to perform game performance, a function of executing an ID determination process (step S1003) as a connection determination means, and a function of causing the performance display device 1600 to display an unconnected error notification display mode, output a game board unconnected notification sound from the various speakers, and a function of causing the door frame unit to perform an ID determination process (step S1003) as an unconnected notification means when it is determined that the right game board 5AR is in an unconnected state in the ID determination process (step S1003). The peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control IC 1510a having the following functions: a function of controlling the illumination of various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) to a minor abnormality notification illumination mode; and a function of displaying a magnetic detection error notification mode on the performance display device 1600, outputting magnetic detection notification sounds from various speakers, and controlling the illumination of various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) to a major abnormality notification illumination mode based on receiving a magnet goto notification command classified as a notification display that indicates that radio wave irradiation goto is being performed from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as a magnetic detection abnormality notification means.

If the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right side game board 5AR is not connected, and a detection signal is input from the magnetic sensor 1050 within a specific period after the setting value confirmation display process (for example, within the execution period of the power-on operation confirmation), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a magnet goto notification command classified as a notification display that indicates that radio wave irradiation goto is being performed from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When a signal is received, the performance display device 1600 displays the unconnected error notification display mode and the magnetic detection error notification mode, but the various speakers output only the magnetic detection notification sound without outputting the game board unconnected notification sound, and the various LEDs of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the dish unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided in the door frame 3) are controlled to emit only the serious abnormality notification light emission mode without controlling the emission in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode. In other words, the unconnected notification means issues a notification with some of its functions restricted, while the magnetic detection abnormality notification means issues a notification without restricting its functions.

In other words, if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism within a specific period after the setting value confirmation display process is completed (for example, within the period during which the power-on operation confirmation is performed), or if the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are determined to be in an unconnected state in the ID determination process (step S1003), the game is not in a state in which it is possible to start playing, and so there is a low risk of a disadvantage to the game establishment. However, the remaining time until the game is in a state in which it is possible to start playing is short, and if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism, this may be a sign of fraudulent conduct directly related to the prize balls. While there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is taking place when the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are in an unconnected state, there is a low possibility that fraudulent activity directly related to the winning game balls is taking place. Therefore, while both the unconnected notification means and the magnetic detection abnormality notification means warn of the possibility that fraudulent activity directly related to the winning game balls is taking place, the function of the magnetic detection abnormality notification means, which notifies of the possibility that fraudulent activity is taking place when the winning game balls are in a direct connection, is not restricted; in other words, notifications by the magnetic detection abnormality notification means are given priority over notifications by the unconnected notification means.

Note that since the power-on operation check is important for checking whether the pachinko machine 1 operates as intended by the designer, some functions may be restricted to perform the power-on operation check even when the magnetic detection abnormality notification means is notifying the user. For example, the LED may be controlled to emit light in the light emission mode during the power-on operation check while the movable body is not operated in the light emission mode during the power-on operation check, or the movable body may be operated in the light emission mode during the power-on operation check while the LED is not controlled to emit light in the light emission mode during the power-on operation check. This makes it possible to perform the power-on operation check and check the behavior, even though some functions are restricted, and this prevents abnormal behavior from being overlooked, which does not cause any disadvantage to the gaming establishment or the player.

[Summary E]
A gaming machine including a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable, a game board side component provided detachably on the game frame side component, a light-emitting unit capable of emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting manner, a sound output unit capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and a performance control board for controlling the performance of a game, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and the performance control board controls a specific light-emitting unit of the light-emitting units to indicate a non-connection notification mode when the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not connected. the unconnection notification means being capable of emitting light in a non-connection notification mode and outputting a non-connection notification sound from the sound output unit, a volume changing means being capable of changing the volume of the sound output unit in response to a first operation, and a brightness changing means being capable of changing the brightness of the specific light-emitting unit in response to a second operation, wherein when the unconnection notification sound is output from the unconnection notification means, the volume of the unconnection notification sound can be changed in response to the first operation, while when the specific light-emitting unit is emitting light in the unconnection notification mode, even if the second operation is performed, the brightness of the unconnection notification mode is not changed and the light is emitted at a constant brightness.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is composed of a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in the island equipment (not shown) of the game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner. A split game board 5A composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR is detachably provided as a game board side component on the game frame side component.

The left game board 5AL is also equipped with multiple magnetic sensors 1050 that detect magnetic fields acting illicitly within the game area 5a. In addition, the left game board 5AL is equipped with various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) as light-emitting units, various LEDs mounted on a decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on a decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, and various speakers (such as a top center speaker, a top side speaker, and a main frame speaker of the main frame 4) as sound output units.

In addition, the device has a function of controlling the performance display device 1600, various speakers (such as the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main frame speaker of the main frame 4), various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR to perform game performance, and as a non-connection notification means, when it is determined in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the device has a function of causing the performance display device 1600 to display an unconnection error notification display mode, outputting a game board unconnection notification sound from the various speakers, and controlling the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) as a specific light-emitting unit. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has the following functions: a function to control the light emission of various LEDs of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc.) to a minor abnormality notification light emission mode; a function to adjust the volume of various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.) in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 as a volume change means; and a function to adjust the brightness of various LEDs of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc. provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR in response to the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 as a brightness change means.

When the game board unconnected notification sound is being output from the various speakers, the volume of the game board unconnected notification sound can be changed by operating the volume adjustment button 227, while when the various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) as a specific light-emitting unit are controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality notification light-emitting mode, the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) will emit light at a predetermined constant brightness without changing the brightness, even if the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated.

In other words, even when the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not connected, the volume of the game board unconnected notification sound output from the various speakers can be changed, while the brightness of the minor abnormality notification light-emitting modes of the various LEDs of the door frame unit as a specific light-emitting unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) cannot be changed. This makes it possible to make the player aware that the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not connected by controlling the light emission of the minor abnormality notification light-emitting modes of the various LEDs of the door frame unit as a specific light-emitting unit, without causing excessive discomfort to the player.

[Summary F]
A gaming machine comprising: a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable; a game board side component provided detachably on the game frame side component; a lottery means for conducting a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition; a setting determination possible state control means for controlling setting information related to the lottery of the lottery means to a setting determination possible state in which setting information can be determined; and a presentation control board for controlling the presentation of a game, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and the presentation control board is composed of the first game board side component and the presentation control board. The game device has a connection determination means for determining whether or not the first game board side component is connected to the second game board side component, and an unconnected notification means capable of giving an alert when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not connected, and when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not connected, the unconnected notification means can give a first notification at a first timing after the end of the setting determination possible state, and can give a second notification that is stronger than the first notification at a second timing later than the first timing.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is composed of a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in the island equipment (not shown) of the game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner. A split game board 5A composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR is detachably provided as a game board side component on the game frame side component.

The main control board 1310 also includes a lottery means for executing a winning determination process (step S305) based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, and a main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as a setting determination state control means for executing a setting change process for controlling the setting value related to the lottery to a setting determination state (a state from when the setting value change permission condition is met to when the setting value change end condition is met).

It also has a function of controlling the performance display device 1600, various speakers (such as the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main frame speaker of the main frame 4), various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR to perform game performance, and a function of executing an ID determination process (step S1003) as a connection determination means. The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a having the following functions as an unconnected notification means: when the right-side game board 5AR is determined to be in an unconnected state in the ID determination process (step S1003), the performance display device 1600 displays an unconnected error notification display mode, various speakers output an unconnected game board notification sound, and various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality notification light emission mode.

If the right side game board 5AR is determined to be in an unconnected state in the ID determination process (step S1003), at the first timing after the setting change process (for example, when starting the operation check at power-on), the performance display device 1600 displays an unconnected error notification display mode, while not outputting the game board unconnected notification sound from the various speakers and outputting the sound from the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200 and the door frame top unit 430 provided in the door frame 3). At a second timing (for example, when the power-on operation check is completed) after the setting change process, the display device 1600 displays the unconnected error notification display mode, various speakers output the game board unconnected notification sound, and various LEDs of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, door frame top unit 450, etc., which are provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in the minor abnormality notification light mode.

That is, if it is determined that the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not connected after the setting change process is completed, the risk of causing a disadvantage to the gaming establishment is low because the situation is not such that the game can be started, but the remaining time until the situation is such that the game can be started is short, so the first notification is issued only in the performance display device 1600 at the first timing to call attention, and the various speakers and LEDs of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the plate unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided in the door frame 3) are not issued. In addition, the power-on operation check is important for checking whether the pachinko machine 1 operates in the manner intended by the designer, and if an alarm is issued by the unconnected alarm means during the execution of this power-on operation check, attention may be drawn to the alarm and the abnormal behavior may be overlooked if an abnormal behavior that is different from normal occurs. If the abnormal behavior is overlooked, it may cause a disadvantage to the gaming establishment and the player. The above invention allows players to focus on checking operation when the power is turned on, preventing abnormal behavior from being overlooked and causing no disadvantage to game establishments or players.

In addition, if the connection status is not improved after the first timing is used to call attention using the display of the performance display device 1600, the second timing is used to call attention using the output of various speakers and the light emitted by various LEDs of the door frame unit, so that the notification can be strengthened in stages according to the degree of risk of occurrence of a disadvantage, and the occurrence of a disadvantage can be suppressed. In other words, if the game is not in a situation where it is possible to start playing, such as during the execution of the power-on operation check, the first notification is issued by calling attention only with the performance display device 1600, and if the game is in a situation where it is possible to start playing, such as after the power-on operation check is completed, the game is likely to cause a disadvantage to the game store, so that the second notification is issued by multiple notification means (performance means) such as the output of various speakers and the light emitted by various LEDs of the door frame unit in addition to the display of the performance display device 1600, so that the notification can be strengthened in stages to call attention, and the occurrence of a disadvantage can be suppressed.

[Summary G]
a game machine including a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable; a game board side component detachably provided on the game frame side component; a lottery means for conducting a lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition; a setting determinable state control means for controlling a setting determinable state in which setting information related to the lottery of the lottery means can be determined; a light-emitting unit capable of emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting manner; a display unit capable of displaying an image; a movable unit operated in a predetermined manner; and a performance control board for controlling the light-emitting unit, the display unit, and the movable unit, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and the performance control board is composed of the first game board side component and the second game board side component. The device has a connection determination means for determining whether or not the first game board side component is connected, a non-connection notification means for displaying a notification display mode on the display unit when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not connected and for causing a specific light-emitting unit among the light-emitting units to emit light in a notification light-emitting mode, and a drive control means for operating the movable unit in a specific mode after the setting determination possible state ends, wherein when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not connected, the notification display mode is displayed while the movable unit is operating in the specific mode, but the movable unit is not illuminated in the notification light-emitting mode while operating in the specific mode.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is composed of a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in the island equipment (not shown) of the game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner. A split game board 5A composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR is detachably provided as a game board side component on the game frame side component.

It also includes a lottery means for executing a winning determination process (step S305) based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, and a main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as a setting determination state control means for executing a setting change process to control the setting value related to the lottery to a setting determination state (a state from when the setting value change permission condition is met to when the setting value change termination condition is met) in which the setting value related to the lottery can be determined. In addition, the light-emitting section includes various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR. The display section includes a performance display device, and the movable section includes movable bodies provided on the left gaming board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left gaming board 5AL of the divided gaming board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160).

In addition, the performance display device 1600, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200 and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided in the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, a function of controlling the movable bodies (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160) to perform game performance; a function of executing an ID determination process (step S1003) as a connection determination means; and a function of executing an ID determination process as a non-connection notification means. When it is determined in step S1003 that the right side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the display device 1600 is caused to display an unconnected error notification display mode, various speakers are caused to output a game board unconnected notification sound, and various LEDs of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the plate unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., which are provided in the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality notification light emission mode. It is equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a of a peripheral control board 1510 having the function of operating movable bodies provided on the left side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, etc.) in the operating state when the power is inserted and operation is confirmed.

If the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, the display device 1600 displays an unconnected error notification display mode during the period when the movable bodies provided on the left-side game board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160) are operating in the operating mode at the time of power-on operation check, while the various LEDs of the door frame unit are not controlled to emit light in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode during that period.

In other words, the power-on operation check is important for checking whether the pachinko machine 1 operates as intended by the designer, and if an alarm is issued by the unconnected alarm means while this power-on operation check is being performed, there is a risk that the attention will be drawn to the alarm and that abnormal behavior that is different from normal will be overlooked. If abnormal behavior is overlooked, there is a risk that it will cause disadvantage to the gaming establishment and the player. According to the above invention, it is possible to concentrate on the power-on operation check, and it is possible to prevent abnormal behavior from being overlooked, so that no disadvantage will be caused to the gaming establishment or the player.

In addition, as an operating mode when checking operation at power-on, some or all of the movable bodies provided on the left side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decoration 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decoration 3301 and the rear right movable decoration 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decoration 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, etc.) may be made to appear in front of the performance display device 1600, in which case it will be easier to notice the unconnected error notification display mode displayed on the performance display device 1600.

The above describes the form for implementing the present invention, but the above-described embodiment can be modified as appropriate without departing from the technical concept of the present invention. In other words, the technical concept of the present invention can be applied even if a part of the above-described embodiment is modified or multiple embodiments are combined.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1804 Decoration (decoration)
1804a Chamfered portion 1804b Glue surface (glue surface)
1805 Decoration (Decoration)
1805a Chamfered portion 1806 Decoration body (decoration body)
1806a Notch 1807L Decoration left (decoration)
1807R Decoration Right (Decoration)
1808 Decoration (Decoration)
1809 Decoration (Decoration)
1809a Notch 1823 First member (base member)
1823a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1823b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1823c Separation hole (separation hole)
1823e Misapplication prevention unit (misapplication prevention unit)
1824 First member (base member)
1824a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1824b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1824c Misapplication prevention unit (misapplication prevention unit)
1825 First member (base member)
1825a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1825b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1825c Misapplication prevention part (misapplication prevention part)
1826L First member left (base member)
1826R First member right (base member)
1826a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1826b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1826c Misapplication prevention unit (misapplication prevention unit)
1827 First member (base member)
1827a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1827b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1827c Separation hole (separation hole)
1827d Misapplication prevention part (misapplication prevention part)
1828 First member (base member)
1828a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1828b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1828c Separation hole (separation hole)
1828d Misapplication prevention part (misapplication prevention part)
2000 Front unit 2810 Gate body (base member)
2810a Front plate part (flat plate part)
2810b Adhesive recess (mounting recess)
2810c Misapplication prevention unit (misapplication prevention unit)
2810d Separation hole (separation hole)
2811 Gate Seal (decoration)
2811a Notch 3000 Back unit 4100 Decorative board 4130 Partition cover IDC ID output circuit

Claims (1)

A frame component having a main body frame and a door frame that can be opened and closed on the main body frame and having a plurality of frame light emitters;
a game component part detachably provided on the frame component part and having a first game component part and a second game component part;
A presentation control means having a sound output unit, a liquid crystal display unit, and a light-emitting unit including the frame light-emitting unit and controlling the presentation of the game;
a special state control means for executing a special state capable of initializing the RAM based on an operation of a special operation unit that is inoperable by a player;
A special state illumination that illuminates a specific frame light source among the frame light sources in a manner corresponding to the special state when the special state occurs;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first game configuration unit includes a control board equipped with a microprocessor,
The second game configuration unit is composed of a specific board not equipped with a microprocessor,
The presentation control means is provided with a notification means capable of notifying, when the first game configuration unit and the second game configuration unit are not connected, a non-connection light emission notification that causes the specific frame light-emitting body to emit light in a manner corresponding to the non-connection and a non-connection sound notification that causes the sound output unit to output a notification sound corresponding to the non-connection,
When the special state occurs in a state in which the first game configuration unit and the second game configuration unit are not connected, a special state light emission is executed to cause the specific frame light-emitting body to emit light in a manner corresponding to the special state without executing a non-connection light emission notification to cause the specific frame light-emitting body to emit light in a manner corresponding to the non-connection, and after the special state light emission ends, a non-connection light emission notification is executed to cause the specific frame light-emitting body to emit light in a manner corresponding to the non-connection,
The specific light emitting substrate on which the specific frame light emitting body is mounted has an insulating coating formed on substantially the entire area of a front mounting surface on which the specific frame light emitting body is mounted, and a land electrically connected to a front mounting surface side wiring pattern formed on the front mounting surface,
The insulating coating formed on the front mounting surface of the specific light-emitting substrate is white.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images